Finger Tips 2022 - Part - 2

FINGER TIPS FOR PROMOTION TEST 2022
FINGER TIPS IN YOUR HANDS

CIRCULARS AT YOUR
fF
FINGER TIPS
PART - 2 3600 MCQs

a
PROMOTION TEST 2022
[Type a quote from the document or

the summary of an interesting point.
You can position the text box
anywhere in the document. Use the
Text Box Tools tab to change the
formatting of the pull quote text box.]
KNOW YOUR CIRCULARS

Though we have taken enough care to go through the notes provided
here, we shall not be responsible for any loss or damage, resulting from
any action taken on the basis of the contents.
We request everyone to go through the
Internal circulars, Knowledge Park and PNB UNIV
& bank’s website and update yourself with the latest
information through RBI website and other authenticated sources.
In case you find any incorrect/doubtful information, kindly
update us also (along with the source link/reference for the correction).
0
COMPILED BY
Page
A.K.SINGH, CHIEF MANAGER, STAFF TRAINING CENTRE, NOIDA

A.K.SINGH,
Compiled DMLRO,
by A.K.Singh CIRCLE
, Chief OFFICE,
Manager, MUMBAI
Staff Training SUBURB
Centre, Noida
MOBILE No.- 7033595537 : EMAIL- ak.singh2@pnb.co.in
3000 MCQs
On Bank’s Circulars
➢ Issued from 01.01.2021
to 22.11.2021
➢ Important operative
Circulars of 2020
600 MCQs
On
➢ Finacle- 10 Module
DISCLAIMER
Though we have taken enough care to go through the notes provided here, we shall not be
responsible for any loss or damage, resulting from any action taken on the basis of the
contents. We request everyone to go through the Internal Circulars, Knowledge Park and
PNB UNIV & bank’s website and update yourself with the latest information through RBI
website and other authenticated sources. In case you find any incorrect/doubtful
information,kindly update us also (along with the source link/reference for the correction).
1 Page
Compiled by A.K.Singh , Chief Manager, Staff Training Centre, Noida

MCQs on Circulars Issued from 01.01.21 to 22.11.2021

1. Banks are permitted to co- lend with all registered NBFCs (including HFCs) based on a prior
agreement. The co- lending banks will take the share of the individual loan on a back-to-back
basis in their books. However, NBFCs shall be required to retain a minimum of ______ percent
share of the individual loan on their books. Circular RAD 119/2021 dated 08.11.2021
A 10 percent B 15 percent C 20 percent
D 25 percent E None of the above Answer: C
2. Under “Co- Lending Model” (CLM), PNB take the share of the individual loan on a back-to-back
basis in our books upto ______ percent of loan amount. However, IIFL Home Finance Limited
shall retain a minimum of ______ percent share of the individual loan in their books. Circular RAD
119/2021 dated 08.11.2021
A 70 percent ; 30 percent B 75 percent ; 25 percent C 80 percent ; 20 percent
D 90 percent ; 10 percent E None of the above Answer: C
3. Maximum outlay allowed under the “Co- Lending Model” (CLM) arrangement will be Rs. ______.
Circular RAD 119/2021 dated 08.11.2021
A Rs. 500 cr. B Rs. 1000 cr. C Rs. 1500 cr.
D Rs. 2000 cr. E None of the above Answer: D
4. LTV in Case of Home Loans upto Rs. 30 lakhs will be considered as ______% for all loans under
the Co Lending arrangement. Circular RAD 119/2021 dated 08.11.2021
A 75% B 80% C 85%
D 90% E None of the above Answer: D
5. Under PNB GREEN CAR (e-Vehicle) LOAN, Existing customer with satisfactory track record viz.
all loan accounts running regular with nil inspection irregularity are eligible for Reimbursement
of cost of new Electrical Car (e-Vehicle) for personal. For this purpose, Invoice date of the
vehicle should not be more than ______months old. Circular RAD 118/2021 dated 08.11.2021
A 1 month B 2 months C 3 months
D 6 months E None of the above Answer: C
6. To eligible under PNB GREEN CAR (e-Vehicle) LOAN, Minimum net monthly salary / pension/
income should be Rs. ______. Circular RAD 118/2021 dated 08.11.2021
A Rs. 10000/-. B Rs. 15000/-. C Rs. 20000/-.
D Rs. 25000/-. E None of the above Answer: D
7. Under PNB GREEN CAR (e-Vehicle) LOAN, No minimum monthly income/ no income proof is
required in cases where borrower agrees to give ______% of liquid security in shape of Term
Deposit. No processing on the basis of income is required. Circular RAD 118/2021 dated
08.11.2021
A 110%. B 120%. C 125%.
D 150%. E None of the above Answer: A
8. Loan amount under PNB GREEN CAR (e-Vehicle) LOAN for individuals/Proprietorship concerns
will be ______ times of Gross Monthly Salary/ Pension/ Income with a ceiling of Rs ______ (for
one or more vehicles). Circular RAD 118/2021 dated 08.11.2021
A 20 times ; Rs 50 lakh B 25 times ; Rs 50 lakh C 20 times ; Rs 100 lakh
D 25 times ; Rs 100 lakh E No ceiling of loan amount Answer: D
9. Loan amount under PNB GREEN CAR (e-Vehicle) LOAN for Business Concerns (Corporate or
Non-Corporate) will be ______ times of Gross Monthly Salary/ Pension/ Income with a ceiling of
Rs ______ (for one or more vehicles). Circular RAD 118/2021 dated 08.11.2021
D 25 times ; Rs 100 lakh E No ceiling of loan amount Answer: E
10. Margin under PNB GREEN CAR (e-Vehicle) LOAN for new vehicle will be ______% of on-road
price or ______% on ex-showroom price. Circular RAD 118/2021 dated 08.11.2021
A 10% ; NIL B 15% ; NIL C 20% ; NIL
D 20% ; 10% E None of the above Answer: A
2
11. Margin under PNB GREEN CAR (e-Vehicle) LOAN for Reimbursement of cost of new Electrical
Page
Car (e-Vehicle) will be ______% of on-road. Circular RAD 118/2021 dated 08.11.2021

A 25% B 20% C 15%

D 10% E None of the above Answer: A
12. Under PNB GREEN CAR (e-Vehicle) LOAN for new Electrical Car (e-Vehicle), The loan amount
together with interest is to be repaid maximum in ______ equated monthly installments
comprising of principal and interest commencing from the succeeding month. Circular RAD
118/2021 dated 08.11.2021
A 60 B 72 C 84
D 120 E None of the above Answer: D
13. Under PNB GREEN CAR (e-Vehicle) LOAN where GMS/I of borrower is upto Rs. 50000/-, all
deductions including the proposed Car Loan installment should not exceed ______% of GMS/I
A 40% B 50% C 60%
D 70% E None of the above Answer: B
14. Under PNB GREEN CAR (e-Vehicle) LOAN where GMS/I of borrower is above Rs. 50000/-, all
deductions including the proposed Car Loan installment should not exceed ______% of GMS/I
A 40% B 50% C 60%
D 70% E None of the above Answer: C
15. Under PNB GREEN CAR (e-Vehicle) LOAN, Guarantee is acceptable to the Bank in case of Gross
Monthly salary/ pension/income is less than Rs. ______. Circular RAD 118/2021 dated 08.11.2021
A Rs. 25000/- B Rs. 30000/- C Rs. 40000/-
D Rs. 50000/- E None of the above Answer: D
16. The entire term loan (principal & interest) under PNB SAHYOG - Personal Loan Scheme for
Public shall be repaid within remaining period of service or in maximum _____ equated monthly
installments (EMIs) whichever is earlier. Circular RAD 111/2021 dated 29.10.2021
A 48 B 60 C 72
D 84 E None of the avove Answer: C
17. The Overdraft Limit under PNB SAHYOG -Personal Loan Scheme for Public shall be adjusted
within remaining period of service or in maximum period of ______ months by reducing Drawing
Power (DP) equivalent to EMI amount at the beginning of every month. Circular RAD 111/2021
dated 29.10.2021
A 48 B 60 C 72
18. Personal loans allowed to Defence Personnel including officials of Military Station Headquarters,
Border Security Force, Central Reserve Police Force, Central Industrial Security Force, Indo
Tibet Border Police etc. shall be repayable in maximum ______ equated monthly installments or
remaining period of stay at the particular posting, whichever is lower. Circular RAD 111/2021
dated 29.10.2021
A 48 B 60 C 72
19. Personal loan to LIC Agent under PNB SAHYOG shall be repayable inmaximum ______ EMIs or
upto ______ years of age of LIC agent, whichever is earlier. Circular RAD 111/2021 dated
29.10.2021
A 60 ; 60 years B 72 ; 60 years C 72 ; 65 years
D 72 ; 65 years E None of the avove Answer: C
20. Under Personal Loan Scheme for Doctors- PNB- Doctor’s Delight, The entire loan (principal &
interest) shall be repaid within remaining period of service or in maximum ______ equated
monthly installments (EMIs). Repayment to start one month after disbursement of the loan.
A 48 B 60 C 72
D 84 E None of the avove Answer: D
21. Under Personal Loan Scheme for Doctors- PNB- Doctor’s Delight, The overdraft Limit shall be
adjusted within a maximum period of ______ months by reducing Drawing Power (DP) equivalent
3
to EMI amount at the beginning of every month. The entire loan shall be repaid within remaining
Page
period of service or in maximum 84 equated monthly installments (EMIs). Circular RAD 111/2021

dated 29.10.2021
A 48 B 60 C 72
22. To eligible for Digital lending under End-to-End Pre-approved automated personal loan (PAPL)
age of applicant should not be more than ______ Years. Circular RAD 110/2021 dated 28.10.2021
A 60 years B 62 years C 65 years
D No any age criteria E None of the avove Answer: D
23. To eligible for Digital lending under End-to-End Pre-approved automated personal loan (PAPL)
Minimum Quarterly average balance should be of Rs. ______ for loans upto Rs 5.00 lakh and
______ for loans above Rs 5.00 lakh for last 4 qtrs is required. Circular RAD 110/2021 dated
28.10.2021
A Nil ; Rs. 5000 B Nil ; Rs. 10000 C Rs. 5000 ; Rs. 10000
D Rs. 10000 ; Rs. 10000 E None of the avove Answer: B
24. Minimum take home after all deductions of proposed Personal Loan under End-to-End Pre-
approved automated personal loan (PAPL) should be Rs. ______ in Metro/ Urban Centers & Rs.
______ in Semi Urban/ Rural Centers. ( Based on location of branch where account is
maintained.) Circular RAD 110/2021 dated 28.10.2021
A Rs. 10000.00 ; Rs. B Rs. 15000.00 ; Rs. C Rs. 15000.00 ; Rs.
10000.00 10000.00 15000.00
D Rs. 20000.00 ; Rs. E None of the avove Answer: B
15000.00
25. Loan amount for Digital lending under End-to-End Pre-approved automated personal loan
(PAPL) will be ______ times of average of 10 months out of last 12 month salary credited in the
account with Minimum Rs ______ and Maximum Rs. ______. Circular RAD 110/2021 dated
28.10.2021
A 4 times ; Rs 25,000/- ; B 5 times ; Rs 20,000/- ; C 5 times ; Rs 25,000/-
Rs. 8.00 lakh Rs. 8.00 lakh ; Rs. 8.00 lakh
D 5 times ; Rs 25,000/- ; E None of the avove Answer: C
Rs. 10.00 lakh
26. The entire Pre-approved automated personal loan (principal & interest) will be repaid within
remaining period of service, in maximum period of ______ and repayment to start one month
after disbursement of the loan. Circular RAD 110/2021 dated 28.10.2021
A 60 months B 72 months C 84 months
D 120 months E None of the avove Answer: A
27. Minimum acceptable score for Digital lending under End-to-End Pre-approved automated
personal loan (PAPL) will be ______. Circular RAD 110/2021 dated 28.10.2021
A 625 and above B 650and above C 700 and above
D 750 and above E None of the avove Answer: C
28. Padho Pardesh scheme covers education loans given to student belonging to minority
communities for overseas studies covering courses for Post Graduate Diploma/Post Graduate
Degree course/Masters, M.Phil & Ph.D from any foreign university subject to his/her
parents/guardians income up to Rs.______per annum. Circular RAD 109/2021 dated 22.10.2021
A Rs.5.00 lakh B Rs.6.00 lakh C Rs.8.00 lakh
D Rs.10.00 lakh E None of the avove Answer: B
29. Under Pradhan Mantri Awas Yojana – PNB Housing for All-Credit Linked Subsidy Scheme for
EWS/LIG, The beneficiary, at his/ her discretion, can build a house of large area but interest
subvention would be limited to the first Rs.______ of loan amount only. Circular RAD 108/2021
dated 13.10.2021
30. For EWS under Pradhan Mantri Awas Yojana – PNB Housing for All-Credit Linked Subsidy
Scheme, Annual Household Income should be up to Rs.______ and house size with carpet area
should be upto ______. Circular RAD 108/2021 dated 13.10.2021
4
A Rs.3 lakh ; 30 sq.mt B Rs.3 lakh ; 60 sq.mt C Rs.6 lakhs ; 30 sq.mt.

Page
D Rs.6 lakhs ; 60 sq.mt. E None of the avove Answer: A

31. For LIG under Pradhan Mantri Awas Yojana – PNB Housing for All-Credit Linked Subsidy
Scheme, Annual Household Income should be above Rs.3 lakhs and upto Rs.______ and house
size with carpet area should be upto ______. Circular RAD 108/2021 dated 13.10.2021
A Rs.3 lakh ; 30 sq.mt B Rs.3 lakh ; 60 sq.mt C Rs.6 lakhs ; 30 sq.mt.
D Rs.6 lakhs ; 60 sq.mt. E None of the avove Answer: D
32. Under Pradhan Mantri Awas Yojana – PNB Housing for All-Credit Linked Subsidy Scheme (CLSS
for EWS /LIG),The Net present value of the interest subsidy will be calculated at a discounted
rate of ______%. Circular RAD 108/2021 dated 13.10.2021
A 6.00% B 7.00% C 8.00%
D 9.00% E None of the avove Answer: D
33. Subsidy under Pradhan Mantri Awas Yojana – PNB Housing for All-Credit Linked Subsidy
Scheme (CLSS for EWS /LIG) will be released to the Bank by the NHB in maximum of
______installments. Circular RAD 108/2021 dated 13.10.2021
A three B four C five
D six E None of the avove Answer: B
34. Margin (Borrower’s contribution) under Pradhan Mantri Awas Yojana – PNB Housing for All-
Credit Linked Subsidy Scheme (CLSS for EWS /LIG) will be ______% for loan up to Rs. 20 lac and
20% for loans above Rs. 20 lac and up to Rs. 30 lac. Circular RAD 108/2021 dated 13.10.2021
A 10% ; 20% B 10% ; 10% C 15% ; 20%
D 10% ; 15% E None of the avove Answer: A
for EWS /LIG), Cost of stamp duty, registration and other documentation charges may be added
to the cost of the house/dwelling unit for the purpose of calculating LTV ratio in cases where the
cost of the house/dwelling unit does not exceed Rs.10 lac. Circular RAD 108/2021 dated
13.10.2021
A Rs.5 lac B Rs.10 lac C Rs.15 lac
D Rs.20 lac E None of the avove Answer: B
for EWS /LIG), Cost of stamp duty, Bank will not charge any processing fee from the beneficiary
for housing loans upto Rs. ______ under the scheme. Circular RAD 108/2021 dated 13.10.2021
A Rs. 2 lakh B Rs. 4 lakh C Rs. 6 lakh
D Rs. 8 lakh E None of the avove Answer: C
37. In lieu of processing fee for housing loan for the borrower under CLSS for EWS /LIG, the bank
would be given a lump sum amount of Rs______per sanctioned application (Loan sanctioned on
or after 01.01.2017). Circular RAD 108/2021 dated 13.10.2021
A Rs 2000/- B Rs 3000/- C Rs 4000/-
D Rs 5000/- E None of the avove Answer: B
38. Repayment Period under Pradhan Mantri Awas Yojana – PNB Housing for All-Credit Linked
Subsidy Scheme (CLSS for EWS /LIG) will be up to age of 70 years or ______ years, including
moratorium period, whichever is earlier. Circular RAD 108/2021 dated 13.10.2021
D 30 years E None of the avove Answer: D
for EWS /LIG), all deductions including the proposed Housing Loan installment should not
exceed ______% of GAS/I for loans upto Rs.5.00 lakh and ______% for loans above Rs.5.00 lakhs
upto Rs.6.00 lakhs. Circular RAD 108/2021 dated 13.10.2021
A 40% ; 50% B 40% ; 60% C 50% ; 60%
D 60% ; 60% E None of the avove Answer: C
40. As part of digitalization efforts and to capture the customer leads from different channels, Our
Bank initiated process for tie-up with Loan Marketplace platform “PaisaBazaar” and has entered
into an agreement for sourcing of home loan leads. Paisabazaar will share the housing loan
leads of above Rs______ only Circular RAD 87/2021 dated 04.09.2021
A Rs5.00 lac B Rs10.00 lac C Rs15.00 lac
5
D Rs20.00 lac E None of the avove Answer: B

Page
41. Commission will be payable to Marketing Associates (Mas); Marketing Consultants (Mcs) &

Retail Loan Counselors (Rlcs) for housing loan leads of Rs. ______ and above converted into
business. Circular RAD 74/2021 dated 20.07.2021
A Rs5.00 lac B Rs10.00 lac C Rs15.00 lac
D Rs20.00 lac E None of the avove Answer: B
42. As per directions by Under Secretary, DFS, MoF, all Education Loan proposals should
compulsorily be routed through Vidya Lakshmi Portal only and No VLP application should be
pending for more than ______days on the portal. Circular RAD 70/2021 dated 07.07.2021
A 7 days B 14 days C 15 days
D 21days E None of the avove Answer: A
43. The Padho Pardesh scheme of interest subsidy scheme covers education loans given to student
belonging to minority communities for overseas studies covering courses for Post Graduate
Diploma/Post Graduate Degree course/Masters, M.Phil & Ph.D from any foreign university
subject to his/her parents /guardians income up to Rs.______ per annum. Circular RAD 61/2021
dated 27.05.2021
44. Amount of Loan under Earnest Money Deposit (EMD) Scheme will be 100% of Earnest Money
Deposit (EMD) subject to maximum of Rs.______. Circular RAD 56/2021 dated 27.04.2021
D Rs.15 lac E None of the avove Answer: A
45. Under Earnest Money Deposit (EMD) Scheme,______ months Interest on loan amount will be
recovered upfront on refundable basis for completed month . Circular RAD 56/2021 dated
27.04.2021
A Twelve months B Six months C Three months
D One month E None of the avove Answer: B
46. Margin under Earnest Money Deposit (EMD) Scheme will be ______%. Circular RAD 56/2021 dated
27.04.2021
A 10% B 15% C 20%
D 25% E None of the avove Answer: D
47. Under Earnest Money Deposit (EMD) Scheme, Irrevocable Letter of Undertaking will be obtained
empowering the Bank to get the allotment cancelled if the borrower fails to adjust EMD loan
within ______ from the date of allotment. Circular RAD 56/2021 dated 27.04.2021
D 30 days E None of the avove Answer: B
48. The maximum qualifying loan amount along with interest under PNB Baghban Scheme shall be
restricted to ______. Circular RAD 55/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A Rs.50 lakh B Rs.100 lakh C Rs.150 lakh
D Rs.200 lakh E None of the avove Answer: B
49. The mortgaged property under PNB Baghban Scheme shall be subject to revaluation once in
______ years at borrower’s cost. Circular RAD 55/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A two years B three years C four years
D five years E None of the avove Answer: D
50. The residential house/flat owner, who is resident of India, of the age of ______ & above, is
eligible to raise the loan under the PNB Baghban Scheme. Circular RAD 55/2021 dated 27.04.2021
D 65 years E None of the avove Answer: B
51. In case of joint account under PNB Baghban Scheme, one of the spouse must be of the age of 60
years & above, while the age of other spouse should be minimum ______. Circular RAD 55/2021
dated 27.04.2021
D 65 years E None of the avove Answer: A
52. The qualifying amount of loan under PNB Baghban Scheme will depend on the realizable value
of residential property, after maintaining margin of ______%. Circular RAD 55/2021 dated
6
27.04.2021
Page
A 10%. B 15%. C 20%.

D 25%. E None of the avove Answer: C

53. Lump-sum payment of loan under PNB Baghban Scheme be permitted only for medical
treatment of senior citizen borrower, his/ her spouse and dependents, if any, subject to ceiling of
Rs.______ at HO level on merits. Circular RAD 55/2021 dated 27.04.2021
54. Under PNB Baghban Scheme, The Bank shall revalue the property once in ______ years when a
quick review shall be undertaken especially with regard to the outstanding in the account vis-a-
vis the revised realizable value of the IP in question and the rate of interest (duly reset), and
reduce or increase the loan or installment, at its discretion, depending on the valuation. Circular
RAD 55/2021 dated 27.04.2021
55. The tenor of loan under PNB Baghban Scheme shall be ______ years for the age group of
individuals between 60 and 70 years and ______years for the age group of individuals above 70
years OR till survival of any of the spouse, whichever is earlier. Circular RAD 55/2021 dated
27.04.2021
A 10 years to 20 years ; B 15 years to 20 years ; C 15 years to 20 years ;
10 years to 15 years 15 years to 20 years 10 years to 15 years
D 15 years to 25 years ; E None of the avove Answer: C
10 years to 15 years
56. The term of loan under PNB Baghban Scheme can be extended at the end of the tenor at the sole
discretion of the Bank, depending on the security cover available as per the realizable value of
the property. The maximum tenor of the loan, in any case, will not be more than ______ years.
D 25 years E None of the avove Answer: C
57. Residual life of the residential property under PNB Baghban Scheme should be at least ______
years. Circular RAD 55/2021 dated 27.04.2021
58. Which of the following statement/s is/are incorrect in respect of PNB Baghban Scheme as per
Income-tax Act 1961, in connection with the Reverse Mortgage Loan?
(i) The stream of payments received by the senior citizen under Reverse Mortgage Loan Scheme
made & notified by the Central Government would not be treated as “income”.
(ii) The borrower under the Reverse Mortgage Scheme shall not be liable to capital gains tax at
the time of creation of mortgage, while he/she will be liable to income tax (in the nature of tax on
capital gains) at the point of alienation of the mortgaged property by the mortgagee for the
purposes of recovering of loan.
A Only (i) B Only (ii) C Both (i) and (ii)
D Neither (i) or (ii) E Answer: D
59. All eligible education loans under the scheme PNB HONHAAR (applicable for Delhi branches) up
to Rs _____ are to be covered under the Credit Guarantee Fund Scheme for education loans
(CGFSEL) of NCGTC and guarantee fees shall not be recovered from the student (borrower).
A Rs 4.50 lakhs B Rs 5.50 lakhs C Rs 6.50 lakhs
D Rs 7.50 lakhs E None of the avove Answer: D
60. Under the scheme PNB HONHAAR, need based finance to meet the expenses will be considered
taking into account subject to the Maximum upto Rs. _____ with margins of ______% Circular
RAD 54/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A Rs. 10 lakhs ; 5% B Rs. 10 lakhs ; 10% C Rs. 10 lakhs ; Nil
D Rs. 20 lakhs ; Nil E None of the avove Answer: C
7
61. Repayment under the scheme PNB HONHAAR will be _____ with Repayment Holiday /
Page
Moratorium of_______ Circular RAD 54/2021 dated 27.04.2021

A 15 years; (Course period + B 15 years; (Course period + C 10 years; (Course period

1 year.) 2 year.) + 1 year.)
D 10 years; (Course period + E None of the avove Answer: A
2 year.)
62. Under the scheme PNB HONHAAR, Annual Guarantee Fee (AGF) of ______% of the outstanding
amount as on the date of application of the guarantee cover shall be paid upfront within ______
from the date of Credit Guarantee Demand Advice Note (CGDAN) of guarantee fee. Circular RAD
54/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 0.5% ; 30 days B 1.0% ; 30 days C 0.5% ; 45 days
D 1.0% ; 45 days E None of the avove Answer: A
63. The Guarantee fee under the education loan scheme PNB HONHAAR shall not be recovered from
the student (borrower) up to sanctioned limit of Rs ______. Circular RAD 54/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A Rs 4.50 Lakh B Rs 5.00 Lakh C Rs 7.50 Lakh
D Rs 10.00 Lakh E None of the avove Answer: C
64. Guarantee fee under the education loan scheme PNB HONHAAR shall be borne by the borrower
for loans sanctioned above Rs 7.50 Lakh to Rs ______. Circular RAD 54/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A Rs 4.50 Lakh B Rs 5.00 Lakh C Rs 7.50 Lakh
D Rs 10.00 Lakh E None of the avove Answer: D
65. Loan applications under the education loan scheme PNB HONHAAR have to be disposed of
within a period of ______ for loans where mortgage is not required (For all cases). Circular RAD
54/2021 dated 27.04.2021
D 10 days E None of the avove Answer: A
66. Under the scheme PNB HONHAAR, on default of the loan and invocation of claim, the Higher
education and Skill Development Credit Guarantee Fund shall settle ______% of the claims after
the credit facility has been recalled and the balance ______% of the claim, if any, shall be paid
after conclusion of the recovery proceedings and ascertaining the net/final loss incurred by the
lending institution. Circular RAD 54/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 70% ; 30% B 75% ; 25% C 75% ; 25%
D 75% ; 25% E None of the avove Answer: B
67. Minimum and maximum quantum of finance under the Education Loan Scheme PNB Kaushal will
be Rs. ______. Circular RAD 53/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A Min: Rs.5000/- ; Max: B Min: Rs.5000/- ; Max: C Min: Rs.10000/- ; Max:
Rs.150000/- Rs.100000/- Rs.150000/-
D Min: Rs.10000/- ; Max: E None of the avove Answer: A
Rs.200000/-
68. Under the Education Loan Scheme PNB Kaushal, Branch Manager may permit reimbursement of
fees paid by the student/ guardian at the time of admission or subsequent stages within ______
from the date of payment of fees on individual merits of the case. Circular RAD 53/2021 dated
27.04.2021
A one month B two months C three months
D six months E None of the avove Answer: D
69. Margin under the Education Loan Scheme PNB Kaushal will be ______%. Circular RAD 53/2021
dated 27.04.2021
A Nil B 10%. C 15%.
D 25%. E None of the avove Answer: A
70. Repayment period under the Education Loan Scheme PNB Kaushal will be upto ______ years for
loans upto Rs. 50,000. Circular RAD 53/2021 dated 27.04.2021
71. Repayment period under the Education Loan Scheme PNB Kaushal will be upto ______ years for
loans between Rs. 50,000 to Rs 1 lakh. Circular RAD 53/2021 dated 27.04.2021
8

Page
72. Repayment period under the Education Loan Scheme PNB Kaushal for loans above Rs 1 lakh

will be upto ______ years . Circular RAD 53/2021 dated 27.04.2021

73. Upon completion of the course, repayment holiday/Moratorium under the Education Loan
Scheme PNB Kaushal will be ______ months for courses of duration upto 1 year and ______
months for courses of duration above 1 year Circular RAD 53/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 3 months ; 12 months B 3 months ; 6 months C 6 months ; 6 months
D 6 months ; 12 months E None of the avove Answer: D
74. Under the Education Loan Scheme PNB Kaushal, If the student is not able to complete the
course within the scheduled time, extension of time for completion of course may be permitted
for a maximum period of ______ years. Circular RAD 53/2021 dated 27.04.2021
D five years E None of the avove Answer: A
75. Sanctioning authority is empowered to permit extension in moratorium period up to maximum
______ years in deserving cases under reporting to Circle Head (in case of GBB
sanction)/ZOCAC-I and above (in case of RAM/iRAM sanction Circular RAD 53/2021 dated
27.04.2021
A 3 months B 6 months C one year
D two years E None of the avove Answer: D
76. Processing Charges/Upfront fee and Documentation Charges under the Education Loan Scheme
PNB Kaushal will be Rs. ______. Circular RAD 53/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 10% B 15% C 20%
D 25% E None of the avove Answer: E
77. The Interest Rate to be charged by the Bank for skill loan under the Education Loan Scheme
PNB Kaushal to be covered under Credit Guarantee Fund Scheme for Skill Development
(CGFSSD) should not be more than ______ % p.a. over the Marginal Cost of Fund Based Lending
Rate (MCLR)/ Repo Linked Lending Rate (RLLR) Circular RAD 53/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 1.00% B 1.50% C 2.00%
D 2.50% E None of the avove Answer: B
78. Under Credit Guarantee Fund Scheme for Skill Development (CGFSSD), A lock-in-period of
______ months has been stipulated from the date of commencement of guarantee cover or end
of period of moratorium of interest, whichever is later for Education Loan Scheme PNB Kaushal.
A 3months B 6 months C 12 months
D 24 months E None of the avove Answer: C
79. Concessional Education Loans to Persons with Disabilities (PwDs) shall be available to any
Student with shall be available to any Student with ______% or more disability on the basis of
Disability certificate issued by authorities empowered to issue such certificate in terms of
Statute / notifications / Govt. orders of Central / State / UT Government. or more disability on the
basis of Disability certificate issued by authorities empowered to issue such certificate in terms
of Statute / notifications / Govt. orders of Central / State / UT Government. Circular RAD 52/2021
dated 27.04.2021
A 30%. B 40%. C 50%.
D 60%. E None of the avove Answer: B
80. Under Concessional Education Loans to Persons with Disabilities (PwDs) Cost of 2-wheeler upto
Rs.______ shall be considered within the overall ceiling of loan amount. Circular RAD 52/2021
dated 27.04.2021
A Rs.50,000/- B Rs.60,000/- C Rs.100,000/-
D Rs.150,000/- E None of the avove Answer: A
81. As per Memorandum of Agreement (MoA) availing 100% refinance from National Handicapped
Finance & Development Corporation (NHFDC) for extending concessional Education Loans to
Persons with Disabilities (PwDs) under Bank’s Education Loan Schemes, Quantum of Finance
will be need based Finance to meet the expenses (taking into account the prescribed Margin),
9
subject to the maximum ceilings of Rs. ______ for studies in India. Circular RAD 52/2021 dated
Page
27.04.2021


Persons with Disabilities (PwDs) under Bank’s Education Loan Schemes, Quantum of Finance
will be need based Finance to meet the expenses (taking into account the prescribed Margin),
subject to the maximum ceilings of Rs. ______ for studies abroad. Circular RAD 52/2021 dated
27.04.2021
Persons with Disabilities (PwDs) under Bank’s Education Loan Schemes, Loans over the ceiling
of Rs. ______ are not eligible for refinance under the aforesaid scheme. Circular RAD 52/2021
dated 27.04.2021
Persons with Disabilities (PwDs) under Bank’s Education Loan Schemes,The maximum
repayment period of loan will be in conformity to the guidelines laid down in NHFDC scheme i.e.
______ after commencement of repayment. Circular RAD 52/2021 dated 27.04.2021
85. Margin under PNB Pravasi Shiksha Loan Scheme will be ______%. Circular RAD 51/2021 dated
27.04.2021
A 5% B 10% C 15%
86. Equitable/Registered Mortgage of Immovable Property in India in the name of Guarantor(s) with
value at least ______% of loan amount or Liquid Security with value at least ______% of loan
amount, in the shape of pledge of Government Security, NSCs, KVPs, IVPs / PSU Bonds (where
interest is being serviced regularly) / Bank's FDR / LIC Policies (surrender value) etc. will be
required as collateral security for the loan under PNB Pravasi Shiksha Loan Scheme. Circular
RAD 51/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 100% ; 100% B 125% ; 100% C 125% ; 125%
87. Under PNB Pravasi Shiksha Loan Scheme, Maximum repayment period will be ______ years
(excluding moratorium period) Circular RAD 51/2021 dated 27.04.2021
88. Under PNB Pravasi Shiksha Loan Scheme, Maximum Repayment Holiday/ Moratorium Period
will be Course Period +______. Circular RAD 51/2021 dated 27.04.2021
D 18 months E None of the avove Answer: B
89. Maximum amount of loan that can be sanctioned by Segment Head of MMG III (RAM/iRAM) for
Studies in India under the Education Loan Scheme PNB Saraswati, will be up to Rs. ______ and
up to Rs. ______ by Incumbents/ Segment head (RAM/iRAM) of SMG IV. Circular RAD 50/2021
dated 27.04.2021
A Rs.10 lakhs ; Rs.30 lakhs B Rs.20 lakhs ; Rs.30 lakhs C Rs.10 lakhs ; Rs.20
lakhs
D Rs.10 lakhs ; Rs.40 lakhs E None of the avove Answer: A
90. Under the Education Loan Scheme PNB Saraswati, Incumbent (SMG V) of RAM/iRAM can
10
sanction Rs. ______ where Collateral Coverage is 100% and Rs. ______ where Collateral
Coverage is 150% Circular RAD 50/2021 dated 27.04.2021
Page
A Rs. 20.00 lakhs ; Rs. B Rs. 25.00 lakhs ; Rs. C Rs. 25.00 lakhs ; Rs.

30.00 lakhs 50.00 lakhs 75.00 lakhs

D Rs. 50.00 lakhs ; Rs. E None of the avove Answer: D
75.00 lakhs
91. Where the admission is purely based on marks scored in qualifying examinations, cut off
percentage of marks of _____% for SC/ST and ______% for General category will be considered
under the Education Loan Scheme PNB Saraswati. Circular RAD 50/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 40% ; 50% B 40% ; 60% C 50% ; 60%
92. Margin under the Education Loan Scheme PNB Saraswati, Up to Rs. 4 lakhs will be _______%
and above Rs. 4 lakhs will be ____%. Margin may be brought-in on year-to-year basis as and
when disbursements are made on a pro-rata basis. Circular RAD 50/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 5% ; 5% B 5% ; 10% C 10% ; 15%
D Nil ; 5% E None of the avove Answer: D
93. No tangible Security and /or 3rd party guarantee will be required under the Education Loan
Scheme PNB Saraswati, up to Rs. ________. Circular RAD 50/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A Rs. 7.50 lakhs B Rs. 10.00 lakhs C Rs. 12.50 lakhs
D Rs. 15.00 lakhs E None of the avove Answer: A
94. All eligible education loans under the Education Loan Scheme up to Rs.______ sanctioned on
and after 16.09.2015 shall be covered under the Credit Guarantee Fund Scheme on Education
Loan (CGFSEL) Circular RAD 50/2021 dated 27.04.2021
95. Education Loan to children of PNB’s Employees where employee is either co-borrower or
guarantor are exempted for coverage under CGFSEL scheme. However no any security is
required in such cases up to Rs. ______. Circular RAD 50/2021 dated 27.04.2021
96. Students who secure admission in Premier Institutes, which include (i) Business Schools, (ii)
Engineering Colleges, (iii) Medical Colleges and other reputed Institutes, are eligible to avail
education loan under the scheme ______. Circular RAD 50/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A PNB Saraswati B PNB Pratibha C PNB Udaan
D Any of the above E None of the avove Answer: B
97. Quantum of Finance under the Education Loan Scheme PNB Pratibha for students getting
admitted in Indian Institute of Managements (IIMs) and Indian Institute of Technology (IITs),
which have been opened in the recent past/ get subsequently opened and their names are
presently not included in the list of premier Institutes will be Rs ______. Circular RAD 50/2021
dated 27.04.2021
A Rs 10.00 lakh B Rs 15.00 lakh C Rs 20.00 lakh
D Rs 30.00 lakh E None of the avove Answer: B
98. Where the admission is purely based on marks scored in qualifying examinations, cut off
percentage of marks of _____% for SC/ST and ______% for General category will be considered
under the Education Loan Scheme PNB Udaan. Circular RAD 50/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 40% ; 50% B 40% ; 60% C 50% ; 60%
99. Under the Education Loan Scheme PNB Udaan, AGM RAM/iRAM and above have been
empowered to accord permission to consider the cases where loan is backed by mortgage of
immoveable property, enforceable under SARFAESI Act, having realizable value of at least
______% of loan amount after. Circular RAD 50/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 100% B 125% C 150%
100. Margin under the Education Loan Scheme PNB Udaan for Studies abroad, up to Rs. 4 lakhs will
be _______% and Above Rs. 4 lakhs will be ____%. Margin may be brought-in on year-to-year
11
basis as and when disbursements are made on a pro-rata basis. Circular RAD 50/2021 dated
27.04.2021
Page
A NIL ; 10% B NIL ; 15% C 5% ; 15%


101. No tangible Security and /or 3rd party guarantee will be required under the Education Loan
Scheme PNB Udaan, up to Rs. ________. Circular RAD 50/2021 dated 27.04.2021
102. All eligible education loans under the Education Loan Scheme PNB Udaanup to Rs.______
sanctioned on and after 16.09.2015 shall be covered under the Credit Guarantee Fund Scheme
on Education Loan (CGFSEL) Circular RAD 50/2021 dated 27.04.2021
103. Education Loan under PNB Udaan to children of PNB’s Employees where employee is either co-
borrower or guarantor are exempted for coverage under CGFSEL scheme. However no any
security is required in such cases up to Rs. ______. Circular RAD 50/2021 dated 27.04.2021
104. Under all variant of our Education Loan Schemes except PNB Pratibha, Expenses like Caution
deposit, Building fund/refundable deposit supported by Institution bills/receipts could be
considered subject to the condition that the amount does not exceed ______% of the total tuition
fees for the entire course. Circular RAD 50/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 10% B 15% C 20%
D 25% E None of the avove Answer: A
105. Under all variant of our Education Loan Schemes except PNB Pratibha, the maximum expenses
for Purchase of books/ equipments/ instruments/ uniforms, Purchase of computer at reasonable
cost, if required for completion of the course and any other expense required to complete the
course - like study tours, project work, thesis, etc may be capped at 20% of the total tuition fees
payable for completion of the course. Circular RAD 50/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 10% B 15% C 20%
D 25% E None of the avove Answer: C
106. Under all variant of our Education Loan Schemes, Branch Manager may permit reimbursement of
fees paid by the student/ guardian at the time of admission or subsequent stages within _______
months from the date of payment of fees on individual merits of the case. Reimbursement after a
period of more than six months may be considered at AGM RAM/iRAM and ZOCAC-I and above.
A two months B three months C six months
D twelve months E None of the avove Answer: C
107. Concession @ ______% in interest shall be available to women borrowers and to borrowers for
regular servicing of interest during moratorium period and repayment of EMI during repayment
period for pursuing courses under PNB Pratibha scheme. Circular RAD 50/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 0.25% B 0.50% C 0.75%
D No concession E None of the avove Answer: D
108. Under Education Loan Schemes PNB Saraswati, PNB Pratibha and PNB Udaan, Repayment of
the loan will be in equated monthly installments (EMIs) for a period of _____ years excluding
repayment holiday Circular RAD 50/2021 dated 27.04.2021
109. Under Education Loan Schemes PNB Saraswati, PNB Pratibha and PNB Udaan, If the student is
not able to complete the course within the scheduled time for reasons beyond his control,
Sanctioning Authority may at his discretion, consider such extension of time for completion of
course as may be deemed necessary to complete the course up to maximum period of _____ .
A 1 year B 2 years C 3 years
12
110. Under all variant of our Education Loan Schemes, PAN of the student be obtained at the time of
sanction. However, obtention of PAN should not be made a pre-condition for sanction/
Page
disbursement of education loans. In case PAN is not available at the time of sanction, the same

should be obtained within ______ . Circular RAD 50/2021 dated 27.04.2021

A two months B three months C six months
D at the time of E None of the avove Answer: D
disbursement of the loan
111. Existing Individual PNB customers (erstwhile OBC and UNI) with at least 6 months satisfactory
transactional record OR new customer with satisfactory track record of last one year with other
Bank/FI in the age group of _______ years holding a valid driving license are eligible under “PNB
Saarthi”- Two Wheeler Loan Scheme. Circular RAD 49/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 18 years and 50 years B 18 years and 55 years C 18 years and 60 years
D 18 years and 65 years E None of the avove Answer: D
112. Salaried persons with pension are eligible upto ______ years age are eligible under “PNB
Saarthi”- Two Wheeler Loan Scheme. Circular RAD 49/2021 dated 27.04.2021
113. Under “PNB Saarthi”- Two Wheeler Loan Scheme, AGM RAM/iRAM/ ZOCAC I and above may
further relax the uper age criteria by ______ years on case to case basis Circular RAD 49/2021
dated 27.04.2021
114. Under “PNB Saarthi”- Two Wheeler Loan Scheme, Minimum Net Monthly Salary/Income (NMS/I)
will be Rs.______ p.m after all dedications including the proposed two wheeler loan installment.
A Rs.7,500/- B Rs.10,000/- C Rs.15,000/-
D Rs.20,000/- E None of the avove Answer: B
115. No minimum monthly income is required under “PNB Saarthi”- Two Wheeler Loan Scheme, in
cases where borrower agrees to give ______% of liquid security in shape of Term Deposit.
A 90% B 100% C 110%
116. Under “PNB Saarthi”- Two Wheeler Loan Scheme, Maximum Loan Amount for super bikes /
hybrid two-wheeler vehicles (Engine capacity 200CC & above) will be Rs. _____ and for all other
two-wheeler vehicles will be Rs. ______. Circular RAD 49/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A Rs 5.00 lakh ; 1.50 lakh B Rs 10.00 lakh ; 2.50 C Rs 10.00 lakh ; 1.50
lakh lakh
D Rs 5.00 lakh ; 2.50 lakh E None of the avove Answer: C
117. Under “PNB Saarthi”- Two Wheeler Loan Scheme, Margin Where salary is being disbursed
through the concerned bank branch and/ or under Check off facility will be ____% of on road
price and for other than salaried/ check off facility margin will be ____% of on road price. Circular
RAD 49/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 10% ; 25% B 10% ; 15% C 15% ; 25%
118. Under “PNB Saarthi”- Two Wheeler Loan Scheme, Maximum Maximum EMIs for repayment will
be _____ EMIs for Scooter and Motorcycle, _____ EMIs for Scooterrete &_____ EMIs for Mopeds.
A 72 ; 30 ; 24 B 60 ; 36 ; 24 C 60 ; 36 ; 30
D 60 ; 30 ; 24 E None of the avove Answer: D
119. Under “PNB Saarthi”- Two Wheeler Loan Scheme, no guarantee be required for Loan up to Rs.
________ Circular RAD 49/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A Rs. 25,000/-, B Rs. 50,000/-, C Rs. 75,000/-,
D Rs. 1,00,000/-, E None of the avove Answer: A
120. Under “PNB Saarthi”- Two Wheeler Loan Scheme, Sanctioning authority empowered to waive
the guarantee in case Liquid Collateral Security (FDRs, NSCs, LICs) having PV/SV of at least
13
_____% of loan amount is offered and in case EM of IP is offered to the extent of _____% amount
of the loan Circular RAD 49/2021 dated 27.04.2021
Page
A 60% ; 100% B 50% ; 100% C 60% ; 120%


121. Under “PNB Saarthi”- Two Wheeler Loan Scheme, Max.Permissible Deduction should not exceed
______% of GMS/I upto Rs.50000 p.m and ______% of GMS/I above Rs.50000 p.m subject to
minimum net take home income- Rs.10000/- including the proposed two wheeler loan
installment. Circular RAD 49/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 30% ; 40% B 40% ; 50% C 50% ; 60%
122. Facility under Power Ride Scheme is available for ‘WOMEN’ borrower with minimum ______
months service in present organistaion for salary class and with experience of more than ______
(Based upon declaration/bank account/ITR etc.) for Self employed. Circular RAD 49/2021 dated
27.04.2021
A 6 months ; one year B one year ; one year C one year ; 18 months
D one year ; two years E None of the avove Answer: A
123. For facility under PNB Power Ride- Scheme for Financing Purchase of Two Wheeler Vehicle to
Women Borrowers, Individuals should be in the age group of ______ years and should hold valid
driving license Circular RAD 49/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 18 years to 50years B 18 years to 55years C 18 years to 60years
D 18 years to 65years E None of the avove Answer: D
124. Under PNB Power Ride- Scheme for Financing Purchase of Two Wheeler Vehicle to Women
Borrowers, Minimum Gross Monthly Salary/Income (GMS/I) will be Rs.______ including the
proposed two wheeler loan installment. Circular RAD 49/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A Rs.5,000/- B Rs.8,000/- C Rs.10,000/-
Borrowers, Maximum Loan Amount will be Rs. ______ and margin will be _____% of ex-
showroom price. Circular RAD 49/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A Rs. 50000/- ; 10% B Rs. 60000/- ; 10% C Rs. 60000/- ; 20%
D Rs. 75000/- ; 20% E None of the avove Answer: B
Borrowers, Maximum Repayment will be _____ months in equated monthly installment Circular
RAD 49/2021 dated 27.04.2021
127. Sanctioning of loans backed by ______% liquid security in the shape of FDRs, NSCs, and KVPs
etc under PNB Power Ride- Scheme for Financing Purchase of Two Wheeler Vehicle to Women
Borrowers shall be exempted from application of PNB Score. Circular RAD 49/2021 dated
27.04.2021
A 100% B 110% C 125%
128. For two wheeler irregular accounts and accounts under NPA category, the inspection shall be
conducted on _____ or at such shorter intervals as the situation demands Circular RAD 49/2021
dated 27.04.2021
A monthly B quarterly C half yearly
D yearly E None of the avove Answer: B
129. Which of the following statement/s is/are incorrect in respect of “PNB Saarthi”- Two Wheeler
Loan Scheme? Circular RAD 49/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A Minimum Net Monthly B Income of Spouse can be C In case of students,
Salary/Income (NMS/I) of taken into account for Income/salary proof of
Rs.10,000/- p.m after all determining loan parent/guardian who will
dedications including the amount/eligibility. In such be co-borrower be
proposed two wheeler loan case, the spouse be made considered.
installment. co-borrower.
14
D Income of other than E None of the above Answer: E

salaried /check off facility
Page
borrowers is verified from

Income Tax Returns filed

and challans for Tax

Deposited
130. Under “PNB Saarthi”- Two Wheeler Loan Scheme, prepayment charges @2% on the outstanding
pre-paid are to be levied except loans sanctioned to individual borrowers on floating rates.
However, no such charges to be recovered in which of the following cases: Circular RAD 49/2021
dated 27.04.2021
A Where the loans are B Where the borrower shift C If closure of loan is on the
prepaid by the borrowers to other bank within 30 instance of the Bank on
from their own sources. days from the date of account of size of
issuance of circular for irregularity, possibility of
upward revision in the rate default in future or any
of interest to be charged in other technical or other
his account or change in specific reasons, pre-
other terms of sanction.
payment penalty would
not be applicable in such
accounts.
D All the above E None of the above Answer: D
131. Minimum eligible loan amount under PNB AABHAR RIN (Personal Loan Scheme for Pensioners)
shall be Rs.______. Circular RAD 48/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A Rs.10, 000/-. B Rs.25, 000/-. C Rs.50, 000/-.
D Rs.1,00, 000/-. E None of the avove Answer: B
132. Maximum loan amount under PNB AABHAR RIN (Personal Loan Scheme for Pensioners) where
age of general pensioners is upto the age of 70 Years, shall be ______ times of net monthly
pension or Max. Rs.______, whichever is lower. Circular RAD 48/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 12 times ; Rs.7.50 lac B 18 times ; Rs.7.50 lac C 18 times ; Rs.10.00 lac
D 20 times ; Rs.10.00 lac E None of the avove Answer: C
age of Defence Pensioners is upto the age of 70 Years, shall be ______ times of net monthly
pension or Max. Rs.______, whichever is lower. Circular RAD 48/2021 dated 27.04.2021
D 20 times ; Rs.10.00 lac E None of the avove Answer: D
age of general pensioners is above 70 years and upto 75 years, shall be ______ times of net
monthly pension or Max. Rs.________, whichever is lower. Circular RAD 48/2021 dated 27.04.2021
D 20 times ; Rs.7.50 lac E None of the avove Answer: B
age of Defence Pensioners is above 70 years and upto 75 years, shall be ______ times of net
monthly pension or Max. Rs.________, whichever is lower. Circular RAD 48/2021 dated 27.04.2021
D 20 times ; Rs.7.50 lac E None of the avove Answer: D
age of borrower is above 75 years shall be ____ times of net monthly pension OR Max.
Rs.________, whichever is lower. Circular RAD 48/2021 dated 27.04.2021
D 20 times ; Rs.7.50 lac E None of the avove Answer: A
137. Under PNB AABHAR RIN (Personal Loan Scheme for Pensioners), Term Loan/ Demand Loan
along with interest will be repaid in maximum ______ equal monthly installment or up to the age
of ______ years whichever is earlier commencing one month after disbursal of the loan
(Irrespective of age of borrower). Circular RAD 48/2021 dated 27.04.2021
D 60 ; 78 years E None of the avove Answer: D
15
138. Under Personal Loan Scheme for Pensioners- PNB Aabhar Rin, OD limit along with interest is to
be adjusted in maximum ______ months or up to the age of ______ years whichever is earlier on
Page
monthly reducing DP basis (equal to EMI) commencing one month after disbursal of loan

(Irrespective of age of borrower). Circular RAD 48/2021 dated 27.04.2021

D 60 ; 78 years E None of the avove Answer: D
139. Under PNB AABHAR RIN (Personal Loan Scheme for Pensioners), all deductions including the
proposed Pension Loan installment should not exceed ______% of Gross Monthly Pension
(GMP) upto Rs.30000/-. Circular RAD 48/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 30% B 40% C 50%
D 60% E None of the avove Answer: B
140. Under PNB AABHAR RIN (Personal Loan Scheme for Pensioners), all deductions including the
proposed Pension Loan installment should not exceed ______% of Gross Monthly Pension
(GMP) above Rs.30000/-. Circular RAD 48/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 30% B 40% C 50%
141. Under PNB SAHYOG - Personal Loan Scheme for Public, minimum ______years of service,
including service with the previous employer(s) is required under Check-off facility. Circular RAD
47/2021 dated 27.04.2021
142. LIC agents aged below ______ years with more than ______ years of agency, having regular and
stable income and maintaining SF a/c with our branch are eligible under PNB SAHYOG -
Personal Loan Scheme for Public/ LIC Agents. Circular RAD 47/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 50 years ; three years B 60 years ; three years C 50 years ; five years
D 60 years ; five years E None of the avove Answer: D
143. Amount of loan under PNB SAHYOG -Personal Loan Scheme for Public, will be up to ______
times of Gross Monthly Salary with a maximum of Rs.______. Circular RAD 47/2021 dated
27.04.2021
A 10 times ; Rs.5.00 B 10 times ; Rs.10.00 C 15 times ; Rs.5.00
Lakh Lakh Lakh
D 24 times ; Rs.20.00 E None of the avove Answer: D
Lakh
144. Margin under PNB SAHYOG -Personal Loan Scheme for Public will be________% Circular RAD
47/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A Nil B 5% C 10%
145. The entire term loan (principal & interest) under PNB SAHYOG - Personal Loan Scheme for
Public shall be repaid within remaining period of service or in maximum _____ equated monthly
installments (EMIs) whichever is earlier. Circular RAD 47/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 48 B 72 C 72
D 84 E None of the avove Answer: B
146. The Overdraft Limit under PNB SAHYOG -Personal Loan Scheme for Public shall be adjusted
within remaining period of service or in maximum period of ______ months by reducing Drawing
Power (DP) equivalent to EMI amount at the beginning of every month. Circular RAD 47/2021
dated 27.04.2021
A 48 B 72 C 72
147. Personal loans allowed to Defence Personnel including officials of Military Station Headquarters,
Border Security Force, Central Reserve Police Force, Central Industrial Security Force, Indo
Tibet Border Police etc. shall be repayable in maximum ______ equated monthly installments or
remaining period of stay at the particular posting, whichever is lower. Circular RAD 47/2021 dated
27.04.2021
A 48 B 60 C 72
16
148. Personal loan to LIC Agent under PNB SAHYOG shall be repayable inmaximum ______ EMIs or
upto ______ years of age of LIC agent, whichever is earlier. Circular RAD 47/2021 dated 27.04.2021
Page

D 72 ; 65 years E None of the avove Answer: C

149. All deductions including the proposed Personal Loan installment under PNB SAHYOG - Personal
Loan Scheme for Public should not exceed _______% of GMS/I up to Rs.30000 and ______% of
GMS/I above Rs.30000. Circular RAD 47/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 30% ; 40% B 40% ; 50% C 50% ; 60%
150. Minimum take home after all deductions of proposed Personal Loan under PNB SAHYOG should
be Rs. ______ in Metro/ Urban centre & Rs. ______ in Semi Urban/ Rural centre. Circular RAD
47/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A Rs. 10000.00 ; Rs. B Rs. 12000.00 ; Rs. C Rs. 15000.00 ; Rs.
8000.00 10000.00 10000.00
D Rs. 25000.00 ; Rs. E None of the avove Answer: C
15000.00
151. In case of LIC Agents, Suitable third party guarantee acceptable to the Bank and assignment of
LIC policy of self, with sum assured equivalent to loan amount or Tangible Collateral Security of
the value of _____% of loan amount should be required under PNB SAHYOG - Personal Loan
Scheme for Public. Circular RAD 47/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 100% B 110% C 125%
152. Professionally qualified practicing/serving Doctors viz., MBBS, BDS & above having Net Annual
Income/Salary of Rs.______ and above are eligible under PNB- Doctor’s Delight- Personal Loan
Scheme for Doctors and for this facility, Doctors should be taxpayers for the last _____ years.
A Rs.2.00 lac ; two years B Rs.2.00 lac ; three years C Rs.5.00 lac ; two years
D Rs.5.00 lac ; three years E None of the avove Answer: C
153. Minimum amount of loan under PNB- Doctor’s Delight will be Rs. _____ and maximum amount of
loan will be Rs. _____ or 24 times monthly net salary/income whichever is lower depending upon
the repaying capacity subject to having Net Annual Income/Salary of Rs.5.00 lakh and above.
A Rs. 1,00,000/-; Rs. B Rs. 1,00,000/-; Rs. C Rs. 2,00,000/-; Rs.
10,00,000 15,00,000 10,00,000
D Rs. 2,00,000/-; Rs. E None of the avove Answer: D
20,00,000
154. The entire loan (principal & interest) under PNB- Doctor’s Delight shall be repaid/adjusted within
remaining period of service or in maximum ______equated monthly installments (EMIs). Circular
RAD 47/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 48 B 60 C 72
155. The overdraft Limit under PNB- Doctor’s Delight shall be adjusted within a maximum period of
_______ months by reducing Drawing Power (DP) equivalent to EMI amount at the beginning of
every month. Circular RAD 47/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 60 Months B 72 Months C 84 Months
D 120 Months E None of the avove Answer: C
156. Repayment of the loan along with interest under PNB- Doctor’s Delight should not extend
beyond the age of _____ years of borrower. AGM RAM/iRAM & ZOCAC-I & above may relax
repayment period upto the age of _____ years. Circular RAD 47/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 60 years ; 65 years B 60 years ; 70 years C 65 years ; 70 years
D 65 years ; 75 years E None of the avove Answer: C
157. Under the Scheme PNB myProperty Loan, Minimum Net monthly Salary for salaried class shall
be Rs.______ and above Circular RAD 46/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A Rs.20,000/- B Rs.25,000/- C Rs.30,000/-
17
158. Under the Scheme PNB myProperty Loan, Minimum Net annual income for other than salaried
class shall be Rs.______. Circular RAD 46/2021 dated 27.04.2021
Page
A Rs.2,40,000/- B Rs.3,00,000/- C Rs.3,60,000/-

D Rs.6,00,000/- E None of the avove Answer: B

159. Maximum Tenor of Term Loan under PNB myProperty Loan will be ______ years. Circular RAD
46/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 7 Years B 10 Years C 12 Years
D 15 Years E None of the avove Answer: B
160. Tenor of Overdraft on monthly reducing Drawing Power (DP) basis will be ______ years subject
to annual review. Circular RAD 46/2021 dated 27.04.2021
161. Under the PNB myProperty Loan, minimum and maximum loan amount for Personal needs shall
be _________ Circular RAD 46/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A Min: Rs. 2.00 lakh, Max: B Min: Rs. 2.00 lakh, Max: C Min: Rs. 2.00 lakh, Max:
Rs Rs. 100.00 lakh. Rs Rs. 200.00 lakh. Rs Rs. 300.00 lakh.
D Min: Rs. 2.00 lakh, Max: E None of the avove Answer: D
Rs Rs. 500.00 lakh.
162. Under the PNB myProperty Loan, the assessment of limit for salaried class will be maximum
______% of the realizable value of the property or ______ times of Gross monthly salary on the
basis of last/latest salary certificate whichever is lower. Circular RAD 46/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 60% ; 30 B 60% ; 36 C 65% ; 30
D 65% ; 36 E None of the avove Answer: D
163. Under the PNB myProperty Loan, the assessment of limit for non salaried class will be maximum
______% of the realizable value of the property or ______ times the average gross monthly
income of last three years as reported in the last three ITRs whichever is lower. Circular RAD
46/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 60% ; 30 B 60% ; 36 C 65% ; 30
D 65% ; 36 E None of the avove Answer: D
164. Under the Scheme PNB myProperty Loan, Max. Permissible Deduction of GMS/I shall be_____%
of GMS/I in case where Gross monthly total salary/income is up to Rs. 1.00 lakh and ______% of
GMS/I in case where Gross monthly total salary/income is above Rs. 1.00 lakh . Circular RAD
46/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 50% ; 60% B 50% ; 70% C 60% ; 70%
165. Repaying capacity/ assessment of loan under the Scheme PNB myProperty Loan, is to be
calculated on the basis of latest salary slips for salaried borrower(s) and on the basis of the
average of last ______ year ITR for other than salaried borrower(s). Circular RAD 46/2021 dated
27.04.2021
A two year B three year C four year
D five year E None of the avove Answer: B
166. Under the Scheme PNB myProperty Loan, Term Loan amount together with interest will be
repaid in maximum ______ Equated Monthly Installments (EM) or up to the age of _____ years,
whichever is earlier. AGM incumbent RAM/iRAM and ZOCAC –I and above are empowered to
relax the age criteria by ______ years on merits of each case. Circular RAD 46/2021 dated
27.04.2021
A 120 ; 65 years ; 5 B 120 ; 60 years ; 5 C 180 ; 65 years ; 5
years years years
D 180 ; 60 years ; 5 E None of the avove Answer: A
years
167. Overdraft on reducing DP basis under the Scheme PNB myProperty Loan will be liquidated in
______years or up to the age of 65 years, whichever is earlier. Circular RAD 46/2021 dated
27.04.2021
18
168. Bank, at the request of the borrower, may consider restoration of the original limit/ enhancement
of the limit after the lapse of ______ months under the Scheme PNB myProperty Loan, where the
Page
conduct of the account is satisfactory. Circular RAD 46/2021 dated 27.04.2021


D 36 months E None of the avove Answer: D
169. Under the Scheme PNB myProperty Loan, _____% Concession in Rate of interest will be given
where available realizable value of IP is above 200% & upto 250% of loan amount Circular RAD
46/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 0.25%. B 0.5%. C 0.75%.
D 1.00%. E None of the avove Answer: A
where available realizable value of IP is above 250% & upto 300% of loan amount. Circular RAD
46/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 0.25%. B 0.5%. C 0.75%.
D 1.00%. E None of the avove Answer: B
where available realizable value of IP is above 300% of loan amount. Circular RAD 46/2021 dated
27.04.2021
A 0.25%. B 0.5%. C 0.75%.
D 1.00%. E None of the avove Answer: C
172. Loans/advances under the Scheme PNB myProperty Loan shall be sanctioned against the
Equitable/ Registered Mortgage of the non-encumbered built up and self-occupied residential
House/Flat/ commercial/ industrial property having minimum residual life of ______ years.
173. Which of the following statement/s is/are incorrect in respect of assessment of limit under the
PNB myProperty Loan? Circular RAD 46/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A Income of spouse, B Projected/ future income C Income of maximum two
parents, son(s)/ will not be considered for co-borrower can be
daughter(s) can be determining loan eligibility. added.
considered for arriving at
loan amount eligibility.
D In case of co-owners of E None of the above Answer: E
the property, income of all
the co-owners can be
added.
174. To purchase new Car/Van/Jeep/Multi Utility Vehicle (MUV) or Sports Utility Vehicles (SUV) or Old
car/van/jeep/MUV/SUV, which are not older than _______ years, minimum net monthly salary /
pension/ income for individuals/ proprietorship firms under PNB Car Loan should be Rs _______
A three years ; Rs 20000/- B three years ; Rs 25000/- C five years ; Rs 20000/-.
. .
D five years ; Rs 25000/-. E None of the avove Answer: B
175. For reimbursement of cost of new cars under PNB Car Loan, Invoice date of the vehicle should
not more than ______months old. Circular RAD 45/2021 dated 27.04.2021
176. No minimum monthly income is required under PNB Car Loan in cases where borrower agrees
to give ______% of liquid security in shape of Term Deposit. Circular RAD 45/2021 dated
27.04.2021
A 110% B 120% C 125%
177. Loan amount under PNB Car Loan for individuals/Proprietorship concerns will be_______ times
of Gross Monthly Salary/ Pension/ Income with a ceiling of Rs ______. Circular RAD 45/2021 dated
27.04.2021
19

D 25 times ; Rs 100 lakh E None of the avove Answer: D
Page
178. Loan amount under PNB Car Loan for for Business Concerns (Corporate or Non-Corporate) will

be________ Circular RAD 45/2021 dated 27.04.2021

A Rs 50 lakh B Rs 100 lakh C Rs 500 lakh
D No ceiling E None of the avove Answer: D
179. Margin under PNB Car Loan for old vehicle will be _____% of the value of the vehicle. Circular
RAD 45/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 10%. B 15%. C 20%.
D 25%. E None of the avove Answer: D
180. Margin under PNB Car Loan in cse reimbursement of cost of new cars will be _____% of on-road
price Circular RAD 45/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 10%. B 15%. C 20%.
181. Valuation of old vehicles to be done at current invoice price of the new vehicle less depreciation
@ _____% p.a. on straight line method. Proportionate depreciation for any part of the year to be
arrived at/ calculated on quarterly basis Circular RAD 45/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 10%. B 15%. C 20%.
182. Maximum Repayment period under PNB Car Loan for new vehicle (car/Van/Jeep/MUV/SUV) will
be _______ equated monthly installments comprising of principal and interest commencing from
the succeeding month Circular RAD 45/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 60 B 72 C 84
183. The loan amount together with interest is to be repaid maximum in _____ equated monthly
installments under PNB Car Loan for old vehicle (car/Van/Jeep/MUV/SUV ). Circular RAD 45/2021
dated 27.04.2021
A 60 B 72 C 84
D 120 E None of the avove Answer: A
184. Under PNB Car Loan, ZOCAC-I & above are empowered to relax repayment period by
______months for new cars. Circular RAD 45/2021 dated 27.04.2021
185. Under PNB Car Loan, Repayment will be ensured within ______ years of age for salaried persons
with pension and ______ years of age for others. ZOCAC-I & above may further relax the above
criteria by ______ years on case to case basis. Circular RAD 45/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 65 years ; 60 years ; B 70 years ; 60 years ; C 70 years ; 65 years ;
5 years 5 years 5 years
D 75years ; 65 years ; 5 E None of the avove Answer: C
years
186. Max. Permissible Deduction under PNB Car Loan should not exceed ______% of Gross Monthly
Salary/Income (GMS/I) of the borrower(s) up to Rs.50000. Circular RAD 45/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 40% B 50% C 60%
187. Max. Permissible Deduction under PNB Car Loan should not exceed ______% of Gross Monthly
Salary/Income (GMS/I) of the borrower(s) above Rs.50000 . Circular RAD 45/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 40% B 50% C 60%
188. Under PNB Car Loan, Guarantee will be required if Gross Monthly salary is less than ______.
A Rs.20,000/ p.m B Rs.25,000/ p.m C Rs.30,000/ p.m
D Rs.50,000/ p.m E None of the avove Answer: D
189. Under PNB Car Loan, Branch (Within vested power) may reimburse the cost of new cars having
invoice date up to ______. Circular RAD 45/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 1 Month B 2 Months C 3 Months
20
D 6 Months E None of the avove Answer: A

190. Under PNB Car Loan, AGM RAM/iRAM/ ZOCAC-I & above (Within vested power) may reimburse
Page
the cost of new cars having invoice date up to ______. Circular RAD 45/2021 dated 27.04.2021

A 1 Month B 2 Months C 3 Months

191. Under tie-up arrangement with PSUs, corporates, institutions or in case of bulk business, no
guarantee under PNB Car Loan will be required if take home pay is more than Rs. ______ or if
there is no default in repayment of EMI in home/personal loan for the past three months, if any,
availed from PNB. Circular RAD 45/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A Rs.20,000/ p.m B Rs.25,000/ p.m C Rs.30,000/ p.m
D Rs.50,000/ p.m E None of the avove Answer: C
192. All existing home loan borrowers where the loan accounts has run for minimum ______ years
(excluding moratorium period) without a single default in EMI are eligible for Purchase of car/
two wheeler for personal use under Insta Vehicle Loan Scheme for existing Home Loan
Borrowers. Circular RAD 45/2021 dated 27.04.2021
193. Loan amount under Insta Vehicle Loan Scheme for existing Home Loan Borrowers will be
assessed @ ______% of on road price of Car/ two wheeler with maximum of Rs. ______. Circular
RAD 45/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 80% ; Rs. 5 lacs B 90% ; Rs. 5 lacs C 80% ; Rs. 10 lacs
D 90% ; Rs. 10 lacs E None of the avove Answer: D
194. Maximum Repayment period under Insta Vehicle Loan Scheme for existing Home Loan
Borrowers will be ______ for Four Wheelers and ______ for Two Wheelers. Circular RAD 45/2021
dated 27.04.2021
A 90 months ; 84 months B 90 months ; 80 months C 100 months ; 84
months
195. PNB Combo Loan Scheme aims to provide ______ at concessional Rate of Interest and attractive
/lucrative Terms and conditions to ______ Borrowers (Existing and New) Circular RAD 45/2021
dated 27.04.2021
A Car Loan ; Personal B Car Loan ; Two whiler C Car Loan ; Pension
Loan Loan Loan
D Car Loan ; Housing E None of the avove Answer: D
Loan
196. Housing Loan Borrowers with Sanction Limit of Rs. ______and above are eligible for Purchase of
only brand new 4 wheelers on or after creation of security on House Property under PNB Combo
Loan Scheme for existing Home Loan Borrowers. Circular RAD 45/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A Rs. 5 Lacs B Rs. 10 Lacs C Rs. 15 Lacs
D Rs. 25 Lacs E None of the avove Answer: C
197. Minimum Gross Income for Salaried Customers under PNB Combo Loan Scheme should be Rs.
______ per month. Circular RAD 45/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A Rs. 25,000/- B Rs. 30,000/- C Rs. 40,000/-
D Rs. 50,000/- E None of the avove Answer: D
198. Minimum Annual Post-Tax Income for Professional and Self Employed / Businessman under
PNB Combo Loan Scheme should be Rs. ______as per average of last 3 years ITR. Circular RAD
45/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A Rs.3.00 lac B Rs.4.00 lac C Rs.5.00 lac
D Rs.6.00 lac E None of the avove Answer: D
199. The total deduction from income including EMI of existing Housing Loan and other Loan(s) and
the proposed EMI of Car Loan under PNB Combo Loan Scheme should not be more than
______% of Gross income. Circular RAD 45/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 40% B 50% C 60%
200. Concession of ______% in Interest Rate from Card Rate in Car Loan Product will be available
21
under PNB Combo Loan Scheme. Circular RAD 45/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 0.10% B 0.25% C 0.50%
Page

201. Eligible Housing Loan Borrowers under PNB Combo Loan Scheme will be entitled for Loan to the
extent of ______% of on road price of the Vehicle. Circular RAD 45/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 80% B 85% C 90%
202. Under PNB Combo Loan Scheme, The Repayment Period of the Car Loan should be less than or
equal to left over repayment period of Housing Loan subject to maximum Repayment Period of
______. Circular RAD 45/2021 dated 27.04.2021
203. Regarding treatment of EMI in Car Loan accounts in the wake of upward revision in rates of
interest, borrower always has which one of the following options to exercise for repayment of
loan? Circular RAD 45/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A To pay increased amount B To continue to pay the C To prolong the repayment
of EMI existing amounts of EMI period
with condition that the
balance outstanding in the
account would be paid in
one go with last EMI of the
originally applicable
repayment tenor.
204. Which of the following statement/s is/are incorrect in respect of Terms and Conditions under
PNB Combo Loan Scheme? Circular RAD 45/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A For existing B In case of C Car Loan under this
Housing Loan takeover of scheme should not be
Borrowers, the Housing Loan sanctioned before
Account under this creation of mortgage for
should be standard with scheme, the Car Housing
satisfactory Track Record. Loan has to be Loan
fully liquidated
before takeover.
D All the above E None of the above Answer: E
205. Maximum amount of loan under PNB Home Loan for purchase of Land/ Plot for House Building
will be Rs. ______. However, AGM RAM/iRAM & ZOCAC-I and above may consider loan
maximum of Rs._____ for Metro/State Capitals. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A Rs.25 lac ; Rs.500 lac B Rs.50 lac ; Rs.50 lac C Rs.100 lac ; Rs.100
lac
D Rs.50 lac ; Rs.100 lac E None of the avove Answer: D
206. ZOCAC-II and above may sanction loan for purchase of land/ plot for house building depending
upon merits/ genuineness of each case / repaying capacity and after fully satisfying themselves
about the realistic valuation of land/plot Maximum upto Rs._____ at all centers & Maximum upto
Rs.______ at state capitals and metro centers, only in cases where land/ plots are allotted by
State Development authorities/ State Housing Boards.” Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A Rs.300 lac ; Rs.500 B Rs.100 lac ; Rs.500 C Rs.100 lac ; Rs.300
lac lac lac
D Rs.200 lac ; Rs.300 E None of the avove Answer: A
lac
207. As per PNB Home Loan, The loan amount for purchase of Land/Plot under any circumstance
should not be more than _______% of the eligible loan amount as per the repayment capacity.
A 40% B 50% C 60%
208. Maximum extent of loan for repairs / renovation / alterations under PNB Home Loan will be Rs.
22

A Rs.10 lac. B Rs.20 lac. C Rs.25 lac.
Page
D Rs.50 lac. E None of the avove Answer: C

209. Under PNB Home Loan, Cost of furnishing may be included in the project cost with maximum
upto _____% of eligible Housing loan or Rs._____ whichever is lower, within the prescribed Loan
to Value (LTV) ratio. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 10% ; Rs.25.00 lac B 20% ; Rs.25.00 lac C 10% ; Rs.30.00 lac
D 15% ; Rs.50.00 lac E None of the avove Answer: A
210. Under PNB Home Loan, AGM RAM/iRAM, ZOCAC-I and above are empowered to consider
requests only from confirmed employees of Central / State Govts. / Public Sector Undertakings
for an amount of loan maximum upto Rs. _____ and extend credit to such employees, who might
have raised funds for construction / acquisition of accommodation from other sources and need
supplementary finance after obtaining pari passu or second charge over the property mortgaged
in favour of other Lender. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A Rs.10 lac. B Rs.20 lac. C Rs.25 lac.
D Rs.50 lac. E None of the avove Answer: B
211. Under PNB Home Loan where Gross Annual Salary/Income (GAS/I) of the borrower(s) is upto
Rs.5.00 lakh, Maximum Permissible Deduction of GAS/I will be ______ . Circular RAD 44/2021
dated 27.04.2021
A 40% B 50% C 60%
212. Under PNB Home Loan where Gross Annual Salary/Income (GAS/I) of the borrower(s) is above
Rs.5.00 lakhs upto Rs.10.00 lakhs, Maximum Permissible Deduction of GAS/I will be ______ .
A 40% B 50% C 60%
213. Under PNB Home Loan where Gross Annual Salary/Income (GAS/I) of the borrower(s) is above
Rs.10.00 lakhs, Maximum Permissible Deduction of GAS/I will be ______ . Circular RAD 44/2021
dated 27.04.2021
A 40% B 50% C 60%
214. Under PNB Home Loan, AGM RAM/iRAM, ZOCAC-I & above, shall permit higher %age deduction
of GAS/I subject to Maximum ______% over & above the prescribed ceiling under each bracket
of GAS/I on individual merits of the case Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 10% B 15% C 20%
215. Under PNB Home Loan, for Salaried class, latest salary slip, Form16/ITR for the last _____ years
is required. Where ITRs/Form 16 is not available for required period on account of lesser service
period, the sanctioning authority may consider sanction of loan provided last ______ months
salary is verified either from salary slips/form 16 or Statement of Account. Circular RAD 44/2021
dated 27.04.2021
A 2 years ; 6 months B 2 years ; 12 months C 3 years ; 6 months
D 3 years ; 12 months E None of the avove Answer: B
216. Under PNB Home Loan, for other than Salaried class, ITRs and Audited Balance Sheets for the
last ______ years of business/activity shall be taken and perused to ascertain continuity of
income. However, deviation regarding availability of ITRs/ABSs may be permitted by AGM
RAM/iRAM, ZOCAC-I & above subject to taking of minimum 1 year latest ITRs/ABSs. Circular RAD
44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
D No such criteria E None of the avove Answer: A
217. Margin for all purposes except to purchase of Land/Plot for home Loan above Rs. 30 lac and
upto Rs.75 lac under PNB Home Loan will be ______% and for home Loan above Rs.75 lac
margin will be ______%. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 20% ; 25% B 10% ; 25% C 10% ; 20%
23
218. Under PNB Home Loan, Margin for Purchase of Land/Plot for House Building will be __________
Page
A 10% B 15% C 20%


219. With a view to encourage availability of affordable housing to economically weaker sections
(EWS) and low income groups (LIG) borrowers, cost of stamp duty, registration and other
documentation charges may be added to the cost of the house/dwelling unit for the purpose of
calculating LTV ratio in cases where the cost of the house/dwelling unit does not exceed
Rs.________ lac Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
D Rs.25 lac E None of the avove Answer: A
220. Loan to Value Ratio (LTV) under PNB Home Loan should not exceed ______% for loan up to Rs.
30 lac; 80% for loans above Rs. 30 lac upto Rs.75 lac and ______% for loans above Rs.75 lac.
A 80% ; 80% ; 75% B 85% ; 85% ; 75% C 90% ; 80% ; 70%
D 85% ; 80% ; 75% E None of the avove Answer: D
221. For Home loan amount of Rs. _______ and above, the higher CICs Score of the two CICs scores
of the borrower/s will be considered for getting the interest benefit under Floating rate of interest
option. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A Rs. 2.00 lacs B Rs. 5.00 lacs C Rs. 10.00 lacs
D Rs. 20.00 lacs E None of the avove Answer: C
222. Under PNB Home Loan, In case the plot/land was sanctioned for 3rd or subsequent house/ flats
is sold or account has been closed without construction both within _____ years from date of
first disbursement, rate of interest applicable to Commercial Real Estate with corresponding
PNB Score/ Risk rating score will be charged from the date of first disbursement of loan. Circular
RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
223. Where the mortgage by deposit of Title Deeds is not possible to secure housing loan, because
the property being an Ancestral Property (without Title Deeds) or Lal Dora Land, The sanctioning
authority may accept, at its discretion, equitable / registered mortgage of some other property /
pledge of Government security, NSCs, KVPs, IVPs / PSU Bonds (where interest is being serviced
regularly) / bank's FDR / LIC Policies (surrender value) etc. The value of such security so
obtained should be equal to ______% of the loan amount. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 100.00% B 125.00% C 150.00%
224. There is delay in execution / unwillingness/ to execute a stamped Tripartite Agreement by
Housing Board/Development Authority/Co-operative Society/ Builder;, The sanctioning authority
may accept, at its discretion, equitable / registered mortgage of some other property / pledge of
Government security, NSCs, KVPs, IVPs / PSU Bonds (where interest is being serviced regularly)
/ bank's FDR / LIC Policies (surrender value) etc. The value of such security so obtained should
be equal to ______% of the loan amount. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 100.00% B 125.00% C 150.00%
225. Extension of charge on property mortgaged in home loan for securing other credit facility (ies)
will be done after maintaining ______ of LTV of outstanding Housing Loan. Circular RAD 44/2021
dated 27.04.2021
A 123.00% B 133.00% C 143.00%
D 113.00% E None of the avove Answer: C
226. For Construction/ Additions of House/ Flat/Purchase of ready built house/ flat under PNB Home
Loan, Loan along-with interest will be re-paid in equated monthly installments within a period of
_____ years inclusive of moratorium period, if any. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
227. For carrying out repairs/ renovation / alterations to the house/flat under PNB Home Loan, Loan
24
along-with interest will be re-paid in equated monthly installments within a period of _____ years
inclusive of moratorium period, if any. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
Page


228. Moratorium Period for Construction/ Additions of House/ Flat under PNB Home Loan will be till
completion of construction (including additions) or _____ months, from the date of disbursement
of first installment of the loan, whichever is earlier. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
229. Moratorium Period for carrying out repairs/ renovation / alterations to the house/flat under PNB
Home Loan will be till completion of repairs/ renovation / alterations or ______ months, from the
date of disbursement of first installment of the loan, whichever is earlier Circular RAD 44/2021
dated 27.04.2021
230. For purchase of ready built House/ flat OR land/plot under PNB Home Loan, the repayment will
be start after the date of possession or _____-months from the date of advance, whichever is
earlier. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
231. Moratorium Period for under-construction flats/houses built by approved private builders under
PNB Home Loan, will be till possession is handed over to the purchaser (borrower) or maximum
______ months or as declared in RERA by the Builder/Developer whichever is lower from the
date of disbursement of first installment of the loan whichever is earlier, subject to interest being
collected on monthly basis (as and when debited) during the moratorium period. Circular RAD
44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
232. Repayment of the Home loan along with interest should not extend beyond the age of _____
years of borrower. In case loan is allowed to joint owners, at least one of the joint owners should
be able to repay the loan along with interest maximum upto the age of _____ years. AGM
RAM/iRAM/ZOCAC-I & above may relax repayment period upto the age of ______ years. Circular
RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
D 70 years ; 70 years ; E None of the avove Answer: D
75 years
233. At location where NACH/RECS (Debit) is available, minimum ______ Advance Cheques (CTS-
2010) signed by borrower towards repayment of monthly installments along with Letter of
Deposit will be obtained under PNB Home Loan. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 12 B 15 C 20
234. No Prepayment charges under PNB Home Loan will to be levied in the cases where the borrower
shifts to other bank within ______ days from the date of issuance of circular for upward revision
in the rate of interest to be charged in his account or change in other terms of sanction. Circular
RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
235. In the event of rejection of In-Principle Sanction of Housing Loan proposal by Bank, irrespective
of the reasons, full Processing Fee will be refunded to the customer if claimed within _____ days
of getting the In-principle Sanction. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
D 60 days E None of the avove Answer: C
236. An Interest Certificate may be issued to the borrower(s), who have availed housing loan from the
bank for availing benefits under the provisions of income tax act, for the complete financial year
25
on actual basis. The Interest Certificate is generated in MIS Server under report ______ for all
Housing Loan accounts except the accounts (a) where repayment has not started; and (b) re-
Page
phasement has been done consequent upon expiry of moratorium period . Circular RAD 44/2021

dated 27.04.2021
A PNBRPT 3/56c B PNBRPT 3/55c C PNBRPT 3/54c
D PNBRPT 3/53c E None of the avove Answer: A
237. For Housing Loan accounts (a) where repayment has not started; and (b) rephasement has been
done consequent upon expiry of moratorium period, the Interest Certificate is generated in MIS
Server under ______. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A PNBRPT 3/56c B PNBRPT 3/55c C PNBRPT 3/54c
D PNBRPT 3/53c E None of the avove Answer: A
238. The Interest Certificate will be issued to all housing loan account holders without any specific
request from them and dispatched at the registered address of the Housing Loan Borrowers
within ______ from the close of respective Financial Year, i.e., by 30th April every year. Circular
RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
239. System generated Provisional Interest Certificate for the complete financial year covering the
period from 1st April to 31st March every year be provided to all Housing Loan borrowers, which
is available in MIS under report ______ by providing 16 digit account number of Housing Loan
A/c. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A PNBRPT 3/56a B PNBRPT 3/56b C PNBRPT 3/56c
D PNBRPT 3/56d E None of the avove Answer: A
240. The annual statement of Home loan account containing all the relevant details can be generated
in MIS server under ______. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A PNBRPT 3/53 B PNBRPT 3/54 C PNBRPT 3/55
D PNBRPT 3/56 E None of the avove Answer: D
241. Where housing loan is sanctioned for purchase of plot/land & in case construction of the house
is not completed within ______ years from date of disbursement of the loan or in case the
plot/land is sold, penal interest at _____% over & above the prescribed rate of interest will be
charged from the date of disbursement of the loan. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 1 year ; 1% B 2 years ; 2% C 3 years ; 3%
D 3 years ; 2% E None of the avove Answer: D
242. For Prospective Borrowers dealing with other Banks/FIs, the track record of at least ______ of
prospective borrower/ co-borrower, dealing with other banks/ FIs and willing to avail loan from
our Bank must be thoroughly verified before making the advance under PNB Home Loan. Circular
RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A six months B one year C two years
D three years E None of the avove Answer: B
243. The property must be re-visited by a bank official different from the one who made pre-sanction
visit within a maximum of ______ days after disbursement of loan under PNB Home Loan.
244. Repayment period of restructured housing loan may be fixed depending upon the repaying
capacity of the borrower but should not exceed ______ years or till the borrower attains the age
of _____ years, whichever is earlier. However, AGM-RAM/iRAM and above/ ZOCAC –I & above
may relax the period till the borrower attains the age of _____ years. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated
27.04.2021
A 15 years ; 70 years ; 75 B 30 years ; 65 years ; 75 C 30 years ; 65 years ; 70
years years years
D 30 years ; 70 years ; 75 E None of the avove Answer: D
years
245. Under PNB GEN-NEXT Housing Finance Scheme, the borrower will be offered _____ times of the
loan amount calculated as per the regular housing loan eligibility method, subject to
26
maintenance of prescribed LTV ratio. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021

A 1.25 times B 1.50 times C 1.75 times
Page
D 2 times E None of the avove Answer: A

246. Under PNB GEN-NEXT Housing Finance Scheme, Age of borrower(s) should be upto _______
years Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
247. Under PNB GEN-NEXT Housing Finance Scheme, In case of multiple borrowers whose income
has been taken for arriving at the loan eligibility and repaying capacity, one borrower must be at-
least upto the age of ______ years and others may be maximum upto the age of ______ years.
248. All salaried employees with minimum _____ years experience having minimum net monthly
salary of Rs. _____ are eligible under PNB GEN-NEXT Housing Finance Scheme . Circular RAD
44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 2 years ; Rs.25000/ B 2 years ; Rs.35000/ C 3 years ; Rs.25000/
D 3 years ; Rs.35000/ E None of the avove Answer: D
249. Minimum and maximum eligible Loan Amount under PNB GEN-NEXT Housing Finance scheme
will be _________ Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A Min - Rs.20 lac, Max - Rs. B Min - Rs.30 lac, Max - Rs. C Min - Rs.20 lac, Max - Rs.
50 lac 50 lac 100 lac
D Min - Rs.20 lac, Max - E None of the avove Answer: D
Need Based
250. Repayment Period under PNB GEN-NEXT Housing Finance Scheme will be _________ Circular
RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A Flat 30 years. B Flat 25 years. C Flat 20 years.
D Flat 15 years. E None of the avove Answer: A
251. Moratorium period in case of under construction flat of approved private builder, will be upto
_____ months plus remaining period of date of possession subject to a maximum moratorium
period of _______months and in all other cases it will be maximum _______ months under PNB
GEN-NEXT Housing Finance Scheme. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 24 months ; 60 B 36 months ; 48 C 24 months ; 60
months ; 36 months months ; 36 months months ; 24 months
D 36 months ; 60 E None of the avove Answer: D
months ; 36 months
252. Under PNB GEN-NEXT Housing Finance Scheme, during moratorium Period, only interest will to
be serviced, for next 120 months, EMI on sanctioned limit for _____ months will be paid and
thereafter EMI which will fully amortize the remaining outstanding in the housing loan account
within the remaining period, will be paid. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
253. Repayment Period under PNB MAX-SAVER Housing Finance Scheme for repairs/ renovation /
alterations will be ______ years and for other than repairs/ renovation / alterationsit will be
______ years. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 20 years ; 30 years B 25 years ; 30 years C 15 years ; 25years
D 15 years ; 30 years E None of the avove Answer: D
254. Loan under PNB Flexible Housing Loan variant will be allowed to customers who are below the
age of ______ years. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 50 years. B 55 years. C 60 years.
D 65 years. E None of the avove Answer: A
255. Under PNB Flexible Housing Loan, the overdraft limit, including Term Loan limit, will be adjusted
by the age of ______ years. AGM- RAM/iRAM/ ZOZCAC-I & above may relax repayment period
upto the age of ______ years. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 60years ; 65 years B 65 years ; 70 years C 65 years ; 75 years
27

256. Maximum Overdraft drawing limit under PNB Flexible Housing Loan, should not exceed ______%
Page
of the total limit including the increase of 20%. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021

A 40% B 50% C 60%

257. Minimum and maximum loan amount under Overdraft/Term Loan facility to Housing Loan
Borrowers for Personal Needs will be _______. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A Min- Rs.2.00 lakh and B Min- Rs.5.00 lakh and C Min- Rs.2.00 lakh and
Max- Rs.10.00 lac Max- Rs.10.00 lac Max- Rs.25.00 lac
D Min- Rs.5.00 lakh and E None of the avove Answer: C
Max- Rs.25.00 lac
258. Maximum loan amount under Overdraft/Term Loan facility to Housing Loan Borrowers for
Personal Needs will be consider @ ______% of current realizable value of housing property if the
loan amount (existing exposure of Housing loan + proposed OD limit) is upto Rs.75 lac and @
_____ if the loan amount (existing exposure of Housing loan + proposed OD limit) is above
Rs.75 lac. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 90% ; 85% B 90% ; 75% C 80% ; 70%
D 80% ; 75% E None of the avove Answer: D
259. Repayment under Term Loan facility to Housing Loan Borrowers for Personal Needs will be
_______ years or reaming period of HL whichever is lower. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
260. In case the interest on OD is not serviced consecutively for ______ months under the Overdraft
facility/Term Loan to housing loan borrowers for personal needs, Bank may consider recalling
the overdraft including housing loan. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 07 days B 15 days C one month
D two months E None of the avove Answer: D
261. No registration of the Real Estate Project with the Real Estate Regulatory Authority (RERA shall
be required where the area of the land proposed to be developed does not exceed ______ or the
number of apartment proposed to be developed does not exceed ______ apartments and where
it relates to only renovation, repair or redevelopment. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 400 sq. meters ; 8 B 400 sq. meters ; 10 C 500 sq. meters ; 8
apartments apartments apartments
D 500 sq. meters ; 10 E None of the avove Answer: C
apartments
262. As per Sec. 4 of RERA, ______% of the amount realised for the Real Estate Project from the
allottees shall be deposited in a separate account to be maintained in a scheduled bank to cover
the cost of construction and the cost of the land and shall be used for that purpose. The
promoter’s account shall be audited within ______ after the end of every financial year Circular
RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 60% ; three months B 60% ; six months C 70% ; three months
D 70% ; six months E None of the avove Answer: D
263. As per Sec. 5 of RERA, on receipt of application for registration of the real estate project, the
RERA shall grant/ reject registration within a period of ______. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated
27.04.2021
264. Section 13 of Real Estate (Regulation & Development) Act 2016 (RERA) provides that a promoter
shall not accept a sum more than _____% of the cost of the apartment, plot or building as an
advance payment or an application fee from a person without entering into a written agreement
for sale with such person Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 5% B 10% C 15%
265. As per Section _____ of Real Estate (Regulation & Development) Act 2016 (RERA), the promoter
shall not transfer or assign his majority rights and liabilities in respect of a real estate project to
28
a third party without obtaining prior written consent from the 2/3rd allottees and without prior
written approval of the authority. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
Page
A Section 15 B Section 18 C Section 31

D Section 40 E None of the avove Answer: A

266. As per Section _____ of Real Estate (Regulation & Development) Act 2016 (RERA), where the
allottee suffers loss on account of defective title of the land, the promoter shall compensate and
such claim for compensation, shall not be barred by limitation provided under any Law Circular
RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
D Section 40 E None of the avove Answer: B
267. As per Section _____ of Real Estate (Regulation & Development) Act 2016 (RERA), Any
aggrieved person (including association of allottees or any voluntary consumer association)
may file a complaint with the authority/ Adjudicating Authority for any violation or contravention
of the provisions of the Act/ Rules & Regulations. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
D Section 40 E None of the avove Answer: C
268. As per Section _____ of Real Estate (Regulation & Development) Act 2016 (RERA), If a promoter
or an allottee fails to pay any interest / penalty/ compensation imposed upon him by the
Adjudicating Officer or the Regulatory Authority or Appellate Authority, it shall be recoverable
from such person in such manner as may be prescribed as an arrears of land revenue. Circular
RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
D Section 40 E None of the avove Answer: D
269. As per Section 59 of Real Estate (Regulation & Development) Act 2016 (RERA), A promoter who
fails to get his project registered with the RERA within a time prescribed i.e. _____ months from
the commencement of the Act, shall be punishable to a penalty which may extend upto ______%
of the estimated cost of the real estate project as determined by the authority. Circular RAD
44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 2 months ; two years B 3 months ; three years C 4 months ; four years
D 6 months ; five years E None of the avove Answer: B
270. As per Section 59 of Real Estate (Regulation & Development) Act 2016 (RERA), If he does not
comply with the order or continues to violate the provisions of Sec. 3 requiring registration of
the project, he shall be punishable with imprisonment for a term which may extend upto ______
years or with fine which may extend upto a further ______% of the estimated cost of the real
estate project or with both. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A two years ; 10% B three years ; 10% C two years ; 15%
D three years ; 15% E None of the avove Answer: B
271. Restructured housing loans will attract additional risk-weight of _____ percentage points.
A 10 percentage B 15 percentage C 20 percentage
D 25 percentage E None of the avove Answer: D
272. The risk weights for all new housing loans to be sanctioned on or after the date of RBI circular
No. RBI/2020-21/56 DOR.No.BP.BC.24/08.12.015/2020-21 dated 16.10.2020 and upto March 31,
2022 shall be ______% where LTV Ratio is ≤ 80. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 25% B 35% C 45%
273. The risk weights for all new housing loans to be sanctioned on or after the date of RBI circular
No. RBI/2020-21/56 DOR.No.BP.BC.24/08.12.015/2020-21 dated 16.10.2020 and upto March 31,
2022 shall be ______% where LTV Ratio is >80 and ≤ 90. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A 25% B 35% C 45%
274. Our Home loan scheme is not available for which of the following purpose? Circular RAD 44/2021
dated 27.04.2021
A For purchase of under B For carrying out Additions C For meeting cost
construction house/flat to the house/flat. escalation in the cases of
29
from Housing Boards/ under-construction flats to

Development Authorities/ existing Housing Loan
Page
Co-operative Societies/ borrowers.

Private Builders.


275. Which of the following statement/s is/are incorrect in respect of financing under PNB Home Loan
Scheme? Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A Loan amount to be arrived B Cost of car parking to be C Cost of GST wherever
at the cost of unit i.e excluded from project cost applicable is to be
Realizable Value or sale of house/ flat while considered while arriving
consideration value* granting Housing Loan. the cost of project.
whichever is lower
276. Which of the following statement/s is/are incorrect in respect of assessment of income for
financing under PNB Home Loan Scheme? Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A The income of the spouse B The income of the joint C In case of self-employed
and earning children owners of the property individuals the gross
(whether married or may be added for income may be arrived at
unmarried) may be taken determining the repaying by adding amount of
into account for capacity. In all such cases, depreciation to the Net
determining the income for they should be made co- Profit amount and
the purpose of borrowers’ borrower. repaying capacity be
repaying capacity.
assessed
accordingly.
277. In which of the the following cases no Prepayment charges under PNB Home Loan account will
be levied? Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A Where the loans are B Where the borrower shifts C Where closure of loan is
prepaid by the borrowers to other bank within 30 on instance of the Bank
from their own sources. days from the date of on account of size of
issuance of circular for irregularity, possibility of
upward revision in the rate default in future or any
of interest to be charged in other technical or other
his account or change in specific reasons,
other terms of sanction.
prepayment penalty would
not be applicable in such
accounts.
278. Which of the following statement/s is/are incorrect in respect of Construction of building / ready-
built house under PNB Home Loan? Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021
A Banks may grant loans to B Bank may extend finance C Bank may extend finance
individuals for to a person who already to a person who proposes
purchase/construction of owns a house in to buy an old house
dwelling unit per family town/village where he where he is presently
and loans given for repairs resides, for buying/ residing as a tenant.
to the damaged dwelling constructing a second
units of families. house in the same or other
town/ village for the
purpose of self occupation.
D Bank may extend finance E None of the above Answer: E
for purchase of a house by
a borrower who proposes
to let it out on rental basis
on account of his posting
outside the headquarters
or because he has been
provided accommodation
by his employer.
30
279. Banks can issue long-term bonds with a minimum maturity of ______ years to raise resources
for lending to affordable housing subject to the certain conditions. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated
Page
27.04.2021

A three years B five years C seven years

D ten years E None of the avove Answer: C
280. Which of the following customer/s is/are not eligible for the facility under End-to-End Pre-
approved automated personal loan (PNB Sahyog Rin) for existing customers? Circular RAD
43/2021 dated 08.04.2021
A Govt. /PSU employees B Drawing salary through C Cutomer more than 55
account maintained with years
our bank
D Staff Member E None of the above Answer: E
281. Which of the following task to enable the ZO and CO Admins is not performed through PNB
PRIDE- RBD Module (Mobile Application and Web Portal)? Circular RAD 38/2021 dated 26.03.2021
A Manage the Leads B Derive user analytics via C Maintain employee
generated by the Dashboard, audit logs & database and manage
employees reports sub-admins
D Assigned tasks to E None of the above Answer: E
employees
282. e-Fixed Deposit having residual period of upto ______ years is eligible for availing Online
Overdraft facility Circular RAD 35/2021 dated 17.03.2021
283. Which of the following statement/s is/are incorrect in respect of revised guidelines on eligible
Fixed Deposit for availing Online Overdraft facility? Circular RAD 35/2021 dated 17.03.2021
A e-Fixed Deposit having B Branch opened Fixed C Fixed Deposit under Tax
residual period of upto 3 Deposit are not eligible. Saver Scheme & Capital
years are not eligible. Gains Scheme are not
eligible.
D All the above E None of the above Answer: A
284. To promote installation of solar power system, cost of financing solar power for Installation of
rooftop solar system at residential house with capacity of minimum 1.0 kw and maximum 5.0 kw
under Financing of solar power systems under housing loan scheme maximum loan amount will
be Rs.______. Circular RAD 30/2021 dated 15.03.2021
A Rs. 5.00 lakh B Rs. 10.00 lakh C Rs. 15.00 lakh
D Rs. 25.00 lakh E None of the avove Answer: A
285. Margin under Financing of solar power systems under housing loan scheme where mortgage of
house is available with the bank will be ass per housing loan and On standalone basis it will be
A Nil B 10% C 20%
286. Maximum Repayment period under Financing of solar power systems under housing loan
scheme where mortgage of house is available with the bank will be ass per housing loan and On
standalone basis where solar system is installed on standalone basis and applicant is not ready
to mortgage the property will be ______. Circular RAD 30/2021 dated 15.03.2021
287. Loans above Rs 7.50 lakh and up to Rs ______ under PNB HONHAAR will be covered under the
scheme of Govt. of NCT of Delhi. Circular RAD 19/2021 dated 17.02.2021
D Rs 30 lakh E None of the avove Answer: A
288. Under Agri-Clinics and Agri-Business Centers scheme, the revised training cost per trainee shall
be limited to Rs. _____. An additional amount of _____% of approved charges on food,
accommodation,honorarium, training wxpenditure and hand holding charges has been provided
in North-Estern states and hill states (J&K, Uttrakhand and Himachal Pradesh). Circular PSFID/PS
31
74/2021 dated 13.10.2021

A Rs. 25000/- ; 10% B Rs. 30000/- ; 10% C Rs. 35000/- ; 10%
Page
D Rs. 35000/- ; 15% E None of the above Answer: C

289. Every candidate under Agri-Clinics and Agri-Business Centers scheme, who establish his/her
venture and submit proof to that effect is eligible to receive an incentive of Rs. _____. Circular
PSFID/PS 74/2021 dated 13.10.2021
A Rs. 1000/- B Rs. 2000/- C Rs. 3000/-
D Rs. 5000/- E None of the above Answer: A
290. Ceiling of project cost for subsidy is Rs. _____ for an individual project and Rs.100 lakh for a
group project (established by a group comprising at least five trained persons under the Agri-
Clinics and Agri-Business Scheme, out of which one could be from Management background).
Circular PSFID/PS 74/2021 dated 13.10.2021
A Rs. 10 lakh ; Rs.50 lakh B Rs. 20 lakh ; Rs.100 lakh C Rs. 25 lakh ; Rs.150 lakh
D Rs. 50 lakh ; Rs.200 lakh E None of the above Answer: B
291. In case loan up to Rs _____ under the Agri-Clinics and Agri-Business Scheme, no margin money
is reqired Circular PSFID/PS 74/2021 dated 13.10.2021
A Rs 5 lakh B Rs. 10 lakh ; C Rs. 15 lakh
D Rs. 20 lakh E None of the above Answer: A
292. Up to Rs _____ under the Agri-Clinics and Agri-Business Scheme, the loan can be secured
against hypothecation of assets created and no further security would be necessary. Circular
PSFID/PS 74/2021 dated 13.10.2021
A Rs 5 lakh B Rs. 10 lakh ; C Rs. 15 lakh
D Rs. 20 lakh E None of the above Answer: A
293. Subsidy pattern under the Agri-Clinics and Agri-Business Scheme has been revised from Capital
and Interest subsidy to Composit subsidy which will be back ended in nature with minimum
_____ years lock-in-period.The subsidy will be _____% of project cost for women, SC/ST & all
categories of candidates from NE and Hill states and _____% of project cost for all others.
A 2 years ; 44% ; 36% B 3 years ; 40% ; 36% C 3 years ; 44% ; 36%
D 4 years ; 44% ; 36% E None of the above Answer: C
294. Margin under the scheme for financing to cold storage units for facilitating the farmers and to
meet running expenditures of cold storages will be ______. Circular PSFID/PS 73/2021 dated
05.10.2021
A 10% B 15% C 20%
295. The overall maximum limit for running the Cold Storage under the scheme for financing to cold
storage will be assessed on the basis of average of the actual expenditures incurred during the
preceding last ______ years (where available)] or as per actual available from the date of COD.
D 5 years E None of the above Answer: C
296. Minimum collateral security for On-Lending to the farmers under the scheme for financing to
cold storage will be ______% in the form of mortgage of IP (land & building)/ other liquid
security. Circular PSFID/PS 73/2021 dated 05.10.2021
A 100% B 110% C 125%
297. As per revised RBI guidelines on DAY-NRLM vide Circular no.
FIDD.GSSD.CO.BC.No.09/09.01.003/2021-22 dated 09-08-2021, For loans to SHGs up to ₹______,
no collateral and no margin will be charged. No lien should be marked against savings bank
account of SHGs and no deposits should be insisted upon while sanctioning loans. Circular
PSFID/PS 72/2021 dated 05.10.2021
A ₹10.00 lakh B ₹20.00 lakh C ₹25.00 lakh
D ₹50.00 lakh E None of the above Answer: A
298. As per revised RBI guidelines on DAY-NRLM vide Circular no.
FIDD.GSSD.CO.BC.No.09/09.01.003/2021-22 dated 09-08-2021, For loans to SHGs above ₹10 lakh
32
and up to ₹______, no collateral should be charged and no lien should be marked against
savings bank account of SHGs. Circular PSFID/PS 72/2021 dated 05.10.2021
Page

D ₹50.00 lakh E None of the above Answer: B

299. Loans sanctioned to Self Help Groups (SHGs) between Rs.10 lakh and Rs. 20 lakh during FY
2020-21 and thereafter would be eligible for coverage under CGFMU, irrespective of the
availability of group guarantee of SHG members. In respect of this category, first loss guarantee
shall be Nil and second loss guarantee shall be ______%. Circular PSFID/PS 72/2021 dated
05.10.2021
A 50%. B 60%. C 75%
300. As per revised guidelines of Central Sector Scheme for “Financing Facility under Agriculture
Infrastructure Fund”, Private entities can submit maximum ______ applications. Circular
PSFID/PS 68/2021 dated 13.09.2021
A 10 B 15 C 20
301. For APMCs under Central Sector Scheme for “Financing Facility under Agriculture Infrastructure
Fund”, interest subvention for a loan upto Rs. ______ will be provided for each project of
different infrastructure types e.g. cold storage, sorting, grading and assaying units, silos, etc.
within the same market yard. Circular PSFID/PS 68/2021 dated 13.09.2021
A Rs. 1 crore B Rs. 1.5 crore C Rs. 2 crore
D Rs. 5 crore E None of the above Answer: C
302. As per existing guidelines, KCC including working capital for animal husbandry & Fisheries,
Kisan Gold Scheme and Self Help Group loans upto Rs. ______ and loans upto Rs.______ under
Agriculture advances including Investment Credit may be considered as routine type of loans
and should be processed without the help of Agriculture Officers. Circular PSFID/PS 64/2021
dated 30.08.2021
A Rs. 10.00 lac ; Rs.5.00 B Rs. 20.00 lac ; Rs.5.00 C Rs. 15.00 lac ;
lac lac Rs.10.00 lac
D Rs. 20.00 lac ; Rs.15.00 E None of the above Answer: A
lac
303. Under the Entrepreneur model of Pradhan Mantri Matsya Sampada Yojana (PMMSY) scheme 25-
30 % of the project cost will be given under Central Assistance, beneficiary contribution will be
minimum ______% and Bank loan upto ______% of the total project cost. Circular PSFID/PS
61/2021 dated 25.08.2021
A 10% ; 65% B 15% ; 65% C 10% ; 70%
304. Applicant/beneficiary having own land with clear title, free from all encumbrances is eligible
under Pradhan Mantri Matsya Sampada Yojana (PMMSY). In case of leased land,
applicant/beneficiary shall have the land lease for a minimum period of ______ years. Circular
PSFID/PS 61/2021 dated 25.08.2021
D 20 years E None of the above Answer: B
305. Under Pradhan Mantri Matsya Sampada Yojana (PMMSY), Assets created either on own or lease
land out of the assistance provided under entrepreneur models shall not be disposed of in any
form including by way of sale, gift, transfer and lease for a period of ______ years from the date
of sanction of the project.
306. Under Pradhan Mantri Matsya Sampada Yojana (PMMSY) upto______ % of the project cost will
be given under Government Assistance, beneficiary contribution of minimum ______% and Bank
loan upto ______% of the total project cost for General Category. Circular PSFID/PS 61/2021 dated
25.08.2021
A 20% ; 10% ; 65% B 25% ; 15% ; 65% C 25% ; 10% ; 60%
33
D 25% ; 10% ; 65% E None of the above Answer: D

307. Under Pradhan Mantri Matsya Sampada Yojana (PMMSY) upto______ % of the project cost will
Page
be given under Government Assistance, beneficiary contribution of minimum ______% and Bank

loan upto ______% of the total project cost for SC/ST/Women Category . Circular PSFID/PS
61/2021 dated 25.08.2021
A 20% ; 10% ; 60% B 30% ; 20% ; 60% C 30% ; 10% ; 50%
D 30% ; 10% ; 60% E None of the above Answer: D
308. Under Pradhan Mantri Matsya Sampada Yojana (PMMSY), Ceiling limit of project cost for
subsidy/ assistance in case of General category will be Rs.______ per project. Circular PSFID/PS
61/2021 dated 25.08.2021
A Rs.1.00 crore B Rs.1.25 crore C Rs.1.50 crore
D Rs.1.75 crore E None of the above Answer: B
309. Under Pradhan Mantri Matsya Sampada Yojana (PMMSY), Ceiling limit of project cost for
subsidy/ assistance in case of SC/ST category will be Rs.______ per project. Circular PSFID/PS
61/2021 dated 25.08.2021
D Rs.1.75 crore E None of the above Answer: C
310. Under Pradhan Mantri Matsya Sampada Yojana (PMMSY), Funds will be released in 3
installments as back-end subsidy at the ratio of ______.
A 20:50:30 B 15:50:35 C 20:40:40
D 20:30:50 E None of the above Answer: A
311. Under Pradhan Mantri Matsya Sampada Yojana (PMMSY), The first installment of governmental
assistance will be released on achieving at least ______% financial progress of the project with
commensurate physical progress. Circular PSFID/PS 61/2021 dated 25.08.2021
A 10%. B 12%. C 15%.
D 20%. E None of the above Answer: D
312. Under Pradhan Mantri Matsya Sampada Yojana (PMMSY), The second installment will be
released on achieving at least ______% financial progress of the project with commensurate
physical progress.
A 50%. B 60%. C 70%.
D 75%. E None of the above Answer: C
313. No processing fee/ documentation charges are to be levied in Priority Sector loans to SHGs for
loans upto Rs. ______ for group as a whole. Circular PSFID/PS 60/2021 dated 23.08.2021
A Rs. 25000 B Rs. 50000 C Rs. 1.00 lakh
D Rs. 10.00 lakh E None of the above Answer: D
314. For Small Finance Banks Total Priority Sector target for will be ______% of ANBC or CEOBE
whichever is higher . Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
A 32%. B 40%. C 60%.
315. Sub targets of Agriculture under priority sector lending for for Foreign banks with less than 20
branches will be ______ % of ANBC or CEOBE whichever is higher Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021
dated 15.06.2021
A 8%. B 10%. C 12%.
D 15%. E None of the above Answer: E
316. Sub targets of Micro Enterprises under priority sector lending for Domestic commercial banks
(excl. RRBs & SFBs) & foreign banks with 20 branches and above will be ______% of ANBC or
CEOBE, whichever is higher. Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
A 6.5 per cent B 7.5 per cent C 8.5 per cent
D 10.5 per cent E None of the above Answer: B
317. Sub targets of Micro Enterprises under priority sector lending for for Foreign banks with less
than 20 branches will be ______ % of ANBC or CEOBE whichever is higher Circular PSFID/PS
46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
34
D 10.5 per cent E None of the above Answer: E

318. Sub targets of Advances to Weaker Sections under priority sector lending for Domestic
Page
commercial banks (excl. RRBs & SFBs) & foreign banks with 20 branches and above will be

______% of ANBC or CEOBE, whichever is higher. Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
D 12 percent E None of the above Answer: D
319. Sub targets of Advances to Weaker Sections under priority sector lending for for Foreign banks
with less than 20 branches will be ______ % of ANBC or CEOBE whichever is higher Circular
PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
D 12 percent E None of the above Answer: E
320. As per Reserve Bank of India (Priority Sector Lending – Targets and Classification) Directions,
Weaker Section targets for RRBs will continue ______% of ANBC or CEOBE, whichever is
higher. Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
A 10% B 12% C 15%
321. Loans to Individual farmers against pledge / hypothecation of agricultural produce (including
warehouse receipts) for a period not exceeding 12 months subject to a limit up to Rs. ______
against NWRs/eNWRs and up to Rs. ______ against warehouse receipts other than
NWRs/eNWRs are classified as Agriculture-Farm credit under Priority Sector Lending. Circular
PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
A Rs. 50 lakh ; Rs. 50 lakh B Rs. 75 lakh ; Rs. 50 lakh C Rs. 75 lakh ; Rs. 75
lakh
D Rs. 100 lakh ; Rs. 75 E None of the avove Answer: B
lakh
322. Crop loans to Corporate farmers, Farmer Producer Organisations (FPOs) / (FPC) Companies of
Individual Farmers, Partnership firms and Co-operatives of farmers engaged in Agriculture and
Allied Activities which will include traditional / non-traditional plantations and horticulture and
loans for allied activities are classified as Agriculture-Farm credit under Priority Sector Lending
subject to an aggregate limit of Rs. ______ per borrowing entity.. Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated
15.06.2021
A Rs. 1 crore B Rs. 2 crore C Rs. 5 crore
D Rs. 10 crore E None of the avove Answer: B
323. Medium and long-term loans to Corporate farmers, Farmer Producer Organisations (FPOs) /
(FPC) Companies of Individual Farmers, Partnership firms and Co-operatives of farmers engaged
in Agriculture and Allied Activities for agriculture and allied activities (e.g. purchase of
agricultural implements and machinery, loans for irrigation and other developmental activities
undertaken in the farm, and developmental loans for allied activities) will be classified as
Agriculture-Farm credit under Priority Sector Lending subject to an aggregate limit of Rs. ______
per borrowing entity. Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
324. Loans to Corporate farmers, Farmer Producer Organisations (FPOs) / (FPC) Companies of
Individual Farmers, Partnership firms and Co-operatives of farmers engaged in Agriculture and
Allied Activities for pre and post-harvest activities, viz., spraying, weeding, harvesting, sorting,
grading and transporting of their own farm produce will be classified as Agriculture-Farm credit
under Priority Sector Lending subject to an aggregate limit of Rs. ______ per borrowing entity.
325. Loans to Corporate farmers farmers against pledge / hypothecation of agricultural produce
(including warehouse receipts) for a period not exceeding 12 months subject to a limit up to Rs.
______ against NWRs/eNWRs and up to Rs. ______ against warehouse receipts other than
NWRs/eNWRs are classified as Agriculture-Farm credit under Priority Sector Lending. Circular
PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
35
lakh
Page
D Rs. 100 lakh ; Rs. 75 E None of the avove Answer: B

lakh

326. Loans upto Rs.______ to FPOs which have assured market links at predetermined rates are
classified as Agriculture- Farm Credit under Priority Sector Lending. Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021
dated 15.06.2021
A Rs. 5 crores B ₹10 crore C ₹20 crore
D ₹25 crore E None of the avove Answer: A
327. Loans for agriculture infrastructure subject to an aggregate sanctioned limit of ₹______ per
borrower from the banking system will be classified under Priority Sector Lending. Circular
PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
A ₹10 crore B ₹25 crore C ₹50 crore
D ₹100 crore E None of the avove Answer: D
328. Loans up to ______ to co-operative societies of farmers for purchase of the produce of members
are classified as Agriculture Ancillary Services under Priority Sector Lending. Circular PSFID/PS
46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
A Rs. 5 crores B ₹10 crore C ₹20 crore
329. Loans up to ₹______ to Start-ups, as per definition of Ministry of Commerce and Industry, Govt.
of India that are engaged in agriculture and allied services are eligible for Priority Sector
classification under Agriculture- Ancillary Services Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
330. Loans for Food and Agro-processing up to an aggregate sanctioned limit of ₹______rore per
borrower from the banking system. Activities eligible for classification under food and agro-
processing will be classified as Agriculture-Ancillary Services under Priority Sector Lending.
331. Loans up to ₹______ to individuals solely engaged in Allied activities without any accompanying
land holding criteria are eligible for classification as loans to Small & Marginal farmers under
Priority Sector Lending . Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
A ₹1 lakh B ₹2 lakh C ₹3 lakh
D ₹5 lakh E None of the avove Answer: B
332. As per Priority Sector Lending, Bank credit to registered NBFCs (other than MFIs) towards on-
lending for 'Term lending' component under agriculture will be allowed up to Rs. ______ per
borrower Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
D Rs. 50 lakh E None of the avove Answer: A
333. All loans to units in the KVI sector will be eligible for classification under the sub-target of
______percent prescribed for Micro Enterprises under priority sector. Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021
dated 15.06.2021
A 5.5 percent B 6.5 percent C 7.5 percent
D 8.5 percent E None of the avove Answer: C
334. Under Priority Sector Lending Loans up to ₹______ to Start-ups, as per definition of Ministry of
Commerce and Industry, Govt. of India that confirm to the definition of MSME are eligible for
classification under other finance to MSMEs. Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
335. For Domestic Banks/ WoS of Foreign Banks/ SFBs/ UCBs, Incremental export credit (other than
in agriculture and MSME) over corresponding date of the preceding year, up to ______% of
ANBC or CEOBE whichever is higher, subject to a sanctioned limit of up to Rs.______ per
borrower will be allowed to be classified as priority sector. Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated
15.06.2021
A 2% ; Rs. 40.00 Crore B 2% ; Rs. 50.00 Crore C 3% ; Rs. 40.00 Crore
36
D 3% ; Rs. 50.00 Crore E None of the avove Answer: A

336. For Foreign banks with 20 branches and above, Incremental export credit (other than in
Page
agriculture and MSME) over corresponding date of preceding year, up to ______% of ANBC or

CEOBE, whichever is higher will be allowed to be classified as priority sector. Circular PSFID/PS
46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
A 2% B 3% C 4%
337. For Foreign banks with less than 20 branches, Export Credit (other than in agriculture and
MSME) up to ______% of ANBC or CEOBE whichever is higher will be allowed to be classified as
priority sector. Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
A 10% B 12% C 18%
338. Loans to individuals for educational purposes, including vocational courses, not exceeding ₹
______ will be considered as eligible for priority sector classification. Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021
dated 15.06.2021
A ₹ 10 lakh B ₹ 20 lakh C ₹ 50 lakh
D ₹ 100 lakh E None of the avove Answer: B
339. Housing Loans to individuals up to ₹______ in metropolitan centres (with population of ten lakh
and above) and up to ₹______ in other centres for purchase/construction of a dwelling unit per
family provided the overall cost of the dwelling unit in the metropolitan centre and at other
centres does not exceed ₹45 lakh and ₹30 lakh respectively are eligible for priority sector
classification. Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
A ₹30 lakh ; ₹25 lakh B ₹35 lakh ; ₹25 lakh C ₹35 lakh ; ₹30 lakh
D ₹35 lakh ; ₹35 lakh E None of the avove Answer: B
340. Loans up to ₹______ in metropolitan centres and up to ₹______ in other centres for repairs to
damaged dwelling units conforming to the overall cost of the dwelling unit are eligible for
priority sector classification. Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
A ₹8 lakh ; ₹6 lakh B ₹10 lakh ; ₹6 lakh C ₹10 lakh ; ₹8 lakh
D ₹12 lakh ; ₹8 lakh E None of the avove Answer: B
341. Bank loans to any governmental agency for construction of dwelling units or for slum clearance
and rehabilitation of slum dwellers subject to dwelling units with carpet area of not more than
______ are eligible for priority sector classification. Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
A 40 sq.m. B 50 sq.m. C 60 sq.m.
D 75 sq.m. E None of the avove Answer: C
342. Bank loans for affordable housing projects using at least 50% of FAR/FSI for dwelling units with
carpet area of not more than ______ are eligible for priority sector classification. Circular
PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
A 40 sq.m. B 50 sq.m. C 60 sq.m.
D 75 sq.m. E None of the avove Answer: C
343. Bank loans to HFCs (approved by NHB for their refinance) for on-lending, up to ₹______ for
individual borrowers, for purchase/construction/ reconstruction of individual dwelling units or
for slum clearance and rehabilitation of slum dwellers, subject to certain conditions are eligible
for priority sector classification. Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
344. Bank loans up to a limit of ₹______ per borrower for setting up schools, drinking water facilities
and sanitation facilities including construction/ refurbishment of household toilets and water
improvements at household level, etc. are eligible for priority sector classification. Circular
PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
A ₹50 lakh B Rs. 1 crore C Rs. 2 crore
D Rs. 5 crore E None of the avove Answer: D
345. Bank loans up to a limit of ₹______ per borrower for building health care facilities including
under ‘Ayushman Bharat’ in Tier II to Tier VI centres are eligible for priority sector classification.
37

346. Bank loans up to a limit of ₹______ to borrowers for Renewable Energy purposes like solar
Page
based power generators, biomass-based power generators, wind mills, micro-hydel plants and

for non-conventional energy based public utilities, viz., street lighting systems and remote
village electrification etc., will be eligible for Priority Sector classification. For individual
households, the loan limit will be ₹______ per borrower. Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated
15.06.2021
A ₹20 crore ; ₹10 lakh B ₹30 crore ; ₹10 lakh C ₹50 crore ; ₹10 lakh
D ₹50 crore ; ₹20 lakh E None of the avove Answer: B
347. Loans not exceeding ₹______ provided directly by banks to SHG/JLG for activities other than
agriculture or MSME, viz., loans for meeting social needs, construction or repair of house,
construction of toilets or any viable common activity started by the SHGs are eligible for priority
sector classification. Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
D ₹10.00 lakh E None of the avove Answer: B
348. Loans to distressed persons [other than distressed farmers indebted to non-institutional
lenders] not exceeding ₹______ per borrower to prepay their debt to non-institutional lenders are
eligible for priority sector classification. Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
D ₹10.00 lakh E None of the avove Answer: A
349. Loans up to ₹______ to Start-ups, as per definition of Ministry of Commerce and Industry, Govt.
of India that are engaged in activities other than Agriculture or MSME are eligible for priority
sector classification. Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
D ₹100 crore E None of the avove Answer: C
350. Distressed person other than farmers, with loan amount not exceeding Rs. ______ per borrower
to prepay their debts to the non-institutional lenders will be considered as lending under Weaker
Sections category. Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
351. Artisans, village and cottage industries where individual credit limits do not exceed Rs. ______
will be considered as lending under Weaker Sections category Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated
15.06.2021
352. Under Priority Sector Lending Loans, Individual women beneficiaries up to Rs. ______ per
borrower will be considered as lending under Weaker Sections category. Circular PSFID/PS
46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
353. Bank credit for on-lending by NBFCs for ‘Term lending’ component up to ₹ ______ per borrower
under Agriculture will be eligible for classification as priority sector. Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021
dated 15.06.2021
D ₹ 30 lakh E None of the avove Answer: A
354. Bank credit for on-lending by NBFCs up to ₹ ______ per borrower under Micro & Small
enterprises will be eligible for classification as priority sector. Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated
15.06.2021
355. Bank credit to Housing Finance Companies (HFCs), approved by NHB for their refinance, for on-
lending for the purpose of purchase/construction/ reconstruction of individual dwelling units or
for slum clearance and rehabilitation of slum dwellers are eligible for priority sector
classification, subject to an aggregate loan limit of ₹______ per borrower. Circular PSFID/PS
46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
38

Page
356. Bank credit to NBFCs (including HFCs) for on-lending as applicable will be allowed up to an

overall limit of ______ percent of individual bank’s total priority sector lending. Circular PSFID/PS
46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
A one percent B two percent C three percent
D five percent E None of the avove Answer: D
357. No loan related and ad hoc service charges/inspection charges should be levied on priority
sector loans up to ₹______. In the case of eligible priority sector loans to SHGs / JLGs, this limit
will be applicable per member and not to the group as a whole. Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated
15.06.2021
A ₹ 25,000 B ₹ 50,000 C ₹ 75,000
D ₹ 100,000 E None of the avove Answer: A
358. Which of the following is/are incorrect in respect of Classification and Reporting of Priority
Sector Advances? Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
A Contingent liabilities / off- B Off-balance sheet C The targets and sub-
balance sheet items do not interbank exposures are targets set under priority
form part of priority sector excluded for computing sector lending, will be
achievement. CEOBE for the priority computed on the basis of
sector targets. the ANBC / CEOBE as
applicable as on the
corresponding date of the
preceding year.
359. Which of the following agriculture Credit to Individual farmers is/are not classified as Farm
Credit under Priority Sector Lending? Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
A Loans for pre and post- B Loans to farmers for C Loans to farmers for
harvest activities viz. installation of stand-alone installation of solar power
spraying, harvesting, Solar Agriculture Pumps plants on barren / fallow
grading and transporting of and for solarisation of grid land or in stilt fashion on
their own farm produce. connected Agriculture agriculture land owned by
Pumps. farmer.
D Loans to distressed E None of the above Answer: E
farmers indebted to non-
institutional lenders.
2020, Sub target of Lending to Small & Marginal Farmers have been Increased from present 8%
to 10%. The same is to be achieved in a phased manner. Which of the following is/are incorrect
in respect of this? Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
A 2020-21 – 8% B 2021-22 – 9% C 2022-23 – 9.50%
D 2023-24 – 10% E None of the above Answer: E
2020, Sub target of Lending to Weaker Section have been Increased from present 10% to 12%.
The same is to be achieved in a phased manner. Which of the following is/are incorrect in
respect of this? Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
A 2020-21 – 10% B 2021-22 – 11% C 2022-23 – 11.50%
D 2023-24 – 12% E None of the above Answer: E
362. Loans to individual farmers [including Self Help Groups (SHGs) or Joint Liability Groups (JLGs),
i.e. groups of individual farmers, provided banks maintain disaggregated data of such loans] and
Proprietorship firms of farmers, directly engaged in Agriculture and Allied Activities, viz., dairy,
fishery, animal husbandry, poultry, bee-keeping and sericulture are classified as Agriculture-
Farm credit-Individual farmers under Priority Sector Lending . Which of the following is/are not
encluded under Agriculture-Farm credit? Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
A Loans to farmers for pre B Loans to distressed C Loans to small and
and post-harvest activities, farmers indebted to non- marginal farmers for
viz., spraying, weeding, institutional lenders.
39
purchase of land for

harvesting, sorting, agricultural purposes.
grading and transporting of
Page
their own farm produce

D Loans against E None of the above Answer: E

pledge/hypothecation of
agricultural produce
(including warehouse
receipt) for a period not
exceeding 12 months
subject to a limit up to ₹50
lakh.
363. Loans for agriculture infrastructure subject to an aggregate sanctioned limit of ₹100 crore per
borrower from the banking system ill be classified under Priority Sector Lending. Which of the
following is/are not encluded under this sector? Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
A Loans for construction of B Loans for Soil C Loans for Plant tissue
storage facilities conservation and culture and agri-
watershed development biotechnology, seed
production, production of
bio-pesticides, bio-
fertilizer, and vermi
composting.
D Loans for construction of E None of the above Answer: E
oil extraction/ processing
units for production of bio-
fuels, their storage and
distribution infrastructure
along with loans to
entrepreneurs for setting
up Compressed Bio Gas
(CBG) plants.
364. Which of the following loan/s are not classified as Agriculture-Ancillary Services under Priority
Sector Lending. Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
A Loans up to ₹5 crore to co- B Loans up to ₹50 crore to C Loans for Food and Agro-
operative societies of Start-ups that are engaged processing up to an
farmers for purchase of in agriculture and allied aggregate sanctioned limit
the produce of members services. of ₹100 crore per
borrower from the banking
system.
D Loans for setting up of E None of the above Answer: E
Agri-clinics and Agri-
business centres.
365. Which of the following loan/s are classified as Agriculture-Ancillary Services under Priority
Sector Lending. Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
A Outstanding deposits B Loans sanctioned by C Loans sanctioned by
under RIDF and other banks to MFIs for on- banks to registered
eligible funds with lending to agriculture NBFCs (other than MFIs)
NABARD on account of sector
priority sector shortfall.
366. For the purpose of computation of achievement of the sub-target under Priority Sector Lending,
Small and Marginal Farmers will include the following
i. Landless agricultural labourers, tenant farmers, oral lessees and sharecroppers whose share
of landholding is within the limits prescribed for SMFs.
ii. Loans to Self Help Groups (SHGs) or Joint Liability Groups (JLGs), i.e. groups of individual
SMFs directly engaged in Agriculture and Allied Activities, provided banks maintain
disaggregated data of such loans.
iii. Loans up to ₹2 lakh to individuals solely engaged in Allied activities without any
40
accompanying land holding criteria.

iv. Loans to FPOs/FPC of individual farmers and co-operatives of farmers directly engaged in
Page
Agriculture and Allied Activities where the land-holding share of SMFs is not less than 75 per

cent, subject to loan limits prescribed in para 6.2. UCBs are not permitted to lend to co-
operatives of farmers Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
A Only i and ii B Only ii and iii C Only iii and iv
367. Which of the following bank loans to Housing sector are not eligible for priority sector
classification? Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
A Loans up to ₹10 lakh in B Bank loans to any C Bank loans for affordable
metropolitan centres and governmental agency for housing projects using at
up to ₹6 lakh in other construction of dwelling least 50% of FAR/FSI for
centres for repairs to units or for slum clearance dwelling units with carpet
damaged dwelling units and rehabilitation of slum area of not more than 60
conforming to the overall dwellers subject to sq.m.
cost of the dwelling unit dwelling units with carpet
area of not more than 60
sq.m
D Outstanding deposits with E None of the above Answer: E
NHB on account of priority
sector shortfall.
368. Priority sector loans to which of the following borrowers will not be considered as lending under
Weaker Sections category? Circular PSFID/PS 46/2021 dated 15.06.2021
A Individual women B Distressed farmers C Persons with disabilities
beneficiaries up to Rs. 1 indebted to non-
lakh per borrower institutional lenders
D Artisans, village and E None of the above Answer: E
cottage industries where
individual credit limits do
not exceed Rs. 1 Lakh
369. Only SHGs that have not received any RF earlier would be provided with RF, as corpus, with a
minimum ₹_______ and up to a maximum of ₹_______ per SHG. Circular PSFID/PS 37/2021 dated
11.05.2021
A ₹10000 ; ₹15,000 B ₹15000 ; ₹15,000 C ₹15000 ; ₹20,000
D ₹20000 ; ₹25,000 E None of the avove Answer: A
370. To eligible under DAY-NRLM, SHGs should be in active existence at least since the last ______
months as per the books of account of SHGs and not from the date of opening of S/B account.
371. The existing defunct SHGs are also eligible for credit under DAY-NRLM if they are revived and
continue to be active for a minimum period of ______ months. Circular PSFID/PS 37/2021 dated
11.05.2021
372. Under DAY-NRLM, SHGs may avail either Term Loan (TL) or a Cash Credit Limit (CCL) loan or
both based on the need. In case of CCL, minimum sanctioned loan will be ₹ ______to each
eligible SHGs for a period of ______ years with a yearly drawing power (DP). Circular PSFID/PS
37/2021 dated 11.05.2021
A ₹ 4 lakh ; 3 years B ₹ 6 lakh ; 3 years C ₹ 4 lakh ; 5 years
D ₹ 6 lakh ; 5 years E None of the avove Answer: B
373. Under DAY-NRLM, In case of Term Loan, banks are advised to sanction loan amount in doses.
First Dose will be ______ times of the existing corpus or minimum of ₹______, whichever is
higher Circular PSFID/PS 37/2021 dated 11.05.2021
A 8 times ; ₹2 lakh B 6 times ; ₹1 lakh C 8 times ; ₹1 lakh
D 6 times ; ₹2 lakh E None of the avove Answer: B
41
374. Under DAY-NRLM, In case of Term Loan, Second Dose will be ______ times of the existing
corpus or minimum of ₹______, whichever is higher Circular PSFID/PS 37/2021 dated 11.05.2021
Page
A 8 times ; ₹2 lakh B 6 times ; ₹1 lakh C 8 times ; ₹1 lakh

D 6 times ; ₹2 lakh E None of the avove Answer: A

375. Under DAY-NRLM, In case of Term Loan, Third Dose will be Minimum of ₹______, based on the
Micro credit plan prepared by the SHGs and appraised by the Federations /Support agency and
the previous credit history. Circular PSFID/PS 37/2021 dated 11.05.2021
376. In order to facilitate use of loans for augmenting livelihoods of SHG members, at least ______%
of loans above ₹2 lakh, ______% of loans above ₹4 lakh and at least ______% of loans above ₹6
lakh should be used primarily for income generating productive purposes. Circular PSFID/PS
37/2021 dated 11.05.2021
A 50% ; 60% ; 85 B 50% ; 60% ; 75 C 50% ; 75% ; 85
D 60% ; 75% ; 85 E None of the avove Answer: C
377. Under DAY-NRLM, In case of Term Loan, The first dose of loan may be repaid in ______ months
and the second dose of loan may be repaid in ______ months in monthly/Quarterly Instalments.
A 24-36 months ; 36-48 B 48-60 months ; 60-84 C 24-36 months ; 60-84
months months months
D 36-48 months ; 60-84 E None of the avove Answer: A
months
378. Under DAY-NRLM, In case of Term Loan, The third dose of loan may be repaid in ______ months
and the forth dose onwards may be repaid between ______ months in monthly/Quarterly
Instalments. Circular PSFID/PS 37/2021 dated 11.05.2021
A 24-36 months ; 36-48 B 48-60 months ; 60-84 C 24-36 months ; 60-84
D 36-48 months ; 60-84 E None of the avove Answer: B
months
379. In case of SHGs no processing fee/ upfront fee will be charged for loans upto Rs. ______ per
member. Circular PSFID/PS 37/2021 dated 11.05.2021
A Rs. 10000/- B Rs. 15000/- C Rs. 25000/-
D Rs. 50000/- E None of the avove Answer: C
380. DAY-NRLM would ensure adequate coverage of vulnerable sections of the society such that
______% of the beneficiaries are SC/STs, ______% are minorities and ______% are persons with
disability Circular PSFID/PS 37/2021 dated 11.05.2021
A 25% ; 15% ; 3% B 25% ; 20% ; 3% C 50% ; 15% ; 3%
D 50% ; 15% ; 5% E None of the avove Answer: C
381. Under Framework for implementation of DAYNRLM, up to ______% of the total membership of
the SHGs may be from among the population marginally above the poverty line, subject to the
approval of other members of the group. Circular PSFID/PS 37/2021 dated 11.05.2021
A 20% B 25% C 30%
382. DAY-NRLM is a Centrally Sponsored Scheme and the financing of the programme would be
shared between the Centre and the States in the ratio of ______ and ______ in case of North
Eastern States including Sikkim; completely from the Centre in case of UTs. Circular PSFID/PS
37/2021 dated 11.05.2021
A 50:50 ; 90:10 B 60:40 ; 90:10 C 50:50 ; 80:20
D 60:40 ; 80:20 E None of the avove Answer: B
383. Under DAY-NRLM, the women SHGs would be provided with an additional 3% subvention on the
prompt repayment of term loans if term loan account where all of the interest payments and/or
instalments of principal were paid within ______ days of the due date during the tenure of the
loan Circular PSFID/PS 37/2021 dated 11.05.2021
42
384. Under DAY-NRLM, All commercial banks in 250 identified districts would be subvented to the
extent of difference between the Weighted Average Interest Charged and 7% subject to the
Page
maximum limit of ______. Circular PSFID/PS 37/2021 dated 11.05.2021

A 5.00% B 5.50% C 6.00%

385. The National Urban Livelihoods Mission (NULM) in 2013. NULM has been under implementation
w.e.f. September 24, 2013 in all district headquarters (irrespective of population) and all the cities
with population of ______ or more. The Mission with enhanced scope was renamed as
Deendayal Antyodaya Yojana -National Urban Livelihoods Mission (DAYNULM) Circular PSFID/PS
36/2021 dated 11.05.2021
A 1 lakh B 2 lakh C 3 lakh
D 5 lakh E None of the avove Answer: A
386. Under DAY-NULM), The percentage of women beneficiaries under SEP shall not be less than
______ percent. SCs and STs must be benefited at least to the extent of the proportion of their
strength in the city/town population of poor. A special provision of ______ percent reservation
should be made for the differently-abled under this program Circular PSFID/PS 36/2021 dated
11.05.2021
D 30 percent ; 10 percent E None of the avove Answer: B
387. Under DAY-NULM, The case duly recommended by the task force will be forwarded by the ULB
to the concerned banks for further processing. Such cases recommended by task force have to
be processed by concerned banks within a time frame of ______days. Circular PSFID/PS 36/2021
dated 11.05.2021
388. Under DAY-NULM, The Maximum unit Project Cost for an individual micro enterprise is ₹
_________. Circular PSFID/PS 36/2021 dated 11.05.2021
A ₹ 100,000 B ₹ 200,000 C ₹ 500,000
D ₹ 1,000,000 E None of the avove Answer: B
389. Under DAY-NULM, Repayment schedule for an individual as well as group enterprises would
range between _____ Years after initial moratorium of _____ months as per norms of the banks.
A 3 to 5 Years ; 6-18 B 5 to 7 Years ; 6-18 C 3 to 5 Years ; 6-12
D 5 to 7 Years ; 6-12 E None of the avove Answer: B
months
390. Under DAY-NULM, No margin money for an individual as well as group enterprises should be
taken for a loan up to ₹______. Circular dated
A ₹ 25,000 B ₹ 50,000 C ₹ 100,000
D ₹ 200,000 E None of the avove Answer: B
391. Under DAY-NULM, The group will be eligible for a maximum loan of Rs. 2 Lakh per member or
Rs. ______, whichever is lower. Circular PSFID/PS 36/2021 dated 11.05.2021
A Rs. 5 Lakh B Rs. 10 Lakh C Rs. 15 Lakh
D Rs. 20 Lakh E None of the avove Answer: B
392. Which of the following condition/s is/are incorrect in respect of eligibility for 3% Incentive
Subvention 0n Short-term crop loans? Circular PSFID/PS 28/2021 dated 09.4.2021
A Accounts under CCAKC & B Individual debit entries C The recovery received in
CCAGR which are KCC during the financial year the account may be first
type loans i.e. assessment are adjusted within a appropriated towards the
is done in terms of KCC maximum period of 12 previous year’s
Scheme guidelines. months. outstanding balance and
then the current year
disbursement.
D Only those Accounts E None of the above Answer: E
where Aadhar has been
43
seeded will be eligible for

subvention and in case
Page
Aadhar is not seeded in

accounts, such accounts

shall attract normal rate of

Interest as per banks
guidelines.
393. A term loan account under DAY-NULM, where all of the interest payments and/or instalments of
principal were paid within ______ days of the due date during the entire tenure of the loans
would be considered as an account having prompt payment. Circular PSFID/PS 36/2021 dated
11.05.2021
394. Advance for under Fisheries and Aquaculture Infrastructure Development Fund (FIDF) shall be
covered by collaterals covering at least ______% of the exposure. Circular PSFID/PS 16/2021
dated 11.02.2021
A 100%. B 110%. C 125%.
395. Maximum Repayment period under Fisheries and Aquaculture Infrastructure Development Fund
(FIDF) will be ______ years inclusive of moratorium of ______ years on repayment of principal
depending on the project magnitude, size of the financial investment, repayment capacity of the
project proponents (EEs) etc. Circular PSFID/PS 16/2021 dated 11.02.2021
D 12 years ; 5 years E None of the above Answer: B
396. A project under Fisheries and Aquaculture Infrastructure Development Fund (FIDF) will be
considered non- starter, if no drawals are made within ______ months from the date of sanction.
A three months B six months C twelve months
D eighteen months E None of the above Answer: B
397. To eligible for co-lending the NBFC should be atleast ______ years in operation to be eligible for
entering into Co- lending agreement with banks. Circular PSFID/PS 13/2021 dated 11.02.2021
398. Which of the following Segments is/are not eligible for financing under “Co- Lending Model”
(CLM) Arrangement? Circular PSFID/PS 13/2021 dated 11.02.2021
A Housing and other retail B Secured and unsecured C Agriculture Equipments
which are eligible under MSME and Agriculture
PS Definition Investment
399. After 09.07.2021, all the claims under PMJJBY/PMSBY are since lodged with designated
Insurance Companies, directly by branches in electronic form, within the revised TAT of ______
days. Circular FI 17/2021 dated 21.10.2021
D 15 days E None of the above Answer: B
400. As per the 6th Amendment of Exit Regulations, the Swavalamban Subscribers whose
accumulated pension wealth do not exceed ______ and if they are not eligible to migrate to Atal
Pension Yojana (APY), can opt to prematurely exit with lump sum payment Circular FI 14/2021
dated 11.08.2021
A one lakh rupees B two lakh rupees C five lakh rupees
D ten lakh rupees E None of the above Answer: A
401. All individual bank account holders in the age ______ years in participating banks will be entitled
to join Pradhan Mantri Suraksha Bima Yojana-PMSBY. Circular FI 11/2021 dated 09.07.2021
A 18 to 60 years B 18 to 65 years C 18 to 70 years
D 18 to 75 years E None of the above Answer: C
402. Claim amount payable (Sum Insured) due to occurrence of Death under Pradhan Mantri
Suraksha Bima Yojana-PMSBY will be Rs.______. Circular FI 11/2021 dated 09.07.2021
44

D Rs. 5 Lakh E None of the above Answer: B
Page
403. For total and irrecoverable loss of both eyes or loss of use of both hands or feet or loss of sight

of one eye and loss of use of hand or foot due to occurrence of the accident, Claim amount
payable (Sum Insured) due under Pradhan Mantri Suraksha Bima Yojana-PMSBY will be
Rs.______. Circular FI 11/2021 dated 09.07.2021
404. For total and irrecoverable loss of sight of one eye or loss of use of one hand or foot due to
occurrence of the accident, Claim amount payable (Sum Insured) due under Pradhan Mantri
Suraksha Bima Yojana-PMSBY will be Rs.______. Circular FI 11/2021 dated 09.07.2021
D Rs. 5 Lakh E None of the above Answer: A
405. Under Pradhan Mantri Suraksha Bima Yojana-PMSBY, The premium will be deducted @ Rs.
______per annum from the account holder’s bank account through ‘auto debit’ facility in one
instalment, as per the consent to be given on enrolment. Circular FI 11/2021 dated 09.07.2021
A Rs.12/- B Rs.14/- C Rs.18/-
D Rs.24/- E None of the above Answer: A
406. Under Pradhan Mantri Suraksha Bima Yojana-PMSBY, The accident cover of the member shall
terminate/ be restricted on attaining age ______ years and on closure of account with the Bank
or insufficiency of balance to keep the insurance in force. Circular FI 11/2021 dated 09.07.2021
407. All individual account holders of participating banks in the age group of ______years are entitled
to join Pradhan Mantri Jeevan Jyoti Bima Yojana-PMJJBY. Circular FI 10/2021 dated 09.07.2021
D 18 to 70 years E None of the above Answer: A
408. Under Pradhan Mantri Jeevan Jyoti Bima Yojana-PMJJBY, Premium will be Rs.______ per annum
per member. The premium will be deducted from the account holder’s bank account through
‘auto debit’ facility in one instalment, as per the option given, at the time of enrolment under the
scheme, Circular FI 10/2021 dated 09.07.2021
A Rs.220/- B Rs.330/- C Rs.440/-
D Rs.550/- E None of the above Answer: B
409. Under Pradhan Mantri Jeevan Jyoti Bima Yojana-PMJJBY, The accident cover of the member
shall terminate/ be restricted on attaining age ______ years and on closure of account with the
Bank or insufficiency of balance to keep the insurance in force. Circular FI 10/2021 dated
09.07.2021
D 70 years E None of the above Answer: A
410. Under Pradhan Mantri Jeevan Jyoti Bima Yojana-PMJJBY, Rs.______ is payable on member’s
death due to any cause. Circular FI 10/2021 dated 09.07.2021
411. Under Pradhan Mantri Jeevan Jyoti Bima Yojana-PMJJBY, Participating Banks shall remit the
premium to insurance companies in case of regular enrolment on or before ______ every year
and in other cases in the same month when received. Circular FI 10/2021 dated 09.07.2021
A 31st of March B 30th of June C 30th of Sept.
D 31st of Dec. E None of the above Answer: B
412. Under Pradhan Mantri Jeevan Jyoti Bima Yojana-PMJJBY, Delayed enrolment for prospective
cover is possible with payment of full Annual Premium of Rs.______ is payable for enrolment in
June, July and August. Circular FI 10/2021 dated 09.07.2021
A Rs. 86/- B Rs.172/- C Rs. 258/-
D Rs.330/- E None of the above Answer: D
cover is possible with payment of pro rata premium of Rs. _____ is payable for enrolment in
45
September, October, and November

Circular FI 10/2021 dated 09.07.2021
Page
A Rs. 86/- B Rs.172/- C Rs. 258/-

D Rs.330/- E None of the above Answer: C

December, January and February.
A Rs. 86/- B Rs.172/- C Rs. 258/-
March, April and May.
A Rs. 86/- B Rs.172/- C Rs. 258/-
D Rs.330/- E None of the above Answer: A
416. Under Pradhan Mantri Jeevan Jyoti Bima Yojana-PMJJBY, Lien period of ______ days shall be
applicable from the date of enrolment. Circular FI 10/2021 dated 09.07.2021
D 60 days E None of the above Answer: D
417. Under Pradhan Mantri Jeevan Jyoti Bima Yojana-PMJJBY, Appropriation of Premium for full
Annual Premium of Rs.330/- collected will be done as: Rs. ______ to LIC/ Insurance
Company, Rs.______ for Reimbursement of Expenses to BC/Micro/Corporate/ Agent and
Rs.______ for Reimbursement of Administrative Expenses to participating Banks. Circular FI
10/2021 dated 09.07.2021
A Rs.289/- ; Rs.30/- ; B Rs.299/- ; Rs.30/- ; C Rs.289/- ; Rs.40/- ;
Rs.11/- Rs.11/- Rs.11/-
D Rs.289/- ; Rs.30/- ; E None of the above Answer: A
Rs.15/-
418. Under Pradhan Mantri Jeevan Jyoti Bima Yojana-PMJJBY, Appropriation of Premium for Rs.258/-
collected in the 2nd quarter of risk Period will be done as: Rs. ______ to LIC/ Insurance
10/2021 dated 09.07.2021
A Rs.225/- ; Rs.22.50 ; B Rs.235/- ; Rs.22.50 ; C Rs.225/- ; Rs.32.50 ;
Rs.10.50 Rs.10.50 Rs.10.50
D Rs.225/- ; Rs.22.50 ; E None of the above Answer: A
Rs.12.50
419. Under Pradhan Mantri Jeevan Jyoti Bima Yojana-PMJJBY, Appropriation of Premium for Rs.172/-
collected in the 3rd quarter of risk Period will be done as: Rs. ______ to LIC/ Insurance
10/2021 dated 09.07.2021
A Rs.150/- ; Rs.15/- ; B Rs.160/- ; Rs.15/- ; C Rs.150/- ; Rs.18/- ;
Rs.7/- Rs.7/- Rs.7/-
D Rs.150/- ; Rs.15/- ; E None of the above Answer: A
Rs.9/-
420. Duly completed claim-cumdischarge form shall be submitted by claimant to the concerned bank
branch / post office immediately after the occurrence of death of the insured member and
preferably within ______ days of the occurrence of the accident giving rise to the claim (death
/permanent disability) under Pradhan Mantri Jeevan Jyoti Bima Yojana-PMJJBY. Circular FI
10/2021 dated 09.07.2021
421. Under Pradhan Mantri Jeevan Jyoti Bima Yojana-PMJJBY, No claim shall be payable in case of
death occurring within ______ days from the date of joining/rejoining the policy, except in case
46
of death due to accident. Circular FI 10/2021 dated 09.07.2021

Page


422. Age in respect of individual BCA should not be less than 18 years and not exceeding ______
years at the time of selection and would continue till the age of ______ years subject to annual
review. Circular FI 08/2021 dated 05.06.2021
D 65 years ; 70 years E None of the above Answer: C
423. As per our bank's Policy on Business Correspondents, The distance between the place of
business of a BC and the base branch should ordinarily not exceed ______ in rural, semi-urban
and urban areas. In metropolitan centres, the distance could be up to ______. Circular FI 08/2021
dated 05.06.2021
A 20 Kms ; 5 Kms B 30 Kms ; 5 Kms C 20 Kms ; 10 Kms
D 30 Kms ; 10 Kms E None of the above Answer: B
424. The cash held with BCA and cash in transit will be insured by bank. Bank has obtained
“Insurance of Cash handled by Business Correspondent Agents” covering cash in premises and
transit along with standard perils up to Rs. ______. Circular FI 08/2021 dated 05.06.2021
A Rs. 1 Lac B Rs. 2 Lac C Rs. 5 Lac
D Rs. 10 Lac E None of the above Answer: A
425. The grievances of the customers with regard to services provided by the Business
Correspondents shall be redressed properly without delays within ______ days at Branch level
and within ______ days at Circle office level. Circular FI 08/2021 dated 05.06.2021
A 5 days ; 10 days B 5 days ; 15 days C 7 days ; 10 days
D 7 days ; 15 days E None of the above Answer: D
426. If the complainant does not get satisfactory response from the Bank within ______ from the date
of his lodging the complaint, he will have the option to approach the office of the Banking
Ombudsman concerned for redressal of his grievance/s. Circular FI 08/2021 dated 05.06.2021
D 45 days E None of the above Answer: C
427. Any BC location would mandatorily be functional on all days of operation of the Base Branch.
The BCA shall be entitled to a leave gap arrangement for a period of maximum ______ in a
month. Circular FI 08/2021 dated 05.06.2021
D 45 days E None of the above Answer: A
428. Maximum Limit of Cash Deposit/transfer at BC location is Rs. ______ per person per day. Circular
FI 08/2021 dated 05.06.2021
A Rs. 10000/- B Rs. 15000/- C Rs. 20000/-
429. Maximum Limit of Cash withdrwal at BC location is Rs. ______ per person per day. Circular FI
08/2021 dated 05.06.2021
A Rs. 10000/- B Rs. 15000/- C Rs. 20000/-
430. To minimize the adverse impact of Covid on tourism industry, Govt. of India through Ministry of
Tourism, has introduced the Loan Guarantee Scheme for the Covid affected Tourism Service
Sector (LGSCATSS) for providing 100% guarantee coverage for a maximum loan of ₹ ______
each for Travel & Tourism Stakeholders and upto ₹ ______ each for registered Tourist Guides.
Circular MSME 85/2021 dated 08.11.2021
A ₹ 5.00 lakhs ; ₹ 1.00 B ₹ 10.00 lakhs ; ₹ 1.00 C ₹ 10.00 lakhs ; ₹ 2.00
lakh lakh lakh
D ₹ 10.00 lakhs ; ₹ 5.00 E None of the above Answer: B
lakh
431. Tenure of Loan under Loan Guarantee Scheme for the Covid affected Tourism Service Sector
(LGSCATSS) would be upto ______ years from the date of first disbursement including
moratorium period of ______. Circular MSME 85/2021 dated 08.11.2021
A 3 years ; one year B 5 years ; one year C 3 years ; two years
47
D 5 years ; two year E None of the above Answer: B

432. Margin under Loan Guarantee Scheme for the Covid affected Tourism Service Sector
Page
(LGSCATSS) shall be ______% Circular MSME 85/2021 dated 08.11.2021

A NIL B 5%. C 10%.

433. For Registered Tourist Guides under Loan Guarantee Scheme for the Covid affected Tourism
Service Sector (LGSCATSS), Loan amount shall be fixed based on the declaration given or
requested by Registered Tourist Guides subject to the maximum cap of ₹ ______ for the purpose
of discharging liabilities and restart their business affected due to Covid -19 pandemic. Circular
MSME 85/2021 dated 08.11.2021
A ₹ 1.00 lakh B ₹ 1.00 lakh C ₹ 5.00 lakh
D ₹ 10.00 lakh E None of the above Answer: A
434. For Travel & Tourism Stakeholders under Loan Guarantee Scheme for the Covid affected
Tourism Service Sector (LGSCATSS), Assessment of Loan amount (WCTL) shall be done on the
basis of ______% of the receipt of the last financial year or immediate pre covid year i.e. FY2019-
20 or estimated/projected receipt, whichever is higher, subject to the maximum cap of ₹ ______.
A 50%. ; ₹ 5.00 lakh B 50%. ; ₹ 10.00 lakh C 50%. ; ₹ 15.00 lakh
D 60%. ; ₹ 20.00 lakh E None of the above Answer: B
435. The projected receipt under Loan Guarantee Scheme for the Covid affected Tourism Service
Sector (LGSCATSS) for Travel & Tourism Stakeholders in case of WCTL, should not be more
than ______% of the receipt of the last financial year or immediate pre Covid year i.e. FY 2019-20,
whichever is higher. Circular MSME 85/2021 dated 08.11.2021
A 100%. B 125%. C 150%.
436. The Scheme for Loan Guarantee Scheme for the Covid affected Tourism Service Sector
(LGSCATSS) would be applicable to all eligible loans sanctioned on or after issuance of these
guidelines by NCGTC till ______, or till guarantees for an amount of Rs. ______ are issued under
the scheme, whichever is earlier. Circular MSME 85/2021 dated 08.11.2021
A 31st March, 2022 ; Rs. B 31st March, 2023 ; Rs. C 31st March, 2022 ; Rs.
250 crores 250 crores 300 crores
D 31st March, 2024 ; Rs. E None of the above Answer: A
500 crores
437. As per extended GECL, In case the borrower wishes to take from any lender an amount more
than the proportional 30% [40% in case of ECLGS 3.0 & ECLGS 3.0 (Extension), subject to cap of
Rs. ______ per borrower] of the outstanding credit that the borrower has with that particular
lender, a No Objection Certificate (NOC) would be required from such lenders whose share of
ECLGS loan is being proposed to be taken from the specificlender. Circular MSME 81/2021 dated
13.10.2021
438. As per extended GECL, The amount of GECL funding to existing ECLGS 1.0 borrowers or new
borrowers, in the form of additional working capital term loan facility would be upto ______% of
their total credit outstanding (net of support received under ECLGS 1.0) up to Rs. 50 crore (fund
based only) as on 29th February, 2020 or 31st March 2021, whichever is higher, subject to the
borrower meeting all the eligibility criteria. Circular MSME 81/2021 dated 13.10.2021
A 10%. ; Rs. 25 crore B 20%. ; Rs. 50 crore C 30%. ; Rs. 50 crore
D 40%. ; Rs. 100 crore E None of the above Answer: C
439. The tenor of loans provided under GECL shall be ______ years from the date of first
disbursement under extended ECLGS 1.0. Circular MSME 81/2021 dated 13.10.2021
D five years E None of the above Answer: D
440. Moratorium period of ______ years on the principal repayment shall be provided to borrowers for
the fund based portion of GECL credit under extended ECLGS 1.0. Circular MSME 81/2021 dated
13.10.2021
48

D five years E None of the above Answer: A
Page
441. Loan shall be repaid in ______ installments after the moratorium period is over under extended

ECLGS 1.0. Circular MSME 81/2021 dated 13.10.2021

A 24 B 36 C 48
D 60 E None of the above Answer: B
442. Under extended GECL 2.0, the amount of GECL funding to eligible borrowers either in the form
of additional working capital term loan facility and / or non-Fund based facility or a mix of the
two would be upto ______% of their total credit outstanding (fund based only, net of support
received under GECL 2.0) up to Rs. ______ as on 29th February, 2020 or 31st March, 2021,
whichever is higher, Circular MSME 81/2021 dated 13.10.2021
A 10%. ; Rs. 250 crore B 20%. ; Rs. 500 crore C 30%. ; Rs. 500 crore
D 40%. ; Rs. 1000 crore E None of the above Answer: C
the fund based portion of GECL credit under extended ECLGS 2.0. Circular MSME 81/2021 dated
13.10.2021
444. Loan shall be repaid in ______ installments after the moratorium period is over under extended
ECLGS 2.0. Circular MSME 81/2021 dated 13.10.2021
A 24 B 36 C 48
D 60 E None of the above Answer: C
445. Borrowers eligible for assistance under ECLGS 3.0 or 3.0 (Extension) who have not availed any
assistance under ECLGS 1.0 and / or 2.0 would be eligible for full ______% assistance under
ECLGS 3.0 or 3.0 (Extension), subject to a cap of Rs.200 crore per borrower and the borrower
meeting all the other eligibility criteria. Circular MSME 81/2021 dated 13.10.2021
A 20%. B 30%. C 40%.
446. The tenor of facilities provided under extended GECL 3.0 shall be ______ years from the date of
first disbursement. Circular MSME 81/2021 dated 13.10.2021
A three years B four years C five years
D six years E None of the above Answer: D
the fund based portion of GECL credit under extended ECLGS 3.0 Circular MSME 81/2021 dated
13.10.2021
448. The principal shall be repaid in ______ monthly instalments under extended ECLGS 3.0. Circular
MSME 81/2021 dated 13.10.2021
A 24 B 36 C 48
449. As Per Revised guidelines, All Business Enterprises/MSME borrower/ individuals who have
availed loan for business purposes with combined outstanding loans across all Banks/ FIs of up
to ₹ ______ as on 29.02.2020 are eligible under GECL 1.0 Scheme. Circular MSME 81/2021 dated
13.10.2021
D Rs. 250 crore E None of the above Answer: A
450. Under GECL 1.0, Pre-approved loan amount will be upto ______% of the total outstanding loans
of eligible borrowers up to ₹ 50.00 Crore as on 29th February, 2020 i.e. loan amount maximum of
₹______, subject to the borrower meeting all the eligibility criteria. Circular MSME 81/2021 dated
13.10.2021
A 20% ; ₹10.00 Crore B 40% ; ₹10.00 Crore C 20% ; ₹20.00 Crore
D 40% ; ₹20.00 Crore E None of the above Answer: A
451. Under GECL 1.0, The period of loan tenor is ______ years from the date of disbursement.
Moratorium period of ______ on the principal amount shall be provided to the borrowers during
49
which interest is to be payable. Circular MSME 81/2021 dated 13.10.2021

A four years ; one year B three years ; one year C four years ; two year
Page
D three years ; two year E None of the above Answer: A

452. Under GECL 1.0, The stipulation of second charge has been waived in respect of all loans up to
Rs.______ (outstanding as on February 29, 2020 plus loan sanctioned under GECL), subject to
the Bank ensuring to safeguard the interests of NCGTC. Circular MSME 81/2021 dated 13.10.2021
D Rs.50 lakh E None of the above Answer: A
453. Under GECL, The NCGTC shall pay 75% of the guaranteed amount within ______ days of
preferring of eligible claim by the Bank, subject to the claim being otherwise found in order and
complete in all respects. The balance 25% of the guaranteed amount will be paid on conclusion
of recovery proceedings or till the decree gets time barred, whichever is earlier. Circular MSME
81/2021 dated 13.10.2021
454. Under GECL 1.0, In case the borrower wishes to take from any lender an amount more than the
proportional 20% of the outstanding credit than the borrower has with that particular lender, a
No Objection Certificate (NOC) would be required from all other lenders. Circular MSME 81/2021
dated 13.10.2021
A 10%. B 20%. C 30%.
D 40%. E None of the above Answer: B
455. Under extended GECL 1.0 Scheme, The amount of GECL funding to existing ECLGS 1.0
borrowers or new borrowers, in the form of additional working capital term loan facility would be
upto ______% of their total fund based credit outstanding up to Rs. 50 crore (net of support
received under ECLGS 1.0) as on 29th February, 2020 or 31st March 2021, whichever is higher,
subject to the borrower meeting all the eligibility criteria. Circular MSME 81/2021 dated 13.10.2021
A 10%. B 20%. C 30%.
456. The tenor of loans provided under extended GECL 1.0 shall be ______ years from the date of first
disbursement. Moratorium period of 2 years on the principal repayment shall be provided to
borrowers for the fund based portion of GECL credit under ECLGS 1.0 (Extension). Circular
MSME 81/2021 dated 13.10.2021
A three years ; one year B four years ; two year C three years ; two year
D five years ; two years E None of the above Answer: D
457. Under extended GECL 1.0 Scheme, Loan shall be repaid in ______ installments after the
moratorium period is over. Circular MSME 81/2021 dated 13.10.2021
A 24 installments B 36 installments C 48 installments
D 60 installments E None of the above Answer: B
458. All Business Enterprises /MSMEs in the 26 sectors identified by the Kamath Committee on
Resolution Framework and the Healthcare sector who have availed loan for business purposes
with total credit outstanding (fund based only), across lending institutions, above Rs. 50 crore
and not exceeding Rs. ______ as on 29.02.2020 are covered under GECL 2.0. Circular MSME
81/2021 dated 13.10.2021
459. To be eligible under ECLGS 2.0, the borrower accounts should be less than or equal to ______
days past due as on February 29, 2020. Circular MSME 81/2021 dated 13.10.2021
460. The amount of GECL 2.0 funding to eligible borrowers either in the form of additional working
capital term loan facility and / or non-Fund based facility or a mix of the two would be up to
______% of their total credit outstanding (fund based only) up to Rs. 500 crore as on 29th
February, 2020, i.e. loan amount maximum of ₹ ______ (FB+NFB) subject to the borrower
meeting all the eligibility criteria. Circular MSME 81/2021 dated 13.10.2021
50
D 20% ; Rs. 100.00 Crore E None of the above Answer: D

461. Under GECL 2.0 (Extension), the amount of GECL funding to eligible borrowers either in the form
Page
of additional working capital term loan facility and / or non- Fund based facility or a mix of the

two would be upto ______% of their total fund based credit outstanding up to Rs. 500 crore (net
of support received under GECL 2.0) as on 29th February, 2020 or 31st March, 2021, whichever is
higher, subject to the borrower meeting all the eligibility criteria. Circular MSME 81/2021 dated
13.10.2021
A 10%. B 20%. C 30%.
462. Under ECLGS 2.0 & ECLGS 2.0 (Extension), Loan shall be repaid in ______ installments after the
moratorium period is over. Circular MSME 81/2021 dated 13.10.2021
D 60 installments E None of the above Answer: C
463. ECLGS 3.0 refers to the scheme for providing 100% guarantee to member lending institutions in
respect of eligible credit facility extended by them to its borrowers in the______ sectors. Circular
MSME 81/2021 dated 13.10.2021
A Hospitality B Travel & Tourism C Leisure & Sporting
D Civil Aviation sectors E All the above Answer: E
464. Under GECL 3.0, the amount of GECL funding to eligible borrowers in the form of additional
working capital term loan facility would be up to ______% of their total credit outstanding (fund
based only) as on 29.02.2020, subject to a cap of Rs. ______ (fund based only) per borrower and
the borrower meeting all the other eligibility criteria. Circular MSME 81/2021 dated 13.10.2021
A 40% ; ₹ 200 crore B 40% ; Rs. 100.00 Crore C 20% ; Rs. 100.00 Crore
D 20% ; Rs. 200.00 Crore E None of the above Answer: A
465. The eligible borrowers, who are eligible under ECLGS 3.0 and have already availed benefit under
ECLGS 1.0 or ECLGS 2.0 shall be eligible for additional credit upto ______% of their total credit
outstanding as on 29.02.2020. Circular MSME 81/2021 dated 13.10.2021
A 10%. B 20%. C 30%.
466. Borrowers eligible for assistance under ECLGS 3.0 or 3.0 (Extension) who have not availed any
assistance under ECLGS 1.0 and / or 2.0 would be eligible for full ______% assistance under
ECLGS 3.0 or 3.0 (Extension), subject to a cap of Rs. 200 crore per borrower and the borrower
meeting all the other eligibility criteria. Circular MSME 81/2021 dated 13.10.2021
A 10%. B 20%. C 30%.
467. The tenor of facilities provided under ECLGS 3.0 or 3.0 (Extension)shall be ______ years from
the date of first disbursement. Moratorium period of ______ years on the principal repayment
shall be provided to borrowers during which period interest shall be payable under ECLGS 3.0 or
3.0 (Extension). Circular MSME 81/2021 dated 13.10.2021
A three years ; one year B four years ; two year C three years ; two year
D six years ; two years E None of the above Answer: D
468. Under GECL 3.0 & 3.0 (Extension), The principal shall be repaid in ______ monthly instalments
after the moratorium period is over. Circular MSME 81/2021 dated 13.10.2021
D 60 installments E None of the above Answer: C
469. Facility under GECL is 100% guaranteed by NCGTC and it is fully secured. Exposure under
GECL carries ______% risk weight. Circular MSME 81/2021 dated 13.10.2021
A 0%. B 5%. C 10%.
470. ECLGS 4.0 refers to the scheme for providing 100% guarantee to member lending institutions in
respect of eligible credit facility extended by them to ______setting up of on-site oxygen
producing plants. Circular MSME 81/2021 dated 13.10.2021
A hospitals/nursing homes B clinics/medical colleges C units engaged in
manufacturing of liquid
oxygen, oxygen cylinders
51

471. Existing Hospitals/nursing homes/clinics/medical colleges/ Units engaged in manufacturing of
Page
liquid oxygen, oxygen Cylinders etc having credit facility with our Bank with days past due upto

______ days as on March 31, 2021 and requiring assistance of upto ₹ ______ for setting up low
cost technologies like Pressure Swing Adsorption etc. for onsite oxygen generation are eligible
under ECLGS 4.0. Circular MSME 81/2021 dated 13.10.2021
A 60 days ; ₹ 2 crore B 90 days ; ₹ 2 crore C 60 days ; ₹ 1 crore
D 90 days ; ₹ 1 crore E None of the above Answer: B
472. Under ECLGS 4.0, Tenor of facilities shall be for a maximum period of ______ years from the
date of first disbursement of fund based facility or first date of utilization of non-fund based
facility, whichever is earlier. Circular MSME 81/2021 dated 13.10.2021
473. Under ECLGS 4.0, Moratorium period of ______ months on the principal amount shall be
provided to borrowers for fund based portion during which interest shall be payable. The
principal along with interest shall be repaid in maximum ______ monthly instalments after the
moratorium period of 6 months is over. Circular MSME 81/2021 dated 13.10.2021
A 6 months ; 36 B 6 months ; 48 C 6 months ; 54
D 6 months ; 60 E None of the above Answer: C
474. CGTMSE vide Circular no. 186/2021-22 dated 08.10.2021 has decided to increase the threshold
for waiver of legal action while invoking the guarantee to Rs. ______ per claim based on the
aggregate outstanding amount considered eligible for claim settlement, as against the present
limit of Rs. 50,000/. Circular MSME 79/2021 dated 11.10.2021
A Rs. 1,00,000/- B Rs. 2,00,000/- C Rs. 3,00,000/-
D Rs. 5,00,000/- E None of the above Answer: A
475. Sankalp scheme will be applicable for new MSME customers for loan sanctions above Rs 20 lakh
and up to Rs ______ .A special discounted rate of interest, starting as low as RLLR + 0.20%,is
being offered. Circular MSME 78/2021 dated 07.10.2021
A Rs 25 crore B Rs 50 crore C Rs 75 crore
D Rs 100 crore E None of the above Answer: B
476. Sankalp Plus will cover new MSME customers primarily falling under ECGLS schemes with less
than Rs ______ sanction limit. Circular MSME 78/2021 dated 07.10.2021
D Rs 100 lakh E None of the above Answer: A
477. Ministry of Housing & Urban Affairs (MoHUA) has issued guidelines to provide an enhanced loan
under 2nd tranche of Rs. ______ to PM SVANidhi beneficiaries on timely repayment of earlier
loan under PM SVANidhi Scheme. However, the minimum amount of loan for 2nd tranche is fixed
at Rs. ______. Circular MSME 60/2021 dated 21.08.2021
A Rs. 20,000 ; Rs. 15,000 B Rs. 25,000 ; Rs. 15,000 C Rs. 20,000 ; Rs. 10,000
D Rs. 25,000 ; Rs. 10,000 E None of the above Answer: A
478. The tenure for 2nd tranche of loan under PM SVANidhi will be up to ______. Circular MSME
60/2021 dated 21.08.2021
479. The street vendors under PM SVANidhi will be eligible for interest subsidy @ 7% on 2nd tranche
loans up to ______. Circular MSME 60/2021 dated 21.08.2021
A March 31, 2022 B June 31, 2022 C March 31, 2023
D March 31, 2024 E None of the above Answer: A
480. Which of the following is/are incorrect in respect of 2nd tranche of loan under PM SVANidhi?
A The street vendors will be B Cashback on digital C The credit guarantee, as
eligible for interest subsidy transactions shall be per the existing structure,
@ 7% on 2nd tranche available for the will be available for all the
loans up to March 31, beneficiaries of 2nd 2nd tranche loans
2022. tranche loan. disbursed up to March 31,
52
2022.
Page
481. To make the MUDRA scheme more flexible and making this product easily accessible to all

eligible borrowers under Shishu Category, CRMC has approved e-MUDRA Scheme for loan upto
₹ ______. Circular MSME 59/2021 dated 19.08.2021
A ₹ 50,000/- B ₹ 100,000/- C ₹ 150,000/-
D ₹ 200,000/- E None of the above Answer: A
482. Individual Customer having an active SB/CA with us since past ______ months are eligible under
e-MUDRA Scheme. Circular MSME 59/2021 dated 19.08.2021
D 12 months E None of the above Answer: B
483. To eligible under e-MUDRA Scheme applicant should be ______ of age.
484. Quantum of Exposure under e-MUDRA Scheme will be Upto ₹______. Circular MSME 59/2021
dated 19.08.2021
A ₹ 50,000/- B ₹ 100,000/- C ₹ 150,000/-
D ₹ 200,000/- E None of the above Answer: A
485. Loan limit under e-MUDRA Scheme will be lowest of Rs. 50000/-, Loan Amount Requested, Cost
of Goods/Articles to be purchasedat and ______ times of the credit summation in the account in
the last 6 months. Circular MSME 59/2021 dated 19.08.2021
A five times B Six times C seven times
D ten times E None of the above Answer: D
486. Repayment Period under e-MUDRA Scheme will be upto ______ years including maximum
moratorium period of ______ months. However, Interest as and when due shall be serviced
during the moratorium period also. Circular MSME 59/2021 dated 19.08.2021
D 7 years ; 6 months E None of the above Answer: B
487. Margin under e-MUDRA Scheme will be ______%. Circular MSME 59/2021 dated 19.08.2021
A NIL B 5%. C 10%.
488. Which of the following is/are not a objective/s of formulation of e-Mudra? Circular MSME 59/2021
dated 19.08.2021
A To meet out credit needs B The proposed module of C The module will be non-
to the Micro and Small e-MUDRA will be rule discretionary & non-
entrepreneur through based processing & discriminatory.
Digital platform, which will sanctioning, which will be
be Straight Through completely system driven
Process as per EASE 3.0
agenda.
489. Which of the following is/are incorrect in respect of e-Mudra Scheme? Circular MSME 59/2021
dated 19.08.2021
A Acceptable Financial B Balance Sheet- Not C CIR score should be ≥650
Ratios- Not applicable applicable or -1
490. Which of the following is/are incorrect in respect of e-Mudra Scheme? Circular MSME 59/2021
dated 19.08.2021
A Udyam Registration B Loan will be sanctioned C submission of LSS is not
number is mandatory and only if present business required for loans
shall be verified during address declared by the sanctioned through
online customer journey. applicant is in the same eMudra portal
city, where his/her base
branch is located.
53
491. Under PNB CONTRACTOR Scheme, Business units should have been established in their line of
business for minimum of ______ years and the unit should have a Cash Profit in the immediate
Page
preceding year. Circular MSME 58/2021 dated 16.08.2021


492. Maximum Loan Amount under PNB CONTRACTOR Scheme will be Rs. ______. However,
interchangeability from Fund Based Working Capital (FBWC) limit to BG/LC may be permitted by
the sanctioning authority up to 25% of the sanction limit. Circular MSME 58/2021 dated 16.08.2021
A Rs. 1 crore ; 25% B Rs. 2 crore ; 25% C Need based ; 20%
D Need based ; 25% E None of the avove Answer: D
493. Margin under PNB CONTRACTOR Scheme for Term Loan will be minimum ______% margin on
equipments/ Plant & Machinery/ any other legitimate assets. Circular MSME 58/2021 dated
16.08.2021
A NIL B 15% C 20%
494. Margin under PNB CONTRACTOR Scheme for Term Loan will be minimum ______% margin on
Transport Vehicles, i.e., inclusive of insurance premium, RTO Tax and other incidental charges
in case of new vehicles. Circular MSME 58/2021 dated 16.08.2021
A NIL B 15% C 20%
495. Margin under PNB CONTRACTOR Scheme for Working Capital will be minimum ______%
margin. Circular MSME 58/2021 dated 16.08.2021
A NIL B 15% C 20%
496. Minimum cash margin for Performance guarantee under PNB CONTRACTOR Scheme will be
______%. Next higher authority can allow deduction in cash margin by maximum of ______%.
A 15% ; 10% B 20% ; 10% C 20% ; 15%
497. Cash margin for BG against disputed liabilities under PNB CONTRACTOR Scheme will be
______%. Circular MSME 58/2021 dated 16.08.2021
A 100% B 90% C 85%
498. Maximum repayment period of Term Loan under PNB CONTRACTOR Scheme will be ______
months including moratorium period of maximum of ______ months from the date of first
disbursement. Circular MSME 58/2021 dated 16.08.2021
D 84 months ; 6 months E None of the avove Answer: C
499. Collateral Security under PNB CONTRACTOR Scheme shall be minimum ______% of the
exposure (Fund based and Non- Fund based) by way of Mortgage of Immovable property/ liquid
security Circular MSME 58/2021 dated 16.08.2021
A 90% B 85% C 75%
500. Maximum Term Loan Amount under PNB TRANSPORT Scheme will be Rs. ______. Circular
MSME 57/2021 dated 16.08.2021
A Rs. 1.00 Crore B Rs. 2.00 Crore C Rs. 5.00 Crore
D Rs. 10.00 Crore E None of the avove Answer: C
501. For financing Used/ Second Hand Vehicles under PNB TRANSPORT Scheme, minimum purchase
price of the vehicle should be Rs. ______. Circular MSME 57/2021 dated 16.08.2021
A Rs. 5.00 lac B Rs. 10.00 lac C Rs. 20.00 lac
D Rs. 25.00 lac E None of the avove Answer: A
502. Maximum OD Limit under PNB TRANSPORT Scheme will be Rs. ______ per vehicle financed by
our Bank subject to maximum Rs.______ per borrower. Circular MSME 57/2021 dated 16.08.2021
A Rs. 50000/- ; Rs.5.00 B Rs. 50000/- ; Rs.10.00 C Rs.1.00 lac ; Rs.5.00
lac lac lac
54
D Rs.1.00 lac ; Rs.10.00 E None of the avove Answer: B

lac
Page
503. OD limit under PNB TRANSPORT Scheme shall be allowed against the vehicles financed by our

Bank only, having on-road purchase price of Rs.______ and above. Circular MSME 57/2021 dated
16.08.2021
D Rs. 25.00 lac E None of the avove Answer: A
504. In case of loans above Rs.2.00 lac, margin for New Vehicles under PNB TRANSPORT Scheme
shall be ______% of “On Road Price” as per the performa invoice of the Dealer or ______% of the
cost on purchase of chasis, cost of body building, road tax & insurance expenses. Circular MSME
57/2021 dated 16.08.2021
A 15% ; 10% B 15% ; 15% C 20% ; 10%
505. In case of loans upto Rs.2.00 lac margin for New Vehicles under PNB TRANSPORT Scheme shall
be ______%. Circular MSME 57/2021 dated 16.08.2021
A NIL B 10% C 20%
506. In case of E-Rickshaws under PNB TRANSPORT Scheme, total Term Loan including replacement
cost of batteries (Upto 2 batteries) shall be sanctioned in the beginning by keeping minimum
margin of ______%. Circular MSME 57/2021 dated 16.08.2021
A NIL B 10% C 20%
507. In case of E-Rickshaws under PNB TRANSPORT Scheme, The TL for batteries will be disbursed
through the same A/c after one & two year subsequently. The EMI will be fixed in such a way the
total Term Loan is adjusted in ______. Circular MSME 57/2021 dated 16.08.2021
508. Margin under PNB TRANSPORT Scheme shall be ______% for used/ second hand Light
Commercial Vehicle /MCV/HCV not older than ______ years. (Second hand E-rickshaws shall not
be financed) Circular MSME 57/2021 dated 16.08.2021
A 20% ; 2 years B 20% ; 3 years C 25% ; 2 years
D 25% ; 3 years E None of the avove Answer: C
509. For loan amount above Rs. 10.00 Lakh under PNB TRANSPORT Scheme, average DSCR should
be minimum of ______ and it should not fall below ______ during any year of the repayment
period. Circular MSME 57/2021 dated 16.08.2021
A 2.00 ; 1.20 B 1.50 ; 1.20 C 2.00 ; 1.50
D 1.50 ; 1.50 E None of the avove Answer: B
510. Tenure of Loan for new vehicles under PNB TRANSPORT Scheme for Loans upto Rs. 2.00 lac
will be up to ______ months and for Loans above Rs. 2.00 lac will be upto ______ months Circular
MSME 57/2021 dated 16.08.2021
D 60 months ; 60 months E None of the avove Answer: B
511. In case of used/ second hand vehicle, maximum repayment period under PNB TRANSPORT
Scheme shall be ______ months from the 1st registration date of the vehicle Circular MSME
57/2021 dated 16.08.2021
512. In cases where body building is required for the vehicle , Max. moratorium period upto ______
months may be allowed under PNB TRANSPORT Scheme. Circular MSME 57/2021 dated
16.08.2021
513. For loan amount above Rs. 10.00 Lacs under PNB TRANSPORT Scheme,______% collateral
Security in the shape of immovable property/ eligible liquid security from the borrower or Credit
Guarantee Coverage under CGTMSE/CGSSI for the entire exposure shall be obtained. Circular
55
MSME 57/2021 dated 16.08.2021

A 50% B 60% C 80%
Page

514. For loan amount upto Rs. 10.00 Lacs under PNB TRANSPORT Scheme,______% collateral
Security in the shape of immovable property/ eligible liquid security from the borrower shall be
obtained. Circular MSME 57/2021 dated 16.08.2021
A 100%. B 110%. C 125%.
D 150%. E None of the avove Answer: E
515. Under PNB TRANSPORT Scheme, Loan without Collateral security or CGTMSE/CGSSI coverage
shall be maximum upto ______% of borrower’s existing exposure or ₹______, whichever is
lower. Circular MSME 57/2021 dated 16.08.2021
A 30% ; ₹1.00 Crore B 40% ; ₹1.00 Crore C 50% ; ₹1.00 Crore
D 50% ; ₹2.00 Crore E None of the avove Answer: C
516. In case of purchase of old vehicle under PNB TRANSPORT Scheme, valuation of the vehicle for
the purpose of advance shall be the purchase price of the new vehicle less depreciation @
______% p.a. for a period starting from the date when the vehicle was first put on the road or the
value assessed through independent agency like the Automobile Association/ Chartered
Engineers etc., whichever is less. Circular MSME 57/2021 dated 16.08.2021
A 10%. B 20%. C 25%.
517. Government of India and SIDBI set up the Credit Guarantee Fund Trust for Micro and Small
Enterprises (CGTMSE). Credit facility under CGTMSE scheme is provided to MSE sector for loan
upto₹______ without obtaining collateral security / third party guarantees. Circular MSME 56/2021
dated 16.08.2021
518. CGTMSE has introduced a new “Hybrid Security” product allowing guarantee cover for the
portion of credit facility not covered by collateral security. Under this model, Bank is allowed to
obtain collateral security for a part of the credit facility, whereas the remaining part of the credit
facility, up to a maximum of ₹______, can be covered under Credit Guarantee Scheme of
CGTMSE. Circular MSME 56/2021 dated 16.08.2021
519. Under Resolution Framework 2.0, General Banking Branches (GBBs) can do Full/Part
Conversion of Working Capital limit into Term Loan i.e. WCTL for aggregate exposure up to
₹______. Circular MSME 51/2021 dated 30.06.2021
D ₹25.00 lakh E None of the avove Answer: B
520. Under Resolution Framework 2.0, Maximum moratorium period of ______ shall be allowed for
WCTL / additional Term Loan facility from the date of implementation. However Interest shall
continue to be serviced by Borrower as and when due. Circular MSME 51/2021 dated 30.06.2021
521. Under Resolution Framework 2.0, For Loans having exposure upto ₹1.00 crore as on 31.03.2021,
Interest for the moratorium period may be converted into FITL, repayable within a maximum
period of ______ years including ______ months moratorium provided if any. Circular MSME
51/2021 dated 30.06.2021
D 3 years ; 3 months E None of the avove Answer: A
522. Under Resolution Framework 2.0, For Loans having exposure above ₹1.00 crore as on
31.03.2021, Interest for the moratorium period may be converted into FITL, repayable within a
maximum period of ______ years including ______ years moratorium provided if any. Circular
MSME 51/2021 dated 30.06.2021
D 5 years ; 3 years E None of the avove Answer: B
56
523. Under Resolution Framework 2.0, to relaxing requirement of audited financials for FY ending
31.03.2021 on account of COVID impact and difficulty in getting ABS, sanctioning authority may
Page
accept Self certified financials for exposures upto ₹______. Circular MSME 51/2021 dated

30.06.2021
524. Under Resolution Framework 2.0, to relaxing requirement of audited financials for FY ending
31.03.2021 on account of COVID impact and difficulty in getting ABS, sanctioning authority may
accept Self certified financials for exposures above ₹1.00 crore to ₹______ where no additional
exposure is taken in the Borrowal account. Circular MSME 51/2021 dated 30.06.2021
525. Under Resolution Framework 2.0, If additional exposure is proposed, CA certified financials is
required for exposures above ₹1.00 crore to ₹______ . Circular MSME 51/2021 dated 30.06.2021
526. Under Resolution Framework 2.0, provisional financials certified by CA/Statutory Auditor (SA) is
required for exposures above ₹______. Circular MSME 51/2021 dated 30.06.2021
527. Resolution of Exposures for Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises (MSMEs) under Resolution
Framework 2.0, The aggregate exposure, including non-fund based facilities, of all lending
institutions to the borrower does not exceed ₹ ______ as on March 31, 2021. Circular MSME
45/2021 dated 09.06.2021
A ₹ 25.00 crore B ₹ 50.00 crore C ₹ 75.00 crore
D ₹ 100.00 crore E None of the avove Answer: B
528. The restructuring of the borrower account under Resolution Framework 2.0 is implemented
within ______ from the date of invocation. Circular MSME 42/2021 dated 27.05.2021
529. Upon implementation of the restructuring plan under Resolution Framework 2.0, the lending
institutions shall keep provision of ______ percent of the residual debt of the borrower. Circular
MSME 42/2021 dated 27.05.2021
D 25 percent E None of the avove Answer: A
530. Under Resolution Framework 2.0, Rescheduling of installments and extension of tenure will be
maximum up to ______ years from the date of original sanction of loan. Circular MSME 42/2021
dated 27.05.2021
531. For restructuring of the borrower account under Resolution Framework 2.0, TEV study is not
required for the borrowers having exposure upto Rs ______. Circular MSME 42/2021 dated
27.05.2021
532. In case exposure of the borrower is above Rs ______ and additional funding is not considered,
TEV study shall not be required for restructuring of the borrower account under Resolution
Framework 2.0. Circular MSME 42/2021 dated 27.05.2021
533. Maximum Quantum of loan (Overall exposure including Term Loanand LC) under PNB JEEVAN
RAKSHAK SCHEME will be Rs. ______. Circular MSME 41/2021 dated 27.05.2021
D ₹10 crore E None of the avove Answer: B
534. In case of existing customers for setting up of Oxygen Plant under PNB JEEVAN RAKSHAK
57
SCHEME, ______% financing can be considered provided Internal Risk Rating (IRR) is upto B1.
Page
A 75%. B 80%. C 90%.


535. In case of New Customers & B2 rated customers for setting up of Oxygen Plant under PNB
JEEVAN RAKSHAK SCHEME, margin shall be ______%. Circular MSME 41/2021 dated 27.05.2021
A 10%. B 15%. C 20%.
536. Repayment period Term Loan under PNB JEEVAN RAKSHAK SCHEME shall be maximum of
______ years including moratorium period of ______ months. Circular MSME 41/2021 dated
27.05.2021
537. In case of individual borrower & MSE borrower and in case of pre-payment through internal
accrual/own fund, Pre-Payment Penalty under PNB JEEVAN RAKSHAK SCHEME will be
______% p.a. of the prepaid amount. Circular MSME 41/2021 dated 27.05.2021
A Nil B 1%. C 1.5%.
538. In case of other than individual borrower & MSE borrower where loan is taken over by other
Bank, Pre-Payment Penalty under PNB JEEVAN RAKSHAK SCHEME will be ______% p.a. of the
prepaid amount. Circular MSME 41/2021 dated 27.05.2021
A Nil B 1%. C 1.5%.
D 2.00%. E None of the avove Answer: D
539. For Bill Discounting Facility under Supply Chain Finance Scheme for Dealers/Vendors, Tenor of
the bills shall be maximum of ______. Circular MSME 31/2021 dated 13.04.2021
540. To give ease to the small borrowers, Our bank has approved a simplified Straight Through
Process (STP) for renewal of business working capital credit facilities having exposure upto ₹
______, with satisfactory conduct of account. Circular MSME 25/2021 dated 12.03.2021
A ₹ 1.00 lacs B ₹ 2.00 lacs C ₹ 5.00 lacs
D ₹ 10.00 lacs E None of the avove Answer: B
541. Maximum Loan Amount under PNB Electronic Dealer Scheme (PNB e-Dealer Scheme) for IOCL
will be up to Rs. ______. Circular MSME 14/2021 dated 12.02.2021
A ₹ 1.00 lacs B ₹ 2.00 lacs C ₹ 5.00 lacs
D ₹ 10.00 lacs E None of the avove Answer: B
542. Credit period shall be taken as ______ days for assessment of limit under PNB Electronic Dealer
Scheme (PNB e-Dealer Scheme) for IOCL. Circular MSME 14/2021 dated 12.02.2021
543. Maximum Period of Advance under PNB Electronic Dealer Scheme (PNB e-Dealer Scheme) for
IOCL will be ______ with maximum Grace Period of ______ for all categories of dealers. Circular
MSME 14/2021 dated 12.02.2021
D 30 days ; 10 days E None of the avove Answer: A
544. Collateral Security under PNB Electronic Dealer Scheme (PNB e-Dealer Scheme) for IOCL shall
be nil provided dealer has dealership with IOCL having tenure of ______ years or more. Circular
MSME 14/2021 dated 12.02.2021
545. If the condition of dealership with IOCL having tenure of 5 years or more is not met by the dealer,
minimum ______% tangible collateral security in the form of Immovable Security/ Bank’s
approved liquid securities will be obtained under PNB Electronic Dealer Scheme (PNB e-Dealer
Scheme) for IOCL. Circular MSME 14/2021 dated 12.02.2021
A 10%. B 15%. C 20%.
58

546. Loan Amount under PNB GST Express Loan will be above Rs.______ to Rs.______. Circular
Page
MSME 07/2021 dated 29.01.2021

A Rs.5.00 Lacs ; B Rs.10.00 Lacs ; C Rs.10.00 Lacs ;

Rs.100.00 lakh Rs.50.00 lakh Rs.100.00 lakh
D Rs.20.00 Lacs ; E None of the avove Answer: C
Rs.100.00 lakh
547. MPBF for Cash Credit Facility under PNB GST Express Loan shall be allowed based on ______%
of the sales reported in the GST returns in the last one year (last 12 months). Circular MSME
07/2021 dated 29.01.2021
A 10%. B 15%. C 20%.
548. Under PNB GST Express Loan wherever GST returns have been filed for less than one year,
MPBF shall be arrived based on ______% of the annual sales after annualising GST returns filed
for that period provided customer has filed minimum GST returns of the last 6 months. Circular
MSME 07/2021 dated 29.01.2021
A 10%. B 15%. C 20%.
549. As per RBI vide its notification dated 29.10.2021 where the exposure of the banking system is
less than ₹______, there is no restriction on opening of current accounts or on provision of
CC/OD facility by banks, subject to obtaining an undertaking from such borrowers that they shall
inform the bank(s), as and when the credit facilities availed by them from the banking system
reaches ₹______ or more. Circular L&A 167/2021 dated 06.11.2021
A ₹3 crore ; ₹5 crore B ₹5 crore ; ₹5 crore C ₹10 crore ; ₹5 crore
D ₹10 crore ; ₹10 crore E None of the above Answer: B
550. As per RBI vide its notification dated 29.10.2021,where exposure of the banking system is ₹5
crore or more, such borrower can maintain current accounts with any one of the banks with
which it has CC/OD facility, provided that the bank has at least ______ per cent of the exposure
of the banking system to that borrower. Circular L&A 167/2021 dated 06.11.2021
A 5 per cent B 10 per cent C 15 per cent
D 20 per cent E None of the above Answer: B
551. The Credit Guarantee Scheme for MFIs (CGSMFI) would be applicable to all loans sanctioned by
the MLIs under CGSMFI during the period from issue of these guidelines to March 31, 2022 or till
guarantees for an amount of Rs.______ are issued under CGSMFI, whichever is earlier. Circular
L&A 163/2021 dated 28.10.2021
A Rs.6,500 crore B Rs.7,500 crore C Rs.8,500 crore
D Rs.9,500 crore E None of the above Answer: B
552. At least ______% of the funding provided and covered under Credit Guarantee Scheme for MFIs
(CGSMFI) goes to lower rated NBFC-MFIs/MFIs (i.e. NBFC-MFIs/MFI rated/graded MfR 2 or
below). Circular L&A 163/2021 dated 28.10.2021
A 40%. B 50%. C 60%.
553. The funding provided by the MLIs under Credit Guarantee Scheme for MFIs (CGSMFI) shall be
eligible for credit guarantee coverage by NCGTC upto ______% of the amount in default. Circular
L&A 163/2021 dated 28.10.2021
A 40%. B 50%. C 60%.
554. The tenor of loans extended by the MLIs and NBFC-MFIs/MFIs would be need based as per
assessment. However, the tenor of NCGTC’s guarantee would be for a maximum period of
______ years. Circular L&A 163/2021 dated 28.10.2021
555. The MLI shall, upon an NBFC-MFI/MFI defaulting in repayment of dues and turning NPA, shall
approach NCGTC and file claim for eligible amount. The first such claim should be filed ______
years after the date of issue of guarantee or date of disbursement of tranche, whichever is later.
59
Circular L&A 163/2021 dated 28.10.2021

Page

556. Under Credit Guarantee Scheme for MFIs (CGSMFI), The guaranteed amount shall be paid within
______ days by NCGTC to the MLIs on invocation of the guarantee/submission of the claim.
557. Charges for issuance of Solvency Certificate shalll be lavied @ 0.10% of certificate amount with
a minimum of ₹______ and maximum ₹25000/-. Any additional certificate issued within a period
of 3 months of issuance of 1st solvency certificate, only ______% of the applicable charges shall
be levied. Circular L&A 160/2021 dated 25.10.2021
A ₹1000/- ; ₹25000/- ; B ₹1000/- ; ₹15000/- ; C ₹1000/- ; ₹15000/- ;
25% 50% 25%
D ₹1000/- ; ₹25000/- ; E None of the above Answer: D
50%
558. Exposure to a single Association of Persons (AOP) borrower by way of Fund Based and Non
Fund Based facilities shall be restricted to ₹______.. Circular L&A 154/2021 dated 11.10.2021
A ₹100 Crore B ₹75 Crore C ₹50 Crore
D ₹25 Crore E None of the above Answer: C
559. For accounts under sole banking, Due diligence report by professionals shall be obtained for the
corporate borrowers with aggregate (fund & non-fund based) limits of Rs ______ & above.
A Rs 10 Crores B Rs 20 Crores C Rs 25 Crores
D Rs 50 Crores E None of the above Answer: B
560. A time period of ______ days should be allotted to CA/CS for submission of the Due Diligence
Report for borrowers availing aggregate (fund and non-fund based) limits of Rs.20 Cr. & above
under consortium / multiple Banking arrangements. Circular L&A 151/2021 dated 30.09.2021
561. The fee payable for issuance of diligence report may be charged @ 0.005% of the limit (i.e.
Rs.500/- per Rs. 1 crore) with a maximum ceiling of Rs.______. Circular L&A 151/2021 dated
30.09.2021
A Rs.25000/- B Rs.50000/- C Rs.75000/-
562. Branch Heads of LCBs/ELCBs/Zonal Heads may consider payment of enhanced fee upto
0.0075% of the limit (i.e. Rs.750/- per Rs.1.00 crore) with a maximum of Rs. ______ in exceptional
cases (depending upon the volume of work) for issuance of diligence report. Circular L&A
151/2021 dated 30.09.2021
A Rs.25000/- B Rs.50000/- C Rs.75000/-
563. Line of Credit if availed in form of WCDL may be disbursed in tranches & should be adjusted
within the respective tenor of the tranche from the date of respective disbursement. The
maximum tenor of the tranche shall be ______ months from the date of disbursement. Circular
L&A 145/2021 dated 27.09.2021
564. Where Line of Credit is disbursed in tranches and expiry of tranches is going beyond the expiry
of sanction, in such cases review of credit facilities should be conducted immediately on
completion of ______ months from date of sanction to maintain the credit discipline. Circular L&A
145/2021 dated 27.09.2021
565. In case Borrowers are falling under exempted category for Tax Audit as per Income Tax Act,
Audited Financial Statement is required for facilities availed above Rs. ______ from our Bank.
60

A Rs. 20.00 Lacs B Rs. 25.00 Lacs C Rs. 50.00 Lacs
Page
D Rs. 100.00 Lacs E None of the above Answer: C

566. In case Borrowers are falling under exempted category for Tax Audit as per Income Tax Act,
Self-Certified Financial Statement is required for facilities availed from our Bank upto Rs. ______
. Circular L&A 144/2021 dated 24.09.2021
567. Under Welcome Back scheme (A scheme to bring back borrowal accounts taken over by other
Banks / Fis), Credit audit is to be conducted for accounts with exposure of Rs ______ and above.
D Rs 5 crore E None of the above Answer: A
568. Which of the following eligibility criteria is incorrect in respect of Welcome Back scheme (A
scheme to bring back borrowal accounts taken over by other Banks / Fis)?
A. Borrowal accounts (that include e-OBC, e-UNI) shifted to other Banks / FIs on or after
01.01.2019
B. Borrower has availed credit facility with our Bank for minimum one year period prior to
takeover by Bank / FI.
C. Borrowal unit has been in existence for at least 3 years as on date of sanction.
D. Borrowal account should have earned cash profit1 during the preceding two years from the
date of sanction Circular L&A 133/2021 dated 23.08.2021
A Only A B Only B C Only C
D Only D E None of the Above Answer: E
569. Which of the following eligibility criteria is incorrect in respect of Welcome Back scheme (A
scheme to bring back borrowal accounts taken over by other Banks / Fis)? Circular L&A 133/2021
dated 23.08.2021
A Account should not be B Account should not have C Account should be
Restructured / slipped to SMA-2 on any Regular Standard as on
Rescheduled during the day during the preceding date of sanction
last 24 months from the 12 months from the date of
date of sanction. sanction.
D All the above E None of the Above Answer: E
570. Which of the following statement/s is/are incorrect in respect of Welcome Back scheme (A
scheme to bring back borrowal accounts taken over by other Banks / Fis)? Circular L&A 133/2021
dated 23.08.2021
A No upfront fee shall be B Documentation fee has C Processing fee is waived
charged in case of Term been waived for the first year
Loan limits taken over
under the scheme
571. Tenure of Term Loan under Credit Guarantee Scheme for MFIs (CGSMFI) will be upto ______
years including moratorium.
A 2 years B 3 years C 5years
572. At least ______% of the funding made and covered under Credit Guarantee Scheme for MFIs
(CGSMFI) should go to NBFC-MFIs / MFIs rated / graded MFR 2 or below.
A 25% B 40% C 50%
573. The borrower shall ensure that ______% of the finance obtained under Credit Guarantee Scheme
for MFIs (CGSMFI) is utilized for creation of fresh loan assets and these assets should be
created within a period of ______ from the date of disbursement of each tranche of loans Circular
L&A 127/2021 dated 09.08.2021
A 60% ; 4 months B 60% ; 6 months C 80% ; 4 months
61
D 80% ; 6 months E None of the above Answer: C

574. The funding so provided by the Bank under Credit Guarantee Scheme for MFIs (CGSMFI) shall
Page
be guaranteed by NCGTC to the extent of ______% of amount in default for a maximum period of

______ years. Circular L&A 127/2021 dated 09.08.2021

A 75% ; 3 years B 75% ; 5 years C 80% ; 3 years
D 80% ; 5 years E None of the above Answer: A
575. NBFC MFIs exposure ceiling for borrower as per RBI guidelines on Large Exposure Framework
(LEF) shall be ______% of Bank’s Tier- I Capital. Circular L&A 127/2021 dated 09.08.2021
A 10% B 15% C 20%
576. NBFC MFIs exposure ceiling for Group borrower as per RBI guidelines on Large Exposure
Framework (LEF) shall be ______% of Bank’s Tier- I Capital. Circular L&A 127/2021 dated
09.08.2021
A 10% B 15% C 20%
577. Loan assistance per MFI for on lending is subject to a maximum cap of ₹______.
D ₹500 Crore E None of the above Answer: C
578. Which of the following guideline/s for financing NBFC-MFI is/are not applicable if the proposal is
to be covered under the guarantee scheme:
A Prior administrative B Fresh exposure should be C In existing accounts no
approval / clearance of taken in A & above additional exposure /
HOCAC-II. externally rated accounts enhancement etc. should
on merits only. be given
in BBB & below rated
accounts.
D All the above E None of the Above Answer: D
579. Maximum loan per project under Loan Guarantee Scheme for COVID Affected Sectors (LGSCAS)
– Health Care Sector shall be limited to ₹______ FOR both fund based and non-fund based
included. Circular L&A 126/2021 dated 09.08.2021
D ₹500 Crore E None of the above Answer: A
580. Margin in case of Term Loan under Loan Guarantee Scheme for COVID Affected Sectors
(LGSCAS) – Health Care Sector for acquisition of premises and / or expansion /
renovation / modernization of existing premises shall be ______%. Circular L&A 126/2021 dated
09.08.2021
A 10% B 15% C 20%
581. Margin in case of Term Loan under Loan Guarantee Scheme for COVID Affected Sectors
(LGSCAS) – Health Care Sector for purchase of equipment / machinery / cost of on
road vehicles / for Ambulance / Other Vehicle shall be ______%. Circular L&A 126/2021 dated
09.08.2021
A 10% B 15% C 20%
582. In case of purchase of land under Loan Guarantee Scheme for COVID Affected Sectors
(LGSCAS) – Health Care Sector, margin should be minimum of ______% of the cost of land
(including cost of registration). Circular L&A 126/2021 dated 09.08.2021
A 15% B 20% C 25%
583. Margin under Loan Guarantee Scheme for COVID Affected Sectors (LGSCAS) – Health Care
Sector for Working Capital against Stock / Book Debts shall be ______%. Circular L&A 126/2021
dated 09.08.2021
A 10% B 15% C 20%
62

584. Cash Margin for BG / LC under Loan Guarantee Scheme for COVID Affected Sectors (LGSCAS) –
Page
Health Care Sector shall be ______%. Circular L&A 126/2021 dated 09.08.2021

A 10% B 15% C 20%

585. Tenure of Term Loan for Social Infrastructure under Loan Guarantee Scheme for COVID Affected
Sectors (LGSCAS) – Health Care Sector shall be upto ______ years. Circular L&A 126/2021 dated
09.08.2021
D 10 years E None of the above Answer: D
586. Tenure of Term Loan for other than Social Infrastructure under Loan Guarantee Scheme for
COVID Affected Sectors (LGSCAS) – Health Care Sector shall be upto ______ years. Circular L&A
126/2021 dated 09.08.2021
587. Maximum moratorium period for Green Field Project under Loan Guarantee Scheme for COVID
Affected Sectors (LGSCAS) – Health Care Sector shall be upto ______ months. Circular L&A
126/2021 dated 09.08.2021
588. Maximum moratorium period for Brown Field Project under Loan Guarantee Scheme for COVID
Affected Sectors (LGSCAS) – Health Care Sector shall be upto ______ months. Circular L&A
126/2021 dated 09.08.2021
D 48 months E None of the above Answer: A
589. Under Loan Guarantee Scheme for COVID Affected Sectors (LGSCAS) – Health Care Sector,
Minimum ______% collateral security shall be obtained in the form of immovable property / liquid
security. Circular L&A 126/2021 dated 09.08.2021
A 10% B 15% C 20%
590. Under Loan Guarantee Scheme for COVID Affected Sectors (LGSCAS) – Health Care Sector, No
collateral is required if realizable value of the primary security in the shape of Land & Building
mortgaged is more than ______% of the total exposure. Circular L&A 126/2021 dated 09.08.2021
A 25% B 40% C 50%
591. ______% loans will be covered under Loan Guarantee Scheme for COVID Affected Sectors
(LGSCAS) - Health Care Sector of NCGTC, for r Brownfield Projects situated at urban or rural
locations other than 8 Metropolitan Tier 1 cities Circular L&A 126/2021 dated 09.08.2021
A 25% B 40% C 50%
592. ______% loans will be covered under Loan Guarantee Scheme for COVID Affected Sectors
(LGSCAS) - Health Care Sector of NCGTC, for Greenfield Projects & Aspirational Districts
situated at urban or rural locations other than 8 Metropolitan Tier 1 cities Circular L&A 126/2021
dated 09.08.2021
A 25% B 40% C 50%
593. The maximum period of guarantee cover for Brownfield Projects under Loan Guarantee Scheme
for COVID Affected Sectors (LGSCAS) - Health Care Sector shall be available upto ______ years
from the Date of Commencement of Commercial Operations (DCCO), subject to a maximum
guarantee period of ______ years from the date of first disbursement. Circular L&A 126/2021 dated
09.08.2021
A 1 year ; 3 years B 1 year ; 5 years C 2 years ; 3 years
D 2 years ; 5 years E None of the above Answer: D
594. The maximum period of guarantee cover for Greenfield Projects under Loan Guarantee Scheme
for COVID Affected Sectors (LGSCAS) - Health Care Sector shall be available upto ______ years
63
from the date of first disbursement. Circular L&A 126/2021 dated 09.08.2021
Page

595. Purpose of Loan Guarantee Scheme for COVID Affected Sectors (LGSCAS) – Health Care Sector
is extending credit support to Health Care Sector for setting up of or modernizing /expanding:
A Hospitals / Dispensaries / B Facilities for manufacturing C Public Healthcare
Clinics / Medical Colleges / of Vaccines / Oxygen / Facilities
Pathology Labs / Ventilators / Priority
Diagnostic Centers medical devices
596. Which of the following statement/s is/are incorrect in respect of Loan Guarantee Scheme for
COVID Affected Sectors (LGSCAS) for Health Care Sector? Circular L&A 126/2021 dated
09.08.2021
A Loans provided in B Traders are not C Only new machinery /
individual capacity allowed under the vehicle / other asset shall
will not be covered scheme. be
under the Scheme. financed
597. Which of the following statement/s is/are incorrect in respect of Collateral Security under Loan
Guarantee Scheme for COVID Affected Sectors (LGSCAS) for Health Care Sector? Circular L&A
126/2021 dated 09.08.2021
A Minimum 25% B No collateral is C For Financing Medical
collateral security required if Equipment: Collateral
shall be obtained realizable value of Security need not be
in the the primary insisted upon.
form of immovable security in the
property / liquid security. shape of Land &
Building
mortgaged is more
than 100% of the total
exposure.
598. As per RBI Guidelines on Opening of Current Accounts by Banks, In case of borrowers who
have not availed of CC/OD facility from any bank, there is no restriction on opening of current
accounts by any bank if exposure of the banking system to such borrowers is less than ₹______
. Circular L&A 125/2021 dated 07.08.2021
D ₹5 crore E None of the above Answer: D
599. In case of borrowers who have not availed of CC/OD facility from any bank and the exposure of
the banking system is ₹ 5 crore or more but less than ₹ ______, there is no restriction on lending
banks to such borrowers from opening a current account. Even non-lending banks can open
current accounts for such borrowers though only for collection purposes. Circular L&A 125/2021
dated 07.08.2021
600. At the time of Renewal/enhancement of limits in case of externally unrated Educational
Institution having exposure of more than Rs.______ from our Bank (exposure of more than Rs.25
crores in case loan is under atleast 75% collateral coverage), stipulate that the borrower shall get
itself externally rated within a period of ______ failing which the Bank shall charge penal interest
as per Bank’s extant guidelines. Circular L&A 124/2021 dated 07.08.2021
A Rs.2 crores ; 3 months B Rs.2 crores ; 6 months C Rs.5 crores ; 3 months
D Rs.5 crores ; 6 months E None of the above Answer: C
601. Minimum Margin in case of advance against book debts shall be ______%. However, the
sanctioning authority may stipulate higher margin depending upon perception of
borrowers/debtors, credit risk rating, nature of business dealings, debtors realization history and
64
nature of other securities etc. Circular L&A 123/2021 dated 03.08.2021

A 10% B 15% C 25%
Page

602. Based on merits of the proposal in case of advance against book debts, ZOCAC- II may consider
reduction in margin upto ______% within their vested loaning powers Circular L&A 123/2021 dated
03.08.2021
A 10% B 15% C 25%
603. Based on merits of the proposal in case of advance against book debts, HOCAC- I may consider
reduction in margin upto ______% within their vested loaning powers Circular L&A 123/2021 dated
03.08.2021
A 10% B 15% C 25%
604. The facility to finance debtors of allied/associate concern should be allowed only to corporate
borrowers engaged in manufacturing activities and EPC Contractors and will be restricted to
______% of Book Debt limits. Circular L&A 123/2021 dated 03.08.2021
A 10% B 15% C 25%
605. Borrower shall submit stock reports giving a complete list of all stocks, as on the last day of
each month, within ______ of the following month, unless other-wise specified in the sanction
606. Period of Foreign Currency Loan will be 12 months in case of WC limit and maximum upto
______ years or remaining repayment period of Rupee Term Loan, whichever is lower, in case of
FCTL. Circular L&A 120/2021 dated 16.07.2021
607. Bills accompanied by MTRs of approved transport companies held as security for advances not
to be detained beyond the period of ______, If the goods are consigned to a distance of 500 kms.
D 15days E None of the above Answer: B
to be detained beyond the period of ______, If the goods have been consigned to a distance
beyond 500 kms but upto 1000 kms. Circular L&A 120/2021 dated 16.07.2021
D 15days E None of the above Answer: C
to be detained beyond the period of ______, If the goods have been consigned to a distance
beyond 1000 kms. Circular L&A 120/2021 dated 16.07.2021
D 15days E None of the above Answer: D
610. Borrower shall pay Pre-Payment Charges @2% of the pre-paid outstanding amount in Case of
Take Over.This condition shall be applicable in which of the following cases? Circular L&A
120/2021 dated 16.07.2021
A Floating rate term loan B Where the loans are C Where the borrower shift
(Non-Business) prepaid by the borrowers to other bank within 30
sanctioned to Individual from their own sources days from the date of
Borrower. issuance of circular for
upward revision in the
rate of interest to be
charged in his account or
change in other terms of
sanction.
65
D MSE Borrower E None of the Above Answer: E

611. During the currency of Bank’s credit facilities, the Borrower shall not ______, without the prior
Page
approval of the Bank in writing. Circular L&A 120/2021 dated 16.07.2021

A Declare dividends for any B Permit any transfer of the C Issue Bonus shares and
year, if the account(s) of controlling interest or dispose of shareholding of
the borrower with the Bank make any drastic change promoters wherever
is/are running irregular in the management set up. specifically stipulated.
612. The stocks shall be checked/verified by the Bank’s officials at least once in a month at irregular
intervals from the books of the borrower and Drawing Power will be revised every month by the
Bank on receipt of stock statement. In which of following cases no Drawing Power shall be
allowed against? Circular L&A 120/2021 dated 16.07.2021
A Old, deteriorated and B Spares of more than 1 C Stocks which are more
unsaleable stocks. year old. than 6 months old.
613. Renewal/ review of Working Capital/ Term Loan must be completed within ______ days from the
due date / date of ad hoc sanction. Circular L&A 117/2021 dated 09.07.2021
614. An account where the regular/ ad hoc credit limits have not been reviewed/ renewed within
______ from the due date/ date of ad hoc sanction will be treated as NPA. Circular L&A 117/2021
dated 09.07.2021
615. Authorities can permit extension in validity of sanction in CBS through short review upto ______
from the due date of renewal of limits subject to following conditions:
a) Validity is extended at existing level of exposure as per terms of last regular sanction
b) No change in existing terms and conditions of last regular sanction
c) No security dilution. Circular L&A 117/2021 dated 09.07.2021
A two months B three months C four months
D six months E None of the avove Answer: B
616. The extension in validity of sanction shall be a maximum period of ______ months from the due
date of the regular sanction through short review. The overall validity of sanction (including
extension of validity) period shall not exceed ______ months from the last regular sanction.
D 12 months ; 24months E None of the avove Answer: A
617. The regular renewal should be done prior to the expiry of the extended validity of sanction or
______ months from the last regular sanction, whichever is earlier. Circular L&A 117/2021 dated
09.07.2021
D 24months E None of the above Answer: B
618. Consortium arrangement shall be considered only in cases where our bank’s minimum
aggregate exposure is of ₹_______ and above (fund-based limits) or minimum ______% share of
the exposure whichever is higher to ensure meaningful participation. Circular L&A 115/2021 dated
06.07.2021
A ₹25 crore ; 10% B ₹50 crore ; 10% C ₹50 crore ; 20%
D ₹100 crore ; 25% E None of the avove Answer: B
619. For ‘Finance against second hand assets to customers directly as well as to NBFCs , the
residual life of the machinery /assets is atleast ______ years. The repayment period shall be
fixed within the residual life. Circular L&A 114/2021 dated 06.07.2021
620. In case of financial assistance to customers against second hand assets / plant & machinery
financed, The imported asset / plant & machinery should be valued by Bank’s approved Valuers/
66
Chartered Engineers within ______ of arrival. Circular L&A 114/2021 dated 06.07.2021
Page

621. For ‘Finance against second hand assets to customers directly as well as to NBFCs, where age
of asset is upto 3 years, minimum margin shall be ______ . Circular L&A 114/2021
dated 06.07.2021
A 30%. B 40%. C 50%.
622. For ‘Finance against second hand assets to customers directly as well as to NBFCs, where age
of asset is above 3 years, minimum margin shall be ______ . Circular L&A 114/2021 dated
06.07.2021
A 30%. B 40%. C 50%.
623. In addition to primary security, collateral security with minimum ______% coverage shall be
obtained for the facility to be sanctioned for purchase of second hand asset / machinery. Circular
L&A 114/2021 dated 06.07.2021
A 30%. B 40%. C 50%.
624. To eligible for ‘Finance against second hand assets to customers directly as well as to NBFCs ,
the customer should be dealing with the Bank for atleast ______ years by way of current account
or credit facilities. Circular L&A 114/2021 dated 06.07.2021
625. For all loans where rescheduling is being permitted under Resolution Framework 2.0 for COVID -
19 related stress of Individuals and Small Businesses, Respective sanctioning authority can
reschedule / give moratorium maximum upto ______ years subject to maintaining LTV ratio upto
90% (LTV wherever applicable). Circular L&A 107/2021 dated 30.06.2021
626. Considering large number of accounts, as a special dispensation, powers to restructure
education loans under Resolution Framework 2.0 for COVID -19 related stress has been given
GBBs for loans outstanding upto ₹______ as on 31.03.2021. Circular L&A 107/2021 dated
30.06.2021
A ₹10 lakhs B ₹15 lakhs C ₹20 lakhs
D ₹25 lakhs E None of the avove Answer: A
627. Under Resolution Framework 2.0 for COVID -19 related stress, No additional rate of interest shall
be charged for loans having sanctioned limits upto ₹______ as on 31.03.2021. (For
Reschedulement /FITL/WCTL). Circular L&A 107/2021 dated 30.06.2021
628. Under Resolution Framework 2.0 for COVID -19 related stress, The right of Recompense shall be
applicable on the Borrowers having exposure above ₹______. Circular L&A 107/2021 dated
30.06.2021
A ₹10 Lac B ₹15 Lac C ₹20 Lac
D ₹25 Lac E None of the avove Answer: A
629. Interest moratorium may be considered under Resolution Framework 2.0 for COVID -19 related
stress. Interest for the moratorium period may be converted into FITL, repayable within a
maximum period of ______ years including ______ months moratorium provided if any for Loans
having exposure upto ₹1 crore as on 31.03.2021. Circular L&A 107/2021 dated 30.06.2021
630. Interest moratorium may be considered under Resolution Framework 2.0 for COVID -19 related
stress. Interest for the moratorium period may be converted into FITL, repayable within a
maximum period of ______ years including ______ moratorium provided if any for Loans having
exposure above ₹1 crore as on 31.03.2021. Circular L&A 107/2021 dated 30.06.2021
67

Page
631. RBI vide its circular no. DOR.STR.REC.20/21.04.048/2021-22 dated 04.06.2021 has revised the

threshold limit for aggregate exposure from ₹25 Crore to ₹______ for resolution
under Resolution Framework 2.0. Circular L&A 103/2021 dated 09.06.2021
D ₹100 Crore E None of the avove Answer: B
632. Individuals who have availed of loans and advances for business purposes and to whom the
lending institutions have aggregate exposure of not more than ₹______ crore as on March 31,
2021 are eligible under Resolution Framework – 2.0 for COVID-19 related stress. Circular L&A
103/2021 dated 09.06.2021
633. Small businesses, including those engaged in retail and wholesale trade, other than those
classified as micro, small and medium enterprises (MSMEs) as on March 31, 2021, and to whom
the lending institutions have aggregate exposure of not more than ₹______ as on March 31, 2021
are eligible under Resolution Framework – 2.0 for COVID-19 related stress. Circular L&A 103/2021
dated 09.06.2021
634. Under Resolution Framework – 2.0 for COVID-19 related stress of Individuals and Small
Businesses acconunts, The decision on the application for resolution process shall be
communicated in writing to the applicant by the bank through registered email /sms on
registered mobile number/registered post/courier/by hand within ______ of receipt of
applications. Circular L&A 91/2021 dated 27.05.2021
635. Under Resolution Framework – 2.0 for COVID-19 related stress of Individuals and Small
Businesses acconunts, The Resolution Plan is to be implemented within maximum ______from
the date of invocation. Circular L&A 91/2021 dated 27.05.2021
D 90 days E None of the avove Answer: D
636. Under Resolution Framework – 2.0 for COVID-19 related stress of personal loans acconunts,
Moratorium of upto ______ months may be extended to borrowers whose income has been
impacted. Circular L&A 91/2021 dated 27.05.2021
637. Under Resolution Framework – 2.0 for COVID-19 related stress of personal loans acconunts,
Rescheduling of instalments and extension of tenure will be the period equivalent to the
moratorium granted subject to a maximum of ______. Circular L&A 91/2021 dated 27.05.2021
638. Under Resolution Framework – 2.0 for COVID-19 related stress of personal loans acconunts ,
maximum tenor for Home Loan borrower will be extended up to ______ years. Similarly,
maximum age limit for Home Loan borrower will also get extended up to ______ years. Circular
L&A 91/2021 dated 27.05.2021
639. It is proposed to charge 25 bps as additional interest (to be loaded to current rates) on the loans
having sanctioned limits more than ₹______ considered under Resolution Framework – 2.0 for
COVID-19 related stress of personal loans accounts. Circular L&A 91/2021 dated 27.05.2021
A ₹10 lacs B ₹15 lacs C ₹20 lacs
D ₹25 lacs E None of the avove Answer: A
640. Under Resolution Framework – 2.0 for COVID-19 related stress of personal loans accounts, for
Loans of Central & State government employees/PSU employee on production of sufficient proof
68
of undergoing stress due to COVID-19, restructuring upto ₹______ can be done by the respective
sanctioning authority. Circular L&A 91/2021 dated 27.05.2021
Page

D ₹25 lacs E None of the avove Answer: A

641. Where a resolution plan is implemented under Resolution Framework – 2.0 for COVID-19 related
stress of personal loans accounts, provisions will be maintained from date of implementation at
higher of the Provisions held as per extant IRAC norms immediately before implementation, or
______ percent of the renegotiated debt exposure post implementation (residual debt). Circular
L&A 91/2021 dated 27.05.2021
D 20 percent E None of the avove Answer: B
642. Individual Business & Small Business Borrowers having only Term Loan, Moratorium of up to
______ years can be considered for repayment of Instalments of principal under Resolution
Framework – 2.0 for COVID-19 related stress. Circular L&A 91/2021
dated 27.05.2021
643. For Individual Business & Small Business Borrowers having only Working capital, Sanctioning
Authority may consider need based additional funding (exceptional circumstances only) in the
form of WCDL or WCTL. The repayment period for any such additional funding sanctioned as
part of the relief package under Resolution Framework – 2.0 for COVID-19 related stress should
not exceed ______ years. Circular L&A 91/2021 dated 27.05.2021
644. For Individual Business & Small Business Borrowers having only Working capital, Interest
moratorium may be considered under Resolution Framework – 2.0 for COVID-19 related stress.
Interest for the moratorium period may be converted into FITL, repayable within a maximum
period of ______ years including ______ months moratorium provided if any. Circular L&A
91/2021 dated 27.05.2021
645. In case of conversion into WCTL up to 25%, the repayment tenor under Resolution Framework –
2.0 for COVID-19 related stress of Individual Business & Small Business Borrowers shall be
______ years inclusive of ______ years moratorium, provided if any. Circular L&A 91/2021 dated
27.05.2021
A 5 years ; 1 year B 5 years ; 2 year C 7 years ; 1 year
D 7 years ; 2 years E None of the avove Answer: A
646. In case of conversion into WCTL more than 25%, the repayment tenor under Resolution
Framework – 2.0 for COVID-19 related stress of Individual Business & Small Business
Borrowers shall be ______ years inclusive of ______ years moratorium, provided if any. Circular
L&A 91/2021 dated 27.05.2021
647. For Individual Business & Small Business borrower having both Term Loan and Working capital,
TEV study is not required for the borrowers having exposure upto Rs ______ under Resolution
Framework – 2.0 for COVID-19 related stress. Circular L&A 91/2021 dated 27.05.2021
A Rs 1 crore B Rs 2 crores C Rs 5 crores
D Rs 10 crores E None of the avove Answer: D
648. Under Resolution Framework – 2.0 for COVID-19 related stress of Individual Business & Small
Business Borrowers, No additional rate of interest shall be charged for loans having sanctioned
limits upto ₹______ as on 31.03.2021. (For Reschedulement/FITLWCTL). Circular L&A 91/2021
dated 27.05.2021
D Rs 10 crores E None of the avove Answer: A
649. Future cash flow projections in the resolution plans under Resolution Framework – 2.0 for
69
COVID-19 related stress shall be considered to arrive at the specified ratios for exposures above
₹______. Circular L&A 91/2021 dated 27.05.2021
Page

D ₹20 lacs E None of the avove Answer: B

650. Which of the following statement/s is/are incorrect in respect of eligibility under Resolution
Framework – 2.0 for COVID-19 related stress of personal loans accounts accounts? Circular L&A
91/2021 dated 27.05.2021
A Staff Loans shall not be B Accounts under above C The borrower accounts
eligible. categories classified as should not have availed of
Standard as on any resolution in terms of
31.03.2021. the Resolution Framework
– 1.0
D Compromise settlements E None of the Above Answer: E
are not permitted as a
resolution plan for this
purpose.
651. Which of the following statement/s is/are incorrect in respect of Resolution plan under
Resolution Framework – 2.0 for COVID-19 related stress of personal loans accounts? Circular
L&A 91/2021 dated 27.05.2021
A Moratorium of upto 24 B Rescheduling of C EMI/net monthly income
months may be extended instalments and extension (NMI) ratio (post-
to borrowers whose of tenure by a period moratorium) not to exceed
income has been equivalent to the 70%.
impacted. moratorium granted
subject to a maximum of 2
years.
D The moratorium period, if E None of the Above Answer: E
granted, shall come into
force immediately upon
implementation of the
resolution plan.
652. Where the mortgagor binds himself to repay the mortgage-money on a certain date, and
transfers the mortgaged property absolutely to the mortgagee, but subject to a proviso that he
will re-transfer it to the mortgagor upon payment of the mortgagemoney as agreed, the
transaction is called ______. Circular L&A 90/2021 dated 19.05.2021
A English mortgage B Simple mortgage C Equitable Mortgage
D Any of the above E None of the avove Answer: A
653. Where, without delivering possession of the mortgaged property, the mortgagor binds himself
personally to pay the mortgage-money and agrees, expressly or impliedly, that in the event of
his failing to pay according to his contract, the mortgagee shall have a right to cause the
mortgaged property to be sold and the proceeds of sale to be applied, so far as may be
necessary, in payment of the mortgage money, the transaction is called ______. Circular L&A
90/2021 dated 19.05.2021
654. Where, the mortgagor deposits the title deeds with the Mortgagee with the intention of giving the
mortgagee an interest in the property, the transaction is called ______ Circular L&A 90/2021 dated
19.05.2021
D Any of the above E None of the avove Answer: C
655. According to Section 59 of the Transfer of Property Act, 1882, where the principal money
secured is Rs.______ or more, a mortgage, other than a mortgage by deposit of title deeds, can
be effected only by a registered instrument signed by the mortgagor and attested by at least two
witnesses. Circular L&A 90/2021 dated 19.05.2021
A Rs.100 B Rs.200 C Rs.500
D Rs.1000 E None of the avove Answer: A
70
656. In terms of Section 23 of the Indian Registration Act, 1908, the document is to be presented for
registration at the offices of the Sub-Registrar of Assurances within ______ from the date of its
Page
execution. Circular L&A 90/2021 dated 19.05.2021

A 30 days B 2 months C 4 months

657. Where the value of immovable property to be mortgaged/ charged is Rs. ______ & above,
branches shall take NEC from 2 different advocates on panel, one before sanction and the 2nd
after sanction, but before disbursement to safeguard the interest of the bank. Circular L&A
90/2021 dated 19.05.2021
D Rs 10 crores E None of the avove Answer: A
658. In case of Primary security, Periodicity of visit to the mortgaged site where Value of property
mortgaged/charged is upto Rs.______ or credit facilities are upto Rs.______ should be at least
on yearly basis or as per terms of sanction, whichever is earlier. Circular L&A 90/2021 dated
19.05.2021
A Rs.20 lac ; Rs.1 crore B Rs.20 lac ; Rs.2 crore C Rs.25 lac ; Rs.1 crore
D Rs.25 lac ; Rs.2 crore E None of the avove Answer: A
659. In case of Collateral security, Periodicity of visit to the mortgaged site where Value of property
mortgaged/charged is upto Rs.20 lac or credit facilities are upto Rs.1 crore should be at least
once in ______ years or as per terms of sanction, whichever is earlier. Circular L&A 90/2021 dated
19.05.2021
D five years E None of the avove Answer: B
660. In case of Primary security, Periodicity of visit to the mortgaged site where Value of property
mortgaged/charged is above Rs.20 lac or the credit facilities are of above Rs.1 crore should be at
least on ______ basis or as per terms of sanction, whichever is earlier. Circular L&A 90/2021 dated
19.05.2021
A bi-monthly B quarterly C half yearly
D yearly E None of the avove Answer: C
661. In case of Collateral security, Periodicity of visit to the mortgaged site where Value of property
mortgaged/charged is above Rs.20 lac or the credit facilities are of above Rs.1 crore should be at
least on ______ basis or as per terms of sanction, whichever is earlier. Circular L&A 90/2021 dated
19.05.2021
A bi-monthly B quarterly C half yearly
D yearly E None of the avove Answer: D
662. No power of sale of Mortgaged Property without the intervention of the court shall be exercised
unless and until notice in writing requiring payment of the principal money has been served on
the mortgagor or on one of several mortgagors and default has been made in payment of the
principal money or of part thereof, for ______ months after such service Circular L&A 90/2021
dated 19.05.2021
663. Limitation for enforcing mortgage security in the case of advances against any type of mortgage
is ______ years from the date of advance or when the amount secured falls due, as the case may
be, and is ______ years for enforcing personal liability of the mortgagor(s). Circular L&A 90/2021
dated 19.05.2021
664. As perSARFAESI Act 2002, Registration of security interest for all movable, immovable and
tangible assets charged to the Bank in the CERSAI is to be done to protect Bank’s interest
except vehicle, Agricultural Land, Loan against Bank Deposit, Government security papers and
securities of Loans below Rs.______. Circular L&A 90/2021 dated 19.05.2021
A Rs.1.00 Lakh B Rs.2.00 Lakh C Rs.5.00 Lakh
D Rs.10.00 Lakh E None of the avove Answer: A
665. Government of India, Ministry of Finance, Department of Financial Services, has directed to
71
ensure the mandated release of security documents within ______ post loan closure (after
repayment of all dues agreed to / contracted by parties). Circular L&A 90/2021dated 19.05.2021
Page


666. Which of the following statement/s is/are incorrect in respect of English mortgage? Circular L&A
90/2021 dated 19.05.2021
A Mortgagor binds himself to B Upon repayment, the C The mortgagee can file a
pay the mortgage-money mortgagee shall reconvey suit for sale
on a certain date the property
D The debtor is personally E None of the Above Answer: E
liable for the debt
667. Which of the following statement/s is/are incorrect in respect of Simple mortgage? Circular L&A
90/2021 dated 19.05.2021
A There is personal B Possession is not given C There is a right to cause
obligation/liability to pay the property to be sold
through court
668. Which of the following types of Security interest is/are not required to be filed on the CERSAI
portal? Circular L&A 90/2021 dated 19.05.2021
A Particulars of creation, B Particulars of creation, C Particulars of creation,
rectification, modification rectification, modification rectification, modification
or satisfaction of security or satisfaction of security or satisfaction of security
interest in immovable interest in hypothecation of interest in intangible
property by all types of plant and machinery, assets being know how,
mortgages. stocks, debt including patent, copyright,
book debts or receivables, trademark, license,
whether existing or future.
franchise or any other
business or commercial
right of similar nature.
D Particulars of creation, E None of the Above Answer: E
rectification, modification
or satisfaction of security
interest in any ‘under
construction’ residential or
commercial or a part
thereof by an agreement
or instrument other than
mortgage.
669. Which of the following statement/s is/are incorrect in respect of CERSAI? Circular L&A 90/2021
dated 19.05.2021
A Filing of security interest B Secured creditors shall be C Attachment orders issued
with CERSAI shall be entitled to enforce by Revenue Authorities
deemed to constitute a securities under for recovery of Govt. dues
public notice from the date SARFAESI Act only if the and issued in favour of
& time of filing with security interest is filed any person by
CERSAI. with CERSAI. Courts/Tribunals are
required to be filed with
CERSAI.
D Filing of security E None of the Above Answer: E
interest or
attachment orders
with CERSAI shall
have priority
over any subsequent
security interest created
upon such property.
670. Short Term Loans of secured nature will be allowed to corporate borrowers for loans above Rs
72
______ with minimum risk rating of ‘A4’ as per internal credit risk rating. Circular L&A 85/2021
dated 10.05.2021
Page

D Rs 1000 crore E None of the avove Answer: C

671. Minimum amount of Short Term Loans (STL) per borrower will be Rs ______. The maximum
amount of Short Term Loans per borrower should be considered within the overall ceiling for
individual and group borrowers prescribed from time to time. Circular L&A 85/2021 dated
10.05.2021
A Rs 10.00 crore B Rs 15.00 crore C Rs 20.00 crore
D Rs 25.00 crore E None of the avove Answer: D
672. In case the aggregate limit by single borrower from more than one PSB is Rs ______ & above,
Joint Lending Arrangement (JLA) shall be formed as per laid down guidelines in case of STLs as
well. Circular L&A 85/2021 dated 10.05.2021
A Rs 50 crores B Rs 100 crores C Rs 150 crores
D Rs 200 crores E None of the avove Answer: C
673. In case of company fails to register the charge within 30 days then the person in whose favour
the charge along with the instrument is created may apply to the Registrar for registration of the
charge in the form CHG-1 or CHG-9 as the case may be within a period of _______ after giving
notice to the company. Circular L&A 78/2021 dated 30.04.2021
674. Logistics Infrastructure means and includes Multimodal Logistics Park comprising Inland
Container Depot (ICD) with minimum investment of ₹______ and minimum area of 10 acre, Cold
Chain Facility with minimum investment of ______ and minimum area of 20,000 sft, and/or
Warehousing Facility with investment of minimum ₹______ crore and minimum area of 1 lakh sq
ft. Circular L&A 77/2021 dated 26.04.2021
A ₹25 crore ; ₹15 crore ; B ₹50 crore ; ₹10 crore ; C ₹50 crore ; ₹15 crore
₹25 crore ₹25 crore ; ₹20 crore
D ₹50 crore ; ₹15 crore ; E None of the avove Answer: D
₹25 crore
675. Affordable Housing is defined as a housing project using at least ______% of the Floor Area
Ratio (FAR)/Floor Space Index (FSI) for dwelling units with carpet area@ of not more than
_______. Circular L&A 77/2021 dated 26.04.2021
A 40% ; 50 square meters B 40% ; 60 square meters C 50% ; 00 square
meters
D 50% ; 60 square meters E None of the avove Answer: D
676. Affordable Rental Housing Complex” means a project to be used for rental purpose only for
urban migrant/poor (EWS/LIG categories) for a minimum period of ______ years with basic civic
infrastructure facilities such as water, sanitation, sewerage/septage, road, electricity along with
necessary social/commercial infrastructure. Circular L&A 77/2021 dated 26.04.2021
677. Affordable Rental Housing Complex Project means a listed project having at least ______
Dwelling Units of double room or single room or equivalent Dormitory Units or a mix of all three
in any ratio but not more than one third of total built up area under double bedrooms units.
A 25 B 30 C 40
678. The banks financing acquisition of equity shares by promoters should be within the regulatory
ceiling of ______ per cent of their net worth as on March 31 of the previous year for the
aggregate exposure of the banks to the capital markets in all forms (both fund based and non-
fund based). Circular L&A 77/2021 dated 26.04.2021
D 50 per cent E None of the avove Answer: C
679. Maximum Tenor for lending to Infrastructure Investment Trust (InvITs) will be upto ______ Years.
73
Circular L&A 77/2021

dated 26.04.2021
Page

D 15 Years E None of the avove Answer: D

680. For lending to Infrastructure Investment Trust (InvITs), A margin of minimum ______% should be
maintained on the NAV of the InvIT assets on an ongoing basis based on the valuation done by
the valuer. Circular L&A 77/2021 dated 26.04.2021
A 15%. B 20%. C 25%.
681. Margin for financing to Educational Institution under Infrastructure Financing for Term loan will
be ______% of the Cost of Project (excluding cost of land). Wherever land is also financed as
part of cost of project then minimum prescribed margin against cost of the land shall be
______% of the cost of the land. Circular L&A 77/2021 dated 26.04.2021
A 20% ; 50% B 25% ; 50% C 20% ; 60%
682. In case of Overdraft to Educational Institution under Infrastructure Financing, the stipulated
margin is ______. Circular L&A 77/2021 dated 26.04.2021
A 1.%. B 15%. C 20%.
683. Maximum Repayment Period for financing to Educational Institution under Infrastructure
Financing for Term loan will be ______ including maximum moratorium up to ______ months
subject to annual review. Circular L&A 77/2021 dated 26.04.2021
A 84 months ; 36 months B 84 months ; 48 months C 120 months ; 36
months
684. For financing to Educational Institution under Infrastructure Financing, TEV study shall be
carried out in all cases involving Project cost of over ₹______. Circular L&A 77/2021 dated
26.04.2021
685. As per as per Harmonized Master List of Infrastructure Sub-sectors as notified by Department of
Economic Affairs, Ministry of Finance, Government of India, Which of the following category will
not qualify as 'Infrastructure Lending? Circular L&A 77/2021 dated 26.04.2021
A Transport and Logistics B Energy, Water & C Communication
Sanitation
D Social and Commercial E None of the Above Answer: E
Infrastructure
686. The plants installed/to be installed in India having adequate sunlight may be considered for
financing under Infrastructure by way of Term Loan, Working Capital and non-fund based
requirement for generation of electricity using solar energy by using which of following? Circular
L&A 77/2021 dated 26.04.2021
A Photovoltaic Technology B Concentrated Solar Power C Thin Film technology
(PV) (CSP)
D either of the above E None of the Above Answer: D
687. RBI vide notification no. DBR.No.BP.BC.20/08.12.014/2019-20 dated October 14, 2019 has
decided to permit banks to lend to Infrastructure Investment Trust (InvITs). Which of the follwing
Eligibility Criteria is/are incorrect for lending to Infrastructure Investment Trust (InvITs) Circular
L&A 77/2021 dated 26.04.2021
A An InvIT must be B 100% of the infrastructure C InvIT should have a valid
registered with SEBI and projects External Risk Rating of
SEBI guidelines should be undertaken/proposed to be AAA from RBI approved
complied with by InvITs. undertaken by InvITs rating agency and should
should be “Completed and have Internal risk rating of
revenue generating A2 & above.
projects”.
74
688. Vetting of loan documents under PNB COVID-19 Emergency Credit Facility (PNB-CECF) shall be
conducted as per Bank’s guidelines, if the exposure is exceeding ₹______ Crore. Circular L&A
Page
74/2021 dated 19.04.2021


689. At the time of request for issuance of any guarantee, Counter indemnity (stamped) should be
obtained from customers whereby customer indemnifies the bank against any claim/loss/liability
that might be sustained in consequence of having paid the guarantee amount. However, in case
of ______% margin, counter indemnity may be dispensed with subject to taking a letter
authorizing the bank to appropriate the amount of security in the event of breach or default in
contract. Circular L&A 73/2021 dated 19.04.2021
A 50% B 60% C 80%
690. Bank Guarantees having maturity period beyond 10 years up to 15 years may be issued at the
level of ______ & above within their vested loaning powers. Circular L&A 73/2021 dated 19.04.2021
A ZOCAC-I B ZOCAC-II C HOCAC-II
D HOCAC-II E None of the avove Answer: B
691. Guarantees should be issued for a definite period and normally not to run for more than a year.
For Projects of Long Gestation period and National importance bank guarantee for maximum
______ could be approved by sanctioning authority not below ______ except for cases where
self renewal clause is already incorporated for Specific Govt. Department. Circular L&A 73/2021
dated 19.04.2021
A 5 years ; ZOCAC-I B 10 years ; HOCAC-I C 15 years ; HOCAC-I
D 15 years ; HOCAC-II E None of the avove Answer: C
692. For BG to be issued to Customs Department at 100% margin, ______ and above will be
sanctioning authority for the tenure as requested by beneficiary. Circular L&A 73/2021 dated
19.04.2021
D HOCAC-II E None of the avove Answer: A
693. Guarantees in favour of court or to Govt. or any other person on behalf of party/borrower
relating to payment of taxes, excise duty, custom duty or other Govt. dues, in dispute should be
issued only against ______% cash margin. Circular L&A 73/2021 dated 19.04.2021
A 25% B 50% C 75%
694. In cases where BG is issued for longer period and the borrower requests for recovery of
commission on Annual/Qtly basis as against the stipulated policy for recovery of commission
for the entire tenure of the bank guarantee + the claim period, an additional charge of ______%
shall be applicable. Circular L&A 73/2021 dated 19.04.2021
A 0.25% B 5% C 10%
695. In case of Bank Guarantee Counter Guaranteed by Central Government / State Government /
ECGC / Scheduled Commercial Bank having minimum required Regulatory CRAR including CCB,
applicable commission will be ______% of normal commission applicable on Bank Guarantee up
to the extent of counter guarantee amount. Circular L&A 73/2021 dated 19.04.2021
A 25% B 50% C 75%
696. The guarantees shall be issued in favour of other Banks/FIs/Lending Institutions on behalf of
those borrowers only in whom our bank has funded exposure equivalent to a minimum of
______% of the amount of guarantee issued. Circular L&A 73/2021 dated 19.04.2021
A 0% B 5% C 10%
697. The exposure limit for issuing guarantees per borrower, favouring Other Banks/FIs/Lending
Agencies has been fixed at ______% of Tier-I Capital of the bank. However, aggregate exposure
for such guarantees should not exceed ______% of Tier I Capital of the Bank. Circular L&A
73/2021 dated 19.04.2021
75
A 10% ; 25% B 20% ; 50% C 10% ; 25%

Page
698. For all guarantees issued on behalf of Commodity Brokers in favour of the National Level

Commodity Exchanges, minimum ______% of margin needs to be maintained, out of which

minimum 25% should be kept in the shape of cash/FDR and balance ______% may be kept in the
shape of shares, Govt. securities like NSCs, KVPs, IVPs, Relief Bonds, surrender value of LIC
etc. Circular L&A 73/2021 dated 19.04.2021
A 25% ; 5% B 50% ; 15% C 50% ; 25%
699. ______ & above may consider sanction of Bank Guarantees in favour of Commodity Exchanges
viz. NCDEX/MCX/NMCEIL by obtaining balance 25% margin in shape of EM of IP covering at least
75% exposure in place of liquid securities. Circular L&A 73/2021 dated 19.04.2021
700. Which of the following guarantee/s is/are not related to performance guarantees? Circular L&A
73/2021 dated 19.04.2021
A Bid bonds B Guarantees in lieu of C Retention money
security deposits// earnest guarantees
money deposits (EMD) for
participating in tenders
D Warranties, indemnities E None of the above Answer: E
and standby letters of
credit related to particular
transaction.
701. Which of the following guarantee/s is/are not related to financial guarantees? Circular L&A
73/2021 dated 19.04.2021
A Guarantees for credit B Guarantees in lieu of C Guarantees in lieu of
facilities repayment of financial margin requirements of
securities exchanges
D Deferred payment E None of the above Answer: E
guarantees.
702. Bank guarantee with automatic renewal clause/without limitation clause can be issued subject
to: -
i) BG shall be issued at 100% cash margin.
ii) BG shall be issued upon specific request.
iii) Sanctioning authority for such type of BG shall be one step higher than the sanctioning
authority.
iv) The beneficiary of such type of BG will be Govt. departments only.
v) BG shall be issued for specific purpose only.
A Only i), ii) and iii) B Only ii), iii) and iv) C Only iii), iv) and v)
D All i) to v) E None of the above Answer: D
703. Which of the following statement/s is/are incorrect in respect of Commission on ILG? Circular
L&A 73/2021 dated 19.04.2021
A In case the commission for B In case of extension of C In case of renewal of
unexpired period was not validity period of existing guarantees, same
charged earlier at the time ILG, commission for the charges as applicable for
of issuance, it should be extended validity period issuance of fresh
charged on monthly basis plus claim period shall be guarantee may be levied.
till the time ILG is charged upfront.
reversed.
D in case renewal is affected E None of the above Answer: E
before the expiry date of
original guarantee,
commission may not be
charged for the claim
period.
76
704. Which of the following statement/s is/are incorrect in respect of refund of guarantee commission
in case of Consortium/Multiple Banking Arrangement and in selective and highly deserving
Page
cases? Circular L&A 73/2021 dated 19.04.2021

A Commission to be B If an existing guarantee is C If guarantee is invoked by

refunded will be for full- extended for a specific the beneficiary,
unexpired quarters only. period and the guarantee commission charged will
is being cancelled (after not be refunded.
original tenure),
commission will be
refunded for full unexpired
quarters.
705. Large Corporate Branches (LCBs) shall be constituted for credit appraisal of loans and advances
above Rs. ______. The LCBs shall be headed by Deputy General Managers. In furtherance to
this, Extra Large Corporate Branches (ELCBs) shall also be constituted for credit appraisal of
proposals above Rs. ______. Such ELCBs shall be headed by General Managers. Circular L&A
61/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A Rs. 10 crores ; Rs. 100 B Rs. 20 crores ; Rs. 200 C Rs. 40 crores ; Rs. 400
crore crore crore
D Rs. 50 crores ; Rs. 500 E None of the avove Answer: D
crore
706. Power of Branch Heads (ncumbent) of RAMs for Purchase of Govt. Cheques for credit to
accounts of Govt. Deptt./Corpn./ Undertakings or Purchase of cheques drawn by Central & State
Govts. & drafts of public sector banks/banks approved by Credit Division/IBD, HO and from first
payee only will be ______ times of their vested loaning powers for FB (secured) advances over &
above the aggregate commitment per borrower. Circular L&A 61/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A Two B Three C Four
D Five E None of the avove Answer: A
707. Power of Branch Heads (ncumbent) of MCCs and LCBs for Purchase of Govt. Cheques for credit
to accounts of Govt. Deptt./Corpn./ Undertakings or Purchase of cheques drawn by Central &
State Govts. & drafts of public sector banks/banks approved by Credit Division/IBD, HO and from
first payee only will be ______ times of their vested loaning powers for FB (secured) advances
over & above the aggregate commitment per borrower. Circular L&A 61/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A Two B Three C Four
D Five E None of the avove Answer: B
708. Where loaning powers are linked to credit Risk Rating of the borrower and rating is A1 or A2,
CMs, AGMs of RAMs and MCCs, ZOCAC-I & above shall exercise ______% of their normal
loaning powers. Circular L&A 61/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A 110% B 120% C 125%
709. Where loaning powers are linked to credit Risk Rating of the borrower and rating is A3 or A4,
AGMs of RAMs and MCCs, ZOCAC-I & above shall exercise ______% of their normal loaning
powers. Circular L&A 61/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A 110% B 120% C 125%
710. Where no other officer is posted or second man is special assistant at the branch, Branch Head
of GBBs may process and sanction loan proposal of all Priority Sector advances including Govt.
sponsored schemes and “Loans under Retail Lending Schemes” upto Rs. ______ each and
under KCC Scheme/other direct agriculture upto Rs. ______.
A Rs. 1 lakh Rs. B Rs. 2 lakh Rs. C Rs. 1 lakh Rs. 3 lakh
1 lakh 3 lakh
D Rs. 3 lakh Rs. E None of the avove Answer: C
3 lakh
711. Where no other officer is posted or second man is special assistant at the branch, Branch Head
of GBBs, the ceiling on individual loan for Tractor loans will be Rs.______ and for Housing
77
Loans will be Rs.______. Circular L&A 61/2021 dated 07.04.2021

A Rs. 2 lakh Rs. B Rs.3 lakh Rs.2 lakh C Rs.3 lakh Rs.3 lakh
Page
3 lakh

D Rs.3 lakh Rs.5 lakh E None of the avove Answer: B

712. Total advance granted without recommendation of second man, where there is none, would not
exceed Rs.______ in a month. The ceiling of total advance in a month may be increased by
Circle Heads to Rs. ______ wherever they find it necessary. Circular L&A 61/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A Rs.20 lakh ; Rs. 50 lakh B Rs.25 lakh ; Rs. 50 lakh C Rs.25 lakh ; Rs. 100
lakh
D Rs.50 lakh ; Rs. 100 E None of the avove Answer: A
lakh
713. All fresh credit proposals envisaging total exposure (both fund based and non-fund based) of
above ₹ ______ shall be placed before New Business Group (NBG). Circular L&A 61/2021 dated
07.04.2021
D ₹500 crore E None of the avove Answer: B
714. The NBG approval is in-principle in nature for evincing interest in the credit proposal based on
broad parameters and shall be valid for ______ months for considering the regular proposal.
715. Sanctions in respect of working capital and Term Loan facilities shall be valid for ______ months
from the date of sanction. Circular L&A 61/2021 dated 07.04.2021
716. No facility should be released unless a lapsed sanction is got revalidated by competent authority
within a maximum period of ______ months from the date of sanction. Circular L&A 61/2021 dated
07.04.2021
717. In case of all Credit proposals pertaining to SC/ST, MSE, Education Loan, various Government
sponsored schemes, and Export Borrowers, the competent authorities for rejection of credit
proposal under GBB power will be ______. Circular L&A 61/2021dated 07.04.2021
A Branch Head B Circle Head C Zonal Head
D Respective Sanctioning E None of the avove Answer: B
Authority
proposal under the Power of Segment Head at PLP will be ______. Circular L&A 61/2021 dated
07.04.2021
D PLP Head E None of the avove Answer: D
proposal under the Power of PLP Head/PLP-CAC/MCC will be ______. Circular L&A 61/2021 dated
07.04.2021
D ZOCAC-I E None of the avove Answer: D
720. In case of all Credit proposals pertaining to Export Borrowers under MC power, the competent
authorities for rejection of credit proposal will be ______. Circular L&A 61/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A ZOCAC-I B HOCAC I C HOCAC II
D HOCAC III E None of the avove Answer: D
721. Incumbents of GBBs/PLPs/MCCs are to exercise their sanctioning powers jointly with other
officials with due care during the period of ______ prior to the retirement and submit the
`Statement of Limits Sanctioned' promptly to the Controlling Office at fortnightly intervals.
78

Page

722. The enhancement within ______of sanction under exceptional and genuine cases shall be
exercised by next higher authority for Cases upto the power of ZOCAC-II. Circular L&A 61/2021
dated 07.04.2021
723. In case of any new unit/company promoted/established by the Directors/ Entrepreneurs, in
whose case negotiated settlement has taken place with our /other bank earlier in respect of any
other/same unit/company promoted by them, fresh Credit facility for new borrower shall be
sanctioned by an authority one step higher than the authority under whose power the proposal
otherwise falls but not below the level of______. Circular L&A 61/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A ZOCAC-I B HOCAC I C HOCAC II
D HOCAC III E None of the avove Answer: B
724. In case of any new unit/company promoted/established by the Directors/ Entrepreneurs, in
whose case negotiated settlement has taken place with our /other bank earlier in respect of any
other/same unit/company promoted by them, The proposals for fresh facilities shall be
considered only after expiry of at least ______ months from the date of full payment of
compromise amount. Circular L&A 61/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A a month B two months C three months
D six months E None of the avove Answer: C
725. Substitution/ release of IP kept as collateral in sanctions falling upto the vested loaning powers
of GBBs/PLPs/MCCs/ZOCAC-I may not be permitted up to the level of ______ except where the
IP is proposed to be replaced by the cash security/FDR of equivalent amount to higher of,
Valuation as per Last Sanction or Latest valuation obtained on receipt of request of substitution.
A ZOCAC-I B ZOCAC-II C HOCAC I
D HOCAC II E None of the avove Answer: A
726. Where such cash security/FDR is not available, the powers of substitution / release of IP shall
vest with ______ where sanctions are falling upto the vested loaning powers of
GBBs/PLPs/MCCs/ZOCAC-I. Circular L&A 61/2021 dated 07.04.2021
D HOCAC II E None of the avove Answer: B
727. Per borrower exposure in the Film Indusry Sector shall not be more than ₹______. Further, as
approved by board, fresh exposure i.e. aggregate of FB and NFB facilities sanctioned in a
financial year should not exceed ₹______. Circular L&A 61/2021 dated 07.04.2021
D ₹50 crore ; ₹200 crore E None of the avove Answer: C
728. In respect of proposals for financing against Future Lease Rentals falling within the vested
loaning powers of Branch Head, the administrative clearance shall be given by ______ within the
quota allocated by respective ZO. Circular L&A 61/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A ZOCAC-I B ZOCAC-II C HOCAC-I
729. For proposals for financing against Future Lease Rentals falling within the vested loaning
powers of ZOCAC-I, administrative clearance shall be given by______ within the quota allocated
by Credit Review & Monitoring Division for Real Estate Sector. Circular L&A 61/2021 dated
07.04.2021
730. For proposals for financing against Future Lease Rentals falling under vested loaning powers of
ZOCAC-II, administrative clearance shall be given by ______. Administrative clearance for
proposals where the sanctioning authority is HOCAC-I and above has been waived as, such
proposals are to be sanctioned at HO level. Circular L&A 61/2021 dated 07.04.2021
79

731. In exceptional and deserving cases, part disbursement of term loan may be allowed through
Page
current/cash credit account by the sanctioning authority not below the level of CM subject to

maximum of ______% of the sanctioned limit and beyond this percentage, the case will be
referred to the next higher authority. Circular L&A 61/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A 10% B 20% C 25%
732. In order to ensure effective monitoring specially in case of project financing having longer
gestation period, a system of annual review of Term Loans is in vogue. Accordingly, all Term
Loans, other than retail loans, with sanctioned limit of ₹ ______ & above needs to be reviewed
annually. Circular L&A 61/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A ₹ 1 crore B ₹ 2 crore C ₹ 5 crore
D ₹ 10 crore E None of the avove Answer: B
733. Overdraft up to Rs. 5000/- may be allowed in Saving Fund Accounts (including minor/staff
accounts) where regular income such as salary, pension, etc. are credited at fixed periodical
intervals. Such overdraft may not be allowed more than ______ times in a calendar year and
should be adjusted within ______. Circular L&A 61/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A 3 times ; 15 days B 3 times ; 30 days C 4 times ; 15 days
D 4 times ; 30 days E None of the avove Answer: C
734. The Temporary Over drawings (TOD) may be allowed in fund based secured advances for
payment of statutory dues, salaries, wages or any other justifiable debits for very short period
say 2-3 days but not exceeding ______ days (including roll over, if any) to meet temporary
mismatch of funds in unforeseen circumstances. Circular L&A 61/2021 dated 07.04.2021
735. In case of working capital limits if enhancement of ______% and above is considered at the time
of takeover, instead of seeking prior approval from the next higher authority, the proposals shall
be sanctioned by the next higher authority on merits of the case subject to the compliance of the
other guidelines. Circular L&A 61/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A 10% B 15% C 25%
736. The borrowal accounts with minimum credit risk rating as ______ may be considered for
takeover. Circular L&A 61/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A B1 B B2 C B3
D A3 E None of the avove Answer: A
737. HOCAC II & III may consider takeover of ______ rated accounts on merits of the case within its
vested loaning powers and MC shall have full powers in this regard. Circular L&A 61/2021 dated
07.04.2021
A A2 & A3 B A3 & B1 C B1 & B2
D B2 & B3 E None of the avove Answer: D
738. The small loan accounts having aggregate exposure upto and including ₹______ with credit risk
rating ‘B2 & below’ are not to be considered for takeover. Circular L&A 61/2021 dated 07.04.2021
739. Maximum Loan amount to Chief Executive Officer/ Whole Time Directors for
constructing/acquiring a house for personal use will be Rs. ______. Circular L&A 61/2021 dated
07.04.2021
D Rs. 250.00 lakh E None of the avove Answer: B
740. Loan amount to Chief Executive Officer/ Whole Time Directors for purchase of new car will be
______% of the cost of vehicle subject to a maximum of Rs.______. Circular L&A 61/2021 dated
07.04.2021
A 90% ; Rs. 20.00 B 90% ; Rs. 25.00 C 95% ; Rs. 20.00
lakh lakh lakh
D 95% ; Rs. 25.00 E None of the avove Answer: A
80
lakh
741. All loans and advances to Directors of other banks, any relative of bank’s Directors or relative of
Page
other banks’ Directors for Rs. ______ & above need to be sanctioned by the Bank's Board of

Directors/Management Committee. Circular L&A 61/2021 dated 07.04.2021

A Rs. 25 lac B Rs. 50 lac C Rs. 75 lac
D Rs. 100 lac E None of the avove Answer: A
742. In cases where prepayment penalty is to be charged in account, authority to permit waiver of
such prepayment penalty, if required, shall be at the level of______ and above. Circular L&A
61/2021 dated 07.04.2021
D HOCAC II E None of the avove Answer: C
743. In branches, where the recovery percentage in terms of Recovery Statement (PNB 746) is below
______% as at March/September on annualized basis, the incumbents shall not exercise loaning
powers for making fresh priority sector advances except under SGSY, SJSRY, 20 point
programme etc. and loans upto Rs.10,000/- under priority sector schemes to all categories of
weaker sections and all Government’s sponsored programmes. Circular L&A 61/2021 dated
07.04.2021
A 20% B 25% C 30%
744. Current account holders who have maintained a minimum average balance of Rs. ______ during
the previous 12 months and in whose case cheque returning during the previous 12 months are
less than ______% shall be identified as premium clients for allowing advance against uncleared
effects. Circular L&A 61/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A Rs. 1 Lakh ; 10% B Rs. 1 Lakh ; 25% C Rs. 2 Lakh ; 10%
D Rs. 1 Lakh ; 25% E None of the avove Answer: A
745. PNB Loan Point (PLP) shall exercise loaning powers for loans above Rs 1.00 crore in which of
the following scenarios? Circular L&A 61/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A MCC is not established at B MCC is established at C Loaning powers above
those circles and all those circles, however Rs.1 crore shall be
proposals of linked many of the branches exercised essentially
branches under that circle situated at far flung areas under Committee
have to be sanctioned by are not linked with MCC. Structure.
PLP as per loaning As such proposals above
powers. Rs 1.00 crore of those
branches have to be
sanctioned by PLP as per
loaning powers.
746. Which of the following category of advances are not exempted from New Business Group (NBG)
approval? Circular L&A 61/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A Exposures to Public B Exposures to Central C Exposures secured by
Sector Undertakings/ Both Governments and 100% cash margin
Central and State exposures guaranteed by
Government. Central Governments.
D Retail Credit Exposure up E None of the Above Answer: E
to Rs. 25.00 crores.
747. Which of the following statement/s is/are incorrect in respect of issuance of letter of Guarantee?
A CMs/AGMs may permit B Branch Heads in scale-I, II C ZOCAC-I may permit
issuance of letter of & III may permit issuance issuance of Letter of
Guarantee upto a of LG upto the maximum Guarantee upto a
maximum of 5 years of 1 year excluding the maximum of 10 years,
excluding the claim period claim period of 12 months excluding the claim period
of 12 months. of 12 months.
D Bank guarantees with E None of the Above Answer: E
maturity period beyond 10
81
years upto 15 years may

be permitted for issuance,
Page
at the level of ZOCAC-II

and above.

748. Borrowal account should be taken over from other banks on selective basis. In which of the
following case/s the requirement of seeking permission from the next higher authority shall be
applicable for taking over? Circular L&A 61/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A in cases where the B In case of crop loans/KCC C In case of taking over of
accounts of other banks accounts wherein there Retail Loan Accounts
have been adjusted for was no default in payment from other banks/FIs.
over 3 months. of interest/instalment
during the last previous
one year with the previous
banker.
749. The Internal Risk Ratings for loans above Rs.1 crore & upto Rs.10 crore shall be vetted at
______. For loans above Rs.10 crore, ratings shall be initiated at ZRMC & vetted at ______
A Circle Office ; Zonal B Circle Office ; ZRMC C Zonal Office ; Head
Office Office
D ZRMC ; IRMD HO E None of the avove Answer: D
750. In terms of RBI Guidelines, the sum of all the exposure values of a bank under under Large
Exposures (LE) Framework to a single counterparty must not be higher than ______ percent of
the bank’s available eligible capital base at all times. In exceptional cases, Board of banks may
allow an additional ______ percent exposure of the bank’s available eligible capital base. Circular
L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
D 25 percent ; 10 percent E None of the avove Answer: A
751. In respect of Proprietorship Concern, exposure to a borrower by way of Fund Based/Non Fund
Based facilities shall be restricted to ₹ ______. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A ₹50.00 Crore. B ₹100.00 Crores C ₹200.00 Crores
D ₹500.00 Crores E None of the avove Answer: A
752. In respect of Partnership Concern/Limited Liability Partnerships, exposure to a borrower by way
of Fund Based/Non Fund Based facilities shall be restricted to ₹ ______. Circular L&A 60/2021
dated 07.04.2021
D ₹500.00 Crores E None of the avove Answer: B
753. In respect of Single entity with constitution as Society, Trust & HUF, exposure to a borrower by
way of Fund Based/Non Fund Based facilities shall be restricted to ₹ ______. Circular L&A
60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
D ₹500.00 Crores E None of the avove Answer: C
754. The exposure including all funded and non-funded facilities, where the realizable value of
tangible security is not more than 10%, ab-initio of the outstanding exposure shall be treated as
‘Unsecured Exposure’, which should not exceed the Exposure Ceiling of ______% of gross
outstanding advances (FB+NFB) as on close of previous quarter. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated
07.04.2021
D 25 percent E None of the avove Answer: D
755. Within the Unsecured Exposure Ceiling of 25%, a sub ceiling of ______% of gross outstanding
advances (FB+NFB) as on close of previous quarter has been fixed for unsecured advances to
Govt. and PSUs borrowers under the category on selective basis to better rated accounts/ group.
A 10% B 15% C 20%
756. Fresh sanction/enhancement to traders above ₹100 crore, but upto ₹200 crore shall be
considered by _______. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
82
A ZOCAC-III B HOCAC-I C HOCAC-II

Page
D HOCAC-III E None of the avove Answer: D

757. Fresh sanction/enhancement to traders above ₹200 crore, but upto ₹500 crore shall be

considered by ______. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021

A HOCAC-I B HOCAC-II C HOCAC-III
D Management committee E None of the avove Answer: D
758. An overall ceiling on total State government exposure (in respect of accounts where facilities are
granted as direct advance to State Govt./State PSUs/Undertakings and other exposure
guaranteed by State Govt.) is fixed at ______% of Gross Total Advances of the bank as of
previous quarter. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A 10% B 15% C 20%
759. Exposure per borrower in the Film Industry sector shall not be more than ₹______. Further, as
approved by board, fresh exposure i.e. aggregate of FB +NFB facilities sanctioned in a financial
year should not exceed ₹______. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
D ₹25 crore ; ₹500 crore E None of the avove Answer: C
760. The overall exposure ceiling for real estate sector has been fixed at ______% of the Bank’s
exposure of the previous quarter. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A 10% B 15% C 20%
761. Within the overall exposure ceiling of 15% stipulated for real estate sector, Exposure on NHB &
HFCs has been fixed at ______% of the previous quarter. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A 7% B 10% C 15%
762. Within the overall exposure ceiling of 15% stipulated for real estate sector, Exposure on
Residential mortgages has been fixed at ______% of the Bank’s exposure of the previous
quarter. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A 7% B 10% C 15%
D Excluded for Ceiling E None of the avove Answer: D
Purpose
763. In terms of RBI guidelines, the ceiling for capital market exposure (both fund based and non-
fund based) is fixed at ______% of its net worth as on March 31 of the previous year on a solo
and on consolidated basis. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A 20% B 25% C 30%
764. Maximum ceilings for advances to individuals for acquiring shares under IPO / FPO, ESOP will
be ₹______. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
D ₹50 lakh E None of the avove Answer: A
765. Maximum ceilings for advances to individuals against security of De-mat shares will be ₹______.
766. "Unsecured exposure" is defined as an exposure where the realisable value of the security, as
assessed by the bank/approved valuers / Reserve Bank’s inspecting officers, is not more than
______ per cent, ab-initio, of the outstanding exposure. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
D 25 percent E None of the avove Answer: A
767. RBI has made it mandatory for corporate borrowers having aggregate fund-based and non-fund
based exposure of ₹5 crore and above (introduced in a phased manner) from any bank to obtain
Legal Entity Identifier (LEI) registration and capture the same in the Central Repository of
Information on Large Credits (CRILC). Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
83
768. Simplified method based on turnover for assessing working capital finance upto ₹______ in case
of MSME units shall be used. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
Page


769. As per the RBI guidelines, in respect of borrowers having aggregate fund based working capital
limit of ₹______ and above from the banking system, a minimum level of ‘loan component’ of 60
percent needs to be maintained. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
770. Export finance is by and large regulated through the directives / guidelines issued by ______.
A Reserve Bank of India B Director General of C Foreign Exchange
(RBI) Foreign Trade (DGFT) Dealers’ Association of
India (FEDAI).
D All the above E None of the avove Answer: D
771. The period for which the Bank gives packing credit depends on the manufacturing / trade cycle
or specific requirements of the individual export, normally not exceeding ______ days. Circular
L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
772. Consortium arrangement shall be considered only in cases where our bank’s minimum
aggregate exposure is of ₹______ and above (fund-based limits) or minimum 10% share of the
exposure whichever is higher. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A ₹50 crore and above B ₹100 crore and above C ₹150 crore and above
D ₹500 crore and above E None of the avove Answer: A
773. All lending arrangements, involving more than one public sector bank, with a single borrower
with aggregate credit limits (both fund based and non-fund based) of ₹______ and all non-
investment grade borrowers (External Commercial Rating below BBB or equivalent), enjoying
credit limits from more than one public sector bank, irrespective of the amount of exposure shall
be under Joint Lending Arrangement (JLA).
D ₹500 crore and above E None of the avove Answer: C
774. Sanctions in respect of Working Capital and Term Loan facilities shall be valid for ______
months, from the date of sanction. Revalidation can be considered by the competent authority
within a maximum period of ______ from the date of sanction. Circular L&A 60/2021dated
07.04.2021
D 12months ; 24 months E None of the avove Answer: B
775. Under RAROC framework, a software application for RAROC analysis is used for all corporate
loan (fund based and non-fund based) aggregating above ₹______, where rate of interest /
commission is linked to risk rating of the borrower and borrower is requesting concessions on
card rate of the bank. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A ₹5 crore B N C N
D Y E None of the avove Answer: C
776. Vetting of Loan Documents from the approved advocate will be required in case of borrowal
accounts, with sanctioned limits of ₹ ______ (both fund based and non-fund based). Circular L&A
60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A ₹ 1 crore & above B ₹ 2 crore & above C ₹ 5 crore & above
D ₹ 10 crore & above E None of the avove Answer: B
777. In case Borrowal accounts is having credit exposure (FB+NFB) of more than ₹______ from the
Banking system under Consortium / Multiple / Sole banking, Agencies for Specialised Monitoring
(ASMs) are to be appointed. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A 100 crore B 150 crore C 200 crore
D 250 crore E None of the avove Answer: D
84
778. PNB-SAJAG is a dynamic system for tracking the health and conduct of borrowal accounts to
capture the signals of early warning and is applicable to all borrowal accounts having
Page
sanctioned limits (FB plus NFB) above ₹ ______. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021


779. Annual Stock Audit should be got compulsorily done in respect of all borrowal accounts,
enjoying Fund Based & Non Fund Based Working Capital Limits of ₹______from our Bank.
780. Annual Stock Audit to be compulsorily conducted in all ‘B2’ to ‘C3’ rated accounts and NPA
accounts enjoying fund based and non- fund based working capital limits of ₹______. Circular
L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
781. In cases of Consortium/Multiple Financing, where the borrower is enjoying working capital limits
(fund based) of less than ₹ 5 crore from our Bank and ₹ ______ in aggregate from the banking
system, branches should take up with lead bank/major share-holder banks in multiple banking
arrangement for getting the stock audit conducted. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A ₹5 crore and above B ₹10 crore and above C ₹ 20 crore and above
D ₹ 25 crore and above E None of the avove Answer: C
782. In exceptional circumstances, where abnormal increase or decrease of ______% or more on a
monthly basis without due justificationare observed in Stock receivables/Sundry debtors /
sundry creditors are observed, Annual Stock Audit may be got done by the branches. Circular
L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A 10% B 20% C 30%
783. In exceptional circumstances, where Decline of ______% or more in credit summation in
Working Capital facility continuously for 3 months without due justification are observed, Annual
Stock Audit may be got done by the branches. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A 10% B 20% C 30%
784. The cut off limit for the purpose of credit audit of all risk rated standard accounts shall be
₹______. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A ₹5 cr. & above B ₹10 cr. & above C ₹20 cr. & above
D ₹25 cr. & above E None of the avove Answer: B
785. In case of accounts with combined group exposure of ₹______, all the accounts irrespective of
individual limits shall be subjected to credit audit. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A ₹5 cr. & above B ₹10 cr. & above C ₹20 cr. & above
D ₹25 cr. & above E None of the avove Answer: B
786. Where auditable accounts are less than ______in a Circle in a Financial Year, top 5 rated
standard accounts of Circle with a minimum balance of ₹______ shall be eligible for the purpose
of credit audit. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A 10 ; ₹5 cr. & above B 20 ; ₹5 cr. & above C 10 ; ₹10 cr. & above
D 20 ; ₹10 cr. & above E None of the avove Answer: A
787. In case of taken over borrowal accounts, credit audit are to be conducted for accounts with
exposure of ₹______. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
D ₹10 crore and above E None of the avove Answer: A
788. RBI has setup a Central Repository of Information on Large Credits (CRILC) to collect, store and
disseminate credit data of borrowers having Aggregate Exposure (AE) of ₹______ and the Banks
are to report classification of such borrowers to CRILC. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A ₹5 crore and above B ₹10 crore and above C ₹ 20 crore and above
D ₹ 25 crore and above E None of the avove Answer: A
789. In fund-based secured advances, overdrawings may be allowed for payment of statutory dues,
85
salaries, wages or any other justifiable debits for very short period say 2-3 days, but not
exceeding ______ days (including roll over, if any) to meet temporary mismatch of funds in
Page
unforeseen circumstances by officials at branch level within their vested loaning powers for

sanction of TOD/ adhoc facility. Circular L&A 60/2021dated 07.04.2021

790. The PNB Score is applicable to all Retail Loan applications (except exempted categories) for
loan upto ₹______, however, for retail loan schemes namely Housing Loan, Education Loan and
Vehicle Loan (loans to individuals), the same is applicable irrespective of amount. Circular L&A
60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A ₹25.00 lakhs B ₹50.00 lakhs C ₹75.00 lakhs
D ₹100.00 lakhs E None of the avove Answer: B
791. The credit risk rating of a borrower shall become due for updation after the expiry of ______
months from the month of confirmation of rating or ______ months from the date of balance
sheet on the basis of which credit risk rating was assigned, whichever is earlier. Circular L&A
60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A 12 months ; 18 months B 12 months ; 21 months C 15 months ; 18 month
D 15 months ; 21 month E None of the avove Answer: A
792. The rating shall be treated as ‘overdue’ after the expiry of ______ months from the month of
confirmation of rating or ______months from the date of Balance Sheet on the basis of which the
credit risk rating was assigned, whichever is earlier. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A 12 months ; 18 months B 12 months ; 21 months C 15 months ; 18 month
D 15 months ; 21 month E None of the avove Answer: D
793. PNB Farm Score Model is applicable for Cash Credit/Production Credit loan more than ₹______
and for investment Credit/Term Loan more than ₹______. Circular L&A 60/2021
dated 07.04.2021
A ₹2 lakh ; Rs. 1 lakh B ₹3 lakh ; Rs. 1 lakh C ₹3 lakh ; Rs. 2 lakh
D ₹5 lakh ; Rs. 2 lakh E None of the avove Answer: B
794. Maximum time schedule for disposal of loan applications/credit proposals upto ₹2 lakhs under
priority/non priority sector advances, MSME etc. (other than proposals falling under retail
lending schemes) is ______. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A 2 Weeks B 4 weeks C 5-6 weeks
D 6-7 weeks E None of the avove Answer: A
795. Maximum time schedule for disposal of loan applications/credit proposals above ₹2 lakhs & upto
₹50 lakhs under priority/non priority sector advances, MSME etc. (other than proposals falling
under retail lending schemes) is ______. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
D 6-7 weeks E None of the avove Answer: B
796. Maximum time schedule for disposal of loan applications/credit proposals above ₹50 lac & upto
₹100 lac under priority/non priority sector advances, MSME etc. (other than proposals falling
under retail lending schemes) is ______. Circular L&A 60/2021dated 07.04.2021
D 6-7 weeks E None of the avove Answer: C
797. Maximum time schedule for disposal of loan applications/credit proposals above ₹100 lac & upto
₹100 crore under priority/non priority sector advances, MSME etc. (other than proposals falling
under retail lending schemes) is ______. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A 4 weeks B 5-6 weeks C 6-7 weeks
D 8-9 weeks E None of the avove Answer: C
798. Maximum time schedule for disposal of loan applications/credit proposals above ₹100 crore
under priority/non priority sector advances, MSME etc. (other than proposals falling under retail
lending schemes) is ______. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A 4 weeks B 5-6 weeks C 6-7 weeks
D 8-9 weeks E None of the avove Answer: D
799. The time frame for disposal of loan applications of MSE borrowers up to ₹5 lakh in line with
BCSBI-Code of Bank’s Commitment to Micro and Small Enterprises (MSE) is ______. Circular L&A
86
60/2021 dated 07.04.2021

Page
D 6-7 weeks E None of the avove Answer: A

800. The time frame for disposal of loan applications of MSE borrowers over ₹5 lakh and up to ₹25
lakh in line with BCSBI-Code of Bank’s Commitment to Micro and Small Enterprises (MSE) is
______. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A 2 Weeks B 3 Weeks C 4 weeks
D 6 Weeks E None of the avove Answer: B
801. The time frame for disposal of loan applications of MSE borrowers above ₹25 lakh in line with
BCSBI-Code of Bank’s Commitment to Micro and Small Enterprises (MSE) is ______. Circular L&A
60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A 2 Weeks B 3 Weeks C 4 weeks
D 6 Weeks E None of the avove Answer: D
802. Under “Hybrid Security” Model, the Bank is allowed to obtain collateral security for a part of the
credit facility, whereas the remaining part of the credit facility, up to a maximum of ₹______, can
be covered under Credit Guarantee Scheme of CGTMSE. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
D ₹250 lakh E None of the avove Answer: C
803. The objective of the Stand-Up India scheme is to facilitate bank loans above ₹`10.00 lakh and
upto ₹______ to at least one Scheduled Caste (SC) or Scheduled Tribe (ST) borrower and at least
one woman borrower per bank branch for setting up a greenfield (New) enterprise. Circular L&A
60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
804. Govt. of India launched a transformative initiative in MSME credit space by launching portal
www.psbloansin59minutes.com. This web portal enables in principle approval for MSME loans
upto ₹______ within 59 minutes from SIDBI and Public Sector Banks (PSBs). Circular L&A 60/2021
dated 07.04.2021
A ₹1.00 Crore B ₹2.00 Crore C ₹5.00 Crore
D ₹10.00 Crore E None of the avove Answer: C
805. Claims on Central Government/ State Govt. and accounts guaranteed by central Government
attracts risk weight of ______%, whereas State Govt. guaranteed claims attracts 20% risk weight.
Circular L&A 60/2021
dated 07.04.2021
A 0% ; 20% B 20% ; 20% C 20% ; 100%
806. There is _______% risk weight in case of claims on RBI/DIGCC/ CGTMSE/ Credit Risk Guarantee
Fund Trust for Low Income Housing (CRGFTLIH). However,the claims on ECGC attract risk
weight of ______%, subject to maximum liability (ML) amount specified in the whole turnover
policy taken by Bank. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A 0% ; 20% B 20% ; 20% C 20% ; 100%
807. Claims on Corporates include all FB and NFB exposures, other than those which qualify for
inclusion under sovereign, bank, regulatory retail, residential mortgage, NPA and specified
categories, The risk weight is in the range of _____% to _______% depending upon the ratings
assigned by the external credit rating agencies as approved by the RBI/Board of the bank.
A 10% ; 100% B 20% ; 100% C 10% ; 150%
D 20% ; 150% E 20% ; 150% Answer: D
808. Risk weight of ______% will be applicable on all unrated claims on corporates having aggregate
exposure of more than ₹200 crore from the banking system with effect from FY 2019-20 onwards.
A 20%. B 100%. C 125%.
809. Claims on Corporates, AFCs, and NBFC-IFCs having aggregate exposure from banking system
87
of more than ₹ 100 crore which were rated earlier and subsequently have become unrated
attracts a risk weight of ______%. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
Page
A 20%. B 100%. C 125%.


810. Claims (including both FB and NFB) in respect of individual, HUF, partnership firm, trust, private
limited company, public limited company, co-operative societies etc. are assigned risk weight of
______% except in non-performing assets. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A 20% B 25% C 50%
811. The threshold limit of ₹5.00 crore for aggregated retail exposure to a counterparty shall stand
increased to ______ from RBI notification date 12.10.2020. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A ₹5.50 crore B ₹6.50 crore C ₹7.50 crore
D ₹10.00 crore E None of the avove Answer: C
812. Individual Housing Loans up to ₹30 lakh, which are fully secured by mortgage of residential
properties where Loan to Value Ratio (LTV) is ≤ 80 attracts a risk weight of ______%. Circular L&A
60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A 25%. B 35%. C 50%.
813. Individual Housing Loans up to ₹30 lakh, which are fully secured by mortgage of residential
properties where Loan to Value Ratio (LTV) is > 80 and ≤ 90 attracts a risk weight of ______%.
A 25%. B 35%. C 50%.
814. Individual Housing Loans above ₹30 lakh and up to ₹75 lakh, which are fully secured by
mortgage of residential properties where Loan to Value Ratio (LTV) is ≤ 75 attracts a risk weight
of ______%. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A 25%. B 35%. C 50%.
815. Individual Housing Loans above ₹30 lakh and up to ₹75 lakh, which are fully secured by
mortgage of residential properties where Loan to Value Ratio (LTV) is > 75 and ≤ 80 attracts a
risk weight of ______%. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A 25%. B 35%. C 50%.
816. Individual Housing Loans above ₹75 lakh, which are fully secured by mortgage of residential
properties where Loan to Value Ratio (LTV) is ≤ 75 attracts a risk weight of ______%. Circular L&A
60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A 25%. B 35%. C 50%.
817. Commercial Real Estate – Residential Housing (CRE-RH) attracts a risk weight of ______%.
A 35%. B 50%. C 75%.
818. Commercial Real Estate (CRE) attracts a risk weight of ______%. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated
07.04.2021
A 35%. B 50%. C 75%.
819. Consumer credit including personal loans but excluding educational loan attracts risk weight @
______ and credit card receivables attracts risk weight @ ______ or higher, if warranted by the
external rating (or, the lack of it) of the counterparty. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A 0% ; 20% B 20% ; 20% C 20% ; 100%
820. A claim on venture capital fund attracts risk weight of ______%. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated
07.04.2021
A 20% B 100% C 125%
88
821. The risk weight in case of Capital Market Exposure attracts a higher risk weight of ______% or
higher, if warranted by the external rating or lack of it. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
Page
A 20% B 100% C 125%


822. Claims on bank’s own staff which are fully covered by superannuation benefits and/or mortgage
of flat/house attracts ______% risk weight. All other loans and advances to Bank’s own staff
attracts a uniform risk weight of ______%. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A 10% ; 100% B 20% ; 100% C 20% ; 125%
823. In view of Basel III regulations, the borrowers of having aggregate exposure (FB+NFB) above
₹______ or total average annual turnover of more than ₹______, shall get their credit facilities
rated from any of the External Rating Agencies. Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A ₹1 Crore ; ₹50 crore B ₹5 Crore ; ₹50 crore C ₹10 Crore ; ₹50 crore
D ₹10 Crore ; ₹100 crore E None of the avove Answer: B
824. As per our Bank’s guidelines all borrowers with total exposure (both Fund Based & Non Fund
Based) up to ₹______ has been exempted from securing External Risk Ratings. Circular L&A
60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
D ₹50 Crore E None of the avove Answer: C
825. Which of the following is not an objective of Loan Management Solution (PNB LenS)? Circular
L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A Standardization of System, B Ease of processing due to C Uniform and consistent
Process and Appraisal integration with various appraisal to speed up the
Formats for Loan tools/software required for process of Credit
Processing and Sanction. appraisal. sanctions.
D Automated generation of E None of the Above Answer: E
Loan Documents for each
type of credit facilities.
826. Which of the following statement/s is/are incorrect in respect of Loans and Advances against
Shares, Debentures and Bonds?
i) No loans will be granted against partly paid shares.
ii) No loans will be granted to partnership/proprietorship concerns against the primary security
of shares and debentures.
A Only i) B Only ii) C Both i) and ii)
D Neither i) nor ii) E Answer: D
827. Which of the following statement/s is/are incorrect in respect of restrictions on grant of Loans
and Advances? Circular L&A 60/2021
dated 07.04.2021
A Bank should not sanction B Bank shall not grant any C Banks should not grant
advances against FDRs, loan/advance for any advance for purchase
or other term deposits of subscription to Indian of gold in any form
other Banks/NBFCs/FIs. Depository Receipts
(IDRs).
D No loans shall be E None of the Above Answer: E
sanctioned for acquisition
of/investing in Small
Savings Instruments
including Kisan Vikas
Patras.
828. While appraising proposal for term loan, which of the following is not required for analytical
assessment of term loan in the appraisal? Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A Purpose, cost of project B Future trends of C Estimates of costs,
and how it is to be tied up production and sales expenses, earning and
profitability
D Cash flow statements E None of the Above Answer: E
89
during the period of the

loan
Page
829. While appraising proposal for term loan, which of the following fundamentals should not be

require studied and analysed? Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021

A Technical feasibility of the B Economic viability of the C Financial viability of the
project. project. project.
D Managerial competence. E None of the Above Answer: E
830. Which of the following statement/s is/are incorrect in respect of Internal Credit Risk rating
A Investment Grades- Rating B Borderline Risk Grade-B3 C High Risk Grades- C1, C2
grades B2 and above (Having score more than and C3 (Having score up
(With score of more than 40.00 and upto 46.00) to 40.00)
46.00)
831. RBI has advised that floating rate Personal or Retail loans (housing, auto, etc.) and floating rate
loans to Micro, Small & Medium Enterprises extended by banks shall be benchmarked to ______
under REPO linked Lending Rate (RLLR).
i) Reserve Bank of India policy Repo Rate
ii) Government of India 3-Months Treasury Bill yield published by the Financial Benchmarks
India Private Ltd (FBIL)
iii) Government of India 6-Months Treasury Bill yield published by the FBIL
iv) Any other benchmark market interest rate published by the FBIL.
A Only i) and ii) B Only i), ii) and iii) C Only ii), ii) and iv)
D Any one of the above E None of the Above Answer: D
832. Under the scheme “PNB PRIME ADVANTAGE”, pricing has been linked to external benchmark
(RLPLR) for which of the following categories of prime borrowers having risk weight of 20% or
less? Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A All India Financial B AAA rated corporate C Maharatna PSUs and
Institutions borrowers (except Banks Navratna PSUs
& NBFC)
D MiniratnaPSUs, with E All the above Answer: E
healthy financials and
good profitability track
record.
833. Under the scheme “PNB PRIME PLUS”, pricing has been linked to T-bill rates as the external
benchmark (TBLR) for which of the following categories of Target segment borrowers? Circular
L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A AAA& AA rated corporate B PSU’s, Central & State C All India Financial
borrowers (except Banks Govt. Undertakings Institutions (NABARD,
& NBFC). including their NBFCs. EXIM, SIDBI & NHB etc.).
834. Under the scheme “PNB PRIME CORP PLUS”, pricing has been linked to G-Sec rates as the
external benchmark (EBLR) for which of the following categories of Target segment borrowers?
A AAA& AA rated corporate B PSU’s, Central & State C All India Financial
borrowers (except Banks Govt. Undertakings Institutions (NABARD,
& NBFC). including their NBFCs. EXIM, SIDBI & NHB etc.).
835. Which of the following accounts are excluded for appointment of Agencies for Specialised
Monitoring (ASMs)? Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A Accounts of Central / State B Accounts having Govt C PSU (Central / State)
Govt undertaking. Guarantee accounts
836. Agencies for Specialised Monitoring (ASMs) can also be appointed in which of the following
situations, irrespective of the type of banking arrangement (Sole/Consortium/Multiple) and limit
90
amount? Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021

A In case of exposures of B Criticality/Stress observed C Project or functioning of
Page
specialized nature. in the account & SMA-2. borrowal account is too

technical or complex.
D If flagged as RFA by E All the above Answer: E
Banks.
837. Which of the following statement/s is/are incorrect in respect of Eligibility and cut off limit of
accounts (risk rated standard accounts) for credit audit? Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A All rated standard B In case of accounts with C Top 5 rated standard
accounts with exposure of combined group exposure accounts of Circle with a
₹10 cr. & above. of ₹10 cr. and above all minimum balance of ₹5
the accounts irrespective cr. & above, where
of individual limits shall be auditable accounts are
subjected to credit audit. less than 10 in a Financial
Year.
D In case of taken over E None of the Above Answer: E
borrowal accounts, credit
audit are also to be
conducted for accounts
with exposure of ₹1 crore
and above.
838. Under which of the following cases, Risk Rating shall not be done through Credit Risk Rating
Model-PNB TRAC? Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A For all Agriculture loans B Agriculture loans above C Agriculture loans above
above ₹50.00 lakh ₹50.00 lakh for Individuals ₹50.00 lakh for Individuals
having audited book of setting up new business
accounts and financial having projected balance
statements. sheet and financials
D Agriculture loans above E None of the Above Answer: D
₹50.00 lakh for those
Individuals only, who don’t
prepare any book of
accounts and don’t have
credible financial
statements.
839. Which of the following Model/s is/are incorrect in respect of Farm Score for scoring Agriculture
Schemes? Circular L&A 60/2021 dated 07.04.2021
A Model I: Farm Credit- B Model II: Farm Credit- C Model III: Farm Credit-
Agriculture with limit above Allied Agriculture with limit Agriculture with limit
₹1 lakh. above ₹1 lakh. above ₹1 lakh (Renewal/
Enhancement)
D Model IV: Farm Credit- E None of the Above Answer: E
Allied Agriculture with limit
above ₹1 lakh (Renewal/
Enhancement).
840. Which of the following Exposures is not covered for charging Country Risk Premium? Circular
L&A 53/2021 dated 26.03.2021
A Loans & Advances B Trade Credit & C Overdraft in Vostro
Receivables Account
D Indirect Exposures and E None of the Above Answer: E
Non-Fund Exposures
841. Normally a packing credit advance is to be granted upto a maximum period of ______ at a
concessive rate of interest. Circular L&A 48/2021 dated 24.03.2021
842. In case the exporter is not in a position to ship the goods within the maximum period of 180
days, extension of packing credit may be permitted by Permitting authority upto ______. Circular
91
L&A 48/2021 dated 24.03.2021

Page

843. If pre-shipment advances are not adjusted by submission of export documents within ______
from the date of pre-shipment advance, the advances will cease to qualify for concessive rate of
interest to the exporter ab initio. Circular L&A 48/2021 dated 24.03.2021
844. In respect of cases relating to the exports of any commodity, where the amount of pre-shipment
credit is in excess of the export value, the excess amount should be adjusted either in cash or
by sale of non-exportable by-product, as soon as the extraction / segregation of by-product is
completed, within a period of ______ from the date of advance. Circular L&A 48/2021 dated
24.03.2021
845. Packing credit advances may be made against cash incentives / assistance etc., keeping a
margin of ______%, as the incentive amount are not subject to any fluctuation. Circular L&A
48/2021 dated 24.03.2021
A 5%. B 10%. C 15%.
846. In case of usance bills, Post-shipment Export Credit can be granted for a maximum duration of
______ from date of shipment inclusive of Normal Transit Period (NTP) and grace period, if any.
A three months B six months C nine months
D twelve months E None of the avove Answer: C
847. In agricultural loans up to credit limit of Rs. ______, where agricultural land is being offered as
security, valuation of such agricultural land may be assessed on the basis of Circle Rates
decided by revenue authorities. Circular L&A 41/2021 dated 01.03.2021
D Rs. 5.00 Crore E None of the avove Answer: B
848. Advances at other than base branch to individual against his/her own deposit shall be permitted
where deposit value is up to Rs. ______ only. Circular L&A 39/2021 dated 19.02.2021
D Rs. 5.00 Crore E None of the avove Answer: B
849. Staff advance upto Rs. 10.00 lac against Bank deposits shall be sanctioned under staff scheme
where margin of ______% is prescribed and above Rs. 10.00 lac it shall be dealt as the case of
advance to public. Circular L&A 39/2021 dated 19.02.2021
A 2.5%. B 5%. C 7.5%.
850. Whenever advances are permitted to customers against balance lying in current/savings
accounts, Advances may be permitted to the extent of _____% of the balance lying in the
current/savings account. Circular L&A 39/2021 dated 19.02.2021
A 70% B 75% C 85%
851. Margin for advance against Rupee Term Deposit upto Rs. 10 lacs to members of staff/
honourably retired/ voluntarily retired/ widow of staff will be ______% Circular L&A 39/2021 dated
19.02.2021
A 5% B 7.50% C 10.00%
D 12.00% E 20.00% Answer: A
852. Margin for advance granted against Rupee Term Deposit standing in the name of the borrower
(including NRE deposits) will be ______% where maturity period remaining at the time of
granting advances is upto 2 years. Circular L&A 39/2021 dated 19.02.2021
A 5% B 7.50% C 10.00%
D 12.00% E 20.00% Answer: A
92
granting advances is above 2 years and upto 3 years. Circular L&A 39/2021 dated 19.02.2021
Page
A 5% B 7.50% C 10.00%

D 12.00% E 20.00% Answer: B

A 5% B 7.50% C 10.00%
D 12.00% E 20.00% Answer: C
A 5% B 7.50% C 10.00%
D 12.00% E 20.00% Answer: D
granting advances is above 5 years. Circular L&A 39/2021 dated 19.02.2021
A 5% B 7.50% C 10.00%
D 12.00% E 20.00% Answer: E
857. Margin for advance granted against NRO Term Deposits will be ______% Circular L&A 39/2021
dated 19.02.2021
A 7.50% B 10.00% C 20.00%
858. Which of the following advances may not be treated as loans/ advances against borrower’s own
deposits? Circular L&A 39/2021 dated 19.02.2021
A Advances made to a B Advances made to a C Advances made to a
guardian competent to proprietary concern partnership firm against a
borrow against a deposit in against a deposit in the deposit in the name of
the name of his ward for name of its proprietor. one of the partners.
the benefit of the ward.
D Advances made to an E None of the Above Answer: E
individual against the
deposit held in the name
of a firm where he stands
as a proprietor.
859. The advance against which of the following fixed deposit schemes have been restricted? Circular
L&A 39/2021 dated 19.02.2021
A PNB Tax saver FDR B Capital Gains Account C Balika Shiksha Fixed
scheme Deposit scheme
above ₹______ and upto Rs. 200 crores shall be placed before NBG-I. Circular L&A 37/2021 dated
16.02.2021
A ₹50 crore ; Rs. 100 B ₹50 crore ; Rs. 200 C ₹100 crore ; Rs. 200
crores crores crores
D ₹100 crore ; Rs. 500 E None of the avove Answer: B
crores
861. All fresh credit proposals envisaging total exposure (both fund based and non-fund based)
above Rs. ______ shall be placed before NBG-II. Circular L&A 37/2021 dated 16.02.2021
A Rs. 50.00 crores B Rs. 100.00 crores C Rs. 150.00 crores
D Rs. 200.00 crores E None of the avove Answer: D
862. Shares & Stock Brokers registered with SEBI and who have complied with Capital adequacy
norms as prescribed by SEBI/Stock Exchange and having minimum net worth of Rs.______ may
be granted fund based and guarantee facilities against Shares / Debentures of Companies.
A Rs.1 crore B Rs.2 crore C Rs.5 crore
93
D Rs.10 crore E None of the avove Answer: A

863. For financing advance to Share and Stock Brokers against Shares / Debentures of Companies,
Page
Collateral security should be obtained to the extent of ______% of the amount of guarantee in

the shape of IPs, Govt. security, Shares/Debentures of companies and bonds issued by PSUs
approved by HO, units of mutual funds, other Govt. securities etc., as acceptable to the bank.
A 50%. B 75%. C 100%.
864. Minimum margin for financing advance to Share and Stock Brokers against Shares / Debentures
of Companies will be ______% for Fund Based Limit. Circular L&A 31/2021 dated 12.02.2021
A 50%. B 75%. C 100%.
865. Minimum margin for financing advance to Share and Stock Brokers against Shares / Debentures
of Companieswill be ______% for Non Fund Based Limit out of which minimum ______% in the
shape of Cash/FDRs. Circular L&A 31/2021 dated 12.02.2021
A 25% ; 15% B 50% ; 15% C 50% ; 25%
866. Shares and Stock Brokers registered with SEBI and members of NSE or BSE complying with the
capital adequacy norms prescribed by SEBI/Stock Exchange, having minimum networth of Rs.
______ may be provided finance for margin trading in actively traded scrips of the companies
approved by HO. Circular L&A 31/2021 dated 12.02.2021
867. The aggregate exposure of the bank to the capital market in all forms (both fund based and non-
fund based) should not exceed ______% of its net worth as on 31st March of the previous year.
A 20%. B 30%. C 40%.
868. Within the overall ceiling the bank’s direct investment in shares, convertible bonds/debentures,
units of equity oriented mutual funds and all exposures to venture capital funds (both registered
and unregistered) should not exceed ______% of its net worth. Circular L&A 31/2021 dated
12.02.2021
A 20%. B 30%. C 40%.
869. Our bank bank has prescribed the internal ceilings of overall ceiling for aggregate advances
forming part of exposure to capital market at 20% of net worth of the bank. Circular L&A 31/2021
dated 12.02.2021
A 20%. B 30%. C 40%.
870. Our bank bank has prescribed the internal sub-ceiling for advances to Shares & Stock Brokers at
______% of net worth of the bank within the overall ceiling of 20%. Circular L&A 31/2021 dated
12.02.2021
A 10%. B 20%. C 40%.
871. For advances to any single stock broking entity including its associate/allied concerns, a ceiling
of Rs. ______ has been fixed by our bank. Circular L&A 31/2021 dated 12.02.2021
D Rs. 150 crore E None of the avove Answer: C
872. Our bank bank has prescribed a ceiling of Rs. ______ and Rs. ______ for financing individuals
for acquiring shares under IPO/FPO and ESOP respectively. Circular L&A 31/2021 dated
12.02.2021
lakh
D Rs. 20 lakh ; Rs. 50 lakh E None of the avove Answer: A
873. The maximum ceilings prescribed by RBI for advances to individuals against security of shares
94
and debentures is Rs. ______ against dematerialized shares from entire banking system. Circular
L&A 31/2021 dated 12.02.2021
Page

D Rs. 50 lakh E None of the avove Answer: B

874. Margin for advance against Equity Shares/Mutual Funds (Equity /Hybrid/ETF)/ ESOPs/ IPOs will
be ______%. Circular L&A 30/2021 dated 12.02.2021
A 50%. B 35%. C 25%.
875. Margin for advance against Mutual Funds (Debt Schemes) and Bonds / Debentures will be
______%. Circular L&A 30/2021 dated 12.02.2021
A 50%. B 35%. C 25%.
876. Advance against the primary security of units of mutual funds may be given to _______. Circular
L&A 31/2021 dated 12.02.2021
A Investment Companies B Stock and Share Brokers C Trust and Endowments
877. In our bank, Minimum amount of advance against Shares / Debentures of Companies and Bonds
of Public Sector Undertakings will be Rs. ______ per Individual. Circular L&A 30/2021 dated
12.02.2021
A Rs. 1.00 Lakhs B Rs. 2.00 Lakhs C Rs. 5.00 Lakhs
D Rs. 10.00 Lakhs E None of the avove Answer: A
878. In our bank, Maximum amount of advance per Individual against Equity Shares/ /Debentures/
Bonds will be Rs. ______ from Banking System. Circular L&A 30/2021 dated 12.02.2021
879. In our bank, Maximum amount of advance per Individual against Mutual Fund will be Rs. ______ .
880. In our bank, Maximum amount of advance per Individual against Debt Oriented Mutual Fund will
be Rs. ______ . Circular L&A 30/2021 dated 12.02.2021
A Rs. 25.00 Lakhs B Rs. 50.00 Lakhs C Rs. 100.00 Lakhs
D Rs. 500.00 Lakhs E None of the avove Answer: C
881. Maximum Repayment period for IPOs will be ______ in the form of Demand Loan. Circular L&A
30/2021 dated 12.02.2021
882. In which of the following cases, the loans may be sanctioned ? Circular L&A 30/2021 dated
12.02.2021
A Loan against partly paid B Against PNB C Against security/share of
securities/ Preference security/shares PNB Subsidiaries/ PNB
shares/ Shares of Private Associates
companies/ Unlisted
Companies.
D Against Securities held in E None of the Above Answer: E
the name of
Minors/Proprietorship/
Third Party/ Jointly.
883. Under CIBIL MSME Rank (CMR), the liquidity profile of the borrower is adjudged by looking at the
seasonally adjusted pattern of funds utilization over the past ______ months’ period. Circular L&A
26/2021 dated 01.02.2021
884. CIBIL presently provides CMR for borrowers availing credit facilities upto ₹______ from the
Banking system. The CMR shall be delivered in the commercial CIBIL report of applicable
95
borrowers only. Circular L&A 26/2021 dated 01.02.2021

Page

885. Branch Visit by Pre Disbursement Auditor is mandatory for all the credit facilities above
Rs.______. Circular L&A 22/2021 dated 29.01.2021
D Rs.100.00 Lakh E None of the avove Answer: D
886. For credit facilities up to Rs ______, Branch Visit by Pre Disbursement Auditor is not required.
887. Which of the following category of advances shall not be exempted from Pre Disbursement
Compliance (PDC)? Circular L&A 22/2021 dated 29.01.2021
A a. Loan to staff members B Renewal of Credit C DL/OD against 100 %
under Staff Scheme or Facilities at existing or FDR.
General Public Scheme reduced level without any
major change in terms and
conditions of last
sanction/renewal.
D BG/LC against 100% E None of the Above Answer: D
FDR/LIP/NSC etc
888. CRMD, HO shall monitor the compliance of Pre Disbursement Audit for all credit limits of above
Rs. ______ under centralized monitoring mechanism. Circular L&A 22/2021 dated 29.01.2021
889. The acceptable CV Score for Consumer CIR that can be considered safe/less risk prone with
respect to the sanction of credit facilities is ______. Circular L&A 15/2021 dated 15.01.2021
A 600& above B 650& above C 700& above
D 750& above E None of the avove Answer: B
890. Credit Information Report should not be older than ______ days at the time of Fresh Sanction/
Enhancement/ Renewal/ Review/ Adhoc/Additional credit facility. Circular L&A 15/2021 dated
15.01.2021
891. Which of the following category of advances is/are not exempted from Drawing of CIRs shall be
exempted? Circular L&A 15/2021 dated 15.01.2021
A Advance against Shares, B Advances against 100% C All Staff Loans
and Debentures & Mutual Cash Margin
Funds
D Advance against gold E None of the Above Answer: E
jewellery/ornaments
892. For considering loans to individuals (including Proprietorship Accounts) whose CV score is less
than 650, the sanctioning authority at field level (i.e. Branch /PLP/MCC) may consider the credit
facility (fresh/enhancement/additional) subject to fulfilment of which of the following conditions?
A The aggregate amount of B Default/irregularity C Current CIBIL CV score of
default except credit card should be atleast 1 the borrower shall not be
default in regard to all the year prior to the below 550.
credit facilities provided by date of current
the other banks/NBFCs application for fresh credit
should be less than facilities.
₹25,000/-.
893. The facility under PNB-Sampatti scheme may be granted to which of the following category of
borrower? Circular dated
A Builders B Property Dealers C Real Estate Agents
96
D Real Estate E None of the Above Answer: E

894. Borrowal account should be taken over from other banks on selective basis after obtaining prior
Page
approval from the next higher authority of the official under whose powers the takeover of the

account (entire fund based and non-fund based limits) is proposed. Such approval shall not be
necessary in cases where the accounts of other banks have been adjusted for over ______
months. Circular L&A 8/2021 dated 07.01.2021
895. The accounts for consideration of takeover should have a rating of______ as per rating scale
and should be duly vetted by Competent Authority as per extant guidelines on Rating and
Vetting. Circular L&A 8/2021 dated 07.01.2021
A A3 & above B B1 & above C B2 & above
D B3 & above E None of the avove Answer: B
896. The small loan accounts with aggregate exposure upto and including Rs.______ having credit
risk rating ‘B2 & below’ are not to be considered for takeover. Circular L&A 8/2021 dated
07.01.2021
D Rs.10 crore E None of the avove Answer: C
897. The accounts for consideration of takeover should be in the `Standard Asset' category of the
existing bank and the borrower should have earned net profit after tax in the immediately
preceding ______ years and have sound financial position. Circular L&A 8/2021 dated 07.01.2021
898. In case of working capital limits if enhancement of ______% and above is considered at the time
of takeover, instead of seeking prior approval from the next higher authority, the proposals shall
be sanctioned by the next higher authority on merits of the case subject to the compliance of the
other guidelines. Circular L&A 8/2021 dated 07.01.2021
A 10% B 15% C 20%
899. In case of taken over borrowal accounts, credit audit is to be conducted for accounts with
exposure of Rs.______. Circular L&A 8/2021 dated 07.01.2021
A Rs.1 crore and above B Rs.2 crore and above C Rs.5 crore and above
D Rs.10 crore and above E None of the avove Answer: A
900. For retail loan accounts eligible in terms of guidelines on takeover, obtention of NOC/Credit
Report may not be insisted at the time of sanctioning of credit facilities. However, statement of
account of minimum ______ months, a certificate with the content that account is running
regular with no default and asset classification is standard may be called from existing banks.
901. Takeover of sick industrial company involving a project/rehabilitation outlay (capital cost of
rehabilitation) of Rs. ______ may only be considered. Circular L&A 8/2021 dated 07.01.2021
A Rs.1 crore and above B Rs.2 crore and above C Rs.5 crore and above
D Rs.10 crore and above E None of the avove Answer: C
902. Bank may also consider retired top executives of RBI / other Banks / our Bank not exceeding
______ years of age for appointment as Nominee Directors. Circular IRMD 30/2021 dated
30.09.2021
903. The Nominee Director shall be appointed in one investee company for a maximum period of
______ years, or date of superannuation, or date of tendering resignation from Bank’s service,
whichever is earlier. Circular IRMD 30/2021 dated 30.09.2021
D five years E None of the above Answer: B
904. Bank shall not appoint any official as Nominee Director if he/she has served in that capacity on
97
any one or more of the investee companies’ Board for a period of ______ years, whether
continuously or intermittently. Circular IRMD 30/2021 dated 30.09.2021
Page
A two years B three years C five years

D six years E None of the above Answer: D

905. PNB SAMPATTI scoring model will be applicable for credit exposure up to Rs. ______ while
renewing/reviewing the facilities under PNB SAMPATTI scheme. Circular IRMD 16/2021 dated
04.06.2021
A Rs. 1.00 Crores B Rs. 2.00 Crores C Rs. 5.00 Crores
D Rs. 10.00 Crores E None of the above Answer: C
906. Which of the following is/are incorect in respect of newly introduced scoring model for PNB
SAMPATTI scheme? Circular IRMD 16/2021 dated 04.06.2021
A If Score Range under PNB B If Score Range under PNB C If Score Range under
SAMPATTI scoring model SAMPATTI scoring model PNB SAMPATTI scoring
is up to 40, Application is above 40 up to 50, model is bove 50,
under PNB SAMPATTI Application under PNB Application under PNB
scheme cannot be SAMPATTI scheme can SAMPATTI scheme can
considered for sanction. be considered by next be considered for
higher Authority for sanction at branches as
sanction with proper
per their vested loaning
justifications.
powers.
907. Which of the following is not an example of Near-Miss Events? Circular IRMD 16/2021 dated
04.06.2021
A An operational risk B Where the maker & C Undercharges, which
incident, which could have checker of a transaction have arisen not out of
resulted in a loss, had it have made a mistake, but commercial decision but
not been discovered and subsequently detected and due to operational
corrected in time rectified without loss lapses/mistakes and
could not be recovered
and ultimately waived
908. Where outsourcing is involved, Poor service from the service provider, its customer interaction
not being consistent with the overall standards of the bank is called ______. Circular IRMD
13/2021 dated 15.04.2021
A Reputation Risk B Compliance Risk C Operational Risk
D Any of the above E None of the above Answer: A
909. Where outsourcing is involved, If Privacy, consumer and prudential laws are not adequately
complied with, It is called _______. Circular IRMD 13/2021 dated 15.04.2021
D Any of the above E None of the above Answer: B
910. The risk arising due to technology failure, fraud, error, inadequate financial capacity to fulfill
obligations and/or provide remedies is called ______. Circular IRMD 13/2021 dated 15.04.2021
D Any of the above E None of the above Answer: C
911. The risk which includes but is not limited to exposure to fines, penalties, or punitive damages
resulting from supervisory actions, as well as private settlements due to omissions and
commissions of the service provider is called ______. Circular IRMD 13/2021 dated 15.04.2021
A Legal Risk B Counter party Risk C Country Risk
912. The risk arising due to inappropriate underwriting or credit assessments is called ______.
Circular IRMD 13/2021 dated 15.04.2021
913. The risk arising due to the political, social or legal climate creating added risk is called ______.
98

Page
914. The failure of a service provider in providing a specified service, a breach in security/

confidentiality, or non-compliance with legal and regulatory requirements by either the service
provider or the outsourcing bank is called ______. Circular IRMD 13/2021 dated 15.04.2021
A Concentration and B Counter party Risk C Country Risk
Systemic Risk
915. Operational risk includes legal risk, but excludes strategic and ______. Circular IRMD 12/2021
dated 15.04.2021
A reputational risk B Counter party Risk C Country Risk
916. As per our Policy for Business Continuity Plan, the risk event is measured as 'High' if events of
disruption occurs more than ______ times in a year and the risk event is measured as 'Medium' if
events of disruption is occured more than ______ times in a year. Circular IRMD 11/2021 dated
15.04.2021
A 3 times ; 3-5 times B 4 times ; 4-5 times C 4 times ; 3-5 times
D 5 times ; 3-5 times E None of the above Answer: D
917. Under Operational Risk, which of the following is not a People Risk? Circular IRMD 10/2021 dated
15.04.2021
A Human Resources Risk : B Work Environment C Negligence, Wrongful act
Availability of employees (Internal Fraud)
with adequate skills,
knowledge & experience
918. Under Operational Risk, which of the following is not a Process Risk (Transaction Execution and
Maintenance Risk)? Circular IRMD 10/2021 dated 15.04.2021
A Adequacy of Instructions B Strategy to minimize C Miscommunication
by way of circulars, Job execution errors in
Cards, guidelines etc. transaction
D Involvement of E None of the above Answer: E
intermediary
919. Under Operational Risk, which of the following is not a System (IT) Risk? Circular IRMD 10/2021
dated 15.04.2021
A Hardware / software B System security C Level of manual
breakdown intervention
D Validity of IT System E None of the above Answer: E
920. Our Bank has developed PNB Trac credit rating models for borrower/prospective borrower
availing (FB+NFB) limits of more than Rs.______ except the exempted categories Circular IRMD
08/2021 dated 15.04.2021
A Rs.25 Lakhs B Rs.50 Lakhs C Rs.100 Lakhs
D Rs.500 Lakhs E None of the above Answer: B
921. PNB SAJAG (EWS+PMS) shall be applicable to all corporate borrowers having sanctioned limits
(FB plus NFB) and PNB My Property Loan above Rs______. Circular IRMD 08/2021 dated
15.04.2021
A Rs1.00 Crore. B Rs2.00 Crores C Rs5.00 Crores
D Rs10.00 Crores E None of the above Answer: A
922. Which of the following statement is incorrect in respect of appointment of Group Chief Risk
Officer (GCRO) Circular IRMD 08/2021 dated 15.04.2021
A GCRO shall be in the rank B GCRO shall have C The appointment of the
of Chief General Manager minimum 5 years of GCRO shall be made with
/ General Manager. experience in risk the approval of Board.
functions.
D The appointment of GCRO E None of the above Answer: E
shall be for a minimum
period of 2 Year.
99
923. For the purpose of definition of Intra-Group Transactions and Exposures (ITEs), Single Group
Entity Exposure should be ______% of the Paid-up Capital and Reservesin case of non-financial
Page
companies and un-regulated financial companies Circular IRMD 07/2021 dated 15.04.2021

A 5%. B 10%. C 15%.

924. For the purpose of definition of Intra-Group Transactions and Exposures (ITEs), Single Group
Entity Exposure should be ______% of the Paid-up Capital and Reserves in case of regulated
financial services companies. Circular IRMD 07/2021 dated 15.04.2021
A 5%. B 10%. C 15%.
925. For the purpose of definition of Intra-Group Transactions and Exposures (ITEs), Aggregate
Group Exposure should be ______% of Paid-up Capital and Reserves in case of all non-financial
companies and unregulated financial services companies taken together. Circular IRMD 07/2021
dated 15.04.2021
A 5%. B 10%. C 15%.
926. For the purpose of definition of Intra-Group Transactions and Exposures (ITEs), Aggregate
Group Exposure should be ______% of Paid-up Capital and Reserves in case of the group i.e. all
group entities (financial and non-financial) taken together. Circular IRMD 07/2021 dated 15.04.2021
A 5%. B 10%. C 15%.
927. As per our bank's Policy for Management of Intra-Group Transactions and Exposures (ITEs),
which of the following entities will not be treated as group entity? Circular IRMD 07/2021 dated
15.04.2021
A Subsidiary - Parent B Associate C Joint Venture
D Related party E None of the above Answer: E
which of the following entities will not be treated as group entity? Circular IRMD 07/2021 dated
15.04.2021
A Direct or Indirect B Common Brand Name C Promoters of the Bank
ownership of 20% or more
in the voting power of the
enterprise.
D Non operative financial E None of the above Answer: E
Holding companies
Which of the following Entity/ies is/are exempted from the definition of Group Entities? Circular
IRMD 07/2021 dated 15.04.2021
A The Government being a B Entities, such as C Bank’s exposures to its
sovereign, as a promoter depositories, exchanges, overseas branches,
and owner of the PSB’s clearing and settlement except for proprietary
agencies, etc, that are derivative transactions
promoted by banks to undertaken with them,
undertake financial market
infrastructure activities
930. Which of the following is not an Indicative Triggers for initiation of crisis management for
containing risk to reputation of PNB? Circular IRMD 07/2021 dated 15.04.2021
A Changes in PNB’s Stock B Downgrade in long term C Major regulatory penalty
prices counterparty rating of the imposed on the Bank.
Bank by one notch
D Adverse action against the E None of the above Answer: E
Bank’s Top Management.
931. Changes in PNB’s Stock prices is one of the Indicative Triggers for initiation of crisis
management for containing risk to reputation of PNB. Which of the following change in PNB’s
100
Stock prices is incorrect in this regard? Circular IRMD 07/2021 dated 15.04.2021
A Decrease in stock price by B Decrease in stock price by C Decrease in stock price
more than 5% (daily) for 10% or more on any given for 5 consecutive trading
Page
more than 2 trading days trading day days.


932. Level reputational risk at PNB solo and PNB Group will be ''Negligible" if score range is
______out of hundred. Circular IRMD 06/2021 dated 15.04.2021
A Up to 30 B Above 30 up to 40 C Above 40 up to 50
D Above 50 up to 60 E None of the above Answer: A
933. Level reputational risk at PNB solo and PNB Group will be ''Low" if score range is ______out of
hundred. Circular IRMD 06/2021 dated 15.04.2021
D Above 50 up to 60 E None of the above Answer: B
934. Level reputational risk at PNB solo and PNB Group will be ''Medium" if score range is ______out
of hundred. Circular IRMD 06/2021 dated 15.04.2021
D Above 50 up to 60 E None of the above Answer: C
935. Level reputational risk at PNB solo and PNB Group will be ''High" if score range is ______out of
hundred. Circular IRMD 06/2021 dated 15.04.2021
D Above 50 up to 60 E None of the above Answer: D
936. Level reputational risk at PNB solo and PNB Group will be ''REPUTATION AT STAKE" if score
range is ______out of hundred. Circular IRMD 06/2021 dated 15.04.2021
A Above 30 up to 40 B Above 40 up to 50 C Above 50 up to 60
D Above 60 E None of the above Answer: D
937. In order to commence a Pre-Pack Process in case of an MSME, it should have committed a
payment default of an amount of at least Rs.______. Circular SASTRA 54/2021 dated 07.10.2021
D Rs.50.00 lakh E None of the above Answer: A
938. As per the Ordinance, the timeline for completion of the pre-packaged insolvency resolution
process is ______ days from the date of commencement of the pre-packaged insolvency. Circular
SASTRA 54/2021 dated 07.10.2021
939. Under PPIRP, The name of Insolvency Professional to be proposed by the financial creditors of
the Corporate Debtor, not being its related parties, and having not less than ______% of the
value of the total financial debt of such creditors. Circular SASTRA 54/2021 dated 07.10.2021
A 10%. B 15%. C 20%.
940. Under PPIRP, name of Insolvency Professional to act as Resolution Professional is to be
approved by the financial creditors of the Corporate Debtor, not being its related parties, with
______% majority votes. Circular SASTRA 54/2021 dated 07.10.2021
A 33%. B 44%. C 55%.
941. The Corporate Debtor shall obtain an approval from its financial creditors, not being its related
parties, representing not less than ______% in value of the financial debt due to such creditors,
for the filing of an application for initiating pre-packaged insolvency resolution process. Circular
SASTRA 54/2021 dated 07.10.2021
A 33%. B 44%. C 55%.
942. The Pre-Packaged Insolvency Resolution Process shall commence on admission by
Adjudicating Authority (AA) i.e. NCLT. The prescribed timeline for approval by NCLT is ______
days. Circular SASTRA 54/2021 dated 07.10.2021
101
943. If the application is admitted, the Pre-Pack Process has to be completed within ______ days from
the date of admission (“Pre-Pack Commencement Date”). Circular SASTRA 54/2021 dated
07.10.2021
Page


944. Under PPIRP, The RP has to finalize the information memorandum in compliance with Pre-Pack
Regulations and submit the same to the CoC within ______ days of the Pre-Pack
Commencement Date after obtaining confidentiality undertaking. Circular SASTRA 54/2021 dated
07.10.2021
945. Under PPIRP, Within ______ days of the Pre-Pack Commencement Date, the RP has to form an
opinion whether the Corporate Debtor has been subjected to any Avoidance Transaction (under
sections 43, 45, 50 or 66 of the Code). If the RP believes that the Corporate Debtor has been so
subjected, then RP shall determine the same within ______ days of the Pre-Pack
Commencement Date under intimation to the IBBI. Circular SASTRA 54/2021 dated 07.10.2021
D 45 days ; 60 days E None of the above Answer: B
946. As per Policy of our bank on Insolvency & Bankruptcy Code relating to Pre-Packaged Insolvency
Resolution Process (PPIRP), The Valuations conducted during PPIRP shall be compared with the
existing valuations available in Bank’s record and in case of variation of ______% or more,
proper justification for the same to be recorded in the proposal. Circular SASTRA 54/2021 dated
07.10.2021
A 10%. B 15%. C 20%.
947. As per Policy of our bank on Insolvency & Bankruptcy Code relating to Pre-Packaged Insolvency
Resolution Process (PPIRP), In case, Base Resolution Plan involves restructuring, Minimum
Promoters’ Contribution should be ______% of the ‘long term requirement of funds plus the
monetary value of sacrifices made by the lenders. At least ______% of such contribution should
come upfront at the time of implementation of Resolution Plan post NCLT approval. Circular
SASTRA 54/2021 dated 07.10.2021
A 10% ; 50% B 20% ; 50% C 10% ; 40%
D 20% ; 40% E None of the above Answer: B
948. Once an application for insolvency resolution is admitted by the Adjudicating Authority (AA),
Interim Resolution Professional (IRP) appointed by AA shall make a public announcement by
publishing it immediately (preferably within 3 days of his/her appointment), in two newspapers
and on website of the Board (IBBI), thereby calling upon public for submission of their claims
against such corporate debtor within a period of ______ days from the date of his appointment.
Circular SASTRA 53/2021 dated 07.10.2021
949. Where Book outstanding in the accounts (PNB’s share only) is up to Rs.1 Cr, Maximum fee
payable per month / per borrower (not per account) (PNB’s share only) IRP/RP will be Rs.
______. Circular SASTRA 53/2021 dated 07.10.2021
D Rs. 3.00 Lacs E None of the above Answer: A
950. Where Book outstanding in the accounts (PNB’s share only) is above Rs.1 Cr to Rs.10 Cr,
Maximum fee payable per month / per borrower (not per account) (PNB’s share only) IRP/RP will
be Rs. ______. Circular SASTRA 53/2021 dated 07.10.2021
D Rs. 3.00 Lacs E None of the above Answer: B
951. Where Book outstanding in the accounts (PNB’s share only) is above Rs.50 Cr up to Rs. 100 Cr,
102

952. Where Book outstanding in the accounts (PNB’s share only) is above Rs.10 Cr to Rs. 50 Cr,
Page


953. Where Book outstanding in the accounts (PNB’s share only) is above Rs.100 Cr up to Rs. 500 Cr,
D Rs. 7.50 Lacs E None of the above Answer: D
954. Maximum fee for Appointment of RP for Personal Insolvency wll be Rs. ______ Lakhs where
Estimated value of Net Worth as per last available CR is up to Rs. 10 Cr. Circular SASTRA 53/2021
dated 07.10.2021
A Rs. 1 Lakhs B Rs. 2 Lakhs C Rs. 5 Lakhs
D Rs. 10 Lakhs E None of the above Answer: C
955. Maximum fee for Appointment of RP for Personal Insolvency wll be Rs. ______ Lakhs where
Estimated value of Net Worth as per last available CR is above Rs. 10 Cr to Rs. 50 Cr. Circular
SASTRA 53/2021 dated 07.10.2021
A Rs. 1 Lakhs B Rs. 2 Lakhs C Rs. 5 Lakhs
D Rs. 10 Lakhs E None of the above Answer: D
956. Where Book Outstanding as on the date of approval is up to Rs. 50 Crore, Maximum Sacrifice /
Haircut linked to book outstanding will be Rs. ______ on assenting resolution plan. Circular
SASTRA 53/2021 dated 07.10.2021
A Rs. 10 Crore B Rs. 25 Crore C Rs. 50 Crore
D Rs. 100 Crore E None of the above Answer: A
SASTRA 53/2021 dated 07.10.2021
D Rs. 100 Crore E None of the above Answer: B
SASTRA 53/2021 dated 07.10.2021
D Rs. 100 Crore E None of the above Answer: D
Haircut linked to book outstanding will be Up to Rs. ______ on assenting resolution plan. Circular
SASTRA 53/2021 dated 07.10.2021
D Rs. 500 Crore E None of the above Answer: C
960. For Agriculture NPA Accounts upto Rs. 10.00 Lakhs under DB-III & Loss Category under “Non-
Discriminatory and Non-Discretionary Special OTS Scheme 2021”- for NPA accounts, Settlement
Amount shall be ______ % of Balance Outstanding as on date of settlement where Balance
Outstanding of Agri. NPA accounts under DB-III & Loss Category as on 31.03.2021 was upto Rs.
1.00 Lakh . Circular SASTRA 51/2021 dated 30.09.2021
A 10%. B 15%. C 20%.
961. For Agriculture NPA Accounts upto Rs. 10.00 Lakhs under DB-III & Loss Category under “Non-
Discriminatory and Non-Discretionary Special OTS Scheme 2021”- for NPA accounts, Settlement
Amount shall be ______ % of Balance Outstanding as on date of settlement where Balance
Outstanding of Agri. NPA accounts under DB-III & Loss Category as on 31.03.2021 was above
Rs. 1.00 Lakh upto Rs. 10.00. Circular SASTRA 51/2021 dated 30.09.2021
A 10%. B 15%. C 20%.
103
962. For NPA Accounts upto Rs. 50,000 under Shishu category under DB-III & Loss category having
CGFMU coverage under “Non-Discriminatory and Non-Discretionary Special OTS Scheme 2021”-
for NPA accounts, Settlement Amount shall be ______ % of Balance Outstanding as on date of
Page
settlement. Circular SASTRA 51/2021 dated 30.09.2021

A 10%. B 15%. C 20%.

963. For NPA Accounts under MUDRA-Kishor & MUDRA-Tarun under DB-III & Loss category having
CGFMU coverage under “Non-Discriminatory and Non-Discretionary Special OTS Scheme 2021”-
for NPA accounts, Settlement Amount shall be ______ % of Balance Outstanding as on date of
settlement. Circular SASTRA 51/2021 dated 30.09.2021
A 10%. B 15%. C 20%.
964. Valuers with Educational Qualifications of Diploma shall be eligible for empanelment to
undertake valuation of Properties/ Land& Building/ Real Estate/ Assets/ Plant and Machinery for
loans up-to Rs.______ only. Circular SASTRA 49/2021 dated 22.09.2021
A Rs.1.00 Crore B Rs.2.00 Crore C Rs.5.00 Crore
D Rs10.00 Crore E None of the above Answer: C
965. Age is an important criteria while empanelling valuers. The minimum age for empanelment shall
be ______ years and there is no maximum age limit for a valuer to remain on the panel. Circular
SASTRA 49/2021 dated 22.09.2021
966. For category 'A' valuers, work experience in undertaking valuation should be more than 10 years
and value of property for assignment of Valuation Work shall be Rs. ______. Circular SASTRA
49/2021 dated 22.09.2021
A ₹5 crores B ₹25 crores C ₹50 crores
D No limit E None of the above Answer: D
967. For category 'B' valuers, work experience in undertaking valuation should be more than 5 years
and less than 10 years and value of property for assignment of Valuation Work shall be upto Rs.
D No limit E None of the above Answer: C
968. For category 'C' valuers, work experience in undertaking valuation should be upto 5 years and
value of property for assignment of Valuation Work shall be upto Rs. ______. Circular SASTRA
49/2021 dated 22.09.2021
D No limit E None of the above Answer: A
969. Where the value of immovable property to be mortgaged/ charged is more than ₹______,
branches shall get valuation of such IPs done from minimum two valuers of category A or B on
the Bank’s approved panel. Circular SASTRA 49/2021 dated 22.09.2021
D ₹10 crore E None of the above Answer: C
970. All Borrowal/ Loan accounts identified as NPA in terms of extant RBI guidelines will be eligible
for compromise/ negotiated settlement/one time settlement and/ or write off only after ______
months from its date of slippage to NPA. Circular SASTRA 45/2021 dated 11.08.2021
971. In case borrowers submit representation/raise objections under Section 13(3A) of SARFAESI
Act, suitable reply to be submitted by Authorized Officer within maximum mandatory time limit
of ______ days from the date of receipt of representation from the borrowers, {preferably within
the 60 days period of having issued Notice under Section 13 (2)}. Circular SASTRA 44/2021 dated
11.08.2021
972. As per Rule 8(2) of SARFAESI Act, for immovable properties it is mandatory to published the
104
Possession Notice in the two leading newspapers within ______ days out of which, one in
vernacular language having sufficient circulation in the locality Circular SASTRA 44/2021 dated
11.08.2021
Page


973. In terms of amendments made in the provisions of Section 14 of the SARFAESI Act, on
application/affidavit of the bank, the District Magistrate/ Chief Metropolitan Magistrate will
henceforth pass suitable orders for taking possession of the secured assets within a period of
______ days. Circular SASTRA 44/2021 dated 11.08.2021
974. As per SARFAESI Act, There should be minimum 30 days gap between the date of publication of
Proclamation of Sale Notice and the date of Auction or date of opening the tenders. Circular
SASTRA 44/2021 dated 11.08.2021
975. Non-Discriminatory and Non-Discretionary Special OTS Scheme 2021 shall be applicable to all
NPA accounts, upto Rs _______ as on dated 31.03.2021 (except agricultural advances up to Rs
10.00 lacs and actual written off account) and will remain in force up to 31.03.2022. Circular
SASTRA 39/2021 dated 30.07.2021
A Rs 5.00 Crores B Rs 10.00 Crores C Rs 15.00 Crores
D Rs 25.00 Crores E None of the above Answer: A
976. In case the entire OTS amount, as per the terms finalized in the sanction, is paid within ______ of
conveying approval to the borrower, no interest will be charged under the scheme “Non-
Discriminatory and Non-Discretionary Special OTS Scheme 2021” upto Rs 5.00 Crores for NPA
accounts. Circular SASTRA 31/2021 dated 30.06.2021
977. Under the scheme “Non-Discriminatory and Non-Discretionary Special OTS Scheme 2021” upto
Rs 5.00 Crores for NPA accounts, the maximum repayment period for the said scheme will be
978. Periodicity for Valuation of immovable properties charged/ mortgaged to the bank in NPA
accounts shall be once in ______ years. Circular SASTRA 24/2021 dated 03.06.2021
A six months B one years C two years
D three years E None of the above Answer: D
979. All Borrowal/ Loan accounts identified as NPA in terms of extant RBI guidelines will be eligible
for compromise/ negotiated settlement/one time settlement and/ or write off only after ______
months from its date of -slippage to NPA. Circular SASTRA 23/2021 dated 29.05.2021
980. In Consortium Advance/Multiple Banking Arrangement, where security is charged on Pari-passu
basis, mandate of ______% lenders is mandatory for issuance of notice u/s 13(4) Circular
SASTRA 23/2021 dated 29.05.2021
A 50%. B 55%. C 60%.
981. In Consortium Advance/Multiple Banking Arrangement, where required mandate of 60% lenders
is not available, the mandatory requirement of at least one e-auction shall not be required.
Further, the exemption from E-auction before entering into OTS will be only allowed for NPA
accounts upto Rs. ______. Circular SASTRA 23/2021 dated 29.05.2021
A Rs. 50 Crores B Rs. 100 Crores C Rs. 150 Crores
D Rs. 200 Crores E None of the above Answer: B
982. As per our bank's Policy for Recovery & Management of NPA, Recoveries in NPA accounts
(irrespective of the mode / status / stage of recovery actions) shall be appropriated in which of
105
the following order of priority:

i. Expenditure/Out of Pocket Expenses incurred for Recovery, including under SARFAESI Action
(Recorded in Memorandum Dues);
Page
ii. Thereafter towards the unrealised/accrued interest.

iii. Principal irregularities i.e. NPA outstanding in the account. Circular SASTRA 20/2021 dated
31.03.2021
A i , ii, iii, B ii, iii, i C iii, i, ii
D i, iii, ii E None of the above Answer: A
983. As per our bank's Policy for Recovery & Management of NPA, In case of suit filed/decreed
accounts, recovery shall be appropriated in which of the following order of priority:
i. Expenditure/Out of Pocket Expenses incurred for Recovery, including under SARFAESI Action
(Recorded in Memorandum Dues);
ii. Thereafter towards the unrealised/accrued interest.
iii. Principal irregularities i.e. NPA outstanding in the account. Circular SASTRA 20/2021 dated
31.03.2021
A i , ii, iii, B As per the directives of the C In the absence of specific
concerned Court. directives from the Court,
as mentioned at Option A
D Both B and C E None of the above Answer: D
984. Which of the following statements is/are incorrect in respect of Power to consider OTS in Wilful
Default/Fraud (RBI Reported)/Criminal Action cases? Circular SASTRA 20/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A Competent Authority to B ZOCC will consider OTS C OTS Proposal in such
consider OTS Proposal in Proposal in such cases cases having book
such cases shall be not having book outstanding outstanding above Rs.
below Zonal Office upto Rs. 300 Lakhs only. 300 Lakhs shall be
Compromise Committee considered by HO Level
(ZOCC). Committees
985. In terms of Rule 6 (1) & 8 (5) of Security Interest (Enforcement) Rules, 2002, the movable as well
as immovable secured assets can be sold by which of the following method?: Circular SASTRA
20/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A By obtaining quotations B By inviting tenders from C By holding public auction
from the parties / persons the public including e-auction mode
dealing with similar
secured assets or
otherwise interested in
buying the such assets
D By private treaty E Any of the above Answer: E
986. In respect of sale of an immovable property under SARFAESI Act , which of the following
statement/s is/are incorrect Circular SASTRA 20/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A Notice of sale shall also be B No sale in first instance C There must be gap of at
affixed on a conspicuous shall take place before the least 30 days between the
part of the property, and expiry of 30 days from the date of publication of
shall also be put on the date on which the public public notice of sale and
website of the Bank. notice of sale is published auction / sale date.
in newspapers or notice of
sale has been served to
the borrower.
987. As per extant guidelines of the Bank, under the SARFAESI Act, Auction Notices are required to
be uploaded on which of the following websites, besides publication in two newspapers
immediately after publication (i.e. on the date of publication) Circular SASTRA 20/2021 dated
31.03.2021
A www.pnbindia.in B https://eprocure.gov.in/epu C www.ibapi.in - IBA portal
(Regulatory Disclosure) - blish/app. -- The Indian for e-auctions in case of
Bank’s website Government Website immovable properties
106
being used by all PSBs

D https://etender.pnbnet.in:8 E Any of the above Answer: E
443/banks/detail/pnb/MTQ
y: PNB’s portal for E-
Page
auctions in case of

movable properties
988. Bank’s approach to compromise as a recovery option is based on analysis of strengths and/or
weakness in a particular given case. The basic parameters for such an analysis are:
i. Quality of primary assets charged to the Bank, their realisability/marketability.
ii. Collateral cover i.e. its value, marketability. realisability and enforceability.
iii. Means/other attachable assets of the Borrower/guarantor(s).
iv. Status of legal action/SARFAESI action and time involved. Circular SASTRA 20/2021 dated
31.03.2021
A Only i and ii B Only ii and iii C Only ii, iii and iv
D All i, ii, iii and iv E None of the above Answer: D
989. In respect of funds so blocked up in NPAs, Bank has to ______: Circular SASTRA 20/2021 dated
31.03.2021
A Maintain capital at the B Continue incurring cost to C Bear the cost for loss of
prescribed level to comply service the funds blocked opportunity to lend these
with capital adequacy in NPAs funds at favourable rates
norms
D Make provisions for such E All the above Answer: E
loan losses in terms of
IRAC norms
990. For NPAs under Agriculture Advances with balance outstanding up to Rs. ______ (including
KCC but excluding Tractor Loans) recoverable dues shall be calculated with interest @6%
simple from the date of classification of the account as NPA. Circular SASTRA 20/2021 dated
31.03.2021
A Rs. 3 lacs B Rs. 5 lacs C Rs. 7 lacs
D Rs. 10 lacs E None of the above Answer: D
991. Under Direct Agriculture Advances with balance outstanding upto Rs. ______, the realizable
value of primary/collateral security will exclude the agricultural land offered as security. Circular
SASTRA 20/2021 dated 31.03.2021
992. Incase of OTS settlement agreed upon in Fraud Reported accounts where fraud amount involved
is Rs ______ and above will be reported to CBI without fail Circular SASTRA 20/2021 dated
31.03.2021
A Rs 100 lacs B Rs 150 lacs C Rs 300 lacs
D Rs 500 lacs E None of the above Answer: C
993. For release of charge on Mortgaged Property/ plant & machinery, where book outstanding in
accounts is upto Rs. ______, the valuation report should be as recent as possible but not more
than 1 year old. Circular SASTRA 20/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A Rs. 1.00 Cr B Rs. 2.00 Cr C Rs. 3.00 Cr
D Rs. 5.00 Cr E None of the above Answer: B
994. For release of charge on Mortgaged Property/plant & machinery, where book outstanding in
accounts and/or Value of Securities is more than Rs. 2 Cr, valuation of property(ies) and other
details should not be more than ______old. Circular SASTRA 20/2021 dated 31.03.2021
D 1 year E None of the above Answer: C
995. As per our bank's Policy for Recovery & Management of NPA, for settlement of OTS proposal,
where OTS Offer is up to Rs. 10 lacs minimum Down Payment/Upfront Amount should be
A 10%. B 15%. C 20%.
where OTS Offer is more than Rs. 10 lacs up to Rs. 50 lacs minimum Down Payment/Upfront
107
Amount should be ______. Circular SASTRA 20/2021 dated 31.03.2021

A 10%. B 15%. C 20%.
Page


where OTS Offer is more than Rs. 50 lacs, minimum Down payment/Upfront Amount should be
A 10%. B 15%. C 20%.
998. In case of obligants’ failure to pay the OTS amount as per schedule of payment, the OTS should
be declared as failed. The failure should be notified to the party maximum within ______ after
giving due notice. Circular SASTRA 20/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A 5 working days B 7 working days C 10 working days
D 15 working days E None of the above Answer: B
999. Cases where CGTMSE Claim not yet lodged/ or lodged but not yet settled, the minimum
indicative settlement amount under General Settlement Scheme shall not be less than ______%
of total CGTMSE eligible claim amount based on the extent of guarantee for the respective
accounts. Circular SASTRA 20/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A 75% B 70% C 65%
1000. No powers in respect of OTS in special categories of NPA Accounts shall be exercised by any
authority in his individual capacity, if he/she had been a Sanctioning Authority in individual
capacity (and not as a member of any Committee) of credit proposal during the last ______
years. Circular SASTRA 20/2021 dated 31.03.2021
1001. Accounts involving ledger outstanding of Rs. ______ and above, where write off is considered
should be backed by the report of Detective Agency/ Investigating agency w.r.t. the traceability
of the obligants/ ascertaining the attachable assets of the borrowers/ guarantors. Circular
SASTRA 20/2021 dated 31.03.2021
D Rs. 50 lac E None of the above Answer: B
1002. All NPA accounts upto Rs.______, both suit filed and others can be considered for reference to
Lok Adalats for settlement . Circular SASTRA 20/2021 dated 31.03.2021
1003. If amount of claim is less than Rs. ______ (after adjustment of payments, if any, received), Bank
has to file Petition for Execution of Award of Lok Adalat before the court from where the court
has referred the case to Lok Adalat. Circular SASTRA 20/2021 dated 31.03.2021
D Rs. 50 lac E None of the above Answer: A
1004. In certain cases, bank permits operation in the account by tagging arrangement. Circle SASTRA
Committee (CSCO) have power to allow tagging in NPA accounts with book outstanding upto Rs
______ and tagging of ______% & above without any relief sacrifice and additional exposure.
A Rs1.00 crores ; 15% B Rs 3.00 crores ; 15% C Rs 1.00 crores ; 10%
D Rs 5.00 crores ; 10% E None of the above Answer: B
1005. Zonal SASTRA Committee (ZSCO) have power to allow Tagging in NPA accounts (with book
outstanding more than Rs 3.00 crores upto Rs. ______ and tagging from ______% to less than
15% without any relief sacrifice and additional exposure. Circular SASTRA 20/2021 dated
31.03.2021
A Rs1.00 crores ; 15% B Rs 3.00 crores ; 15% C Rs 1.00 crores ; 10%
D Rs 5.00 crores ; 10% E None of the above Answer: D
1006. On failure of recovery the tagging arrangement should be terminated immediately after giving a
notice of ______days and recovery action should be initiated. Circular SASTRA 20/2021 dated
31.03.2021
108

1007. In terms of Recovery of Debts due to Banks and Financial Institutions Act 1993, Debt Recovery
Page
Tribunals have been established to adjudicate claims involving an amount of Rs.______ and over

in respect of amounts due to Banks and FIs. Circular SASTRA 20/2021 dated 31.03.2021
1008. As per provisions of the Securitization and Reconstruction of Financial Assets and Enforcement
of Security Interest Act 2002, the Bank, in an eligible NPA account, may require the defaulting
borrower, by notice in writing under Section 13(2) of the Act, to discharge his liabilities in full to
the Bank within ______ days of the date of notice. Circular SASTRA 20/2021 dated 31.03.2021
1009. On receipt of the demand notice, the borrower/s or guarantor/s and/or mortgagors make
representation or raise any objection, the secured creditor is required to consider such
representation in terms of provisions of Section 13 (3A) of SARFAESI Act, and if the secured
creditor comes to the conclusion that such representation/ objections are not acceptable or
tenable, the reasons for non-acceptance shall be communicated to the
borrower/guarantor/mortgagor/objector within ______ days of receipt of such representation/
objections by the secured creditor. Circular SASTRA 20/2021 dated 31.03.2021
1010. Before effecting sale under SARFAESI Act (except in case of movable property subject to
speedy or natural decay or expense for custody exceeds its value), the borrower shall be given
______ days’ notice for the intended sale. Circular SASTRA 20/2021 dated 31.03.2021
1011. In case of sale of an immovable property under SARFAESI Act, There must be gap of at least
______ days between the date of publication of public notice of sale and auction / sale date.
1012. On every sale of immovable property under SARFAESI Act, the purchaser shall immediately i.e
on the same day or not later than next working day, as the case may be, pay a deposit of ______
percent of the amount of the sale price Circular SASTRA 20/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A five percent B ten percent C twenty five percent
D fifty percent E None of the avove Answer: C
1013. The balance amount (i.e 75%) of the purchase price payable shall be paid by the purchaser to the
Authorized Officer on or before the _____ day from date of confirmation of sale of the immovable
property or such extended period as may be agreed upon in writing between the purchaser and
the secured creditor, in any case not exceeding______ months. Circular SASTRA 20/2021 dated
31.03.2021
A fifteenth day ; three B seventh day ; three C fifteenth day ; six
D fifteenth day ; two E None of the avove Answer: A
months
1014. Compromise/negotiated settlement with the Borrowers/co-obligants is one of the speedy ways of
recovery of dues by which blocked funds can be easily and promptly made available for:-
i. Recycling at favourable rates and earning profits;
ii. Reducing capital adequacy requirements; and
iii. Saving the cost of funds so blocked up as NPAs;
iv. Release of Provisions to favourably impact P & L Account of the Bank. Circular SASTRA
20/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A Only i and ii B Only ii and iii C Only ii, iii and iv
D All i, ii, iii and iv E None of the above Answer: D
109
1015. Guidelines relating to ”Wilful Defaulters” would be applicable to all non-performing borrowal
accounts with outstanding(funded facilities and such non-funded facilities which are converted
into funded facilities) aggregating Rs.______ , where “wilful default” is identified by the Bank.
Page

A Rs. 5 lac and above B Rs. 10 lac and above C Rs. 20 lac and above
D Rs. 25 lac and above E None of the avove Answer: D
1016. As a precautionary measure, branches may send a Notice through Registered Post to the Wilful
Defaulters (borrower/guarantor) in the local language, intimating that in case of non-repayment
of the pending amount in the loan account, within ______ from the date of Notice, their names
and photographs will be published in the newspapers. Circular SASTRA 19/2021 dated 31.03.2021
1017. Term loan account will be treated as NPA if interest and/or installment of principal remain
overdue for a period of more than _______. Circular SASTRA 18/2021 dated 31.03.2021
1018. A cash credit or overdraft account will be treated as NPA if the account remains ‘out of order’. A
Cash Credit and Overdraft account is treated as ‘out of order’ if:
(i) The outstanding balance remains continuously in excess of the sanctioned limit/drawing
power for______.
(ii) Even though the outstanding balance is less than the sanctioned limit/drawing power, there
are no credits continuously for ______ as on the date of balance sheet or credits are not enough
to cover the interest debited during the same period.
D 90 days ; 90 days E None of the avove Answer: D
1019. A working capital borrowal account will become NPA if such irregular drawings are permitted in
the account for a continuous period of ______ even though the unit may be working or the
borrower’s financial position is satisfactory. Circular SASTRA 18/2021 dated 31.03.2021
1020. An account where the regular/ adhoc credit limits have not been reviewed / renewed within
______ from the due date/date of adhoc sanction will be treated as NPA. Circular SASTRA 18/2021
dated 31.03.2021
1021. The bills purchased/discounted account should be treated as NPA if the bill remains overdue for
a period of more than______. Circular SASTRA 18/2021 dated 31.03.2021
1022. Erosion in the value of security can be reckoned as significant when the realisable value of the
security is less than ______ per cent of the value assessed by the bank or accepted by RBI at the
time of last inspection, as the case may be. Such NPAs may be straightaway classified under
doubtful category and provisioning should be made as applicable to doubtful assets. Circular
SASTRA 18/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A 10 B 20 C 25
1023. If the realizable value of the security, as assessed by the bank’s approved valuers/RBI is less
than ______% of the outstanding in the borrowal accounts, the existence of security should be
ignored and the asset should be straightaway classified as loss asset. Circular SASTRA 18/2021
dated 31.03.2021
A 10%. B 20%. C 25%.
1024. If loss assets are permitted to remain in the books for any reason, ______% of the outstanding
should be provided for. Circular SASTRA 18/2021 dated 31.03.2021
110
A 100%. B 25%. C 20%.

1025. In regard to the secured portion, provision for doubtful asstets which the advance has remained
Page
in ‘doubtful’ category up to one year, may be made at the rate of ______%. Circular SASTRA

18/2021 dated 31.03.2021

A 100%. B 25%. C 20%.
in ‘doubtful’ category for one to three years, may be made at the rate of ______%. Circular
SASTRA 18/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A 40%. B 25%. C 20%.
in ‘doubtful’ category for more than three years, may be made at the rate of ______%. Circular
SASTRA 18/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A 100%. B 25%. C 20%.
1028. In view of certain safeguards such as escrow accounts available in respect of Infrastructure
lending, Infrastructure loan accounts which are classified as Sub Standard will attract a
provisioning of ______% for unsecured exposures instead of aforesaid prescription of 25%.
A 40%. B 25%. C 20%.
1029. The provisioning requirement for unsecured ‘doubtful’ assets is ______%. Circular SASTRA
18/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A 100%. B 25%. C 20%.
1030. Unsecured exposure is defined as an exposure where the realisable value of the security, as
assessed by the bank/approved valuers/Reserve Bank’s inspecting officers, is not more than
______ percent, ab-initio, of the outstanding exposure. Circular SASTRA 18/2021 dated 31.03.2021
D 20 percent E None of the avove Answer: B
1031. Loans where the realizable value of the security, as assessed by the Bank/ Approved Valuers/
RBI Officers is not more than 10% of the exposure based on the latest sanction/ disbursement is
to be categorized as ______. Circular SASTRA 18/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A Secured Exposure B Unsecured Exposure C Either A or B
D Both A and B E None of the avove Answer: Y
1032. For standard Direct Advances to agricultural and Small & Micro Sectors, provisioning
requirement is ______%. Circular SASTRA 18/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A 0.25. B 0.4. C 0.5.
D 0.6. E None of the avove Answer: A
1033. For standard Advances to Commercial Real Estate (CRE) sector, provisioning requirement is
______%. Circular SASTRA 18/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A 0.5%. B 1%. C 1.5%.
1034. For standard Advances to Commercial Real Estate – Residential Housing Sector (CRE - RH),
provisioning requirement is ______%. Circular SASTRA 18/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A 0.75%. B 1%. C 1.5%.
1035. For standard Housing loan granted at ‘Teaser Rates, provisioning requirement is ______%. The
provisioning on these assets would revert to ______% after 1 year from the date on which the
rates are reset at higher rates if the accounts remain ‘standard’. Circular SASTRA 18/2021 dated
31.03.2021
A 1% ; 0.40% B 2% ; 0.50% C 2% ; 0.40%
D 1% ; 0.50% E None of the avove Answer: C
111
1036. For standard Direct Advances to Medium Enterprises shall attract ______% provisions. Circular
SASTRA 18/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A 0.5%. B 0.4%. C 0.3%.
Page

1037. Integrated housing projects comprising of some commercial space (e.g. Shopping complex,
school, etc.) can also be classified under CRE-RH, provided that the commercial area in the
residential housing project does not exceed ______% of the total Floor Space Index (FSI) of the
project. Circular SASTRA 18/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A 10%. B 12%. C 15%.
1038. Banks shall make provisions on the net funded country exposures on a graded scale ranging
from 0.25 to ______ percent according to the risk categories. Circular SASTRA 18/2021 dated
31.03.2021
D 100 percent E None of the avove Answer: D
1039. The non performing financial asset purchased, may be classified as ‘standard’ in the books of
the purchasing bank for a period of ______ from the date of purchase. Circular SASTRA 18/2021
dated 31.03.2021
1040. In the case of restructured accounts classified as 'standard', the income, if any, generated by
these instruments may be recognised on _______. Circular SASTRA 18/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A accrual basis B cash basis C Either A or B
D Both A and B E None of the avove Answer: A
1041. In the case of restructured accounts classified as non-performing assets, the income, if any,
generated by these instruments may be recognised only on______. Circular SASTRA 18/2021
dated 31.03.2021
A accrual basis B cash basis C Either A or B
D Both A and B E None of the avove Answer: B
1042. Any change in the repayment schedule of a project loan caused due to an increase in the project
outlay on account of increase in scope and size of the project, would not be treated as
restructuring if _______. Circular SASTRA 18/2021 dated 27.03.2020
A The increase in scope and B The rise in cost excluding C The bank re-assesses the
size of the project takes any cost-overrun in viability of the project
place before respect of the original before approving the
commencement of project is 25% or more of enhancement of scope
commercial operations of the original outlay. and fixing a fresh DCCO.
the existing project.
D On re-rating, (if already E All the above Answer: E
rated) the new rating is not
below the previous rating
by more than one notch.
1043. In which of the following circumstances, A KCC account will not be treated as out of order ?
A There are no credits in the B The outstanding remains C The credits in the account
account continuously for continuously in excess of are not sufficient even to
two crop seasons/one crop the limit for two crop cover the interest debited
season (as the case may seasons/one crop season in respect of the account
be) as on the date of (as the case may be) as for two crop seasons/one
balance sheet. on the date of balance crop season (as the case
sheet. may be).
1044. Debits in Cash Credit - NPA account with tagging facility can be allowed dependent upon extent
of tagging permitted by appropriate authority. The proceeds received through tagging
arrangement would also be utilized in which of the following order:
(i) Expenditure/Out of pocket Expenses incurred for recovery.
112
(ii) Recognition of Recorded Interest.

(iii) Principal outstanding balance in Working Capital Facility till it is brought within the DP/Limit
(Whichever is lower)
Page
(iv) Instalments in arrear in Term Loan Account. Circular SASTRA 18/2021 dated 31.03.2021

A i , ii, iii, iv B ii, iii, iv, i C iii, iv, i, ii

D i, iii, iv, ii E None of the above Answer: A
1045. Financial assets would be offered for transfer / sale to only those Securitization Company (ies) /
Reconstruction Company (ies) who has / have obtained the Certificate of Registration from RBI
under Section 3 of the ______ before providing information in respect of a financial asset to
them. Circular SASTRA 17/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A RBI B SARFAESI C IBC
D Bank'S HO E None of the avove Answer: A
1046. Banks will be permitted to sell their NPAs to other Banks/FIs/NBFCs (excluding SC/RC) without
any initial holding period. However, the non-performing financial asset should be held by the
purchasing bank for a period of ______ months before it is sold to other Banks/FIs/NBFCs
(excluding SC/RC). Circular SASTRA 17/2021 dated 31.03.2021
1047. An asset reported as ______ where principal or interest payment is overdue between 61-90 days
days, by the Bank/FI to Central Repository for information on Large Credit (CRILC) can be sold
to SCs/RCs. Circular SASTRA 17/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A SMA-0 (Special Mention B SMA-1 (Special Mention C SMA-2 (Special Mention
Account) Account) Account)
D NPA(Non Performing E None of the avove Answer: C
Assets)
1048. A Standard Asset can be sold to SCs/RCs where (i) The asset is under consortium/multiple
banking arrangements (ii) At least ______% by value of the asset is classified as non-performing
assets in the books of other Banks/FIs and (iii) At least ______% by value of the banks/FIs who
are under consortium/multiple banking arrangements agree to sale of the asset to SC/RC.
A 50% ; 50% B 50% ; 75% C 60% ; 75%
1049. Accounts backed by Govt. Guarantees may be considered for sale to SCs/RCs/other
Banks/FIs/NBFCs, subject to approval by the______. Circular SASTRA 17/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A Board B Management Committee C ZOCAC- I
D ZOCAC- II E None of the avove Answer: A
1050. All Doubtful accounts with balance outstanding of Rs. ______ will be reviewed and placed to the
Management Committee for identification of accounts which may be offered to the the
ARCs/NBFCs etc. during the year.” Circular SASTRA 17/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A Rs. 5 crores & above B Rs. 10 crores & above C Rs. 25 crores & above
D Rs. 50 crores & above E None of the avove Answer: D
1051. The powers for withdrawal of the account due to any reason, e.g non-availability of the latest
valuation report, OTS/ Compromise Offer received from the borrower/co-borrower, any
regulatory/legal requirement/restriction etc. from sale process are vested with ______. Circular
SASTRA 17/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A ED/MD B Management Committee C ZOCAC- I
D ZOCAC- II E None of the avove Answer: A
1052. In case obligant(s) and co obligant(s) come forwards, for OTS, before finalization of sale process
by the proposed buyer(s), the concerned account may be withdrawn from the sale process
considering account specific merits, provided, the minimum offer of OTS shall be 115%, 110%
and 105% of reserve price where outstanding is upto Rs.10 lacs, more than Rs.10 lacs & upto
Rs.50 lacs and more than Rs.50 lacs respectively and the party deposits ______% cash as
upfront money immediately and remaining within ______ months of approval of OTS. Circular
SASTRA 17/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A 25% ; 3 months B 25% ; 6 months C 50% ; 3 months
113
D 50% ; 6 months E None of the avove Answer: C

1053. In case of sale of financial assets to the SCs/RCs, minimum cash component will be ______% of
the sale price and rest ______% in the form of Security Receipts/Bonds etc. Circular SASTRA
Page
17/2021 dated 31.03.2021

A 15% ; 85% B 15% ; 75% C 20% ; 85%

1054. In terms of RBI guidelines Security Receipts (SRs) are redeemable within ______ years which
can be extended upto ______ years with the approval of the Boards of the SCs/RCs. However,
there is no guarantee of return on SRs. Circular SASTRA 17/2021 dated 31.03.2021
1055. If a bid received is above the Reserve Price and a minimum ______% of sale proceeds is in cash
and also fulfills the other conditions specified in Offer Document, acceptance of that bid would
be mandatory for the Bank. Circular SASTRA 17/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A 10% B 20% C 25%
1056. In case account is offered only on 100% cash basis, a flat discount in the range of______ may be
given over the NPRV calculated, subject to ZOASC recommendations. Circular SASTRA 17/2021
dated 31.03.2021
A 5%-15% B 10%-20% C 10%-15%
D 10%-25% E None of the avove Answer: C
1057. As per RBI gudelines, two independent valuation reports be obtained in case of exposures (non
fund based + fund based) of Rs. ______. Circular SASTRA 17/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A Rs. 5 crores & above B Rs. 10 crores & above C Rs. 25 crores & above
D Rs. 50 crores & above E None of the avove Answer: D
1058. In our bank, in case the value of immovable property is Rs.______, branches shall get valuation
of such IP done from minimum two valuers on the Bank’s approved panel Circular SASTRA
17/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A Rs.5 crore & above each B Rs.10 crore & above each C Rs.25 crore & above each
D Rs.50 crore & above each E None of the avove Answer: A
1059. In case the difference in valuation by the two valuers is less than ______%, the average value
may be taken. Circular SASTRA 17/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A 5% B 10% C 15%
1060. In those accounts which are being placed for sale to ARCs/NBFCs etc. in case valuation is
required to be got done in terms of Bank’s guidelines, then only the cost will be borne by the
______and in all other cases the cost will continue to be borne by the ______. Circular SASTRA
17/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A Bank ; borrower B borrower ; Bank C Bank ; Bank
D borrower ; borrower E None of the avove Answer: B
1061. In case no bid is received at the Reserve Price fixed, then in the next sale process, HOASC &
HOSAC may permit further reduction in Reserve Price/Sale Price by ______% on
recommendations of the ZOASC. Circular SASTRA 17/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A 5%. B 10%. C 15%.
1062. The Bank may also dispense with independent valuation by an outside valuer where the loan
asset being acquired by the Securitization Company / Reconstruction Company/other
banks/FIs/NBFCs etc. is below Rs. ______ depending upon the merits. Circular SASTRA 17/2021
dated 31.03.2021
D Rs. 25 lacs E None of the avove Answer: A
1063. As advised by RBI, minimum period of______ will be given to the prospective buyers to
complete their Due Diligence Exercise. Circular SASTRA 17/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A one week B two weeks C three weeks
D four weeks E None of the avove Answer: B
114
1064. As per RBI Master Circular, in the case of consortium / multiple banking arrangements, if
______% (by value of amount outstanding) of the banks / FIs decide to accept the offer, the
remaining banks / FIs will be obligated to accept the offer. Circular SASTRA 17/2021 dated
Page
31.03.2021

A 25% B 50% C 75%

1065. A Standard Asset can be sold to SCs/RCs where ______: Circular SASTRA 17/2021 dated
31.03.2021
A The asset is under B At least 75% by value of C At least 75% by value of
consortium/multiple the asset is classified as the banks/FIs who are
banking arrangements non-performing assets in under consortium/multiple
the books of other banking arrangements
Banks/Fis agree to sale of the asset
to SC/RC.
1066. Which of the following category of account is not permitted for transfer /sale to SCs/RCs/other
Banks/FIs/NBFCs? Circular SASTRA 17/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A Wilful defaulters/Criminal B Accounts backed by Govt. C Written off NPA accounts
Action (only non-fraudulent Guarantees
cases)
D case is pending before E None of the above Answer: E
Court/DRT/BIFR etc
1067. NPAs falling under which of the following categories shall be excluded from sale / transfer to
SCs / RCs/Other Banks/FIs/NBFCs etc? Circular SASTRA 17/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A Any loan originated B NPAs in respect of which C NPAs where restructuring
fraudulently or has been OTS is already concluded is already approved and is
classified as fraud as on and is under under implementation.
the date of sale. This is implementation.
equally applicable to
standalone/bilateral sale of
accounts.
1068. The securities (bonds and debentures) offered by Securitization Company/ Reconstruction
Company as sale consideration should satisfy the guidelines issued by RBI from time to time.
Which of the following guideline is incorrect in this regard. Circular SASTRA 17/2021 dated
31.03.2021
A The securities must not B The securities must carry C The securities must be
have a term in excess of a rate of interest which is secured by an appropriate
six years. not lower than 1.5% above charge on assets
the Bank Rate in force at transferred.
the time of issue.
D The commitment of the E None of the above Answer: E
SC/RC to redeem the
securities must be
unconditional and not
linked to realization of the
assets.
1069. Our bank has decided that Asset Reconstruction Companies (ARCs) shall not acquire financial
assets from which of the following on a bilateral basis, whatever may be the consideration
A a bank / financial B a bank / financial C an entity in the group to
institution which is the institution which is either a which the ARC belongs
sponsor of the ARC lender to the ARC or a
subscriber to the fund, if
any, raised by the ARC for
its operations
115
1070. Once the account has been closed after sale to the ARCs/Other Buyers, the necessary
documents/files should be handed over to them within ______ by the concerned branch. Circular
SASTRA 17/2021 dated 31.03.2021
Page


1071. All NPA accounts under Doubtful and Loss category (whether non-suit filed, suit filed or
decreed) with outstanding upto Rs. ______ are eligible for allotment to Recovery Agencies.
D Rs. 25 lac E None of the avove Answer: B
1072. SCs/RCs may be empanelled as Resolution cum recovery Agents and all Retail Loans under
Doubtful/Loss category may be allocated to them Circle-wise on portfolio basis in addition to
NPAs (Doubtful/Loss) of Rs. ______. Circular SASTRA 16/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A Rs. 0.50 crore & above B Rs. 1 crore & above C Rs. 1.50 crore & above
D Rs. 2 crore & above E None of the avove Answer: B
1073. As per our bank's policy for engagement of Recovery Agencies/Resolution Agents, a
Firm/Company promoted by and/or employing professional person/persons like Chartered
Accountant /Company Secretary / Cost Accountant and / or honourably retired Senior
Executives of the Banks (not less than DGM/GM) with minimum ______ years experience in the
resolution of NPAs will be eligible for allocation of NPA Accounts above Rs 10.00 lacs. Circular
SASTRA 16/2021 dated 31.03.2021
1074. Retired employees of Amalgamated Bank who have worked in the last ______ years of their
service in the Head Office SASTRA Division/ Recovery Sections at Zonal Office/Circle and/or in
ARMBs will be eligible for empanelment for allocation of NPA Accounts above Rs 10.00 lacs as
Resolution Agents. Circular SASTRA 16/2021 dated 31.03.2021
1075. The Agency shall furnish to the Bank’s Circle Office (In case of Recovery Agents) & Zonal Office
(In case of Resolution Agents), a Bank guarantee for an amount of Rs. 1,00,000/-. Circular
SASTRA 16/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A Rs 1, 00,000/- B Rs 2, 00,000/- C Rs 3, 00,000/-
D Rs 5, 00,000/- E None of the avove Answer: A
1076. If reputed Recovery Agencies having good track of effecting recoveries of the Banks are
desirous of getting empanelled with other Circle Offices, they shall provide Bank Guarantee/
Security deposit of Rs.______ for each Circle Office separately, subject to maximum of Rs.3 lacs.
A Rs.1 lac ; Rs.2 lacs B Rs.2 lac ; Rs.3 lacs C Rs.1 lac ; Rs.3 lacs
D Rs.3 lac ; Rs.3 lacs E None of the avove Answer: C
1077. If reputed Resolution Agents having good track of effecting recoveries of the Banks are desirous
of getting empanelled with other Zonal Office, they shall provide Bank Guarantee/ Security
deposit of Rs.______ for each Zonal Office separately, subject to maximum of Rs.______. Circular
SASTRA 16/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A Rs.1 lac ; Rs.2 lacs B Rs.2 lac ; Rs.3 lacs C Rs.1 lac ; Rs.3 lacs
D Rs.3 lac ; Rs.3 lacs E None of the avove Answer: C
1078. SCs/RCs as Resolution Agent shall be allocated 25 to 50 accounts for resolution based on their
performance subject to the sum of outstanding balance of all NPA accounts allocated to
resolution agents should not exceed ______, at a time. Circular SASTRA 16/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A Rs. 20 Cr B Rs. 50 Cr C Rs. 100 Cr
D Rs. 150 Cr E None of the avove Answer: B
1079. Firms as Resolution Agent are to be allotted accounts based on the credentials of the agency.
However, not more than 200 accounts above the balance of Rs 10.00 lacs be allotted to one
Resolution Agent subject to the sum of outstanding balance of all NPA accounts allocated to
resolution agents should not exceed Rs. ______, at any point of time. Circular SASTRA 16/2021
116
dated 31.03.2021
Page
1080. A PSB Retired Employees as Resolution Officer shall be allocated maximum 50 accounts subject

to the sum of outstanding balance of all NPA accounts allocated to resolution agents should not
exceed Rs.______, at any point of time. Circular SASTRA 16/2021 dated 31.03.2021
1081. Supporting Agencies engaged should be capable of gathering proper and genuine purchasers
for assisting the Bank for sale of acquired assets, in order to be able to fetch the maximum bid
and as such must have an experience of ______ years of conducting auction on behalf of
Government Departments of PSUs. Circular SASTRA 16/2021 dated 31.03.2021
1082. To eligible for Detective Agencies, Agency must have minimum______of experience in this
activity and key-person of the Agency should have minimum ______years of the experience in
this activity either worked in Govt. Offices looked after this type of activity/ other Detective
Agency firm. Circular SASTRA 16/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A 1 year ; 2 years B 1 year ; 3 years C 1 year ; 5 years
D 2 year ; 5 years E None of the avove Answer: B
1083. Panel of Detective Agencies shall be valid for ______ (subject to annual review by Zonal Office
Vertical and Zonal Manager). Circular SASTRA 16/2021 dated 31.03.2021
1084. The empanelled Detective agencies will submit their report along-with the supporting papers,
photographs, audio/video recording etc., if any, collected by them. A time frame of maximum
______ days will be allowed to the Agency for submission of report. However, in emergent
circumstances, further extension of ______ days may be permitted by the Circle Head (ZM in
case of LCBs), keeping in view complexity of the case. Circular SASTRA 16/2021 dated 31.03.2021
D 00 days ; 60 days E None of the avove Answer: C
1085. Request for issuance of Look Out circular against any person/entities may be made by a bank if
the Person and all the Entities taken together have combined loan outstanding (fund based and
non- fund based) of not less than Rs. ______ from the banking system. Circular SASTRA 15/2021
dated 31.03.2021
A Rs. 10 crores B Rs. 20 crores C Rs. 25 crores
D Rs. 50 crores E None of the avove Answer: D
1086. As per DFS instructions, data on request for opening of LOCs made by the Bank is to be
submitted on ______basis to bo2@nic.in. Circular SASTRA 15/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A weekly B fortnightly C monthly
D quarterly E None of the avove Answer: B
1087. As per MHA, LOCs are valid for a period of ______ from the date of issue and name of the
subject shall be automatically removed from the LOC thereafter unless the concerned agency
requests for its renewal within a period of ______. Circular SASTRA 15/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A six months ; one year B one year ; one year C one year ; two years
D two years ; one year E None of the avove Answer: B
1088. Request for issuance of Look out Circulars (LOCs) may be made by a Bank against the person
who is likely to flee out of India based on which of the following reliable information? Circular
SASTRA 15/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A detective/ intelligence B Personal behaviour of the C Conduct of account with
report/ forensic audit Person any bank of the Person or
report the Entity
D There being a criminal E Any one or more of the Answer: E
case registered with above
Police, CBI, ED or any
117
other investigation agency

against the Person or
against the Entity
Page
1089. In terms of guidelines issued by the Reserve Bank of India, request for issuance of Look out
Circulars (LOCs) may be made by a bank where Circular SASTRA 15/2021 dated 31.03.2021

A Fraud is (or is in the B The Person or the Entity is C The Person or the Entity
process of being) reported (or is in the process of is (or is in the process of
in any of the transactions being) declared as Wilful being) identified as Non-
of or dealings with any Defaulter Cooperative Borrower
bank of the Person or the
Entity
1090. RBI vide their notification no. DoR.SPE.REC.29/13.03.00/2021-2022 dated 02.07.2021 has
reviewed the instructions on interest on overdue domestic deposits. As per revised guidelines, If
a Term Deposit (TD) matures and proceeds are unpaid, the amount left unclaimed with the bank
shall attract rate of interest as applicable to ______ or the contracted rate of interest on the
matured TD, whichever is lower. Circular RLBD 20/2021 dated 20.10.2021
A savings account B term deposit C savings account +2%
D term deposit +2 E None of the above Answer: A
1091. Revised Personal Accident (Death) Insurance coverage under PNB Rakshak Plus Scheme will be
Rs. ______. Circular RLBD 19/2021 dated 17.09.2021
D Rs.50.00 lakh E None of the above Answer: D
1092. Revised Air Accident (Death) Insurance coverage under PNB Rakshak Plus Scheme will be Rs.
______. Circular RLBD 19/2021 dated 17.09.2021
1093. Revised Personal Accident (Permanent Total Disability) Insurance coverage under PNB Rakshak
Plus Scheme will be Rs. ______. Circular RLBD 19/2021 dated 17.09.2021
1094. Educational benefits up to Rs.______ in aggregate per year for ______ years for any 2 dependent
children in case of accidental death of Defence personnel is available under PNB Rakshak Plus
Scheme. Circular RLBD 19/2021 dated 17.09.2021
A Rs.1 lakh ; 2 years B Rs.1 lakh ; 4 years C Rs.2 lakh ; 4 years
D Rs.5 lakh ; 4 years E None of the above Answer: B
1095. To eligible for coverage in case of Accidental Death/ Permanent Total Disability under PNB
Rakshak Plus Scheme, there should be Credit of monthly salary/ pension for previous______
months in the account immediate before date of death. Circular RLBD 19/2021 dated 17.09.2021
D six months E None of the above Answer: C
1096. Minimum Quarterly average Balance under PNB “Samridhi” Current Account - a variant of PNB
“Current Account-Point of Sale” Scheme (PNB “CA POS”) will be ______. Circular RLBD 17/2021
dated 13.08.2021
A ₹25,000/- B ₹50,000/- C ₹100,000/-
D ₹200,000/- E None of the above Answer: C
1097. Under PNB Rakshak Plus Scheme, Benefits for Educational purpose in the event of the death of
the Insured person due to an accident as defined, the policy shall pay as
education grant for the dependent children.Which of the following statement/s is/are incorrect in
this respect? Circular RLBD 19/2021 dated 17.09.2021
A Educational benefits up to B The Amount will be C This amount shall be paid
Rs.1 lakh in aggregate per payable in the name of provided the Personal
year for 4 years for any 2 Child towards his/her Accident claim has been
dependent children in case education. admitted.
of accidental death of
Defence personnel.
118
1098. Which of the following statement/s is/are incorrect in respect of Add-On Coverage under PNB
Rakshak Plus Scheme in the event of the death of the Insured person due to
an accident. Circular RLBD 19/2021 dated 17.09.2021
Page
A Travel Expenses of two B Funeral Expenses C Girl Child Marriage Cover

family members upto upto Rs.10,000/- Rs.25,000/-

Rs.10,000/-
D Emergency Medical E None of the above Answer: E
Expenses upto
Rs.10,000/-(on the basis
of actual reimbursement).
1099. Which of the following is/are incorrect in respect of Minimum Quarterly average Balance under
PNB “Vikas” Current Account - a variant of PNB “Current Account-Point of Sale” Scheme (PNB
“CA POS”) Circular RLBD 17/2021 dated 13.08.2021
A Rural-₹1000/- B Semi-Urban-₹2000/- C Urban & Metro-₹5000
1100. Under PNB “SELECT” SAVING ACCOUNT, QAB should be ₹ ______. Circular RLBD 15/2021 dated
03.08.2021
A ₹2,000/- B ₹5,000/- C ₹10,000/-
D ₹25,000/- E None of the above Answer: B
1101. Under PNB “SELECT” SAVING ACCOUNT, customers can earn ROI @FD on their surplus fund
after maintaining threshold amount of ₹______ and in multiples of ₹______ under Sweep Facility
. Circular RLBD 15/2021 dated 03.08.2021
A ₹20,000/- ; ₹5,000/- B ₹25,000/- ; ₹5,000/- C ₹20,000/- ; ₹1,000/-
D ₹25,000/- ; ₹1,000/- E None of the above Answer: A
1102. Fixed Deposit account can be made transferable at the branch other than the issuing branch on
the request of the Depositor/depositors. Further check is placed on Intersol transfer of Fixed
Deposit account balance amounting more than ₹______. Circular RLBD 14/2021 dated 06.08.2021
D ₹10 crore E None of the above Answer: B
1103. Minimum Initial Deposit under PNB Merchant Current Account scheme will be Rs. ______.
Circular RLBD 11/2021 dated 12.05.2021
A Rs. 1000/- B Rs. 2000/- C Rs. 5000/-
D Rs. 10000/- E None of the above Answer: E
1104. Average Quarterly Balance and Non-Maintenance of QAB charges per quarte runder PNB
Merchant Current Account scheme in all centre will be Rs. ______ + Service Tax. Circular RLBD
11/2021 dated 12.05.2021
A Rs. 25,000/- and Rs. B Rs. 20,000/- and Rs. C Rs. 25,000/- and Rs.
1000/- 1000/- 5000/-
D Rs. 20,000/- and Rs. E None of the avove Answer: A
5000/-
1105. Charges for Cash Deposit under PNB Merchant Current Account scheme will be free upto Rs.
______ per day thereafter applicable charges as circulated by HO: IRMD from time to time.
A Rs.1.00 lakh B Rs. 2.00 lakh C Rs.3.0 Lakh
D Rs. 5.00 lakh E None of the above Answer: C
1106. Charges for Cash Withdrawal under PNB Merchant Current Account scheme will be free upto Rs.
______ per day thereafter applicable charges as circulated by HO: IRMD from time to time.
D Rs. 5.00 lakh E None of the above Answer: A
1107. Facility of Free 24 DD in a year with a max. Capping of Rs.______ per instrument. (02 DD in a
month) is avalable under PNB Merchant Current Account scheme. Circular RLBD 11/2021 dated
12.05.2021
D Rs. 5.00 lakh E None of the above Answer: D
119
1108. 20% rebate is available in Locker under PNB Merchant Current Account scheme if locker rent is
paid in advance for ______ years and above in lump sum. Circular RLBD 11/2021 dated 12.05.2021
A one years B two years C three years
Page
D five years E None of the above Answer: C

1109. PNB Pride has been designed to enhance the monitoring mechanism through real-time
collection of data for field visits by the Bank Officials for recovery. Which of the following is not
a feature of PNB Pride application for benefits of the Officials working in SASTRA Vertical?
A Details of NPA accounts B User will have calling C Search Record
can be accessed through facility to the mobile no. (s) Functionality via Name,
Mobile App anytime / listed in account details. Cust id & account number
anywhere. for submission of visit
report.
D Creation of trail/history of E None of the above Answer: E
visits.
1110. If request for renewal is received after the date of maturity, such deposits will be renewed with
effect from the date of maturity at interest rate applicable as on due date, provided such request
is received within______ from the date of maturity. Circular RLBD 10/2021 dated 10.05.2021
1111. In case the depositor does not get response from the Bank within ______ from date of complaint
or he is not satisfied with the response received from the Bank, he has a right to approach
Banking Ombudsman appointed by the Reserve Bank of India. Circular RLBD 10/2021 dated
10.05.2021
1112. In case of FDRs with amounting Rs.20,000/- & above and Less than Rs.______, the approval for
credit the proceeds in other account (which the FDR was not created) will be given by the Circle
Head & in his absence by the Deputy Circle Head concerned. Circular RLBD 06/2021 dated
11.02.2021
D Rs.10.00 Crore E None of the above Answer: D
1113. Under the facility for opening of online instant Saving Account with Video KYC facility, Expected
annual credit should not be greater than the Annual Income. Proof of income is mandatorily to
be uploaded by the customer whenever expected annual credit is more than Rs. ______. Circular
CASA 09/2021 dated 17.08.2021
A Rs.100000/- B Rs. 200000/- C Rs. 500000/-
D Rs. 1000000/- E None of the above Answer: C
1114. Our bank has now extended the facility of Positive Pay System (PPS) through ______. Circular GB
13/2021 dated 26.07.2021
A Internet Banking Service B Mobile Banking Service C SMS Banking
(IBS- Retail) (PNB ONE)
1115. Now, CBS System shall show a pop up message “Account is not more than ______ month old:
date of account opening” where bank staff is maker and/or verifier/ authorizer when a new
chequebook is issued in the accounts. Circular GB 05/2021 dated 15.04.2021
D 6 months E None of the above Answer: D
1116. Now, CBS System will give alert if more than ______ leaves entered for issuance in new
accounts. However same be allowed with proper justification by higher level user in case of non-
personalized chequebook. Circular GB 05/2021 dated 15.04.2021
A 10 leaves B 20 leaves C 50 leaves
D 100 leaves E None of the above Answer: A
1117. A warning message “NEW ACCOUNT” shall pop up in the newly opened accounts not more than
6 month old in the menu ______. Circular GB 05/2021 dated 15.04.2021
120
A HTM B HRMI C HICTM

1118. In terms of Reserve Bank of India Circular No. RBI/2020-21/82 DPSS.CO.OD. No.
Page
901/06.24.001/2020-21dated January 05,2021,our bank has decided to introduce the Legal Entity

Identifier(LEI) system for all payment transactions of value ₹______ and above undertaken by
entities (non-individuals) using Reserve Bank-run Centralised Payment Systems viz. Real Time
Gross Settlement (RTGS) and National Electronic Funds Transfer (NEFT). Circular GB 04/2021
dated 31.03.2021
D 2050 Crore E None of the above Answer: A
1119. The Legal Entity Identifier (LEI) is a ______digit number used to uniquely identify parties to
financial transactions worldwide. It was conceived as a key measure to improve the quality and
accuracy of financial data systems for better risk management post the Global Financial Crisis.
Circular GB 04/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A 14-digit B 16-digit C 18-digit
D 20-digit E None of the above Answer: D
1120. In terms of extant guidelines, customer has to submit specified “Officially Valid Document(s)”
for opening of account and where the OVD furnished by customer does not have updated
address, customer has to submit additional documents with updated address, which are deemed
to be OVDs for limited purpose of proof of address. However, customer has to submit OVD with
current address within a period of ______ failing which operations in his account may be
restricted. Circular KYC 14/2021 dated 04.09.2021
A 30 days B two months C three months
1121. To monitor the accounts opened with OVDs without updated current address, a system has been
implemented in CBS to generate alert/ pop-up message on exceeding total deposit of Rs.______
in a month in such accounts. Circular KYC 14/2021 dated 04.09.2021
A Rs.1 lakh B Rs.1.5 lakh C Rs.2 lakh
D Rs.5 lakh E None of the avove Answer: C
1122. Where the customer is a company, the beneficial owner is the natural person(s), who, whether
acting alone or together, or through one or more juridical persons, has / have a controlling
ownership interest or who exercise control through other means. "Controlling ownership
interest" means ownership of / entitlement to more than ______ per cent of the shares or capital
or profits of the company. Circular KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
A 10% B 15% C 20%
1123. Where the customer is a partnership firm, the beneficial owner is the natural person(s), who,
whether acting alone or together, or through one or more juridical person, has / have ownership
of / entitlement to more than _____ per cent of capital or profits of the partnership. Circular KYC
13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
A 10% B 15% C 20%
1124. Where the customer is an unincorporated association or body of individuals, the beneficial
owner is the natural person(s), who, whether acting alone or together, or through one or more
juridical person, has / have ownership of/ entitlement to more than ______ per cent of the
property or capital or profits of the unincorporated association or body of individuals. Circular
KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
A 10% B 15% C 20%
1125. "Suspicious transaction" means a "transaction" as defined which of the below, including an
attempted transaction, whether or not made in cash, which, to a person acting in good faith: (i)
gives rise to a reasonable ground of suspicion that it may involve proceeds of an offence
specified in the Schedule to the Act, regardless of the value involved; or (ii) appears to be made
in circumstances of unusual or unjustified complexity; or (iii) appears to not have economic
rationale or bona-fide purpose; or (iv)gives rise to a reasonable ground of suspicion that it may
121
involve financing of the activities relating to terrorism Circular KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
A Only i, ii & iii B Only ii, iii,& iv C Only iii & iv
D Only ii & iii E All the above Answer: E
Page
1126. Where the customer is a trust, the identification of beneficial owner(s) shall include identification

of the author of the trust, the trustee, the beneficiaries with ______ % or more interest in the trust
and any other natural person exercising ultimate effective control over the trust through a chain
of control or ownership. Circular KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
A 10% B 15% C 20%
1127. The KYC Policy has been framed to develop a strong mechanism for achieving which of the
following objectives: Circular KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
A To prevent Bank from B To enable the Bank to C Only A
being used, intentionally or comply with all the legal
unintentionally, by criminal and regulatory obligations
elements for Money in respect of KYC norms /
Laundering or Terrorist AML standards / CFT
Financing activities. KYC measures / Bank‘s
procedures also enable Obligation under PMLA,
the Bank to 2002 and to cooperate
know/understand their with various government
customers and their bodies dealing with related
financial dealings better, issues
whi
D Only B E Both A & B Answer: E
1128. Where the OVD furnished by the customer does not have updated address, the utility bill which
is not more than ______ months old of any service provider (electricity, telephone, post-paid
mobile phone, piped gas, water bill) shall be deemed to be OVDs for the limited purpose of proof
of address. Circular KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
1129. The KYC policy does not include which of the following key elements: Circular KYC 13/2021
dated 25.08.2021
A Customer Acceptance B Risk Management C Customer Identification
Policy Procedures
D Monitoring of Transactions E None of the above Answer: E
1130. Where the OVD furnished by the customer does not have updated address, at the time of on-
boarding of the customer, an undertaking should be obtained from the customer along with
AOF/OVDs stating that Customer shall submit his OVD with updated current address within
______ months failing which operations in his account shall be restricted. Circular KYC 13/2021
dated 25.08.2021
1131. PML Rules require all offices of the Bank to carry out Risk Assessment to identify, assess and
take effective measures to mitigate its money laundering and terrorist financing risk for clients,
countries or geographic areas, and products, services, transactions or delivery channels. The
risk assessment should _______. Circular KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
A be documented B consider all the relevant C be kept up to date
risk factors before
determining the level of
overall risk and the
appropriate level and type
of mitigation to be applied
D be available to competent E All the above Answer: E
authorities and self-
regulating bodies.
1132. In case of Accounts opened using OTP based e-KYC, in non face to face mode, The aggregate
balance of all the deposit accounts of the customer shall not exceed Rs. _______. Circular KYC
122
13/2021 dated 25.08.2021

A Rs. fifty thousand B Rs. sixty thousand C Rs. one lakh
D Rs. two lakh E None of the avove Answer: C
Page
1133. In case of Accounts opened using OTP based e-KYC, in non face to face mode, The aggregate of

all credits in a financial year, in all the deposit taken together, shall not exceed Rs. _______.
Circular KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
D Rs. two lakh E None of the avove Answer: D
1134. As regards borrowal accounts opened using OTP based e-KYC, in non face to face mode, only
term loans shall be sanctioned. The aggregate amount of term loans sanctioned shall not exceed
Rs. ______thousand in a year. Circular KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
D Rs. two lakh E None of the avove Answer: B
1135. Which of the following is/are not limitation/s of Small Account: (i) the aggregate of all credits in a
financial year does not exceed rupees one lakh; (ii) the aggregate of all withdrawals and
transfers in a month does not exceed rupees ten thousand; and (iii) the balance at any point of
time does not exceed rupees fifty thousand. Circular KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
A Only i B Only ii C Only iii
1136. Accounts, both deposit and borrowal, opened using OTP based e-KYC shall not be allowed for
more than ______ unless identification as per Section 15 or as per Section 17 (V-CIP) is carried
out. Circular KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
A three months B six months C one year
D two yearS E None of the avove Answer: C
1137. Where the OVD furnished by the customer does not have updated address, Which of the
following documents or the equivalent e-documents thereof shall not be deemed to be OVDs for
the limited purpose of proof of address:- Circular KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
A utility bill which is not more B property or Municipal tax C pension or family pension
than two months old of any receipt payment orders (PPOs)
service provider issued to retired
(electricity, telephone, employees by
post-paid mobile phone, Government Departments
piped gas, water bill) or Public Sector
Undertakings, if they
contain the address
D letter of allotment of E None of the above Answer: E
accommodation from
employer issued by State
Government or Central
Government Departments,
statutory or regulatory
bodies.
1138. In case of offline verification of Aadhaar using XML file or Aadhaar Secure QR Code, it shall be
ensured that the XML file or QR code generation date is not older than ______ days from the date
of carrying out V-CIP. Circular KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
1139. In case of small account, the aggregate of all credits in a financial year shall not exceed Rs.
______. Circular KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
D Rs. two lakh E None of the avove Answer: C
1140. In case of small account, the aggregate of all withdrawals and transfers in a month shall not
exceed Rs.______. Circular KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
A Rs. ten thousand B Rs. fifty thousand C Rs. sixty thousand
D Rs. one lakh E None of the avove Answer: A
1141. Customer Identification Procedure means undertaking client due diligence measures including
123
identifying and verifying the customer and the beneficial owner. Bank to undertake identification
of customers in which of the following cases? Circular KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
Page
A Carrying out any B When there is a doubt C Carrying out transactions

international money about the authenticity or for a non-account based

transfer operations for a adequacy of the customer customer, that is a walkin

person who is not an identification data it has customer, where the
account holder of the obtained. amount involved is equal
Bank. to or exceeds rupees fifty
thousand, whether
conducted as a single
transaction or several
transactions that appear
to be connected.
1142. In case of small account, the balance at any point of time shall not exceed Rs.______. Circular
KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
D Rs. one lakh E None of the avove Answer: B
1143. The small account shall remain operational initially for a period of ______ which can be extended
for a further period of ______, provided the account holder applies and furnishes evidence of
having applied for any of the OVDs during the first ______ months of the opening of the said
account. Circular KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
A six months ; twelve B six months ; six months C six months ; six months
months ; twelve months ; twelve months ; six months
D twelve months ; twelve E None of the avove Answer: D
months ; twelve months
1144. Periodic updation of KYC shall be carried out at least once in every ______ years for high risk
customers, once in every ______ years for medium risk customers and once in every ______
years for low risk customers. Circular KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
A two years ; five years ; B five years ; eight years C two years ; eight years
ten years ; ten years ; ten years
D five years ; eight years E None of the avove Answer: C
; twelve years
1145. Accounts opened using OTP based e-KYC, in non face to face mode are subject to which of the
following conditions: Circular KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
A The aggregate balance of B The aggregate of all C As regards borrowal
all the deposit accounts of credits in a financial year, accounts, only term loans
the customer shall not in all the deposit taken shall be sanctioned. The
exceed rupees one lakh. together, shall not exceed aggregate amount of term
In case, the balance rupees two lakh. loans sanctioned shall not
exceeds the threshold, the exceed rupees sixty
account shall cease to be thousand in a year
operational, till CDD is
complete.
D Accounts, both deposit E All the above Answer: E
and borrowal, opened
using OTP based e-KYC
shall not be allowed for
more than one year
1146. In case of existing business relationship which is not KYC compliant or KYC has not been
updated as per prescribed periodicity, Bank shall temporarily cease operations in the account.
However, before temporarily ceasing operations for an account, the Bank shall give the client
two notices of ______ days each and within ______ days period the account should be made
KYC compliant otherwise operations in the account shall be frozen. Circular KYC 13/2021 dated
25.08.2021
124
1147. Banks shall, at their option, open a Non Resident Ordinary (NRO) bank account of a foreign
student on the basis of his / her passport (with visa & immigration endorsement) bearing the
Page
proof of identity and address in the home country together with a photograph and a letter
offering admission from the educational institution in India. Provided that a declaration about the

local address shall be obtained within a period of ______ days of opening the account and the
said local address is verified. Circular KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
1148. For the purpose of verifying the identity of customers at the time of commencement of an
account-based relationship, Bank, will at its option, rely on customer due diligence done by a
third party, subject to which of the following conditions: i) Records or the information of the
customer due diligence carried out by the third party is obtained within two days from the third
party or from the Central KYC Records Registry. ii) Adequate steps are taken by Bank to satisfy
itself that copies of identification data and other relevant documentation relating to the customer
due diligence requirements shall be made available from the third party upon request without
delay. iii) The third party is regulated, supervised or monitored for, and has measures in place
for, compliance with customer due diligence and record-keeping requirements in line with the
requirements and obligations under the PML Act. iv) The third party shall not be based in a
country or jurisdiction assessed as high risk. v) The ultimate responsibility for customer due
diligence and undertaking enhanced due diligence measures, as applicable, will be with the
Bank.
A Ony i) and ii) B Only ii) and iii) C Only iii) and iv)
D Only iv)and v) E All the above Answer: E
1149. Banks shall, at their option, open a Non Resident Ordinary (NRO) bank account of a foreign
student on the basis of his / her passport (with visa & immigration endorsement) bearing the
proof of identity and address in the home country together with a photograph and a letter
offering admission from the educational institution in India. Provided that pending the
verification of address, the account shall be operated with a condition of allowing foreign
remittances not exceeding ______ or equivalent into the account and a cap of rupees ______on
aggregate in the same, during the 30-day period. Circular KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
A USD 1,000 ; twenty five B USD 1,000 ; fifty C USD 2,000 ; fifty
thousand thousand thousand
D USD 5,000 ; one lac E None of the avove Answer: B
1150. As per KYC guidelines with reference to provisions of PML Act and Rules, Bank shall maintain
all necessary records of transactions between the Bank and the customer, both domestic and
international, for at least ______ years from the date of transaction; Circular KYC 13/2021 dated
25.08.2021
A five years B six years C seven years
D eight years E None of the avove Answer: A
1151. As per KYC guidelines with reference to provisions of PML Actand Rules, Bank shall, preserve
the records pertaining to the identification of the customers and their addresses obtained while
opening the account and during the course of business relationship, for at least ______ years
after the business relationship is ended. Circular KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
A five years B six years C seven years
D eight years E None of the avove Answer: A
1152. Report of all cash transactions (CTR) of the value of more than rupee ______ or its equivalent in
foreign currency will be furnished to ______. Circular KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
A ten lakhs ; Financial B twenty lakhs ; Financial C ten lakhs ; RBI
Intelligence Unit – India Intelligence Unit – India
D twenty lakhs ; RBI E None of the avove Answer: A
1153. The Cash Transaction Report (CTR) for each month will be submitted to FIU-IND by ______ of the
succeeding month. Circular KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
A 5th B 7th C 10th
D 15th E None of the avove Answer: D
125
1154. The authorised official of the Bank performing the V-CIP shall record audio video as well as
capture photograph of the customer present for identification and obtain the identification
information using which of the following?
Page
i) OTP based Aadhaar e-KYC authentication

ii) Offline Verification of Aadhaar for identification

iii) KYC records downloaded from CKYCR, in accordance with section 53, using the KYC
identifier provided by the customer
iv) Equivalent e-document of Officially Valid Documents (OVDs) including documents issued
through Digilocker Circular KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
A Only i, ii & iii B Only ii, iii,& iv C Only iii & iv
D Any of the i, ii, iii & iv E None of the above Answer: D
1155. Bank will furnish Suspicious Transaction Reports (STR) within ______ of arriving at a conclusion
by the Principal Officer of the Bank that any transaction, whether cash or non-cash, or a series
of transactions integrally connected are of suspicious nature Circular KYC 13/2021 dated
25.08.2021
A seven days B ten days C fifteen days
D thirty days E None of the avove Answer: A
1156. Cash transactions were forged or counterfeit currency notes have been used as genuine or
where any forgery of a valuable security or document has taken place facilitating the
transactions (Counterfeit Currency Report (CCR)) will be reported to Financial Intelligence Unit-
India in the specified format by ______ of the succeeding month. Circular KYC 13/2021 dated
25.08.2021
A 5th B 7th C 10th
D 15th E None of the avove Answer: D
1157. The authorised Bank official performing the V-CIP shall record audio-video as well as capture
photograph of the customer present for identification and obtain the identification information
using which of the following? Circular KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
A OTP based Aadhaar e- B Offline Verification of C KYC records downloaded
KYC authentication Aadhaar for identification from CKYCR
D Equivalent e-document of E Any one of the above Answer: E
Officially Valid Documents
(OVDs) including
documents issued through
Digilocker
1158. Bank will report all transactions involving receipts by non-profit organizations (Non Profit
Organisations Transaction report [NTR]) of value more than rupees ______ or its equivalent in
foreign currency to the Director, Financial Intelligence Unit-India by the ______ of the
succeeding month. Circular KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
A ten lakh ; 10th B ten lakh ; 15th C twent lakh ; 10th
D twent lakh ; 15th E None of the avove Answer: B
1159. Bank will file Cross-Border Wire Transfer Report (CWTR) to the Director, Financial Intelligence
Unit-India by ______ of succeeding month for all cross border wire transfers of the value of more
than Rs ______or its equivalent in foreign currency where either the origin or destination of fund
is in India. Circular KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
A 10th ; Rs 5 lakh B 15th ; Rs 5 lakh C 10th ; Rs 10 lakh
D 15th ; Rs 10 lakh E None of the avove Answer: B
1160. In terms of Section 51A of the UAPA Act, 1967, International Agencies do not have any account
in the name of individuals / entities appearing in the lists of individuals and entities, suspected
of having terrorist links, which are approved by and periodically circulated by the United Nations
Security Council (UNSC). Expand the term UAPA ______. Circular KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
A Unfare Action (Prevention) B Unfare Activities C Unlawful Action
(UAPA) (Prevention) (UAPA) (Prevention) (UAPA)
D Unlawful Activities E None of the avove Answer: D
(Prevention) (UAPA)
1161. Which the following conditions in respect of small small accounts is/are incorrect? Circular KYC
13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
A The account shall remain B The entire relaxation C The account shall be
126
operational initially for a provisions shall be monitored and when there

period of twelve months reviewed after twenty four is suspicion of money
which can be extended for months laundering or financing of
Page
a further period of twelve terrorism activities or

months, provided the other high risk scenarios,

account holder applies and the identity of the
furnishes evidence of customer shall be
having applied for any of established.
the OVDs during the first
twe
D Foreign remittance shall E None of the above Answer: E
not be allowed to be
credited into the account
unless the identity of the
customer is fully
established
1162. Post-closure scrutiny of ______% closed alerts shall be undertaken at Centralized AML Cell by
officers upto Scale-III. Further, Chief Managers at Centralized AML Cell will also review /
scrutinize atleast ______% of the closed alerts, pertaining to their respective assigned Zones /
Circles, on sample basis. Circular KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
A 20% ; 5% B 25% ; 5% C 20% ; 10%
1163. In terms of provision of Rule 9(1A) of PML Rules, the Bank has to capture customer’s KYC
records and upload onto CKYCR within ______ days of commencement of an account-based
relationship with the customer Circular KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
D thirty days E None of the avove Answer: B
1164. Domestic wire transfers of rupees ______and above shall be accompanied by originator
information such as name, address and account number. Circular KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
1165. Customer Identification shall be made if a customer is intentionally structuring wire transfer
below rupees ______ to avoid reporting or monitoring. In case of non-cooperation from the
customer, efforts shall be made to establish his identity and STR shall be made to FIU-IND.
1166. Any remittance of funds by way of demand draft, mail / telegraphic transfer / NEFT / IMPS or any
other mode and issue of travelers' cheques for value of rupees ______ and above shall be
effected by debit to the customer's account or against cheques and not against cash payment.
1167. Bank acting as agents while selling third party products/ Bank's own products as per regulations
in force from time to time. The identity and address of the walk-in customer shall be verified for
transactions above rupees ______ as required under Section 13(e) of KYC Directions. Circular
KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
1168. As per the PMLA rules, Bank is required to submit Cash Transaction Report (CTR) to Financial
Intelligence Unit – India. Which of the following statement/s is/are incorrect in this regard?
A Report of all cash B Report of all series of cash C Individual entries below
transactions of the value of transactions integrally Rs. 50,000/- will not be
more than rupee ten lakhs connected to each other reported in the Cash
or its equivalent in foreign which have been valued Transaction Report.
127
currency below rupees ten lakhs or

its equivalent in foreign
currency where such
Page
series of transactions have

taken place within a month

and the aggregate value of

s
D The CTR for each month E A copy of monthly CTR Answer: D
will be submitted to FIU- submitted on its behalf to
IND by 10th of the FIU-IND is available at the
succeeding month. concerned branch
(through MIS Report: Misc
Reports Module under
SENSRPT – 5/7 & 5/7a)
for production to
auditors/Inspectors, when
asked for
1169. Politically exposed persons (PEPs) of foreign origin, customers who are close relatives of PEPs
and accounts of which a PEP is the ultimate beneficial owner are categorised as ______
customer. Circular KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
A Low B Medium C High
D Extremely High E None of the avove Answer: C
1170. Non-resident customers and foreign nationals are categorised as ______ customer. Circular KYC
13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
1171. Non face-to-face customers and High net worth individuals (HNIs) are categorised as ______
customer. Circular KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
1172. Firms with 'sleeping partners' are categorised as ______ customer. Circular KYC 13/2021 dated
25.08.2021
1173. Accounts for "gatekeepers" such as accountants, lawyers, or other professionals for their
clients where the identity of the underlying client is not disclosed to the financial institution are
categorised as ______ . Circular KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
1174. Client Accounts managed by professional service providers such as law firms, accountants,
agents, brokers, fund managers, trustees, custodians, etc are categorised as ______ . Circular
KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
1175. Dealers in high value or precious goods (e.g. jewel, gem and precious metals dealers, art and
antique dealers and auction houses, estate agents and real estate brokers) are categorised as
______ . Circular KYC 13/2021 dated 25.08.2021
1176. Where a customer, for the purposes of establishing an account based relationship, submits a
KYC Identifier to the Bank, with an explicit consent to download records from CKYCR, then
concerned office shall retrieve the KYC records online from the CKYCR using the KYC Identifier
and the customer shall not be required to submit the same KYC records or information or any
other additional identification documents or details, unless – Circular KYC 13/2021 dated
25.08.2021
A there is a change B the current address of the C the Bank considers it
in the information customer is required to be necessary in order to
128
of the customer as verified verify the identity or

existing in the address of the customer,
records of CKYCR or to perform enhanced
Page
due diligence or to build

an appropriate risk profile

of the client.
1177. To facilitate branches for fast update of PAN/Form 60 details in retail Cust IDs without visiting
CRM module, a new menu option ______ has been introduced in CBS. Circular KYC 12/2021 dated
24.08.2021
A PANCD B PNCD C PNUPD
D PANUPD E None of the avove Answer: D
1178. A new menu option ______ has been customised in CBS, using which branches can replace PAN
entered as identity proof with the other valid OVD (Passport, Voter ID, Driving License, Aadhaar
etc.) already present as address proof in CRM. Circular KYC 11/2021 dated 23.07.2021
A PANCD B PNCD C PNUPD
D PANUPD E None of the avove Answer: A
1179. Where individuals customer submits document(s) in support of income/ turnover, The threshold
limit in new accounts will be fixed by system @ ______% of “Expected Annual Credits” declared
by customer in AOF. Circular KYC 05/2021 dated 17.03.2021
A 100%. B 125%. C 150%.
1180. Where individual customer submits self declaration in support of income/ turnover (such as
housewife, student, minor, labour working in unorganized sector etc.), The threshold limit in new
accounts will be fixed by system @ ______% of “Expected Annual Credits” declared by
customer in AOF subject to maximum of annual threshold of Rs.______ in SF accounts and
Rs.______ in current/OD/CC accounts.. Circular KYC 05/2021 dated 17.03.2021
A 100% ; Rs.5 lakh ; B 150% ; Rs.5 lakh ; C 150% ; Rs.10 lakh ;
Rs.25 lakh Rs.25 lakh Rs.25 lakh
D 150% ; Rs.10 lakh ; E None of the avove Answer: B
Rs.50 lakh
1181. The maximum threshold limit in Small accounts will be Rs. ______. Circular KYC 05/2021 dated
17.03.2021
A Rs. fifty thousand B Rs. sixty thousand C Rs.1 lakh
D Rs.2 lakh E None of the avove Answer: C
1182. The maximum threshold limit in BSBD accounts, A/cs opened at BC locations and A/cs opened
using OTP based e- KYC in non-face-to-face mode will be Rs. ______. Circular KYC 05/2021 dated
17.03.2021
A Rs. fifty thousand B Rs. sixty thousand C Rs.1 lakh
D Rs.2 lakh E None of the avove Answer: D
1183. Where Legal Entities submit document(s) in support of income/ turnover, The threshold limit in
new accounts will be fixed by system @ ______% of “Expected Annual Credits” declared by
customer in AOF. Circular KYC 05/2021 dated 17.03.2021
A 100%. B 125%. C 150%.
1184. Where Legal Entities submit self declaration in support of income/ turnover, The threshold limit
in new accounts will be fixed by system @ ______% of “Expected Annual Credits” declared by
customer in AOF. Circular KYC 05/2021 dated 17.03.2021
A 100%. B 125%. C 150%.
1185. Where Public Ltd Co/ NBFC submits self declaration in support of income/ turnover, The
maximum threshold limit will be Rs. ______ in Rural/Semi-Urban and Rs. ______ in Urban/Metro.
A Rs.100 lakh ; Rs.1000 B Rs.100 lakh ; Rs.1500 C Rs.500 lakh ; Rs.1000
lakh lakh lakh
129
D Rs.500 lakh ; Rs.1500 E None of the avove Answer: D

lakh
1186. Where Pvt Ltd Co/ LLP submits self declaration in support of income/ turnover, The maximum
Page
threshold limit will be Rs. ______ in Rural/Semi-Urban and Rs. ______ in Urban/Metro. Circular

KYC 05/2021 dated 17.03.2021

A Rs.200 lakh ; Rs.500 B Rs.80 lakh ; Rs.100 lakh C Rs.60 lakh ; Rs.80 lakh
lakh
D Rs.50 lakh ; Rs.60 lakh E None of the avove Answer: A
1187. Where Partnership Firm/ Trust/ Society submits self declaration in support of income/ turnover,
The maximum threshold limit will be Rs. ______ in Rural/Semi-Urban and Rs. ______ in
Urban/Metro. Circular KYC 05/2021 dated 17.03.2021
lakh
D Rs.50 lakh ; Rs.60 lakh E None of the avove Answer: B
1188. Where Prop. Firm/HUF submits self declaration in support of income/ turnover, The maximum
threshold limit will be Rs. ______ in Rural/Semi-Urban and Rs. ______ in Urban/Metro. Circular
KYC 05/2021 dated 17.03.2021
lakh
D Rs.50 lakh ; Rs.60 lakh E None of the avove Answer: C
1189. In case of other type of legal entities who submit self declaration in support of income/ turnover,
The maximum threshold limit will be Rs. ______ in Rural/Semi-Urban and Rs. ______ in
Urban/Metro. Circular KYC 05/2021 dated 17.03.2021
lakh
D Rs.50 lakh ; Rs.60 lakh E None of the avove Answer: D
1190. Any increase in threshold limit shall be done through menu option______ for maintaining proper
record of such increase in system. Circular KYC 05/2021 dated 17.03.2021
A THRESHLD B THRESHOLD C THRSHLD
D THRSHOLD E None of the avove Answer: A
1191. In CBS, provision has been made to assign ‘Value Date’ to a transaction. The value dating of
transactions will be allowed in genuine cases for a period not exceeding ______ days,
irrespective of amount. Circular IAD 26/2021 dated 30.08.2021
1192. In the cases upto Rs.______ where only workmen are involved, staff accountability/staff side
action will be dealt at Circle Office level comprising a Committee of three members headed by
Circle Head and two other members not below the rank of Chief Manager. Circular IAD 19/2021
dated 15.06.2021
A Rs.100.00 lacs B Rs.200.00 lacs C Rs.300.00 lacs
D Rs.500.00 lacs E None of the above Answer: C
1193. In accounts/group accounts with aggregate sanctioned limit up to Rs.______, and Government
sponsored schemes, staff accountability shall be examined on the basis of Annual
I.Rs/QCAR/Special Reports/ RBI Reports/Complaints etc. Circular IAD 19/2021 dated 15.06.2021
A Rs.10 lacs B Rs.20 lacs C Rs.25 lacs
D Rs.50 lacs E None of the above Answer: C
1194. The fresh slippage (NPA) of small accounts during the year in a branch exceeds ______% of the
credit outstanding within limit upto Rs.______, the Circle Head will examine the entire credit
portfolio of the branch and, thereafter, he may order for an investigation, if required. Circular IAD
19/2021 dated 15.06.2021
A 10% ; Rs.10.00 lacs B 15% ; Rs.10.00 lacs C 10% ; Rs.10.00 lacs
D 15% ; Rs.15.00 lacs E None of the above Answer: C
1195. In accounts with aggregate sanctioned limit above Rs. 25 lacs (including Government sponsored
schemes) and up to Rs.______, staff accountability shall be examined on the basis of
information provided by the branches/back offices through Circle Office on the basis of a
130
Preliminary Enquiry and examination of Documents report with specific comments on staff
accountability aspect. Circular IAD 19/2021 dated 15.06.2021
Page
D Rs.100.00 crore E None of the above Answer: A

1196. As per our Staff Accountability Policy, In accounts with aggregate sanctioned limit above

Rs.10.00 core and up to Rs. ______ the branch/back office will submit Status Note to Circle
Office. Circular IAD 19/2021 dated 15.06.2021
1197. As per our Staff Accountability Policy, Investigation in accounts with sanctioned limits above
Rs. 50.00 core is mandatory. Circular IAD 19/2021 dated 15.06.2021
1198. As per our Staff Accountability Policy, Investigations will be invariably got conducted in Quick
Mortality accounts with aggregate sanctioned limit of Rs.______ and above. Circular IAD 19/2021
dated 15.06.2021
D Rs.50 lacs E None of the above Answer: D
1199. For A/Cs with sanctioned limit above Rs. 25.00 lac and up to Rs10.00 crore, Competent Authority
for taking view on conducting investigation will be ______. Circular IAD 19/2021 dated 15.06.2021
A COSAC B ZOSAC C HOSAC
1200. Competent Authority for examination of staff accountability for NPA Accounts having
outstanding balance up to Rs. 10.00 crore will be ______. Circular IAD 19/2021 dated 15.06.2021
1201. Competent Authority for examination of staff accountability for NPA Accounts having
outstanding balance above Rs. 10.00 crore will be ______. Circular IAD 19/2021 dated 15.06.2021
1202. Where committee has taken a view for conducting investigation, the Level of officer as
Inspecting officials (IOs) upto Rs. 10.00 crores will be ______. Circular IAD 19/2021 dated
15.06.2021
A Scale III/IV B Not below Scale V C Not below Scale V
Inspecting officials (IOs) above Rs. 10 crore and up to Rs. 30.00 Crore will be ______ having
experience/ expertise befitting to the exposure involved. Circular IAD 19/2021 dated 15.06.2021
Inspecting officials (IOs) above Rs. 30.00 Crore will be ______ having experience/ expertise
befitting to the exposure involved. Circular IAD 19/2021 dated 15.06.2021
1205. Inspecting officials (IO) will be appointed by Incumbent of ZAO in cases with sanctioned limits
up to Rs______ and in other cases GM, IAD, HO will appoint Investigating Officer Circular IAD
19/2021 dated 15.06.2021
A Rs1.00 crore B Rs5.00 crore C Rs10.00 crore
D Rs25.00 crore E None of the above Answer: C
1206. For NPA accounts with outstanding balance above Rs.______, where staff accountability aspect
has been examined, by the designated committee, a copy of Investigation report along with
enclosures, Tabular and Minutes of the meeting will be furnished to Vigilance Department.
Circular IAD 19/2021 dated 15.06.2021
A Rs1.00 crore B Rs5.00 crore C Rs10.00 crore
D Rs25.00 crore E None of the above Answer: C
131
1207. IAD, HO shall place a summary position to MD & CEO through ED ( Domain ) regarding
examination of staff accountability on half yearly basis as on 30th September & 31st March in
respect of NPA cases with limits of over Rs.______ and in case of Quick Mortality for limits over
Page
Rs. ______ along with individual details of all such accounts. Circular IAD 19/2021 dated

15.06.2021
A Rs.5.00 crore ; Rs. 1.00 B Rs.10.00 crore ; Rs. C Rs.10.00 crore ; Rs.
crore 1.00 crore 4.00 crore
D Rs.10.00 crore ; Rs. E None of the above Answer: C
5.00 crore
1208. Which of the following Daily Monitoring System (DMS) reports shall not be checked online?
A Outstanding Proxy Posted B UPM Changes Report C GL balance Report
Transactions
D Interest Accrued Heads for E None of the above Answer: D
Deposit in Debit Balance
1209. Which of the following Daily Monitoring System (DMS) reports shall not be checked physically
through printout? Circular IAD 16/2021 dated 08.06.2021
A Report on Dormant B Exceptional Transactions C Temporary overdrafts
Accounts credited through Report Report
NEFT/RTGS on a given
date.
D Report on Inter-sol TOD E None of the above Answer: A
granted in CC/OD/SB/CA
accounts
1210. Quarterly Concurrent Audit Reports after closure will be retained on record for ______. Circular
IAD 15/2021 dated 02.06.2021
D 10 Years E None of the above Answer: A
1211. Files relating to limits sanctioned statements will be retained on record for ______. Circular IAD
15/2021 dated 02.06.2021
D 10 Years E None of the above Answer: B
1212. Files of medical aid, TA bills and petty cash vouchers will be retained on record for ______.
D 10 Years E None of the above Answer: C
1213. Record of Receipt & Disposal of Applications received under Right to Information Act, 2005 will
be retained on record for ______. Circular IAD 15/2021 dated 02.06.2021
1214. Annual Internal Audit (Inspection) Reports / Revenue Audit Reports / Statutory Audit Reports
including LFAR / Currency Chest Inspection Reports, etc. will be retained on record for ______.
1215. Vouchers / Voucher register will be retained on record for ______. Circular IAD 15/2021 dated
02.06.2021
A 3 Years B 5 Years C 8 years
1216. CIBIL Data will be retained on record for ______. Circular IAD 15/2021 dated 02.06.2021
1217. LongBooks/ DailyExtracts/ DayBook will be retained on record in electronic form for ______.
132
1218. TA Bill Register, Files of safe, fixture and furniture will be retained on record for ______. Circular
IAD 15/2021 dated 02.06.2021
Page


1219. Loan sanctioned files, Loan correspondence files and Loan follow up files will be retained on
record for ______. Circular IAD 15/2021 dated 02.06.2021
1220. Retention Period of Transactional Logs, both financial & Non financial transaction/ Logs that
provide information about changes in business data including customer information, account
details, scheme details etc will be ______ Years. Circular IAD 15/2021 dated 02.06.2021
D 10 Years E None of the above Answer: D
1221. Retention Period of Privilege user/System Administration /DBA Activity Logs will be ______
Years. Circular IAD 15/2021 dated 02.06.2021
1222. Retention Period of User Activity (This may include access to application, access to particular
module / service, details of other activities in applications etc.) will be ______ Years. Circular IAD
15/2021 dated 02.06.2021
1223. Retention/Preservation Period for CCTV footages/recordings of currency chest, branches, ATMs,
Administrative Office & all other offices will be ______ in storage media and when a dispute has
been raised,until issue isresolved. Circular IAD 15/2021 dated 02.06.2021
1224. Retention/Preservation Period of Footage/recordings for ATMs embedded webcameras will be
______ in storage media and when a dispute has been raised,until issue isresolved. Circular IAD
15/2021 dated 02.06.2021
1225. Retention/Preservation Period of Voice Recordings ( Treasury, Credit Card Division) will be
______ in storage media and when a dispute has been raised,until issue isresolved. Circular IAD
15/2021 dated 02.06.2021
1226. Record of Video conferencing by any of the Directors will be retained on record for ______ in
storage media (Till AFI is conducted) Circular IAD 15/2021 dated 02.06.2021
A 90 days B 180 days C 21 months
1227. It is open to the Bank not to issue fresh cheque book in the account or even to consider closure
of account / discontinuance of the credit facility at its discretion in the event of dishonour of one
or more cheque (s) each for Rs 25.00 lacs and above for want of sufficient funds on ______
occasions in a financial year. Circular IAD 14/2021 dated 02.06.2021
A three B four C five
D six E None of the above Answer: B
1228. In the event of dishonour of a cheque valuing Rs.______ and above and drawn on a particular
account of the drawer on 4 occasions during the financial year for want of sufficient funds in the
account, no fresh cheque book would be issued. Circular IAD 14/2021 dated 02.06.2021
D Rs.50 lacs E None of the above Answer: C
1229. Bank may consider closing of account at its discretion after issuing ______days notice to the
customer in the event of subsequent dishonour ( excedded four occasions) of cheques/failed
NACH (ECS) transactions in the account. Circular IAD 14/2021 dated 02.06.2021
133

1230. When an inward clearing cheque is received by Service SOLs in local/CTS clearing and
Page
dishonoured for some reason, the Incharge of Clearing Section shall ensure that the cheque is

returned to the presenting bank /our sister branches promptly within ______ of dishonour of
cheque. Circular IAD 14/2021 dated 02.06.2021
A same day B 24 hours C 48 hours
D 72 hours E None of the above Answer: B
1231. When a branch presents a cheque in clearing either for its own customer or on behalf of any
sister branch / other bank and the cheque is returned unpaid, it should be returned within ______
of dishonour of cheque to the customer / sister branch / bank concerned. Circular IAD 14/2021
dated 02.06.2021
A immediately B 24 hours C 48 hours
D 72 hours E None of the above Answer: A
1232. The frequeny of conducting Information Systems Audits (IS Audit) for the audit domain of
Vulnerability Assessment/ Penetration Testing/Device Level Audit will be ______. Circular IAD
13/2021 dated 28.04.2021
A Bi-Monthly B Quarterly C Half-Yearly
D Yearly E None of the above Answer: B
1233. The frequeny of conducting Information Systems Audits (IS Audit) for the audit domain of
External Attack/ Penetration Testing of web facing applications will be ______. Circular IAD
13/2021 dated 28.04.2021
D Yearly E None of the above Answer: A
1234. The frequeny of conducting Information Systems Audits (IS Audit) for the audit domain of Data
Center/ Disaster Recovery Centre/ Critical Locations Process Audit will be ______. Circular IAD
13/2021 dated 28.04.2021
1235. The frequeny of conducting Information Systems Audits (IS Audit) for IT Application
Management will be ______. Circular IAD 13/2021 dated 28.04.2021
D Yearly E None of the above Answer: C
1236. The frequeny of conducting Information Systems Audits (IS Audit) for IT Network will be ______.
1237. The frequeny of conducting Information Systems Audits (IS Audit) for IT Security Operations will
be ______. Circular IAD 13/2021 dated 28.04.2021
1238. The timelines for remediation of Vulnerabilities pointed out in IS Audits of of Branches/
Controlling Offices/ HO Departments shall be within ______ of receipt of observations. Circular
IAD 13/2021 dated 28.04.2021
A 15 days B One month C two months
D three months E None of the above Answer: B
1239. The external attack and penetration testing (EAPT) for the systems exposed to outside world
(through internet) will be done once in ______ on continuous basis. Circular IAD 13/2021 dated
28.04.2021
A 15 days B One month C two months
D three months E None of the above Answer: C
1240. Officers, who have at least ______ years of experience in Information Technology preferably with
CISA/DISA/CISM/CISSP or similar certifications will be posted in IS Audit cell at IAD-HO to the
possible extent. Circular IAD 13/2021 dated 28.04.2021
134

1241. Under Risk Based Internal Audit (RBIA) Policy, Business Risk has further been subdivided into
following three segments with risk weightage mentioned there against 1. Credit Risk 2.
Page
Operational Risk and 3. ___________. Circular IAD 12/2021 dated 26.04.2021

A Credit Risk B Operational Risk C Earning Risk

1242. Under Risk Based Internal Audit (RBIA) Policy, Control Risk has been divided into following
three segments with risk weightage. Which of the following is not a segment of Control Risk?
A Operations Management B Compliance C Branch Management
1243. As per Risk Based Internal Audit (RBIA) Policy, under Control Risk, Operations Management
shall be bifurcated into three components. Which of the following is not a component of
Operations Management under Control Risk? Circular IAD 12/2021 dated 26.04.2021
A Credit Functions B Non Credit Functions C Computer Functions
1244. The Off-site audit of Extremely High, Very High and High Risk branches will be conducted at the
______ periodicity. Circular IAD 12/2021 dated 26.04.2021
A Monthly B quarterly C half yearly
D yearly E None of the above Answer: B
1245. The Off-site audit of Low/Medium Risk branches with credit portfolio of Rs. 25 Crore & above will
be conducted at the ______ periodicity. Circular IAD 12/2021 dated 26.04.2021
D yearly E None of the above Answer: B
1246. The Off-site audit of Other Low/ Medium Risk branches will be conducted at the ______
periodicity. Circular IAD 12/2021 dated 26.04.2021
D yearly E None of the above Answer: C
1247. Where Overall Risk Category is Extremely High / Very High with any direction ,The periodicity of
Risk Based Internal Audit (RBIA) will be _______ . Circular IAD 12/2021 dated 26.04.2021
A 6 months B 6-9 months C 9-12 months
D 12-15 months E None of the above Answer: A
1248. Where Overall Risk Category is High with any direction ,The periodicity of Risk Based Internal
Audit (RBIA) will be _______ and where Direction of risk is Stable/Decreasing Frequency of IS
Audit will be ______. Circular IAD 12/2021 dated 26.04.2021
A 6 months B 6-9 months C 9-12 months
D 12-15 months E None of the above Answer: B
1249. Where Overall Risk Category is Medium and Direction of risk is Increasing, The periodicity of
Risk Based Internal Audit (RBIA) will be _______ and where Direction of risk is
Stable/Decreasing, Frequency of Risk Based Internal Audit (RBIA) will be ______. Circular IAD
12/2021 dated 26.04.2021
A 6 months B 6-9 months C 9-12 months ; 12-15
months
D 12-15 months ; 15-18 E None of the above Answer: C
months
1250. Where Overall Risk Category is Low and Direction of risk is Increasing, The periodicity Risk
Based Internal Audit (RBIA) will be _______ and where Direction of risk is Stable/Decreasing,
Frequency of Risk Based Internal Audit (RBIA) will be ______. Circular IAD 12/2021 dated
26.04.2021
A 6 months B 6-9 months C 9-12 months ; 12-15
months
D 12-15 months ; 15-18 E None of the above Answer: D
months
1251. At least _____% of non-concurrent audit branches shall be identified from all the risk categories
by respective ZAOs every year for conducting compliance audit to ascertain the actual status of
135
compliance. Circular IAD 12/2021 dated 26.04.2021

A 5% B 10% C 15%
Page
1252. The prescribed time period for closure of Regular Audit Reports of Small and Medium branches

will be within ______ from the date of finalization of the report. Competent Authority for Closure
of Audit Reports of Small and Medium branches will be ______. Circular IAD 12/2021 dated
26.04.2021
A half month ; Zonal Audit B one month ; Zonal Audit C one & half month ;
Office Office Zonal Audit Office
D one & half month ; HO: E None of the above Answer: C
IAD
1253. The prescribed time period for closure of Regular Audit Reports of of Large branches and other
Specialized Offices e.g. RCCs, CDPCs, ZTCs, ARMBs, Back Offices etc. will be within ______
from the date of finalization of the report. Competent Authority for Closure of Audit Reports of
Small and Medium branches will be ______. Circular IAD 12/2021 dated 26.04.2021
A one & half month ; B 2 months ; Zonal Audit C 3 months ; Zonal Audit
Circle Head Office Office
D 3 months ; Inspection & E None of the above Answer: B
Audit Division Head Office
1254. The prescribed time period for closure of Regular Audit Reports of ELCBs /LCBs /MCCs / iRAM
/RAM /VLBs / ELBs / including IBBs will be within ______ from the date of finalization of the
report. Competent Authority for Closure of Audit Reports of Small and Medium branches will be
______. Circular IAD 12/2021 dated 26.04.2021
D 3 months ; Inspection & E None of the above Answer: C
1255. The prescribed time period for closure of Regular Audit Reports of Foreign Branches, Back
Office of Foreign Branches, Trade Finance Centers (TFCs) will be within ______ from the date of
finalization of the report. Competent Authority for Closure of Audit Reports of Small and Medium
branches will be ______. Circular IAD 12/2021 dated 26.04.2021
D 3 months ; Inspection & E None of the above Answer: D
1256. The prescribed time period for closure of Regular Audit Reports of Currency Chest will be within
______ from the date of finalization of the report. _______under whose jurisdiction the currency
chest is functioning, shall be the competent authority to take a view on dropping of irregularities
and closure of inspection reports of currency chest. Circular IAD 12/2021 dated 26.04.2021
D 3 months ; Inspection & E None of the above Answer: A
1257. A regular audit report shall be treated as closed, on ______% dropping/ rectification of
irregularities in FSI (Fraud Sensitive Index), ZTL (Zero Tolerance Level), KRI (Key Risk Indicator)
items and Significant Audit Findings (as defined in the policy) and at least ______% rectification/
dropping of other irregularities reported in the audit report. Circular IAD 12/2021 dated 26.04.2021
A 80% ; 60% B 90% ; 70% C 100% ; 75%
D 100% ; 80% E None of the above Answer: C
1258. Zonal Audit Office shall submit significant audit findings of regular audit report of every branch
to the concerned Circle Head and Zonal Head, within ______ days of receipt of the report. Circular
IAD 12/2021 dated 26.04.2021
1259. Head of Zonal Audit Office may take a view on conducting of on-site Snap Audit in which of the
following circumstances? Circular IAD 12/2021 dated 26.04.2021
136
A Two consecutive off-site B An off-site audit shows the C On receipt of any

audits show the direction risk direction increasing by alarming
of risk as increasing two notches compared to information/report or
Page
the previous risk Occurrence of

assessment frauds/suspicious
transactions
D Any of the above E None of the above Answer: D
1260. The exercise of identification & declaration of an account as a case of Quick Mortality will be
done on ______ basis based on incidences of fresh slippage of accounts to NPA category.
D yearly E None of the above Answer: A
1261. Zonal Offices will procure the information in respect of all quick mortality cases with aggregate
sanctioned limits of above Rs. ______ from Circles and submit to HO SASTRA on the above
format on Monthly basis Circular IAD 11/2021 dated 26.04.2021
A Rs.1.00 lac B Rs. 2.00 lac C Rs. 5.00 lac
D Rs. 10.00 lac E None of the above Answer: C
1262. Investigations will be invariably got conducted in Quick Mortality accounts with aggregate
sanctioned limit of Rs.______ and above. Circular IAD 11/2021 dated 26.04.2021
A Rs. 25 lacs B Rs.50 lac C Rs.100 lac
D Rs.150 lac E None of the above Answer: B
1263. In accounts with aggregate sanctioned limit up to Rs. ______, staff accountability shall be
examined on the basis of Annual I.Rs/QCAR/Special Reports/ RBI Reports/Complaints etc.
D Rs.150 lac E None of the above Answer: A
1264. In accounts with aggregate sanctioned limit above Rs. 25 lacs and below Rs. ______, staff
accountability shall be examined on the basis of information provided by the branches/back
offices through Circle Office on the basis of a Preliminary Enquiry and examination of
Documents report. Circular IAD 11/2021 dated 26.04.2021
D Rs.150 lac E None of the above Answer: B
1265. Monthly Audit Reports of branches under Concurrent Audit shall be closed within _____
including period allowed for its submission. Circular IAD 10/2021 dated 26.04.2021
1266. Retired honorably officer from our bank, in Scale III to VI having an experience of minimum of
______ years service in our bank and a satisfactory track record with Branch experience of
______ years as an officer are eligible for empanelment as Concurrent Auditor. Circular IAD
10/2021 dated 26.04.2021
D 20 years ; 10 years E None of the above Answer: D
1267. An empanelled Retired Official of our own bank may be utilized as Concurrent Audit in a branch
upto the age of _____ or till the completion of last quarterly audit assignment, whichever is later.
1268. Branch assigned to Retired Staff of own bank appointed as auditor shall be within a maximum
distance of ______ KMs from his / her place of residence. Circular IAD 10/2021 dated 26.04.2021
A 10 KMs B 20 KMs C 25 KMs
D 50 KMs E None of the above Answer: D
1269. Bank may utilize the services of an Internal Auditor or an External Auditor or concurrent audit of
an identified branch. In which of the following branches, only Internal Auditors will be assigned
for Concurrent Audit? Circular IAD 10/2021 dated 26.04.2021
A MCC/RAM/iRAM/LCB/ELC B Branches with business C Back offices and HO
137
B/CIRCLE above 2500cr as per last Divisions

SASTRA/ZONAL financial year
SASTRA/TFC/ISB
Page

1270. While submitting Revenue Audit Report, auditor is required to indicate the name of erring
officials in individual incidences of undercharges of Rs. ______ & above besides comments on
staff accountability. Circular IAD 09/2021 dated 22.04.2021
A Rs. 5000/- B Rs. 10000/- C Rs. 20000/-
1271. Under Whistle Blower Policy, The Competent Authority shall, upon receipt of the protected
disclosure while concealing the identity of the complainant, shall make discreet inquiry within
maximum period of ______days, to ascertain whether there is any basis for proceeding further to
investigate the disclosure. Circular IAD 07/2021 dated 21.04.2021
1272. As per the RBI guidelines, all accounts for ₹ ______ & above, if NPA or classified as RFA, shall
be examined from the angle of possible fraud either through conduct of internal investigation or
Forensic Audit. Circular FRMD 03/2021 dated 05.01.2021
D ₹ 200.00 crore E None of the above Answer: A
1273. Forensic audit must be completed within a maximum period of ______ days from authorizing the
audit Circular FRMD 03/2021 dated 05.01.2021
1274. ‘Forensic Audit’ means an examination and evaluation of a firm's or individual's financial
information to determine if they are accurate and lawful. It encompasses: i) complete track of
entity’s finances (ii) identify any wrongdoing and (iii) use it as evidence in court/ to prosecute a
party for fraud, embezzlement or other financial claims. Circular FRMD 03/2021 dated 05.01.2021
A Only i) B Only i) and ii) C Only ii) and iii)
D Only i) and ii) E All i), ii) and iii) Answer: E
1275. The scope of Forensic audit will not extend to which of the following aspects relating to a
borrower: Circular FRMD 03/2021 dated 05.01.2021
A Capacity to pay B Money trail & End use of C Diversion of funds
funds financed by the
Bank/lenders
D Siphoning of funds E None of the above Answer: E
1276. Diversion of funds on the part of borrower would be construed in which of the undernoted
occurrences: i) Utilization of short term working capital funds for long term purposes not in
conformity with the terms of sanction; ii) Deploying borrowed funds for purposes/activities or
creation of assets other than those for which the loan was sanctioned. iii) Transferring borrowed
funds to the subsidiaries/group companies or other Corporate by whatever modalities. iv)
Routing of funds through any bank other than the lender bank or members of consortium
without prior permission of the bank/lenders. v) Investment in other companies by way of
acquiring equities/debt instruments without approval of lenders. vi) Shortfall in deployment of
funds vis-à-vis the amounts disbursed/drawn and the difference not being accounted for. Circular
FRMD 03/2021 dated 05.01.2021
A Only i), ii) and iii) B Only ii), iii) and iv C Only iii), iv and v)
D Only iv), v) and vi) E Any of the i),ii), iii), iv), v) Answer: E
and vi)
1277. Which of the following is/are not benefits of Forensic Audit: i) Detection of red flags,
inconsistencies and vulnerable points of the borrower including genuineness of
bills/documents/ transactions. ii) Assessment of regulatory compliance and propriety of
transactions iii) Money trail of transactions. iv) Ascertaining siphoning of funds by the borrower
v) Identification of control issues from bank’s point of view particularly end use of funds
/diversion /syphoning. vi) Creating evidence for testifying in court, when needed Circular FRMD
03/2021 dated 05.01.2021
138
A Only i), ii) and iii) B Only ii), iii) and iv C Only iii), iv and v)
D Only iv), v) and vi) E None of the above Answer: E
Page
1278. Cases of ______ should not be reported as fraud to FRMD but should immediately be reported to
Security Division, HO. Circular FRMD 02/2021 dated 05.01.2021

A theft B burglary C dacoity

D robbery E All the above Answer: E
1279. A CGM level Fraud Risk/ RFA Monitoring Committee at Head Office shall examine the fraud angle
in NPA accounts and non-RFA accounts for accounts with exposure Rs.50.00 crore & above.
Circular FRMD 02/2021 dated 05.01.2021
D ₹ 200.00 crore E None of the above Answer: A
1280. A GM level Fraud Risk/ RFA Monitoring Committee at Head Office shall examine the fraud angle
in NPA accounts and non-RFA accounts for accounts with exposure of Rs ______ & above but
less than Rs.50 crore. Circular FRMD 02/2021 dated 05.01.2021
D Rs 5 crore E None of the above Answer: C
1281. Cases relating to ‘Negligence and Cash Shortages’ and ‘Irregularities in Foreign Exchange
Transactions’ are to be reported as fraud if the intention to cheat / defraud is suspected / proved.
However, the following cases where fraudulent intention is not suspected/ proved at the time of
detection will be treated as fraud and reported accordingly: a) Cases of cash shortage more than
₹______ and b) Cases of cash shortage more than ₹______, if detected by management/ auditor/
inspecting officer and not reported on the day of occurrence by the persons handling cash.
A ₹10,000/- ; ₹5,000/- B ₹15,000/- ; ₹5,000/- C ₹20,000/- ; ₹5,000/-
D ₹20,000/- ; ₹10,000/- E None of the above Answer: A
1282. In terms of revised RBI guidelines, all individual fraud cases (including frauds below ₹1 lakh)
need to be furnished to RBI within ______ weeks of date of detection. Circular FRMD 02/2021
dated 05.01.2021
A two weeks B three weeks C four weeks
D six weeks E None of the above Answer: B
1283. A monthly certificate (mentioning that soft copy of all the FMRs have been submitted to RBI) is
to be submitted by the bank to CFMC, Bengaluru with a copy to the SSM of the bank, within
______ from the end of the month Circular FRMD 02/2021 dated 05.01.2021
A seven days B ten days C fourteen days
D fifteen days E None of the above Answer: A
1284. Bank has constituted a Special Committee of Board (SCBF) exclusively for monitoring and
follow up of cases of frauds involving amounts of ₹______. Circular dated
D ₹10 crore and above E None of the above Answer: A
1285. RBI has allowed the Banks, for limited statistical/ reporting purposes, to close those fraud cases
involving amounts upto ₹______, where: a. The investigation is on or challan/ charge sheet not
filed in the Court for more than three years from the date of filing of First Information Report
(FIR) by the CBI/Police, or b. The trial in the courts, after filing of charge sheet/ challan by CBI/
Police, has not started, or is in progress. Circular FRMD 02/2021 dated 05.01.2021
D ₹25.00 lakh E None of the above Answer: D
1286. As per the guidelines of Central Vigilance Commission/ RBI, fraud cases above ₹______ but
below ₹______, only if staff of the bank involved, complaint should be lodged by the bank branch
concerned to State Police To the local police station. Circular FRMD 02/2021 dated 05.01.2021
A ₹10,000/- ; ₹1 Lakh B ₹10,000/- ; ₹2 Lakh C ₹20,000/- ; ₹1 Lakh
D ₹20,000/- ; ₹2 Lakh E None of the above Answer: A
1287. As per the guidelines of Central Vigilance Commission/ RBI, fraud cases of ₹1 Lakh and above
and below ₹______ involving outsiders and bank staff, complaint should be lodged by the officer
designated by CO/ZO to State Police To the local police station. Circular FRMD 02/2021 dated
05.01.2021
139
A ₹100 Lakh B ₹200 Lakh C ₹300 Lakh

D ₹500 Lakh E None of the above Answer: C
1288. Fraud cases of ₹______ should be reported to CBI, after permission from MD & CEO (through
Page
FRMD, HO) and after getting draft approved from Vigilance/Law Division. Circular FRMD 02/2021

dated 05.01.2021
A ₹1.00 crore and above B ₹1.50 crore and above C ₹2.00 crore and above
D ₹3.00 crore and above E None of the above Answer: D
1289. In terms of CVC Office Order No 06/08/19 dated 21.08.2019, all large fraud cases above ₹______
involving the level of officers of General Manager and above be referred to Advisory Board for
Banking & Financial Frauds (ABBFF) before recommendations/ references are made to the
investigative agencies, i.e., CBI and on receipt of its recommendation/ advice Circular FRMD
02/2021 dated 05.01.2021
1290. CVO has been designated as nodal officer for vetting the complaint and subsequent
coordination with CBI for complaint of frauds exceeding ₹______. Circular FRMD 02/2021 dated
05.01.2021
1291. Where fraud amount is ₹300 lakh and above, Concerned Office will file FIR with CBI within 3 days
of receiving the approval from Vigilance Department/FRMD ensuring lodgement within outer time
limit of ______ days from reporting of fraud to RBI. Circular FRMD 02/2021 dated 05.01.2021
1292. In fraud cases involving amount of ₹10000.00 & above but below ₹1 lakh (only if staff of the bank
is involved), the concerned branch/office to lodge FIR with local Police Station within ______ of
detection of fraud. Circular FRMD 02/2021 dated 05.01.2021
A same day B 2 days C 3 days
1293. In fraud cases involving amount of ₹1 lakh & above (but below ₹300 lakhs) branch /Office to
submit the draft FIR to Circle/ Controlling Office through email within ______ of detection of
fraud. Circular FRMD 02/2021 dated 05.01.2021
1294. The Circle/ Controlling Office will send the approved draft of FIR through email to branch/ office
within ______ of receipt of draft FIR. Circular FRMD 02/2021 dated 05.01.2021
1295. Branch Head/ Authorized official will lodge the FIR with CID/ EOW within ______ of receipt of
approved draft of FIR. Circular FRMD 02/2021 dated 05.01.2021
1296. Branch will examine each Early Warning Signals (EWS) in relation to business profile of the
customer and manually enter status in CBS within _______ from date of identification of EWS.
1297. Accounts classified in NPA category with exposure of ₹______ irrespective of the lending
arrangement (whether solo banking, multiple banking or consortium) shall be considered for
classification as RFA and examination of fraud angle. Circular FRMD 02/2021 dated 05.01.2021
A ₹50 crore or more B ₹100 crore or more C ₹150 crore or more
D ₹200 crore or more E None of the above Answer: A
1298. Other than NPA accounts (SMA/ Standard) with exposure of ₹______ (solo/ consortium basis)
where EWS noticed shall be considered for classification as RFA and examination of fraud
angle. Circular FRMD 02/2021 dated 05.01.2021
140

D ₹200 crore or more E None of the above Answer: A
1299. Consortium /Multiple Banking accounts for ₹______ where majority of member Banks (60% &
Page
above) have taken decision to treat account as RFA, shall be considered for classification as

RFA and examination of fraud angle. Circular FRMD 02/2021 dated 05.01.2021
A ₹1 crore & above B ₹2 crore & above C ₹3 crore & above
D ₹5 crore & above E None of the above Answer: C
1300. The bank which has ‘red flagged’ the account or detected the fraud would ask the consortium
leader or the largest lender under MBA to convene a meeting of JLF to discuss the issue within
______ . Circular FRMD 02/2021 dated 05.01.2021
1301. Under Consortium or Multiple Banking Arrangements, In case there is a broad agreement, the
account would be classified as a fraud; else based on the majority rule of agreement amongst
banks with at least ______% share in the total lending, the account would be red flagged by all
the banks Circular FRMD 02/2021 dated 05.01.2021
A 80%. B 70%. C 60%.
1302. Within ______ of the RBI reporting, the bank commissioning/ initiating the forensic audit would
lodge a complaint with the CBI on behalf of all banks in the consortium/MBA. Circular FRMD
02/2021 dated 05.01.2021
1303. Under Consortium or Multiple Banking Arrangements, In case it is decided at the individual bank
level to classify the a/c as fraud straightway at this stage itself, the bank may then report the
fraud to RBI within ______ of detection and also report the case to CBI/Police, as is being done
hitherto. Circular FRMD 02/2021 dated 05.01.2021
1304. Bank to put in place a system of periodic legal audit of the title deeds and other documents in
respect of all credit exposures of ₹ ______and above and reverification of title deeds with
relevant authorities as part of regular audit exercise till the loan stands fully repaid. Circular
FRMD 02/2021 dated 05.01.2021
1305. Under the initiative certain basic banking services under Doorstep Banking Services are offered
to customers through designated branches and have a uniform charge of Rs.______. Circular
CCC 12/2021 dated 06.08.2021
A Rs.60+GST B Rs.65+GST C Rs.70+GST
D Rs.75+GST E None of the above Answer: D
1306. For all the Doorstep Banking (DSB) service requests received till 03.00PM, these have to be
completed by ______ and mark completion status in respective vendor portal. Circular CCC
12/2021 dated 06.08.2021
A 05.00PM same day B 06.00PM same day C 01.00PM next working
day
D 02.00PM next working E None of the above Answer: B
day
1307. The service requests under Doorstep Banking received after 03.00 PM on a day have to be
completed by the designated branch by ______ next working day. Circular CCC 12/2021 dated
06.08.2021
A 05.00PM same day B 06.00PM same day C 01.00PM next working
day
D 02.00PM next working E None of the above Answer: C
day
1308. After supplying necessary inputs the customer will be registered with the Doorstep Banking
141
(DSB) System. The DSB system will locate a branch of the Bank in the service area within ______
from the customer’s location. Circular CCC 12/2021 dated 06.08.2021
A 5KM B 10KM C 12KM
Page
D 15KM E None of the above Answer: B

1309. A customer’s entitlement to zero liability shall arise where the deficiency in unauthorized
electronic Banking Transactions lies neither with the bank nor with the customer but lies
elsewhere in the system, and the customer notifies the bank within ______ of receiving the
communication. Circular CCC 10/2021 dated 28.07.2021
A 2 working day B 3 working day C 5 working day
D 7 working day E None of the above Answer: B
1310. In cases where the responsibility for the unauthorized electronic banking transaction lies neither
with the bank nor with the customer, but lies elsewhere in the system and the customer notifies
such transaction on fourth to seventh day after receiving the communication from the bank, per
transaction liability of the customer shall be limited to the transaction value or Rs.______,
whichever is lower in BSBD accounts. Circular CCC 10/2021 dated 28.07.2021
A Rs. 5000/- B Rs. 10000/- C Rs. 20000/-
1311. Per transaction liability of the customer shall be limited to the transaction value or Rs.______,
whichever is lower in all other SB accounts except BSBDA if reported within 4th to 7th working
day. Circular CCC 10/2021 dated 28.07.2021
A Rs. 5000/- B Rs. 10000/- C Rs. 20000/-
D Rs. 25000/- E None of the above Answer: B
whichever is lower in Prepaid Payment Instruments and Gift Cards if reported within 4th to 7th
working day. Circular CCC 10/2021 dated 28.07.2021
A Rs. 5000/- B Rs. 10000/- C Rs. 20000/-
whichever is lower in Current/Cash Credit/Overdraft accounts of MSMEs if reported within 4th to
7th working day. Circular CCC 10/2021 dated 28.07.2021
A Rs. 5000/- B Rs. 10000/- C Rs. 20000/-
whichever is lower in Current/Cash Credit/Overdraft accounts of individuals with average anual
balance limit upto Rs. 25 Lakh if reported within 4th to 7th working day. Circular CCC 10/2021
dated 28.07.2021
A Rs. 5000/- B Rs. 10000/- C Rs. 20000/-
whichever is lower in Credit Cards upto Rs. 5 lakh if reported within 4th to 7th working day.
Circular CCC 10/2021 dated 28.07.2021
A Rs. 5000/- B Rs. 10000/- C Rs. 20000/-
whichever is lower in all other Current/Cash Credit/Overdraft accounts other than MSMEs and
individuals with average anual balance limit upto Rs. 25 Lakh if reported within 4th to 7th
working day. Circular CCC 10/2021 dated 28.07.2021
A Rs. 5000/- B Rs. 10000/- C Rs. 20000/-
whichever is lower in Credit Cards above Rs. 5 lakh if reported within 4th to 7th working day.
A Rs. 5000/- B Rs. 10000/- C Rs. 20000/-
1318. The customer will bear the entire loss until he reports the unauthorized transaction to the bank.
142
However, depending on case to case basis, Bank may compensate customer an amount of
maximum Rs ______ (if reported beyond 7th Working day and within 30 days) irrespective of the
fact whether there is single or multiple number of transactions or transaction amount whichever
Page
is lower. Circular CCC 10/2021 dated 28.07.2021

A Rs. 5000/- B Rs. 10000/- C Rs. 20000/-

1319. On being notified by the customer, the Bank shall credit( shadow reversal) the amount involved
in the unauthorized electronic transaction to the customer’s account within ______ from the date
of such notification by the customer (without waiting for settlement of insurance claim , if any) .
D 10 working days E None of the above Answer: D
1320. In case verification of the entry reported to be erroneous by the customer does not involve a
third party, the bank will endeavor to complete the process of verification within a maximum
period of _______ from the date of reporting of erroneous debit. Circular CCC 10/2021 dated
28.07.2021
D 7 working day E None of the above Answer: D
1321. In case, the verification involves a third party or where verification is to be done at overseas
centers, the bank shall complete the verification process within a maximum period of ________
from the date of reporting of erroneous transaction by the customer. Circular CCC 10/2021 dated
28.07.2021
A seven days B fifteen days C one month
D two months E None of the above Answer: C
1322. Where it is established that bank had issued and activated a credit card without written consent
of the recipient, the bank would not only reverse the charges immediately but also pay a penalty
without demur to the recipient amounting to ______ reversed as per regulatory guidelines in this
regard. Circular CCC 10/2021 dated 28.07.2021
A half the value of charges B equal to the value of C twice the value of charges
charges
D thrice the value of charges E None of the above Answer: C
1323. In case a cheque has been paid after stop payment instruction is acknowledged by the bank, the
bank shall reverse the transaction within _______ after receiving the intimation and give value-
dated credit to protect the interest of the customer. Circular CCC 10/2021 dated 28.07.2021
D 7 working day E None of the above Answer: A
1324. In case of delay in collection of local cheques, If the proceeds of cheque under collection were to
be credited to Savings Bank or Current account of the customer, interest shall be paid at the rate
of ______ for the period of delay. Circular CCC 10/2021 dated 28.07.2021
A Saving Bank Rate B Saving Bank Rate + 2% C Term Deposit rate
D Term Deposit rate + 2% E None of the above Answer: A
1325. In case of delay in collection of outstation cheques, If the proceeds of cheque under collection
were to be credited to Savings Bank or Current account of the customer, interest shall be paid at
the rate of ______ for the period of delay beyond 7/10/14 days as the case may be in collection of
outstation cheques.. Circular CCC 10/2021 dated 28.07.2021
A Saving Bank Rate B Saving Bank Rate + 2% C Term Deposit rate
D Term Deposit rate + 2% E None of the above Answer: A
were to be credited to Savings Bank or Current account of the customer, Interest for
extraordinary delays, i.e. delays exceeding 90 days, will be paid at the rate of 2% above the rate
applicable to ______for the corresponding period. Circular CCC 10/2021 dated 28.07.2021
A Saving Bank Rate B term deposit C overdraft/loan account
D Upon bank’s discretion E None of the above Answer: B
were to be credited to an overdraft / loan account of the customer, Interest for delayed collection
143
shall be paid at the the rate applicable to the ______ for the period of delay.
Page
D Upon bank’s discretion E None of the above Answer: C

were to be credited to an overdraft / loan account of the customer, Interest for extraordinary
delays, i.e. delays exceeding 90 days interest for delayed collection will be paid at the rate of
______% above the rate applicable to the loan account.
D 2.00 percent E None of the above Answer: D
1329. In case of delay in Collection of Cheques / Instruments (Payable Outside India), authorized
Dealers shall pay or send Intimation, as the case may be, to the beneficiary in two working days
from the date of receipt of credit advice / nostro statement. In case of delay, the bank shall pay
the beneficiary interest @ 2 % over its ______ rate. Circular CCC 10/2021 dated 28.07.2021
D Upon bank’s discretion E None of the above Answer: A
1330. In case of delay in crediting the beneficiary customer’s account or in returning the un-credited
amount to the remitter in case of NEFT, Bank shall pay penal interest at the current RBI LAF
Repo Rate plus _______ for the period of delay/till the date of refund as the case may be to the
affected customers suo moto, without waiting for claim from customers. Circular CCC 10/2021
dated 28.07.2021
D 2.00 percent E None of the above Answer: D
1331. On receipt of credit advice/statement of Nostro/Vostro account, the Bank shall transfer funds to
the credit of exporter’s account within ______. If this stipulated time limit is not observed, Bank
shall pay compensation for the delayed period at the minimum interest rate charged on ________
as advised by RBI from time to time. Circular CCC 10/2021 dated 28.07.2021
A two working ; Saving B two working days ; term C two working days ;
Bank Rate deposit export credit
D Upon bank’s discretion E None of the above Answer: C
1332. In case of payment of Inward Remittance, Bank shall pay or send intimation, as the case may be,
to the beneficiary within ______ from the date of receipt of credit advice/nostro statement. In
case of delay, Bank shall pay the beneficiary interest @ 2% over the ______ rate. Circular CCC
10/2021 dated 28.07.2021
A two working ; Saving B two working days ; term C two working days ;
Bank Rate deposit export credit
1333. In the event a cheque or an instrument accepted for collection is lost in transit or in the clearing
process or at the paying bank’s branch, bank will pay interest on the amount of the cheque for a
further period of ______ days at Savings Bank rate to provide for likely further delay in obtaining
duplicate cheque/instrument and collection thereof in addition to the interest for the period of
delay beyond 7/10/14 days. Circular CCC 10/2021 dated 28.07.2021
1334. Duplicate draft will be issued within ______ from the receipt of such request from the purchaser
along with submission of documents as prescribed by the bank. For delay beyond the above
stipulated period, interest at the rate applicable for ______ of corresponding period will be paid
as compensation to the customer for such delay. Circular CCC 10/2021 dated 28.07.2021
A a fortnight ; Saving B a fortnight ; fixed C a month ; Saving
deposit deposit deposit
D a month ; fixed deposit E None of the above Answer: B
1335. All the pensioners are compensated for the delayed period, if delay is on the part of the Bank,
beyond the due date at a fixed interest rate of _______%. Circular CCC 10/2021 dated 28.07.2021
A 6% B 7% C 8%
144

1336. In the event of receipt of any complaint from the customer that Bank’s representative / courier or
Direct Selling Agent (DSA) has engaged in any improper conduct or acted in violation of the
Page
Code of Bank’s Commitment to Customers which the bank has adopted voluntarily, the bank is

committed to investigate the matter and endeavor to communicate the findings to the customer
within ______ from the date of receipt of complaint and wherever justified, compensate the
customer for financial losses, if any, as contemplated under this policy. Circular CCC 10/2021
dated 28.07.2021
D 7 working day E None of the above Answer: D
1337. In terms of the guidelines for lenders liability, and the Code of Bank’s Commitment to Customers
adopted by the bank, the bank would return to the borrowers all the securities/documents/title
deeds to mortgaged property within ______ of repayment of all dues agreed to or contracted.
1338. Where the Branch after adjustment of the loan account does not remit/ credit the remaining
amount of the pledged FD to the customer’s account but keeps the balance in Sundry Account,
the Bank will compensate to the customer the interest as payable for the amount kept in the
Sundry account at ______Rate, if the customer has not been duly informed. Circular CCC 10/2021
dated 28.07.2021
A Saving Bank B term deposit C overdraft/loan account
1339. As per Customer Compensation Policy for ASBA of our Bank, Any applicant (RII) whose
application has not been considered for allotment, due to failure on the part of the bank, shall
have the option to seek redressal of the same within ______ months of the listing date. Circular
CCC 10/2021 dated 28.07.2021
D four months E None of the above Answer: C
1340. As per Customer Compensation Policy for ASBA of our Bank, On receipt of application/s for
redressal of non-allotment due to failure on the part of the bank, the branch where cause of
action has arisen will resolve the same within 15 days, failing which it will pay the interest at the
rate of ______% per annum for any delay beyond the said period of 15 days. Circular CCC 10/2021
dated 28.07.2021
A 5%. B 6%. C 10%.
1341. In case of delays in Collection of Outstation Cheques and other Negotiable Instruments in India,
If the proceeds of cheque under collection were to be credited to Savings
Bank or Current account of the customer, Interest for delayed collection shall be paid as per
compensation policy of our bank. Which of the following is/are incorrect in this regard? Circular
CCC 10/2021 dated 28.07.2021
A interest will be B Where the delay is C In case of extraordinary
paid at the beyond 14 days delay, i.e. delays
Savings Bank rate but up to 90 days, exceeding 90 days
for the period of interest will be interest will be paid at the
delay beyond paid at the rate rate of 2% above the rate
7/10/14 days as applicable to term applicable to term deposit
the case may be in deposit for the for the corresponding
collection of corresponding
period.
outstation period or Saving
cheques. Bank rate,
whichever is
higher.
1342. The Nodal Officers handling Banking Ombudsman complaints shall ensure that all the
complaints received at CMS portal are downloaded on daily basis and the data is then shared
145
with respective Circle Offices. Circle Offices will then enter the details of the complaints into
CGRMS portal latest by ______. Circular CCC 09/2021 dated 08.06.2021
A T + 1 days B T + 2 days C T + 3 days
Page
D T + 5 days E None of the above Answer: A

1343. Doorstep Banking Service is aimed at providing certain basic banking services to senior citizens
of more than ______ years of age and differently abled persons at the doorstep of such
customers in an effective and transparent manner. Circular CCC 07/2021 dated 31.03.2021
1344. At present, our Bank is offering Doorstep Banking Services (DSBS) through branches to senior
citizens of more than 70 years of age and differently abled persons within a radius of _______ of
a branch. Circular CCC 07/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A 3 KMs ; 2 KMs for hilly/ B 5 KMs ; 2 KMs for hilly/ C 5 KMs ; 3 KMs for hilly/
difficult areas difficult areas difficult areas
D 10 KMs ; 5 KMs for hilly/ E None of the above Answer: B
difficult areas
1345. Pick up of Cash deposit and delivery of cash withdrawal up to Rs. ______ will be provided by
branches under Doorstep Banking Service. Circular CCC 07/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A Rs. 10,000/- B Rs. 15,000/- C Rs. 20,000/-
D Rs. 25,000/- E None of the above Answer: C
1346. A Senior Citizen / Differently Abled customer/other customers are required to bear the service
charges @______ for Non-Financial & Financial Doorstep Banking Service provided through
Branch. Circular CCC 07/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A Rs. 25/- + GST B Rs. 50/- + GST C Rs. 100/- + GST
D Rs. 150/- + GST E None of the above Answer: C
1347. A Senior Citizen / Differently Abled customer/other customers are required to bear the service
charges @______ for Non-Financial & Financial Doorstep Banking Service provided through
Authorized 3rd Party Agent. Circular CCC 07/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A Rs. 50/- + GST B Rs. 75/- + GST C Rs. 100/- + GST
D Rs. 150/- + GST E None of the above Answer: B
1348. Under Doorstep Banking Service, Any change in the charges will be notified to customers in
advance at least ______ days before implementation. Circular CCC 07/2021 dated 31.03.2021
1349. For Life Certificate Pick-Up through branches from pensioners/family pensioners under
Doorstep Banking Service, service charges will be Rs. ______. Circular CCC 07/2021 dated
31.03.2021
A Rs. 50/- + GST B Rs. 60/-+GST C Rs. 75/-+GST
D Rs. 100/- + GST E None of the above Answer: B
1350. The delivery of Doorstep Banking Service (DSBS) would be completed on best effort basis but
not later than______ days (holidays excluded). Circular CCC 07/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A T+2 working B T+3 working C T+4 working
D T+5 working E None of the above Answer: A
1351. The request for Doorstep Banking Services (DSBS) will be received through which of the
following modes from DSB registered customer?
i) Telephone / Mobile Call from DSB registered mobile no./ telephone no.
ii) Email message from registered email id of DSB registered customer.
iii) Post/ Courier.
iv) Contact Centre- Customer to be duly authenticated through security questions and verified
for his eligibility.
v) SMS/ Internet Banking Services/ Mobile Banking Services. Circular CCC 07/2021 dated
31.03.2021
A Only i), ii) & iii) B Only i), iii) & iv) C Only ii), iii) iv) & v)
D Any of the i), ii), iii), iv) & v) E None of the above Answer: D
1352. Which of the following service/s is/are not provided under Doorstep Banking Service (DSBS)?
146

A Cheque Requisition Slip B Form 15G/H Delivery & C Life Certificate Pickup
Pick Up Pick Up
Page
D Cash Deposit and E None of the above Answer: E

Withdrawal up to Rs.
20,000/-
1353. The request for Doorstep Banking Service (DSBS) will be received through various modes from
DSB registered customer. Which of the following mode is incorrect in this regard? Circular CCC
07/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A Telephone / Mobile Call B Email message from C Post/ Courier
from DSB registered registered email id of DSB
mobile no./ telephone no registered customer
D SMS/ Internet Banking E None of the above Answer: E
Services/ Mobile Banking
Services
1354. As per our Policy for Collection of Cheques and Instruments for the year 2021-22, Bank branches
situated at centers where no clearing house exists, would present local cheques on drawee
banks across the counter and it would be the bank's endeavor to credit the proceeds at the
earliest but not later than ______ from the date of deposit by customer. Circular CCC 06/2021
dated 30.03.2021
A 2nd working day B 3rd working day C 5th working day
D 7th working day E None of the above Answer: B
1355. As per our Policy for Collection of Cheques and Instruments for the year 2021-22, For cheques
and other instruments presented at CTS Centres and sent for collection to centres within the
country, maximum time norms shall be______ days. Circular CCC 06/2021 dated 30.03.2021
1356. As per our Policy for Collection of Cheques and Instruments for the year 2021-22, For cheques
and other instruments presented at non CTS Centres and sent for collection to centres within the
country, maximum time norms shall be______ days. Circular CCC 06/2021 dated 30.03.2021
1357. Interest for delayed collection shall be paid at the ______ rate for the period of delay beyond 3
working days in case of local cheques. Circular CCC 06/2021 dated 30.03.2021
A Savings Bank B term deposit C overdraft/loan account
D at bank’s discretion E None of the above Answer: A
1358. Interest for delayed collection shall be paid at the ______ rate for the period of delay beyond 7
days in collection of outstation cheques payable at CTS centres and 10 days in non CTS centres.
1359. As per our Policy for Collection of Cheques and Instruments for the year 2021-22, Where the
delay is beyond 14 days interest for delayed collection will be paid at the rate applicable for
______ for the respective period. Circular CCC 06/2021 dated 30.03.2021
D at bank’s discretion E None of the above Answer: B
1360. As per our Policy for Collection of Cheques and Instruments for the year 2021-22, In case of
extraordinary delay, i.e. delays exceeding ______ days interest for delayed collection will be
paid at the rate of ______% above the corresponding Term Deposit rate. Circular CCC 06/2021
dated 30.03.2021
A 90 days ; 1% B 90 days ; 2% C 120 days ; 1%
D 120 days ; 2% E None of the above Answer: B
1361. In the event the proceeds of cheque under collection was to be credited to an overdraft/loan
account of the customer, interest will be paid at the rate applicable to the______. For
extraordinary delays, interest will be paid at the rate of ______% above the rate applicable to the
loan account. Circular CCC 06/2021 dated 30.03.2021
147
A loan account ; 2% B Savings Bank ; 2% C term deposit ; 2%

Page
1362. In line with the compensation policy of the bank, in respect of instruments lost in transit, bank
will pay interest on the amount of the cheque as compensation in addition to the interest for

delayed collection, for a further period of ______ days at Savings Bank rate to provide for likely
further delay in obtaining duplicate cheque/instrument and collection thereof. Circular CCC
06/2021 dated 30.03.2021
1363. Cheque which are deposited with wrong account number mentioned on the pay-in slip, Bank will
return such cheques to the customer on the address mentioned within ______. Circular CCC
06/2021 dated 30.03.2021
A 24 working hours B 48 working hours C 2 days
1364. Cheque received back unpaid will be returned by post/courier etc. to the customer within ______
on the address recorded in Bank's database. Circular CCC 06/2021 dated 30.03.2021
A 24 working hours B 48 working hours C 2 days
1365. In cases with incomplete address, incomplete phone no. or no phone number mentioned on the
pay-in slip for collection of cheques, the bank will be responsible to keep these instruments for a
maximum period of ______. Circular CCC 06/2021 dated 30.03.2021
1366. In cases of Cheque received back unpaid, If not collected by the customer within ______, bank
will send back at the recorded address by post or courier. Circular CCC 06/2021 dated 30.03.2021
1367. All complaints will be recorded by the Bank in a database. The database, along with the
acknowledgement letter and other correspondence will be preserved at least for ________ for
future reference. Circular CCC 04/2021 dated 31.03.2021
1368. If the complaints are not resolved within _____ or in case the customer is not satisfied with the
service or redressal provided by the bank, he can also approach the Banking Ombudsman (BO)
located in State Capitals for redressal. Circular CCC 04/2021 dated 31.03.2021
1369. Time schedule for redressal of complaints for General complaints and Complaints forwarded by
RBI/MOF/ MPs/VVIPs/PMO is ______ days. Circular CCC 04/2021 dated 31.03.2021
1370. Complaints requiring some time for examination of issues involved/detail
investigations/enquiries; Bank will send final response or explain reasons for further time
required within _____ of receipt of complaint. Circular CCC 04/2021 dated 31.03.2021
1371. Customer Service committees shall meet once in ______ where staff and invited customers shall
interact freely on service related issues to discuss the ‘monthly theme’ to be deliberated upon by
the Branch/ Office. Circular CCC 04/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A a fortnight B a month C a quarter
D a half year E None of the above Answer: B
1372. Customers’ Day is extended at the organisation structure level and be conducted on ______ of
every month or next working Day if 10th is a holiday. Office bearers at respective locations will
meet customers and take necessary action for resolution of genuine customer grievance
between ______. Circular CCC 04/2021 dated 31.03.2021
148
A 10th ; 3 pm and 5 pm B 10th ; 4 pm and 5 pm C 15th ; 3 pm and 5 pm

D 15th ; 4 pm and 5 pm E None of the above Answer: A
1373. Monthly Theme Based Meeting is held on PAN India level on single date in all the branches of
Page
the bank to create awareness among staff on all the products & services of the bank to serve to

our esteemed customers in a better way. For this purpose Monthly Quiz Contest is also
conducted with Monthly Theme Based Meeting at branches and cash incentive of Rs.______ is
given to the winner of the contest. Circular CCC 04/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A Rs.50/- B Rs.100/- C Rs.150/-
1374. May I help You Counter will be extended at all branches having staff strength of ______ or more.
A 10 B 15 C 20
D 25 E None of the above Answer: A
1375. The name/designation/boards of the offices/official of the banks, as also the name-boards of the
Departments/ Divisions etc. be displayed bilingually in the offices in Regions ______. Circular
CCC 03/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A A B B C A and B.
D A, B and C. E None of the above Answer: C
1376. Bank's Security Officers visit all the High Risk Branches once in______ and other low/normal
risk branches once in ______to check the arrangement and guide the staff or whenever an
untoward incident takes place. Circular CCC 03/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A 3 months ; a year B 6 months ; a year C 3 months ; two year s
D 6 months ; two years E None of the above Answer: V
1377. As per our Customer Rights Policy, If the bank has made any change in the terms and conditions
without giving such notice which is favourable to the customer, it will notify the change within
______ of such change. Circular CCC 02/2021 dated 31.03.2021
1378. As per our Customer Rights Policy, If the change in the terms and conditions is adverse to the
customer, prior notice of minimum ______ days will be provided and the customer may be
provided options, to close the account or switch to any other eligible account without having to
pay the revised charge or interest within ______ of such notice. Circular CCC 02/2021 dated
31.03.2021
D 60 days ; 60 days E None of the above Answer: C
1379. As per our Customer Rights Policy, bank will acknowledge all formal complaints (including
complaints lodged through electronic means) within ______working days and work to resolve it
within a reasonable period, not exceeding ______ days (including the time for escalation and
examination of the complaint by the highest ranking internal official responsible for grievance
redressal). Circular CCC 02/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A two ; 15 days B three ; 15 days C two ; 21 days
D three ; 21 days E None of the above Answer: B
1380. Accidental death insurance of Rs. ______ is available to primary card holder under Rupay
Platinum Debit Cards. Circular DBD 66/2021 dated 16.11.2021
D Rs. 2.50 lacs E None of the above Answer: C
1381. Accidental death insurance of Rs. ______ is available to primary card holder under Rupay Select
Debit Cards(Card Type- SI). Circular DBD 66/2021 dated 16.11.2021
A Rs. 2.00 lacs B Rs. 2.50 lacs C Rs. 5 lacs
1382. MMID (Mobile Money Identifier) is a ______digit unique number issued by Banks Circular DBD
61/2021 dated 10.11.2021
D 10-digit E None of the above Answer: C
1383. With the increasing use of digital channels for undertaking various banking and financial
149
transactions and as per regulatory guidelines, the limits of IMPS have been revised for P2A type
of transactions only. Revised upper limit of IMPS through IBS / MBS will be Rs. ______ per
transaction. Circular DBD 61/2021 dated 10.11.2021
Page

D Rs. 10 lakh E None of the above Answer: C

1384. Revised upper limit of IMPS through Branches (Transfer mode) for P2A type of transactions only
will be Rs. ______ per transaction. Circular DBD 61/2021 dated 10.11.2021
A Rs. 50,000/- B Rs. 1 lakh C Rs. 2 lakh
D Rs. 5 lakh E None of the above Answer: D
1385. Our bank has launched Virtual Debit Card which can be used for E Comm transactions at all
merchant sites through Second factor authentication (OTP). The per day limit for E Comm
transactions through Virtual Debit Card will be Rs. ______. Circular DBD 55/2021 dated 07.10.2021
A Rs. 40,000 B Rs. 50,000 C Rs. 60,000
D Rs. 70,000 E None of the above Answer: C
1386. Under E- surveillance System at Bank’s ATMs/BNAs/e-Lobbies/Sites, Images and Video for
Verification locally as well on cloud should be stored upto ______ days. Images and Video
footages related to any incident detected/deterred should be stored beyond this period and till
the closure of the case. Circular DBD 50/2021 dated 07.09.2021
1387. Our Bank is offering Cash@POS facility at all designated Merchant Establishments. As per RBI
guidelines, the revised limits for Cash@POS transactions will be Rs. ______ per transaction
within the overall monthly withdrawal limit of Rs. ______. Circular DBD 49/2021 dated 07.09.2021
D Rs. 5,000 ; Rs. 10,000 E None of the above Answer: C
1388. Using Cash@POS facility, all Debit/Pre paid Card holders can withdraw cash by swiping their
card at POS terminal at all designated merchant establishments. Now, as per RBI guidelines, the
revised limits for Cash@POS transactions will be Rs. ______per transaction within the overall
monthly withdrawal limit of Rs. ______. Circular DBD 48/2021 dated 06.09.2021
D Rs. 5,000 ; Rs. 10,000 E None of the above Answer: C
1389. Under VISA Classic Debit Cards with International usage / acceptance facility, ATM cash
withdrawal limit will be Rs. ______ and Transaction Limit for POS +Ecomm will be Rs. ______.
Circular DBD 48/2021 dated 06.09.2021
D Rs. 4,000 ; Rs. 80,000 E None of the above Answer: B
1390. Under VISA Classic Debit Cards with International usage / acceptance facility Card issuance
Charge will be Rs. ______ and annual maintainance charge will be Rs. ______ exclusive of
taxes. Circular DBD 48/2021 dated 06.09.2021
A Nil ; Rs. 150 B Rs. 250 ; Rs. 150 C Rs. 500 ; Rs. 200
D Rs. 250 ; Rs. 150 E None of the above Answer: A
1391. Under VISA Gold Debit Cards with International usage / acceptance facility, ATM cash withdrawal
limit will be Rs. ______ and Transaction Limit for POS +Ecomm will be Rs. ______. Circular DBD
48/2021 dated 06.09.2021
A Rs. 50,000 ; Rs. B Rs. 60,000 ; Rs. C Rs. 60,000 ; Rs.
1,00,000 1,25,000 1,00,000
D Rs. 50,000 ; Rs. E None of the above Answer: D
1,25,000
1392. Under VISA Gold Cards with International usage / acceptance facility Card issuance Charge will
be Rs. ______ and annual maintainance charge will be Rs. ______ exclusive of taxes. Circular
DBD 48/2021 dated 06.09.2021
D Rs. 250 ; Rs. 150 E None of the above Answer: B
1393. Under VISA Signature Debit Cards with International usage / acceptance facility, ATM cash
withdrawal limit will be Rs. ______ and Transaction Limit for POS +Ecomm will be Rs. ______.
150

1,00,000 1,25,000 1,00,000
Page

1,25,000
1394. Under VISA Signature Cards with International usage / acceptance facility, Card issuance Charge
will be Rs. ______ and annual maintainance charge will be Rs. ______ exclusive of taxes.
D Rs. 250 ; Rs. 150 E None of the above Answer: C
1395. Under RuPay Platinum Internationa Debit Cards, ATM cash withdrawal limit will be Rs. ______
and Transaction Limit for POS +Ecomm will be Rs. ______. Circular DBD 48/2021 dated 06.09.2021
1,00,000 1,25,000 1,00,000
1,25,000
1396. Under RuPay Platinum Internationa Debit Cards, Card issuance Charge will be Rs. ______ and
annual maintainance charge will be Rs. ______ exclusive of taxes. Circular DBD 48/2021 dated
06.09.2021
D Rs. 250 ; Rs. 150 E None of the above Answer: D
1397. Under RuPay JCB and RuPay Select Internationa Debit Cards, ATM cash withdrawal limit will be
Rs. ______ and Transaction Limit for POS +Ecomm will be Rs. ______. Circular DBD 48/2021 dated
06.09.2021
1,00,000 1,25,000 1,00,000
1,25,000
1398. Under RuPay JCB Internationa Debit Cards, Card issuance Charge will be Rs. ______ and
annual maintainance charge will be Rs. ______ exclusive of taxes Circular DBD 48/2021 dated
06.09.2021
D Rs. 250 ; Rs. 150 E None of the above Answer: B
1399. Under RuPay Select Internationa Debit Cards, Card issuance Charge will be Rs. ______ and
annual maintainance charge will be Rs. ______ exclusive of taxes Circular DBD 48/2021 dated
06.09.2021
D Rs. 500 ; Rs. 150 E None of the above Answer: D
1400. Contactless Transaction Limit under VISA Classic, VISA Gold, VISA Signature and RuPay
Platinum International Debit Cards will be Rs. ______. Circular DBD 48/2021 dated 06.09.2021
A Rs. 2,000 B Rs. 5,000 C Rs. 3,000
D Rs. 6,000 E None of the above Answer: B
1401. Under Cardless cash withdrawal (Cash @ PNB), a ______digit random number( Transaction
reference number) will be generated automatically after submission of Cardless Cash
Withdrawal request through Internet Banking or PNBOne. Circular DBD 26/2021 dated 20.05.2021
D 16-digit E None of the above Answer: C
1402. Customer can set the ______digit TPIN for every reference number under Cardless cash
withdrawal. Circular DBD 26/2021 dated 20.05.2021
D 10-digit E None of the above Answer: A
1403. Cardless Cash Withdrawal is a service which enables customer to withdraw cash without
holding any physical or virtual card. Maximum amount limit under Cardless cash withdrawal
(Cash @ PNB) is Rs. ______ in a day Circular DBD 26/2021 dated 20.05.2021
A Rs. 1000 B Rs. 2000 C Rs. 5000
151
D Rs. 10000 E None of the above Answer: D

1404. Minimum amount for cardless cash withdrawal is Rs. ______. Circular DBD 26/2021 dated
20.05.2021
Page
A Rs. 1000 B Rs. 2000 C Rs. 5000

D Rs. 10000 E None of the above Answer: A

1405. Customer can only make maximum ______ withdrawals in a day for Cardless cash withdrawal by
the customer, irrespective whether reference number generated through Internet Banking or
PNBOne. Circular DBD 26/2021 dated 20.05.2021
A Three B Four C Five
D no limit E None of the above Answer: C
1406. The transaction reference number and TPIN for Cardless cash withdrawal are valid for ______
only. Circular DBD 26/2021 dated 20.05.2021
A 15 minutes B 30 minutes C 1 hours
D 2 hours E None of the above Answer: D
1407. As per our bank's Pre-Paid Instrument Policy, Bank can issue PPIs for facilitating the purchase
of goods and services from a particular entity only.Cash withdrawal shall not be allowed in such
types of PPIs. This type of PPIs are called ______. Circular DBD 24/2021 dated 10.05.2021
A Closed system PPIs B Semi-closed system PPIs C Opened system PPIs
D Semi-opened system PPIs E None of the above Answer: A
1408. As per our bank's Pre-Paid Instrument Policy, Bank can issue PPIs for facilitating the purchase
of goods and services, including financial services, remittance facilities, etc., at a group of
clearly identified merchant locations / establishments which have a specific contract with the
bank to accept the PPIs as payment instruments. This type of PPIs are called ______. Circular
DBD 24/2021 dated 10.05.2021
A Closed system PPIs B Semi-closed system PPIs C Opened system PPIs
D Semi-opened system PPIs E None of the above Answer: B
1409. Under Semi-closed System Pre-Paid Instrument, PPIs up to Rs.10,000/- by accepting minimum
details of the PPI holder, The amount loaded in such PPIs during any month shall not exceed
Rs.______ and the total amount loaded during the financial year shall not exceed Rs.______.
A Rs.5,000/- ; Rs.50,000/- B Rs.10,000/- ; C Rs.15,000/- ;
Rs.1,00,000/- Rs.1,50,000/-
D Rs.20,000/- ; E None of the above Answer: B
Rs.2,00,000/-
1410. Under Semi-closed System Pre-Paid Instrument, PPIs upto Rs.10,000/- by accepting minimum
details of the PPI holder shall be converted into KYC compliant semi-closed PPIs within a period
of ______ from the date of issue of PPI, failing which no further credit shall be allowed in such
PPIs. Circular DBD 24/2021 dated 10.05.2021
1411. Open System Pre-Paid Instruments (PPIs) will be issued after completing KYC of the PPI holder.
The amount outstanding in Open System PPIs shall not exceed Rs.______at any point of time.
A Rs.1,00,000/- B Rs.1,50,000/- C Rs.2,00,000/-
D Rs.1,50,000/- E None of the above Answer: A
1412. Prepaid Gift instruments shall not be reloadable and no cash withdrawal or funds transfer shall
be permitted from such instruments. Maximum value of each prepaid gift instrument shall not
exceed Rs.______. Circular DBD 24/2021 dated 10.05.2021
A Rs.5,000/- B Rs.10,000/- C Rs.20,000/-
D Rs.25,000/- E None of the above Answer: B
1413. A maximum of ______ gift instruments per calendar year to individuals can be issued. There is
no limit for issuance of Gift cards to corporate. Circular DBD 24/2021 dated 10.05.2021
A 5 B 10 C 20
1414. The facility of cross-border outward transactions through prepaid instrument shall be provided
152
only on explicit request of the PPI holders and shall apply a per transaction limit not exceeding
Rs.______, while per month limit shall not exceed Rs. ______ for such crossborder transactions.
Page
A Rs.10,000/- ; Rs. B Rs.15,000/- ; Rs. C Rs.20,000/- ; Rs.

50,000/- 60,000/- 50,000/-

D Rs.20,000/- ; Rs. E None of the above Answer: A
60,000/-
1415. Pre-Paid Instrument (PPI) holder will be cautioned, at reasonable intervals, during the ______
days period prior to expiry of the validity period of the PPI. The caution advice shall be sent by
SMS / e-mail. Circular DBD 24/2021 dated 10.05.2021
1416. Card Verification Value (CVV) is a ______ digit number printed (usually) on the reverse/back side
of the card& is used for validation of online transactions. Circular DBD 24/2021 dated 10.05.2021
D Six E None of the above Answer: A
1417. PIN of a Card is a ______ digit code/ number referred to as the Personal Identification Number
(PIN) which is assigned by the Bank to the cardholder for validation of ATM/ POS transactions as
second factor of authentication (2FA). Circular DBD 24/2021 dated 10.05.2021
D Six E None of the above Answer: B
1418. OTP is a ______ digit dynamic PIN provided to the customer for authentication of eCommerce
transactions which is valid for one transaction and for a specific period of time. Circular DBD
24/2021 dated 10.05.2021
D Six E None of the above Answer: D
1419. At present bank is issuing a Open loop full KYC pre paid instrument in the form of physical card
(Reloadable) in the name of PNB Suvidha Card with per day limit of Rs. ______. Circular DBD
24/2021 dated 10.05.2021
A Rs. 10000 B Rs. 10000 C Rs. 25000
D Rs. 50000 E None of the above Answer: C
1420. At present bank is issuing a Semi closed instrument in the form of physical card in the name of
PNB Uphaar Card with per day limit of Rs. ______. It is non re loadable in nature . Circular DBD
24/2021 dated 10.05.2021
A Rs. 10000 B Rs. 10000 C Rs. 25000
1421. At present bank is issuing a co branded pre paid cards for corporate as Corporate card
(reloadable) in the name of PNB Kite with per day limit of Rs. ______. Circular DBD 24/2021 dated
10.05.2021
A Rs. 10000 B Rs. 10000 C Rs. 25000
D Rs. 50000 E None of the above Answer: C
1422. At present bank is issuing a co branded pre paid Gift card (use & throw, non reloadable) in the
name of PNB Kite with per day limit of Rs. ______. Circular DBD 24/2021 dated 10.05.2021
A Rs. 10000 B Rs. 10000 C Rs. 25000
1423. Non personalized Debit Cards (Insta cards to be issued by branches) would be issued within
______ after receipt of application from customer. Circular DBD 23/2021 dated 10.05.2021
A 100 minutes B 15 minutes C 20 minutes
D 30 minutes E None of the above Answer: D
1424. Personalized Debit Cards would be delivered at customer's registered address within ______ at
metro locations and ______ at non-metro locations. Circular DBD 23/2021 dated 10.05.2021
A 5 working days ; 10 B 7 working days ; 15 C 10 working days ; 15
working days working days working days
D 15 working days ; 15 E None of the above Answer: B
working days
153
1425. Maximum of ______accounts held in the same name and same capacity can be linked to a Debit
card Circular DBD 23/2021 dated 10.05.2021
A 2 B 3 C 4
Page

1426. Any Debit card holder can get ______ more Debit cards in the name of his / her spouse and
dependent parents and children not below 18 years old. Debit card will be linked to the
cardholder`s main account. Circular DBD 23/2021 dated 10.05.2021
A 2 B 3 C 4
1427. Mobile banking user id would be automatically disabled if the user has not logged in once in
______ days. Circular DBD 22/2021 dated 10.05.2021
1428. Transaction password of Mobile banking has expiry period of ______ days Circular DBD 22/2021
dated 10.05.2021
1429. Session expiry period (idle time during usage)for Mobile banking is ______ minutes Circular DBD
22/2021 dated 10.05.2021
A 5 minutes B 6 minutes C 7 minutes
D 8 minutes E None of the above Answer: D
1430. The minimum length of transaction password under Mobile banking is ______ alphanumeric
characters and maximum is ______ characters. It is mandatory to use one or more special
characters in the password. Circular DBD 22/2021 dated 10.05.2021
A six ; 21 B six ; 28 C eight ; 21
D eight ; 28 E None of the above Answer: B
1431. There shall be maximum ______ attempts for transaction after which the transaction password
of Mobile banking shall get automatically disabled. Circular DBD 22/2021 dated 10.05.2021
A 3 B 4 C 5
1432. MPIN is mandatory for Mobile Banking App login purpose. There shall be maximum ______
attempts after which MPIN will be disabled. Circular DBD 22/2021 dated 10.05.2021
A 3 B 4 C 5
1433. Bank's UPI App (BHIM PNB) requires a ______digit Numeric Login Password to login. Circular
DBD 22/2021 dated 10.05.2021
A four-digit B five-digit C six-digit
D eight-digit E None of the above Answer: C
1434. MPIN is ______ digit number set by the user to get access to Mobile Banking Services. Circular
DBD 22/2021 dated 10.05.2021
A 4 B 4 C 6
1435. Internet banking user id would be automatically disabled if the user has not logged in once in
______ days. Circular DBD 21/2021 dated 10.05.2021
1436. Transaction password of Internet banking has expiry period of ______ days Circular DBD 21/2021
dated 10.05.2021
1437. Session expiry period (idle time during usage) for Internet banking is ______ minutes for retail
users and ______ minutes for corporate users respectively. Circular DBD 21/2021 dated
10.05.2021
A 5 minutes ; 8 minutes B 6 minutes ; 8 minutes C 6 minutes ; 10 minutes
D 8 minutes ; 10 minutes E None of the above Answer: D
154
1438. The minimum length of password for Internet banking is ______ alphanumeric characters and it
is mandatory to use one or more special characters in the password. Circular DBD 21/2021 dated
10.05.2021
Page
A four-digit B five-digit C six-digit

D eight-digit E None of the above Answer: C

1439. There shall be maximum ______ attempts for sign on and ______ attempts for transaction after
which the login and transaction password of Internet banking respectively shall get
automatically disabled. Circular DBD 21/2021 dated 10.05.2021
A 3 ; 3 B 5 ; 3 C 5 ; 5
D 3 ; 5 E None of the above Answer: C
1440. Under Internet banking, Bank had introduced Cooling Period of ______ hours for performing
transaction after addition/modification of beneficiary. Circular DBD 21/2021 dated 10.05.2021
A half an hour B 1 hour C 1 and half an hours
D 2 hours E None of the above Answer: D
1441. For transactions done using QUICK TRANSFER option (within PNB & using MMID) through
PNBOne, Per transaction amount is restricted to Rs. ______ with Maximum ______ transactions
in a day. Circular DBD 21/2021 dated 10.05.2021
A Rs. 10000/- ; 3 B Rs. 10000/- ; 4 C Rs. 25000/- ; 3
D Rs. 25000/- ; 4 E None of the above Answer: A
1442. RBI released guidelines regarding “Processing of e-mandates for recurring transactions”
wherein it was decided to increase the maximum limit for Additional Factor of Authentication
(AFA) relaxation from Rs. 2,000/- to Rs. ______ per transaction, with effect from January 1, 2021.
Circular CCD 09/2021 dated 09.11.2021
A Rs. 2000/- B Rs. 5000/- C Rs. 6000/-
1443. The Resolution Plan under Resolution Framework 2.0 for Credit Card accounts will be
implemented within maximum ______ days from the date of invocation. Circular CCD 04/2021
dated 28.05.2021
1444. No restructuring under Resolution Framework 2.0 for Credit Card accounts will be done in those
Credit Card accounts where the dues outstanding ,as on date of invocation, is less than
Rs.______. Circular CCD 04/2021 dated 28.05.2021
A Rs. 2000/- B Rs. 5000/- C Rs. 6000/-
1445. The finance charges on restructured Credit Card accounts will be levied @ ______% per annum
plus applicable GST under Resolution Framework 2.0. Circular CCD 04/2021 dated 28.05.2021
A 6%. B 8%. C 12%.
1446. In case of Credit Card accounts resolved under under Resolution Framework 2.0, half of the
provisions may be written back upon the borrower paying at least ______% of the residual debt
without slipping into NPA post implementation of the plan, and the remaining half may be written
back upon the Cardholder paying another ______% of the residual debt without slipping into
NPA subsequently. Circular CCD 04/2021 dated 28.05.2021
A 10% ; 10% B 20% ; 10% C 20% ; 20%
1447. At the request of primary credit card holder, maximum ______ add-on cards can be issued only
to spouse, mother, father, major son and daughter (unmarried) of the primary cardholder.
A 0ne B two C three
D four E None of the above Answer: B
1448. The age of add on credit card holder should be between 18 and ______ years. Circular CCD
03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
155
1449. Credit Cards to individuals are issued on the basis of minimum annual income with documentary
evidence. Minimum Annual Income for PNB customers will be Rs.______ for VISA Classic &
Rupay Platinum Credit Card. Circular CCD 03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
Page
A Rs. 2,50,000/- B Rs. 3,50,000/- C Rs. 5,00,000/-

D Rs. 7,50,000/- E None of the above Answer: A

1450. Minimum Annual Income for PNB customers will be Rs.______ for VISA Gold Credit Card.
A Rs. 2,50,000/- B Rs. 3,50,000/- C Rs. 5,00,000/-
D Rs. 7,50,000/- E None of the above Answer: B
1451. Minimum Annual Income for PNB customers will be Rs.______ for VISA Platinum, Rupay Select&
PNB Millennial Credit Card. Circular CCD 03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
A Rs. 2,50,000/- B Rs. 3,50,000/- C Rs. 5,00,000/-
D Rs. 7,50,000/- E None of the above Answer: C
1452. Minimum Annual Income for PNB customers will be Rs.______ for VISA Signature Credit Card.
A Rs. 2,50,000/- B Rs. 3,50,000/- C Rs. 5,00,000/-
D Rs. 7,50,000/- E None of the above Answer: D
1453. Minimum Annual Income for non PNB customers will be Rs.______ for VISA Classic & Rupay
Platinum Credit Card. Circular CCD 03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
A Rs. 2,50,000/- B Rs. 3,50,000/- C Rs. 5,00,000/-
1454. Minimum Annual Income for PNB customers will be Rs.______ for VISA Gold Credit Card.
A Rs. 2,50,000/- B Rs. 3,50,000/- C Rs. 5,00,000/-
1455. Minimum Annual Income for PNB customers will be Rs.______ for VISA Platinum, Rupay Select&
PNB Millennial Credit Card. Circular CCD 03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
A Rs. 2,50,000/- B Rs. 3,50,000/- C Rs. 5,00,000/-
1456. Minimum Annual Income for PNB customers will be Rs.______ for VISA Signature Credit Card.
A Rs. 2,50,000/- B Rs. 3,50,000/- C Rs. 5,00,000/-
D Rs. 7,50,000/- E None of the above Answer: D
1457. PNB VISA Classic Credit Cards are issued for credit limits ranging from Rs.______. Circular CCD
03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
A Rs.10,000 to Rs.1,00,000 B Rs.50,000 to Rs.5,00,000 C Rs.50,000 to
Rs.10,00,000
D Rs.1,00,000 to E None of the above Answer: A
Rs.10,00,000
1458. PNB VISA Gold credit cards are issued with credit limit of Rs.______. Circular CCD 03/2021 dated
25.05.2021
Rs.10,00,000
D Rs.1,00,000 to E None of the above Answer: B
Rs.10,00,000
1459. PNB VISA Platinum Credit Cards is a premium category card issued with credit limit of
Rs.10,00,000
D Rs.1,00,000 to E None of the above Answer: C
Rs.10,00,000
1460. PNB VISA Signature Credit Cards are issued for credit limits ranging from ______. Circular CCD
03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
A Rs.1,25,000 to B Rs.1,25,000 to C Rs.1,00,000 to
Rs.15,00,000 Rs.10,00,000 Rs.15,00,000
156

Rs.10,00,000
1461. Purchase transactions upto Rs ______ can be made through the contactless card-Wave n Pay. It
Page
is almost twice as fast as conventional Credit Card purchases because no signature or PIN

verification isrequired Circular CCD 03/2021 dated 25.05.2021

A Rs 2000/- B Rs 3000/- C Rs 5000/-
D Rs 10000/- E None of the above Answer: C
1462. Maximum 10 Contactless transactions can be done in a day through contactless card- Wave n
Pay with per day maximum limit of Rs.______. Circular CCD 03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
A Rs.10000/- B Rs.20000/- C Rs.30000/-
1463. VISA Signature Credit Cards are issued with credit limit of Rs ______. Circular CCD 03/2021 dated
25.05.2021
Rs.15,00,000 Rs.10,00,000 Rs.15,00,000
Rs.10,00,000
1464. Free credit period for minimum 20 days and maximum upto _____ days is available on
purchases for VISA Credit Card holder. Circular CCD 03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
1465. Lost Card Liability Insurance of VISA Platinum Credit Cards will be upto Rs.______after reporting
of the loss of card. Circular CCD 03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
A Rs.10,000/- B Rs.20,000/- C Rs.25,000/-
D Rs.50,000/- E None of the above Answer: D
1466. Under PNB VISA credit card, Cash withdrawal limits are currently allowed ______% of the card
limit and out of the cash limit, single Transaction Limit will be ______% of the Available Cash
Limit. Circular CCD 03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
A 20% ; 25% B 20% ; 40% C 20% ; 50%
1467. Current limits of PNB RuPay Platinum Credit Card is ______. Circular CCD 03/2021 dated
25.05.2021
A Minimum: Rs. 25,000/- B Minimum: Rs. 50,000/- C Minimum: Rs. 25,000/-
and Maximum: and Maximum: and Maximum:
Rs.10,00,000/- Rs.10,00,000/- Rs.5,00,000/-
D Minimum: Rs. 50,000/- E None of the above Answer: C
and Maximum:
Rs.5,00,000/-
1468. Under PNB Rupay Platinum credit card, Cash withdrawal limits are currently allowed ______% of
the card limit and out of the cash limit, single Transaction Limit will be ______% of the available
Cash Limit. Circular CCD 03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
A 20% ; 25% B 20% ; 40% C 20% ; 50%
1469. Under PNB RuPay Platinum Credit Card, Lost Card Liability will be upto Rs.______ after
reporting loss of card to the bank. Circular CCD 03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
A Rs.25,000/- B Rs.50,000/- C Rs.1,00,000/-
D Rs.1,50,000/- E None of the above Answer: B
1470. Current limits of Global RuPay Select Credit Card/PNB millennial is ______. Circular CCD 03/2021
dated 25.05.2021
A Minimum: Rs. 25,000/- B Minimum: Rs. 50,000/- C Minimum: Rs. 25,000/-
and Maximum: and Maximum: and Maximum:
Rs.10,00,000/- Rs.10,00,000/- Rs.5,00,000/-
D Minimum: Rs. 50,000/- E None of the above Answer: B
and Maximum:
Rs.5,00,000/-
157
1471. Under PNB Rupay Select credit card/PNB millennial, Cash withdrawal limits are currently allowed
______% of the card limit and out of the cash limit, single Transaction Limit will be ______% of
the Available Cash Limit. Circular CCD 03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
Page
A 20% ; 25% B 20% ; 40% C 20% ; 50%


1472. Under PNB Rupay Select credit card/PNB millennial, Lost Card Liability will be upto Rs.______
after reporting loss of card to the bank. Circular CCD 03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
A Rs.25,000/- B Rs.50,000/- C Rs.1,00,000/-
1473. The reward points on PNB credit cards will be expired if not redeemed within ______ years from
the date of accrual. Circular CCD 03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
1474. The Applicants that holds either an NRE/NRO/ or FCNR fixed deposit Account with PNB in their
own name are eligible under the Scheme For PNB Global Credit Card For NRIs. The minimum
amount held in NRE/NRO/ or FCNR should be equivalent of ______. Circular CCD 03/2021 dated
25.05.2021
A INR 50000 B INR 100000 C INR 200000
D INR 500000 E None of the above Answer: B
1475. Card Credit limit for NRIs under VISA Gold/Platinum variants will be ______% of the amount of
deposit with PNB. Circular CCD 03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
A 60% B 70% C 75%
1476. Minimum Card Credit limit of PNB VISA Gold/Platinum Credit Card for NRIs VISA Gold/Platinum
variants will be ______ and maximu m will be ______. Circular CCD 03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
A INR 50000/- ; INR B INR 80000/- ; INR C INR 100000/- ; INR
500000/- 500000/- 500000/-
D INR 80000/- ; INR E None of the above Answer: B
1000000/-
1477. Under the scheme, PNB Credit Card By Marking Lien On Term Deposit Held With Bank, Card
Credit Limit will be set up in multiples of ______ on the lower side of ______% of Term Deposit
amount Circular CCD 03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
A Rs. 1000/- ; 60% B Rs. 1000/- ; 80% C Rs. 2000/- ; 60%
D Rs. 2000/- ; 80% E None of the above Answer: B
1478. Under the Scheme For Credit Cards To Housing Loan Customers of PNB, where amount of
housing loan Sanctioned is between Rs. 2,00,000 to Rs. 5,00,000, VISA Classic Credit card will be
issued and pre- approved Card limit will be ______. Circular CCD 03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
A 5% of HL amount B 10% of HL amount C 15% of HL amount
D 25% of HL amount E None of the above Answer: B
housing loan Sanctioned is between Rs 5,00,001 to Rs. 20,00,000, VISA Gold / Rupay Platinum
Credit card will be issued and pre- approved Card limit will be 10% of HL amount subject to
maximum of Rs.______. Circular CCD 03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
D Rs.10.00 lac E None of the above Answer: A
housing loan Sanctioned is Above Rs.20,00,000, VISA Gold / Rupay Platinum Credit card will be
issued and pre- approved Card limit will be ______% of HL amount subject to maximum of
Rs.______ or as per recommendation of the branch based on the value of relationship with the
bank. Circular CCD 03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
A 5% ; Rs.2.00 lacs B 5% ; Rs.3.00 lacs C 10% ; Rs.2.00 lacs
D 10% ; Rs.3.00 lacs E None of the above Answer: B
1481. Under the Scheme For Credit Card To Visually Impaired Persons, Card Credit Limit will be Rs.
______. Circular CCD 03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
A Minimum: Rs.5,000/- , B Minimum: Rs.5,000/- , C Minimum: Rs.10,000/- ,
158
Maximum: Rs.25,000/- Maximum: Rs.50,000/- Maximum: Rs.25,000/-

D Minimum: Rs.10,000/- , E None of the above Answer: C
Maximum: Rs.50,000/-
Page
1482. Under the Scheme For Credit Card To Visually Impaired Persons, Cash withdrawal limit will be

______% of card credit limit.Out of this cash limit, single Transaction Limit will be ______% of
the Available Cash Limit. Circular CCD 03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
A 20% ; 25% B 20% ; 40% C 20% ; 50%
1483. For Credit Cards to Individuals, drawing salary from their account maintained with PNB ,
Minimum net salary credited to account should be Rs.______& above per month. Circular CCD
03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
A Rs.20,000/- B Rs.25,000/- C Rs.30,000/-
D Rs.50,000/- E None of the above Answer: A
1484. For Credit Cards to Individuals, drawing salary from their account maintained with other than
PNB , Minimum net salary credited to account should be Rs.______& above per month. Circular
CCD 03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
A Rs.10000/- B Rs.20000/- C Rs.30000/-
1485. For Credit Cards to Individuals, drawing salary from their account maintained with PNB or any
other nationalized/private/ foreign bank, Card credit limit will be calculated as ______ times of
average of last six months net salary. The card limit for this scheme will be fixed at the lower
side of multiples of Rs. ______. Circular CCD 03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
A two ; Rs. 5000/- B three ; Rs. 5000/- C two ; Rs. 10000/-
D three ; Rs. 10000/- E None of the above Answer: A
1486. Maximum limit of Credit Card that can be sanctioned under salaried category will be Rs ______.
D Rs.10.00 lac E None of the above Answer: C
1487. The Clerical Staff of of sponsored RRBs of Amalgamated entity would be offered Credit Cards
with the maximum credit limits of Rs. ______ with cash Limit of Rs. ______. Circular CCD 03/2021
dated 25.05.2021
A Rs.1,00,000 ; Rs.20,000 B Rs.2,00,000 ; Rs. 40,000 C Rs.3,00,000 ; Rs.
60,000
D Rs.5,00,000 ; E None of the above Answer: A
Rs.1,00,000
1488. The Officers in JMG Scale-I of of sponsored RRBs of Amalgamated entity would be offered
Credit Cards with the maximum credit limits of Rs. ______ with cash Limit of Rs. ______. Circular
CCD 03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
60,000
D Rs.5,00,000 ; E None of the above Answer: B
Rs.1,00,000
1489. The Officers in MMG Scale-II & III of of sponsored RRBs of Amalgamated entity would be offered
CCD 03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
60,000
D Rs.5,00,000 ; E None of the above Answer: C
Rs.1,00,000
1490. The Officers in MMG Scale-IV & V of sponsored RRBs of Amalgamated entity would be offered
CCD 03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
60,000
D Rs.5,00,000 ; E None of the above Answer: D
159
Rs.1,00,000
1491. The Subordinate Staff of our Bank would be offered Credit Cards with the maximum credit limits
of Rs. ______ with cash Limit of Rs. ______. Circular CCD 03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
Page
A Rs. 15,000 ; Rs. 3,000 B Rs. 75,000 ; Rs. 15,000 C Rs. 1,50,000 ; Rs.
30,000

D Rs. 2,00,000 ; Rs. E None of the above Answer: A

40,000
1492. The Clerical Staff of our Bank would be offered Credit Cards with the maximum credit limits of
Rs. ______ with cash Limit of Rs. ______. Circular CCD 03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
A Rs. 15,000 ; Rs. 3,000 B Rs. 75,000 ; Rs. 15,000 C Rs. 1,50,000 ; Rs.
30,000
D Rs. 2,00,000 ; Rs. E None of the above Answer: B
40,000
1493. The Officers in JMG Scale-I of our Bank would be offered Credit Cards with the maximum credit
limits of Rs. ______ with cash Limit of Rs. ______. Circular CCD 03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
A Rs. 75,000 ; Rs. 15,000 B Rs. 1,50,000 ; Rs. C Rs. 2,00,000 ; Rs.
30,000 40,000
D Rs. 3,50,000 ; Rs. E None of the above Answer: B
70,000
1494. The Officers in MMG Scale-II & III of our Bank would be offered Credit Cards with the maximum
credit limits of Rs. ______ with cash Limit of Rs. ______. Circular CCD 03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
30,000 40,000
D Rs. 3,50,000 ; Rs. E None of the above Answer: C
70,000
1495. The Officers in SMG Scale-IV & V of our Bank would be offered Credit Cards with the maximum
credit limits of Rs. ______ with cash Limit of Rs. ______. Circular CCD 03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
30,000 40,000
D Rs. 3,50,000 ; Rs. E None of the above Answer: D
70,000
1496. Under Category of Corporate Credit Card with Individual Liability, Gold & Platinum Card will be
issued for minimum limit of Rs.______ and maximum upto Rs. ______ with ______% Cash limit.
A 50,000/- ; 5,00,000/- ; B 60,000/- ; 5,00,000/- ; C 40,000/- ; 4,00,000/- ;
20% 20% 20%
D 50,000/- ; 5,00,000/- ; E None of the above Answer: A
25%
1497. Under Category of Corporate Credit Card with Individual Liability, The applicant should have
minimum annual Income of Rs.______ for Gold & Platinum Card. Circular CCD 03/2021 dated
25.05.2021
A Rs.1,50,000 B Rs.2,50,000 C Rs.3,50,000
D Rs.5,00,000 E None of the above Answer: C
1498. Minimum annual income for Corporate Credit Card with Individual Liability should be Rs. ______
for Classic Credit Card and Rs. ______ for Gold Credit Card Circular dated
A Rs.1,00,000 ; B Rs.1,50,000 ; C Rs.2,00,000 ;
Rs.2,50,000 Rs.3,00,000 Rs.3,50,000
D Rs.2,50,000 ; E None of the above Answer: D
Rs.3,50,000
1499. For Corporate Enjoying Credit Exposure From The Bank, The maximum corporate card limit per
corporate for corporate card with corporate liability shall not exceed ______% of average
operating expenses of the previous three years. Circular CCD 03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
A 10% B 15% C 20%
1500. For Corporate not enjoying Credit Exposure from the Bank, Limit for corporate card with
corporate liability will be assessed based on the credit summations in the account of the
corporate i.e. ______% of average credit summations of previous two years with maximum
160
corporate credit card limit of Rs ______, whichever is lower. Circular CCD 03/2021 dated
25.05.2021
A 10% ; Rs 1.00 lakh B 20% ; Rs 1.00 lakh C 10% ; Rs 5.00 lakh
Page
D 20% ; Rs 5.00 lakh E None of the above Answer: D

1501. For Corporate having Deposit with the Bank, Limit for corporate card with corporate liability will
be assessed based on the TERM DEPOSIT/OTHER DEPOSITS pledged with bank i.e. Maximum
______% of the Term Deposit/Other deposits amount or Rs.50 lakh, whichever is lower. Circular
CCD 03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
A 75% ; Rs.25 lakh B 80% ; Rs.25 lakh C 75% ; Rs.50 lakh
D 80% ; Rs.50 lakh E None of the above Answer: D
1502. Normally the Corporate Credit cards limit per corporate on Corporate Credit Cards with
corporate liability is Rs.______. However, In the case of big corporate, exporters etc., who
frequently travel abroad higher limits can be considered on merits having a bearing on the
Working Capital Limit sanctioned to the Corporate by the bank subject to maximum of
A Rs.25,00,000/- ; B Rs.25,00,000/- ; C Rs.50,00,000/- ;
Rs.50,00,000/- Rs.1,00,00,000/- Rs.1,00,00,000/-
D Rs.50,00,000/- ; E None of the above Answer: C
Rs.10,00,00,000/-
1503. Under Corporate Credit Card with Corporate Liability (CCCL), Per employee/executive Credit
Card limit for the individual card holder within the overall Corporate Credit Card limit is ______
i.e. 0-40% of Corporate Credit Card limit, as agreed with the corporate. Circular CCD 03/2021
dated 25.05.2021
A Rs. 25,000 to B Rs. 50,000 to C Rs. 25,000 to
Rs.10,00,000/- Rs.10,00,000/- Rs.50,00,000/-
D Rs. 50,000 to E None of the above Answer: B
Rs.50,00,000/-
1504. Credit Cards can be issued to PNB staff members where the default amount as per CIBIL report
is up to Rs.______. Circular CCD 03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
A Rs.5,000/- B Rs.10,000/- C Rs.20,000/-
1505. Credit Cards can be issued to the customers (other than staff) where the default amount as per
CIBIL report is up to ______. Circular CCD 03/2021 dated 25.05.2021
A Rs.5,000/- B Rs.10,000/- C Rs.20,000/-
D Rs.25,000/- E None of the above Answer: A
1506. Credit Cardholders are allowed interest free credit period subject to certain terms & conditions.
The monthly statements are issued on prescribed dates allowing at least ______days period
from date of statement, to make payment. Circular CCD 02/2021 dated 12.05.2021
1507. Write-off of Credit Card will be done after ______ days from date of NPA for all those cases
which are in Loss category, Circular CCD 02/2021 dated 12.05.2021
1508. The Minimum limit of subscription for the Sovereign Gold Bond 2021-22 issued shall be ______
and maximum limit of subscription per fiscal year shall be ______ for individuals, ______ for
Hindu Undivided Family (HUF) and ______for Trusts and similar entities notified by the
Government from time to time. Circular GBD 95/2021 dated 22.10.2021
A one gram ; 2 kg ; 4 kg B one gram ; 4 kg ; 4 kg C one gram ; 5 kg ; 5
; 20kg ; 20kg kg ; 20kg
D one gram ; 5 kg ; 5 kg E None of the above Answer: B
; 25 kg
1509. The nominal value of Gold Bond 2021-2022 shall be in Indian Rupees fixed on the basis of simple
average of closing price of gold of 999 purity, published by the India Bullion and Jewelers
Association Limited, for the last ______ days of the week preceding the subscription period.
161
Circular GBD 95/2021 dated 22.10.2021

D 7 working days E None of the above Answer: A
Page
1510. The issue price of the Sovereign Gold Bond 2021-22 will be Rs.______ per gram less than the
nominal value to those investors applying online and the payment against the application is

made through digital mode. Circular GBD 95/2021 dated 22.10.2021

A Rs.25.00 B Rs.50.00 C Rs.75.00
D Rs.100.00 E None of the above Answer: B
1511. The interest on the Sovereign Gold Bond 2021-22 shall commence from the date of issue and
shall be paid at a fixed rate of ______ percent per annum on the nominal value of the bond.
D 5.00 percent E None of the above Answer: B
1512. All payments for Sovereign Gold Bond 2021-22 shall be accepted in Indian Rupees through cash
upto a maximum of Rs.______ or demand draft or cheque, or electronic banking. Circular GBD
95/2021 dated 22.10.2021
A Rs. 10,000/- B Rs. 20,000/- C Rs. 25,000/-
D Rs. 50,000/- E None of the above Answer: B
1513. The Sovereign Gold Bond 2021-22 shall be repayable on the expiration of______ years from the
date of the issue of the Bonds. Circular GBD 95/2021 dated 22.10.2021
1514. Premature redemption of Sovereign Gold Bond 2021-22 may be permitted after ______ from the
date of issue of Bonds and such repayments will be made on next interest payment date. Circular
GBD 95/2021 dated 22.10.2021
A 2nd year B 3rd year C 4th year
D 5th year E Fifth year Answer: D
1515. The commission for mobilizing subscription towards Sovereign Gold Bond 2021-22 shall be paid
at the rate of ______ % of the total subscription received by the receiving offices and receiving
offices shall share at least ______% of the commission so received with the agents or sub
agents for the business procured through them. Circular GBD 95/2021 dated 22.10.2021
A 1% ; 40% B 1% ; 50% C 2% ; 50%
1516. As per Circular no. PFRDA/2021/36/SUP-CRA/14 dated August 26, 2021; age of entry under NPS
will be ______ years. Circular dated
A 18-60 years B 18-65 years C 18-70 years
D 18-75 years E None of the above Answer: C
1517. As per revised guidelines on entry and exit under NPS, The Subscriber, joining NPS beyond the
age of 65 years, can exercise the choice of PF and Asset Allocation with the maximum equity
exposure of ______% and ______% under Auto and Active Choice respectively. Circular GBD
93/2021 dated 06.09.2021
A 10% ; 50% B 15% ; 50% C 15% ; 60%
1518. As per PFRDA (Exit and Withdrawal under NPS) (Amendment) Regulations, 2021 dt 14th June
2021, the provisions related to lump sum withdrawal have been modified for the benefit of
Subscribers. For Premature Exit i.e. Exit before 60 years/Superannuation, Limit for lump Sum
payment will be Rs. ______. Circular GBD 92/2021 dated 13.10.2021
A Rs. 2.5 lac B Rs. 5 lac C Rs. 7.5 lac
D Rs. 10 lac E None of the above Answer: A
2021, For Normal exit i.e. on 60 years / or beyond & on Superannuation, Limit for lump Sum
payment will be Rs. ______. Circular GBD 92/2021 dated 13.10.2021
2021,For exit due to Unfortunate Death of Subscriber, Limit for lump Sum payment will be Rs.
162
______. Circular GBD 92/2021 dated 13.10.2021

Page
1521. In case of Freedom Fighter Pensioner, the banks must ensure that a dependent pension is not

sanctioned to a spouse or a daughter of a freedom fighter if the spouse/daughter is already

employed in a Central or a State Government, Central/ State PSU or Local Body and income from
such job/activity exceeds ₹______. Circular GBD 84/2021 dated 20.09.2021
A ₹1,80,000/- per year or B ₹2,40,000/- per year or C ₹3,00,000/- per year or
₹15,000/- per month. ₹20,000/- per month. ₹25,000/- per month.
D ₹3,60,000/- per year or E None of the above Answer: B
₹30,000/- per month.
1522. In case of Freedom Fighter Pensioner, the banks must ensure that a dependent pension is not
sanctioned to a spouse or a daughter of a freedom fighter In case the spouse/daughter is
working in a private sector or having his/her own business/activity and income from such
job/activity exceeds ₹______. Circular GBD 84/2021 dated 20.09.2021
A ₹1,80,000/- per year or B ₹2,40,000/- per year or C ₹3,00,000/- per year or
₹15,000/- per month. ₹20,000/- per month. ₹25,000/- per month.
D ₹3,60,000/- per year or E None of the above Answer: B
₹30,000/- per month.
1523. Pension Paying Banks should compensate the pensioner for delay in crediting pension/arrears
thereof at a fixed interest rate of ______ percent per annum for the delay after the due date of
payment. Circular GBD 84/2021 dated 20.09.2021
D 10 percent E None of the above Answer: C
1524. The pensioners/family pensioners would be required to furnish a Life Certificate in November
each year. The Pensioners/Family Pensioners aged ______ years and above may submit their
Life certificate w.e.f 1st October of each year which would be valid till 30th November of the
Subsequent Year. Circular GBD 84/2021 dated 20.09.2021
1525. Unmarried dependent son/daughter (including widowed daughter) is entitled to get family
pension until he/she attains the age of ______ years or until he/she gets married or until he/she
starts earning his/her livelihood whichever is the earliest. Circular GBD 84/2021 dated 20.09.2021
1526. On attaining the age of ______ years an additional pension/family pension is payable to the
pensioners/family pensioners covered under CCS(Pension) Rules 1972, from the 1st day of the
month in which the date of birth falls. Circular GBD 84/2021 dated 20.09.2021
1527. A pensioner who produces a life certificate in the prescribed form signed by which of the
following person is exempted from personal appearance? Circular GBD 84/2021 dated 20.09.2021
A A person exercising the B A Registrar or Sub- C A Police Officer not below
powers of a Magistrate Registrar appointed under the rank of Sub-Inspector
under the Criminal Indian Registration Act in–charge of a Police
Procedure code Station
1528. A pensioner/family pensioner gets exemption from personal appearance subject to production of
Life Certificate signed by the ______. Circular GBD 84/2021 dated 20.09.2021
A A Class-I officer of the B A Head of Village C A Member of Parliament,
Reserve Bank of India, an Panchayat, Gram of State legislatures or of
officer (including Grade II Panchayat, Gaon legislatures of Union
officer) of the State Bank Panchayat or an Executive Territory
of India or of its subsidiary Committee of a Village Governments/Administrati
ons.
163

1529. Pension will be credited to pensioner’s account during the last ______ of the month except for
the month of March for which pension is to be credited on or after first working day of April.
Page

A three working days B four working days C five working days

D seven working days E None of the above Answer: B

1530. NACH mandate dose not provide which of the following benefits to nodal officers? Circular GBD
53/2021 dated 04.07.2021
A NIL/Reduced instances of B Timely investment due to C Eliminates the visit by
fund returns due to non- timely remittance of funds. Nodal offices/POPs to
availability of transaction their Bank for transfer of
id/amount funds and issue of
mismatch/expired cheque is avoided.
transactions.
1531. Which of the following is incorect in respect of maximum limit of subscription per fiscal year
under Sovereign Gold Bond 2021-22? Circular GBD 35/2021 dated 15.05.2021
A 4 kg for individuals B 4 kgs for Hindu Undivided C 20 kg for trusts
Family (HUF)
1532. PFRDA has announced the enablement of contribution by NPS Subscribers into D Remit by
using Immediate Payment System (IMPS), the instant fund transfer facility provided by National
Payment Corporation of India (NPCI). The minimum value of contribution under D Remit should
be equal to or above Rs.______. Circular GBD 32/2021 dated 23.04.2021
A Rs.500/- B Rs.1000/- C Rs.1500/-
D Rs.2000/- E None of the above Answer: a
1533. Agency banks would be eligible to claim agency commission for pension transactions at the rate
of ₹ ______ per transaction for Physical Receipts and ₹ ______ per transaction for e-mode
Receipts. Circular GBD 30/2021 dated 19.04.2021
A ₹ 30/- ₹ 6/- B ₹ 40/- ₹ 6/- C ₹ 40/- ₹ 9/-
D ₹ 50/- ₹ 10/- E None of the above Answer: C
of ₹ ______ per transaction only when the entire work relating to disbursement of pension
including pension calculation is attended to by them. Circular GBD 30/2021 dated 19.04.2021
A ₹ 25 B ₹ 50 C ₹ 75
D ₹ 100 E None of the above Answer: C
1535. Other than pension payment would be eligible for payment of agency commission @ ______
w.e.f. July 1, 2019. Circular GBD 30/2021 dated 19.04.2021
A 5.0 paise per ₹ 100/- B 5.5 paise per ₹ 100/- C 6.0 paise per ₹ 100/-
turnover turnover turnover
D 6.5 paise per ₹ 100/- E None of the above Answer: D
turnover
of ₹______ per transaction only when the entire work relating to disbursement of pension
including pension calculation is attended to by them. Circular GBD 30/2021 dated 19.04.2021
A ₹ 60 B ₹ 65 C ₹ 70
D ₹ 75 E None of the above Answer: D
1537. If the work relating to pension calculations, etc., is attended to by the concerned Government
Department / Treasury, Agency banks would be eligible to claim agency commission for pension
transactions at the rate of ₹______ per transaction Circular GBD 30/2021 dated 19.04.2021
turnover
1538. If the banks are required only to credit the amount of pension to the pensioners' accounts
maintained with them by a single
debit to Government Account, Agency banks would be eligible to claim agency commission for
164
pension transactions at the rate of ₹______ per transaction Circular GBD 30/2021 dated 19.04.2021
Page

turnover
1539. The number of pension transactions eligible for payment of agency commission should not
exceed ______ per pensioner per year. This includes one monthly credit for payment of net
pension and a maximum of ______ per year for payment of arrears on account of increase in
dearness relief, if applicable. Circular GBD 30/2021 dated 19.04.2021
A 14 ; two B 16 ; two C 14 ; three
D 16 ; three E None of the above Answer: A
1540. Agency commission is payable to an agency bank at the full rate provided the transactions are
handled by the bank at all stages. Where, however, the work is shared between two banks, the
agency commission is shared between the banks in the proportion of ______. Circular GBD
30/2021 dated 19.04.2021
A 65:35 B 70:30 C 75:25
D 80:20 E None of the above Answer: C
1541. The agency commission is payable to the agency banks @ ______ , in cases where the
transactions are handled by the bank at all stages, i.e., up to the stage of dispatch of scrolls and
challans / cheques to the Pay and Accounts Offices, and treasuries/sub-treasuries. Circular GBD
30/2021 dated 19.04.2021
A 25% B 50% C 75%
1542. The agency commission is payable to the agency banks @ ______ , of the applicable rate, where
the dealing branch is required to account for the transaction by passing on the scrolls and
documents to the local/nearest branch of Reserve Bank of India or by any agency bank
conducting government business. Circular GBD 30/2021 dated 19.04.2021
A 25% B 50% C 75%
1543. The agency commission is payable to the agency banks @ ______ , of the applicable rate, in the
case of agency branch which received the scrolls and documents from dealing branches of
other banks and is responsible for the accounting of these transactions and dispatching of the
scrolls and documents to the Pay and Accounts Offices, Treasuries, etc. Circular GBD 30/2021
dated 19.04.2021
A 25% B 50% C 75%
1544. Which of the following government business transactions undertaken by agency banks is/are
not eligible for agency commission? Circular GBD 30/2021 dated 19.04.2021
A Revenue receipts and B Pension payments in C Small Savings Schemes
payments on behalf of the respect of Central / State (SSS)
Central/State Governments and
Governments
D Collection of stamp duty E Transactions related to Answer: E
through physical mode or Gold Monetisation
e-mode (challan based) Scheme 2015
1545. Agency banks are furnished their claim on agency commission to Reserve Bank within ______
days from the end of the quarter in which the transactions have been conducted. Circular GBD
30/2021 dated 19.04.2021
A 30 calendar days B 60 calendar days C 00 calendar days
D 120 calendar days E None of the above Answer: B
1546. Under Public Provident Fund (PPF) Scheme, A minimum deposit of ₹______is required to open
and can be deposited upto ₹______ in financial year. Circular GBD 28/2021 dated 15.04.2021
A ₹100/- ; ₹1.5 lakh B ₹500/- ; ₹1.5 lakh C ₹1000/- ; ₹1.5 lakh
D ₹1000/- ; ₹2.5 lakh E None of the above Answer: B
1547. Senior Citizens Savings Scheme (SCSS) is a government-backed savings Scheme offered to
Indian residents aged over ______ years or superannuation/ VRS after the ages of ______ years
165
and above. Circular GBD 28/2021 dated 15.04.2021

Page

1548. The retired personnel of Defense Services (excluding Civilian defense employees) shall be

eligible to open an account under Senior Citizens Savings Scheme (SCSS) on attaining the age
of ______ years subject to fulfillment of other specified conditions. Circular GBD 28/2021 dated
15.04.2021
1549. The deposit under Senior Citizens Savings Scheme (SCSS) matures after ______ years from the
date of account opening but can be extended once for a period of ______ years. Circular GBD
28/2021 dated 15.04.2021
1550. Depositors under Senior Citizens Savings Scheme (SCSS) are allowed to make a lump sum
deposit with a minimum deposit of ₹______ and maximum of ₹______. Circular GBD 28/2021 dated
15.04.2021
A ₹500 ; ₹10 lakh B ₹1000 ; ₹10 lakh C ₹1000 ; ₹10 lakh
D ₹1000 ; ₹15 lakh E None of the above Answer: D
1551. An account under Sukanya Samriddhi Account can be opened by deposit of ₹ ______ and can be
deposited upto ₹ ______ during a financial year. Circular GBD 28/2021 dated 15.04.2021
A ₹ 100/- ; ₹ 1.50 lakh B ₹ 250/- ; ₹ 1.50 lakh C ₹ 500/- ; ₹ 1.50 lakh
D ₹ 500/- ; ₹ 2.50 lakh E None of the above Answer: B
1552. The Floating Rate Saving Bonds 2020 (Taxable) will be issued for a minimum amount of ₹ ______
and in multiple thereof with upper limit of ₹______. Circular GBD 28/2021 dated 15.04.2021
A ₹500 ; ₹10 lakh B ₹1000 ; ₹10 lakh C ₹1000 ; no upper limit
D ₹1000 ; no upper limit E None of the above Answer: D
1553. Under Employee Provident Fund (EPF) Scheme, every company/organization employing more
than ______ individuals including employees who are on contract is mandatorily required to
register under PF Act. Circular GBD 28/2021 dated 15.04.2021
A 10 B 15 C 20
1554. As per Note Refund Amendment Rules, where the number of soiled notes presented by a person
is up to ______ pieces with a maximum value of Rs. ______ per day, banks should exchange
them over the counter, free of charge. Circular GBD 27/2021 dated 09.04.2021
A 5 ; Rs. 1000 B 10 ; Rs. 500 C 10 ; Rs. 5000
D 20 ; Rs. 5000 E None of the above Answer: D
1555. As per Note Refund Amendment Rules, where the number of mutilated and imperfect notes
presented by a person is more than ______ pieces not exceeding Rs. ______ in value, the
tenderer should be advised to send such notes to nearby currency chest branch by insured post
giving his / her bank account details (a/c no, branch name, IFSC, etc.) or get them exchanged
thereat in person. Circular GBD 27/2021 dated 09.04.2021
A 5 ; Rs. 5000 B 10 ; Rs. 5000 C 5 ; Rs. 10000
D 10 ; Rs. 10000 E None of the above Answer: A
1556. Currency chest branches receiving mutilated notes through insured post should credit the
exchange value to the account of sender by electronic means within ______ of receipt of notes.
1557. For Shortages in soiled note remittances and currency chest balances in denomination up to ₹
50, Penalties will be imposed on banks @ ______ per piece in addition to the loss Circular GBD
26/2021 dated 09.04.2021
A ₹ 20/- B ₹ 50/- C ₹ 100/-
D Equal to the value of the E None of the above Answer: B
denomination
166
1558. For Shortages in soiled note remittances and currency chest balances in denomination of ₹ 100
& above, Penalties will be imposed on banks @ ______ per piece in addition to the loss Circular
GBD 26/2021 dated 09.04.2021
Page
A ₹ 10/- B ₹ 20/- C ₹ 50/-

D Equal to the value of the E None of the above Answer: C

denomination
1559. For Mutilated notes detected in soiled note remittances and currency chest balances, Penalties
will be imposed on banks @ ______ per piece irrespective of the denomination. Circular GBD
26/2021 dated 09.04.2021
A ₹ 20/- B ₹ 50/- C ₹ 100/-
D Equal to the value of the E None of the above Answer: B
denomination
1560. For Non-compliance with operational guidelines by currency chests detected by RBI officials e.g.
a) Non-functioning of CCTV b) Branch cash/documents kept in strong room c) Non-utilization of
NSMs for sorting of notes (NSMs not used for sorting of high denomination notes received over
the counter or not used for sorting notes remitted to chest/RBI), Penalties will be imposed on
banks @ ______ for each irregularity. Penalty will be enhanced to ₹ ______ in case of repetition.
A ₹ 1000/- ; ₹ 5,000 B ₹ 1000/- ; ₹ 10,000 C ₹ 5000/- ; ₹ 10,000
D ₹ 10000/- ; ₹ 20,000 E None of the above Answer: C
1561. For non-issue of coins over the counter to any member of public despite having stock, Penalties
will be imposed on banks @ ______ for any violation of agreement or deficiency of service.
A ₹ 5,000 B ₹ 10,000 C ₹ 20,000
D ₹ 25,000 E None of the above Answer: B
1562. For refusal by any bank branch to exchange soiled notes / refusal by any currency chest branch
to adjudicate mutilated notes tendered by any member of public, Penalties will be imposed on
banks @ ______ for any violation of agreement or deficiency of service. Circular GBD 26/2021
dated 09.04.2021
A ₹ 5,000 B ₹ 10,000 C ₹ 20,000
1563. For non acceptance of lower denomination notes (i.e. denomination of ₹ 50 and below) tendered
by members of public and linked bank branches, Penalties will be imposed on banks @ ______
for any violation of agreement or deficiency of service. Circular GBD 26/2021 dated 09.04.2021
A ₹ 5,000 B ₹ 10,000 C ₹ 20,000
1564. For Detection of mutilated /counterfeit notes in re-issuable packets prepared by the currency
chest branches., Penalties will be imposed on banks @ ______ for any violation of agreement or
deficiency of service. Circular GBD 26/2021 dated 09.04.2021
A ₹ 5,000 B ₹ 10,000 C ₹ 20,000
1565. In terms of the Preamble, under Section ______ of the RBI Act, 1934 and ______ of the Banking
Regulation Act, 1949, the Bank issues guidelines / instructions for realising the objectives of
Clean Note Policy. Circular GBD 25/2021 dated 09.04.2021
A Section 45 ; Section 35 B Section 35A ; Section C Section 45 A ; Section
A 45 35
D Section 45 A ; Section E None of the above Answer: A
35 A
1566. For exchange of soiled notes over the counter at bank branches, banks are eligible for financial
incentives @ ₹ _______ per packet for exchange of soiled notes up to denomination ₹ 50. Circular
GBD 25/2021 dated 09.04.2021
A ₹ 1/- B ₹ 2/- C ₹ 5/-
D ₹ 10/- E None of the above Answer: B
1567. For Exchange of adjudication of mutilated banknotes over the counter at bank branches, banks
are eligible for financial incentives @ ₹ _______ per piece. Circular GBD 25/2021 dated 09.04.2021
₹ 1/- ₹ 2/- ₹ 5/-
167
A B C
D ₹ 10/- E None of the above Answer: B
1568. For distribution of coins over counter banks are eligible for financial incentives @ ₹ _______ per
Page
bag for distribution of coins over the counter. Circular GBD 25/2021 dated 09.04.2021

A ₹ 5/- B ₹ 10/- C ₹ 20/-

D ₹ 25/- E None of the above Answer: D
1569. The minimum amount of deposit into / withdrawal from currency chest will be ₹ ______ and
thereafter, in multiples of ₹ ______. Circular GBD 24/2021 dated 09.04.2021
A ₹ 50,000/- ; ₹ 50,000/- B ₹ 1,00,000/- ; ₹ C ₹ 1,00,000/- ; ₹
50,000/- 1,00,000/-
D ₹ 1,00,000/- ; ₹1, E None of the above Answer: B
50,000/-
1570. For cases of detection of Counterfeit Notes up to ______ pieces, in a single transaction, a
consolidated report in the prescribed format should be sent by the Nodal Bank Officer to the
police authorities or the Nodal Police Station, along with the suspect Counterfeit Notes, at the
end of the month. Circular GBD 23/2021 dated 09.04.2021
A 4 pieces B 5 pieces C 6 pieces
D 8 pieces E None of the above Answer: A
1571. For cases of detection of Counterfeit Notes of ______ pieces, in a single transaction, the
Counterfeit Notes should be forwarded immediately by the Nodal Bank Officer to the local police
authorities or the Nodal Police Station for investigation by filing FIR in the prescribed format.
A 4 or more pieces B 5 or more pieces C 6 or more pieces
D 8 or more pieces E None of the above Answer: B
1572. The banks should re-align their cash management in such a manner so as to ensure that cash
receipts in the denominations of ₹______ and above are not put into recirculation without the
notes being machine processed for authenticity. Circular GBD 23/2021 dated 09.04.2021
A ₹ 50 B ₹ 100 C ₹ 2,100
D ₹ 500 E None of the above Answer: B
1573. Penalty at ______% of the notional value of Counterfeit Notes, in addition to the recovery of loss
to the extent of the notional value of such notes, will be imposed when Counterfeit Notes are
detected in the soiled note remittance of the bank and if Counterfeit Notes are detected in the
currency chest balance of a bank during Inspection / Audit by RBI. Circular GBD 23/2021 dated
09.04.2021
A 50% B 60% C 75%
1574. Counterfeit Notes, which are the subject matter of litigation in the court of law should be
preserved with the branch concerned for ______ years after conclusion of the court case.
A one year B two years C three years
D six years E None of the above Answer: C
1575. Joint A-Type Account under Kisan Vikas Patra Scheme may be opened jointly in the names of
upto ______ adults payable to all the account holders jointly or to the survivors. Circular GBD
13/2021 dated 05.03.2021
A two B three C four
D five E None of the above Answer: B
1576. Joint B-Type Account under Kisan Vikas Patra Scheme may be opened jointly in the name of
upto ______ adults payable to any of the account holders or to the survivor or survivors. Circular
GBD 13/2021 dated 05.03.2021
D five E None of the above Answer: B
1577. A minimum of Rs.______ and any sum in multiples of Rs.______may be deposited in an account
under Kisan Vikas Patra Scheme. Circular GBD 13/2021 dated 05.03.2021
A Rs.1000.00 ; Rs.100.00 B Rs.5000.00 ; Rs.100.00 C Rs.5000.00 ;
Rs.500.00
168
D Rs.10000.00 ; E None of the above Answer: A

Rs.1000.00
1578. A transaction with related party shall be considered material if the transaction(s) to be entered
Page
into individually or taken together with previous transactions during a financial year exceeds

______%of the Annual Consolidated Income of the Bank as per the last Audited Financial
Statements of the Bank. Circular BOARD 01/2021 dated 02.06.2021
A 5%. B 10%. C 15%.
1579. A transaction involving payments made to a related party with respect to brand usage or royalty
shall be considered material if the transaction(s) to be entered into individually or taken together
with previous transactions during a financial year, exceed ______5% of the Annual Consolidated
Income of the Bank as per the last Audited Financial Statements of the Bank. Circular BOARD
01/2021 dated 02.06.2021
A 5%. B 10%. C 15%.
1580. In terms of Regulation 2(1)(zb) of the SEBI (LODR) Regulations, Any person or entity belonging
to the promoter or promoter group of the listed entity and holding ______% or more of
shareholding in the listed entity shall be deemed to be a related party. Circular BOARD 01/2021
dated 02.06.2021
A 5%. B 10%. C 15%.
1581. The Bank shall submit within ______ days from the date of publication of its Standalone and
Consolidated Financial Results for the half year; disclosures of Related Party Transactions on a
consolidated basis. Circular BOARD 01/2021 dated 02.06.2021
1582. A company having Net Worth of Rs. ______ or more; or turnover of Rs.______ or more; or Net
Profit of Rs. ______ or more during any Financial Year shall be required to constitute a CSR
Committee of the Board and spend not less than 2% of the average net Profits during the three
immediately preceding FYs. Circular CCC 06/2021 dated 22.04.2021
A Rs. 100 crore ; Rs.1000 B Rs. 100 crore ; Rs.500 C Rs. 500 crore ; Rs.1000
crore ; Rs. 5 crore crore ; Rs. 5 crore crore ; Rs. 5 crore
D Rs. 500 crore ; Rs.1500 E None of the above Answer: C
crore ; Rs. 10 crore
1583. The Reserve Bank of India has laid down the basic framework for the policy relating to donations
given by Banks to various entities. As per RBI the Bank may make donations during a financial
year aggregating up to _______ per cent of the published profit of the Bank for the previous year.
D 2.0 per cent E None of the above Answer: B
1584. As per RBI, In case of loss during the previous Financial Year, Bank can make donations
totalling Rs. ______ only in a financial year Circular CCC 04/2021 dated 22.04.2021
A Rs. 1.00 Lac B Rs. 2.00 Lacs C Rs. 5.00 Lacs
1585. Donations should be made only to institutions / NGOs eligible for tax exemptions. However,
Donations in special cases / events may be made to societies / institutions / organizations not
holding Income Tax Exemption. However, such amount will be restricted to Rs. 1.00 Lac per
reference. Circular CCC 04/2021 dated 22.04.2021
A Rs. 1.00 Lac B Rs. 2.00 Lacs C Rs. 5.00 Lacs
D Rs. 10.00 Lacs E None of the above Answer: A
1586. Our Bank has a tie up for distributing Mutual Fund business with ______. Circular CAD 89/2021
dated 06.11.2021
A 1. Aditya Birla Sun B 1. LIC Mutual C 1. Principal Asset
Life Asset Fund Asset Management Co. Ltd
Management Management Ltd. 2. Franklin Templeton
169
company Limited 2. UTI Asset Management Asset Management

2. Nippon Life Asset Co. Ltd (India) Pvt. Ltd
Management Limited- 3. DSP Investment
Nippon Mutual fund
Page
Managers Pvt Ltd.


1587. Looking at the indemnity needs of our priority customers who are Medical practitioners or
Medical establishments by profession, Our bank has approved the distribution of “Professional
Indemnity Insurance for Medical Practitioners and Institutions” offered by ______. Circular CAD
70/2021 dated 22.10.2021
A M/s Bajaj Allianz GIC Ltd B Care Health Insurance Co. C Star Health & Allied
Ltd. (CHIL) Insurance Co. Ltd.
(SHICL)
1588. Our General Insurance partner M/s Bajaj Allianz General Insurance Company Ltd. (BAGIC) has
introduced a mechanism through which our customers can instantly insure their ______ by
scanning a QR code placed in branches from the mobile phone of the customers. Circular CAD
64/2021 dated 18.10.2021
A two wheelers B three wheelers C four wheelers
1589. Oriental Insurance is offering higher discount in Motor Insurance for Bank staff, Bank ex-staff
and Bank owned vehicles up to ______%. Circular CAD 58/2021 dated 30.09.2021
A 70%. B 75%. C 80%.
1590. Bajaj Allianz General Insurance Company Ltd. (BAGIC) is offering a discount of upto ______% to
the employees (in service or retired) of the Bank on renewing motor insurance policies from
them on all the models except KIA motors. Circular CAD 58/2021 dated 30.09.2021
A 70%. B 75%. C 80%.
1591. No Policy where Sum Insured is above ₹ ______ shall be solicited under Bank’s Corporate
Agency Code. Circular CAD 57/2021 dated 03.09.2021
A ₹ 1 Crore B ₹ 2 Crore C ₹ 5 Crore
D ₹ 10 Crore E None of the above Answer: C
1592. Our bank is not having Corporate Agency arrangement with which of the following Life
Insurance companies for solicitation of Life Insurance business? Circular CAD 48/2021 dated
15.07.2021
A PNB MetLife India B Canara HSBC OBC Life C Life Insurance
Insurance Company Insurance Co. Ltd. Corporation of India (LIC)
Ltd.(PMLI) (CHOICe)
D B & C both E None of the above Answer: E
1593. Our Bank does not solicit Health Insurance Business as a Corporate Agent of which of the
following Insurance companies:
i) The Oriental Insurance Co. Ltd. (OICL)
ii) Care Health Insurance Co. Ltd. (CHICL)
iii) Star Health & Allied Insurance Co. Ltd. (SHICL)
iv) Bajaj Allianz General Insurance Co. Ltd. (BAGIC)
v) Cholamandalam MS General Insurance Co. Ltd. (CHOLA) Circular CAD 47/2021 dated
14.07.2021
A Only i) and ii) B Only ii) and iii) C Only iii) and iv)
D Only v) E None of the above Answer: E
1594. Entry Age under Chola Arogya and Chola Arogya Plus will be ______. Circular CAD 44/2021 dated
02.07.2021
A 18 to 60 Years B 18 to 65 Years C 18 to 70 Years
D 18 to 79 Years E None of the above Answer: D
1595. Minimum Entry age under Chola Arogya and Chola Arogya Plus for Self and Spouse will be
______ and ______for Dependent Children Circular CAD 44/2021 dated 02.07.2021
170
A 18 years ; 90 days B 18 years ; 90 days C 18 years ; 120 days

D 18 years ; 180 days E None of the above Answer: B
1596. Maximum Entry age under Chola Arogya and Chola Arogya Plus for Self and Spouse & Parents
Page
will be upto ______ and ______for Dependent Children Circular CAD 44/2021 dated 02.07.2021


1597. Maternity Coverage (Normal & Caesarean) under Chola Arogya and Chola Arogya Plus will be up
to Rs.______ per child (Maximum up to 2 children ) Circular CAD 44/2021 dated 02.07.2021
A Rs.10,000/- B Rs.20,000/- C Rs.25,000/-
1598. Domiciliary Hospitalization Coverage under Chola Arogya and Chola Arogya Plus will up to
______% of Sum Insured. Circular CAD 44/2021 dated 02.07.2021
A 10%. B 20%. C 25%.
1599. Pre-Hospitalization Benefits under Chola Arogya and Chola Arogya Plus is available for ______
days and ______ days for Post-Hospitalization. Circular CAD 44/2021 dated 02.07.2021
D 60 days ; 90 days E None of the above Answer: B
1600. The Oriental Insurance Co. Ltd. has launched a New Health Insurance Policy in the name of Bank
Saathi Policy. The maximum Sum Insured (S.I) under this scheme will be up to Rs. ______.
Circular CAD 42/2021 dated 25.06.2021
D Rs. 25 Lac E None of the above Answer: D
1601. Maximum Entry Age is ______ years for all members under Oriental Insurance Bank Saathi
Policy. Circular CAD 42/2021 dated 25.06.2021
1602. Upto three Dependent Children (natural or legally adopted) between the ages of ______ are
eligible under Oriental Insurance Bank Saathi Policy. Circular CAD 42/2021 dated 25.06.2021
A 60 days to 18 years B 91days to 18 years C 60 days to 21 years
D 91days to 21 years E None of the above Answer: B
1603. Under Oriental Insurance Bank Saathi Policy, male child can be covered upto the age of ______
years if he is a bonafide regular student and financially dependent. Female child can be covered
until she gets married. Circular CAD 42/2021 dated 25.06.2021
1604. Pre & Post Hospitalisation Expenses under Oriental Insurance Bank Saathi Policy are covered
upto ______ Days respectively Circular CAD 42/2021 dated 25.06.2021
A 30 & 30 Days B 30 & 60 Days C 60 & 60 Days
D 60 & 90 Days E None of the above Answer: B
1605. Maternity Expenses under Oriental Insurance Bank Saathi Policy are covered upto 2.5% of Sum
Insured for Sum Insured of INR ______& above. Circular CAD 42/2021 dated 25.06.2021
A 10 Lacs B 15 Lacs C 20 Lacs
D 25 Lacs E None of the above Answer: A
1606. Individual investors can open Demat account on Joint name operated jointly by all joint holders
only . Maximum______ holders are allowed in joint demat account. Circular CAD 39/2021 dated
29.05.2021
D No limit E None of the above Answer: B
1607. Which of the following is/are incorrect in respect of distribution of branches of PNB 2.0 among
the Life Insurance partners? Circular CAD 33/2021 dated 16.04.2021
A PNB MetLife India B Canara HSBC OBC Life C LIC shall solicit business
Insurance Company Insurance Co. Ltd. in all branches of PNB
Ltd.(PMLI) shall solicit (CHOICe) shall solicit 2.0.
business in all branches of business in all branches of
171
PNB 1.0 and eUNI eOBC.

D B & C both E None of the above Answer: E
1608. The tie ups arrangement with Insurance companies shall have to be disclosed to IRDAI within
Page
______days of entering into such arrangements. Circular CAD 31/2021 dated 15.04.2021


1609. Now, Investors can apply in public issues of debt securities through the app/web interface of
Stock Exchange(s) with a facility to block funds (ASBA) through Unified Payments Interface
(UPI) mechanism for application value up to Rs. ______. Circular CAD 21/2021 dated 17.02.2021
D Rs. 10 Lac E None of the above Answer: B
1610. All the bank account holders in the age group of ______ years will be entitled to join the Group
Personal Accident Insurance Product By Bajaj Allianz General Insurance Co. Ltd. (BAGIC)
1611. Under Group Personal Accident Insurance Product By Bajaj Allianz General Insurance Co. Ltd.
(BAGIC), Maximum Sum Insured that can be offered to a customer even if the customer have
multiple accounts is ₹______ only. Circular CAD 13/2021 dated 03.02.2021
A ₹1 Lakhs B ₹2 Lakhs C ₹3 Lakhs
D ₹4 Lakhs E None of the above Answer: D
(BAGIC), Bank will earn a maximum permissible commission of ______% of the premium
mobilized. Circular CAD 13/2021 dated 03.02.2021
A 5%. B 7.5%. C 10%.
(BAGIC), In case of Permanent Total Disability Compensation will be ______% of Sum Insured
A 100%. B 110%. C 125%.
1614. Bank as a Corporate Agent for General Insurance business can solicit, procure and service retail
lines of general insurance products and commercial lines of such insurers having a total sum
insured not exceeding Rs. _______ per risk for all insurances combined. Circular CAD 07/2021
dated 27.01.2021
D ₹10 crores E None of the above Answer: C
1615. Approval/Verification of CBS entry for CBS Menu LOANCHRG shall not be allowed at respective
branch for borrowers wherein total limit marked in MENU is above Rs. ______. Circular CRMD
32/2021 dated 10.11.2021
D Rs. 50 crore E None of the above Answer: D
1616. It is mandatory for corporate borrowers having aggregate fund-based and non fund based
exposure of Rs.______ & above from Banks to obtain Legal Entity Identifier (LEI) registration and
capture the same in the Central Repository of Information on Large Credits (CRILC). Circular
CRMD 20/2021 dated 18.06.2021
D Rs.10 crore E None of the above Answer: C
1617. The credit facilities sanctioned to Senior Officers (Scale-IV & above) and their relatives reported
on Quarterly basis within ______ days from the end of the quarter Circular CRMD 17/2021 dated
22.04.2021
1618. Circle Offices shall submit consolidated report of credit facilities sanctioned to Senior Officers
(Scale-IV & above) and their relatives sanctioned at GBBs to their Zonal Offices (ZOs) on
172
Quarterly basis within ______ days from the end of the quarter. Circular CRMD 17/2021 dated
22.04.2021
Page

1619. Zonal Offices shall monitor advances to Senior Officers (Scale-IV & above) and their relativesat
their level and submit the consolidated report of such cases sanctioned at GBB/PLP/MCC/ZO
level to Credit Review & Monitoring Division, HO on Quarterly basis within ______ days from the
end of the quarter. Circular CRMD 17/2021 dated 22.04.2021
1620. As regards borrowal accounts having aggregate limit of Rs.1 crore & above, valuation of
immovable properties charged/mortgaged to the Bank be got done from approved valuer once in
______ years. Circular CRMD 16/2021 dated 19.04.2021
A a year B two years C three years
1621. As regards borrowal accounts having aggregate limit of below Rs.1 crore, valuation of
immovable properties charged / mortgaged to the Bank be got done from approved valuer once
in ______ years. Circular CRMD 16/2021 dated 19.04.2021
D five years E None of the above Answer: D
1622. In any case, the revaluations in all eligible accounts having limits of below Rs. 1 Crore shall have
to be invariably obtained within a timeline of ______ years. Circular CRMD 16/2021 dated
19.04.2021
D five years E None of the above Answer: B
1623. Where the value of immovable property to be mortgaged/ charged is more than ₹______,
branches shall get valuation of such IPs done from minimum two valuers of category A or B on
the Bank’s approved panel. Circular CRMD 16/2021 dated 19.04.2021
1624. Where the value of immovable property to be mortgaged/ charged is more than ₹5 crore, In case
the difference in the valuation arrived at by both the valuers is not more than ______%, the
average value may be considered. Circular CRMD 16/2021 dated 19.04.2021
A 10% B 15% C 20%
1625. Where the value of immovable property to be mortgaged/ charged is more than ₹5 crore, In case
the difference in valuations is more than ______%, 3rd valuation may be got done from a senior
valuer in A category and the average of the lower two valuation reports shall be taken Circular
CRMD 16/2021 dated 19.04.2021
A 10% B 15% C 20%
1626. In all agricultural loans above Rs.______, the valuation of agricultural land shall be continued to
be taken from empanelled valuer. Circular CRMD 16/2021 dated 19.04.2021
A Rs.50 Lacs B Rs.100 Lacs C Rs.200 Lacs
D Rs.500 Lacs E None of the above Answer: C
1627. The Department of Financial Services as part of the recommendations under the PSB Reforms
Agenda EASE had proposed an action point relating to tie up with Agencies for Specialized
Monitoring (ASMs) for clean and effective post-sanction follow-up in case of consortium lending,
having credit exposures above Rs. ______ and exposure of a specialized nature. Circular CRMD
15/2021 dated 12.04.2021
1628. As per suggestion by IBA, a weightage of ______% to be given on technical capability and
______% to financial quotations submitted by Agencies for Specialized Monitoring (ASMs) for
appointment. Circular CRMD 15/2021 dated 12.04.2021
173
A 50% ; 50% B 60% ; 40% C 70% ; 30%

1629. In respect of consortium advances, the appointment / waiver of work allocation to Agencies for
Page
Specialized Monitoring (ASMs) and the scope of work to be allotted may be decided by lenders

representing ______ per cent by value of total outstanding credit facilities (fund based as well
non-fund based) and ______ per cent of lenders by number. Circular CRMD 15/2021 dated
12.04.2021
A 60 ; 60 B 70 ; 50 C 70 ; 60
D 75 ; 60 E None of the above Answer: D
1630. Bank has subscribed the services of M/s CIBIL Transunion Ltd. for EWS triggers of all Retail &
MSME accounts having exposure upto Rs.______. Circular CRMD 11/2021 dated 17.03.2021
D Rs.10.00 Crore E None of the above Answer: A
1631. PMS (Preventive Monitoring System) is one of the effective Post-sanction credit monitoring tools
for all borrowal accounts having exposure above Rs. ______. Circular CRMD 11/2021 dated
17.03.2021
1632. In terms of RBI guidelines, the threshold for EWS and RFA is an exposure of Rs.______ or more
at the level of a bank irrespective of the lending arrangement ( Solo, Multiple or Consortium
banking). Circular CRMD 04/2021 dated 22.01.2021
A Rs.50 crore B Rs.1.00 Crore C Rs.2.00 Crore
1633. Accounts classified in NPA category with exposure of Rs.______ or more irrespective of the
lending arrangement (whether Solo banking, Multiple banking or Consortium) shall be
considered for classification as RFA and examination of fraud angle. Circular CRMD 04/2021
dated 22.01.2021
1634. Other than NPA accounts (SMA/ Standard) with exposure of Rs.______ or more
(Solo/MBA/Consortium basis) where EWS noticed. shall be considered for classification as RFA
and examination of fraud angle. Circular CRMD 04/2021 dated 22.01.2021
1635. Accounts of Rs.______ & above under Consortium /Multiple Banking accounts where majority of
member Banks (60% & above) have taken decision to treat account as RFA are to be categorized
under RFA from the perspective of examination of fraud angle. Circular CRMD 04/2021 dated
22.01.2021
D Rs.5.00 Crore E None of the above Answer: C
1636. In accounts where lending is under Consortium or Multiple Banking, In case it is decided at the
individual bank level to classify the a/c as ‘Fraud’straightway at this stage itself, the bank may
then report the fraud to RBI within ______ days of detection and also report the case to
CBI/Police, as is being done hitherto. Circular CRMD 04/2021 dated 22.01.2021
1637. Accounts where lending is under Consortium or Multiple Banking, Within ______ days, the bank
which has ‘RedFlagged’ the account or detected the fraud would ask the consortium leader or
the largest lender under MBA to convene a meeting of JLF to discuss the issue. Circular CRMD
04/2021 dated 22.01.2021
1638. Red Flagged Accounts where lending is under Consortium or Multiple Banking, The forensic
audit must be completed within a maximum period of ______ months from the date of JLF
meeting authorizing the audit. Circular CRMD 04/2021 dated 22.01.2021
174

D twelve months E None of the above Answer: A
1639. Within ______ days of the RBI reporting, the bank commissioning/ initiating the forensic audit
Page
would lodge a complaint with the CBI on behalf of all banks in the consortium/MBA. Circular

CRMD 04/2021 dated 22.01.2021

1640. Entire exercise will be completed in ______ months from the date when the sole banker/first
member bank reported the account as RFA/Fraud on CRILC platform. Circular CRMD 04/2021
dated 22.01.2021
D twelve months E None of the above Answer: B
1641. Where PAN is Furnished by Deductee, TDS is required to be deducted @ 10%, if the payments
exceed prescribed threshold limits of Rs. ______ on interest other than interest on securities
(Sec 194A) to resident i.e. Interest paid on Term Deposits including Recurring Deposits. Circular
FD 18/2021 dated 09.06.2021
A Rs 40,000/- per year for B Rs 40,000/- per year for C Rs 50,000/- per year for
senior citizen and Rs senior citizen and Rs senior citizen and Rs
30,000/- Per year for any 40,000/- Per year for any 40,000/- Per year for any
other person other person other person
D Rs 50,000/- per year for E None of the above Answer: C
senior citizen and Rs
50,000/- Per year for any
other person
1642. No deduction of tax is required to be made, if the payments do not exceed prescribed threshold
limits of Rs. ______ for payment in respect of deposits under National Savings Scheme, 1987.
Circular FD 18/2021 dated 09.06.2021
A Rs 2,500/- Per FY B Rs 5,000/- Per FY C Rs 7,500/- Per FY
D Rs 10,000/- Per FY E None of the above Answer: A
limits of Rs. ______ for payment of Rent to a resident. Circular FD 18/2021 dated 09.06.2021
A Rs 1,80,000/- Per FY B Rs 2,00,000/- Per FY C Rs 2,40,000/- Per FY
D Rs 2,50,000/- Per FY E None of the above Answer: C
1644. It is not necessary to deduct tax at source from interest on debentures paid to a resident
individual if the aggregate amount of interest paid or likely to be paid during the Financial Year
does not exceed Rs ______. Circular FD 18/2021 dated 09.06.2021
A Rs 5000/- B Rs 10000/- C Rs 20000/-
D Rs 25000/- E None of the above Answer: A
1645. Where tax is deducted from April to February tax should be deposited within ______ from the
end of the month in which tax is deducted and where tax is deducted in the month of March, tax
should be deposited by ______ of immediately succeeding FY. Circular FD 18/2021 dated
09.06.2021
A 7 days ; 30th April B 15 days ; 30th April C 7 days ; 31st May
D 15 days ; 31st May E None of the above Answer: A
1646. In respect of Tax Deducted at Source, it is mandatory to file Quarterly TDS Return (26Q & 27 Q)
in electronic form within ______ from the end of quarter Circular FD 18/2021 dated 09.06.2021
A 7 days from the end of B 15 days from the end of C 20 days from the end of
quarter quarter quarter
D 31 days from the end of E None of the above Answer: D
quarter
1647. Absence of PAN or providing wrong PAN or reporting wrong PAN will result in denial of credit
for TDS by Income Tax Deptt. and attract penalty of Rs ______ on depositor. Circular FD 18/2021
dated 09.06.2021
A Rs 5000/- B Rs 10000/- C Rs 20000/-
D Rs 25000/- E None of the above Answer: B
175
1648. In respect of Tax Deducted at Source for Interest on Securities, dividend, Interest on term
deposits, Payment to contractors /sub-contractors, Payment in respect of deposit under NSS,
Commission or Brokerage, Fees for professional or technical services, it is mandatory to issue
Page
TDS certificates (16A) within ______ from the due date for furnishing the quarterly statement of
TDS. Circular FD 18/2021 dated 09.06.2021


1649. In respect of Tax Deducted at Source on Purchase of Immovable Property (Sec 194-IA), it is
mandatory to issue TDS certificates (16B) within ______ days of furnishing challan in Form No
26QB. Circular FD 18/2021 dated 09.06.2021
1650. Under Section 194, TDS at the rate of 10% needs to be deducted on dividend payment. Threshold
limit under section 194 is increased from Rs.2,500/- to ______ for dividend paid by any mode
(other than cash). Circular FD 18/2021 dated 09.06.2021
A Rs 5000/- B Rs 10000/- C Rs 20000/-
1651. TDS on interest on the compensation amount awarded by the Motor Accident claims Tribunal
will be deducted at the time of payment on interest where interest payments exceeds Rs.______.
A Rs.10,000/- B Rs.20,000/- C Rs.50,000/-
D Rs.1,00,000/- E None of the above Answer: C
1652. Estimated total taxable income upto ______ for FY 2021-22 (i.e. gross total income minus
deductions) is eligible for submission of Form 15H, but the tax liability shall be Nil after taking
into account rebate under section 87A. Circular FD 18/2021 dated 09.06.2021
A Rs.2,50,000/- B Rs.5,00,000/- C Rs.7,50,000/-
1653. Declaration in Form 15G/H are to be retained by the payer for ______ years from the end of
financial year in which declaration has been received. Circular FD 18/2021 dated 09.06.2021
1654. Tax shall not be deducted under Section 194C if the amount of any single sum credited or paid
to the contractor does not exceed Rs ______ and the aggregate of the amounts of sums credited
or paid during the financial year does not exceed Rs ______. Circular FD 18/2021 dated 09.06.2021
A Rs 30,000/- ; Rs B Rs 40,000/- ; Rs C Rs 30,000/- ; Rs
1,00,000/- 1,00,000/- 2,00,000/-
D Rs 40,000/- ; Rs E None of the above Answer: A
2,00,000/-
1655. TDS is required to be deducted at source on all brokerage/ commission paid or credited to
resident, if the amount credited or paid or likely to be credited or paid exceeds Rs ______ in a
FY. Circular FD 18/2021 dated 09.06.2021
A Rs 5000/- B Rs 10000/- C Rs 15000/-
1656. TDS is to be deducted by the transferee, if consideration paid or payable to resident, for the
transfer of asset (other than agriculture land in rural area in India) is Rs.______ or more. Circular
FD 18/2021 dated 09.06.2021
A Rs.25,00,000/- B Rs.50,00,000/- C Rs.1,00,00,000/-
D Rs.5,00,00,000/- E None of the above Answer: B
limits of Rs. ______ for payment of Fees for professional or technical services or Royalty to a
resident. Circular FD 18/2021 dated 09.06.2021
A Rs 20,000/- Per FY B Rs 25,000/- Per FY C Rs 30,000/- Per FY
D Rs 50,000/- Per FY E None of the above Answer: C
1658. No TDS on Cash withdrawal will be deducted upto Rs. ______ for Category A (other than
exempted category) borrower and upto Rs. ______ for Category B borrower (other than
exempted category). Circular FD 18/2021 dated 09.06.2021
176
A Rs. 10 lakh ; Rs. 1 crore B Rs. 20 lakh ; Rs. 1 crore C Rs. 10 lakh ; Rs. 2
crore
D Rs. 20 lakh ; Rs. 2 crore E None of the above Answer: B
Page
1659. For Category A customers other than exempted category, TDS on Cash withdrawal will be

______% for withdrawal above Rs 20 lakh to Rs 1 Crore and ______% for withdrawal above Rs 1
Crore. Circular FD 18/2021 dated 09.06.2021
A 1% ; 3% B 2% ; 3% C 2% ; 5%
1660. For Category B customers other than exempted category, TDS on cash Withdrawal above Rs 1
crore will be______ %. Circular FD 18/2021 dated 09.06.2021
A 1.0%. B 1.5%. C 2.0%.
D 2.5%. E None of the above Answer: C
1661. Where a person fails to submit quarterly TDS / TCS returns within prescribed time, they shall be
liable to pay, by way of fee, a sum of Rs ______ per day during which the failure continues.
A Rs 100/- B Rs 200/- C Rs 500/-
1662. If a person fails to submit quarterly TDS /TCS returns on or before due date or If a person
furnishes incorrect information in quarterly TDS/TCS returns, such person shall pay penalty
ranging from Rs.10,000/- to Rs.______. Circular FD 18/2021 dated 09.06.2021
A Rs.50,000/- B Rs.1,00,000/- C Rs.1,50,000/-
1663. Penalty u/s 272A in respect of failure to issue TDS certificate in Form 16 will be a sum of Rs
______ for every day of such default however, the amount of penalty for such failure shall not
exceed the amount of tax deductible. Circular FD 18/2021 dated 09.06.2021
A Rs 100/- B Rs 200/- C Rs 500/-
1664. Where amount of any penalty or where such application relates to more than one penalty, the
aggregate amount of such penalties exceeds Rs.______, no order reducing / waiving the amount
shall be made by the Commissioner of Income Tax except with the prior approval of the Chief
Commissioner / Director General of Income Tax, as the case may be. Circular FD 18/2021 dated
09.06.2021
A Rs.50,000/- B Rs.1,00,000/- C Rs.1,50,000/-
1665. As per section 194 P, a specified senior citizen is a person who is ______years or more at any
time during the previous year and who has income from pension which is credited in his pension
account with “specified bank” Circular FD 18/2021 dated 09.06.2021
1666. In respect of TDS on purchase of goods [Section 194Q] if the value of purchase exceeds Rs.
______, Buyer is liable to deduct the tax @______% on the amount of purchase in excess of that
limit. Circular FD 18/2021 dated 09.06.2021
A Rs. 50 lakhs ; 0.1% B Rs. 50 lakhs ; 0.5% C Rs. 100 lakhs ; 0.1%
D Rs.100 lakhs ; 0.5% E None of the above Answer: A
1667. In respect of TCS on Sale of goods [Section 206C(1H)] if the value of sales exceeds Rs. ______,
Seller is liable to deduct the tax @______% on the amount of sale consideration in excess of that
limit. Circular FD 18/2021 dated 09.06.2021
A Rs. 50 lakhs ; 0.1% B Rs. 50 lakhs ; 0.5% C Rs. 100 lakhs ; 0.1%
D Rs.100 lakhs ; 0.5% E None of the above Answer: A
1668. Any person paying any sum or amount , on which tax is collectible at source shall not furnish
his PAN/Aadhar to the person responsible for collecting such tax , failing which tax shall be
collected at twice the rate specified in the relevant provision of the Act or the rate of ______%
whichever is higher. Circular FD 18/2021 dated 09.06.2021
A 5% B 10% C 15%
177
1669. Section 206AA of Income Tax Act, 1961 provides that any person entitled to receive any income
or amount on which tax is deductible shall furnish valid PAN, failing which tax shall be deducted
at higher of the i) TDS rate as prescribed in the relevant section; or ii) At the rate or rates in
Page
force as per Finance Act; or iii) At the rate of______%. Circular FD 18/2021 dated 09.06.2021

A 5% B 10% C 15%
1670. Rebate under section 87A is available in case of a resident individual if his/ her taxable income
(i.e. gross total income minus deduction under section 80C to 80U) does not exceed Rs ______
for AY 2022-23 (FY 2021-22) Circular FD 16/2021 dated 27.05.2021
A Rs 5,00,000/- B Rs 10,00,000/- C Rs 20,00,000/-
D Rs 25,00,000/- E None of the above Answer: A
1671. As per Section 194P, Resident Senior citizen who is of the age of ______ years or above shall not
be required to file the return of income if he has only pension income and interest income from
the same bank in which he is receiving his pension Circular FD 16/2021 dated 27.05.2021
1672. The Finance Act, 2021 has provided that no exemption shall be available for the interest income
accrued during the year in the recognised and statutory provident fund to the extent it relates to
the contribution made by the employees over Rs. ______ from the assessment year 2022-23.
A Rs. 2,50,000 B Rs. 5,00,000 C Rs. 7,50,000
D Rs. 10,00,000 E None of the above Answer: A
1673. The Finance Act, 2021 has added a second provison to Section 10(11) and Section 10(12) that if
an employee is contributing to the fund but there is no contribution to such fund by the
employer, then the interest income accrued during the previous year shall be taxable to the
extent it relates to the contribution made by the employee to that fund in excess of Rs.______ in
a financial year. Circular FD 16/2021 dated 27.05.2021
A Rs. 2,50,000 B Rs. 5,00,000 C Rs. 7,50,000
D Rs. 10,00,000 E None of the above Answer: B
1674. Gratuity received by an employee on his retirement or on his becoming incapacitated prior to
such retirement or on termination of his employment or by his legal heir(s) on his death, is
exempted from Income Tax to the extent of least of Rs. ______ or Gratuity actually received..
A Rs 10,00,000/- B Rs 15,00,000/- C Rs 20,00,000/-
D Rs 25,00,000/- E None of the above Answer: C
1675. Encashment of Privilege Leave is exempt from tax when received at the time of retirement
whether on superannuation or otherwise to the extent of maximum of Rs. ______. Circular FD
16/2021 dated 27.05.2021
A Rs.1,00,000/- B Rs.2,00,000/- C Rs.3,00,000/-
1676. An amount not exceeding Rs.______ received or receivable by an employee at the time of his
voluntary retirement, or termination of service under a scheme of voluntary separation is
exempted from Income Tax . Circular FD 16/2021 dated 27.05.2021
A Rs.1,00,000/- B Rs.2,00,000/- C Rs.3,00,000/-
D Rs.5,00,000/- E None of the above Answer: D
1677. In relation to deduction of Tax at source on salary, the loss, if any, under the head “Income from
House Property” shall be set off with the income under any other heads of income to the extent
of Rs.______. Circular FD 16/2021 dated 27.05.2021
A Rs.1,00,000/- B Rs.2,00,000/- C Rs.3,00,000/-
1678. In relation to deduction of Tax at source on salary, Section 80C provides deduction in respect of
specified qualifying amounts paid or deposited by the employee in the financial year. As per
Section 80CCE of the Act, aggregate deductions under section 80C, 80CCC and 80CCD shall not
exceed Rs.______. Circular FD 16/2021 dated 27.05.2021
178
D Rs.2.00 lakh E None of the above Answer: C

1679. In relation to deduction of Tax at source on salary, an assessee shall be allowed an additional
deduction of Rs. ______ for any additional contribution under NPS in computation of his total
Page
income and the ceiling of Rs. 1,50,000 as prescribed under section 80CCE does not apply for the

said additional contribution. Circular FD 16/2021 dated 27.05.2021

A Rs. 50000/- B Rs. 100000/- C Rs.150000/-
1680. In relation to deduction of Tax at source on salary, Section 80 D provides deduction for medi-
claim premium/ preventive health check up paid of Rs.______ in the case of senior citizen and of
Rs.______ for other than senior citizen. Circular FD 16/2021 dated 27.05.2021
A Rs.25,000/- ; B Rs.50,000/- ; C Rs.1,00,000/- ;
Rs.25,000/- Rs.25,000/- Rs.25,000/-
D Rs.1,00,000/- ; E None of the above Answer: B
Rs.50,000/-
1681. In relation to deduction of Tax at source on salary, the whole of the amount paid on account of
medical expenditure incurred on the health of person or his/her parent(s), who is senior citizen
and mediclaim insurance is not paid on the health of such person(s), the maximum eligible
amount of deduction is of Rs.______. Circular FD 16/2021 dated 27.05.2021
A Rs. 50000/- B Rs. 100000/- C Rs.150000/-
1682. In relation to deduction of Tax at source on salary, A deduction upto Rs.______ is allowable on
account of preventive “Health Check-up” of self, spouse, parents or dependent children within
the overall limits underSection 80-D. Circular FD 16/2021 dated 27.05.2021
A Rs 5000/- B Rs 10000/- C Rs 15000/-
1683. For the purpose of deduction in respect of maintenance including medical treatment of a
dependant who is a person with disability (Section 80DD), "person with disability" means a
person having "disability" not less than______. Circular FD 16/2021 dated 27.05.2021
D 60 per cent E None of the above Answer: B
1684. Where the income of the employee includes any income by way of interest on deposits (not
being time deposit) in a saving account with a banking company, Co - operative society or a post
office, a deduction of such interest shall be allowed to the maximum extent of Rs. ______.
A Rs. 5,000/- B Rs. 10,000/- C Rs. 20,000/-
1685. Deduction upto Rs ______ is available to senior citizens towards interest on deposits with bank/
co-operative bank/ post office (it may be interest on fixed deposits, interest on savings account
or any other interest). Circular FD 16/2021 dated 27.05.2021
A Rs. 20,000/- B Rs. 25,000/- C Rs 50,000/-
1686. In Respect of Physically Handicapped Persons (including blindness), The amount of deduction
to be allowed is Rs.______. Higher deduction of Rs. ______ is allowed in respect of a person with
severe disability (disability over 80%). Circular FD 16/2021 dated 27.05.2021
A Rs.50,000/- ; Rs. B Rs.50,000/- ; Rs. C Rs.75,000/- ; Rs.
1,00,000/- 1,25,000/- 1,25,000/-
D Rs.75,000/- ; Rs. E None of the above Answer: C
1,50,000/-
1687. If a person fails to comply with the provisions of section 203A in respect of quoting of tax
deduction / collection account number, he shall, on an order passed by the Assessing Officer,
pay, by way of penalty, a sum of Rs.______. Circular FD 16/2021 dated 27.05.2021
A Rs. 5,000/- B Rs. 10,000/- C Rs. 20,000/-
1688. It is obligatory for all persons responsible for deducting tax at source to obtain and quote TAN in
all challan /TDS certificates, statement and other documents. Failure to comply with these
179
provisions will attract penalty of Rs.______ under section 272BB. Circular FD 16/2021 dated
27.05.2021
A Rs. 5,000/- B Rs. 10,000/- C Rs. 20,000/-
Page

1689. If a person fails to apply for tax deduction account number (TAN) or after allotment of such
number fails to quote such number in challan forms for payment of tax under section 200,
certificate under section 203 and returns under section 206, then he shall be liable for penalty of
a sum which may extend to Rs.______. Circular FD 16/2021 dated 27.05.2021
A Rs. 5,000/- B Rs. 10,000/- C Rs. 20,000/-
1690. If any person fails to furnish certificate of tax deducted at source, under section 203, he shall be
liable for penalty under section 272A. Such penalty shall be Rs.______ for every day during
which the failure continues. Circular FD 16/2021 dated 27.05.2021
A Rs.500 B Rs.100 C Rs.200
D Rs.250 E None of the above Answer: B
1691. Payment of insurance premium on deposits to DICGC is required to be paid by the Bank in
advance every half year on the basis of assessable deposits of the Bank as on closing day of the
respective half year. Delay in payment of advance premium/submission of Statement to DICGC
attracts penal interest @ _______% per annum over bank rate. Circular FD 12/2021 dated
31.03.2021
A 6%. B 8%. C 10%.
1692. As per Policy for Adoption of Fintech solutions for existing and new Businesses of the Bank,
FinTech division can procure solution within specific requirement of ₹ ______ per project
including support and maintenance. Circular FINTECH 01/2021 dated 23.09.2021
D ₹ 5 crore E None of the above Answer: C
1693. To be considered Startup FinTechs under the Policy for Adoption of Fintech solutions, The
firm/company should have a Paid-up Capital/Net worth of minimum ₹ ______. It should not be
older than a period of ______ years from the date of its incorporation/registration. Turnover
should be less than ₹ 100 crores in any of the previous financial years. Circular FINTECH 01/2021
dated 23.09.2021
A ₹ 10 lac ; ten years ; B ₹ 20 lac ; ten years ; C ₹ 20 lac ; seven years
₹ 100 crores ₹ 100 crores ; ₹ 100 crores
D ₹ 10 lac ; ten years ; E None of the above Answer: A
₹ 500 crores
1694. To be considered FinTechs other than Startups under the Policy for Adoption of Fintech
solutions, The firm/company should have a Paid-up Capital/ Net worth of minimum ₹ ______ and
the firm/company should have achieved minimum annual turnover of ₹ ______ from the FinTech
business for its Indian operations during preceding financial year. Circular FINTECH 01/2021
dated 23.09.2021
A ₹ 1 crore ; ₹ 5 crore B ₹ 1 crore ; ₹ 10 crore C ₹ 5 crore ; ₹ 10 crore
D ₹ 5 crore ; ₹ 50 crore E None of the above Answer: A
1695. Procurement of Fintech product(s) and/ or services and solution from startup companies would
be limited to a total project(s) cost of Rs. ______ per FinTech/ Startup company (ies) for software
application including application support for up to ______ years. Circular FINTECH 01/2021 dated
23.09.2021
A Rs. 1 crores ; three B Rs. 1 crores ; five years C Rs. 3 crores ; three
years years
D Rs. 3 crores ; five years E None of the above Answer: B
1696. In case of Nomination Based Procurement, the total project cost would be limited to a cost of Rs.
______ per FinTech/Startup company (ie’s) for software application, support, and maintenance
for a period up to ______ years. Circular FINTECH 01/2021 dated 23.09.2021
A Rs. 50 Lakhs ; one B Rs. 75 Lakhs ; one C Rs. 50 Lakhs ; three
years years years
180
D Rs. 75 Lakhs ; three E None of the above Answer: D

years
1697. Recovery of Debts and Bankruptcy Act, 1993 enables the Banks to recover its dues for amount
Page
Rs.______ or more. Circular LAW 09/2021 dated 21.06.2021



1698. Commercial Courts Act, 2015 enables the Banks to recover its dues for amount of Rs.3 lakh and
upto Rs. ______.. Circular LAW 09/2021 dated 21.06.2021
1699. District Civil Courts enables the Banks to recover its dues for amount of less than Rs. ______ in
terms of Civil Procedure Code.. Circular LAW 09/2021 dated 21.06.2021
1700. For recoverable amount more than Rs.______, recovery suit is to be filed before Debt Recovery
Tribunals under the Recovery Of Debts Due to Banks and Financial Institutions Act, 1993.
Circular LAW 06/2021 dated 31.03.2021
1701. For recoverable amount between Rs.______ and upto Rs. ______, recovery suit can be filed
before the Civil Courts, in terms of Civil Procedure Code, or before the Commercial Court.
A Rs.1 lakh ; Rs. 10 Lakh B Rs.3 lakh ; Rs. 10 Lakh C Rs.1 lakh ; Rs. 20 Lakh
D Rs.3 lakh ; Rs. 20 Lakh E None of the avove Answer: D
1702. DRT issues summons in the names of defendants and the services of summons are required to
be made upon each of the defendant. On service of summons, the defendant is required to file
reply within ______ days or further time granted. Circular LAW 06/2021 dated 31.03.2021
1703. The proceedings before Civil Court commence by filing of plaint along with the documents relied
upon. The defendant appears and files written statement within ______ days from the date of
service of Summons. Circular LAW 06/2021 dated 31.03.2021
1704. In case of deposit accounts and lockers having nomination/survivorship mandate, the claim in
respect of the deceased customer should be settled and payment to the nominee / survivor(s)
should be released within a period not exceeding ______days from the date of receipt of the
claim Circular LAW 05/2021 dated 31.03.2021
1705. In the case of deposit accounts and lockers without survivorship mandate / nomination, the
claim in respect of the deceased customer should be settled, in accordance with the bank’s
guidelines, within ______ from the date on which the requisite documents are submitted. Circular
LAW 05/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A 15 days B one month C two month
D three month E None of the avove Answer: B
1706. In respect of claims up to the value of Rs.______, in place of Power of Attorney, a Letter of
Consent-cum-Relinquishment, duly notarized /attested, may be executed by the legal heirs in
favour of one of the major legal heirs authorizing him/her to lodge claim, execute documents,
receive claim amount, etc. Circular LAW 05/2021 dated 31.03.2021
D Rs.10.00 lac E None of the avove Answer: C
1707. In claim cases involving an amount / value not exceeding Rs.______, payment may be made to
the legal heirs of the deceased customer, after relying on the declaration made in the claim form
about the legal heirs of the deceased, duly attested by Notary/Magistrate. Circular LAW 05/2021
dated 31.03.2021
181
A Rs. 25000/- B Rs. 50000/- C Rs. 1 Lacs

D Rs. 2 Lacs E None of the avove Answer: B
1708. In claim cases involving an amount / value exceeding Rs.______, confidential enquiry be made
Page
by the branch about the legal heirs of the deceased customer. Circular LAW 05/2021 dated

31.03.2021
A Rs. 25000/- B Rs. 50000/- C Rs. 1 Lacs
1709. In the event of death of a Karta, Bank can allow the new Karta to continue to operate the existing
account on the basis of an affidavit cum indemnity, from the surviving members and the legal
heirs alongwith two guarantors, in HUF accounts having balances upto Rs. ______. Circular LAW
05/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A Rs. 25000/- B Rs. 50000/- C Rs. 1 Lacs
1710. On the death of the Karta/Coparcener, the operation in HUF accounts having balance more than
Rs ______ be stopped and dealt with as a claim case. Circular LAW 05/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A Rs. 25000/- B Rs. 50000/- C Rs. 1 Lacs
1711. When an account holder / locker hirer is reportedly missing for the last ______ or more is
presumed to be dead in terms of Sections 107 and 108 of the Indian Evidence Act. Circular LAW
05/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A five years B seven years C ten years
D fifteen years E None of the avove Answer: V
1712. In case where the bank’s customer is reportedly missing for last seven and more years but order
from the court is not produced by the claimants with regard to presumption of death of such
missing customer and the claim amount/value does not exceed Rs. ______. Circular LAW 05/2021
dated 31.03.2021
A Rs. 1.00 Lac B Rs. 2.00 Lac C Rs. 3.00 Lac
D Rs.5.00 lac. E None of the avove Answer: D
1713. The claim in respect of the account holder / locker hirer, who has reportedly been missing for
less than 7 years, can also be considered by the bank where the total amount / value of the claim
does not exceed the threshold limit of Rs. ______ subject to the condition that a minimum period
of ______ years has elapsed from the date of lodging of FIR. Circular LAW 05/2021 dated
31.03.2021
A Rs. 1.00 Lac ; 1 years B Rs. 2.00 Lac ; 2 years C Rs. 3.00 Lac ; 3 years
D Rs.5.00 lac. ; 5 years E None of the avove Answer: B
1714. To sanction settlement of claim cases including lockers and safe custody boxes (where title is
legally established), Power to settle deceased claim case for Incumbent In-charge in Scale I will
be Rs. ______. Circular LAW 05/2021 dated 31.03.2021
A Rs. 5.00 Lakh B Rs. 10.00 Lakh C Rs. 15.00 Lakh
D Full E None of the avove Answer: A
legally established), Power to settle deceased claim case for Incumbent In-charge in Scale II will
D Full E None of the avove Answer: B
legally established), Power to settle deceased claim case for Incumbent In-charge in Scale III will
D Full E None of the avove Answer: C
legally established), Power to settle deceased claim case for Incumbent In-charge in Scale
IV/V/VI will be Rs. ______. Circular LAW 05/2021 dated 31.03.2021
D Full E None of the avove Answer: D
182
not legally established), Power to settle deceased claim case for Incumbent In-charge in Scale I
will be Rs. ______ on the basis of Indemnity Agreement alone (Without Surety). Circular LAW
Page
05/2021 dated 31.03.2021


D Rs. 3.00 Lakh E None of the avove Answer: A
not legally established), Power to settle deceased claim case for Incumbent In-charge in Scale II
05/2021 dated 31.03.2021
D Rs. 3.00 Lakh E None of the avove Answer: B
not legally established), Power to settle deceased claim case for Incumbent In-charge in Scale III
05/2021 dated 31.03.2021
D Rs. 3.00 Lakh E None of the avove Answer: C
not legally established), Power to settle deceased claim case for Incumbent In-charge in Scale IV
05/2021 dated 31.03.2021
D Rs. 3.00 Lakh E None of the avove Answer: D
not legally established), Power to settle deceased claim case for Incumbent In-charge in Scale I
will be Rs. ______ on the basis of Indemnity Agreement with Surety. Circular LAW 05/2021 dated
31.03.2021
D Rs. 25.00 Lakh E None of the avove Answer: A
not legally established), Power to settle deceased claim case for Incumbent In-charge in Scale II
31.03.2021
not legally established), Power to settle deceased claim case for Incumbent In-charge in Scale III
31.03.2021
not legally established), Power to settle deceased claim case for Incumbent In-charge in Scale IV
31.03.2021
1726. It has now been decided that as defined by Department for Promotion of Industry and Internal
Trade (DPIIT) an entity shall be considered as a Startup if its turnover for any of the financial
years has not exceeded ______. Circular GSAD 39/2021 dated 28.09.2021
1727. It has now been decided that as defined by Department for Promotion of Industry and Internal
Trade (DPIIT) an entity shall be considered as a Startup up to ______ years from the date of its
183
incorporation/ registration Circular GSAD 39/2021 dated 28.09.2021

A five years B seven years C ten years
D fifteen years E None of the above Answer: A
Page
1728. As per Office Memorandum No.F.1/26/2018-PPD dated 09.08.2021: Amendment in Rule 149

General Financial Rules (GFRs) 2017, in the case of procurement of Automobiles only through
Government e-Marketplace (GeM), the ceiling of direct purchase will be Rs. ______ instead of Rs.
25,000/-. Circular GSAD 39/2021 dated 28.09.2021
A Rs. 10,00,000/- B Rs. 20,00,000/- C Rs. 30,00,000/-
1729. As per revised guidelines, Powers for purchase of SFF for office use for Incumbents of Scale-I &
II will be Rs. ______ per anum. Circular GSAD 38/2021 dated 24.09.2021
A Rs.0.25 Lacs B Rs.0.50 Lacs C Rs.0.75 Lacs
D Rs.1.00 Lacs E None of the above Answer: B
1730. As per revised guidelines, Powers for purchase of SFF for office use for Incumbents of Scale-III
& IV will be Rs. ______ per anum. Circular GSAD 38/2021 dated 24.09.2021
A Scale-III: Rs.0.50 B Scale-III: Rs.0.75 C Scale-III: Rs.0.50 Lacs pa
Lacs pa Lacs pa Scale IV: Rs.1.50 Lacs pa
Scale IV: Rs.1.00 Lacs pa Scale IV: Rs.1.00 Lacs pa
D Scale-III: Rs.0.75 E None of the above Answer: B
Lacs pa
Scale IV: Rs.1.50 Lacs pa
1731. As per revised guidelines, ______ at HO, GSAD/ ZO / CO and above have full powers for payment
of contractors bills/refund of security deposits / advances/ ad-hoc payment in terms of approved
contract. Circular GSAD 38/2021 dated 24.09.2021
A Chief Managers B Asstt. General manager C Dy. General manager
D General manager E None of the above Answer: A
1732. As per Procurement Policy of our Bank related to GSAD and Non IT Division, Procurement from
Government e- Market Place(Goods & services) up to Rs.______ may be made through any of the
available suppliers on the Government e- Market Place (GeM Portal), meeting the requisite
quality, specification and delivery period. Circular GSAD 21/2021 dated 10.05.2021
D Rs.1.00 Lakh E None of the above Answer: A
Government e- Market Place(Goods & services) above Rs.0.25 Lakh and up to Rs.______
(excluding automobiles) may be made through the GeM Seller having lowest price amongst the
available sellers(excluding automobiles) of at least three different manufacturers, on GeM,
meeting the requisite quality, specification and delivery period. Circular GSAD 21/2021 dated
10.05.2021
D Rs.10.00 Lakh E None of the above Answer: C
Government e- Market Place(Goods & services) above Rs.______h may be made through the
supplier having lowest price meeting the requisite quality, specification and delivery period after
mandatorily obtaining bids through tendering , using online bidding and reverse auction ( if
approved by competent authority) tool provided on GeM. Circular GSAD 21/2021 dated 10.05.2021
1735. As per Procurement Policy of our Bank related to GSAD and Non IT Division, Purchase of goods
under Direct Procurement from Market upto the value of Rs. 0.25 Lakh on each occasion may be
made without inviting quotations or bids on the basis of a certificate to be recorded by the
procuring officer Circular GSAD 21/2021 dated 10.05.2021
D Rs.1.00 Lakh E None of the above Answer: A
1736. In case certain items are not available on GeM portal or are available on a higher price than
market rate purchase of such goods costing above Rs. 0.25 Lakh and upto Rs.______ on each
184
occasion may be made on the recommendations of a duly constituted Local Purchase

Committee consisting of three members. Circular GSAD 21/2021 dated 10.05.2021
Page

1737. As per Procurement Policy of our Bank related to GSAD and Non IT Division, For procurement of

goods etc. having value upto Rs.______, limited tender method should be adopted. Two bid
tender to be called from the vendors/contractors empanelled with bank for different categories.
Circular GSAD 21/2021 dated 10.05.2021
D Rs.25.00 Lakh E None of the above Answer: D
1738. For attending Small/ Urgent Works having value upto Rs.______ work may be carried out directly
through either empanelled contractor or locally available market contractor. Circular GSAD
21/2021 dated 10.05.2021
D Rs.1.00 Lakh E None of the above Answer: B
1739. For works having value above Rs.0.50 Lakh upto Rs.______ and not covered in any panel , the
work may be entrusted after obtaining three quotations from the market and award the work to
the contractor quoted the lowest amount after recording reason subject to reasonability of the
rates. Circular GSAD 21/2021 dated 10.05.2021
1740. Limited manual tender method is to be adopted for procurement of goods/works/consultancy
services/ Non Consultancy services etc. having value upto Rs.______ from the
vendors/contractors empanelled with bank for different categories. Circular GSAD 21/2021 dated
10.05.2021
1741. E-tender method is to be adopted for procurement of goods/works/consultancy services/ Non
Consultancy services etc. having value above Rs.______ upto maximum ceiling value of
respective category. Circular GSAD 21/2021 dated 10.05.2021
1742. Confidential report of past performance from the employer to be mandatorily obtained for
technical eligibility of bidders for procurement of goods, works or services having estimated
value above Rs.______. Circular GSAD 21/2021 dated 10.05.2021
A Rs.20.00 Lakh B Rs.25.00 Lakh C Rs.50.00 lakh
1743. As per Procurement Policy of our Bank related to GSAD and Non IT Division, For all procurement
where the estimated value is upto Rs.1.00 Crore, ______ days time be given to the bidders for
bidding. Circular GSAD 21/2021 dated 10.05.2021
where the estimated value is above Rs.1.00 Crore and upto Rs.10.00 Crore, ______ days time be
given to the bidders for bidding. Circular GSAD 21/2021 dated 10.05.2021
where the estimated value is above Rs.10.00 Crore, ______ days time be given to the bidders for
bidding. Circular GSAD 21/2021 dated 10.05.2021
1746. For the firms registered under MSME during procurement of goods through open tender, Every
Bank office engaged in procurement of goods shall set an annual target for ______%
procurement from MSE Sector out of the total procurement of goods done through open tender
and a sub-target of ______% out of annual procurement earmarked for procurement from MSEs
185
owned by SC/ST entrepreneurs.. Circular GSAD 21/2021 dated 10.05.2021

A 10% ; 4% B 20% ; 4% C 10% ; 5%
Page
1747. As per RBI guidelines for Basel III Regulation, valuations of properties owned by the bank are to

be obtained, from two professionally qualified independent valuers, at least once in every ______
years. Circular GSAD 16/2021 dated 19.04.2021
1748. As per RBI guidelines for Basel III Regulation, The Bank should obtain minimum two
independent valuation reports for Bank’s owned land & buildings valued at Rs. ______ or above.
Circular GSAD 16/2021 dated 19.04.2021
D Rs. 100 crore E None of the above Answer: B
1749. Our Bank has decided to revalue all its land & buildings once in every ______ years and will
obtain minimum two independent valuation reports for properties valued at Rs. ______ or above
from its empanelled valuers. Circular GSAD 16/2021 dated 19.04.2021
A 2 years ; Rs. 50 crore B 3 years ; Rs. 50 crore C 2 years ; Rs. 100 crore
D 3 years ; Rs. 100 crore E None of the above Answer: B
1750. As per our bank's policy for Depreciation on Fixed Assets owned by the Bank, Fixed items for
office use amounting less than Rs.______ and/or having useful life of less than 12 months from
the date of acquisition to be recognised as expense. Circular GSAD 15/2021 dated 19.04.2021
A Rs.10,000/- B Rs.15,000/- C Rs.20,000/-
1751. No depreciation is to be provided on cost of land where the same is ascertainable. Depreciation
@______% p.a. (keeping in view the useful life of the property as 40 years) is to be provided on
Construction Cost where the land cost is segregated and on total cost where the land cost is not
ascertainable and cannot be segregated. Circular GSAD 15/2021 dated 19.04.2021
A 2.5%. B 5%. C 10%
1752. No depreciation is required to be provided on cost of land in respect of properties acquired on
Perpetual Leasehold basis where no lease period is mentioned, but the construction cost on
such land shall be depreciated @ ______% p.a. Circular GSAD 15/2021 dated 19.04.2021
A 2.5%. B 5%. C 10%
1753. Where the land cost is not segregated the total cost (land + construction) is required to be
depreciated @ ______% p.a. (keeping in view the useful life of the property as 40 years. Circular
GSAD 15/2021 dated 19.04.2021
A 2.5%. B 5%. C 10%
1754. Mattresses, carpet etc. is required to be depreciated @ ______% p.a. Circular GSAD 15/2021 dated
19.04.2021
A 10% B 15% C 20%
D 33.33%. E None of the above Answer: C
1755. Mobile Phone Instruments and Computers, ATMs and related items, laptop, I-pad etc :- Servers,
Network Equipments& Automated Teller Machines (including software forming an integral part of
computer hardware) is required to be depreciated @ ______% p.a. Circular GSAD 15/2021 dated
19.04.2021
A 10% B 15% C 20%
D 33.33%. E None of the above Answer: D
1756. Machinery, electrical and miscellaneous articles and Motor cars and cycles is required to be
depreciated @ ______% p.a. Circular GSAD 15/2021 dated 19.04.2021
A 10% B 15% C 20%
D 33.33%. E None of the above Answer: B
1757. Cost of Application Software/ Operating System/ Data Base amounting to Rs, ______ and less
are to be charged to revenue expenditure directly. Circular GSAD 15/2021 dated 19.04.2021
186
A Rs.10,000/- B Rs.15,000/- C Rs.20,000/-

1758. Depreciation on Software up to Rs. 25,000/- will be provided on straight line method @ ______%
Page
per annum. Circular GSAD 15/2021 dated 19.04.2021

A 10% B 15% C 20%

D 33.33%. E None of the above Answer: D
1759. As per our bank's policy for sale of Non-Core Banking Assets (Immovable Properties), Any plot
owned by bank which is not put to use for the last ______ years and its utilization could not be
finalized, may be considered for Sale. Circular GSAD 13/2021 dated 06.04.2021
1760. As per our bank's policy for sale of Non-Core Banking Assets (Immovable Properties), Before
taking steps for arranging sale of the NCBA, the property shall be got valued from two Bank’s
approved valuers by the concerned Circle Office where IP is positioned. The valuation reports
should not be more than ______ old. Circular GSAD 13/2021 dated 06.04.2021
1761. As per our bank's policy for sale of Non-Core Banking Assets (Immovable Properties), Before
taking steps for arranging sale of the NCBA, Legal opinion/NEC from the approved counsel will
be obtained which should not be older than ______and same will be vetted by Law Officer at
ZO/HO.. Circular GSAD 13/2021 dated 06.04.2021
1762. Housing Loan Limit under Housing loan scheme for members of staff will be Rs. ______ for
Subordinate and Rs. ______ for Clerks. Circular HRDD 866/2021 dated 11.11.2021
A Rs.25 Lac ; Rs.30 Lac B Rs.25 Lac ; Rs.45 Lac C Rs.30 Lac ; Rs.45 Lac
D Rs.40 Lac ; Rs.45 Lac E None of the above Answer: C
1763. Loan Limit for Repair/ Renovation/ Furnishing under Housing loan scheme for members of staff
will be Rs. ______ for Subordinate and Rs. ______ for Clerks. Circular HRDD 866/2021 dated
11.11.2021
D Rs.8 Lac ; Rs.12 Lac E None of the above Answer: D
1764. Housing Loan Limit under Housing loan scheme for members of staff will be Rs. ______ for
officers up to Scale IV and Rs. ______ for officers of Scale V and above. Circular HRDD 866/2021
dated 11.11.2021
D Rs.65 Lac ; Rs.80 Lac E None of the above Answer: D
1765. Loan Limit for Repair/ Renovation/ Furnishing under Housing loan scheme for members of staff
for all officers irrespective of scale will be Rs. ______ . Circular HRDD 866/2021 dated 11.11.2021
A Rs.10 Lac B Rs.20 Lac C Rs.30 Lac
D Rs.50 Lac E None of the above Answer: B
1766. Under Housing loan scheme for members of staff , Cost of project will include stamp duty,
registration charges, any tax imposed by Govt. and amount of advances may be computed after
providing for ______% margin on the cost of project subject to the fulfillment of other eligibility
criteria. Circular HRDD 866/2021 dated 11.11.2021
A 5% B 7.50% C 10%
1767. Net take home salary under Housing loan scheme for members of staff will be ______% of Gross
Income for Income up to Rs.50000/- and ______% of Gross Income for Income above Rs.50000/-
after taking into account all deductions including notional interest of sanctioned Staff Clean OD
Limit. Circular HRDD 866/2021 dated 11.11.2021
A 60% ; 40% B 50% ; 40% C 50% ; 30%
D 40% ; 30% E None of the above Answer: D
1768. Under Housing loan scheme for members of staff, ______% of the loan sanction or ______% of
the actual cost of plots falling in all areas, whichever is less will be disbursed for purchase of
187
land & construction thereon Circular HRDD 866/2021 dated 11.11.2021

A 50% ; 80% B 40% ; 80% C 50% ; 90%
Page
1769. For construction only where the land is already owned, the loan amount under Housing loan

scheme for members of staff will be disbursed in ______ equal tranches depending upon the
stage of construction and after ensuring end use of previous drawls. Circular HRDD 866/2021
dated 11.11.2021
A 2 (Two) B 3 (Three) C 4 (Four)
D 5 (Five) E None of the above Answer: C
1770. For facility of repairs/renovation/enlargement of existing premises under Housing loan scheme
for members of staff will be disbursed in ______ equal tranches after ensuring end use of
previous drawl. Circular HRDD 866/2021 dated 11.11.2021
A 2 (Two) B 3 (Three) C 4 (Four)
D 5 (Five) E None of the above Answer: A
1771. For construction of house under Housing loan scheme for members of staff, the sanctioned
amount should be availed and construction should be completed as per estimate within
maximum ______ years from the date of first disbursement. Circular HRDD 866/2021 dated
11.11.2021
A one year B 1 and half years C 2 years
D 2 and half years E None of the above Answer: C
1772. The borrowing member of the staff should give an undertaking to start construction on plot
within maximum period of ______ from the date of disbursement of loan for the purchase of the
plot. Circular HRDD 866/2021 dated 11.11.2021
A one year B 1 and half years C 2 years
D 2 and half years E None of the above Answer: A
1773. For purchase of ready built house/flat (freehold) under Housing loan scheme for members of
staff, the acquisition of built up House/Flat and deposit of Title Deed should be completed within
______ of date of disbursement. Circular HRDD 866/2021 dated 11.11.2021
1774. For purchase of house/flat from Co-operative Group House Building Societies under Housing
loan scheme for members of staff, creation of valid and legally enforceable charge over the
property in favour of bank should be completed within ______ of date of disbursement. Circular
HRDD 866/2021 dated 11.11.2021
1775. Facility for repairs/renovation of existing premises under Housing loan scheme for members of
staff will be available after ______ years of initial construction/original purchase in case of ready
built house/flat and will thereafter be further sanctioned after minimum ______ years period, on
adjustment of the existing repair loan. Circular HRDD 866/2021 dated 11.11.2021
A two years ; three years B three years ; two years C three years ; three
years
D two years ; two years E None of the above Answer: C
1776. In case of construction of new house under Housing loan scheme for members of staff, the
repayment will commence from the month following the completion of house or ______ months
after the date of disbursement, whichever is earlier. Circular HRDD 866/2021 dated 11.11.2021
1777. In case of purchase of built-up house under Housing loan scheme for members of staff, the
repayment will commence from the month following the month of purchase or ______ months
after the date of disbursement, whichever is earlier. Circular HRDD 866/2021 dated 11.11.2021
1778. In case of purchase of flat etc under construction stage from Coop society/builder/developer or
from PSU/Govt agencies like DDA, NOIDA, HUDA, PUDA etc and allotment of plots by Govt
188
agencies, the maximum permissible construction period under Housing loan scheme for
members of staff will be as per the builder construction plan/schedule or ______ months
whichever is lower. Circular HRDD 866/2021 dated 11.11.2021
Page


1779. Any employee availing the Staff Housing Loan for purchase of a 2nd house should not sell such
house/property within a period of ______ years from the date of availment of the loan for
purchase of the 2nd house. Circular HRDD 866/2021 dated 11.11.2021
A 5 years B 7years C 10 years
1780. Under IBA’s Group Medical Insurance Policy for retired employees, The Officers and Award Staff
are covered under the Base Policy coverage of Rs. ______ Lakhs and Rs. ______ Laks
respectively. Circular HRMD 595/2021 dated 28.09.2021
A Rs. 3 Lakhs ; Rs. 2 Laks B Rs. 3 Lakhs ; Rs. 3 Laks C Rs. 4 Lakhs ; Rs. 3
Laks
D Rs. 5 Lakhs ; Rs. 3 Laks E None of the above Answer: C
1781. Under IBA’s Group Medical Insurance Policy for retired employees, The maximum coverage for
Officers, if opted for Maximum Super Top Up will be Max. Rs. ______. Circular HRMD 595/2021
dated 28.09.2021
A Rs.3 Lakh B Rs.5 Lakh C Rs.7 Lakh
D Rs. 9 Lakhs E None of the above Answer: D
1782. Under IBA’s Group Medical Insurance Policy for retired employees, The maximum coverage for
Workmen, if opted for Maximum Super Top Up will be Max. Rs.______. Circular HRMD 595/2021
dated 28.09.2021
A Rs.3 Lakh B Rs.5 Lakh C Rs.7 Lakh
D Rs. 9 Lakhs E None of the above Answer: C
1783. Under IBA’s Group Medical Insurance Policy for retired employees, Officer, who opt Rs. 3 Lakh
Sum Insured in base policy, can avail up to Rs. ______ Lakhs SI in Super Top Up policy and
those officer who opt Rs. 4 Lakhs Sum Insured in base policy, can avail up to Rs. ______ SI in
Super Top Up Policy. Circular HRMD 595/2021 dated 28.09.2021
A Rs. 3 Lakhs ; Rs. 4 B Rs. 3 Lakhs ; Rs. 5 C Rs. 4 Lakhs ; Rs. 5
Lakhs Lakhs Lakhs
D Rs. 4 Lakhs ; Rs. 4 E None of the above Answer: C
Lakhs
1784. One Time subscription under “PNB Hospitalization Contributory Benefit Scheme for Retired
Employees” scheme will be Rs.______. Circular HRMD 586/2021 dated 22.07.2021
A Rs.1000/- B Rs.2000/- C Rs.3000/-
1785. In terms of Joint Note/ Bi-partite Settlement dated 11.11.2020, The PLI (Performance Linked
Incentive) of ______ days shall be payable to all employees annually over and above normal
salary payable if the Y-o-Y Growth in Operating Profit of the bank is 5% to 10%. Circular HRMD
580/2021 dated 08.07.2021
salary payable if the Bank has Net Profit and if the Y-o-Y Growth in Operating Profit of the bank
is >10 to 15%. Circular HRMD 580/2021 dated 08.07.2021
salary payable if the Bank has Net Profit and if the Y-o-Y Growth in Operating Profit of the bank
is >15% and if the Bank has Net Profit. Circular HRMD 580/2021 dated 08.07.2021
189

1788. In terms of Joint Note/ Bi-partite Settlement dated 11.11.2020, If a Bank has growth in Operating
Profit of 5% & more, but there is no Net Profit, then minimum PLI of ______days will be payable.
Page
Circular HRMD 580/2021 dated 08.07.2021


1789. To meet unanticipated medical expenses or any other expenses incurred by the staff member
due to Covid-19, An “Interest Free Salary Advance” for the staff members has been approved by
our bank. Limit under this scheme in case of officer will be one months’ salary - Basic + DA +
Professional Qualification pay + Fixed Permanent pay with maximum upto Rs. _______ for
Officers upto Scale-III and Rs. ______ for Officers Officers in Scale IV and Above. Circular HRMD
575/2021 dated 04.06.2021
A Rs.100000/- ; B Rs.150000/- ; C Rs.200000/- ;
Rs.200000/- Rs.200000/- Rs.200000/-
D Rs.150000/- ; E None of the above Answer: B
Rs.300000/-
1790. To meet unanticipated medical expenses or any other expenses incurred by the staff member
due to Covid-19, An “Interest Free Salary Advance” for the staff members has been approved by
our bank. Limit under this scheme in case of Award Staff will be one months’ salary - Basic + DA
+ Professional Qualification pay + Fixed Permanent pay + Special Pay with maximum upto Rs.
_______ for Subordinate Staff and Rs. ______ for Clerical Staff. Circular HRMD 575/2021 dated
04.06.2021
A Rs.50000/- ; B Rs.50000/- ; C Rs.75000/- ;
Rs.100000/- Rs.750000/- Rs.100000/-
D Rs.50000/- ; E None of the above Answer: A
Rs.200000/-
1791. The net take home salary of the employee should not be less than ______% of the monthly Gross
Salary under Interest Free Salary Advance to member of staff or/and the dependent family
member/s who infected with COVID-19. Circular HRMD 575/2021 dated 04.06.2021
A 25% B 30% C 55%
1792. Our bank has obtained a New Group Personal Accidental (GPA) Insurance Policy at Bank’s cost
for the Staff members of the bank. Sum Insured under this scheme would be Rs. ______ for
Workmen Staff. Circular HRMD 572/2021 dated 27.05.2021
1793. Sum Insured under the New Group Personal Accidental (GPA) Insurance Policy at Bank’s cost
for the Staff members of the bank would be Rs. ______ for Scale I,II & III and Rs. ______ for
Scale IV to V. Circular HRMD 572/2021 dated 27.05.2021
A Rs. 25 Lakh ; Rs. 50 B Rs. 25 Lakh ; Rs. 100 C Rs. 75 Lakh ; Rs. 150
Lakh Lakh Lakh
D Rs. 100 Lakh ; Rs. 150 E None of the above Answer: A
Lakh
1794. Sum Insured under tthe New Group Personal Accidental (GPA) Insurance Policy at Bank’s cost
for the Staff members of the bank would be Rs. ______ for Scale VI to VIII and Rs. ______ for MD
& CEO/ED/CVO. Circular HRMD 572/2021 dated 27.05.2021
A Rs. 25 Lakh ; Rs. 50 B Rs. 25 Lakh ; Rs. 100 C Rs. 75 Lakh ; Rs. 150
Lakh Lakh Lakh
D Rs. 100 Lakh ; Rs. 150 E None of the above Answer: C
Lakh
1795. Education Benefit under the New Group Personal Accidental (GPA) Insurance Policy at Bank’s
cost for the Staff members of the bank will be ______% of CSI or Rs. ______ whichever is lower.
A 10% ; Rs. 50,000/- B 20% ; Rs. 50,000/- C 10% ; Rs. 1 lac
D 20% ; Rs. 1 lac E None of the above Answer: C
1796. Reimbursement for Body Repatriation under the New Group Personal Accidental (GPA)
190
Insurance Policy at Bank’s cost for the Staff members of the bank will be Rs. ______ for India
and INR ______ for overseas. Circular HRMD 572/2021 dated 27.05.2021
A Rs. 10,000/- ; Rs. 1 Lac B Rs. 15,000/- ; Rs. 1 Lac C Rs. 25,000/- ; Rs. 1 Lac
Page
D Rs. 25,000/- ; Rs. 2 Lac E None of the above Answer: C

1797. Expenses for external aids like prosthesis/Artificial Limbs/Device etc up to Rs ______ will be
reimbursed under the New Group Personal Accidental (GPA) Insurance Policy at Bank’s cost for
the Staff members of the bank. Circular HRMD 572/2021 dated 27.05.2021
A Rs 100,000/- B Rs 150,000/- C Rs 200,000/-
D Rs 250,000/- E None of the above Answer: A
1798. Cost of supporting items like crutches, stretcher etc up to Rs ______ will be reimbursed under
the New Group Personal Accidental (GPA) Insurance Policy at Bank’s cost for the Staff members
of the bank. Circular HRMD 572/2021 dated 27.05.2021
A Rs. 10,000/- B Rs. 15,000/- C Rs. 20,000/-
D Rs. 25,000/- E None of the above Answer: A
1799. Dependent Travel will be covered in case of death up to Rs ______ under the New Group
Personal Accidental (GPA) Insurance Policy at Bank’s cost for the Staff members of the bank.
A Rs. 10,000/- B Rs. 15,000/- C Rs. 20,000/-
D Rs. 25,000/- E None of the above Answer: C
1800. Under PNB Samadhan, immediate steps should be initiated to resolve the issues within the
stipulated period of 10______ days. Circular HRMD 566/2021 dated 23.04.2021
1801. Under PNB Samadhan, In case the grievance/complaint is neither acknowledged nor any
solution is provided by the controlling Office at Level I within ______ days, it will automatically
get escalated to the next higher level i.e. Zonal Office/HO. Circular HRMD 566/2021 dated
23.04.2021
1802. Under PNB Samadhan, Upon receipt of resolution, the employee may accept the resolution
provided, if satisfied. Otherwise he/she may escalate the complaint to next higher level along
with reasons for non-acceptance of resolution provided by office at Level I, within ______ days.
1803. The deposit of gold made under the Gold Monetization Scheme (GMS) with a designated bank in
the account of the Central Government for a medium term period of ______ years or a long term
period of ______ years or for such period as may be decided from time to time by the Central
Government. Circular FEC 86/2021 dated 29.10.2021
A 3-7 years ; 12-15 years B 5-9 years ; 12-15 years C 5-7 years ; 12-15 years
D 5-7 years ; 10-15 years E None of the avove Answer: C
1804. The deposit of gold made under the Gold Monetization Scheme (GMS) with a designated bank for
a short term period of ______ years is called Short Term Bank Deposit (STBD). Circular FEC
86/2021 dated 29.10.2021
D 1-7 years E None of the avove Answer: B
1805. Interest on deposits under the Gold Monetization Scheme (GMS) will start accruing from the date
of conversion of gold deposited into tradable gold bars after refinement or ______ days after the
receipt of gold at the CPTC / GMCTA or the bank's designated branch, as the case may be,
whichever is earlier. Circular FEC 86/2021 dated 29.10.2021
1806. The quantity of gold under the Gold Monetization Scheme (GMS) will be expressed up to ______
decimals of a gram. Circular FEC 86/2021 dated 29.10.2021
191
D five E None of the avove Answer: B

1807. Under the Gold Monetization Scheme (GMS), The minimum deposit at any one time shall be
______ grams of raw gold (bars, coins, jewellery excluding stones and other metals) and
Page
maximum limit for deposit under the scheme shall be ______ grams. Circular FEC 86/2021 dated

29.10.2021
A 10 grams ; 100 grams B 10 grams ; 400 grams C 1 gram ; No limit
D 10 grams ; No limit E None of the avove Answer: D
1808. Under the Gold Monetization Scheme (GMS), A Medium Term Government Deposit (MTGD) is
allowed to be withdrawn any time after ______ years and a Long Term Government Deposit
(LTGD) after ______ years. Circular FEC 86/2021 dated 29.10.2021
A 1 year ; 3 years. B 1 year ; 5 years. C 3 years ; 5 years.
D 3 years ; 7 years. E None of the avove Answer: C
1809. Under the Gold Monetization Scheme (GMS), The amount payable to the depositor on premature
withdrawal after lock-in period but >3 and < 5 years in case of MTGD shall be applicable rate for
MTGD at the time of deposit minus______% for actual period for which the deposit has run
(years) Circular FEC 86/2021 dated 29.10.2021
A 0.250%. B 0.375%. C 0.500%.
withdrawal after lock-in period but >5 and < 7 years in case of MTGD shall be applicable rate for
A 0.250%. B 0.375%. C 0.500%.
withdrawal after lock-in period but >5 and < 7 years in case of LTGD shall be applicable rate for
A 0.250%. B 0.375%. C 0.500%.
withdrawal after lock-in period but > 7 and < 12 years in case of LTGD shall be applicable rate for
LTGD at the time of deposit minus______% for actual period for which the deposit has run
A 0.250%. B 0.375%. C 0.500%.
withdrawal after lock-in period but >12 and < 15 years in case of LTGD shall be applicable rate
for LTGD at the time of deposit minus______% for actual period for which the deposit has run
A 0.250%. B 0.375%. C 0.500%.
1814. Under the Gold Monetization Scheme (GMS), The designated banks will credit the STBD or
MLTGD, as the case may be, with the amount of 995 fineness gold as indicated in the advice
received from CPTC / GMCTA, after ______ days of receipt of gold at the CPTC / GMCTA,
regardless of whether the depositor submits the receipt for issuance of the deposit certificate or
not. Circular FEC 86/2021 dated 29.10.2021
1815. Under the Gold Monetization Scheme (GMS), On submission of the deposit receipt by the
depositor, the designated bank shall issue the final deposit certificate on the same day or ______
days after the date of the tendering of gold at the CPTC, whichever is later. Circular FEC 86/2021
dated 29.10.2021
192
1816. The parent entity or the promoters / promoter groups of the company applying to set up a
company as International Trade Financing Services Platform (ITFS) in an International Financial
Services Centres (IFSC) should have a minimum net worth of USD ______. Circular FEC 49/2021
Page
dated 22.07.2021

A USD 1 million B USD 2 million C USD 5 million

D USD 10 million E None of the avove Answer: A
1817. The company proposed to be set up as International Trade Financing Services Platform (ITFS)
shall have minimum paid up equity capital of USD ______ or equivalent in any other freely
convertible currency. Circular FEC 49/2021 dated 22.07.2021
A USD 0.1 million B USD 0.2 million C USD 0.5 million
D USD 0.10 million E None of the avove Answer: B
1818. Any Direct Investment or financial commitment (FC) exceeding USD ______ (or its equivalent) in
a financial year would require prior approval of the Reserve Bank even when the total FC of the
Indian Party is within the eligible limit under the automatic route (i.e., within 400% of the net
worth as per the last audited balance sheet). Circular FEC 46/2021 dated 25.06.2021
A USD 1 billion B USD 2 billion C USD 3 billion
D USD 5 billion E None of the avove Answer: A
1819. The non-resident entity applying for a Branch Office in India should have a financially sound
track record having a profit making track record during the immediately preceding five financial
years in the home country and net worth of not less than USD _______ or its equivalent Circular
FEC 37/2021 dated 24.05.2021
A USD 50,000 B USD 100,000 C USD 200,000
D USD 500,000 E None of the avove Answer: B
1820. The non-resident entity applying for a Liaison Office in India should have a profit making track
record during the immediately preceding three financial years in the home country and net worth
of not less than USD______ or its equivalent. Circular FEC 37/2021 dated 24.05.2021
A USD 50,000 B USD 100,000 C USD 200,000
D USD 500,000 E None of the avove Answer: A
1821. The validity period of an liaison office (LO) is generally for ______ years, except in the case of
Non-Banking Finance Companies (NBFCs) and those entities engaged in construction and
development sectors, for whom the validity period is ______ only. Circular FEC 37/2021 dated
24.05.2021
A two years ; two years B two years ; one year C three years ; two years
D three years ; three years E None of the avove Answer: C
1822. There is a general permission to non-resident companies for establishing BO in the Special
Economic Zones (SEZs) to undertake manufacturing and service activities subject to the
conditions that such BOs are functioning in those sectors where ______% FDI is permitted and
on a stand-alone basis Circular FEC 37/2021 dated 24.05.2021
A 100%. B 90%. C 80%.
1823. All eligible borrowers can raise External Commercial Borrowings (ECB) up to USD ______ or
equivalent per financial year under the automatic route. Circular FEC 30/2021 dated 15.04.2021
D USD 1000 million E None of the avove Answer: C
1824. Minimum Average Maturity Period (MAMP) for External Commercial Borrowings (ECB) will be
______ years. However, for the specific categories i.e. ECB raised by manufacturing companies
up to USD 50 million or its equivalent per financial year, Minimum Average Maturity Period
(MAMP) will be ______ years. Circular FEC 30/2021 dated 15.04.2021
D 5 years ; 1 year E None of the avove Answer: B
1825. Public Sector Oil Marketing Companies (OMCs) can raise ECB for working capital purposes with
minimum average maturity period of 3 years from all recognised lenders under the automatic
route. The overall ceiling for such ECB shall be USD ______ or equivalent. Circular FEC 30/2021
dated 15.04.2021
A USD 5 billion B USD 10 billion C USD 20 billion
193
D USD 25 billion E None of the avove Answer: B

1826. The period of Trade Credits (TC), reckoned from the date of shipment, shall be up to ______
years for import of capital goods. Circular FEC 30/2021 dated 15.04.2021
Page

D five years E None of the avove Answer: C

1827. The period of realization and repatriation of export proceeds shall be ______ from the date of
export for all exporters. Circular FEC 10/2021 dated 11.01.2021
A six months B nine months C twelve months
D fifteen months E None of the avove Answer: B
1828. In view of the outbreak of pandemic COVID-19, The period of realization and repatriation of
export proceeds has been increased from nine months to ______ from the date of export, for the
exports made up to or on July 31, 2020. Circular FEC 10/2021 dated 11.01.2021
D fifteen months E None of the avove Answer: D
1829. For goods exported to a warehouse established outside India, the proceeds shall be realized
within ______ from the date of shipment of goods. Circular FEC 10/2021 dated 11.01.2021
1830. Facility under online Payment Gateway Service Providers shall only be available for export of
goods and services of value not exceeding USD ______. Circular FEC 10/2021 dated 11.01.2021
A USD 5,000 B USD 10,000 C USD 20,000
1831. Under Diamond Dollar Account (DDA) scheme, Eligible firms and companies may be allowed to
open not more than ______ Diamond Dollar Accounts with their banks. Circular FEC 10/2021
dated 11.01.2021
D five E None of the avove Answer: D
1832. Any person resident in India may take outside India (other than to Nepal and Bhutan) currency
notes of Government of India and Reserve Bank of India up to an amount not exceeding
Rs.______. Circular FEC 10/2021 dated 11.01.2021
A Rs.5,000 B Rs.10,000 C Rs.20,000
D Rs.25,000 E None of the avove Answer: D
1833. Any person resident outside India, not being a citizen of Pakistan and Bangladesh and also not a
traveler coming from and going to Pakistan or Bangladesh, and visiting India may take outside
India currency notes of Government of India and Reserve Bank of India notes up to an amount
not exceeding Rs. ______ while exiting only through an airport. Circular FEC 10/2021 dated
11.01.2021
A Rs.5,000 B Rs.10,000 C Rs.20,000
1834. In case of Export of goods through Customs ports, within ______ days from the date of export,
exporter shall lodge the duplicate copy together with relative shipping documents and an extra
copy of the invoice to the AD named in the EDF. Circular FEC 10/2021 dated 11.01.2021
1835. In case of export of software, Contracts involving only ‘one-shot operation’, the invoice/bill
should be raised within ______ days from the date of transmission. Circular FEC 10/2021 dated
11.01.2021
1836. Firms / Companies and other organizations participating in Trade Fair/Exhibition abroad can
take/export goods for exhibition and sale outside India without the prior approval of the Reserve
Bank. Unsold exhibit items may be sold outside the exhibition/trade fair in the same country or
in a third country. It would also be permissible to 'gift’ unsold goods up to the value of USD
______ per exporter, per exhibition/trade fair. Circular FEC 10/2021 dated 11.01.2021
A USD 5,000 B USD 10,000 C USD 20,000
194

1837. To eligible under Outward Remittance under LRS through Internet Banking, Customer should be
a Resident individual (Retail Internet Banking) customer and should have a deposit account for a
Page
minimum period of ______ prior to the remittance. Circular FeX 77/2021 dated 16.11.2021

A One year B Two years C Three years

D Five years E None of the avove Answer: A
1838. Limit for single outward remittance under LRS through Internet Banking will be ______ (or its
equivalent in foreign currency, converted at Bank’s applicable TT selling rate). Circular FeX
77/2021 dated 16.11.2021
A USD10000/- B USD 25000/- C USD 50000/-
D USD 250000/- E None of the avove Answer: A
1839. Limit for cumulative value of all outward remittance under LRS through Internet Banking in a
financial year will be ______ (or its equivalent in foreign currency, converted at Bank’s
applicable TT selling rate). Circular FeX 77/2021 dated 16.11.2021
A USD 25000/- B USD 50000/- C USD 100000/-
D USD 250000/- E None of the avove Answer: C
1840. Transactions Limits for outward remittance under LRS through Internet Banking in a month will
be ______. Circular FeX 77/2021 dated 16.11.2021
A 2 B 3 C 4
1841. Under our bank's policy on gold monetization Scheme,The minimum net deposit at any one time
will be ______ grams of gold (bars, coins, jewellery excluding stones and other metals) after
certification from CPTC. Circular FeX 52/2021 dated 26.08.2021
A 1 gram B 5 grams C 10 grams
D 100 grams E None of the avove Answer: C
1842. Maximum limit for deposit under PNB gold monetization scheme will be ______grams. Circular
FeX 52/2021 dated 26.08.2021
A 100 grams B 500 grams C 10 kg
D No limit E None of the avove Answer: D
1843. The Authorised branches for Gold Business will accept up to ______ Kg of Gold under PNB Gold
Monetisation Deposit under both variants i.e. Short Term Bank Deposit (STBD) and Medium Long
Term Government Deposit (MLTGD). Circular FeX 52/2021 dated 26.08.2021
A 100 grams B 500 grams C 2 Kg
D 10 kg E None of the avove Answer: C
1844. For derivative contracts involving INR, AD Branches shall allow a user to book derivative
contracts up to USD 10 million or equivalent of notional value (outstanding at any point in time)
without the need to establish the existence of underlying exposure. Circular FeX 44/2021 dated
15.07.2021
1845. For Specific Approval of unapproved Foreign Bank, Bank should be in world rank up to ______
and out of the last three consecutive years,Foreign bank should be in profit for at least ______
years. Circular FeX 39/2021 dated 29.06.2021
A 2000 ; two years B 2000 ; three years C 4000 ; two years
D 4000 ; three years E None of the avove Answer: C
1846. Borrowers, who have availed FCL/FCTL of USD ______ or above, will have additional choice to
hedge their risk by buying “Plain Vanilla Foreign Currency-Rupee Option” contract,(subject to
availability at Treasury Division) as an alternative to booking of Forward contract. Circular FeX
32/2021 dated 07.06.2021
1847. Exporters, whose accounts have been classified as standard continuously for a period of ______
years and there is no irregularities /adverse features in the conduct of the account, will be
considered for PNB Gold Card Scheme for exporters. Circular FeX 31/2021 dated 07.06.2021
195

1848. Gold Card can also be granted to exporters undertaking exports on collection basis, provided
they have been in export business at least for ______ years including their dealings with
Page
previous bankers. Circular FeX 31/2021 dated 07.06.2021


1849. Our bank has decided that sanction and renewal of limits under Gold Card Credit Scheme upto
Rs.______ may be considered based on simplified turnovermethod. Circular FeX 31/2021 dated
07.06.2021
A Rs.1 Crore B Rs.2 Crore C Rs.5 Crore
D Rs.10 Crore E None of the avove Answer: C
1850. Under Gold Card Credit Scheme, In-principle limits will be sanctioned for a period of ______
years with a provision for automatic renewal. Circular FeX 31/2021 dated 07.06.2021
1851. The time lines for disposal of applications received for fresh sanction of export credit under the
Gold card scheme will be ______days and ______ days for Other Exporters Circular FeX 31/2021
dated 07.06.2021
A 07days ; 15 days B 15 days ; 30 days C 15 days ; 45 days
1852. The time lines for disposal of applications received for Renewal/ Review of limits of export credit
under the Gold card scheme will be ______days and ______ days for Other Exporters Circular
FeX 31/2021 dated 07.06.2021
D 25 days ; 45 days E None of the avove Answer: B
1853. The time lines for disposal of applications received for Sanction of adhoc limits under the Gold
card scheme will be ______days and ______ days for Other Exporters Circular FeX 31/2021 dated
07.06.2021
1854. standby/ adhoc limit to Gold Card Holders can be allowed for a maximum period of ______ days.
Circular FeX 31/2021 dated 07.06.2021
1855. Deferred payment arrangements (including suppliers and buyers credit) up to ______ years, are
treated as trade credits. Circular FeX 31/2021 dated 07.06.2021
A two years B three years C five years
1856. It shall not be necessary to make CurrencyDeclaration Form (CDF) where the aggregate value of
the foreign exchange in the form of currency notes, bank notes or travellerscheques brought in
by such person at any one time does not exceed USD ______ or its equivalent and/or the
aggregate value of foreign currency notes (cash portion) alone brought in by such person at any
one time does not exceed USD ______ or itsequivalent. Circular FeX 31/2021 dated 07.06.2021
A USD 5,000 ; USD B USD 5,000 ; USD C USD 10,000 ; USD
1,000 5,000 5,000
D USD 10,000 ; USD E None of the avove Answer: C
10,000
1857. No guarantee for an amount exceeding USD ______ or its equivalent, shall be issued on behalf of
service importer other than a Public Sector Company or a department/PSU/State Government.
A USD 1,00,000 B USD 2,00,000 C USD 3,00,000
D USD 500,000 E None of the avove Answer: D
1858. Where the service importer is a Public Sector Company or a Department/PSU/State Government,
no guarantee for an amount exceeding USD ______ or its equivalent shall be issued without the
prior approval of the Ministry of Finance, GOI. Circular FeX 31/2021 dated 07.06.2021
196
A USD 1,00,000 B USD 2,00,000 C USD 3,00,000

1859. AD Branches may allow advance remittance for import of goods without any ceiling subject to
Page
the certain conditions. In case the amount of advance remittance exceeds USD 2,00,000 or its

equivalent, an unconditional irrevocable SBLC backed by a counter guarantee from an

international Bank of repute situated outside India is obtained. Circular FeX 31/2021 dated
07.06.2021
A USD 1,00,000 B USD 2,00,000 C USD 3,00,000
1860. In case the Importer (other than a public Sector Company or a Department /Undertaking of the
Government of India/State Government/s) is unable to obtain irrevocable SBLC/Guarantee, the
AD may waive the same keeping in view the past track record of the importer customer for
advance remittance, up to USD ______. Circular FeX 31/2021 dated 07.06.2021
A USD 1.00 Million B USD 2.00 Million C USD 5.00 Million
D USD 10.00 Million E None of the avove Answer: C
1861. A Public Sector Company or a Department /Undertaking of the Government of India/State
Government/s which is not in a position to obtain a guarantee from an international bank of
repute against an advance payment, is required to obtain a specific waiver for the Bank
guarantee from the Ministry of Finance, Government of India before making advance remittance
exceeding USD ______. Circular FeX 31/2021 dated 07.06.2021
A USD 1,00,000 B USD 2,00,000 C USD 3,00,000
1862. AD branches may allow advance remittance for import of services without any ceiling. Where the
amount of advance exceeds USD ______ or its equivalent, a guarantee from a bank of
international repute situated outside India or a guarantee from an AD Category-I bank in India
should be obtained from the overseas beneficiary. Circular FeX 31/2021 dated 07.06.2021
A USD 1,00,000 B USD 2,00,000 C USD 3,00,000
1863. Where the importer is a Public Sector Company or a Department/ Undertaking of the Government
of India/State Government, no guarantee for an amount exceeding USD ______ or its equivalent
shall be issued without the prior approval of the Ministry of Finance, Government of India.
A USD 1,00,000 B USD 2,00,000 C USD 3,00,000
1864. Credit Report on Foreign Supplier/Manufacturer/Service provider from IBD approved credit
rating agencies or approved foreign correspondent Banks in case of advance
remittance/Contract of USD ______and above or equivalent be obtained. Circular FeX 31/2021
dated 07.06.2021
A USD 1,00,000 B USD 2,00,000 C USD 3,00,000
1865. A report in the prescribed format is required to be submitted, of all Advance remittance for
import of rough diamonds made without a Bank guarantee or Standby Letter of Credit, where the
amount of advance payment is equivalent to or exceeds USD ______, to the concerned Regional
Office of Reserve Bank of India within ______ of the close of each halfyear. Circular FeX 31/2021
dated 07.06.2021
A USD 1,000,000 ; 10 B USD 1,000,000 ; 15 C USD 5,000,000 ; 10
calendar days calendar days calendar days
D USD 5,000,000 ; 15 E None of the avove Answer: D
calendar days
1866. As a sector specific measure, airline companies which have been permitted by the Directorate
General of Civil Aviation (DGCA) to operate as a Scheduled or Non-Scheduled air transport
service (including Air Taxi Services), can make advance remittance without Bank
guarantee/SBLC, up to USD ______. Circular FeX 31/2021 dated 07.06.2021
A USD 10.00 Million B USD 20.00 Million C USD 50.00 Million
D USD 100.00 Million E None of the avove Answer: C
197
1867. In terms of Section 5 of the FEMA, persons resident in India, resident individuals, including
minors, are allowed to freely remit up to USD ______ per financial year (April – March) for any
permissible current or capital account transaction or a combination of both under Liberalized
Page
Remittance Scheme. Circular FeX 31/2021 dated 07.06.2021

A USD 1,00,000 B USD 1,50,000 C USD 2,00,000

D USD 2,50,000 E None of the avove Answer: D
1868. A General permission is available to persons other than individuals to remit towards donations
up-to one per cent of their foreign exchange earnings during the previous three financial years
or USD ______, whichever is less. Circular FeX 31/2021 dated 07.06.2021
A USD 1,000,000 B USD 2,000,000 C USD 2,500,000
1869. Remittances by persons other than individuals shall require prior approval of the Reserve Bank
of India if commission per transaction to agents abroad for sale of residential flats or
commercial plots in India exceeds USD ______ or five percent of the inward remittance
whichever is more. Circular FeX 31/2021 dated 07.06.2021
A USD 5,000 B USD 10,000 C USD 20,000
of India if remittances exceed USD ______ per project for any consultancy services in respect of
infrastructure projects and USD ______ per project, for other consultancy services procured
from outsideIndia. Circular FeX 31/2021 dated 07.06.2021
A USD 5,000,000 ; USD B USD 5,000,000 ; USD C USD 10,000,000 ; USD
1,000,000 2,000,000 1,000,000
D USD 10,000,000 ; USD E None of the avove Answer: C
2,000,000
of India for remittances exceeding five per cent of investment brought into India or USD ______
whichever is higher, by an entity in India by way of reimbursement of pre- incorporation
expenses. Circular FeX 31/2021 dated 07.06.2021
A USD 100,000 B USD 200,000 C USD 250,000
1872. AD branches are permitted to issue guarantee for amount not exceeding USD ______ or its
equivalent in favor of a non-resident service provider, on behalf of a resident customer who is a
service importer. Circular FeX 31/2021 dated 07.06.2021
A USD 100,000 B USD 200,000 C USD 250,000
1873. In the case of a Public Sector Company or a Department/ Undertaking of the Government of
India/ State Governments, approval from the Ministry of Finance, Government of India for issue
of guarantee for an amount exceeding USD ______ or its equivalent would berequired. Circular
FeX 31/2021 dated 07.06.2021
A USD 100,000 B USD 200,000 C USD 250,000
1874. Remittance from NRO accounts is permitted outside India up to USD ______, per financial year
(April- March), by NRI, subject to payment of tax, asapplicable.for Current income like rent,
dividend, pension, interest, etc. in India of the account holder. Circular FeX 31/2021 dated
07.06.2021
A USD one million B USD two million C USD five million
D USD ten million E None of the avove Answer: A
1875. A citizen of a foreign state, not being a citizen of Nepal or Bhutan or a Person of Indian Origin
(PIO), who – (i) has retired from an employment in India, or (ii) has inherited assets from a
person referred to in sub-section (5) of Section 6 of the FEMA; or (iii) is a widow resident outside
India and has inherited assets of her deceased husband who was an Indian citizen resident in
India, may remit an amount, not exceeding USD ______ per financial year out of the balances in
the account. Circular FeX 31/2021 dated 07.06.2021
A USD one million B USD two million C USD five million
198
D USD ten million E None of the avove Answer: A

1876. Under MTSS (Money Transfer Service Scheme) Only personal remittances are allowed. A cap of
USD ______ has been placed on individual transaction and amounts up to Rs.______ may be
Page
paid in cash. Circular FeX 31/2021 dated 07.06.2021

A USD 1,000 ; Rs.25, B USD 2,500 ; Rs.25, C USD 2,500 ; Rs.50,

000/- 000/- 000/-
D USD 5,000 ; Rs.50, E None of the avove Answer: C
000/-
1877. Only ______ remittances can be received by a single individual beneficiary under MTSS (Money
Transfer Service Scheme) during a calendar year. Circular FeX 31/2021 dated 07.06.2021
A 15 B 20 C 25
1878. Requests for payment in cash in Indian Rupees to resident customers towards purchase of
foreign currency notes and/ or Travellers‟Cheques from them may be acceded to the extent of
only USD ______ or its equivalent per transaction. Circular FeX 31/2021 dated 07.06.2021
A USD 1,000 B USD 3,000 C USD 5,000
D Rs.10,000 E None of the avove Answer: A
1879. Requests for payment in cash by foreign visitors / Non-Resident Indians may be acceded to the
extent of only USD ______ or its equivalent per transaction. Circular FeX 31/2021 dated 07.06.2021
A USD 1,000 B USD 3,000 C USD 5,000
D Rs.10,000 E None of the avove Answer: B
1880. AD branch may convert at their discretion, unspent Indian currency up to Rs.______ in the
possession of non-residents if, for bonafide reasons, the person is unable to produce an
Encashment Certificate after ensuring that the departure is scheduled to take place within the
following seven days. Circular FeX 31/2021 dated 07.06.2021
A Rs.10,000 B Rs.20,000 C Rs.25,000
1881. AD Branch may provide facility for reconversion of Indian Rupees to the extent of Rs.______ to
foreign tourists (not NRIs) against ATM Receipts based on the following documents. Circular FeX
31/2021 dated 07.06.2021
A Rs.10,000 B Rs.20,000 C Rs.25,000
D Rs.50,000/- E None of the avove Answer: D
1882. In case deposits under FCNR (B) scheme are withdrawn before maturity, the rate of interest
payable on such deposits to be subject to a penalty of ______% of the current applicable rate for
the tenor for which the deposit has been in force with the bank subject to maximum 1%. Circular
FeX 27/2021 dated 31.05.2021
A 5%. B 10%. C 20%.
1883. Trade Credit for imports into India can be raised in any freely convertible foreign currency (FCY
denominated TC) or Indian Rupee (INR denominated TC). Amount under automatic route for
Trade Credit will be up to USD ______ or equivalent per import transaction for oil/gas refining &
marketing, airline and shipping companies. For others, amount will be up to USD ______ or
equivalent per import transaction. Circular FeX 25/2021 dated 15.04.2021
A USD 100 million ; USD B USD 100 million ; USD C USD 150 million ; USD
25 million 50 million 50 million
D USD 150 million ; USD E None of the avove Answer: C
100 million
1884. The period of Trade Credit (TC), reckoned from the date of shipment, will be up to three ______
for import of capital goods. Circular FeX 25/2021 dated 15.04.2021
1885. For import of non-capital goods, The period of Trade Credit (TC) will be up to up to ______he
operating cycle whichever is less. Circular FeX 25/2021 dated 15.04.2021
199
1886. For shipyards / shipbuilders, the period of Trade Credit (TC) for import of non-capital goods can
be up to ______ years. Circular FeX 25/2021 dated 15.04.2021
Page

1887. Overdue PCFC/FCL will be crystallized on _______day from the due date. Circular FeX 22/2021
dated 12.04.2021
A 5th banking day B 7th banking day C 10th banking day
D 15th banking day E None of the avove Answer: D
1888. The minimum net deposit at any one time under the “Gold Monetization Scheme (GMS)” shall be
_____ of raw gold (bars, coins, jewellery excluding stones and other metals). There is no
maximum limit for deposit under the scheme. Circular FeX 20/2021 dated 12.04.2021
A 10 grams B 30 grams C 40 grams
D 50 grams E None of the avove Answer: A
1889. All transactions under the “Gold Monetization Scheme (GMS)” with the Bank will be in gold
of______. The quantity of gold will be expressed up to ______ decimals of a gram. Circular FeX
20/2021 dated 12.04.2021
A 995 fineness ; two B 995 fineness ; three C 999 fineness ; two
D 999 fineness ; three E None of the avove Answer: B
1890. The Authorised branches for Gold Business will accept up to ______ of Gold under PNB Gold
Monetisation Deposit under both variants i.e. Short Term Bank Deposit (STBD) and Medium Long
Term Government Deposit (MLTGD). Circular FeX 20/2021 dated 12.04.2021
A 1 Kg B 2 Kg C 4 Kg
D 5 Kg E None of the avove Answer: B
1891. Interest on the deposit under the Gold Monetization scheme will start accruing from the date of
conversion of gold deposited into tradable gold bars after refinement or ______ days after
receipt of the gold at the CPTC/Branch, whichever is earlier. Circular FeX 20/2021 dated
12.04.2021
1892. Minimum lock in period for Short term bank deposit (STBD) under Gold Monetization Scheme
will be ______ from the effective date of deposit. Circular FeX 20/2021 dated 12.04.2021
A One year B Two years C Three years
D Five years E None of the avove Answer: A
1893. Under Gold Monetization Scheme, A Medium Term Government Deposit (MTGD) is allowed to be
withdrawn any time after ______ years and Long Term Government Deposit (LTGD) after ______
years. Circular FeX 20/2021 dated 12.04.2021
A 1 year ; 3 years B 2 years ; 3 years C 1 years ; 5 years
1894. Minimum quantity of Loan under Gold Metal Loan Scheme (GML) will be ______ from the
consignment stock received from the foreign supplier. Circular FeX 19/2021 dated 12.04.2021
A 5 kg gold B 10 kg gold C 20 kg gold
D 25 kg gold E None of the avove Answer: B
1895. Maximum period of loan Loan under Gold Metal Loan Scheme (GML) will be not exceeding
______ or the operating cycle (trade Cycle) whichever is less. Circular FeX 19/2021 dated
12.04.2021
1896. In case of loan against Standby Letter of Credit (SBLC)/Bank Guarantee (B/G) of other banks,
period of loan will be as per the tenor allowed in the SBLC/BG but not exceeding ______ days
under Gold Metal Loan Scheme (GML). Circular FeX 19/2021 dated 12.04.2021
1897. Margin under Gold Metal Loan Scheme (GML) will be ______ % in shape of FDR or lien in
Account of borrower. Circular FeX 19/2021 dated 12.04.2021
A 5% B 10% C 15%
200

1898. Under Gold Metal Loan Scheme (GML), The outstanding overdraft can be repaid by way of
purchase of gold on spot/ forward basis with a minimum lot of______. Circular FeX 19/2021 dated
Page
12.04.2021

A 2 kg B 3 kg C 5 kg
D 10 kg E None of the avove Answer: C
1899. Under Rupee Drawing Arrangements (RDA), Remittances through Exchange Houses for
financing of trade transactions are permitted up to Rs.______ per transaction. Circular FeX
15/2021 dated 12.04.2021
A Rs.5,00,000 B Rs.10,00,000 C Rs.15,00,000
D Rs.25,00,000 E None of the avove Answer: C
1900. The size of a single transaction under FX Retail Platform is not allowed to exceed ______.
A $1 million B $2 million C $5 million
D $10 million E None of the avove Answer: C
201 Page

MCQs on Important Operative Circulars of 2020

1. The acceptable CIBIL Score for Consumer CIR (Credit Information Report) that can be
considered safe / less risk prone with respect to the sanction of credit facilities to the borrowers
/ guarantor is ______. Circular RBD(A) 59/2020 dated 15.06.2020
A 600 & above B 650 & above C 700 & above
D 750 & above E None of the avove Answer: B
2. Credit Information Report should not be older than______ days at the time of Fresh Sanction/
Enhancement/ Renewal/ Review/ Adhoc/Additional credit facility. Circular RBD(A) 59/2020 dated
15.06.2020
3. Under the scheme Pradhan Mantri Awas Yojana (Urban) – Housing for All”- “Credit Linked
Subsidy Scheme (CLSS) for MIG”, Middle Income Group-I households are defined as households
having an annual income of Rs. _____. Circular RBD(A) 51/2020 dated 26.05.2020
Rs.10,00,000 Rs.12,00,000 Rs.10,00,000
D Rs.7,00,001 to E None of the avove Answer: B
Rs.12,00,000
Subsidy Scheme (CLSS) for MIG”,Middle Income Group- II households are defined as
households having an annual income of Rs. _____. Circular RBD(A) 51/2020 dated 26.05.2020
Rs.15,00,000 Rs.15,00,000 Rs.18,00,000
D Rs.12,00,001 to E None of the avove Answer: C
Rs.20,00,000
Subsidy Scheme (CLSS) for MIG”, Carpet Area of dwelling unit should be _____ Sq.m. for MIG – I
and ______ Sq.m. for MIG – II. Circular RBD(A) 51/2020 dated 26.05.2020
A 140 Sq.m. ; 200 B 150 Sq.m. ; 200 C 160 Sq.m. ; 200 Sq.m.
Sq.m. Sq.m.
D 160 Sq.m. ; 250 E None of the avove Answer: C
Sq.m.
Subsidy Scheme (CLSS) for MIG”, amount of loan will be need based as per the existing housing
loan scheme. However, eligible Housing Loan amount for Interest Subsidy will be Rs. ______ for
MIG – I and Rs. ______ for MIG – II. Circular RBD(A) 51/2020 dated 26.05.2020
A Rs. 8,00,000/- ; Rs. B Rs. 8,00,000/- ; Rs. C Rs. 9,00,000/- ; Rs.
10,00,000/- 12,00,000/- 10,00,000/-
D Rs. 9,00,000/- ; Rs. E None of the avove Answer: D
12,00,000/-
Subsidy Scheme (CLSS) for MIG”, Repayment Period will be as per the existing housing loan
scheme to public. However, subsidy will be available for a maximum tenure of ______ years on
Notional Basis. Circular RBD(A) 51/2020 dated 26.05.2020
Subsidy Scheme (CLSS) for MIG”, Discount Rate for Net Present Value (NPV) calculation of
interest subsidy will be @ ______ Circular RBD(A) 51/2020 dated 26.05.2020
A 6% B 7% C 8%
202

9. In case of granting advance against the security of gold coins sold by schedule bank / our bank,
the weight of the coin(s) does not exceed ______ grams per customer. Circular RBD(A) 50/2020
Page
dated 16.05.2020

A 10 grams B 20 grams C 50 grams

D 100 grams E None of the avove Answer: C
10. Margin for advances granted against the security of gold jewellery/ ornaments under PNB Gold
Loan will be _____% in case borrower opts for bullet repayment and _____% in case borrower
opts to pay interest as and when levied. LTV ratio not to exceed ______% of the value of security
during the entire currency of loan. Circular RBD(A) 50/2020 dated 16.05.2020
A 35% ; 25% B 30% ; 25% C 30% ; 20%
11. LTV ratio for advances granted against the security of gold jewellery/ ornaments under PNB
Gold Loan should not exceed ______% of the value of security during the entire currency of
loan. Circular RBD(A) 50/2020 dated 16.05.2020
A 85% B 80% C 75%
12. Under PNB Gold Loan, the valuation fee @ ______ per thousand maximum upto Rs. ______ will
be paid to valuers/ shroff on monthly consolidated basis. Circular RBD(A) 50/2020 dated
16.05.2020
A Rs. 2.00 ; Rs. 200/- B Rs. 3.00 ; Rs. 300/- C Rs. 4.00 ; Rs. 400/-
D Rs. 5.00 ; Rs. 500/- E None of the avove Answer: B
13. The principal under PNB Gold Loan will be repayable within a maximum period of _____ or as
and when demanded or repayment through Bullet Payment i.e. payment of interest and principal
at maturity. Circular RBD(A) 50/2020 dated 16.05.2020
14. Confidential reporton borrower is not required for advances upto Rs. ______ against the security
of gold jewellery/ ornaments under PNB Gold Loan. Circular RBD(A) 50/2020 dated 16.05.2020
A Rs. 10,000/- B Rs. 20,000/- C Rs. 25,000/-
D Rs. 50,000/- E None of the avove Answer: A
15. Minimum and maximum quantum of advance against Sovereign Gold Bonds will be Rs. _____.
Circular RBD(A) 50/2020 dated 16.05.2020
A Min – Rs. 50000/-, Max - B Min – Rs. 50000/-, Max - C Min – Rs. 50000/-, Max -
Rs.1.00 lacs Rs.5.00 lacs Rs.10.00 lacs
D Min – Rs.1.00 lacs-, Max - E None of the avove Answer: C
Rs.10.00 lacs
16. Maximum Repayment Period of advance against Sovereign Gold Bonds will be maximum_____
or residual period of the Gold Bond whichever is earlier. Circular RBD(A) 50/2020 dated 16.05.2020
17. Margin for advance against Sovereign Gold Bonds will be ____% for individuals and _____% for
other than individuals. Circular RBD(A) 50/2020 dated 16.05.2020
A 10% ; 15% B 15% ; 20% C 20% ; 30%
18. For advance against Sovereign Gold Bonds, LTV of ______% is maintained throughout the tenor
of loan. The LTV is to be calculated and maintained on ______ basis based on the Gold rate
published by Retail Banking Division. Circular RBD(A) 50/2020 dated 16.05.2020
A 70% ; monthly B 70% ; quarterly C 75% ; monthly
D 75% ; quarterly E None of the avove Answer: C
19. The Padho Pardesh scheme covers education loans given to student belonging to Minority
Communities for overseas studies covering courses for Post Graduate Diploma/Post Graduate
Degree course/Masters, M.Phil & Ph.D from any Foreign University subject to his/her parents
/guardians income up to Rs.______per annum. Circular RBD(A) 47/2020 dated 13.05.2020
203

20. Under Dr. Ambedkar Central Sector Scheme of Interest Subsidy (ACSIS), candidates total per
annum income from all sources of the employed candidate or his/her parents/guardians in case
Page
of unemployed candidate shall not exceed Rs.______ for OBC and Rs.______ for EBC. Circular

RBD(A) 47/2020 dated 13.05.2020

A Rs.6 lakh ; Rs.2.50 lakh B Rs.6 lakh ; Rs.3.00 lakh C Rs.8 lakh ; Rs.2.50 lakh
D Rs.8 lakh ; Rs.3.00 lakh E None of the avove Answer: C
21. The cut-off level for ‘sanction’ of all the loan applications has been kept at the score of ______
for all the retail loan schemes covered under the scoring models PNB score. Circular RBD(A)
31/2020 dated 31.03.2020
A above 40 B above 45 C above 50
D above 550 E None of the avove Answer: C
22. ______ needy girl students who are willing to continue their studies till at least class XII, shall be
identified from a single village under PNB Ladli Scheme. Circular PSFID/PS 72/2020 dated
29.09.2020
A Seven B Eight C Nine
D Ten E None of the avove Answer: D
23. The adopted girl students under PNB Ladli Scheme shall be provided study material like
stationery, uniform etc. relevant to their course and payment of school fees if considered
essential. The value of such study material and fees will not exceed ______ per student per
annum (inclusive of all taxes). Circular PSFID/PS 72/2020 dated 29.09.2020
A Rs. 1000/- B Rs. 1500/- C Rs. 2000/-
D Rs. 2500/- E None of the avove Answer: D
24. Saving Fund accounts of all the girl students adopted under PNB Ladli scheme will be opened
and Rs.______ will be deposited to meet their out of pocket expenses. Circular PSFID/PS 72/2020
dated 29.09.2020
A Rs.400/- on Half Yearly B Rs.500/- on Half Yearly C Rs.600/- on Half Yearly
basis basis basis
D Rs.800/- on Half Yearly E None of the avove Answer: C
basis
25. All the girl students already selected under PNB Ladli scheme are eligible to receive the cash
incentive. The cash incentive will continue to be paid till the selected girl students complete
class______. Circular PSFID/PS 72/2020 dated 29.09.2020
A VIII B IX C X
D XII E None of the avove Answer: D
26. The project under the Animal Husbandry Infrastructure Development Fund (AHIDF) shall be
eligible for maximum loan up to ______% of the estimated/ actual project cost from the
Scheduled Bank based on submission of viable projects by eligible beneficiaries. Circular
PSFID/PS 68/2020 dated 17.09.2020
A 80% B 85% C 90%
27. Under the Animal Husbandry Infrastructure Development Fund (AHIDF), The minimum
beneficiary contribution in case of Micro and Small units as per MSME efined ceiling would be
______% while in case of Medium Enterprises as per defined MSME ceiling, it would be ______%.
The beneficiary contribution in other categories of enterprises would be ______%. Circular
PSFID/PS 68/2020 dated 17.09.2020
A 15% ; 15% ; 25% B 10% ; 20% ; 15% C 10% ; 15% ; 25%
D 15% ; 15% ; 25% E None of the avove Answer: C
28. Credit guarantee is available under the Animal Husbandry Infrastructure Development Fund
(AHIDF) scheme. However, it will be provided only for those projects which are viable and are
covered under MSME defined ceilings and the guarantee coverage would be up to ______% of
loan. Circular PSFID/PS 68/2020 dated 17.09.2020
A 10% B 15% C 20%
29. Under the Animal Husbandry Infrastructure Development Fund (AHIDF), The maximum re-
204
payment period should not exceed ______ from the date of first disbursement inclusive of
moratorium of ______ on repayment of principal. Circular PSFID/PS 68/2020 dated 17.09.2020
Page

30. Under the Animal Husbandry Infrastructure Development Fund (AHIDF), Interest subvention
benefit will not be provided for the period beyond ______. Circular PSFID/PS 68/2020 dated
17.09.2020
31. Applications under Agriculture lending schemes cannot be considered for sanction if PNB
FARM Score is in the range of ______. Circular PSFID/PS 66/2020 dated 09.09.2020
A 0 < 20 B 0 < 30 C 0 < 40
D 0 < 50 E None of the avove Answer: C
32. Applications under Agriculture lending schemes can be considered for sanction by the
competent authority if PNB FARM Score is in the range of ______. Circular PSFID/PS 66/2020
dated 09.09.2020
A 30 < 50 B 40 < 60 C 50 < 70
D 50 < 75 E None of the avove Answer: D
33. All loans up to a limit of Rs. ______ under Central Sector Scheme for financing facility under
‘Agriculture Infrastructure Fund (AIF) will have interest subvention of 3% per annum. This
subvention will be available for a maximum period of 7 Years. Circular PSFID/PS 64/2020 dated
08.09.2020
D Rs. 10.00 Crores E None of the avove Answer: B
34. The Central Sector Scheme for financing facility under ‘Agriculture Infrastructure Fund (AIF)
does not have minimum or maximum loan cap. However, maximum loan quantum on which the
benefit of interest subvention is applicable is up to Rs. ______. Circular PSFID/PS 64/2020 dated
08.09.2020
35. Under the Central Sector Scheme for financing facility under ‘Agriculture Infrastructure Fund
(AIF), The time limit to convey the decision on the loan application to the applicant is set for a
maximum period of ______ from the date of application of the loan. Circular PSFID/PS 64/2020
dated 08.09.2020
36. After sanction of proposal under Entrepreneurship Development & Employment Generation
(EDEG) component of National Livestock Mission, the controlling office will upload the details as
per the template prescribed in the EDEG Portal within ______days of sanction of loan and block
eligible subsidy amount. Circular PSFID/PS 62/2020 dated 28.08.2020
37. Under Entrepreneurship Development & Employment Generation (EDEG) component of National
Livestock Mission,The financing Bank / institution would keep subsidy amount borrower-wise in
“Subsidy Reserve Fund Account’’ (SRFA) in their books of accounts and adjust the subsidy
amount in the subsidy reserve fund account of the beneficiary within ______ of the receipt of
subsidy from NABARD. Circular PSFID/PS 62/2020 dated 28.08.2020
D thirteen days E None of the avove Answer: A
Livestock Mission, The controlling office of the financing bank / institution shall submit
utilization certificate to the effect that the subsidy amount has been credited to the Subsidy
Reserve Fund Account (SRFA) of the beneficiary along with details of the beneficiary. The
certificate should be submitted / uploaded on NABARD online within ______ of receipt of
subsidy. Circular PSFID/PS 62/2020 dated 28.08.2020
205

D thirteen days E None of the avove Answer: C
Page
Livestock Mission, the ceiling on subsidy in general is at the rate of ______%. Circular PSFID/PS

62/2020 dated 28.08.2020

A 10% B 15% C 20%
40. The back ended subsidy under Entrepreneurship Development & Employment Generation
(EDEG) component of National Livestock Mission will be maximum ______% for Salvaging of
Male Buffalo Calves for BPL/SC/ST categories of North East Region / Hill Areas / LWE affected
districts and BPL/SC/ST/ APL categories of Difficult Areas. Circular PSFID/PS 62/2020 dated
28.08.2020
A 20% B 25% C 40%
41. In pursuance of recently announced Atma Nirbhar Bharat Abhiyan stimulus package for
ensuring growth in several sectors, the Cabinet Committee on Economic Affairs, chaired by
Prime Minister Shri Narendra Modi, has approved setting up of Animal Husbandry Infrastructure
Development Fund (AHIDF) worth Rs.______. Circular PSFID/PS 60/2020 dated 24.08.2020
42. Margin for Micro & Small Enterprises (as per MSME defined ceiling) under Animal Husbandry
Infrastructure Development Fund' (AHIDF) will be ______%. Circular PSFID/PS 60/2020 dated
24.08.2020
A 10% B 15% C 20%
43. Margin for Medium Enterprises (as per MSME defined ceiling) under Animal Husbandry
Infrastructure Development Fund' (AHIDF) will be ______%. Circular PSFID/PS 60/2020 dated
24.08.2020
A 10% B 15% C 20%
44. Margin for other than Micro, Small & Medium Enterprises under Animal Husbandry Infrastructure
Development Fund' (AHIDF) will be ______%. Circular PSFID/PS 60/2020 dated 24.08.2020
A 10% B 15% C 20%
45. Credit guarantee for Central Sector Scheme of Financing Facility under 'Animal Husbandry
Infrastructure Development Fund' (AHIDF) will be provided only for those projects which are
viable and are covered under MSME defined ceilings and would be up to ______% of the credit
facility available to the borrower. Circular PSFID/PS 60/2020 dated 24.08.2020
A 10% B 15% C 20%
46. Maximum Repayment period for Central Sector Scheme of Financing Facility under 'Animal
Husbandry Infrastructure Development Fund' (AHIDF) will be ______ years inclusive of
moratorium of ______ years on principal amount. Circular PSFID/PS 60/2020 dated 24.08.2020
47. For Central Sector Scheme of Financing Facility under 'Animal Husbandry Infrastructure
Development Fund' (AHIDF), Maximum repayment period will not exceed ______ years from the
date of first disbursement inclusive of moratorium of ______ years on repayment of principal in
cases where cost escalation has occurred and the same has been financed by the bank. Circular
PSFID/PS 60/2020 dated 24.08.2020
48. For Central Sector Scheme of Financing Facility under 'Animal Husbandry Infrastructure
Development Fund' (AHIDF), Project Approval Committee shall accord approval to projects
costing up to Rs. ______ for grant of Interest Subvention. Circular PSFID/PS 60/2020 dated
206
24.08.2020
D Rs. 100.00 Crores E None of the avove Answer: C
Page
49. The PM Formalization of Micro food processing Enterprises Scheme (PM FME Scheme)

envisages an outlay of Rs. ______ over a period of five years from 2020-21 to 2024-25. Circular
PSFID/PS 59/2020 dated 24.08.2020
A Rs. 1,000 crore B Rs. 5,000 crore C Rs. 10,000 crore
D Rs. 20,000 crore E None of the avove Answer: C
50. Under the PM Formalization of Micro food processing Enterprises Scheme (PM FME Scheme),
______ micro food processing units will be directly assisted with credit linked subsidy. Circular
PSFID/PS 59/2020 dated 24.08.2020
A 100000 B 200000 C 300000
Individual micro food processing units would be provided credit-linked capital subsidy
@______% of the eligible project cost with a maximum ceiling of Rs.______ per unit. Beneficiary
contribution should be minimum 10% of the project cost with balance being loan from Bank.
A 25% ; Rs.10.00 B 35% ; Rs.10.00 C 25% ; Rs.20.00
D 35% ; Rs.20.00 E None of the avove Answer: B
Beneficiary contribution should be minimum ______% of the project cost with balance being
loan from Bank. Circular PSFID/PS 59/2020 dated 24.08.2020
A 10% B 15% C 20%
53. To eligibile for individual micro enterprises under the PM Formalization of Micro food processing
Enterprises Scheme (PM FME Scheme), The applicant should be above 18 years of age and
should be at least ______ standard pass. Circular PSFID/PS 59/2020 dated 24.08.2020
A VIII standard B IX standard C X standard
D XII standard E None of the avove Answer: A
54. Seed capital (initial funding) @ Rs. ______ per member of SHG for working capital and purchase
of small tools would be provided under the PM Formalization of Micro food processing
Enterprises Scheme (PM FME Scheme). Circular PSFID/PS 59/2020 dated 24.08.2020
A Rs. 20,000/- B Rs. 30,000/- C Rs. 40,000/-
D Rs. 50,000/- E None of the avove Answer: C
55. To eligibile for Credit Linked Grant for Capital Investment for SHGs under the PM Formalization
of Micro food processing Enterprises Scheme (PM FME Scheme), SHGs should have sufficient
own funds for meeting ______% of the project cost and ______% margin money for working
capital or sanction of the same as grant from the State Government. Circular PSFID/PS 59/2020
dated 24.08.2020
A 10% ; 10% B 10% ; 20% C 20% ; 20%
56. To eligibile for Credit Linked Grant for Capital Investment for SHGs under the PM Formalization
of Micro food processing Enterprises Scheme (PM FME Scheme), SHG members should have for
a minimum period of______ experience in processing of the ODOP product. Circular PSFID/PS
59/2020 dated 24.08.2020
A 2 years’ B 3 years’ C 4 years’
D 5 years’ E None of the avove Answer: B
57. Credit Guarantee coverage for Financing Facility under Agriculture Infrastructure Fund will be
available to eligible borrowers under Credit Guarantee Fund Trust for Micro & Small Enterprises
(CGTMSE) Scheme for a loan up to Rs. _______. Circular PSFID/PS 58/2020 dated 24.08.2020
58. With effect from July 1, 2020, An enterprise shall be classified as Micro Enterprise, where the
investment in plant and machinery or equipment does not exceed ______ rupees and turnover
207
does not exceed ______ rupees. Circular PSFID/PS 53/2020 dated 06.07.2020
A one crore ; five crore B ten crore ; fifty crore C twenty crore ; two
hundred and fifty crore
Page
D fifty crore ; two hundred E None of the avove Answer: A

and fifty crore

59. With effect from July 1, 2020, An enterprise shall be classified as Small Enterprise, where the
investment in plant and machinery or equipment does not exceed ______ rupees and turnover
does not exceed ______ rupees. Circular PSFID/PS 53/2020 dated 06.07.2020
D fifty crore ; two hundred E None of the avove Answer: B
and fifty crore
60. With effect from July 1, 2020, An enterprise shall be classified as Medium Enterprise, where the
investment in plant and machinery or equipment does not exceed ______rupees and turnover
does not exceed ______rupees. Circular PSFID/PS 53/2020 dated 06.07.2020
D fifty crore ; two hundred E None of the avove Answer: D
and fifty crore
61. Central Financial Assistance (CFA) of ______% of the benchmark cost or the tender cost,
whichever is lower, of the stand-alone solar Agriculture pump will be provided under Pradhan
Mantri Kisan Urja Suraksha Evem Utthan Mahabhiyan (PM KUSUM). The State Government will
give a subsidy of ______%; and the remaining ______% will be provided by the farmer. Circular
PSFID/PS 47/2020 dated 06.06.2020
A 20% ; 30% ; 50% B 30% ; 20% ; 50% C 30% ; 40% ; 30%
62. Bank finance may be made available for farmer's contribution up to ______% of the cost as
loan.The remaining 10 percent of the cost will be provided by the farmer. Circular PSFID/PS
47/2020 dated 06.06.2020
A 20% B 30% C 40%
63. In North Eastern States, Sikkim, Jammu & Kashmir, Himachal Pradesh and Uttarakhand,
Lakshadweep and A&N Islands, CFA of ______% of the benchmark cost or the tender cost,
whichever is lower, of the stand-alone solar pump will be provided under Pradhan Mantri Kisan
Urja Suraksha Evem Utthan Mahabhiyan (PM KUSUM). The State Government will give a subsidy
of ______%; and the remaining ______% will be provided by the farmer. Circular PSFID/PS
47/2020 dated 06.06.2020
A 20% ; 30% ; 50% B 30% ; 20% ; 50% C 30% ; 40% ; 30%
64. Projects for installation of solar Agriculture pumps systems under Pradhan Mantri Kisan Urja
Suraksha Evem Utthan Mahabhiyan (PM KUSUM) shall be completed within ______ months from
the date of sanction by MNRE. However, for North Eastern States including Sikkim, Jammu &
Kashmir, Himachal Pradesh, Uttarakhand, Lakshadweep and A&N Islands this time limit will be
______ months from the date of sanction. Circular PSFID/PS 47/2020 dated 06.06.2020
65. The Overdraft limit under PNB Kisan Tatkal Rin Yojana may be a reducing limit on yearly basis,
as it is to be liquidated within ______ years. Circular PSFID/PS 43/2020 dated 22.05.2020
66. Term Loan under PNB Kisan Tatkal Rin Yojana is repayable in ______ installments starting after
______ months from date of disbursement. Circular PSFID/PS 43/2020 dated 22.05.2020
A 5 Yearly ; 6 months B 5 Yearly ; 12 months C 3 Yearly ; 6 months
D 3 Yearly ; 12 months E None of the avove Answer: B
67. Maximum limit under PNB Kisan Tatkal Rin Yojana will be Rs. ______. Circular PSFID/PS 43/2020
208
dated 22.05.2020
A Rs.20000/- B Rs.25000/- C Rs.50000/-
D Rs.100000/- E None of the avove Answer: C
Page
68. Margin under PNB Kisan Tatkal Rin Yojana will be ______%. Circular PSFID/PS 43/2020 dated

22.05.2020
A 5% B 10% C 15%
D Nil E None of the avove Answer: D
69. For financing farmers for purchase of land for agricultural purpose, Small and marginal farmers
i.e. those who would own maximum of ______ acres of unirrigated land or ______ acres of
irrigated land including the land to be purchased are eligible under the scheme PNB Krishi Bhu
Swami Yojana. Circular PSFID/PS 42/2020 dated 14.05.2020
A 2.5 acres ; 1.0 acre B 2.5 acres ; 2.0 acres C 5 acres ; 2.0 acres
D 5 acres ; 2.5 acres E None of the avove Answer: D
70. Maximum amount of loan under the PNB Krishi Bhu Swami Yojana will be Rs.______. Circular
PSFID/PS 42/2020 dated 14.05.2020
71. Loans under the PNB Krishi Bhu Swami Yojana may be repaid in ______ years in half-yearly/
yearly instalments including maximum moratorium period of ______. Circular PSFID/PS 42/2020
dated 14.05.2020
A 5-7 years ; 12 months B 5-12 years ; 24 months C 7-12 years ; 12 months
D 7-12 years ; 24 months E None of the avove Answer: D
72. Applicant farmers under PNB Krishi Bhu Swami Yojana may be allowed to purchase agriculture
land within a radius of ______ kms from the existing land owned by him/her or from the
residence or within the service area villages whichever is higher. Circular PSFID/PS 42/2020 dated
14.05.2020
A 10 kms B 15 kms C 20 kms
D 25 kms E None of the avove Answer: B
73. As per Department of Agriculture,Cooperation & Farmers Welfare, the Farmers can now choose
not to participate in the Pradhan Mantri Fasal Bima Yojana (PMFBY), by giving a signed
declaration, mentioning that the farmer does not want to participate in the schemes any time
during the year for the upcoming season but atleast ______ days before the enrolment cut-off
date. Circular PSFID/PS 41/2020 dated 11.05.2020
74. The borrower under PNB Kisan Tatkal Rin Yojana shall have satisfactory track record of at least
______ years (existing accounts should be in Standard/ SMA-0 category) Circular PSFID/PS
37/2020 dated 09.04.2020
D five years E None of the avove Answer: B
75. Bank credit up to ₹ ______ per borrower to registered NBFCs (other than MFIs) for on-lending
will be eligible for classification as priority sector under Agriculture category. Circular PSFID/PS
36/2020 dated 04.04.2020
D ₹ 50 lakh E None of the avove Answer: A
76. Bank credit up to ₹ ______ per borrower to registered NBFCs (other than MFIs) for on-lending
will be eligible for classification as priority sector under Micro & Small enterprises. Circular
PSFID/PS 36/2020 dated 04.04.2020
77. For purchase of tractor, farmer or a group of farmers holding land jointly should have a land
holding either owned by them or held by them on perpetual leasehold rights of minimum ______
acres of perennially irrigated land or corresponding acreage as prescribed for different
categories of land under the State Land Ceiling Act. Circular PSFID/PS 33/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 1.0 acres B 1.5 acres C 2.0 acres
209
D 2.5 acres E None of the avove Answer: D

78. Minimum land holding criteria may be waived in cases where financing of tractor/power tillers is
secured up to ______% of loan by liquid security like FDR, NSC, etc. However, the applicant
Page
should be a farmer. Circular PSFID/PS 33/2020 dated 26.03.2020

A 100% B 110% C 125%

79. For purchase of Power tillers, farmer or a group of farmers holding land jointly should have a
land holding either owned by them or held by them on perpetual leasehold rights of minimum
______ acres of perennially irrigated land or corresponding acreage as prescribed for different
categories of land under the State Land Ceiling Act. Circular PSFID/PS 33/2020 dated 26.03.2020
D 2.5 acres E None of the avove Answer: B
80. For repair/renovation of tractors, farmer or group of farmers shall have land holdings of
minimum ______ acres of irrigated land or corresponding acreage as prescribed for different
category of land under the State Land Ceiling Act, either owned by him or held by him on
perpetual lease hold rights. Circular PSFID/PS 33/2020 dated 26.03.2020
D 2.5 acres E None of the avove Answer: D
81. Tractor for which loan is to be obtained for repair/renovation should be more than ______ years
old but should not be older than ______ years from the date of manufacture. Circular PSFID/PS
33/2020 dated 26.03.2020
82. Need based loan net of stipulated margin shall be provided for purchase of farm
machinery/equipment and for repair of tractors. However, total loan for renovation/repairs of
tractors should not exceed Rs.______. For second hand tractor with three implements including
a trailer shall be restricted to Rs. ______ lakh. Circular PSFID/PS 33/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A Rs.2.00 lakh ; Rs. 1.00 B Rs.1.00 lakh ; Rs. 1.00 C Rs.1.00 lakh ; Rs. 2.00
lakh lakh lakh
D Rs.2.00 lakh ; Rs. 2.00 E None of the avove Answer: C
lakh
83. For purchase of farm machinery/equipment and for repair of tractors, margin will be ______%
where loan amount is up to Rs. 1.60 lakh and ______% where loan amount is above Rs. 1.60 lakh
to Rs. 2.00 lakh. Circular PSFID/PS 33/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A Nil ; 5% B Nil ; 10% C 5% ; 10%
84. For purchase of farm machinery/equipment and for repair of tractors, margin will be ______%
where loan amount is above Rs. 2.00 lakh to Rs.5.00 lakh and ______% where loan amount is
above Rs.5.00 lakh. Circular PSFID/PS 33/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A Nil ; 10% B 5% ; 10% C 5% ; 15%
85. For purchase of second hand tractor margin will be ______% of depreciated value of tractor
A 10% B 15% C 20%
86. In case the tractor borrowers do not opt for PNB Farmers’ Welfare Fund Scheme, tractor
(purchased / renovated), power tiller, agricultural machinery and equipment valued at Rs. ______
or more are to be comprehensively insured in joint names of ‘bank and borrower’ at borrower’s
cost and a copy of policy shall be kept on bank’s record. Circular PSFID/PS 33/2020 dated
26.03.2020
A Rs. 10,000/- B Rs. 20,000/- C Rs. 25,000/-
D Rs. 50,000/- E None of the avove Answer: A
87. Repayment Period for Power tillers will be ______ years. Circular PSFID/PS 33/2020 dated
26.03.2020
210

88. Repayment Period for Repair/ renovation of tractors will be ______ years. Circular PSFID/PS
33/2020 dated 26.03.2020
Page

D 9 Years E None of the avove Answer: A

89. While inspecting securities for loans exceeding Rs ______ under financing of farm machinery
and repair/ renovation of tractors and power tillersshould, a declaration from borrower be
obtained and certified by inspecting officials as to verification of the machinery. Circular
PSFID/PS 33/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A Rs 10,000/- B Rs 25,000/- C Rs 50,000/-
D Rs 1,00,000/- E None of the avove Answer: B
90. Existing farmer borrowers having a satisfactory record of dealing with us for the last two years
and having no NPA account and whose loan is secured by mortgage of agriculture land of
______% of loan amount shall be eligible for cash disbursal under financing of farm machinery
and repair/ renovation of tractors and power. Circular PSFID/PS 33/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 100% B 125% C 150%
91. Amount of loan for second hand tractors will be 75% of depreciated value of tractor and shall be
restricted to Rs.2 lakh. Circular PSFID/PS 33/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 75% ; Rs.1lakh B 75% ; Rs.2 lakh C 90% ; Rs.1 lakh
D 90% ; Rs.2 lakh E None of the avove Answer: B
92. Cost of second hand tractor should be assessed by an approved surveyor or calculated by
applying ______% depreciation, whichever is less. Circular PSFID/PS 33/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 5% B 10% C 15%
93. For second hand tractors, repayment of loan should be made in half-yearly/yearly installments
linked with harvesting and marketing of major crops within ______ years from the date of
disbursement of loan (including gestation period given for tractors). Circular PSFID/PS 33/2020
dated 26.03.2020
94. Minimum cash margin under the scheme for financing tractor without mortgage of land will be
______%. Circular PSFID/PS 33/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 25% B 30% C 40%
95. Maximum repayment under the scheme for financing tractor without mortgage of land will
be______ years in form of monthly/ quarterly/ half yearly installments. Circular PSFID/PS 33/2020
dated 26.03.2020
96. Moratorium period under the scheme for financing tractor without mortgage of land will be
______. Circular PSFID/PS 33/2020 dated 26.03.2020
D No moratorium period is E None of the avove Answer: D
prescribed
97. Extent of Loan to increase productivity of land and convert degraded land to arable land under
PNB Gram Uday Scheme will be need based with maximum upto Rs.______. Circular PSFID/PS
32/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A Rs.50000/- B Rs.100000/- C Rs.150000/-
D Rs.200000/- E None of the avove Answer: B
98. To increase productivity of land and convert degraded land to arable landunder PNB Gram Uday
Scheme, Maximum repayment period will be ______ years, including maximum moratorium
period of ______. Circular PSFID/PS 32/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 5 years ; 6 months B 5 years ; 1 year C 7 years ; 6 months
D 7 years ; 1 year E None of the avove Answer: B
211
99. To increase productivity of land and convert degraded land to arable landunder PNB Gram Uday
Scheme, Margin under PNB Gram Uday Scheme will be ______ %. Circular PSFID/PS 32/2020
dated 26.03.2020
Page
A 10% B 15% C 20%

D NIL E None of the avove Answer: D

100. The subsidy from Government of India under Central sector scheme for development of non-
forest wastelands will be released in two installments, first being ______% and the second at
______%. Circular PSFID/PS 32/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 40% ; 600% B 60% ; 40% C 50% ; 50%
101. For release of subsidy under Central sector scheme for development of non-forest wastelands,
Project shall be for a minimum period of ______ years with a minimum area of ______ hectares.
A 5 years ; 4 B 5 years ; 5 C 7 years ; 4
D 7 years ; 5 E None of the avove Answer: A
102. For release of subsidy under Central sector scheme for development of non-forest wastelands,
Average project cost for on-farm development activities shall be restricted to around Rs.______
per hectares. Circular PSFID/PS 32/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A Rs.10,000/- B Rs.20,000/- C Rs.25,000/-
103. Need based credit against indebtedness from money lender with a maximum of Rs.______ per
farmer may be financed under PNB Krishak Saathi Scheme (PNBKSS). Circular PSFID/PS 28/2020
dated 26.03.2020
A Rs.50,000/- B Rs.1,00,000/- C Rs.1,50,000/-
D Rs.2,00,000/- E None of the avove Answer: B
104. Margin under PNB Krishak Saathi Scheme (PNBKSS) will be ______% Circular PSFID/PS 28/2020
dated 26.03.2020
A 10% B 15% C 20%
105. The loan under PNB Krishak Saathi Scheme (PNBKSS) shall be repaid by the farmers in ______
years including a maximum moratorium period of ______ months with half-yearly/yearly
installment. Circular PSFID/PS 28/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 5 years ; 12 months B 7 years ; 12 months C 5-7 years ; 6months
D 5-7 years ; 12 months E None of the avove Answer: D
106. NABARD will provide refinance assistance to the extent of ______% of loans redeemed by the
bank from non-intuitional money lenders under PNB Krishak Saathi Scheme (PNBKSS). Circular
PSFID/PS 28/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 80% B 85% C 90%
107. In case marketing loan under the Scheme for financing development of horticulture (fruits,
flowers & vegetables) and plantation crops is considered, it should not exceed ______per cent of
the estimated value of crop. Circular PSFID/PS 27/2020 dated 26.03.2020
108. Under the Scheme for financing development of horticulture (fruits, flowers & vegetables) and
plantation crops, The cost of plants to be purchased may be disbursed in cash upto Rs.______
in advance to enable borrowers to purchase quality plants/seedlings from the Government
reputed nurseries. Circular PSFID/PS 27/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A Rs.10000/- B Rs.20000/- C Rs.25000/-
D Rs.50000/- E None of the avove Answer: A
109. Under the Scheme for financing development of horticulture (fruits, flowers & vegetables) and
plantation crops, Labour charges may also be disbursed in cash upto ______ per cent of labour
cost involved for the year at a time and after verification of its proper end use. Circular PSFID/PS
27/2020 dated 26.03.2020
212
D 25 per cent E None of the avove Answer: D

110. Investment Loan upto Rs.______ may be released in cash under the Scheme for financing
development of horticulture (fruits, flowers & vegetables) and plantation crops. Circular PSFID/PS
Page
27/2020 dated 26.03.2020

A Rs.50,000/- B Rs.1,00,000/- C Rs.1,50,000/-

D Rs.2,00,000/- E None of the avove Answer: A
111. Minimum size of the poultry unit to be financed as subsidiary activity under the Scheme for
Financing Poultry Farming should be ______ birds for providing in-built viability owing to
economics of scale of operations. Circular PSFID/PS 26/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 100 B 200 C 300
112. A poultry farm should have full time veterinary doctor if number of hatchery/parent birds is
______ and above or proposed sum insured is Rs.20 lakh and above and in case of
layers/broilers, if a farm has ______ and above birds or proposed sum insured is Rs.20 lakh.
A 15,000 ; 25,000 B 15,000 ; 50,000 C 25,000 ; 40,000
D 25,000 ; 50,000 E None of the avove Answer: B
113. Minimum unit for financing under the Scheme for Financing Apiculture (Bee Keeping) should be
of ______ bee hives. Circular PSFID/PS 25/2020 dated 20.03.2020
A 10 B 20 C 25
114. Irrigation Projects having Culturable Command Area (CCA) less than ______hectare are called
Minor Irrigation Projects. Circular PSFID/PS 24/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 500 B 1,000 C 2,000
D 2,500 E None of the avove Answer: C
115. A borrower intending to implement a minor irrigation project including sprinkler/ drip irrigation
projects under the Scheme for Financing Minor Irrigation Activities must have a holding of at
least ______ of land. Circular PSFID/PS 24/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 1 acre B 1.5 acres C 2 acres
D 2.5 acres E None of the avove Answer: A
116. For financing minor irrigation project, minimum distance criteria of at least ______ sq. yards
between tube wells should be maintained. Circular PSFID/PS 24/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 50 sq. yards B 100 sq. yards C 150 sq. yards
D 200 sq. yards E None of the avove Answer: D
117. Maximum repayment period for Deepening of wells, Persian wheels/ Rehat under the Scheme for
Financing Minor Irrigation Activities will be ______ years. Circular PSFID/PS 24/2020 dated
26.03.2020
118. Maximum repayment period under the Scheme for Financing Minor Irrigation Activities will be
______ years for Pump sets and ______ years for Solar pump sets. Circular PSFID/PS 24/2020
dated 26.03.2020
A 5 Years ; 7 Years B 6 Years ; 7 Years C 7 Years ; 9 Years
D 9 Years ; 10 Years E None of the avove Answer: D
119. Repayment period under the Scheme for Financing Minor Irrigation Activities will be ______
years for Sprinkler/drip irrigation. Circular PSFID/PS 24/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 5-7 Years B 7-9 Years C 9-12 Years
D 10-15 Years E None of the avove Answer: D
120. Repayment period under the Scheme for Financing Minor Irrigation Activities will be ______
years for Filter point & pump set, Shallow Tube wells, Bore Well, Dug well with or without pump
set, Lift Irrigation. Circular PSFID/PS 24/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 5-7 Years B 7-9 Years C 9-12 Years
D 11-15 Years E None of the avove Answer: D
121. Gestation period for term loan under the Scheme for financing piggery development will be
______ months. Circular PSFID/PS 23/2020 dated 26.03.2020
213
A 3 month B 6 month C 9 month

D 12 Months E None of the avove Answer: D
122. Financial assistance may also be provided under the Scheme for financing piggery development
Page
for purchase of feed and medicines for a period not exceeding ______ months. Circular PSFID/PS

23/2020 dated 26.03.2020

A 3 month B 6 month C 9 month
123. PNB Farm Score Model is applicable for Cash Credit/ Production Credit loan more than
Rs.______ and for investment Credit/Term Loan more than Rs.1 lakh. Circular PSFID/PS 22/2020
dated 26.03.2020
A Rs.3 lakh ; Rs.1 lakh B Rs.3 lakh ; Rs.2 lakh C Rs.5 lakh ; Rs.1 lakh
D Rs.5 lakh ; Rs.2 lakh E None of the avove Answer: A
124. To extend relief measures including rescheduling of loans Scheme for Providing Relief and
Rehabilitation Assistance to people in areas affected by natural calamities, the assessed crop
loss should be ______% or more. Circular PSFID/PS 21/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 22% B 33% C 44%
125. Amount of Cash Credit under the Scheme for financing Organic farming and organic inputs will
be need based subject to maximum up to a limit of Rs. ______. Circular PSFID/PS 20/2020 dated
26.03.2020
D Rs. 1 crore E None of the avove Answer: C
126. Maximum amount of Term loan under the Scheme for financing Organic farming and organic
inputs will be Rs. ______. Circular PSFID/PS 20/2020 dated 26.03.2020
D Need Based E None of the avove Answer: D
127. Margin for production credit under the Scheme for financing Organic farming and organic inputs
will be ______% Circular PSFID/PS 20/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 10% B 15% C 20%
128. For production credit under the Scheme for financing Organic farming and organic inputs, KCC
may be issued for limit upto Rs.______. Circular PSFID/PS 20/2020 dated 26.03.2020
D Rs. 50 lakh E None of the avove Answer: D
129. Repayment period the Scheme for financing forestry development programmes will be fixed with
a minimum of ______ years to a maximum of ______ years. Circular PSFID/PS 18/2020 dated
26.03.2020
130. Minimum & maximum repayment period of term loan including gestation period under Scheme
for financing sheep/goat breeding/rearing activities will be ______ years. Circular PSFID/PS
17/2020 dated 26.03.2020
D 5-7 years E None of the avove Answer: C
131. Gestation period under Scheme for financing sheep/goat breeding/rearing activities will be
______. Circular PSFID/PS 17/2020 dated 26.03.2020
D 12 Months E None of the avove Answer: D
132. Proposal under the Scheme for Financing Self-Propelled Combine Harvesters should be from
areas which offer good potential for custom hiring i.e. a minimum of ______ acres per year.
A 1000 acres B 1200 acres C 1400 acres
D 1600 acres E None of the avove Answer: D
133. Farmers owning minimum ______ acres of land or having perpetual right of cultivation of
minimum ______ acres of land are eligible for financing under the scheme for Financing
214
Purchase of Draft Animals and/ or Animal Drawn Vehicles. Circular PSFID/PS 15/2020 dated
26.03.2020
A 1 acre ; 1 acre B 1 acre ; 2 acres C 2 acres ; 2 acres
Page
D 2.5 acres ; 2,5 acres E None of the avove Answer: C

134. Gestation period under the Scheme for Financing Mushroom Cultivation And Spawn Production
will be ______ months for mushroom cultivation and ______ for spawn production. Circular
PSFID/PS 14/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 3 months ; 1 year B 6 months ; 1 year C 3 months ; 2 years
D 6 months ; 2 years E None of the avove Answer: B
135. Repayment period under the Scheme for Financing Mushroom Cultivation And Spawn
Production will be ______ years including gestation period.. Circular PSFID/PS 14/2020 dated
26.03.2020
136. Extent of loan under Produce (Marketing) Loan Scheme would be ______% of the Minimum
Support Price or Current Market Price whichever is lower, at the time of disbursement maximum
upto Rs. ______. Circular PSFID/PS 12/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 50% ; Rs. 25 lakh B 50% ; Rs. 50 lakh C 75% ; Rs. 25 lakh
D 75% ; Rs. 50 lakh E None of the avove Answer: D
137. Produce (Marketing) Loan shall be repaid within a maximum period of ______ from the date of its
disbursement. Circular PSFID/PS 12/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A six months B twelve months C eighteen months
D twenty four months E None of the avove Answer: B
138. Quantum of loans under the Scheme for Financing Loan for Farm House Construction will be
need based depending upon the project cost and repaying capacity of the borrower subject to
maximum ceiling of Rs. ______ for onstruction of farmhouse and loans for repair of existing
structures will be capped at a limit of Rs. ______. Circular PSFID/PS 11/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A Rs. 10.00 Lacs ; Rs. B Rs. 15.00 Lacs ; Rs. C Rs. 15.00 Lacs ; Rs.
5.00 Lacs 5.00 Lacs 10.00 Lacs
D Rs. 20.00 Lacs ; Rs. E None of the avove Answer: B
10.00 Lacs
139. The total quantum of loan including the loan for repair under the Scheme for Financing Loan for
Farm House Construction will be Rs. ______. Circular PSFID/PS 11/2020 dated 26.03.2020
D Rs. 25.00 Lacs E None of the avove Answer: C
140. Net Take Home (NTH) for eligible under the Scheme for Financing Loan for Farm House
Construction should be ______% of gross annual income at the time of applying for loan (after
meeting the installment for the proposed loan under this scheme) with a minimum of Rs.
______p.a. Circular PSFID/PS 11/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 40% ; Rs. 1.50 Lacs/- B 50% ; Rs. 1.50 Lacs/- C 40% ; Rs. 2.00 Lacs/-
D 50% ; Rs. 2.00 Lacs/- E None of the avove Answer: A
141. Assessment for eligibility under the Scheme for Financing Loan for Farm House Construction on
basis of value of collateral security will be calculated at ______% the value of immovable
property offered as security or ______% the value of liquid securities such as LIC policy
(surrender value), FDR, NSC/ KVP etc. Circular PSFID/PS 11/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 80% ; 100% B 80% ; 150% C 90% ; 100%
142. Margin under the Scheme for Financing Loan for Farm House Construction will be ______% of
the estimated cost of construction/ repair. Circular PSFID/PS 11/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A NIL B 10% C 15%
143. Maximum repayment period for construction under the Scheme for Financing Loan for Farm
House Construction will be ______ years or ______ years of age of the borrower whichever is
lower Circular PSFID/PS 11/2020 dated 26.03.2020
215

144. Maximum repayment period for repairs under the Scheme for Financing Loan for Farm House
Construction will be ______ years or ______ years of age of the borrower whichever is lower
Page


145. Maximum quantum of loan under the Scheme for Financing Estate/ Orchard Purchase will be up
to Rs. ______. Circular PSFID/PS 10/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A Rs. 1.00 Cr B Rs. 2.00 Cr C Rs. 5.00 Cr
D Rs. 10.00 Cr E None of the avove Answer: B
146. Minimum margin under the Scheme for Financing Estate/ Orchard Purchase will be ______%.
A NIL B 20% C 30%
147. The assessment and extent of limit under the Scheme for Financing Estate/ Orchard Purchase
shall be maximum ______% of the realizable value of the property. Circular PSFID/PS 10/2020
dated 26.03.2020
A 60% B 70% C 75%
148. Loan under the Scheme for Financing Estate/ Orchard Purchase will be repaid within ______
years. Circular PSFID/PS 10/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 5-7 year B 5-10 year C 7-10 year
D 9-10 year E None of the avove Answer: C
149. All agriculturists owning and cultivating agricultural lands of more than ______ of agriculture
land in their name/s with ______ years of satisfactory dealing with the bank are eligible to apply
for Three Wheeler (carrier) and Four Wheeler (LMV) under the Scheme for Financing Vehicle For
Farmers/ Agriculturists. Circular PSFID/PS 09/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 1 acre ; 2 years B 1 acre ; 3 years C 2.5 acre ; 2 years
D 2.5 acre ; 3 years E None of the avove Answer: A
150. UNDER the Scheme for Financing Vehicle For Farmers/ Agriculturists, In case of agriculturists
engaged in Dairy farming, Poultry farming, Plantation Crops and Horticultural produce or other
allied activity, the minimum land holding requirement does not apply, instead they should have
minimum gross annual income of Rs. ______ for 3 & 4 wheeler. Circular PSFID/PS 09/2020 dated
26.03.2020
D Rs. 2.50 lacs E None of the avove Answer: D
151. In case of loans above Rs. ______ under the Scheme for Financing Vehicle For Farmers/
Agriculturists, ITR where agricultural income is also declared is compulsory. Circular PSFID/PS
09/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A Rs. 5 Lacs B Rs. 10 Lacs C Rs. 15 Lacs
152. Eligibility of finance under the Scheme for Financing Vehicle For Farmers/ Agriculturists will be
calculated as ______ times of net annual income in case of Farm Income or ______ times the
value of annual crop production from the farm taking into consideration type of crop, area under
cultivation, market value of produce etc or ______ times the value of net anticipated annual profit
from economic activity undertaken by the applicant In case of other income/ income from allied
activities whichever is lower. Circular PSFID/PS 09/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 3 times ; 3 times ; 3 B 4 times ; 4 times ; 3 C 4 times ; 3 times ; 3
times times times
D 4 times ; 4 times ; 4 E None of the avove Answer: C
times
153. Maximum Loan Amount for Scooters, Motorcycles etc under the Scheme for Financing Vehicle
For Farmers/ Agriculturists will be Rs. ______. Circular PSFID/PS 09/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A Rs 50, 000/- B Rs 1, 00, 000/- C Rs 1, 50, 000/-
D Rs 2, 00, 000/- E None of the avove Answer: B
216
154. Maximum Loan Amount for Three- Wheeler (carriers) under the Scheme for Financing Vehicle
For Farmers/ Agriculturists will be Rs. ______. Circular PSFID/PS 09/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A Rs 1, 50, 000/- B Rs 2, 00, 000/- C Rs 3, 00, 000/-
Page
D Rs 5, 00, 000/- E None of the avove Answer: C

155. Maximum Loan Amount for Four- Wheeler (LMVs) under the Scheme for Financing Vehicle For
Farmers/ Agriculturists will be Rs. ______. Circular PSFID/PS 09/2020 dated 26.03.2020
D Rs. 20.00 Lacs E None of the avove Answer: C
156. Under the Scheme for Financing Vehicle For Farmers/ Agriculturists, Minimum margin on the on-
Road price inclusive of invoice value, life tax, registration charges and insurance premium, will
be ______% for loan upto Rs. 10.00 Lacs and ______% for loans above Rs.10.00 Lacs & upto
Rs.15.00 Lacs. Circular PSFID/PS 09/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 5% ; 10% B 5% ; 15% C 10% ; 10%
157. Maximum repayment period under the Scheme for Financing Vehicle For Farmers/ Agriculturists
will be ______ months in case of 2/3 wheeler and ______ months in case of new 4 wheeler
vehicle. Circular PSFID/PS 09/2020 dated 26.03.2020
158. Interest subvention will be provided on a maximum limit of ₹ ______ short term loan to farmers
involved in animal husbandry and fisheries. Circular PSFID/PS 05/2020 dated 21.03.2020
159. The interest subvention and prompt repayment incentive benefit on short term loan (i.e. Crop
loan+ working capital loan for animal husbandry and fisheries) will be available only on an
overall limit of ₹ ______ per annum. Circular PSFID/PS 05/2020 dated 21.03.2020
D ₹ 5 lakh E None of the avove Answer: C
160. As per PFRDA (Redressal of Subscriber Grievance) Regulations. 2015. an Appeal to the
Ombudsman may be filed by a NPS & APY complainant whose grievance has not been resolved
within ______ days from its escalation by filing a complaint with the National Pension System
Trust (NPST). Circular PSFID/FI 08/2020 dated 04.09.2020
161. The facility under the Credit Guarantee Scheme for Subordinate Debt (CGSSD) is guaranteed by
CGTMSE upto the extent of ______%. Circular MSME 107/2020 dated 17. 10.2020
A 80% B 85% C 90%
162. Under the Credit Guarantee Scheme for Subordinate Debt (CGSSD), Promoter(s) of the MSME
unit will be given credit facility, by the lending institution, equal to ______% of promoter(s) stake
in the MSME entity (equity plus debt), existing total outstanding exposure of the entity or
₹______, whichever is lower. Circular MSME 107/2020 dated 17. 10.2020
A 10% ; ₹50 lakh B 15% ; ₹50 lakh C 10% ; ₹75 lakh
D 15% ; ₹75 lakh E None of the avove Answer: D
163. If promoters have invested ₹100 lakh as equity/debt in a company and existing total outstanding
exposure of the entity is ₹10 lakh then eligible amount under the Credit Guarantee Scheme for
Subordinate Debt (CGSSD)will be Rs. ______. Circular MSME 107/2020 dated 17. 10.2020
exposure of the entity is ₹35 lakh, then eligible amount under the Credit Guarantee Scheme for
217
exposure of the entity is ₹100 lakh, then eligible amount under the Credit Guarantee Scheme for
Page
D ₹100 lakh E None of the avove Answer: C

166. Under the Credit Guarantee Scheme for Subordinate Debt (CGSSD), Maximum tenor for
repayment will be ______ years with maximum moratorium of ______ years, wherein only
interest needs to be paid. Circular MSME 107/2020 dated 17. 10.2020
167. Any Guarantee fees due by the MLI (current and previous FY) will be demanded along with penal
interest and additional risk premium @______ of standard rate as per the guidelines of the
CGTMSE scheme. Circular MSME 105/2020 dated 05. 10.2020
A 10.00% B 15.00% C 20.00%
168. The lending institution may invoke the CGTMSE guarantee in respect of credit facility within a
maximum period of ______ years from the NPA date or lock-in period whichever is later, if the
NPA date is on or after 15.03.2018. Circular MSME 105/2020 dated 05. 10.2020
169. Initiation of legal proceeding as a pre-condition for invoking of guarantees is waived in respect
of those credit facilities covered under Credit Guarantee Scheme where the aggregate
outstanding amount considered eligible for claim settlement by CGTMSE does not exceed ₹
______ per claim. Circular MSME 105/2020 dated 05. 10.2020
A ₹50,000/- B ₹1,00,000/- C ₹1,50,000/-
D ₹5,00,000/- E None of the avove Answer: A
170. The settlement of second / final instalment under CGTMSE will be considered on conclusion of
recovery, irrespective of the sanction date of the credit facility, provided minimum period of
______ years from the date of settlement of first claim has been lapsed. Circular MSME 105/2020
dated 05. 10.2020
171. Annual Guarantee fee (first time fee) shall be paid to the Trust by the institution availing of the
guarantee within ______ days from the date of first disbursement of credit facility (not applicable
for Working capital) or ______ days from the date of Demand Advice (CGDAN) of guarantee fee
whichever is later or such date as specified by the Trust. Circular MSME 105/2020 dated 05.
10.2020
172. Proposal under Credit Guarantee Scheme for Subordinate Debt (CGSSD) shall be considered by
the respective sanctioning authority under whose power the proposal otherwise falls in case of
Branches/ PLPs/MCC/ZOCAC-I. However, proposals, pertaining to ZOCAC-II & Head Office level
Credit Approval Committees, can be considered by ______. Circular MSME 103/2020 dated
22.09.2020
173. For accounts restructured under the scheme One –Time Restructuring of MSME Advances as
per provisions of RBI Circular No. RBI/2020-21/17 DOR. No. BP.BC/4/ 21.04.048/2020-21 dated
06.08.2020, banks shall maintain additional provision of ______% over and above the provision
already held by them. Circular MSME 98/2020 dated 09.09.2020
A 5% B 10% C 15%
174. When a request for proceedings is received by the branch under Framework for Revival and
Rehabilitation of Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises’ (FRR for MSMEs, the account with
aggregate loan limits above ₹10 lacs should be referred to the Committee.The Committee should
convene its meeting at the earliest but not later than ______ days from the receipt of the
218
application, to examine the account for a suitable CAP. Circular MSME 98/2020 dated 09.09.2020
A five working days B seven working days C ten working days
D fifteen working days E None of the avove Answer: A
Page
175. Any MSME borrower may voluntarily initiate proceedings Under Framework for Revival and

Rehabilitation of Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises’ (FRR for MSMEs), , if the enterprise
reasonably apprehends failure of its business or its inability or likely inability to pay debts or
there is erosion in the net worth due to accumulated losses to the extent of ______% of its net
worth during the previous accounting year, by making an application to the branch or directly to
the Committee, wherever applicable. Circular MSME 98/2020 dated 09.09.2020
A 10% B 20% C 25%
176. As per new definition, an enterprise where the investment in plant andmachinery or equipment
does not exceed one crore rupeesand turnover does not exceed five crore rupees shall be
classified as a______. Circular MSME 96/2020 dated 04.09.2020
A Micro Enterprise B Small Enterprise C Medium
Enterprise
D Large Enterprise E None of the avove Answer: A
177. As per new definition, an enterprise where the investment in plant and machinery or equipment
does notexceed ten crore rupees and turnover does not exceed fifty crore rupees shall be
classified as a______. Circular MSME 96/2020 dated 04.09.2020
Enterprise
D Large Enterprise E None of the avove Answer: B
178. As per new definition, an enterprise where the investment in plant andmachinery or equipment
does notexceed fifty crore rupees and turnover does not exceed two hundred and fifty crore
rupees shall be classified as a______. Circular MSME 96/2020 dated 04.09.2020
Enterprise
D Large Enterprise E None of the avove Answer: C
179. Under PM Street Vendor's AtmaNirbharNidhi (PM SVANidhi), Bank to provide Credit Life
insurance/ Loan Protection insurance on the disbursed loan amount. The Street Vendor may be
charged the actual premium paid or Rs.______, whichever is less, which shall be recovered from
the disbursed amount. Circular MSME 94/2020 dated 26.08.2020
A Rs.10 B Rs.25 C Rs.50
D Rs.100 E None of the avove Answer: D
180. The maximum repayment tenure of term loan under PNB Sampatti Scheme will be ______
inclusive of ______ moratorium. Circular MSME 90/2020 dated 31.07.2020
181. The maximum repayment tenure of Overdraft (with Reducing DP) under the Scheme PNB
Sampatti will be ______ subject to annual renewal. The drawing power will be reduced on ______
basis with fixed amount so as the total Principal+ Interest is liquidated at the loan tenure. Circular
MSME 90/2020 dated 31.07.2020
182. All facilities under PNB Sampatti Scheme will be adjusted ______ years prior to the residual life
of the property. Circular MSME 90/2020 dated 31.07.2020
183. Maximum Loan to Value Ratio under PNB Sampatti Scheme will be upto ______% of R.V. of the
property in case of residential property and upto ______% of R.V. of the property in case of other
than residential property Circular MSME 90/2020 dated 31.07.2020
A 50% ; 50% B 60% ; 50% C 60% ; 60%
184. Maximum amount of term loan under PNB Sampatti Scheme shall be prescribed LTV or ______%
219
of the assets to be created out of loan whichever is lower. Circular MSME 90/2020 dated
31.07.2020
A 60% B 70% C 75%
Page

185. Under PNB Sampatti Scheme, Property to be mortgaged is to be within _____ Km of the Metro
Branches and within ______ Km of the Non Metro Branches where account is/ to be maintained.
A 40 Km ; 20 Km B 50 Km ; 20 Km C 50 Km ; 25 Km
D 50 Km ; 30 Km E None of the avove Answer: C
186. Property already mortgaged in any existing loans, may be extended in PNB Sampatti scheme
subject to availability of residual realizable value after carving out ______% of the RV of the
security of the existing exposure. Circular MSME 90/2020 dated 31.07.2020
A 100% B 125% C 150%
187. Property charged in this scheme may be extended to cover any other facility to the extent of spill
over available i.e. realizable value of property in excess of ______% of the exposure against
which the property is held as primary security. Circular MSME 90/2020 dated 31.07.2020
A 100% B 125% C 150%
188. Average DSCR under PNB Sampatti Scheme should be ______ , with minimum of ______ during
entire repayment period (for Term Loan and OD with reducing DP). Circular MSME 90/2020 dated
31.07.2020
A 1.30 ; 1.20 B 1.40 ; 1.20 C 1.50 ; 1.20
D 1.60 ; 1.30 E None of the avove Answer: C
189. PM street vendor's AtmaNirbhar Nidhi will implemented by ______ PM street vendor's
AtmaNirbhar Nidhi. Circular MSME 82/2020 dated 04.07.2020
A SIDBI B NABARD C RBI
D LIC E None of the avove Answer: A
190. Under the scheme PM street vendor's AtmaNirbhar Nidhi (PM SVANidhi), Urban street vendors
will be eligible to avail a Working Capital Term loan (WCTL) up to Rs.______with tenure of
______ and repayable in monthly Instalments. Circular MSME 82/2020 dated 04.07.2020
A Rs.10,000/- ; 1 year B Rs.10,000/- ; 2 years C Rs.20,000/- ; 1 year
D Rs.20,000/- ; 2 years E None of the avove Answer: A
191. The vendors availing loan under the scheme PM street vendor's AtmaNirbhar Nidhi (PM
SVANidhi) are eligible to get an interest subsidy @ ______%. The interest subsidy amount will be
credited into the borrower’s account quarterly. Circular MSME 82/2020 dated 04.07.2020
A 2% B 3% C 5%
192. The interest subsidy under the scheme PM street vendor's AtmaNirbhar Nidhi (PM SVANidhi) is
available up to ______. The subsidy will be available on first and subsequent enhanced loans up
to that date. Circular MSME 82/2020 dated 04.07.2020
A March 31, 2021 B March 31, 2022 C March 31, 2023
D March 31, 2025 E None of the avove Answer: B
193. Margin under the scheme PM street vendor's AtmaNirbhar Nidhi (PM SVANidhi) will be ______%.
A 5% B 10% C 15%
D 25% E None of the avove Answer: E
194. As per revised definition of MSME, a Micro enterprises (manufacturing and services both) is
defined as a unit where the investment in Plant and Machinery or Equipment does not exceed
Rs.______ and turnover does not exceed Rs. ______. Circular MSME 75/2020 dated 06.06.2020
A Rs 1 crore ; Rs 5 crore B Rs 10 crore ; Rs 50 C Rs 25 crore ; Rs 100
crore crore
D Rs 50 crore ; Rs 250 E None of the avove Answer: A
crore
195. As per revised definition of MSME, a Small enterprises (manufacturing and services both) is
220
Page
crore crore

D Rs 50 crore ; Rs 250 E None of the avove Answer: B

crore
196. As per revised definition of MSME, a Medium enterprises (manufacturing and services both) is
crore crore
D Rs 50 crore ; Rs 250 E None of the avove Answer: D
crore
197. Within ______days of receipt of application under PMEGP, the nodal officer of KVIC, State KVIB
and DIC shall interact with the applicant personally on telephone or personal meeting and
confirm the receipt/acceptance of the application for preliminary scrutiny. Circular MSME 70/2020
dated 11.05.2020
D fifteen working days E None of the avove Answer: A
198. IBA with consultation with KVIC has devised a scoring model (score card) which is being used
by members banks for PMEGP cases for the selection of beneficiaries. Applications which do
not score more than______ of 100 marks will be rejected. Circular MSME 70/2020 dated
11.05.2020
A 40 marks B 50 marks C 55 marks
D 60 marks E None of the avove Answer: D
199. There shall be an On- line Grievance Portal and a Grievance Cell for PMEGP cases will be set up
by the KVIC, HQ. The Grievance Cell will act up on the on line complaints within ______ and
direct the concerned state officers to take necessary action. Circular MSME 70/2020 dated
11.05.2020
A 24 hours B 48 hours C 72 hours
D 96 hours E None of the avove Answer: B
200. The bank will either sanction or reject the loan application under PMEGP within a stipulated
period. Sanction will be issued based on the on line sanction letter and the copies of the
sanction letter will be sent to the applicant (by e-mail/hard copy) as well as to KVIC/KVIB/DIC
within ______ days from the receipt of application from the District Agencies. Circular MSME
70/2020 dated 11.05.2020
201. The Oriental Business Loan Scheme in earstwhile OBC and United Mortgage Loan (Business
Loan) in earstwhile UBI are renamed as ______ for the amalgamated entity (PNB 2.0). Circular
MSME 68/2020 dated 21.04.2020
A PNB Sampatti B PNB Gurukul Scheme C PNB Satkar Scheme
D PNB Mahila Udyami E None of the avove Answer: A
Scheme
202. The Oriental Vidyalaya Scheme/ Loan to Educational Institute in earstwhile OBC is renamed as
______ for the amalgamated entity (PNB 2.0). Circular MSME 68/2020 dated 21.04.2020
D PNB Mahila Udyami E None of the avove Answer: B
Scheme
203. The Oriental Budget Hotels & Restaurents scheme in earstwhile OBC is renamed as ______ for
the amalgamated entity (PNB 2.0). Circular MSME 68/2020 dated 21.04.2020
D PNB Mahila Udyami E None of the avove Answer: C
Scheme
204. The scheme PNB Vanita, PNB Nurture in PNB 1.0, Loan for Beauty Parlour in earstwhile OBC and
United Mahila Udyami Yojona in earstwhile UBI are renamed as ______ for the amalgamated
221
entity (PNB 2.0). Circular MSME 68/2020 dated 21.04.2020

D PNB Mahila Udyami E None of the avove Answer: D
Page
Scheme

205. The objective of the Stand-Up India Scheme is to facilitate bank loans between Rs. ______ to Rs.
______ to at least one Scheduled Caste (SC) or scheduled Tribe (ST) borrower and at least one
Woman borrower per bank branch of all scheduled commercial banks for setting up a greenfield
enterprise. Circular MSME 57/2020 dated 27.03.2020
lakh
D Rs. 25 lakh ; Rs. 100 E None of the avove Answer: C
lakh
206. To be eligible under Stand Up India, at least ______% of the shareholding and controlling stake
should be held by either an SC/ST or Woman entrepreneur for eligibility in case of non-individual
enterprises. Circular MSME 57/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 48% B 49% C 50%
207. The loan under Stand Up India is repayable in ______ years with a maximum moratorium period
of ______ months. Circular MSME 57/2020 dated 27.03.2020
D 7 years ; 18 months E None of the avove Answer: D
208. Under Stand Up India, composite loan (inclusive of term loan and working capital) is to be
sanctioned to the customer. However, working capital limit above Rs. ______ will be sanctioned
by way of Cash Credit limit only. Circular MSME 57/2020 dated 27.03.2020
D Rs. 50 lakh E None of the avove Answer: A
209. All new/renewed/enhanced/taken over MSME advances (Manufacturing/Services) having
sanctioned limit above Rs.2 Lakh & upto Rs. ______, are mandatorily to be scored in PNB Score
SME Circular MSME 55/2020 dated 27.03.2020
210. For new Loans under Govt. Sponsored scheme (eg. PMEGP scheme etc.) above Rs.2 lakh and up
to Rs.20 lakh, where Capital subsidy/ Interest subsidy/concession etc. is available and PNB SME
scores is ______, branches can consider the application for sanction as per their vested loaning
powers. Circular MSME 55/2020 dated 27.03.2020
D above 60 E None of the avove Answer: A
211. For non Govt. sponsored schemes loans above Rs.2 lakh and new Loans under Govt. Sponsored
scheme (eg. PMEGP scheme etc.) above Rs.20 lakh where PNB SME scores is ______, branches
can consider the application for sanction as per their vested loaning powers. Circular MSME
55/2020 dated 27.03.2020
D above 60 E None of the avove Answer: B
212. The Udyamimitra Portal is an enabling platform to accept loan Applications viz. MUDRA, STAND
UP INDIA and MSME loans,upto Rs. ______. Circular MSME 53/2020 dated 27.03.2020
213. Coverage ceasing age for Group Life Insurance Coverage to MSME under Met Loan & Life
Suraksha is ______ years. Circular MSME 51/2020 dated 27.03.2020
214. Minimum/Maximum sum assured for Group Life Insurance Coverage to MSME under Met Loan &
Life Suraksha shall be ______. Circular MSME 51/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A Min-Rs.5000/- ; Max- B Min-Rs.5000/- ; Max- C Min-Rs.5000/- ; Max-
Rs.100000/- Rs.500000/- No Limit
222
D Min-Rs.10000/- ; Max- E None of the avove Answer: C

No Limit
215. Our bank has developed an online portal ‘PNB MICRO LOANS PORTAL’ to provide ‘In-principle
Page
approval’ of loans up to Rs. ______ to eligible MSME applicants. Circular MSME 50/2020 dated

27.03.2020
D Rs. 10 lac E None of the avove Answer: A
216. After complition of the Borrower’s journey for submission of application on the ‘PNB MICRO
LOANS PORTAL’, concerned branch has to dispose of the In-Prinicple approval application
within ______. Circular MSME 50/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A a week B two weeks C 15 days
217. The maximum limit for Term Loan & Working Capital limit sanctioned under PNB Kushal
Handicraft Welfare Mudra Scheme (PNB KHWMS) would be Rs.______. Circular MSME 47/2020
dated 27.03.2020
D Rs. 25.00 lakh E None of the avove Answer: B
218. OD facility under PNB Kushal Handicraft Welfare Mudra Scheme (PNB KHWMS) may be
sanctioned by way of Mudra Card upto Rs.______. Circular MSME 47/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A Rs.50,000/- B Rs.1,00,000/- C Rs.1,50,000/-
219. Under PNB Kushal Handicraft Welfare Mudra Scheme (PNB KHWMS), Office of DC (Handicraft),
Ministry of Textile, GOI shall provide Interest Subvention of ______%, subject to maximum of Rs.
1 lakh in three years and Margin Money of 20% subject to maximum of Rs. 10,000/-. Circular
MSME 47/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 5% ; Rs. 1 lakh B 5% ; Rs. 2 lakh C 6% ; Rs. 1 lakh
D 6% ; Rs. 2 lakh E None of the avove Answer: C
220. Under PNB Kushal Handicraft Welfare Mudra Scheme (PNB KHWMS), Office of DC (Handicraft),
Ministry of Textile, GOI shall provide Margin Money of 20% subject to maximum of Rs. ______.
A 10% ; Rs. 10,000/- B 20% ; Rs. 10,000/- C 10% ; Rs. 20,000/-
D 20% ; Rs. 20,000/- E None of the avove Answer: B
221. Margin for Working Capital under PNB Kushal Handicraft Welfare Mudra Scheme (PNB KHWMS)
will be ______% for loans upto Rs.2 lakh and ______% for loans above Rs. 2 lakh to Rs. 5 lakh.
A 5% ; 15% B 5% ; 20% C Nil ; 15%
222. Margin for Purchase of Land for construction of factory building thereon/Construction of
Building on land purchased through Bank’s finance/Construction of Building on land owned by
borrower//Constructed Factory Building upto Rs. 5 lacs under PNB Kushal Handicraft Welfare
Mudra Scheme (PNB KHWMS) will be ______% Circular MSME 47/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 15% B 20% C 25%
223. Margin for purchase of Plant and machinery under PNB Kushal Handicraft Welfare Mudra
Scheme (PNB KHWMS) will be ______% for loans upto Rs.2 lakh and ______% for loans above
Rs. 2 lakh to Rs. 5 lakh. Circular MSME 47/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 5% ; 15% B 5% ; 20% C Nil ; 15%
224. Margin for purchase of old machinery/old generators set upto Rs. 5 lacs under PNB Kushal
Handicraft Welfare Mudra Scheme (PNB KHWMS) will be ______%. Circular MSME 47/2020 dated
27.03.2020
A 15% B 20% C 25%
225. Old machinery having Minimum remaining useful life i.e. ______ years or loan tenure, whichever
is higher may be purchased under PNB Kushal Handicraft Welfare Mudra Scheme (PNB
223
KHWMS). In case of old generators set, it should not be older than ______ years. Circular MSME
47/2020 dated 27.03.2020
Page

226. Repayment periodof Term Loan under PNB Kushal Handicraft Welfare Mudra Scheme (PNB
KHWMS) will be ______ years in monthly/quarterly installments exclusive of gestation
period of ______ months. Circular MSME 47/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 3 to 5 years ; 6 to 12 B 3 years ; 6 months C 5 years ; 6 months
months
D 5 years ; 12 months E None of the avove Answer: A
227. Duration of the Venture Capital Fund for Scheduled Castes is ______ years from the date of
implementation with provision of 2 years as extension. Circular MSME 45/2020 dated 27.03.2020
228. Investment Period of Venture Capital Fund for Scheduled Castes will be ______ years from the
date of Closing Circular MSME 45/2020 dated 27.03.2020
229. Companies having at least ______% stake holding by Scheduled Caste entrepreneurs for the
past 12 months with management control are eligible under Venture Capital Fund Scheme for
Scheduled Castes. Circular MSME 45/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 49% B 51% C 50%
230. The Venture Capital Fund for Scheduled Castes will be available for both Ltd. and Pvt. Ltd.
companies existing since ______. Circular MSME 45/2020 dated 27.03.2020
231. Where financial assistance is upto Rs 5 Crore under the Venture Capital Fund scheme for
Scheduled Castes, Investment shall be funded maximum upto ______% of the project cost and
the balance ______% of the project cost will be funded by the promoters Circular MSME 45/2020
dated 27.03.2020
A 60% ; 40% B 70% ; 30% C 75% ; 25%
232. Where financial assistance is above Rs. 5 Crore under the Venture Capital Fund scheme for
Scheduled Caste, Investment shall be funded maximum upto ______% of the project cost. At
least ______% of the project cost has to be financed by bank/other institutions and balance
______% of the project cost will be funded by the promoters. Circular MSME 45/2020 dated
27.03.2020
A 50% ; 25% ; 25% B 60% ; 20% ; 20% C 50% ; 40% ; 10%
D 40% ; 30% ; 30% E None of the avove Answer: A
233. Under Prime Minister’s Employment Generation Programme (PMEGP) for setting up new Micro
Enterprise (Units), general category beneficiaries can avail margin money subsidy of ______ %
of the project cost in rural areas and ______% in urban areas. Circular MSME 44/2020 dated
27.03.2020
A 25% ; 20% B 30% ; 20% C 25% ; 15%
234. For beneficiaries belonging to special categories such as Scheduled Caste/Scheduled Tribe/OBC
/Minorities/Women, Ex-serviceman, Physically Handicapped, NER, Hill and Border areas etc. the
margin money subsidy under Prime Minister’s Employment Generation Programme (PMEGP) is
_____% in rural areas and ______% in urban areas. Circular MSME 44/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 25% ; 20% B 30% ; 20% C 25% ; 15%
235. The maximum cost of projects under Prime Minister’s Employment Generation Programme
(PMEGP) is Rs. ______ in the manufacturing sector and Rs. 10 lakh in the service sector. Circular
MSME 44/2020 dated 27.03.2020
224
A Rs.10 lakh ; Rs. 5 lakh B Rs. 50 lakh ; Rs. 25 lakh C Rs. 25 lakh ; Rs. 10
lakh
D Rs. 25 lakh ; Rs. 20 lakh E None of the avove Answer: C
Page
236. For setting up new projects costing above Rs.______ in the manufacturing sector and above Rs.

______ in the business /service sector under Prime Minister’s Employment Generation
Programme (PMEGP), the beneficiaries should have passed at least the 8th standard. Circular
MSME 44/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A Rs.10 lakh ; Rs. 5 lakh B Rs. 20 lakh ; Rs. 5 lakh C Rs. 25 lakh ; Rs. 10
lakh
D Rs. 25 lakh ; Rs. 20 lakh E None of the avove Answer: A
237. Ministry of MSME has introduced a new component of second financial assistance for
expansion/upgrading the existing PMEGP units for manufacturing unit up to Rs.______ and for
service/ business unit up to Rs.______ . Circular MSME 44/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A Rs.50.00 lakhs ; B Rs.1.00 crore ; Rs.25.00 C Rs.1.00 crore ;
Rs.25.00 lakhs lakhs Rs.50.00 lakhs
D Rs.2.00 crore ; Rs.50.00 E None of the avove Answer: B
lakhs
238. Rate of subsidy for expansion/upgrading the existing PMEGP/MUDRA units will be ______% for
all categories except for NER and Hilly state. Circular MSME 44/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 10% B 15% C 20%
239. Rate of subsidy for expansion/upgrading the existing PMEGP/MUDRA units will be ______% for
all categories in NER and Hilly state. Circular MSME 44/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 10% B 15% C 20%
240. The beneficiary's contribution under Prime Minister’s Employment Generation Programme
(PMEGP) for setting up new Micro Enterprise (Units) will be _____% of the cost of the project for
special category borrowers and ______% for General category borrowers. Circular MSME 44/2020
dated 27.03.2020
A 5% ; 10% B 10% ; 15% C 15% ; 20%
241. Rate of subsidy for special category of benrficiary under Prime Minister’s Employment
Generation Programme (PMEGP) for setting up new Micro Enterprise (Units) will be ______% of
project cost in rural areas and ______% of project cost in urban areas. Circular MSME 44/2020
dated 27.03.2020
A 25% ; 15% B 20% ; 15% C 30% ; 25%
242. Rate of subsidy for general category of benrficiary under Prime Minister’s Employment
Generation Programme (PMEGP) for setting up new Micro Enterprise (Units) will be ______% of
project cost in rural areas and ______% of project cost in urban areas. Circular MSME 44/2020
dated 27.03.2020
A 25% ; 15% B 20% ; 15% C 30% ; 25%
243. The Bank will sanction ______% of the project cost in case of General Category of
beneficiary/institution and ______% in case of special category of the beneficiary/institution, and
disburse full amount suitably for setting up of new project under Prime Minister’s Employment
Generation Programme (PMEGP). Circular MSME 44/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 90% ; 95% B 85% ; 90% C 80% ; 85%
244. In case the Bank’s advance under Prime Minister’s Employment Generation Programme
(PMEGP) goes “bad” before the ______ year period , due to reasons, beyond the control of the
beneficiary, the Margin Money (subsidy) will be returned to the KVIC alongwith the interest.
A one year B two year C three year
D five year E None of the avove Answer: C
225
245. The duration of the Entrepreneurship Development Programme (EDP) under Prime Minister’s
Employment Generation Programme (PMEGP) would be for at least ______ days for projects with
project cost up to Rs. 10 lakh and for projects with project cost above Rs. 10 lakh the duration of
Page
EDP would be for at least ______ days. Circular MSME 44/2020 dated 27.03.2020


246. The beneficiary's contribution under Prime Minister’s Employment Generation Programme
(PMEGP) for expansion/ upgrading the existing PMEGP units will be _____% of the cost of the
project for all category borrowers. Circular MSME 44/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 5% B 10% C 15%
247. Projects costing more than Rs.______ under Prime Minister’s Employment Generation
Programme (PMEGP), which do not require working capital, need clearance from the Regional
Office or Controller of the Bank's Branch and the claims are required to be submitted with such
certified copy of approval from Regional Office or Controller, as the case may be. Circular MSME
44/2020 dated 27.03.2020
D Rs.25 lakh E None of the avove Answer: A
248. Cost of the land under PMEGP should not be included in the Project cost. However, Cost of the
ready built as well as long lease or rental Work-shed/Workshop can be included in the project
cost subject to restricting such cost of ready built as well as long lease or rental
workshed/workshop to be included in the project cost calculated for a maximum period of
______years only. Circular MSME 44/2020 dated 27.03.2020
249. For manufacturing units, working capital component should not be more than ______% of
project cost and for unis for business/service sector, the working capital shall not be more than
______% of project cost under Prime Minister’s Employment Generation Programme (PMEGP).
A 40% ; 50% B 40% ; 60% C 50% ; 60%
250. Working capital component under Prime Minister’s Employment Generation Programme
(PMEGP) should be utilised in such a way that at one point of stage it touches ______% limit of
cash credit within 3 years of lock-in-period of margin maney and not less than ______%
utilization of sanction limit. Circular MSME 44/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 90% ; 75% B 100% ; 80% C 100% ; 75%
251. Repayment period under Prime Minister’s Employment Generation Programme (PMEGP) will be
______ years after an initial moratorium as may be prescribed by the concerned bank/financial
institution. Circular MSME 44/2020 dated 27.03.2020
D 5 to 10 years E None of the avove Answer: B
252. At present persons with family income below Rs.______ per annum in Rural Areas and
Rs.______per annum in Urban Areas come under double the poverty line. Circular MSME 43/2020
dated 27.03.2020
A Rs.90,000/- ; B Rs.98,000/- ; C Rs.90,000/- ;
Rs.1,20,000/- Rs.1,20,000/- Rs.1,25,000/-
D Rs.98,000/- ; E None of the avove Answer: A
Rs.1,25,000/-
253. The National Backward Classes Finance and Development Corporation (NBCFDC) will provide
refinance at ______% lower ROI against the financial assistance under NBCFDC schemes
extended by the bank. Circular MSME 43/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 1% B 2% C 3%
254. Max. Loan Limit of Rs. ______ will be provided by bank to borrower under New Swarnima
226
scheme (for women) of National Backward Classes Finance and Development Corporation
(NBCFDC). Circular MSME 43/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A Rs.0.50 Lakh B Rs.1 Lakh C Rs.2 Lakh
Page
D Rs.5 Lakh E None of the avove Answer: B

255. Max. limit of Refinance to be provided by NBCFDC to bank will be Rs. ______ will be provided by
bank to borrower under New Swarnima scheme (for women) of National Backward Classes
Finance and Development Corporation (NBCFDC). Circular MSME 43/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A Rs.0.50 Lakh B Rs.1 Lakh C Rs.2 Lakh
D Rs.5 Lakh E None of the avove Answer: B
256. Max. limit of Refinance to be provided by NBCFDC to bank will be Rs. ______ will be provided by
bank to borrower under all other Schemes of National Backward Classes Finance and
Development Corporation (NBCFDC) (excluding New Swarnima scheme). Circular MSME 43/2020
dated 27.03.2020
D Rs.25 Lakhs E None of the avove Answer: B
257. For extending concessional loans under MSE segment for income generating activities to People
with Disabilities (PwDs), the National Handicapped Finance and Development Corporation
(NHFDC) will provide 100% refinance at ______% lower ROI against the financial assistance
extended by the bank Circular MSME 42/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 1% B 2% C 3%
258. Any Indian citizen between 18 and 60 years with ______% or more disability having annual
income below Rs. ______per annum for urban areas and Rs. ______ per annum for rural areas
shall be eligible for assistance under the scheme for financing PwDs (People with Disabilities).
A 30% ; Rs. 500000/- ; B 40% ; Rs. 400000/- ; C 40% ; Rs. 500000/- ;
Rs. 300000/- Rs. 300000/- Rs. 200000/-
D 40% ; Rs. 500000/- ; E None of the avove Answer: D
Rs. 300000/-
259. For setting up of self employment service units under the scheme for financing PwDs (People
with Disabilities), quantum of loan will be need based, subject to maximum loan upto Rs.______.
260. For setting up of self employment manufacturing/fabrication/ production units under the scheme
for financing PwDs (People with Disabilities), quantum of loan will be need based, subject to
maximum loan upto Rs.______. Circular MSME 42/2020 dated 27.03.2020
D Rs.25 Lakhs E None of the avove Answer: D
261. For purchase of vehicle including auto rickshaw for commercial hiring purpose under the
scheme for financing PwDs (People with Disabilities), quantum of loan will be need based,
subject to maximum loan upto Rs.______. Circular MSME 42/2020 dated 27.03.2020
D Rs.25 Lakhs E None of the avove Answer: B
262. Margin for setting up manufacturing/service unit upto Rs. 2.00 Lakh under the scheme for
financing PwDs (People with Disabilities) will be ______%. Circular MSME 42/2020 dated
27.03.2020
A Nil B 5% C 7.50%
263. Margin for setting up manufacturing/service unit above Rs 2.00 Lakh & upto Rs.5.00 lakh under
the scheme for financing PwDs (People with Disabilities) will be ______%. Circular MSME 42/2020
dated 27.03.2020
A 7.50% B 10% C 15%
264. Margin for setting up manufacturing/service unit above Rs.5.00 lakh & upto Rs. 25.00 lakh under
227
the scheme for financing PwDs (People with Disabilities) will be ______%. Circular MSME 42/2020
dated 27.03.2020
A 7.50% B 10% C 15%
Page

265. Margin for purchase of vehicle 9new vehicles only) including auto rickshaw for commercial
hiring Purpose under the scheme for financing PwDs (People with Disabilities) will be ______%.
A 7.50% B 10% C 15%
266. The loan under the scheme for financing PwDs (People with Disabilities) for purchase of auto
rickshaw, station wagons or tempos shall be for a maximum period of ______ years and for
purchase of taxi cars ______ years repayable by monthly installments commencing from one
month after the date of the loan. Circular MSME 42/2020 dated 27.03.2020
267. Maximum Limit under PNB Weaver Mudra Scheme will be upto Rs.______ per borrower by way
of Cash Credit/WC. Circular MSME 41/2020 dated 27.03.2020
D Rs.25 Lakhs E None of the avove Answer: A
268. Margin under PNB Weaver Mudra Scheme will be ______% of project cost (Working Capital
Requirement). Circular MSME 41/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 7.50% B 10% C 15%
269. Under PNB Weaver Mudra Scheme, Margin @ 20% of cost of project (Working Capital
Requirement) with a maximum of Rs. ______ will be borne by Govt. Rest amount to be borne by
borrower. Circular MSME 41/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A Rs. 10000/- B Rs. 20000/- C Rs. 25000/-
D Rs. 50000/- E None of the avove Answer: A
270. Interest Subsidy under PNB Weaver Mudra Scheme will be provided for maximum ______ years
from the date of first disbursement and will be credited to the account of the borrower on______
basis. Circular MSME 41/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 3 years ; quarterly B 3 years ; half yearly C 5 years ; quarterly
D 5 years ; half yearly E None of the avove Answer: A
271. MUDRA Card under PNB Weaver Mudra Scheme will be issued for a maximum of Rs.______ and
above this amount will be disbursed by way of opening regular CC account. Circular MSME
41/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A Rs.50000/- B Rs.100000/- C Rs.150000/-
272. The beneficiaries under the PNB Weaver Mudra Scheme will be issued with a RUPAY Card
having the daily limit of Rs.______ per day. Circular MSME 41/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A Rs.10000/- B Rs.15000/- C Rs.20000/-
D Rs.25000/- E None of the avove Answer: D
273. The limit sanctioned under the PNB Weaver Mudra Scheme will be valid for ______years, subject
to annual review by the bank, based on genuine trade transactions and satisfactory track record.
274. Stock statements and financials under the PNB Weaver Mudra Scheme are required to be
submitted by borrower for loans above Rs. ______. Circular MSME 41/2020 dated 27.03.2020
275. All existing customers who are dealing with our bank for the last ______ years satisfactorily and
enjoying loan/operative limit upto ______ are eligible under PNB Laghu Udhyami Credit Card
(PNBLUCC) Circular MSME 40/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A two years ; Rs.10 lakh B three years ; Rs.10 lakh C two years ; Rs.20 lakh
228
D three years ; Rs.20 lakh E None of the avove Answer: B

276. For Small Business, Retail Traders, the PNB Laghu Udhyami Credit Card limit shall be fixed at
______% of the annual turnover declared for tax purposes or last 12 months turnover of genuine
Page
trade transactions in the operative account, whichever is higher. Circular MSME 40/2020 dated

27.03.2020
A 15% B 20% C 25%
277. For Professionals and Self-employed persons, ______% of their gross annual income as per
Income Tax return shall be considered as the limit for issuing the PNB Laghu Udhyami Credit
Card. Circular MSME 40/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 15% B 20% C 25%
278. Maximum loan under PNB Laghu Udhyami Credit Card (PNBLUCC) will be ______. Circular
MSME 40/2020 dated 27.03.2020
279. Margin for Micro & Small Enterprises (other than Trading) under PNB Laghu Udhyami Credit
Card (PNBLUCC) in case of Cash Credit (Hyp.) upto Rs. 2.00 lakh will be ______%. Circular MSME
40/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A NIL B 15% C 20%
Card (PNBLUCC) in case of Cash Credit (Hyp.) above Rs.2 lakh & upto Rs 5 lakh will be
______%. Circular MSME 40/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A NIL B 15% C 20%
Card (PNBLUCC) in case of Cash Credit (Hyp.) above Rs 5 lakh will be ______%. Circular MSME
40/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A NIL B 15% C 20%
Card (PNBLUCC) in case of Cash Credit (Pledge) will be ______%. Circular MSME 40/2020 dated
27.03.2020
A NIL B 15% C 20%
283. PNB Laghu Udhyami Credit Card limit sanctioned will be valid for ______ years, subject to
annual review by the bank, based on genuine trade transactions and satisfactory track record.
284. Maximum extent of limit under PNB General Credit Card (GCC) Scheme will be Rs. ______ for
entrepreneurial activity in the non-farm sector. Circular MSME 39/2020 dated 27.03.2020
285. The PNB GCC will be valid for ______ years and limits will be reviewed annually. Circular MSME
39/2020 dated 27.03.2020
286. Margin under PNB General Credit Card (GCC) Scheme will be ______%. Circular MSME 39/2020
dated 27.03.2020
A NIL B 15% C 20%
287. The maximum limit for Term Loan & Working Capital to be sanctioned under the PNB Artisans
Credit Card would be Rs. ______. Circular MSME 38/2020 dated 27.03.2020
229

D Rs. 5.00 lakh E None of the avove Answer: C
288. Margin under the PNB Artisans Credit Card for both Term Loan & Working Capital will be
Page
______% Circular MSME 38/2020 dated 27.03.2020

A NIL B 15% C 20%

289. The PNB Artisans Credit Card limit sanctioned will be valid for ______ years, subject to annual
review by the bank, based on genuine trade transactions and satisfactory track record. Circular
MSME 38/2020 dated 27.03.2020
290. Margin under the Scheme PNB PROFESSIONAL will be ______% for both Term Loan and
Overdraf. Circular MSME 35/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A NIL B 15% C 20%
291. Under the Scheme PNB PROFESSIONAL, wherever land is also financed as part of the cost of
project, minimum prescribed margin against cost of land shall be ______% of cost of land. The
quantum of finance against cost of the land shall be restricted to ______% of the total
sanctioned loan amount. Circular MSME 35/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 20% ; 25% B 20% ; 50% C 25% ; 25%
292. Maximum overdraft limit under the Scheme PNB PROFESSIONAL shall be ______% of annual
receipts or Rs. 25.00 lac whichever is lower . Circular MSME 35/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 10% B 15% C 20%
293. Maximum repayment period for Term Loan under the Scheme PNB PROFESSIONAL will be up to
______ months including moratorium period of maximum of ______months from the date of first
disbursement. Circular MSME 35/2020 dated 27.03.2020
D 84 months ; 6 months E None of the avove Answer: A
294. Pradhan Mantri Mudra Yojana (PMMY) is a Scheme to fund the unfunded by bringing enterprises
in Manufacturing, Trading and Services to the formal financial system and extending affordable
credit to them upto Rs. ______. Circular MSME 34/2020 dated 27.03.2020
D Rs. 25.00 Lacs E None of the avove Answer: B
295. Financial ratios shall not be applicable under Pradhan Mantri Mudra Yojana (PMMY) for loan
below Rs. ______ . Circular MSME 34/2020 dated 27.03.2020
D Rs. 10.00 Lacs E None of the avove Answer: B
296. For Loan below 2.00 lacs under Pradhan Mantri Mudra Yojana (PMMY), the Working capital
facility shall be allowed based on ______% of realistic projected turnover. Margin in this case will
A 20% ; Nil B 25% ; Nil C 20% ; 10%
297. For Loan 2.00 Lacs & above under Pradhan Mantri Mudra Yojana (PMMY), the Working capital
facility shall be allowed based on ______% of realistic projected turnover after ensuring
minimum margin of ______%. Circular MSME 34/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 20% ; 5% B 25% ; 5% C 20% ; 10%
298. Maximum repayment period under Pradhan Mantri Mudra Yojana (PMMY) shall be ______ years
including maximum moratorium period of ______ months. Circular MSME 34/2020 dated
27.03.2020
D 7 years ; 6 months E None of the avove Answer: C
299. The Working Capital limit under Pradhan Mantri Mudra Yojana (PMMY) shall be sanctioned for a
230
period of ______ years. Circular MSME 34/2020 dated 27.03.2020

Page
300. Stock Statement for working capital limit under Pradhan Mantri Mudra Yojana (PMMY) shall be

obtained on ______ basis. Circular MSME 34/2020 dated 27.03.2020

A Monthly B Quarterly C Half yearly
D Yearly E None of the avove Answer: D
301. Margin for Term Loan under Pradhan Mantri Mudra Yojana (PMMY) shall be ______% for loan up
to Rs. 50,000/- (Shishu Loans),______% for loan above Rs. 50,000/- to Rs. 2 Lakh and ______%
for loan above Rs. 5.00 Lakh to Rs. 10.00 Lakh. Circular MSME 34/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A Nil ; 10% ; 20% B Nil ; 15% ; 20% C Nil ; 10% ; 25%
302. The loan application under Pradhan Mantri Mudra Yojana (PMMY) should be disposed of within
______ for credit limit upto Rs. 5 Lakh and within ______ for credit limit above Rs. 5 Lakh from
the date of receipt of proposal Circular MSME 34/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 2 weeks ; 3 weeks B 2 weeks ; 4 weeks C 3 weeks ; 4 weeks
D 3 weeks ; 5 weeks E None of the avove Answer: A
303. For issuance of MUDRA Card under Pradhan Mantri Mudra Yojana (PMMY), Maximum composite
loan shall not exceed Rs. ______. Circular MSME 34/2020 dated 27.03.2020
304. Maximum limit of MUDRA Card under Pradhan Mantri Mudra Yojana (PMMY) shall be upto Rs.
______ Circular MSME 34/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A Rs. 10,000/- B Rs. 20,000/- C Rs. 25,000/-
D Rs. 50,000/- E None of the avove Answer: B
305. Our bank has formulated a scheme “PNB Tatkal Scheme” specially designed for the
psbloansin59minutes.com portal for the loan / limit requirement from Rs.1.00 lacs to Rs. ______
to obtain IN-PRINCIPLE approval from the portal based on data fetched from GST/ ITR / Account
statements. Circular MSME 33/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A Rs 50.00 lacs B Rs 25.00 lacs C Rs 20.00 lacs
D Rs 10.00 lacs E None of the avove Answer: B
306. Maximum tenor of Term Loan under PNB Tatkal Scheme will be ______ Years including
moratorium period of maximum ______ however next higher authority can extend the
moratorium period upto ______. Circular MSME 33/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 5 Years ; 6 months ; B 5 Years ; 12 months ; C 7 Years ; 6 months ;
1 year 1 year 1 year
D 7 Years ; 12 months ; E None of the avove Answer: C
1 year
307. Minimum margin under PNB Tatkal Scheme will be ______%. Circular MSME 33/2020 dated
27.03.2020
A NIL B 15% C 20%
308. Under PNB Tatkal Scheme, minimum Current Ratio for Working Capital should be ______ and
minimum Debt Service Coverage Ratio (DSCR) for Term Loan should be ______ . Circular MSME
33/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 1.1 ; 1.25 B 1.1 ; 1.50 C 1.33 ; 1.25
D 1.33 ; 1.50 E None of the avove Answer: A
309. Frequency of submitting Stock Statement for working Capital facility under PNB Tatkal Scheme
shall be ______. Circular MSME 33/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A Monthly B Quarterly C Half yearly
D Yearly E None of the avove Answer: C
310. GST registered units which have filed GST returns at least for the last ______ months are eligible
for financing under PNB GST Express Loan to meet working capital requirements related to
business activity or for expansion of business. Circular MSME 32/2020 dated 27.03.2020
231
D twelve months E None of the avove Answer: B

311. Loan Amount under PNB GST Express Loan will be Rs. ______. Circular MSME 32/2020 dated
27.03.2020
Page
A Above Rs.5.00 Lacs to B Above Rs.10.00 Lacs to C Above Rs.10.00 Lacs to


D Above Rs.20.00 Lacs to E None of the avove Answer: C
Rs.100.00 lakh
312. Mortgage of immovable property having realizable value of at least equivalent to ______% of the
total exposure or Security in shape of NSCs/KVPs/ FDR/CDR (Accrued Value), LIP (Surrender
Value) at least equivalent to ______% of total exposure shall be obtained under PNB GST
Express Loan. Circular MSME 32/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 150% ; 100% B 125% ; 100% C 125% ; 125%
313. Term Loan, Overdraft and Total Cumulative Exposure under PNB SATKAR Scheme will be
Rs.______, Rs. ______ and Rs. ______ respectively. Circular MSME 30/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A Rs. 10.00 Crore ; Rs. B Rs. 10.00 Crore ; Rs. C Rs. 10.00 Crore ; Rs.
50.00 lac ; Rs.10.00 25.00 lac ; Rs.10.00 50.00 lac ; Rs.5.00
crore crore crore
D Rs. 5.00 Crore ; Rs. E None of the avove Answer: A
50.00 lac ; Rs.5.00
crore
314. Margin under PNB SATKAR Scheme will be ______% for both Term Loan and Working capital
A NIL B 15% C 20%
315. Under PNB SATKAR Scheme, wherever land is also financed as part of the cost of project in
such cases minimum prescribed margin against cost of land shall be ______% of cost of land.
The quantum of finance against cost of the land shall be restricted to ______% of the total
sanctioned loan amount. Circular MSME 30/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 20% ; 50% B 25% ; 50% C 25% ; 75%
316. Repayment period under PNB SATKAR Scheme will be upto ______ years including moratorium
period of maximum upto ______ months. Circular MSME 30/2020 dated 27.03.2020
317. Advance under PNB SATKAR scheme must be covered by collaterals coverage of at least
______% of the exposure (FB+NFB). However, if the Primary Security is in the shape of Land &
Building Residual Value over and above ______% of the Term Loan outstanding shall be treated
as collateral security. Circular MSME 30/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 40% ; 135% B 50% ; 135% C 40% ; 125%
318. Maximum loan amount under PNB GURUKUL Scheme will be Rs. ______. Circular MSME 29/2020
dated 27.03.2020
D Rs. 100.00 Crore E None of the avove Answer: E
319. Margin for both Term Loan and Working capital under PNB GURUKUL Scheme will be ______%.
A NIL B 15% C 20%
320. Assessment of OD limit upto Rs.2.00 Crore under PNB GURUKUL Scheme will be on the basis of
______% of the Average Receipts of the Actual and Estimated Receipts of the institution. Circular
MSME 29/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 70% B 75% C 80%
321. Tenure of Term Loan under PNB GURUKUL Scheme will be ______ years including moratorium
232
period of maximum upto ______ months. Circular MSME 29/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A upto 5 years ; 12 B upto 10 years ; 24 C upto 15 years ; 12
Page
D upto 15 years ; 24 E None of the avove Answer: B

months
322. Under PNB GURUKUL Scheme, minimum ______% of the loan amount (Other than the land and
building of the educational institute) shall be obtained in the form of immovable property / liquid
security as Collateral Security. Circular MSME 29/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 50% B 60% C 80%
323. Institutions whose final approval is pending (After receipt of Letter of Intent from the concerned
authority like AICTE, UGC, MCI, DCI, CBSE, ICSE etc. as applicable at particular stage), collateral
security under PNB GURUKUL Scheme shall be ______% of the loan amount (Other than the
land and building of the educational institute) Circular MSME 29/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 50% B 60% C 80%
324. Max. loan Amount (Term Loan/Overdraft) under PNB MAHILA UDYAMI Scheme will be Rs.
______. Circular MSME 28/2020 dated 27.03.2020
325. Margin under PNB MAHILA UDYAMI Scheme for loan upto Rs. 2.00 Lakh will be ______%.
A NIL B 15% C 20%
326. Margin under PNB MAHILA UDYAMI Scheme for loan above Rs. 2.00 Lakh to Rs. 5.00 Lakh will
A NIL B 15% C 20%
327. Margin under PNB MAHILA UDYAMI Scheme for loan Above Rs. 5.00 Lakh to Rs. 10.00 Lakh will
A NIL B 15% C 20%
328. OD under PNB MAHILA UDYAMI Scheme shall be assessed based on ______% of realistic
projected annual turnover Circular MSME 28/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A NIL B 15% C 20%
329. Overdraft limit under PNB MAHILA UDYAMI Scheme shall be sanctioned for a period of ______
years. However, the account will be reviewed on yearly basis and be renewed on every three
years. Circular MSME 28/2020 dated 27.03.2020
330. Loan Amount (Only Overdraft) under PNB ARHATIA Scheme will be ______% of annual Sales/
Turnover (Estimated) or ______ times of the Commission earned (actual) whichever is applicable
within maximum limit of Rs.______. Circular MSME 27/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 20% ; 6 times ; Rs. B 20% ; 6 times ; Rs. C 20% ; 8 times ; Rs.
1.00 Crore 5.00 Crore 1.00 Crore
D 20% ; 8 times ; Rs. E None of the avove Answer: D
5.00 Crore
331. The facility under PNB ARHATIA Scheme shall be secured by way of mortgage of residential /
commercial property (Other than Agricultural Land) having realizable value worth at least
______% of advance sought belonging to either the applicant or the guarantor OR Pledge of
NSC/ KVP/ FDR (Accrued Value), LIP (S.V.) at least ______% of advance. Circular MSME 27/2020
dated 27.03.2020
A 100% ; 100% B 110% ; 100% C 125% ; 100%
233
332. Under PNB ARHATIA Scheme, In built Stand By Credit facility of ______% of the OD limit can be
sanctioned by the respective sanctioning authorities at the time of sanction/renewal of facility,
over and above the normal MPBF, provided that the collateral coverage does not go below 100%
Page
after considering Stand By Credit facility within maximum limit of Rs. 5.00 Crore Circular MSME

27/2020 dated 27.03.2020

A 10% B 15% C 20%
333. Availment of Stand By Credit facility under PNB ARHATIA Scheme can be permitted for a
maximum period of ______ days at a stretch and maximum ______ times in a year in a borrowal
account. Circular MSME 27/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 90 days ; 2 times B 90 days ; 3 times C 180 days ; 2 times
D 180 days ; 3 times E None of the avove Answer: B
334. Total duration of Stand By Credit limit availment under PNB ARHATIA Scheme shall not exceed
______ days in a financial year. Circular MSME 27/2020 dated 27.03.2020
335. Additional interest of ______% shall be charged on the portion of Stand By Credit limit during
the period of Stand By Credit facility is availed under PNB ARHATIA Scheme. Circular MSME
27/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 1.00% B 1.25% C 1.50%
D 2.00% E None of the avove Answer: A
336. In case of individuals under PNB SANJEEVANI Scheme, minimum experience required is ______
years and if experience is less than 2 years then maximum Overdraft limit upto Rs. ______ shall
only be sanctioned. Circular MSME 25/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 2 years ; Rs. 1.00 Crore B 3 years ; Rs. 1.00 Crore C 2 years ; Rs. 2.00
Crore
D 3 years ; Rs. 2.00 Crore E None of the avove Answer: B
337. In case of other than individuals under PNB SANJEEVANI Scheme, minimum stake of qualified
doctors should be ______% and in case of Trust it should be minimum of ______%. Further, next
sanctioning authority can relax this condition. Circular MSME 25/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 50% ; 50% B 75% ; 50% C 50% ; 75%
338. Maximum extent of loan under PNB SANJEEVANI Scheme for Term Loan and Non Fund Based
(LC/BG) will be Rs. ______. Circular MSME 25/2020 dated 27.03.2020
D Rs. 10.00 Crore E None of the avove Answer: E
339. Maximum extent of loan under PNB SANJEEVANI Scheme for Overdraft will be maximum upto
______% of annual receipts or Rs. ______ whichever is lower. Circular MSME 25/2020 dated
27.03.2020
D 10% ; Rs. 5.00 Crore E None of the avove Answer: B
340. Margin under PNB SANJEEVANI Scheme shall be ______% for acquisition of premises and/or
expansion/ renovation/ modernization of existing premises. Circular MSME 25/2020 dated
27.03.2020
A 10% B 15% C 25%
341. Margin under PNB SANJEEVANI Scheme shall be ______% for purchase of equipment/
machinery/ cost of on road vehicles/ for Ambulance/ Other Vehicle. Circular MSME 25/2020 dated
27.03.2020
A 10% B 15% C 25%
342. In case of purchase of land under PNB SANJEEVANI Scheme, margin should be minimum of
______% of the cost of land (including cost of registration). Circular MSME 25/2020 dated
27.03.2020
A 10% B 15% C 25%
234

343. Repayment period under PNB SANJEEVANI Scheme will be upto ______ years including
moratorium period of maximum up to ______. Circular MSME 25/2020 dated 27.03.2020
Page


344. For advances under PNB SANJEEVANI Scheme minimum ______% collateral security shall be
obtained in the form of immovable property / liquid security. No collateral is required if realizable
value of the primary security in the shape of Land & Building mortgaged is more than ______%
of the total exposure. Circular MSME 25/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 25% ; 110% B 50% ; 110% C 25% ; 150%
345. In case of financing purchase of old machinery/assets under PNB SANJEEVANI Scheme, its
residual life may be at least ______ years and repayment period is to be fixed within the residual
life. Circular MSME 25/2020 dated 27.03.2020
D 1 5 years E None of the avove Answer: A
346. Maximum loan limit under PNB VYAPAAR Scheme will be Rs. ______ . Loans above ticket size of
Rs.______ may be considered under this scheme. Circular MSME 24/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A Rs.100.00 lac ; B Rs.100.00 lac ; C Need Based ; Rs.10.00
Rs.10.00 lac Rs.10.00 lac lac
D Need Based ; Rs.5.00 E None of the avove Answer: C
lac
347. In case of acquiring premises under PNB VYAPAAR Scheme, margin shall be ______%. Circular
MSME 24/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 10% B 15% C 20%
348. In case of purchase of land under PNB VYAPAAR Scheme, margin shall be ______% of the cost
of land (including cost of registration). However, loan amount for the purchase of the land shall
not be more than ______% of the total term loan amount sanctioned. Circular MSME 24/2020
dated 27.03.2020
A 25% ; 50% B 25% ; 25% C 40% ; 50%
349. In case of Financing for conversion lease hold business premises to free hold, For repair/
renovation/ furnishing of existing business premises/ showroom, To purchase furniture &
fixtures for business premises and To purchase new equipments/ business tools etc. for
business under PNB VYAPAAR Scheme, margin shall be ______%. Circular MSME 24/2020 dated
27.03.2020
A 10% B 15% C 20%
350. Margin for Working Capital under PNB VYAPAAR Scheme will be ______% on stocks. Circular
MSME 24/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 10% B 15% C 20%
351. Margin for Working Capital under PNB VYAPAAR Scheme will be ______% on Book Debts not
older than 3 Months and ______% on Book Debts more than 3 months and maximum upto 6
months. Circular MSME 24/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 25% ; 30% B 25% ; 40% C 30% ; 40%
352. Tenure of Loan under PNB VYAPAAR Scheme will be upto ______ years inclusive of maximum
moratorium period of upto ______. Circular MSME 24/2020 dated 27.03.2020
353. Under PNB VYAPAAR Scheme, collateral security (under CGTMSE “Hybrid Security” product)
for a part of the credit facility can be obtained whereas the remaining part of the credit facility up
to a maximum of Rs. ______ can be covered under Credit Guarantee Scheme of CGTMSE.
235

Page
354. Under PNB VYAPAAR Scheme, requirement of collateral Security may be relaxed by maximum

upto ______% by next higher sanctioning authority. Circular MSME 24/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 10% B 15% C 20%
355. Under PNB VYAPAAR Scheme, periodicity of Stock Statement for loan amount above Rs 10.00
Lacs to Rs 50.00 Lacs will be ______. Circular MSME 24/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A Monthly B Quarterly C Half Yearly
D Yearly E None of the avove Answer: C
356. Under PNB VYAPAAR Scheme, periodicity of Stock Statement for loan amount above Rs. 50.00
Lacs to Rs.100.00 Lacs will be ______. Circular MSME 24/2020 dated 27.03.2020
D Yearly E None of the avove Answer: B
357. Under PNB VYAPAAR Scheme, periodicity of Stock Statement for loan amount above Rs.100.00
Lacs will be ______. Circular MSME 24/2020 dated 27.03.2020
D Yearly E None of the avove Answer: A
358. Margin for Deferred Payment Guarantee and finance against Bill for Collection under PNB SEVA
Scheme will be ______%. Circular MSME 23/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 10% B 15% C 20%
359. Repayment period and maximum moratorium period under PNB SEVA Scheme shall be
maximum ______ for Term Loan. However, extension of repayment may be allowed by next
higher authority on the merit of the proposal. Circular MSME 23/2020 dated 27.03.2020
360. Advance under PNB SEVA Scheme shall be covered by collaterals covering at least ______% of
the exposure (FB+NFB). Circular MSME 23/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 40% B 50% C 60%
361. If the Primary Security is in the shape of Land & Building, residual value over and above
______% of the Term Loan O/s shall be treated as collateral security under PNB SEVA Scheme.
A 100% B 125% C 135%
362. The extent of cash margin (In case of Non fund based limits) over and above ______% under
PNB SEVA Scheme, shall be considered for the computation of collateral coverage. Circular
MSME 23/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 10% B 15% C 20%
363. Margin against Book Debt under PNB UDYOG Scheme will be ______%. Circular MSME 22/2020
dated 27.03.2020
A 10% B 15% C 20%
364. Margin for new vehicle for business use under PNB UDYOG Scheme will be ______%. Circular
MSME 22/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 10% B 15% C 20%
365. Repayment period under PNB UDYOG Scheme shall be maximum of ______ years for Term
Loan (including moratorium period) Circular MSME 22/2020 dated 27.03.2020
366. Maximum moratorium period under PNB UDYOG Scheme shall be ______. Circular MSME 22/2020
236
dated 27.03.2020
Page

367. Advance under PNB UDYOG Scheme shall be covered by collaterals covering at least ______%

of the exposure (FB+NFB). Circular MSME 22/2020 dated 27.03.2020

A 10% B 15% C 20%
368. If the Primary Security is in the shape of Land & Building, residual value over and above
______% of the Term Loan O/s shall be treated as collateral security under PNB UDYOG Scheme.
A 100% B 125% C 135%
369. CGTMSE decided to remove the tenure cap of ______ years for coverage of working capital
facilities under Credit Guarantee Scheme Circular MSME 21/2020 dated 27.03.2020
370. For coverage of working capital facilities under Credit Guarantee Scheme a review would be
undertaken after each block of ______ years by CGTMSE before renewal of the guarantee
coverage for next ______. Circular MSME 21/2020 dated 27.03.2020
371. In terms of revised guidelines issued by Department of Financial Services, Ministry of Finance,
Overdraft limit to Pradhan Mantri Jan DhanYojana (PMJDY) loan amount has been raised to
Rs.______ and age limit of 18-60 years has also been revised to ______ years. Circular MSME
20/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A Rs.5,000/- ; 18-60 years B Rs.5,000/- ; 18-65 years C Rs.10,000/- ; 18-60
years
D Rs.10,000/- ; 18-65 E None of the avove Answer: D
years
372. The MSME units will continue to enjoy the priority sector lending status up to ______ years after
they grow out of the MSME category concerned. Circular MSME 20/2020 dated 27.03.2020
373. In terms of the recommendations of the Prime Minister‟s Task Force on MSMEs, banks are
advised to achieve:
(i) ______ per cent year-on-year growth in credit to micro and small enterprises.
(ii) ______ per cent annual growth in the number of micro enterprise accounts and
(iii) ______% of total lending to MSE sector as on preceding March 31st to Micro enterprises.
A 10 ; 10 ; 50% B 20 ; 10 ; 50% C 20 ; 10 ; 60%
D 20 ; 20 ; 60% E None of the avove Answer: C
374. The time frame for disposal of loan applications of MSE borrowers in line with BCSBI-Code of
Bank's Commitment to Micro and Small Enterprises (MSE) for loan amount up to 5 lakh is
A 2 Weeks B 3 Weeks C 6 Weeks
D 8 Weeks E None of the avove Answer: A
Bank's Commitment to Micro and Small Enterprises (MSE) for loan amount over Rs. 5 lakh and
up to Rs. 25 lakh is ______. Circular MSME 20/2020 dated 27.03.2020
D 8 Weeks E None of the avove Answer: B
Bank's Commitment to Micro and Small Enterprises (MSE) for loan amount Above Rs. 25 lakh is
237
D 8 Weeks E None of the avove Answer: C

377. A composite loan with maximum limit up to Rs.______ should be considered by bank to enable
the Micro and Small Enterprises {both for manufacturing and service sector} to avail of their
Page
working capital and Term loan requirement through Single Window. Circular MSME 20/2020 dated

27.03.2020
A Rs.1.00 Crore. B Rs.2.00 Crore. C Rs.5.00 Crore.
D Rs.10.00 Crore. E None of the avove Answer: A
378. In the Hybrid Security model, the Bank is allowed to obtain collateral security for a part of the
credit facility, whereas the remaining part of the credit facility, up to a maximum of Rs. ______,
can be covered under Credit Guarantee Scheme of CGTMSE. Circular MSME 20/2020 dated
27.03.2020
379. For loan upto Rs.5.00 Crore under MSME, where the borrower that made more than or equal to
75% transactions Digitally such as cheques, DD, Pos, the Working Capital requirement shall be
assessed based on ______% of annual turnover based upon realistic projection. Bank shall fix
the limit to the extent of ______%, keeping the prescribed margin of ______%. Circular MSME
20/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 31.50% ; 25% ; B 37.5% ; 25% ; 7.50% C 31.50% ; 30% ;
6.25% 6.25%
D 37.5% ; 30% ; 7.50% E None of the avove Answer: D
380. For loan upto Rs.5.00 Crore under MSME, where the borrower that made transactions non digital
i.e. less than 75% transactions through digital mode, the Working Capital requirement shall be
assessed based on ______% of annual turnover based upon realistic projection. Bank shall fix
the limit to the extent of ______%, keeping the prescribed margin of ______%. Circular MSME
20/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 31.50% ; 25% ; B 37.5% ; 25% ; 7.50% C 31.50% ; 30% ;
6.25% 6.25%
D 37.5% ; 30% ; 7.50% E None of the avove Answer: A
381. In case, the actual digital transaction is below ______% of the accepted digital sales then credit
limit assessed at 30% should be restored to 25%. Circular MSME 20/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 70.00% B 75.00% C 80.00%
382. Subsidy under Credit Linked Capital Subsidy Scheme (CLCSS) for Technology Upgradation of
Micro and Small Enterprises would be ______% of the term loan/ credit amount or cost of P&M
whichever lower maximum up to Rs.______. The ceiling limit of loan to be considered for
granting the subsidy under the Credit Linked Capital Subsidy (CLCS) is Rs.______. Circular
MSME 20/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 15% ; Rs.15.00 lac ; B 20% ; Rs.15.00 lac ; C 20% ; Rs.20.00 lac ;
D 15% ; Rs.20.00 lac ; E None of the avove Answer: A
Rs.100.00 lakh
383. All eligible loan to MSE unit including Government sponsored scheme up to Rs.______
sanctioned without collateral security and /or Third party Guarantee must be mandatorily
covered under credit Guarantee Coverage of CGTMSE. Circular MSME 20/2020 dated 27.03.2020
D Rs.5.00 crore E None of the avove Answer: C
384. Credit Facilities extended to all new and existing MSE units up to Rs. ______ and Retail units up
to Rs.______ are covered under CGTMSE Scheme. Circular MSME 20/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A Rs. 100 Lakh ; Rs.100 B Rs. 200 Lakh ; Rs.100 C Rs. 200 Lakh ; Rs.200
lakh lakh lakh
D Rs. 100 Lakh ; Rs.200 E None of the avove Answer: B
lakh
385. Claims under CGTMSE can be lodged after a look in period of ______months from the date of
last disbursement or date of payment of Guarantee Fee, whichever is later. Maximum period of
238
lodging claim is ______ years from the date of NPA, if the account turns NPA after lock-in period
or within 3 years after expiry of lock-in period. Circular MSME 20/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 12 months ; 2 years B 18 months ; 2 years C 12 months ; 3 years
Page
D 18 months ; 3 years E None of the avove Answer: D

386. CGTMSE shall pay ______% of Guaranteed amount on eligible claims and remaining ______%
amount shall be paid on conclusion of recovery proceedings. Circular MSME 20/2020 dated
27.03.2020
A 65% ; 35% B 70% ; 30% C 75% ; 25%
387. CGTMSE shall pay 75 per cent of the guaranteed amount on preferring of eligible claim by the
lending institution, within ______ days, subject to the claim being otherwise found in order and
complete in all respects. Circular MSME 20/2020 dated 27.03.2020
388. Annual Guarantee fee (first time fee) shall be paid to the Trust by the institution availing of the
guarantee within ______ days from the date of first disbursement of credit facility (not applicable
for Working capital) or ______ days from the date of Demand Advice (CGDAN) of guarantee fee
whichever is lateror such date as specified by the Trust. Circular MSME 20/2020 dated 27.03.2020
389. If the guaranteed account gets closed due to non-payment of AGF, the guarantee under the
scheme shall not be available and request for revival of accounts/ delayed payment will be
considered where account should be standard and regular as on date of submission of request
for revival and the Trust reserves the right to reject the claim if the account turns NPA within
______ days from the date of revival of account. Circular MSME 20/2020 dated 27.03.2020
390. The lending institution may invoke the guarantee under Credit Guarantee Fund Scheme in
respect of credit facility within a maximum period of ______ years from the NPA date or lock-in
period whichever is later, if the NPA date is on or after 15/03/2018. Circular MSME 20/2020 dated
27.03.2020
391. The lending institution shall be liable to refund the claim released by the Trust together with
penal interest at the rate of ______% above the prevailing Bank Rate, if such a recall is made by
the Trust in the event of serious deficiencies having existed in the matter of appraisal / renewal /
follow-up / conduct of the credit facility or where lodgement of the claim was more than once or
where there existed suppression of any material information on part of the lending institutions
for the settlement of claims. Circular MSME 20/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 2% B 3% C 4%
392. Every amount recovered and due to be paid to the CGTMSE shall be paid without delay, and if
any amount due to the Trust remains unpaid beyond a period of ______ days from the date on
which it was first recovered, Circular MSME 20/2020 dated 27.03.2020
393. Iinterest shall be payable to the CGTMSE by the lending institution at the rate which is ______%
above Bank Rate for the period for which payment remains outstanding after the expiry of the
said period of 30 days. Circular MSME 20/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 2% B 3% C 4%
394. Under Credit Guarantee Scheme for Stand Up India (CGSSI- Stand Up India) for Credit Facility
above Rs. 10 lac up to Rs 50 lac, NCGTC shall provide guarantee cover to the extent of ______%
of the amount in default, subject to a maximum of Rs. ______. Circular MSME 20/2020 dated
27.03.2020
239
A 80% ; Rs. 40 Lac B 85% ; Rs. 40 Lac C 50% ; Rs.65 lac

D 60% ; Rs.65 lac E None of the avove Answer: A
395. Under Credit Guarantee Scheme for Stand Up India (CGSSI- Stand Up India for credit facility
Page
above Rs. 50 lac and up to Rs. 100 lac NCGTC shall provide guarantee cover to the extent of Rs.

40.00 Lac + _____% of amount in default above Rs. 50 lac subject to overall ceiling of Rs.65 lac
of the amount in default. Circular MSME 20/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 80% ; Rs. 40 Lac B 85% ; Rs. 40 Lac C 50% ; Rs.65 lac
D 60% ; Rs.65 lac E None of the avove Answer: C
396. All fresh / enhancement / renewable Mudra applications from Rs. ______ to Rs. 10 lac under
MUDRA LOANS and all other MSME fresh / enhancement / renewable applications up to Rs.
______ under BUSINESS LOANS will be routed through www.psbloansin59minutes.com portal.
A Rs. 10,000 ; Rs. 1 crore B Rs. 10,000 ; Rs. 5 crore C Rs. 50,000 ; Rs. 1 crore
D Rs. 50,000 ; Rs. 5 crore E None of the avove Answer: B
397. Department of Economic Affairs, Affordable Housing” is defined as a housing project using at
least ______% of the Floor Area Ratio (FAR)/Floor Space Index (FSI) for dwelling units with
carpet area of not more than ______. Circular L&A 199/2020 dated 22.10.2020
A 40% ; 60 square meters B 50% ; 70 square meters C 50% ; 60 square
meters
D 50% ; 70 square meters E None of the avove Answer: C
398. Affordable Rental Housing Complex” means a project to be used for rental purpose only for
urban migrant/poor (EWS/LIG categories) for a minimum period of ______ years with basic civic
infrastructure facilities and the initial rent fixed by Local Authority/ Entities based on local
survey of surrounding area wherein the project is situated. Circular L&A 199/2020 dated
22.10.2020
399. RBI has setup a Central Repository of Information on Large Credits (CRILC) to collect, store and
disseminate credit data of borrowers having Aggregate Exposure (AE) of Rs. ______ and above
and the Banks are to report classification of such borrowers to CRILC Circular L&A 197/2020
dated 16.10.2020
A Rs. 1.00 crore B Rs. 5.00 crore C Rs. 10.00 crore
D Rs. 25.00 crore E None of the avove Answer: B
400. The cut off limit for classifying borrowers as non-cooperative shall be those borrowers having
aggregate fund-based and non-fund based facilities of Rs. ______ and above from our bank.
A Rs. 1.00 crore B Rs. 5.00 crore C Rs. 10.00 crore
D Rs. 25.00 crore E None of the avove Answer: B
401. The quarterly CRILC Main report is required to be submitted within ______ from the close of the
relevant quarter. Circular L&A 197/2020 dated 16.10.2020
402. The line of credit facility may be considered for PSUs irrespective of the rating and all
existing/fresh borrowers with External Risk Rating BBB & above where the bank’s exposure by
way of working capital finance (funded and non funded) is above ₹______. Circular L&A 194/2020
dated 14.10.2020
403. For availing the line of credit, the borrower has to give notice of minimum ______ hours clearly
specifying the period for which the availment shall be made. Circular L&A 194/2020 dated
14.10.2020
A 24 hours B 48 hours C 72 hours
D No such criteria E None of the avove Answer: B
404. Additional ROI of ______% shall be charged over existing pricing for additional finance or
FITL/WCTL sanctioned under the Framework under the Resolution Framework for COVID-19-
240
related Stress. Circular L&A 180/2020 dated 03.10.2020

A 0.25% B 0.50% C 1.00%
Page
405. Existing borrowers enjoying fund based credit facility and the account has not slipped to

category SMA-2 and below in previous ______ months are eligible under the scheme for Open
Term Loan. Circular L&A 170/2020 dated 05.09.2020
406. The facility of Open Term Loan is a pre-approved term loan facility with an option of multiple
disbursements for multiple purposes which can be disbursed over a period of ______ months
depending upon requirement of the borrower. Circular L&A 170/2020 dated 05.09.2020
407. Limit under the scheme for Open Term Loan will be assessed upto ______% of the total limit
sanctioned, with minimum above ₹______ and maximum upto ₹______. Circular L&A 170/2020
dated 05.09.2020
A 15% ; ₹10 lakh ; ₹10 B 20% ; ₹10 lakh ; ₹10 C 20% ; ₹20 lakh ; ₹10
Crore Crore Crore
D 20% ; ₹10 lakh ; ₹100 E None of the avove Answer: B
Crore
408. Minimum margin under the scheme for Open Term Loan will be ______%. Circular L&A 170/2020
dated 05.09.2020
A 15% B 20% C 25%
409. Maximum Repayment Period under the scheme for Open Term Loan will be ______ years in
monthly / quarterly installments. HOCAC-II and above may consider repayment period upto
______ wherever necessary on case to case basis. Circular L&A 170/2020 dated 05.09.2020
A 3-5 years ; 7 years B 5-7 years ; 7 years C 3-5 years ; 10 years
D 5-7 years ; 10 years E None of the avove Answer: A
410. Validity of Sanction under the scheme for Open Term Loan will be ______ from date of sanction
411. For purchase of Bonds/CPs at the portfolio level, AA and AA- investment sub-portfolio under the
Partial Credit Guarantee Scheme should not exceed ______% of the total portfolio of Bonds/ CPs
purchased by PSBs. Circular L&A 164/2020 dated 29.08.2020
D 85 per cent E None of the avove Answer: A
412. Portfolio to be eligible under the Partial Credit Guarantee scheme should be built up within
______ months of announcement of the scheme. Circular L&A 164/2020 dated 29.08.2020
413. As per RBI No bank shall open current accounts for customers who have availed credit facilities
in the form of cash credit (CC)/ overdraft (OD) from the banking system and all transactions shall
be routed through the CC/OD account. However, In case of borrowers where exposure (other
than CC/OD) of the banking system is ______, banks shall be required to put in place an escrow
mechanism. Accordingly, current accounts of such borrowers can only be opened/maintained by
the escrow managing bank. Circular L&A 162/2020 dated 28.08.2020
D ₹100 crore or more E None of the avove Answer: C
414. In case of borrowers where exposure of the banking system is ₹______ but less than ₹50 crore,
there is no restriction on opening of current accounts by the lending banks. However, non-
lending banks may open only collection accounts. Circular L&A 162/2020 dated 28.08.2020
D ₹50 crore or more E None of the avove Answer: A
241
415. Large Borrowal Accounts (availing limits above ₹5.00 crore) will be dealt with by a branch office
of the bank functioning at the place where the ______ of the borrowing company/firm is located
or at the place where ______ of the borrowing company/firm/project site office (for infrastructure
Page
advances) is located. Circular L&A 157/2020 dated 17.08.2020

A registered office ; B head office ; factory C administrative office ;

manufacturing unit manufacturing unit
D registered/head/administra E None of the avove Answer: D
tive office ; factory/
manufacturing unit
416. In case the borrowing company/firm have more than one factory/manufacturing unit, the
responsibility to collect the necessary financial data/other relevant information for compiling the
loan proposal shall rest with the branch where ______. Circular L&A 157/2020 dated 17.08.2020
A registered Office is located B Head Office is located C Administrative office is
located
D the company/firm desires E None of the avove Answer: D
to avail the facilities
417. In case of Small & Medium Accounts (availing limits upto ₹5.00 crore), Loan proposal may be
dealt by that branch office of the bank, which is near to the ______. Circular L&A 157/2020 dated
17.08.2020
A Registered Office of the B Head Office of the C Administrative office of
borrowing company/firm borrowing company/firm the borrowing
company/firm
D the factory/commercial E None of the avove Answer: D
establishment (e.g. office/
shop in case of trading
accounts).
418. Time schedule prescribed by RBI for proposals for sanction of Fresh/enhanced credit limits
(other than Export Proposals) under Consortium arrangement is ______days. Circular L&A
157/2020 dated 17.08.2020
A 60 Days B 45 Days C 30 Days
D 15 Days E None of the avove Answer: A
419. Time schedule prescribed by RBI for proposals for renewal of existing credit limits (other than
Export Proposals) under Consortium arrangement is ______days. Circular L&A 157/2020 dated
17.08.2020
D 15 Days E None of the avove Answer: B
420. Time schedule prescribed by RBI for proposals for for sanction of Adhoc facilities (other than
Export Proposals) under Consortium arrangement is ______ days. Circular L&A 157/2020 dated
17.08.2020
D 15 Days E None of the avove Answer: C
421. Time schedule prescribed by RBI for export proposals for sanction of Fresh/enhanced credit
limits under Consortium arrangement as well as sole banking arrangement is ______ days for
Gold Card Holders and ______ days for other exporters. Circular L&A 157/2020 dated 17.08.2020
A 25 Days ; 30 Days B 30 Days ; 45 Days C 25 Days ; 45 Days
D 15 Days ; 30 Days E None of the avove Answer: C
422. Time schedule prescribed by RBI for export proposals for renewal of existing credit limits under
Consortium arrangement as well as sole banking arrangement is ______days for Gold Card
Holders and ______days for 0ther exporters. Circular L&A 157/2020 dated 17.08.2020
D 45 Days ; 45 Days E None of the avove Answer: C
423. Time schedule prescribed by RBI for export proposals for sanction of Adhoc facilities under
Consortium arrangement as well as sole banking arrangement is ______ days for Gold Card
Holders and ______ days for other exporters. Circular L&A 157/2020 dated 17.08.2020
D 30 Days ; 45 Days E None of the avove Answer: A
242
424. Maximum time schedule for disposal of loan applications/credit proposals for other than
Consortium Arrangement under priority/non priority sector advances, MSME etc. (other than
proposals falling under retail lending schemes) for amount upto ₹ 2 lakhs is _______ and for
Page
amount above ₹ 2 lakhs & Upto ₹ 50 lakhs is ______. Circular L&A 157/2020 dated 17.08.2020

A 2 Weeks ; 4 weeks B 2 Weeks ; 6 weeks C 4 Weeks ; 6 weeks

D 4 Weeks ; 4 weeks E None of the avove Answer: A
425. Maximum time schedule for disposal of loan applications/credit proposals ( other than
Consortium Arrangement and other than proposals falling under retail lending schemes) under
priority/non priority sector advances, MSME etc. for amount above ₹50 lac & upto ₹100 lac is
_______ , for amount above ₹100 lac & upto ₹100 crore is ______ and for amount above ₹100
crore is ______. Circular L&A 157/2020 dated 17.08.2020
A 2-4 weeks ; 6-7 weeks B 2-4 weeks ; 4-5 weeks C 2-4 weeks ; 4-5 weeks
; 8-9 weeks ; 8-9 weeks ; 5-6 weeks
D 5-6 weeks ; 6-7 weeks E None of the avove Answer: D
; 8-9 weeks
426. Certified copy of passport (a declaration in cases where the concerned person does not have
passport) should be obtained in all existing borrowal accounts as well as from prospective
borrowers irrespective of the loan amount. However, in small accounts, say upto ₹ ______ the
capturing of passport details may not be insisted upon in routine manner. Circular L&A 157/2020
dated 17.08.2020
A ₹ 10 lac B ₹ 20 lac C ₹ 25 lac
D ₹ 50 lac E None of the avove Answer: D
427. It has been made mandatory by RBI for corporate borrowers having aggregate fund-based and
non-fund based exposure of ₹ ______and above (introduced in a phased manner) from any bank
to obtain Legal Entity Identifier (LEI) registration and capture the same in theCentral Repository
of Information on Large Credits (CRILC). Circular L&A 157/2020 dated 17.08.2020
428. Credit Information Report should not be older than ______ at the time of Fresh Sanction/
Enhancement/ Renewal/ Review/ Adhoc/Additional credit facility. Circular L&A 157/2020 dated
17.08.2020
429. Where the value of immovable property to be mortgaged/ charged is Rs. ______ & above, NEC
from 2 different advocates on panel will be taken, one before sanction and the 2nd after
sanction, but before disbursement to safeguard the interest of the bank. Circular L&A 157/2020
dated 17.08.2020
D Rs. 10 crore E None of the avove Answer: A
430. Where the value of immovable property to be mortgaged/ charged is above ₹ ______, branches
shall get valuation of such IPs done from minimum two valuers of category A or B as per
prescribed format on the Bank’s approved panel. In case the difference in valuation is less than
15%, the average value may be taken. Circular L&A 157/2020 dated 17.08.2020
A ₹ 5 crore ; 10% B ₹ 5 crore ; 15% C ₹ 10 crore ; 10%
D ₹ 10 crore ; 15% E None of the avove Answer: B
431. In case the difference in two valuations is more than ______%, 3rd valuation may be got done
from a senior valuer in category A and the average of the two valuation reports having difference
of not more than ______% will be taken. Circular L&A 157/2020 dated 17.08.2020
A 15% ; 15% B 15% ; 20% C 20% ; 20%
432. Borrowal accounts having aggregate limit of ₹ ______ & above, valuation of immovable
properties charged/mortgaged to the Bank be got done from approved valuer once in three
years. Circular L&A 157/2020 dated 17.08.2020
A 50 lac & above B 1 crore & above C 2 crore & above
D 5 crore & above E None of the avove Answer: B
243
433. In case the IPs are recently purchased then the purchase price as per sale deed and not the
market value shall be reckoned as value of the property. The period for recent purchase be taken
as ______ from the date of sale deed. Circular L&A 157/2020 dated 17.08.2020
Page


434. Where the value of Plant & Machinery to be charged is ₹ ______ & above, branches shall get
valuation of such P&M done from minimum two valuers on the Bank’s approved panel. Circular
L&A 157/2020 dated 17.08.2020
D ₹ 50 crore E None of the avove Answer: D
435. Annual accounts of all borrowers enjoying aggregate credit limits of ₹ ______ & above (both
fund based & non-fund based) from the banking system should be submitted to the Bank duly
audited by Chartered Accountants. Circular L&A 157/2020 dated 17.08.2020
A ₹ 10 lac B ₹ 20 lac C ₹ 25 lac
D ₹ 50 lac E None of the avove Answer: B
436. RBI has set up a Central Repository of Information on Large Credits (CRILC) to collect, store and
disseminate credit data of borrowers having Aggregate Exposure of ₹ ______ and above with the
SMA status of the accounts and/or parties having current account balance (debit/credit) of ₹
______ and above to enable banks to access such information for initiating Corrective Action
Plan (CAP). Circular L&A 157/2020 dated 17.08.2020
A ₹ 2 crore ; ₹ 1 crore B ₹ 5 crore ; ₹ 2 crore C ₹ 5 crore ; ₹ 1 crore
D ₹ 10 crore ; ₹ 5 crore E None of the avove Answer: C
437. RBI has operationalized the Central Fraud Registry (CFR). It is a centralized searchable registry,
containing information pertaining to frauds involving an amount of ₹ ______ & above reported by
commercial banks (Public Sector banks, private banks, foreign banks and local area banks) and
selected financial institutions, which can be viewed by banks/FIs through login on the CFR
portal of RBI. Circular L&A 157/2020 dated 17.08.2020
A ₹ 1.00 lac B ₹ 2 lac C ₹ 5 lac
D ₹ 10 lac E None of the avove Answer: A
438. For loan proposals coming under the power of ______, the report sought from Central Economic
Intelligence Bureau (CEIB) on the prospective borrower be properly analyzed and if any
adverse/significant feature in the report is noted with regard to the prospective borrower/entity
etc., the same be taken cognizance of and be mentioned in the proposal. Circular L&A 157/2020
dated 17.08.2020
A Circle Head & above B ZOCAC-I & above C Zonal Manager & above
D HOCAC-I & above E None of the avove Answer: D
439. Bank credit for working capital purposes for borrowers requiring fund based limits up to a
specified extent (presently ₹ 5 crore in case of MSME borrowers and ₹ 2 crore in case of other
borrowers from the banking system) is required to be assessed at ______% of the projected
annual turnover of which at least ______% should be provided by the Bank and the balance
______% should be contributed by the promoters. Circular L&A 157/2020 dated 17.08.2020
A 25% ; 20% ; 5% B 25% ; 25% ; 5% C 25% ; 20% ; 10%
440. Assessment of working capital limits in respect of borrowers not eligible to be provided fund-
based working capital limits under “Simplified Turnover Method”, is to be done as per ______.
A Simplified Turnover B MPBF system (Second C Cash Budget System
Method except in case of Method of Lending) except
Tea & Sugar industries in case of Tea & Sugar
etc. industries etc.
441. In case of Tea & Sugar industries etc., credit requirement is assessed as per ______. Circular L&A
157/2020 dated 17.08.2020
A Simplified Turnover B MPBF system (Second C Cash Budget System
Method Method of Lending)
244

442. The validity period of the rating is ______months from the month of confirmation of rating or
______ months from the date of Balance Sheet, on the basis of which credit risk rating was
Page
assigned, whichever is earlier. Circular L&A 157/2020 dated 17.08.2020



443. Dynamic review of credit risk rating, Borrowers having exposure more than Rs ______ and all
listed borrowers, irrespective of limits, rating shall mandatorily be reviewed on expiry of ______
months from date of last rating except : - Borrower already rated as PNB-C1/C2/C3. Circular L&A
157/2020 dated 17.08.2020
A Rs 10.00 crores ; 4 B Rs 20.00 crores ; 5 C Rs 25.00 crores ; 4
D Rs 50.00 crores ; 5 E None of the avove Answer: D
months
444. Review of rating in dynamic review rating model to be completed before expiry of ______months
from the month of confirmation of rating or ______ months from date of balance sheet,
whichever is earlier. Circular L&A 157/2020 dated 17.08.2020
445. Risk Adjusted Return on Capital (RAROC) framework was developed for corporate borrowers
having/ proposing aggregate exposure above ₹ ______, for analyzing risk-adjusted return and
providing a consistent view of profitability across loans. Circular L&A 157/2020 dated 17.08.2020
D ₹ 10 crore E None of the avove Answer: C
446. All the loan documents in respect of sanctioned limits of ₹______ (both FB and NFB) will ve
vetted from the local approved advocate/solicitor, first before their execution and again after
execution but before disbursement of the loans. Circular L&A 157/2020 dated 17.08.2020
447. In case of all borrowers enjoying aggregate fund based working capital limits of Rs.1 crore &
above from the entire banking system (except sugar units), borrowers to submit QMS form I as
per prescribed proforma within ______from the close of every quarter and QMS Form II
within______ from the close of half year. Circular L&A 157/2020 dated 17.08.2020
A Four weeks ; 2 months B Six weeks ; 3 months C Four weeks ; 3
months
D Six weeks ; 2 months E None of the avove Answer: D
448. Where Value of property mortgaged/charged is upto Rs.______ or credit facilities are upto
Rs.______, periodic visit to the mortgaged (IP) accepted as primary security should be at least
on yearly basis or as per terms of sanction, whichever is earlier. Circular L&A 157/2020 dated
17.08.2020
A Rs.20 lac ; Rs.1 crore B Rs.50 lac ; Rs.2 crore C Rs.25 lac ; Rs.1 crore
D Rs.1 crore ; Rs.5 crore E None of the avove Answer: A
449. Where Value of property mortgaged/charged is upto Rs.20 lac or credit facilities are upto Rs.1
crore, periodic visit to the mortgaged (IP) accepted as collateral security should be at least once
in ______ years or as per terms of sanction, whichever is earlier. Circular L&A 157/2020 dated
17.08.2020
A one years B two years C three years
450. Where Value of property mortgaged/charged as is above Rs.20 lac or credit facilities are above
Rs.1 crore, periodic visit to the mortgaged (IP) accepted as primary security should be at least
on ______ basis or as per terms of sanction, whichever is earlier. Circular L&A 157/2020 dated
17.08.2020
A quarterly B half yearly C yearly
D No need to visit E None of the avove Answer: B
451. Where Value of property mortgaged/charged as is above Rs.20 lac or credit facilities are above
Rs.1 crore, periodic visit to the mortgaged (IP) accepted as collateral security should be at least
245
on ______ basis or as per terms of sanction, whichever is earlier. Circular L&A 157/2020 dated
17.08.2020
A quarterly B half yearly C yearly
Page
D No need to visit E None of the avove Answer: C

452. System of E-way bill (a system for tracking movement of goods under the Goods and Services
Tax (GST)) has been made mandatory for inter-state movement of goods of more than ₹ ______
in value throughout India Circular L&A 157/2020 dated 17.08.2020
A ₹ 50,000 B ₹ 100,000 C ₹ 150,000
D ₹ 500,000 E None of the avove Answer: A
453. PNB-SAJAG (EWS+PMS) shall be applicable to all corporate borrowers having sanctioned limits
(FB plus NFB) above ₹ ______ and OD against IPs except for certain exemtions. Circular L&A
157/2020 dated 17.08.2020
D ₹ 10 crore E None of the avove Answer: A
454. For all borrowal accounts availing fund based working capital credit limits of ______ & above
from our bank, Quarterly Information System (QIS) Form-I may be obtained for fixing up of
quarterly operative limits in addition to the QMS Forms. Circular L&A 157/2020 dated 17.08.2020
455. Balance Confirmation (BC) Letters confirming balances be obtained once in ______ in all
Standard/Regular loan accounts from the borrowers and guarantors and on ______ basis in
accounts other than standard/regular from the borrowers and guarantors. Circular L&A 157/2020
dated 17.08.2020
A a year ; half yearly B two year ; half yearly C three year ; half yearly
D three year ; yearly E None of the avove Answer: A
456. Cash payment not exceeding ₹ ______ by non base branch may be allowed to the drawer for self
drawn cheques of Cash Credit account. Circle Heads may permit cash withdrawal in CC account
at a non base branch to the extent of ₹ ______ to facilitate operational convenience on merits
A ₹ 1 lac ; ₹ 2 Lacs B ₹ 2 lac ; ₹ 5 Lacs C ₹ 1 lac ; ₹ 5 Lacs
D ₹ 5 lac ; ₹ 10 Lacs E None of the avove Answer: C
457. RBI vide notification no. DBR.No.BP.BC.20/08.12.014/2019-20 dated October 14, 2019 has
decided to permit banks to lend to Infrastructure Investment Trust (InvITs). Maximum tenor will
be upto ______ Years for financing to InvITs. Circular L&A 155/2020 dated 13.08.2020
D 20 Years E None of the avove Answer: C
458. A margin of minimum ______% should be maintained on the NAV of the InvIT assets on an
ongoing basis based on the valuation done by the valuer Circular L&A 155/2020 dated 13.08.2020
A 5% B 10% C 25%
459. Annual Stock Audit should be got compulsorily done in respect of all borrowal accounts
enjoying Fund Based & Non Fund Based (NFB) working capital limits of Rs. ______ and above
from our Bank. Circular L&A 148/2020 dated 11.08.2020
460. All NFB limits, which are being used for Working Capital Funding like LC, SBLC, BG for
purchase of goods for sale and BGs for mobilization Advances are to be included within
threshold limit of Rs.5 crore for stock audit, but ______ need not be included in NFB limits for
the purpose of conducting stock audit. Circular L&A 148/2020 dated 11.08.2020
A Capex LCs B Bid Bond Guarantees C Both A and B
D None of the avove E Answer: C
461. Annual Stock Audit should be compulsorily conducted in all ______ rated accounts and NPA
accounts enjoying fund based and non-fund based working capital limits of Rs. ______ and
above. Circular L&A 148/2020 dated 11.08.2020
A A2’ to ‘A3 ; Rs. 3 crore B B2’ to ‘B3 ; Rs. 3 crore C B2’ to ‘C3 ; Rs. 3 crore
246
D B2’ to ‘C3 ; Rs. 5 crore E None of the avove Answer: C

462. In case of Consortium/Multiple Financing, where the borrower is enjoying working capital limits
(fund based) of less than Rs.5 crore from our Bank and Rs.______ and above in aggregate from
Page
the banking system, branches should take up with lead bank/major share-holder banks in

multiple banking arrangement for getting the stock audit conducted. Circular L&A 148/2020 dated
11.08.2020
D Rs.50 crore E None of the avove Answer: B
463. In certain prestigious accounts falling under the category ______ under the risk rating module
signifying lower risk and where conducting stock audit by an outside agency may hurt the
sentiments of borrowes may be exemption from Annual Stock Audit. Circular L&A 148/2020 dated
11.08.2020
A A1 to A2 B A1 to A3 C A1 to A4
D B1 to B2 E None of the avove Answer: C
464. Frequency of conducting Stock Audit in NPA Accounts will be immediately after an account gets
classified as NPA and normal cooling period of ______ months for up-gradation/rectification of
default is over, Stock Audit be made mandatory within next ______ months. Circular L&A
148/2020 dated 11.08.2020
465. The observations/deficiencies pointed out by the Stock Auditors should be removed/rectified
maximum within ______. Circular L&A 148/2020 dated 11.08.2020
466. The overall time limit for closure of stock audit shall be 3 months. However, in cases where
stock/receivables audit is conducted more than one time in a year, the time limit for closure of
stock audit shall be ______. Circular L&A 148/2020 dated 11.08.2020
A 15 days B 1 month C 45 days
467. Panel of Stock auditors shall consist of reputed firms of Chartered Accountants/ Individual
CAs/Cost Accountants/firm of Cost Accountants who have at least ______ years’ standing and
at least one of the partners should be a fellow of the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India
(FCA). Circular L&A 148/2020 dated 11.08.2020
468. The duration of empanelment of stock auditors shall be for a period of ______ years. Circular L&A
148/2020 dated 11.08.2020
469. Chartered accountant firm once removed from the panel could be reempanelled again after a
period of ______ years from the date of depanel after giving proper justification and completing
process for empanelment for Stock/ Receivables verification. Circular L&A 148/2020 dated
11.08.2020
470. The fee for Stock/ Receivables verification by independent Chartered Accountant will be Rs.
______ for WC limit (FB+NFB) up to Rs 10 Cr and Rs. ______for WC limit (FB+NFB) above Rs 10
Cr upto Rs 25 Cr. Circular L&A 148/2020 dated 11.08.2020
A Rs 10,000/- ; Rs B Rs 15,000/- ; Rs C Rs 20,000/- ; Rs
20,000/- 20,000/- 25,000/-
D Rs 15,000/- ; Rs E None of the avove Answer: B
25,000/-
471. The entire fee inclusive of all expenses to be incurred for stock audit of one borrower including
travelling, boarding, lodging etc. will not exceed Rs.______. Circular L&A 148/2020 dated
11.08.2020
247
A Rs. 0.50 lacs B Rs. 1 lac C Rs. 2 lacs

D Rs. 3 lacs E None of the avove Answer: C
472. The Statement of Limits Sanctioned (LSS) is to be submitted by the sanctioning authority to the
Page
next higher authority, properly filled up in all respects, within______ days of the close of the

month to which it relates. Circular L&A 135/2020 dated 27.07.2020

473. In case where the monthly Statement of Limits Sanctioned (LSS) is not received within ______
days of the close of the month to which it relates, the Controlling Offices to generate the LSS
report from the EDW Server for overview and thorough scrutiny. Circular L&A 135/2020 dated
27.07.2020
474. The Monthly Statement of Limits Sanctioned (LSS) should be submitted in ______ parts. Circular
L&A 135/2020 dated 27.07.2020
A 2 B 3 C 4
475. Sanctioning Authority at Branch offices (other than committees) are to exercise their sanctioning
powers jointly with other officials with due care during the period of ______ months prior to the
retirement and submit the `Statement of Limits Sanctioned' promptly to the Controlling Office at
fortnightly intervals. Circular L&A 135/2020 dated 27.07.2020
476. Statement of Limits Sanctioned (LSS) received should be scrutinized and observations, if any to
be communicated to the concerned branches/offices within ______ days of receipt of the LSS.
477. All the Statement of Limits Sanctioned (LSS) are monitored till its logical end and shall be closed
within ______months. Circular L&A 135/2020 dated 27.07.2020
478. The maximum repayment tenure of term loan under PNB Sampatti Scheme will be ______
inclusive of ______ moratorium. Circular L&A 132/2020 dated 23.07.2020
479. At the time of request for issuance of any guarantee, Counter indemnity (stamped) should be
obtained from customers whereby customer indemnifies the bank against any claim/loss/liability
that might be sustained in consequence of having paid the guarantee amount. However, in case
of ______% margin, counter indemnity may be dispensed with subject to taking a letter
authorizing the bank to appropriate the amount of security in the event of breach or default in
contract. Circular L&A 129/2020 dated 17.07.2020
A 50% B 60% C 80%
480. Guarantees in favour of court or to Govt. or any other person on behalf of party/borrower
relating to payment of taxes, excise duty, custom duty or other Govt. dues, in dispute should be
issued only against ______% cash margin. Circular L&A 129/2020 dated 17.07.2020
A 25% B 50% C 75%
481. In cases where BG is issued for longer period and the borrower requests for recovery of
commission on Annual/Qtly basis as against the stipulated policy for recovery of commission
for the entire tenure of the bank guarantee + the claim period, an additional charge of ______%
shall be applicable. Circular L&A 129/2020 dated 17.07.2020
A 0% B 5% C 10%
248
482. In case of Bank Guarantee Counter Guaranteed by Central Government / State Government /
ECGC / Scheduled Commercial Bank having minimum required Regulatory CRAR including CCB,
applicable commission will be ______% of normal commission applicable on Bank Guarantee up
Page
to the extent of counter guarantee amount. Circular L&A 129/2020 dated 17.07.2020

A 25% B 50% C 75%

483. The guarantees shall be issued in favour of other Banks/FIs/Lending Institutions on behalf of
those borrowers only in whom our bank has funded exposure equivalent to a minimum of
______% of the amount of guarantee issued. Circular L&A 129/2020 dated 17.07.2020
A 0% B 5% C 10%
484. The exposure limit for issuing guarantees per borrower, favouring Other Banks/FIs/Lending
Agencies has been fixed at ______% of Tier-I Capital of the bank. However, aggregate exposure
for such guarantees should not exceed ______% of Tier I Capital of the Bank. Circular L&A
129/2020 dated 17.07.2020
A 10% ; 25% B 20% ; 50% C 10% ; 25%
485. for all guarantees issued on behalf of Commodity Brokers in favour of the National Level
Commodity Exchanges, minimum ______% of margin needs to be maintained, out of which
minimum 25% should be kept in the shape of cash/FDR and balance ______% may be kept in the
shape of shares, Govt. securities like NSCs, KVPs, IVPs, Relief Bonds, surrender value of LIC
etc. Circular L&A 129/2020 dated 17.07.2020
A 25% ; 5% B 50% ; 15% C 50% ; 25%
486. The Reserve Bank, vide its notification dated 23.05.2020 has allowed increase in Bank’s
exposure to a group of connected counterparties from 25% to ______% of the eligible capital
base of the bank. Circular L&A 106/2020 dated 04.06.2020
A 30% B 35% C 40%
487. For purchase of assets one-time guarantee provided by Gol on the pooled assets under Partial
Credit Guarantee Scheme will be valid for ______ from the date of purchase and can be invoked
on the occurrence of default Circular L&A 96/2020 dated 30.05.2020
488. For purchase of Bonds/CPs under the Partial Credit Guarantee Scheme, Individual PSBs may
buy up to ______% of their total non SLR (Statutory Liquidity Ratio) Bondholding through this
route. Circular L&A 96/2020 dated 30.05.2020
A 10% B 15% C 20%
489. Portfolio to be eligible under the Partial Credit Guarantee scheme should be built up
within______ months of announcement of the scheme. Circular L&A 96/2020 dated 30.05.2020
490. Gol shall settle claims under the Partial Credit Guarantee Scheme by the banks within ______
days from the date of claim. Circular L&A 96/2020 dated 30.05.2020
D 15 working days E None of the avove Answer: A
491. In case of purchase of assets, any loss crystalized up to ______ months is eligible for claim from
Gol under the Partial Credit Guarantee Scheme, provided such pooled assets are not (a) bought
back by the concerned NBFCs/HFCs or (b) sold by the purchasing bank to other entities. Circular
L&A 96/2020 dated 30.05.2020
492. The amount of overall guarantee will be limited to ______% of fair value of assets or ______% of
the face value at portfolio level of the Bonds/CPs being purchased by the bank under the Partial
249
Credit Guarantee Scheme, or Rs. 10,000 crore, whichever is lower. Circular L&A 96/2020 dated
30.05.2020
A 10% ; 20% ; Rs. B 15% ; 20% ; Rs. C 10% ; 20% ; Rs.
Page
1,000 crore 1,000 crore 10,000 crore

D 10% ; 15% ; Rs. E None of the avove Answer: C

10,000 crore
493. In case of purchase of assets under the Partial Credit Guarantee Scheme, guarantee will be valid
for ______ from the date of purchase of assets or till the date of sale of assets, whichever is
earlier. However, in case of purchase of Bonds/ CPs, the guarantee will be co-terminus with the
tenure of the Bonds/CPs. Circular L&A 96/2020 dated 30.05.2020
494. Charges for providing Credit Information / Opinion including introduction in case of Borrowal
Accounts if Provided on Request of the Borrower will be ₹______ per occasion. Circular L&A
93/2020 dated 26.05.2020
A ₹500/- B ₹1000/- C ₹1500/-
D ₹2500/- E None of the avove Answer: B
495. The minimum period of Inter-Bank Participation with Risk Sharing will be______ days while the
maximum period will be ______days. Circular L&A 84/2020 dated 06.05.2020
496. The maximum period of Inter-Bank Participation without Risk Sharing will be ______ days.
497. The aggregate amount of Inter-Bank Participation with Risk Sharing in any account should not
exceed ______ per cent of the outstanding in the account at the time of issue (within prudential
exposure ceiling to individual borrower/ group). Circular L&A 84/2020 dated 06.05.2020
498. Exposure in Inter-Bank Participation portfolio (excluding exposure to bank’s sponsored RRBs)
of the bank shall be capped to ______% of total advances of previous quarter on an ongoing
basis. Circular L&A 84/2020 dated 06.05.2020
A 1% B 1.50% C 2%
499. Minimum threshold limit of transaction under Inter-Bank Participation shall be Rs. ______.
500. Maximum amount of Advances Against Life Insurance Policies will be ______% of Surrender
Value of Life Insurance Policy issued by LIC of India/Insurance Company by way of Demand
Loan/OD facility to Public & Members of Staff. Circular L&A 83/2020 dated 06.05.2020
A 50% B 60% C 70%
501. Margin for Advances Against Life Insurance Policies will be ______% of the Surrender value of
Life Insurance Policy Circular L&A 83/2020 dated 06.05.2020
A 20% B 25% C 30%
502. Repayment of Demand Loan under Advances Against Life Insurance Policies will be ______
months or the period up till maturity of the security whichever is earlier. Circular L&A 83/2020
dated 06.05.2020
503. LIC of India/Private Sector Insurance Companies allow the Surrender Value after completion of
______ years period of policy and the Bonus is accrued only when the policy has run for
250
complete ______ years from the date of commencement. Circular L&A 83/2020 dated 06.05.2020
Page
504. For advances upto Rs.5 lac against life policies, after receipt of duly assigned policy in favour of

the branch and surrender value certificate from the office of the Insurance company, a
Registered Letter seeking confirmation of assignment in bank’s favour be sent to the insurance
company and in case, confirmation from insurance company is not received within ______ days
from the date of the letter, the same may be treated as confirmed by the insurance company and
loan can be disbursed thereafter. Circular L&A 83/2020 dated 06.05.2020
505. When the LIC policy is taken as primary security, and advance against LIPs is in the name of
third party, SI to remit the premium to the Insurance Company directly to be obtained. In case,
the SI could not be executed and the premium is not paid by the borrower/insured even after
follow-up, branch may remit the premium to the debit of loan account and take up with the
borrower/insured to regularize the account within a period of______. Circular L&A 83/2020 dated
06.05.2020
506. For loans against Central/State Govt. Bonds having the residual period upto 48 months to their
maturity, Margin will be ______% and for the residual period exceeding 48 months to their
maturity it will be ______%. Circular L&A 83/2020 dated 06.05.2020
A 15% ; 25% B 20% ; 30% C 25% ; 35%
507. Repayment Period of Demand Loan against the security of national savings certificates (NSCs)
and Kisan Vikas Patras (KVPs) will be ______ or the period uptill maturity of the security
whichever is earlier. Circular L&A 83/2020 dated 06.05.2020
508. Micro Finance Institution (NBFC-MFI) is a non-deposit taking NBFC having not less than
______% of its assets in the nature of qualifying assets. Circular L&A 82/2020 dated 06.05.2020
A 75% B 80% C 85%
509. Systemically Important Core Investment Company (CIC-ND-SI) is an NBFC carrying on the
business of acquisition of shares and securities which holds not less than ______% of its Total
Assets in the form of investment in equity shares, preference shares, debt or loans in group
companies and Its asset size is ₹ ______ or above. Circular L&A 82/2020 dated 06.05.2020
A 80% ; ₹ 50 crore B 85% ; ₹ 100 crore C 90% ; ₹ 50 crore
D 90% ; ₹ 100 crore E None of the avove Answer: D
510. Systemically Important Core Investment Company (CIC-ND-SI) is an NBFC carrying on the
business of acquisition of shares and securities whose investments in the equity shares
(including instruments compulsorily convertible into equity shares within a period not exceeding
______ years from the date of issue) in group companies constitutes not less than ______% of
its Total Assets. Circular L&A 82/2020 dated 06.05.2020
A 5 years ; 60% B 10 years ; 50% C 10 years ; 70%
D 10 years ; 60% E None of the avove Answer: D
511. NBFC-Factor is a non deposit taking NBFC engaged in the principal business of factoring. The
financial assets in the factoring business should constitute at least ______ percent of its total
assets and its income derived from factoring business should not be less than ______ percent of
its gross income. Circular L&A 82/2020 dated 06.05.2020
D 60 percent ; 60 percent E None of the avove Answer: C
512. Mortgage Guarantee Companies (MGC) are financial institutions for which at least ______% of
the business turnover is mortgage guarantee business or at least ______% of the gross income
is from mortgage guarantee business and net owned fund is ₹ ______. Circular L&A 82/2020 dated
251
06.05.2020
A 80% ; 90% ; ₹ 100 B 90% ; 80% ; ₹ 100 C 90% ; 90% ; ₹ 100
crore crore crore
Page
D 90% ; 90% ; ₹ 500 E None of the avove Answer: C

crore
513. Every NBFC-MFI and Infrastructure Finance Company (IFC) shall maintain, a minimum Capital
Adequacy Ratio consisting of Tier I and Tier II Capital which shall not be less than ______% of its
aggregate risk weighted assets on balance sheet and of risk adjusted value of offbalance sheet
items. Circular L&A 82/2020 dated 06.05.2020
A 5% B 10% C 15%
514. The total of Tier II capital of an NBFC-MFI, at any point of time, shall not exceed ______% of Tier I
capital. The Tier I capital of an IFC, at any point of time, shall not be less than ______%. Circular
L&A 82/2020 dated 06.05.2020
A 100% ; 25% B 150% ; 10% C 150% ; 25%
515. The minimum CRAR level required to be maintained by Housing Finance Companies is ______%
by 31st March, 2021and ______% by 31st March 2022. Circular L&A 82/2020 dated 06.05.2020
A 11% ; 12% B 12% ; 13% C 14% ; 15%
516. All NBFCs –ND with an asset size of Rs.______ and more as per the last audited balance sheet
will be considered as a systemically important NBFC–ND (NBFC-ND-SI). Circular L&A 82/2020
dated 06.05.2020
D Rs.50 crore E None of the avove Answer: C
517. Systemically important NBFC–ND (NBFC-ND-SI) shall maintain a minimum capital to Risk
Weighted Assets Ratio (CRAR) of ______%. Circular L&A 82/2020 dated 06.05.2020
A 5% B 10% C 15%
518. No Systemically important NBFC–ND (NBFC-ND-SI shall lend to any single borrower exceeding
______% of its owned fund and any single group of borrowers exceeding ______% of its owned
fund Circular L&A 82/2020 dated 06.05.2020
A 10% ; 25% B 10% ; 20% C 15% ; 20%
519. No Systemically important NBFC–ND (NBFC-ND-SI) shall invest in the shares of another
company exceeding ______% of its owned fund and the shares of a single group of companies
exceeding ______% of its owned fund. Circular L&A 82/2020 dated 06.05.2020
A 10% ; 25% B 10% ; 20% C 15% ; 20%
520. No Systemically important NBFC–ND (NBFC-ND-SI) shall lend and invest (loans/investments
taken together) exceeding ______% of its owned fund to a single party and ______% of its owned
fund to a single group of parties. Circular L&A 82/2020 dated 06.05.2020
A 25% ; 40% B 10% ; 25% C 10% ; 20%
521. As a matter of policy, minimum margin of ______% is prescribed for financing to NBFC sector.
However, minimum prescribed margin for various specific sectors shall be adhered to like
second hand vehicle financing -40% to 50% and 25% for leasing/ hire purchase companies.
A 5% B 10% C 15%
522. In case of finance to NBFCs for purchase of second hand plant & machinery/assets, its residual
life may be at least ______ years and the repayment period shall be fixed within the residual life
and finance shall not be given for purchase of second hand domestic machinery/assets, which
are more than ______ years old. Circular L&A 82/2020 dated 06.05.2020
252

523. Term Loan for the period of maximum ______ years may be considered to Housing Finance
Companies (HFCs) and NBFCs engaged in Housing Finance and for all other NBFCs, the
Page
maximum tenor shall be ______ years. Circular L&A 82/2020 dated 06.05.2020


524. In case of MFIs, Term Deposit of ______% of the advance disbursed shall be kept with bank and
the rate of interest payable on the deposit would be as per existing available rate on the date of
creation of deposit. Circular L&A 82/2020 dated 06.05.2020
A 5% B 10% C 15%
525. Due Diligence Report under Consortium Arrangement/Multiple Banking Arrangement shall be
obtained for the borrowers with aggregate (fund and non fund based) limits of Rs.______ and
above with our bank. Circular L&A 80/2020 dated 29.04.2020
A Rs.5 Crores B Rs.10 Crores C Rs.20 Crores
D Rs.25 Crores E None of the avove Answer: C
526. As per RBI it mandatory for corporate borrowers having aggregate fund-based and non-fund
based exposure of Rs.______ and above (introduced in a phased manner) from any bank to
obtain Legal Entity Identifier (LEI) registration and capture the same in the Central Repository of
Information on Large Credits (CRILC). Circular L&A 71/2020 dated 20.04.2020
527. Annual Stock Audit should be got compulsorily done in respect of all borrowal accounts
enjoying Fund Based & Non Fund Based (NFB) working capital limits of Rs.______ and above
from our Bank. Circular L&A 61/2020 dated 02.04.2020
528. Branches will return to the borrower all the securities / documents / title deeds to mortgaged
property within ______ days of the repayment of all dues agreed to or contracted and report to
Central Registry for Securitization, Asset Reconstruction and Security Interest (CERSAI) about
satisfaction of bank‟s charge. Circular L&A 56/2020 dated 31.03.2020
D 30 working days E None of the avove Answer: C
529. To extend relief measures including reschedulement of loans by banks in case of natural
calamities, is that the crop loss assessed should be ______% or more. Circular L&A 50/2020
dated 30.03.2020
A 30% B 33% C 40%
530. As relief in case of natural calamities, a maximum period of repayment of up to ______
(including the moratorium period of 1 year) is to be allowed if the loss is between 33% and 50%,
and if the crop loss is 50% or more, the restructured period for repayment may be extended to a
maximum of ______ years (including the moratorium period of one year) for Short-term
Production Credit (Crop Loans). Circular L&A 50/2020 dated 30.03.2020
531. In case of Agriculture Long term (Investment) Credit, where only crop for that year is damaged
and productive assets are not damaged due to occurrence of natural calamity, The Banks may
reschedule the payment of installment during the year of natural calamity and extend the loan
period by ______. Circular L&A 50/2020 dated 30.03.2020
532. In case of Agriculture Long term (Investment) Credit, where the productive assets are partially
or totally damaged due to occurrence of natural calamity and borrowers are in need of a new
loan , the total repayment period for the restructured/fresh term loan will differ on case-to-case
basis, generally it should not exceed a period of______years. Circular L&A 50/2020 dated
253
30.03.2020
Page
533. The Reserve Bank of India has developed a dedicated portal (https://dbie.rbi.org.in/DCP/) for

collection and compilation of data on natural calamities on a real time basis through a
centralized system. The Banks are required to upload the actual data on relief measures every
month by the ______ of the following month. Circular L&A 50/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A 5th B 7th C 10th
D 15th E None of the avove Answer: C
534. Margin for Term Loan under the scheme Financing to Educational Institutions will be ______% of
the Cost of Project (excluding cost of land). Circular L&A 47/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A 25% B 30% C 40%
535. Margin for Term Loan under the scheme Financing to Educational Institutions, wherever land is
also financed as part of cost of project then minimum prescribed margin against cost of the land
shall be ______% of the cost of the land. Circular L&A 47/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A 25% B 30% C 40%
536. Margin for Overdraft under the scheme Financing to Educational Institutions will be ______%
A 25% B 30% C 40%
537. Maximum Repayment Period for Term Loan under the scheme Financing to Educational
Institutions will be ______ months including maximum moratorium up to 36 months. Circular L&A
47/2020 dated 30.03.2020
538. TEV study shall be carried out in all cases under the scheme Financing to Educational
Institutions involving Project cost of over Rs. ______. Circular L&A 47/2020 dated 30.03.2020
539. No fresh exposure should be taken up to field level to financing to Educational Institutions.
However ______ & above may consider fresh exposure up to their vested loaning power subject
to obtainment of minimum collateral as prescribed. Circular L&A 47/2020 dated 30.03.2020
540. Additional/enhanced facility to Educational Institutions shall be sanctioned by the next higher
authority not below the level of ______ subject to obtaining of minimum prescribed collateral
541. Wherever EM is not possible under financing Term Loan to Educational Institutions, alternate
collateral security in the name of the institution or promoters of the institution equivalent to a
minimum of ______% (in terms of RV) of the Loan Amount shall be obtained as collateral
A 10% B 20% C 30%
542. For sanction of Term Loan and working capital (both fund based and non fund based) to
Educational institutions, collateral security (other than Land & Building of Educational
Institutions) shall be minimum ______% of total exposure for Proposals falling within vested
loaning powers of ZOCAC-I. Circular L&A 47/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A 100% B 75% C 50%
254
Institutions) shall be minimum ______% of total exposure for Proposals falling within vested
loaning powers of ZOCAC-II. Circular L&A 47/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A 100% B 75% C 50%
Page

Institutions) shall be minimum______% of total exposure for Proposals falling within vested
loaning powers of HOCAC-I. Circular L&A 47/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A 100% B 75% C 50%
545. In case the limit is sanctioned against hypothecation of Debtors/Book Debt only, verification of
Book Debts statement by a Chartered Accountant should be obtained mandatorily on ______
intervals for limits upto Rs.2.00 Cr for and for limits above Rs.2.00 Cr, the periodicity to be at
______ Intervals. Circular L&A 45/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A yearly ; half yearly B yearly ; Quarterly C half yearly ; Quarterly
D half yearly ; half yearly E None of the avove Answer: C
546. Borrower shall submit stock reports giving a complete list of all stocks, as on the last day of
each month, within ______ of the following month invariably along with GST returns of the
previous month/quarter as applicable under GST to facilitate. Circular L&A 44/2020 dated
27.03.2020
547. A report of physical inspection/verification of stocks is to be submitted as per Inspection Report
Form PNB 941 in case of all C/C(H) and P/C accounts with limit of Rs.______. Circular L&A
44/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A Rs.1 lacs and above B Rs.5 lacs and above C Rs.10 lacs and above
D Rs.25 lacs and above E None of the avove Answer: B
548. In addition to physical verification of stocks lying at outstations once in a month by the sister
branches, the main branch to necessarily inspect stocks charged once in a quarter, if the value
of stocks is more than Rs.______, otherwise the inspection should be done once in ______.
A Rs.10 lakhs ; six months B Rs.20 lakhs ; six months C Rs.50 lakhs ; six
months
D Rs.50 lakhs ; twelve E None of the avove Answer: C
months
549. No Drawing Power shall be allowed against stocks which are more than ______ months old.
550. Overdraft Limit under the Scheme for financing property owners against future lease rentals
(FLRs) shall be adjusted within a maximum period of ______(as prescribed for Term Loan
option) or total lease period considered for arriving at the loan amount, whichever is earlier, by
reducing Drawing Power (DP). Circular L&A 35/2020 dated 26.03.2020
551. For arriving at loan amount under the Scheme for financing property owners against future
lease rentals (FLRs) total unexpired period of lease shall not exceed ______ years. Circular L&A
35/2020 dated 26.03.2020
552. Under the Scheme for financing property owners against future lease rentals (FLRs), in case of
loans having repayment period upto 5 years, the amount of loan should not exceed ______% of
the value of the property mortgaged. Circular L&A 35/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 75% B 100% C 125%
255
553. Under the Scheme for financing property owners against future lease rentals (FLRs), in case of
loans having repayment period beyond 5 years, the amount of loan should not exceed ______%
of the value of the property mortgaged. Circular L&A 35/2020 dated 26.03.2020
Page
A 75% B 100% C 125%


554. Under the Scheme for financing property owners against future lease rentals (FLRs),Wherever
the leased property cannot be mortgaged for any reason whatsoever, of the required value, the
loan to be secured by EM of any other IP i.e. other than that of which rental is assigned, having
minimum value of ______% of loan amount. Circular L&A 35/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 75% B 100% C 125%
above ₹ ______ shall be placed before New Business Group (NBG). Circular L&A 33/2020 dated
26.03.2020
556. Exposures secured by ______% cash margin and Retail credit proposals up to ₹ ______ are
exempted from New Business Group (NBG) approval. Circular L&A 33/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 75% ; ₹ 25 Crore B 100% ; ₹ 25 Crore C 75% ; ₹ 50 Crore
D 100% ; ₹ 50 Crore E None of the avove Answer: A
557. In case of borrowers enjoying fund-based credit limits of Rs.______ and above, the concerned
single bank and/or the leader of the existing consortium will be free to organise `syndication' of
the credit limits. Circular L&A 31/2020 dated 26.03.2020
D Rs.500 crore E None of the avove Answer: B
558. Time limit for Export Proposals/Other Proposals for sanction of Fresh/enhanced credit limits
under Consortium Lending will be ______. Circular L&A 31/2020 dated 26.03.2020
559. Time limit for Export Proposals for renewal of existing credit limits under Consortium Lending
will be ______. Circular L&A 31/2020 dated 26.03.2020
560. Time limit for Other Proposals for renewal of existing credit limits under Consortium Lending will
be ______. Circular L&A 31/2020 dated 26.03.2020
561. Time limit for Export Proposals for sanction of Adhoc facilities under Consortium Lending will
be ______. Circular L&A 31/2020 dated 26.03.2020
D 60 Days E None of the avove Answer: A
562. Time limit for Other Proposals for sanction of Adhoc facilities under Consortium Lending will be
______. Circular L&A 31/2020 dated 26.03.2020
563. Under Consortium Lending, Where our bank is either a lead bank or 2nd largest participating
bank and the value of immovable property will be mortgaged/ charged is Rs. ______, NEC from 2
different advocates on panel, one before sanction and the 2nd after sanction, but before
disbursement to be taken. Circular L&A 31/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A Rs. 1 crore & above B Rs. 2 crore & above C Rs. 5 crore & above
D Rs. 10 crore & above E None of the avove Answer: A
564. Under Consortium Lending, Where our bank is neither the Lead Bank nor the 2nd largest
participating bank, Second legal opinion should be obtained for the property wherein the value
of the property is Rs.______ and above or as decided. Circular L&A 31/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A Rs. 5 crore B Rs. 10 crore C Rs.25.00 crore
256
D Rs.50.00 crore E None of the avove Answer: C

565. All the loan documents with limits of Rs.______ (both FB and NFB) will be vetted from the local
approved advocate/ law officer/law manager of administrative offices , first before their
Page
execution and again after execution but before disbursement of the loan. Circular L&A 31/2020

dated 26.03.2020
A Rs. 1 crore & above B Rs. 2 crore & above C Rs. 5 crore & above
D Rs. 10 crore & above E None of the avove Answer: B
566. Under Portfolio Purchase, Bank, Bank/FI/NBFC can transfer a single standard asset or a part of
such asset, a portfolio or part of portfolio of standard asset of homogenous nature through sale
and purchase under ______. Circular L&A 30/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A Housing Loan, Loan B MSME loans C Agriculture Loans
against Properties, other
retail loans
567. Under Portfolio Purchase, Bank Loans with tenor up to ______ months extended to individuals
for agricultural activities where both interest and principal are due only on maturity and trade
receivables with tenor up to ______ months discounted/purchased by banks from their
borrowers will be eligible for direct transfer (sale and purchase) through assignment. Circular
L&A 30/2020 dated 26.03.2020
D 12months ; 6 months E None of the avove Answer: B
568. Borrowers having aggregate fund based working capital (FBWC) limit of ₹ ______ and above
from the banking system will be eligible under - Loan System for Delivery of Bank Credit. Circular
L&A 23/2020 dated 16.03.2020
569. RAROC software is applicable only on the fund based and non-fund based facilities above Rs.
_______ for those corporate where rate of interest / commission is linked to risk rating of the
borrower and borrower is requesting concessions on card rate of the bank. Circular L&A 22/2020
dated 05.03.2020
A Rs. 1 crores B Rs. 2 crores C Rs. 5 crores
D Rs. 10 crores E None of the avove Answer: C
570. Based on the assessment under Zero Defect Zero Effect (ZED)’ Certification Scheme ( ‘Financial
Support to MSMEs), the MSME will be ranked as ______ enterprises. Circular L&A 09/2020 dated
20.01.2020
A Bronze, Silver B Silver, Gold C Gold, Diamond
D Diamond and Platinum E All Bronze, Silver, Gold, Answer: E
Diamond and Platinum
571. PNB SAJAG- Early Warning Signal+ Preventive Monitoring System (EWS+PMS) has been
implemented in respect of all corporate borrowal accounts having exposure above Rs.______.
572. The data for preparation of PNB SAJAG (EWS+PMS) report for a month will be available in the
system within ______days of next month. Circular IRMD 31/2020 dated 15.10.2020
573. All borrowers of our Bank with total exposure (both Fund Based & Non Fund Based) of up to
Rs.______, will be exempted from securing External Risk Ratings. Circular IRMD 26/2020 dated
13.08.2020
A Rs.5 Crore B Rs.10 Crore C Rs.20 Crore
D Rs.25 Crore E None of the above Answer: D
574. For borrowers having Internal Risk Ratings (IRR) PNB-B2 and exempted from requirement of
External Risk Ratings (ERR) up to Rs.25 Crs., ______ can sanction proposal for
fresh/enhancement/ additional/ adhoc limits where exposure is secured by the eligible collaterals
257
of at least ______% or more. Circular IRMD 26/2020 dated 13.08.2020

A ZOCAC-I ; 50% B ZOCAC-II ; 50% C ZOCAC-I ; 100%
D ZOCAC-II ; 100% E None of the above Answer: B
Page
575. As per RBI, Member Lending Institutions shall assign ______% risk weight on the credit facilities

extended under the Emergency Credit Line Guarantee scheme to the extent of guarantee
coverage. Circular IRMD 24/2020 dated 26.06.2020
A zero B 10% C 20%
576. Banks are required to maintain the minimum CRAR at ______% on an ongoing basis (other than
capital conservation buffer and countercyclical capital buffer etc.). Circular IRMD 19/2020 dated
26.03.2020
A 5.50% B 7.00% C 8.00%
D 9.00% E None of the above Answer: D
577. Scheduled commercial banks (excluding LABs and RRBs) operating in India shall maintain a
minimum total capital (MTC) of ______% of total risk weighted assets (RWAs) i.e. capital to risk
weighted assets (CRAR). Circular IRMD 19/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 5.50% B 7.00% C 8.00%
578. Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) capital must be at least ______% of risk- weighted assets (RWAs)
i.e. for credit risk + market risk + operational risk on an ongoing basis. Circular IRMD 19/2020
dated 26.03.2020
A 5.50% B 7.00% C 8.00%
D 9.00% E None of the above Answer: A
579. Tier 1 capital must be at least ______% of RWAs on an ongoing basis. Thus, within the minimum
Tier 1 capital, Additional Tier 1 capital can be admitted maximum at 1.5% of RWAs. Circular IRMD
19/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 5.50% B 7.00% C 8.00%
D 9.00% E None of the above Answer: B
580. Total Capital (Tier 1 Capital plus Tier 2 Capital) must be at least ______% of RWAs on an ongoing
basis. Circular IRMD 19/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 5.50% B 7.00% C 8.00%
581. Within the minimum CRAR of 9%, Tier 2 capital can be admitted maximum up to ______%.
A 2.00% B 3.00% C 5.50%
582. If bank has complied with the minimum Common Equity Tier 1 and Tier 1 capital ratios, then the
excess Additional Tier 1 capital can be admitted for compliance with the minimum CRAR of
______% of RWAs. Circular IRMD 19/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 5.50% B 7.00% C 8.00%
583. In addition to the minimum Common Equity Tier 1 capital of 5.5% of RWAs, bank is also required
to maintain a capital conservation buffer (CCB) of ______% of RWAs in the form of Common
Equity Tier 1 capital. Circular IRMD 19/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 2.00% B 2.50% C 5.50%
584. Both Fund Based and Non-Fund Based claim on Central Government will attract a zero risk
weight. Central Govt. Guaranteed claims will also attract______% risk weight. Circular IRMD
19/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A zero B 2.00% C 3.00%
585. Direct loans/Credit/Overdrafts and investments in State Govt. Securities will attract zero risk
weight. However, the State Govt. guaranteed claims will attract risk weight @ 20%. Circular IRMD
19/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 10.00% B 20.00% C 25.00%
258

586. Claim on RBI, DICGC and Credit Guarantee Fund Trust Micro and Small Enterprises (CGTMSE)
and Credit Risk Guarantee Fund Trust for Low Income Housing (CRGFTLIH) will attract ______%
Page
risk weight. However, the claims on ECGC will attract risk weight of ______%. Circular IRMD

19/2020 dated 26.03.2020

A 10% ; 20% B 10% ; 25% C zero ; 20%
D zero ; 25% E None of the above Answer: C
587. Claims on Bank for International Settlements (BIS), International Monetary Fund (IMF) and
eligible Multilateral Development Banks (MDBs) will attract uniform risk weight of ______%.
A 10.00% B 20.00% C 25.00%
588. Small business is one where the total average annual turnover is less than Rs. ______. Circular
IRMD 19/2020 dated 26.03.2020
D Rs. 50 crore E None of the above Answer: D
589. The maximum aggregated retail exposure to one counter party should not exceed the absolute
threshold limit of Rs._______. Circular IRMD 19/2020 dated 26.03.2020
590. Claims on unrated corporates, AFCs, and NBFC-IFCs having aggregate exposure from banking
system of more than INR 200 crore will attract risk weight of 150% instead of 100% Circular IRMD
19/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 50% B 100% C 125%
591. Claims on corporates, AFCs, and NBFC-IFCs having aggregate exposure from banking system of
more than INR 100 crore which were rated earlier and subsequently have become unrated will
attract risk weight of ______%. Circular IRMD 19/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 50% B 100% C 125%
592. Risk weight on claims on Asset Finance Companies (AFCs) would continue to be governed by
credit rating of the AFCs, except claims that attract a risk weight of 150 percent under NCAF
shall be reduced to a level of ______ %. Circular IRMD 19/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 50% B 100% C 125%
593. An exposure to be classified as CRE where primary source of cash flow (i.e. lease or rental
payments) for repayment is more than ______% of cash flows. Circular IRMD 19/2020 dated
26.03.2020
A 50% B 100% C 125%
594. Claim classified under CRE will attract risk weights of ______%. However, claims classified
under CRE-RH will attract risk weights of ______%. Circular IRMD 19/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 100% ; 75% B 100% ; 100% C 125% ; 100%
595. Risk weight for consumer credit, including personal loans, except credit card receivables has
been reduced to ______% from 125%. Circular IRMD 19/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 50% B 100% C 125%
596. Credit card receivables will continue to attract risk weight of ______%. Circular IRMD 19/2020
dated 26.03.2020
A 50% B 100% C 125%
597. If the exposure is collateralised by gold and gold jewellery then the exposure value after risk
mitigation shall attract risk weight of ______%. Circular IRMD 19/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 50% B 100% C 125%
259

598. Any exposure to Capital Market will attract a risk weight of ______% as warranted by external
rating or the lack of it of the counter party. Circular IRMD 19/2020 dated 26.03.2020
Page
A 50% B 100% C 125%


599. Fund Based and Non-Fund Based claims under Venture Capital Fund will attract risk weight at
______%. Circular IRMD 19/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 50% B 100% C 125%
600. As per New Capital Adequacy Framework (NCAF), Capital charge under Basic Indicator
Approach (BIA) is equal to the average over the previous three years of positive annual Gross
Income multiplied by a fixed percentage factor. This fixed percentage factor is currently set to
______%. Circular IRMD 11/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 10% B 11% C 13%
601. The exposure to an individual person or persons or to a small business is classified under Retail
Banking. The maximum aggregated retail exposure to one counterpart should not exceed the
absolute threshold limit of Rs.______. Circular IRMD 11/2020 dated 26.03.2020
D Rs.10 crore E None of the above Answer: C
602. Which of the following Business Line does not fall under Payment & Settlement? Circular IRMD
11/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A Electronic remittance like B Cash Management C MICR Cheque Processing
RTGS, EFT, NEFT, Services Centers
ECS/SWIFT
D Clearing Houses managed E None of the above Answer: E
by PNB
603. Which of the following Business Line does not fall under Corporate Finance? Circular IRMD
11/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A Application Supported by B Merchant Banking C Loan
Blocked Amount (ASBA) Syndication/Arrangement
D Commercial Paper E None of the above Answer: E
(Issuing and Paying
Agent)
604. Which of the following Business Line does not fall under Retail Banking? Circular IRMD 11/2020
dated 26.03.2020
A ATM/Debit Cards/Credit B PNB World Travel Card C Lockers/Safe Custody of
Cards (Dollar, Euro, Pound) Articles
D Purchase of Foreign E None of the above Answer: E
Currency and Travelers
Cheques
605. The New Capital Adequacy Framework (NCAF) presents three methods for calculating
operational risk capital charges in a ‘continuum’ of increasing sophistication and risk sensitivity.
Which of the following is not a method for the purpose of calculating operational risk capital
charges? Circular IRMD 11/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A Basic Indicator Approach B The Standardized C Advanced Measurement
(BIA) Approach (TSA) Approach (AMA)
606. As per RBI, A bank should establish one or more appropriate de minimis gross loss thresholds
which may vary in the bank across business lines or loss event types, for the collection of
internal loss data. However, no bank will fix a threshold above Rs ______ for any of the business
classes or loss event types. Circular IRMD 06/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A Rs 25,000/- B Rs 30,000/- C Rs 40,000/-
D Rs 50,000/- E None of the above Answer: D
607. Which of the following Operational Risk Events is not an examples of losses from failed
transactions, client accounts, settlements and every day business processes? Circular IRMD
260
06/2020 dated 26.03.2020

A Data entry error B Unauthorised access to C Negligent loss/damage to
account clients assets
Page

608. Which of the following Operational Risk Events is not an examples of losses caused by an
employee or involving employees (intentional or unintentional)? Circular IRMD 06/2020 dated
26.03.2020
A Unauthorized trading B Internal fraud C Wrongful termination
D Harassment E None of the above Answer: E
609. Which of the following Operational Risk Events is not an examples of losses arising from
disruption of business or system failure due to unavailability of infrastructure or IT? Circular
IRMD 06/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A Hardware or software B Telecommunications C Programming error
breakdown failures
D Computer virus E None of the above Answer: E
610. Which of the following Operational Risk Events is not an examples of losses from the actions of
3rd parties including external fraud, or damage to property or assets, or from change in
regulations that would alter the firm’s ability to continue doing business. Circular IRMD 06/2020
dated 26.03.2020
A Natural disasters B Terrorism and Extortion C External Fraud
(hurricane, flood, etc)
D Credit card fraud E None of the above Answer: E
611. Which of the following examples of operational risk losses related to credit risk that would be
included in the Operational Loss data? Circular IRMD 06/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A Card skimming B ID theft C credit card fraud
612. Small Loan Rating Model (SLRM) is applicable for borrowers proposing total limits (fund based
and non-fund based) of more than Rs ______ and upto Rs ______ from our bank and having
turnover upto Rs ______ . The model is in use across the bank online through PNB Trac System.
A Rs 20.00 lacs ; Rs 5.00 B Rs 50.00 lacs ; Rs 2.00 C Rs 50.00 lacs ; Rs
Crs ; Rs 25.00 crore Crs ; Rs 25.00 crore 5.00 Crs ; Rs 20.00
crore
D Rs 50.00 lacs ; Rs 5.00 E None of the above Answer: D
Crs ; Rs 25.00 crore
613. A Digital Web Application & Mobile App named as ______ has been developed to capture the
records of all field visits made by the Branch Officials for recovery in NPA accounts. Circular
SASTRA 28/2020 dated 23.04.2020
A N-Touch B D-Touch C P-Touch
D M-Touch E None of the avove Answer: D
614. After first login, the M-Touch Mobile Application user will have to enter his ______digit M-Pin for
further logins. Circular SASTRA 28/2020 dated 23.04.2020
D 8-digit E None of the avove Answer: A
615. MSTC Ltd. has now been empanelled with IBAPI as e-auction service provider and our Bank has
chosen Mode-2 i.e. Rs. ______+ Taxes per successful auction payable to MSTC Ltd. Circular
SASTRA 24/2020 dated 07.04.2020
A Rs. 5000/- B Rs. 6000/- C Rs. 8000/-
616. Bidders shall use IBAPI e-Bक्रयportal as a ______ for searching, viewing, selecting and bidding
for a property, as all Banks will display their properties on sale at this portal. Circular SASTRA
24/2020 dated 07.04.2020
A Point of sale B Property on sale C Property Bazar
D Property Shopping Mall E None of the avove Answer: D
617. Digital Marketing Department (DMD) of ______ at Delhi is managing E-Bक्रयPortal project and
261
coordinating with related Apex Bodies, Banks and MSTC. Circular SASTRA 24/2020 dated
07.04.2020
A Allahabad Bank B Canara Bank C Bank of Baroda
Page
D RBI E None of the avove Answer: A

618. As per our bank's Policy on Seizure and Sale of Vehicles (including Tractors) of Defaulter
Borrowers, In addition to the usual / normal recovery reminders / notices / efforts, a ______ days
notice calling upon the borrower to remedy the default shall be given (with copy to guarantor/s)
in writing in local vernacular language. Circular SASTRA 13/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 7 days B 10days C 15 days
Borrowers, In case the default persists, another possession-cum-sale notice of ______ days
shall be given to borrower / guarantors in writing in local vernacular language intimating the date
of taking over possession of the vehicle / tractor and conveying bank’s intention of selling it to
recover its dues on a date to be specified in the notice. Circular SASTRA 13/2020 dated 27.03.2020
Borrowers, In case auction fails once, then for the subsequent auction, as a onetime exercise,
reserve price may be fixed at ______% lower than the last reserve price. Circular SASTRA 13/2020
dated 27.03.2020
A 5.00% B 10.00% C 15.00%
Borrowers, For sale of vehicle, estimated value may be obtained from Surveyor and estimated
value given by Surveyor shall be fixed as Reserve Price. However, in no case valuation obtained
from surveyor should be older than ______. Circular SASTRA 13/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A one year B two years C one and half year
D six months E None of the avove Answer: A
Borrowers, After seizure of the vehicle, prompt and quick steps shall be taken to dispose off /
sell the vehicle but in any case not exceeding ______ days from the date of seizure, failing which
the vehicle / tractor may be restored back to the borrower. Circular SASTRA 13/2020 dated
27.03.2020
Borrowers, approved fees for Seizure and transporting the vehicle to a nearby godown will be
Maximum Rs.______ per vehicle for Cars, Trucks etc. and Maximum Rs.______ per vehicle for
Tractors. Circular SASTRA 13/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A Rs.3000/- ; Rs.3000/- B Rs.4000/- ; Rs.4000/- C Rs.3000/- ; Rs.4000/-
D Rs.4000/- ; Rs.3000/- E None of the avove Answer: C
Borrowers, Acting as custodian of vehicle / Storage Charges will be Maximum Rs.______- per
day for a maximum period of ______ days during which either the possession is to be restored
to the borrower or the vehicle is sold. Circular SASTRA 13/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A Rs.125/- ; 60 days B Rs.150/- ; 60 days C Rs.125/- ; 30 days
D Rs.175/- ; 60 days E None of the avove Answer: A
Borrowers, Fee Payable to Seizure & Disposal Agents for Sale of vehicle will be ______% of
amount realized. Circular SASTRA 13/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 5.00% B 7.50% C 10.00%
Borrowers, Fee Payable to Seizure & Disposal Agents for Recovery without seizure/sale of
262
vehicle/Tractor will be ______% of amount recovered. Circular SASTRA 13/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 5.00% B 7.50% C 10.00%
Page
627. For premature closure/withdrawal of FDR with face value greater than or equal to ₹ 5.00 Cr & less

than ₹ ______ should be done after obtaining permission from respective Circle Office (Circle
head or Dy. Circle Head in absence of Circle Head). Circular RLBD 04/2020 dated 13.10.2020
A ₹ 10.00 Crore B ₹ 15.00 Crore C ₹ 20.00 Crore
D ₹ 25.00 Crore E None of the avove Answer: A
628. Now quarterly minimum balance under PNB SF Prudent Sweep for Institutions has been reduced
from Rs. 10.00 lakhs to Rs. ______. Circular RLBD 03/2020 dated 29.09.2020
D Not reduced E None of the avove Answer: A
629. The threshold amount for sweep out under PNB SF Prudent Sweep for Institutions has been
increased from Rs. 50000/- to Rs. ______, keeping the minimum Sweep-out/ Sweep-In of Rs.1.00
lakh and thereafter in multiples of Rs.1.00 lakh to/from Fixed Deposit unchanged. Circular RLBD
03/2020 dated 29.09.2020
D Rs. 10.00 lakhs E None of the avove Answer: C
630. For RD & Pranam RD variants of Recurring Deposit scheme, the maximum monthly instalment
amount should be restricted to ______ per customer. Circular RLBD 02/2020 dated 14.08.2020
631. ______ shall have full powers to waive incidental charges, stipulated for maintenance of QAB as
well as Initial Deposit Amount for opening of accounts on the basis of merits of each case.
Circular RBD (R) 29/2020 dated 15.04.2020
A Senior Manager and B Chief Managers and C AGM and above
above above
D DGM and above E None of the avove Answer: B
632. In cases where rent in arrears is outstanding for more than ______ years and where the locker is
empty & being surrendered, Incumbents In- charge may consider waiver of locker rent by
accepting Rs.100/- only + surrender of locker key provided there is no security deposit/ balance
available in the relative deposit accounts. Circular RBD (R) 29/2020 dated 15.04.2020
633. Savings Bank accounts opened / maintained under the ‘RAKSHAK PLUS’ have free Sweep-In /
Out facility which, on authorization by the Primary account holder, would automatically get
initiated after ensuring an initial threshold amount of Rs ______ in the Savings Bank account,
subject to a minimum Sweep-in / out of Rs ______ and in
multiples of Rs 1,000/- thereafter. Circular RBD (R) 26/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs 10,000/- ; Rs 1,000/- B Rs 10,000/- ; Rs 2,000/- C Rs 5,000/- ; Rs 1,000/-
D Rs 10,000/- ; Rs 5,000/- E None of the avove Answer: A
634. The maximum amount of OD under ‘RAKSHAK PLUS’ Scheme for Category – I (JCOs/ ORs of
Indian Army & equivalents) will be ______. Circular RBD (R) 26/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs. 50,000/- B Rs. 75,000/- C Rs. 100,000/-
635. The maximum amount of OD under ‘RAKSHAK PLUS’ Scheme forCategory – II (Officers of the
Indian Army & equivalents) will be ______. Circular RBD (R) 26/2020 dated 30.03.2020
636. Personal Accidental (Death) Insurance (PAI) of Rs. ______ is available under ‘RAKSHAK PLUS’
Scheme, provided the monthly salary / pension for the past ______ months, preceding the month
of the accidental death, has been regularly credited in his/ her RAKSHAK PLUS Savings Bank
account. Circular RBD (R) 26/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs. 20 lakhs ; three B Rs. 30 lakhs ; three C Rs. 30 lakhs ; six
D Rs. 20 lakhs ; six E None of the avove Answer: A
263
637. Air Accident (Death) Insurance (AAI) of Rs. One Crore is availableunder ‘RAKSHAK PLUS’
Scheme, covering both the International and Domestic travels, provided the ticket for such air
travel was purchased by him / her from his / her ‘RAKSHAK PLUS’ Savings Bank account using
Page
net-banking OR the Debit cum ATM Card issued under the ‘RAKSHAK PLUS’ Scheme and the

monthly salary / pension for the past ______ months, preceding the air accident, have been
regularly credited in his/ her RAKSHAK PLUS SB account. Circular RBD (R) 26/2020 dated
30.03.2020
A Rs. One Crore ; three B Rs. One Crore ; SIX C Rs. Two Crore ; three
D Rs. Two Crore ; six E None of the avove Answer: A
638. Personal Accident (Permanent Total Disability) Insurance of Rs. ______ is availableunder
‘RAKSHAK PLUS’ Scheme, provided the monthly salary for the past ______ months, preceding
the month of accident resulting in permanent total disablement, have been regularly credited in
his/ her RAKSHAK PLUS Savings Bank account. Circular RBD (R) 26/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs. 30 Lakhs ; six B Rs. 30 Lakhs ; three C Rs. 20 Lakhs ; three
D Rs. 20 Lakhs ; six E None of the avove Answer: B
639. Cash Handling Charges’ @ _____% would be levied for transaction(s) (i.e. withdrawal/ deposit) in
‘PNB RAKSHAK PLUS’ accounts, implying thereby that all branches of PNB, PAN-India, would
be considered as ‘Home’ branch. Circular RBD (R) 26/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A 0.10% B 0.15% C 0.25%
D Not levied E None of the avove Answer: D
640. Benefit of Insurance is as per NPCI guidelines, and will be available to the card holders who have
performed minimum one successful financial or non-financial transaction at any channel
(ATM/Micro ATM/POS/e-Com/BC of the bank at locations) within ______ days prior to date of
accident including accident date for Platinum Cardholders and within ______ days prior to date
of accident including accident date for Classic Cardholders. Circular RBD (R) 26/2020 dated
30.03.2020
641. Credit Card limit of Rakshak Select RuPay Credit Card will be ______ times of net monthly
Income/ pension subject to maximum limit as per prevailing bank policy from time to time.
A two times B three times C four times
D No such criteria E None of the avove Answer: A
642. The Bank would provide financial support of Rs. ______ per year for ______ years or the actual
expenditure whichever is less, for education of one surviving and dependent child (Male /
Female) of a PAI(Death) case under ‘RAKSHAK PLUS’ Scheme. Circular RBD (R) 26/2020 dated
30.03.2020
A Rs. 1 lakh ; 3 years B Rs. 1 lakh ; 4 years C Rs. 2 lakh ; 3 years
D Rs. 2 lakh ; 4 years E None of the avove Answer: B
643. In the event of non - credit of salary in the ‘PNB RAKSHAK PLUS’ Savings Bank account for
______ consecutive months and/or any default in loan accounts of a ‘RAKSHAK PLUS’ account,
Bank has the discretion to convert such account to normal Savings Bank account and shall
withdraw all benefits extended under the ‘PNB RAKSHAK PLUS’ Scheme. Circular RBD (R)
26/2020 dated 30.03.2020
D six E None of the avove Answer: B
644. Rs. 150/- will be charged if PNB RAKSHAK PLUS Savings Bank account closed before
completion of ______. However, in case of death of the Primary account holder under ‘Rakshak
Plus’ Scheme, no charges will be levied if the account is intended to be closed. Circular RBD (R)
26/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A three months B six month C one year
D two years E None of the avove Answer: C
645. Where the OVD furnished by the customer does not have updated address, the utility bill which
is not more than ______ months old of any service provider (electricity,
telephone, post-paid mobile phone, piped gas, water bill) or the equivalent e-documents thereof
264
shall be deemed to be OVDs for the limited purpose of proof of address Circular RBD (R) 25/2020
dated 30.03.2020
Page

646. Where the OVD furnished by the customer does not have updated address, at the time of on-
boarding of the customer, an undertaking should be obtained from the customer along with
AOF/OVDs stating that Customer shall submit his OVD with updated current address within
______ months failing which operations in his account shall be restricted. Circular RBD (R)
25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
647. In those accounts which are opened using OTP based e-KYC, in non face to face mode, the
aggregate balance of all the deposit accounts of the customer shall not exceed Rs. ______. In
case, the balance exceeds the threshold, the account shall cease to be operational, till CDD is
complete. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs. Ten thousand B Rs. Twent five thousand C Rs. Fifty thousand
D Rs. One lakh E None of the avove Answer: D
648. In those accounts which are opened using OTP based e-KYC, in non face to face mode, the
aggregate of all credits in a financial year, in all the deposit taken together,
shall not exceed Rs. ______. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs. Twent five thousand B Rs. Fifty thousand C Rs. One lakh
D Rs. Two lakh E None of the avove Answer: D
649. As regards borrowal accounts which are opened using OTP based e-KYC, only term loans shall
be sanctioned. The aggregate amount of term loans sanctioned shall not exceed Rs. ______ in a
year. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs. Ten thousand B Rs. Twent five thousand C Rs. Fifty thousand
D Rs. Sixty thousand E None of the avove Answer: D
650. In those accounts which are opened using OTP based e-KYC, both deposit and borrowal shall
not be allowed for more than ______ within which identification as per Section 15 is to be carried
out. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A three months B six month C one year
D two years E None of the avove Answer: C
651. In case of Non-Resident Indians (NRIs) and Persons of Indian Origin (PIOs), as defined in
Foreign Exchange Management (Deposit) Regulations, 2016 {FEMA 5(R)}, alternatively, the
original certified copy of OVD, certified by any which of the following, may be obtained at the
time of opening of account. Circular RBDR 26/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Authorized officials of B Branches of overseas C Notary Public abroad,
overseas branches of banks with whom Indian Court Magistrate, Judge
Scheduled Commercial banks have relationships
Banks registered in India,
D Indian Embassy/Consulate E Any one of the above Answer: E
General in the country
where the non-resident
customer resides.
652. In case an individual customer who does not possess any of the OVDs and desires to open a
bank account, banks shall open a ‘Small Account’, which entails the
following limitations:
i. The aggregate of all credits in a financial year does not exceed rupees ______;
ii. The aggregate of all withdrawals and transfers in a month does not exceed rupees______; and
iii. The balance at any point of time does not exceed rupees ______. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020
dated 30.03.2020
A one lakh ; ten thousand B one lakh ; twenty five C one lakh ; ten
; twenty five thousand thousand ; fifty thousand ; fifty
thousand thousand
D two lakh ; twenty five E None of the avove Answer: C
thousand ; fifty
265
thousand
653. The small account shall remain operational initially for a period of ______ which can be extended
for a further period of ______, provided the account holder applies and furnishes evidence of
Page
having applied for any of the OVDs during the first twelve months of the opening of the said

account. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020

A Six months ; six months B six months ; twelve C twelve months ; twelve
months months
D twelve months ; twenty E None of the avove Answer: C
four months
654. In case of newly opened saving account, if a customer desires so, he/she may request, on a
plain paper, to switch to another account or else to close his/her account citing the reasons to
do so, within ______ of first transaction in the account. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
655. If a depositor closes his/her saving account, after trial period of 14 days but within ______ of its
opening, the prescribed charges will be recovered. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
656. A Saving account shall be categorized as “Inoperative Account” if there is no customer induced
transaction for a period of ______. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
657. In case an individual customer who does not possess any of the OVDs and desires to open a
bank account, banks shall open a ‘Small Account’. Which of the following limitation/s of Small
Account is/are incorrect?
i. The aggregate of all credits in a financial year does not exceed rupees one lakh;
ii. The aggregate of all withdrawals and transfers in a month does not exceed rupees ten
thousand; and
iii. The balance at any point of time does not exceed rupees fifty thousand. Circular RBDR
26/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Only i. B Only ii C Only iii
658. As per directives issued by the Reserve Bank of India, Banks are prohibited from opening saving
accounts in which of the following name? Circular RBDR 26/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Primary Co-operative B Khadi & Village Industries C Agriculture Produce
Credit Society which is Market Committee
being financed by the
banks
D Societies registered under E None of the above Answer: E
the Societies Registration
Act 1860
659. Debit entries in a half year under PNB Unnati Saving Fund Account should not exceed ______.
A 30 B 40 C 50
660. Deposits are insured by DICGC upto a maximum limit of Rs. ______ per customer, subject to
change from time to time. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
661. Facility of ______ free personalized multicity cheque leaf per year is allowed under PNB Unnati
Saving Fund Account. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A 30 B 40 C 50
662. Initial Deposit/Minimum Quarterly Average Balance is Rs. ______ under PNB SF Prudent Sweep
Deposit Scheme for Individuals. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
266
A Rs.5000/- B Rs.10000/- C Rs.20000/-

663. Charges for not maintaining Quarterly Average Balance under PNB SF Prudent Sweep Deposit
Page
Scheme for Individuals is Rs. ______ per quarter. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs. 100/- B Rs. 200/- C Rs. 400/-


664. Sweep In and Out shall take place in PNB SF Prudent Sweep Deposit Scheme for Individuals
after the cut off level of Rs.______ with a minimum Sweep-out/ Sweep-In of Rs._____ and
thereafter in multiples of Rs._____ to/from Fixed Deposit. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated
30.03.2020
A Rs.25,000/- ; Rs.5,000/- B Rs.25,000/- ; C Rs.25,000/- ;
; Rs.5,000/- Rs.10,000/- ; Rs.5,000/- Rs.10,000/- ;
Rs.10,000/-
D Rs.50,000/- ; Rs.5,000/- E None of the avove Answer: D
; Rs.5,000/-
665. FDR’s under PNB SF Prudent Sweep Deposit Scheme for Individuals through Sweep In and Out
facility can be issued for minimum period of ______ and for maximum period of ______. Circular
RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
666. Free Collection of Outstation Cheques upto the maximum amount of Rs.______ in a month is
available under PNB SF Prudent Sweep Deposit Scheme for Individuals. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020
dated 30.03.2020
A Rs.5000/- B Rs.10000/- C Rs.20000/-
667. Minimum Quarterly Average Balance is Rs. ______ under PNB SF Prudent Sweep Deposit
Scheme for Institutions. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
668. Charges for not maintaining Quarterly Average Balance under PNB SF Prudent Sweep Deposit
Scheme for Institutions is Rs. ______ per quarter. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs. 100/- B Rs. 200/- C Rs. 400/-
669. Sweep In and Out shall take place in PNB SF Prudent Sweep Deposit Scheme for Institutions
after the cut off level of Rs.______ with a minimum Sweep-out/ Sweep-In of Rs._____ and
thereafter in multiples of Rs._____ to/from Fixed Deposit. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated
30.03.2020
A Rs.50,000/- B Rs. 1.00 lakhs C Rs. 2.00 lakhs
D Rs. 5.00 lakhs E None of the avove Answer: D
670. FDR’s under PNB SF Prudent Sweep Deposit Scheme for Institutions through Sweep In and Out
facility can be issued for minimum period of ______ and for maximum period of ______. Circular
RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
671. Issue of ATM/Debit Card (RuPay) is allowed under PNB Junior Saving Fund Account for Minors
subject to debit upto Rs.______ per day Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs.1000/- B Rs.5000/- C Rs.10000/-
672. Under the Silver variant of PNB mySALARY Account, Gross Salary per Month will be Rs.
______. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs.10,000 & above upto B Rs. 25,001 & above upto C Rs.75,001 & above upto
Rs.25,000/- Rs.75,000/- Rs.150000/-
D Rs.1,50,001 and above E None of the avove Answer: A
673. Under the Gold variant of PNB mySALARY Account, Gross Salary per Month will be Rs. ______.
267
Rs.25,000/- Rs.75,000/- Rs.150000/-

D Rs.1,50,001 and above E None of the avove Answer: B
674. Under the Premium variant of PNB mySALARY Account, Gross Salary per Month will be Rs.
Page

Rs.25,000/- Rs.75,000/- Rs.150000/-
D Rs.1,50,001 and above E None of the avove Answer: C
675. Under the Platinum variant of PNB mySALARY Account, Gross Salary per Month will be Rs.
Rs.25,000/- Rs.75,000/- Rs.150000/-
D Rs.1,50,001 and above E None of the avove Answer: D
676. Primary account holder of the PNB mySALARY Account scheme may avail overdraft up to a sum
representing last ______ months net Salary(salary credited in account) @ Rate of Interest of
‘RLLR + 3.70% per annum. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
677. Overdraft under PNB mySALARY Account is to be adjusted in ______ months and fresh OD limit
will be allowed only after adjustment of the previous one. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated
30.03.2020
D six months E None of the avove Answer: D
678. Under the Silver variant of PNB mySALARY Account, the maximum amount of OD will be Rs.
A Rs. 50000/- B Rs. 150000/- C Rs. 225000/-
679. Under the Gold variant of PNB mySALARY Account, the maximum amount of OD will be Rs.
A Rs. 50000/- B Rs. 150000/- C Rs. 225000/-
D Rs. 300000/- E None of the avove Answer: B
680. Under the Premium variant of PNB mySALARY Account, the maximum amount of OD will be Rs.
A Rs. 50000/- B Rs. 150000/- C Rs. 225000/-
681. Under the Platinum variant of PNB mySALARY Account, the maximum amount of OD will be Rs.
A Rs. 50000/- B Rs. 150000/- C Rs. 225000/-
682. Savings Bank accounts opened / maintained under the scheme PNB mySALARY Account will
have Sweep-In / Out facility. On authorization by primary account holder, it will automatically get
initiated after ensuring an initial threshold amount of Rs ______ in salary account, subject to a
minimum Sweep-in / out of Rs ______ and in multiples of Rs ______ thereafter. Circular RBD (R)
25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs 10,000/- ; Rs 1,000/- B Rs 20,000/- ; Rs 1,000/- C Rs 25,000/- ; Rs
; Rs 1,000/- ; Rs 1,000/- 1,000/- ; Rs 1,000/-
D Rs 25,000/- ; Rs 5,000/- E None of the avove Answer: B
; Rs 1,000/-
683. TDRs/STDRs created through Sweep facility under the scheme PNB mySALARY Account will be
issued for a period of ______. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A 7 to 46 days B 7 to 91 days C 7 to 181 days
D 7 to 365 days E None of the avove Answer: D
684. Under the all variant of PNB mySALARY Account, Personal Accidental Insurance Cover of Rs.
______ is available. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs.5.00 lakh B Rs. 10 lakhs C Rs.18.00 lakh
D Rs. 20 lakhs E None of the avove Answer: D
268
685. Bank will take insurance cover of Rs.______ for all variants of PNB mySALARY Account from
Insurance Co., provided salary is being credited in the account for two consecutive months in
calendar quarter. Remaining amount of insurance cover will be provided for use of debit card as
Page
per extant guidelines Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020

A Rs.5.00 lakh B Rs. 10 lakhs C Rs.18.00 lakh

D Rs. 20 lakhs E None of the avove Answer: C
686. In case, salary is not credited in PNB mySALARY Account for continuous______, the account
will be transferred to Saving Fund General and all freebies will be withdrawn by system. Circular
RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A two months in a calendar B three months in a calendar C two months in a calendar
quarter quarter half year
D three months in a calendar E None of the avove Answer: B
half year
687. Minimum Quarterly Average Balance under PNB Saving Account Product for Premium
Customers will be Rs. ______. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs. 10000/- & Above B Rs. 25000/- & Above C Rs. 50000/- & Above
D Rs. 100000/- & Above E None of the avove Answer: C
688. Initial Deposit under under PNB Saving Account Product for Premium Customers in rural area
will be Rs. ______. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs. 500/- B Rs. 1000/- C Rs. 2000/-
689. Initial Deposit under under PNB Saving Account Product for Premium Customers in Semi Urban
area will be Rs. ______. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs. 500/- B Rs. 1000/- C Rs. 2000/-
690. Initial Deposit under under PNB Saving Account Product for Premium Customers in Urban area
A Rs. 500/- B Rs. 1000/- C Rs. 2000/-
691. Initial Deposit under under PNB Saving Account Product for Premium Customers in Metro area
A Rs. 500/- B Rs. 1000/- C Rs. 2000/-
692. Instant credit of outstation cheques of Rs. ______ P.Q. (After ensuring satisfactory operation &
maintaining of QAB for 2 qtr in the account)is available under PNB Saving Account Product for
Premium Customers. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs.5000/- B Rs.10000/- C Rs.20000/-
693. Under PNB Saving Account Product for Premium Customers, Platinum Debit Card with 2 add on
cards will be issued to the customers who maintain QAB of Rs.50000/- & above wherein
accidental insurance cover of Rs.______ will be available. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated
30.03.2020
A Rs. 50000/- B Rs. 1,00,000/- C Rs. 2,00,000/-
D Rs. 5,00,000/- E None of the avove Answer: C
694. ______% concession in locker rent for first year only for Small locker is available under PNB
Saving Account Product for Premium Customers. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A 20% B 25% C 50%
695. Minimum Quarterly Avg Balance under Premium Saving Account ‘PNB Best Customer’ scheme
will be Rs. ______ for a minimum period of ______. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs.1.00 lakh ; 6 months B Rs.1.00 lakh ; 1 year C Rs.50 thousand ; 6
months
D Rs.50 thousand ; 1 E None of the avove Answer: B
year
696. Daily ATM Withdrawal limit, POS Transaction Limit and E – Commerce Limit under the Premium
269
Saving Account ‘PNB Best Customer’ scheme will be Rs. ______. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated
30.03.2020
A Rs. 25000/- B Rs. 50000/ C Rs. 100000/-
Page

697. Personal Accidental Insurance cover of Rs. ______ under Premium Saving Account ‘PNB Best
Customer’ is available for primary account holder (Death + Total Permanent Disability) Circular
RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
D Rs. 25.00 lakhs E None of the avove Answer: B
698. What are the eligible criteria under the Premium Saving Account ‘PNB Best Customer’ scheme?
Circular RBDR 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Individual Resident Indian B Associated with the bank C Minimum 5 transactions
> 18 years of age & < 70 for a period of not less (both Cr & Dr) in a month.
years of age. than 3 years.
699. Minimum Quarterly Avg Balance under PNB Pratham Saving Account will be Rs. ______ per
quarter. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs. 50000/- B Rs. 1,00,000/- C Rs. 2,00,000/-
D Rs. 5,00,000/- E None of the avove Answer: B
700. Daily ATM Withdrawal limit under PNB Pratham Saving Account will be Rs. ______ for RuPay
Platinum International/ VISA. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs. 50000/- B Rs. 1,00,000/- C Rs. 2,00,000/-
701. Daily POS Transaction Limit/ E –Commerce Limit limit under PNB Pratham Saving Account will
be Rs. ______ for RuPay Platinum International/ VISA. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs. 50000/- B Rs. 1,00,000/- C Rs. 2,00,000/-
702. ______% concession in locker rent for first year only is available under PNB Power Saving
Scheme. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A 20% B 25% C 50%
703. Per day Domestic cash-ATM withdrawal under PNB Power Saving Scheme will be Rs. ______.
A Rs. 50000/- B Rs. 1,00,000/- C Rs. 2,00,000/-
D Rs. 5,00,000/- E None of the avove Answer: A
704. Per day Domestic shopping limit (POS) under PNB Power Saving Scheme will be Rs. ______.
D Rs.1.25 lakh E None of the avove Answer: D
705. Free Accidental death Insurance claim of Rs.5.00 lakh under PNB Power Saving Scheme is
admissible if the QAB in the account during the last calendar quarter remains equal to or more
than Rs.______. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs.25000/- B Rs.50000/- C Rs.75000/-
706. If customer is holding platinum debit card under PNB Power Saving Scheme and has used in
the last 45 days but QAB in the account during the last calendar quarter remains not equal to or
more than Rs.25000/-and minimum one transaction on POS/E-Com during the last 90 days is not
fulfilled then insurance claim will be restricted to Rs.______. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated
30.03.2020
D Rs.2.00 lakh E None of the avove Answer: D
707. Free Accidental death Insurance claim of Rs.5.00 lakh under PNB Power Saving Scheme is
admissible if ______ Circular RBDR 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A The QAB in the account B Minimum one transaction C Platinum Debit card
during the last calendar on POS/E-Com during the should have been used
270
quarter remains equal to last 90 days. within 45 days/or as per

or more than Rs.25000/- extant guidelines.
Page
708. Overdraft facility of Rs. ______ or the ______ times the monthly pension (whichever is lower) is

available under PNB Samman Saving Accounts. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs. 1,00,000/- ; 4 B Rs. 1,00,000/- ; 5 C Rs. 2,00,000/- ; 4
times times times
D Rs. 2,00,000/- ; 5 E None of the avove Answer: A
times
709. The overdraft under PNB Samman Saving Accounts is adjustable any time during the next
______ months. Circular RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
710. Overdraft facilities under PNB Samman Saving Accounts will be given with some Terms &
Conditions. Which of the following terms & conditions for this is/are correct? Circular RBDR
25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Account should be joint B Maximum age of C Request for overdraft is to
account with the spouse & pensioner should be 70 be signed by the both
Account must come in years at the time of joint account holders
credit once in twelve sanction of overdraft.
months
D The overdraft is adjustable E All the above Answer: E
any time during the next
twelve months.
711. Holder of Basic Saving Bank Deposit Account will not be eligible for opening any other saving
bank deposit account in the same bank. BSBDA holder will be required to close all existing
saving fund account in our Bank within ______ from the date of opening of the account. Circular
RBD (R) 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
712. In FINACLE Application, which of the following transaction/s is/are not Customer-Induced
Transaction? Circular RBDR 25/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A ATM, IBS, RTGS/NEFT- B Standing Instruction (SI) C Stop Payment Service
outward Charges
D Dividend on Shares E None of the above Answer: E
credited
713. The CIN (Corporate Identification Number) is a unique ______ digits alpha-numeric code/number,
given in the Certificate of Incorporation, issued to every company incorporated in India when it
gets registered by Registrar of Companies located in various states of India which is to be
captured in CBS by branches for identifying/tracking of companies Circular RBD (R) 24/2020
dated 30.03.2020
A 18 B 19 C 20
714. Initial Deposit for all variants of PNB myBIZ Plus Current Account in all areas (R/SU/U/M) will be
Rs. ______. Circular RBD (R) 24/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs. 1,000 B Rs. 2,500 C Rs. 5,000
D Rs. 10,000 E None of the avove Answer: C
715. Minimum Quarterly Average Balance for Silver variant of PNB myBIZ Plus Current Account will
be Rs. ______. Circular RBD (R) 24/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs. 1,00,000 B Rs. 2,00,000 C Rs. 5,00,000
D Rs. 10,00,000 E None of the avove Answer: A
716. Minimum Quarterly Average Balance for Gold variant of PNB myBIZ Plus Current Account will be
A Rs. 1,00,000 B Rs. 2,00,000 C Rs. 5,00,000
D Rs. 10,00,000 E None of the avove Answer: B
717. Minimum Quarterly Average Balance for Diamond variant of PNB myBIZ Plus Current Account
271

A Rs. 1,00,000 B Rs. 2,00,000 C Rs. 5,00,000
D Rs. 10,00,000 E None of the avove Answer: C
Page
718. Minimum Quarterly Average Balance for Platinum variant of PNB myBIZ Plus Current Account


A Rs. 1,00,000 B Rs. 2,00,000 C Rs. 5,00,000
D Rs. 10,00,000 E None of the avove Answer: D
719. Non Maintenance of QAB Charges for Silver variant of PNB myBIZ Plus Current Account will be
A Rs. 500/- B Rs. 1000/- C Rs. 2000/-
720. Non Maintenance of QAB Charges for Gold variant of PNB myBIZ Plus Current Account will be
A Rs. 500/- B Rs. 1000/- C Rs. 2000/-
721. Non Maintenance of QAB Charges for Diamond variant of PNB myBIZ Plus Current Account will
A Rs. 500/- B Rs. 1000/- C Rs. 2000/-
722. Non Maintenance of QAB Charges for Platinum variant of PNB myBIZ Plus Current Account will
A Rs. 500/- B Rs. 1000/- C Rs. 2000/-
723. Minimum Balance for Sweep-in and Sweep –out facility for Silver & Gold variants of PNB myBIZ
Plus Current Account will be Rs. ______. Circular RBD (R) 24/2020 dated 30.03.2020
724. Minimum Balance for Sweep-in and Sweep –out facility for Dimond & Platinum variants of PNB
myBIZ Plus Current Account will be Rs. ______. Circular RBD (R) 24/2020 dated 30.03.2020
725. Sweep – in and Sweep –out shall take place in all variants of PNB myBIZ Plus Current Account
in multiples of Rs. ______. Circular RBD (R) 24/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs.25000/- B Rs.50000/- C Rs.75000/-
726. FDR’s under all variants of PNB myBIZ Plus Current Account through Sweep In and Out facility
can be issued for minimum period of ______ and for maximum period of ______. Circular RBD (R)
24/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A 7 to 46 days B 7 to 91 days C 7 to 181 days
D 7 to 365 days E None of the avove Answer: B
727. Rs.______ (one time) will be charged for opting the lower variant of PNB myBIZ Plus Current
Account. There is no charge for upgrading the variant. The change in QAB to lower/higher
variant will be allowed only at the end of the quarter. Circular RBD (R) 24/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs. 500/- B Rs. 1000/- C Rs. 2000/-
728. The Credit Card under all variants of PNB myBIZ Plus Current Account will be issued after
______ months satisfactory conduct of account. Circular RBD (R) 24/2020 dated 30.03.2020
729. The Real Estate (Regulation and Development) Act, 2016 makes it mandatory for all commercial
and residential real estate projects, where the land is over______ or ______ apartments, to
register with the Real Estate Regulatory Authority (RERA) for launching a project, in order to
provide greater transparency in projectmarketing and execution. Circular RBD (R) 24/2020 dated
30.03.2020
A 400 square meters ; B 400 square meters ; C 500 square meters ;
272
seven eight seven

D 500 square meters ; E None of the avove Answer: D
eight
Page
730. There are various provision in the Real Estate (Regulation and Development) Act, 2016 and one

of the provision is that, the promoter/developer has to maintain a 'SEPARATE ACCOUNT' with a
Scheduled Bank for every project undertaken wherein ______ percent of the money received
from the buyers shall be deposited. Such funds can only be used for the purposes of
construction and land cost. Circular RBD (R) 24/2020 dated 30.03.2020
D 80 percent E None of the avove Answer: C
731. Whenever a locker is rented, fixed deposit for the amount which will cover ______ years rent and
charges for break open of the locker, under the scheme Sugam Fixed Deposit/Multi Benefit Fixed
Deposit/Varshik Aay Yojna, be taken and kept under Bank’s lien. Circular RBD (R) 23/2020 dated
30.03.2020
732. In the absence of standing instructions for recovery of rent, the lessee may be reminded for
payment of rent, at least a ______ before the due date of the payment. Circular RBD (R) 23/2020
dated 30.03.2020
A week B fortnight C month
D No such criteria E None of the avove Answer: B
733. A nominal fee of Rs. ______ per locker may be paid to the advocate for witnessing the break
open of the locker. However, if more than one locker is to be break opened at Circular RBD (R)
23/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs. 200/- B Rs. 300/- C Rs. 500/-
734. Branches may refund @______ of pro-rata rent for unavailed period of lease worked out on half
yearly basis. Circular RBD (R) 23/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A 60% B 70% C 75%
735. If any customer surrenders the locker before the anniversary date and rent has been recovered
on 1st day of the month i.e. before anniversary date, locker rent @ ______ will be refunded by the
system itself. Circular RBD (R) 23/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A 25% B 50% C 75%
736. In case of loss of key of the lockers, a service charge of Rs ______ has to be recovered from
hirer in addition to the actual expenditure incurred in breaking open the locker and changing of
key by manufacturer of lockers. Circular RBD (R) 23/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs 1000/-+ ST B Rs 1500/-+ ST C Rs 2000/-+ ST
D Rs 2500/-+ ST E None of the avove Answer: A
737. The amounts to be credited to the Depositor Education and Awareness Fund shall be the credit
balance in any deposit account maintained with bank which have not been operated upon for
______ years or more, or any amount remaining unclaimed for ______ years or more Circular
RBD (R) 21/2020 dated 30.03.2020
738. Recurring deposit accounts may be opened, with minimum monthly installment of Rs.______ or
more in multiples thereof. Maximum monthly installment will be restricted to Rs. ______. Circular
RBD (R) 22/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs.100/- ; Rs. 5.00 B Rs.100/- ; Rs. 10.00 C Rs.100/- ; Rs. 20.00
lakhs lakhs lakhs
D Rs.100/- ; without any E None of the avove Answer: A
ceiling on maximum
amount
739. Which of the following amount remain/s unclaimed for 10 years is /are not required to be
273
transferred to the Depositor Education and Awareness Fund? Circular RBD (R) 21/2020 dated
30.03.2020
A Loan accounts after due B Margin money against C Undrawn balance
Page
appropriation by the banks issue of Letter of Credit/ amounts remaining in any

Guarantee etc., or any

security deposit prepaid card issued by

banks
D amounts outstanding E None of the above Answer: D
against travellers cheques
740. The installment under Recurring deposit accounts for any calendar month shall be paid on or
before the last working day of that month, failing which penalty charges are to be levied for delay
@______ p.m. irrespective of periodicity of deposit. Circular RBD (R) 20/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs.1.00 for Rs.100/- B Rs.1.50 for Rs.100/- C Rs.2.00 for Rs.100/-
D Rs.2.50 for Rs.100/- E None of the avove Answer: A
741. Under Recurring deposit accounts, the additional rate of interest of 50 bps (presently) over
applicable card rates for all maturities on domestic deposits of less than Rs. ______ would be
paid to senior citizen. Circular RBD (R) 20/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A 1 crore B 2 crores C 5 crores
D 10 crores E None of the avove Answer: B
742. If a person is holding a Term Deposit/Recurring deposit and during the currency of deposit, the
depositor attains the age of 60 years, the preferential rate would be allowed @ ______. Circular
RBD (R) 20/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A 0.25% B 0.50% C 0.75%
D not be allowed E None of the avove Answer: D
743. 1% additional ROI is allowed to Chairman/Managing Director & CEO/Executive Director or other
such Executive appointed for a fixed tenure and Staff / retired staff members / widow/ widower of
staff in Aggregate Deposit Accounts of less than Rs. ______ over rates applicable to public.
A 1 crore B 2 crores C 5 crores
D 10 crores E None of the avove Answer: B
744. In case of premature cancellation of recurring deposits, ______% penalty will be levied and the
interest rate payable would be contractual rate minus _______% or the rate under the scheme on
the contractual date applicable for the tenor for which the deposit has run minus ______%,
whichever is lower. Circular RBD (R) 20/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A 0.25% ; 0.50% ; B 0.50% ; 0.25% ; C 0.50% ; 0.50% ;
0.50% 0.50% 0.25%
D 0.50% ; 0.50% ; E None of the avove Answer: D
0.50%
745. Free Accidental death coverage under Recurring deposit accounts is available to the extent of
Rs. ______ for individual account holder, first person in case of joint accounts (as presently
provided to bank’s debit card holders), with installment of Rs. ______ & above per month and
which are regular. Circular RBD (R) 20/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs. 1 lakhs ; Rs. 1000/- B Rs. 2 lakhs ; Rs. 1000/- C Rs. 1 lakhs ; Rs. 5000/-
D Rs. 2 lakhs ; Rs. 5000/- E None of the avove Answer: D
746. Accounts under PNB Pranam Recurring Deposit Scheme shall be opened by an individual
having minimum age of ______ years and maximum upto ______ years of age. Circular RBD (R)
20/2020 dated 30.03.2020
747. Accounts under PNB Pranam Recurring Deposit Scheme shall be opened with
minimum/maximum monthly installment of Rs. ______ or more in multiples thereof. Circular RBD
(R) 20/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Min-Rs.100/- ; Max- Rs. B Min-Rs.100/- ; Max- Rs. C Min-Rs.100/- ; Max- Rs.
5.00 lakhs 10.00 lakhs 20.00 lakhs
D Min-Rs.100/- ; Max- E None of the avove Answer: A
without any ceiling
274
748. Additional Benefit of interest to Senior Citizens under PNB Pranam Recurring Deposit Scheme
will be restricted to deposits upto Rs ______ only. Circular RBD (R) 20/2020 dated 30.03.2020
Page
D Rs 10 crore E None of the avove Answer: B

749. The account PNB Special Recurring Deposit Scheme can be opened by all Govt. Institutions, Pvt.
Institutions, PSUs, Corporate Bodies etc. The Institution shall open the accounts with minimum
______ Employee or ______% of the eligible employee, whichever is lower. Circular RBD (R)
20/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A 10 ; 60% B 10 ; 75% C 20 ; 65%
D 20 ; 75% E None of the avove Answer: B
750. The amount of installments under PNB Special Recurring Deposit Scheme shall be minimum Rs.
______ according to PF deductions of the employees and may be accepted later on in multiples
of ______ thereof. Circular RBD (R) 20/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs. 10/- ; Re.1/- B Rs. 50/- ; Rs.5/- C Rs. 100/- ; Rs.10/-
D Rs. 500/- ; Rs.50/- E None of the avove Answer: A
751. Penalty under PNB Special Recurring Deposit Scheme on missed installments will be @ ______.
A Re. 1/- per hundred B Rs. 2/- per hundred C Rs. 5/- per hundred
D No penalty E None of the avove Answer: D
752. Under Balika Shiksha Fixed Deposit Scheme, A sum of Rs.______ will be deposited as fixed
deposit in the name of girl child by the Govt. of India and she would be entitled to withdraw on
reaching 18 years of age Circular RBD (R) 19/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs.1000 B Rs.2000 C Rs.3000
D Rs.5000 E None of the avove Answer: C
753. Auto renewal under Balika Shiksha Fixed Deposit Scheme shall be done for ______, until final
disposal of funds only in the cases where directions are not received from the implementing
agency on or before the due date of the fixed deposit. Circular RBD (R) 19/2020 dated 30.03.2020
754. Which of the following is not a eligibility criteria of Balika Shiksha Fixed Deposit Scheme?
A All girls who pass class B All SC/ST girls who pass C Accounts should be of
VIII from Kasturba Gandhi class VIII and enroll for unmarried girls below 16
Balika Vidyalayas class IX in State/UT Govt., years of age as on 31st
(irrespective of whether Govt. aided or local body March on joining class IX.
they belong to SC/ST) and schools in the academic
enroll for class IX in year 2008-09 onwards.
State/UT Govt., Govt.
aided or local bodies
schools in the academic
year 2008-09 onwards.
D Students enrolled in E None of the above Answer: D
schools run by Central
Govt. are also eligible.
755. Period of Fixed Deposit Scheme for Victims of Road Accidents will be for any period from
______ months to 120 months. In case, the honorable court directs fixed deposit tenor more than
120 months Circular RBD (R) 18/2020 dated 30.03.2020
756. ______% higher rate of on the applicable CARD rate of interest as applicable for normal Fixed
Deposit Scheme for various tenors is available under Fixed Deposit Scheme for Victims of Road
Accidents. Circular RBD (R) 18/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A 0.25% B 0.50% C 0.75%
757. Which of the following statement/s is/are incorrect in respect of Fixed Deposit Scheme for
Victims of Road Accidents? Circular RBD (R) 18/2020 dated 30.03.2020
275
A No cheque book is to be B No loans/advances or C It is mandatory to open a

issued under the Saving withdrawal shall be Saving Fund account
Fund account without the allowed on the Fixed wherein monthly interest
Page
permission of the court. Deposit without permission of the Fixed Deposit shall

of the court. be credited.

D Photo identity card shall E None of the above Answer: E
be issued to the claimant
and the withdrawal shall
be permitted only after due
verification by the Bank of
the identity card of the
claimant.
758. Which of the following statement/s is/are incorrect in respect of Fixed Deposit Scheme for
Victims of Road Accidents? Circular RBD (R) 18/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A The scheme is to facilitate B Any C Income option (out flow of
the claimants of victims of individual/depende interest) is available to the
road accidents to place the nt (singly or jointly customer and maturity
funds received from the with others), option is not available
Motor Tribunal as per Minors of 10 years under the scheme. The
court orders under the and interest may be paid on
maximum interest above in his own name monthly basis.The
category of Fixed Deposit. and below 10 years under
monthly interest will be
guardianship shall be
paid at discounted rate.
eligible to open under the
scheme provided there are
Court orders in support of
the claim in his/their na
D In case, the honorable E None of the above Answer: E
court directs fixed deposit
tenor more than 120
months, the same shall be
auto renewed if the period
exceeds 120 months.
759. Minimum deposit amount based on minimum monthly annuity under Motor Accident Claims
Annuity (Term) Deposit (MACAD) Account will be Rs.______ for the relevant period. Circular RBD
(R) 17/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs.500/- B Rs.1,000/- C Rs.2,000/-
760. Tenure under Motor Accident Claims Annuity (Term) Deposit (MACAD) Account will be ______.
A 6 to 120 months. B 12 to 120 months. C 24 to 120 months.
D 36 to 120 months. E None of the avove Answer: D
761. The Capital Gain Sugam Term Deposit Account can be opened with a minimum deposit of
Rs.______ and thereafter in multiples of ______ with maximum amount of Rs.______. Circular
RBD (R) 16/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs.1000/- ; Re.1/- ; B Rs.5000/- ; Re.1/- ; C Rs.10000/- ; Re.1/- ;
Rs.1.00 Crore Rs.5.00 Crore Rs.10.00 Crore
D Rs.10000/- ; Re.100/- ; E None of the avove Answer: C
Rs.10.00 Crore
762. Period under Capital Gain Sugam Term Deposit Account will be for any period from ______ to
______ months, even for incomplete quarters Circular RBD (R) 16/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A 46 days ; 120 month B 6 to 120 months. C 12 to 120 months.
D 24 to 120 months. E None of the avove Answer: A
763. Under Capital Gain Sugam Term Deposit Account, The depositor has the facility to withdraw any
amount before maturity in multiples of Rs.______ any time whenever he needs it without
breaking the entire deposit and without losing interest on the remaining deposit under the
scheme. Circular RBD (R) 16/2020 dated 30.03.2020
276
A Rs.500/- B Rs.1,000/- C Rs.2,000/-

764. All single term deposits up to Rs 10 crore contracted at the Retail Credit rates, published by ALM
Page
Cell, IRMD, HO, will be treated as _____. Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated 30.03.2020

A Core Deposits (Retail B Wholesale (Core) C Wholesale (DRI) deposit

Core)
D Any of the above E None of the avove Answer: A
765. All single term deposits above Rs.10 crore Crorecontracted at the card rates will be treated as
_____. Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
Core)
766. All single term deposits above Rs.10 crore where contracted at Differential (DRI) Card Rate,
published by Treasury Division are treated as _____. Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
Core)
767. The additional rate of interest over applicable card rates for all maturities on domestic deposits
on fixed deposit/ Recurring Deposit schemes of less than Rs _____ crores would be paid to
senior citizen. Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
768. 1% additional ROI is allowed to Chairman/Managing Director & CEO/Executive Director or other
such Executive appointed for a fixed tenure and Staff / retired staff members / widow/ widower of
staff in Aggregate Deposit Accounts of less than Rs. _____ over rates applicable to public.
769. All the deposits, which are repayable after notice or repayable after a certain period, (1) where
the amount of deposit (2) aggregate amount of deposit and (3) such deposit repayable together
with interest i.e.Rs._____ or more, the repayment of such deposit(s) has to be made by account
payee cheque or account payee bank draft. Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs.20,000/- B Rs.50,000/- C Rs.100,000/-
770. TDS shall be deducted on proportionate basis from the very first month / quarter if total interest
payable to a customer during the financial year (i.e. from April to March) on all his term deposits,
wherein his / her name stands first, in a Bank on the basis of CIF of the customer comes to Rs
______ and above in case of Senior citizen and Rs. ______and above for any other person
A Rs. 40,000/- ; Rs. B Rs. 50,000/- ; Rs. C Rs. 50,000/- ; Rs.
40,000/- 40,000/- 50,000/-
D Rs. 60,000/- ; Rs. E None of the avove Answer: B
50,000/-
771. The Bank is required to issue TDS certificate within _____ days from the end of the month in
which credit is given or the amount is paid. Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
772. Aauto renewal of the fixed deposits having maturity value of above Rs.______ is to be accepted
for principal amount only. Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs.1 crores B Rs.5 crores C Rs.10 crores
D Rs.20 crores E None of the avove Answer: C
773. Term Deposits for Rs.______ and above on written request shall be eligible for Demand
Loan/overdraft facility. The option/facility of ‘overdraft’ shall not be available in the account
opened in the name of illiterate or a blind person. Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs.1,000/- B Rs.5,000/- C Rs.10,000/-
277
D Rs.20,000/- E None of the avove Answer: C

774. The Term Deposit Ordinary (TDO) account can be opened with a minimum deposit of Rs.______
and thereafter in multiples of ______ with maximum amount of Rs.______. Circular RBD (R)
Page
15/2020 dated 30.03.2020

A Rs.100/- ; Re.1/- ; B Rs.100/- ; Rs.100/- ; C Rs.1000/- ; Re.1/- ;

Rs.1,99,99,999/. Rs.1,99,99,999/. Rs.1,99,99,999/.

D Rs.1000/- ; Rs.100/- ; E None of the avove Answer: A
Rs.1,99,99,999/.
775. The Term Deposit Ordinary (TDO) account can be opened for any period from ______ to ______.
A 7 days ; 179 day B 46 days ; 179 day C 7 days ; 365 day
D 46 days ; 365 day E None of the avove Answer: A
776. Account under PNB Multi Benefit Term Deposit Scheme can be opened with a minimum deposit
of Rs.______ and thereafter in multiples of ______ with maximum amount of Rs.______. Circular
RBD (R) 15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
Rs.1,99,99,999/. Rs.1,99,99,999/. Rs.1,99,99,999/.
Rs.1,99,99,999/.
777. Account under PNB Multi Benefit Term Deposit Scheme can be opened for any period from
______ to ______ thereafter in months & days, even for incomplete quarters. Circular RBD (R)
15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A 7 days ; 120 months B 6 months ; 120 months C 7 days ; 60 months
778. Account under PNB Special Term Deposit Scheme can be opened with a minimum deposit of
RBD (R) 15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
Rs.1,99,99,999/. Rs.1,99,99,999/. Rs.1,99,99,999/.
Rs.1,99,99,999/.
779. Account under PNB Special Term Deposit Scheme can be opened for any period from ______ to
______ even for incomplete quarters. Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A 6 months ; 10 years B 1 year ; 10 years C 6 months ; 5 years
D 1 year ; 5 years E None of the avove Answer: B
780. Account under PNB Sugam Term Deposit Scheme can be opened with a minimum deposit of
RBD (R) 15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs.1000/- ; Re.1/- ; B Rs.10000/- ; Re.1/- ; C Rs.10000/- ; Rs.100/-
Rs.1.00 Crore. Rs.10.00 Crore. ; Rs.10.00 Crore.
D Rs.10000/- ; Rs.100/- ; E None of the avove Answer: B
Rs.1.00 Crore.
781. Account under PNB Sugam Term Deposit Scheme can be opened for any period from ______ to
______even for incomplete quarters. Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A 7 days ; 120 months B 46 days ; 120 months C 6 months ; 120 months
D 12 months ; 120 E None of the avove Answer: B
months
782. Under PNB Sugam Term Deposit Scheme, The depositor has the facility to withdraw any amount
before maturity in multiples of Rs.______ subject to minimum withdrawal of Rs.______ at a time,
whenever he needs it without breaking the entire deposit and without losing interest on the
remaining deposit. Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Re.1/- ; Rs.1000/- B Re.1/- ; Rs.10000/- C Re.100/- ; Rs.1000/-
D Re.100/- ; Rs.10000/- E None of the avove Answer: A
783. Account under PNB Anupam Term Deposit Scheme can be opened with a minimum deposit of
RBD (R) 15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs.1000/- ; RS.1000/- ; B Rs.1000/- ; RS.100/- ; C Rs.10000/- ; RS.1000/-
278
Rs.1, 99, 99,000/- Rs.1, 99, 99,000/- ; Rs.1, 99, 99,000/-

D Rs.10000/- ; RS.100/- ; E None of the avove Answer: C
Rs.1, 99, 99,000/-
Page
784. Account under PNB Anupam Term Deposit Scheme can be opened for any period from ______ to

______ . Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated 30.03.2020

D 12 months ; 120 E None of the avove Answer: C
months
785. Account under PNB Uttam Term Deposit Scheme can be opened for single deposit of above
Rs.______, and thereafter in multiples of ______. Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs.10 lakh ; Re.1/- B Rs.10 lakh ; Re.100/- C Rs.15 lakh ; Re.1/-
D Rs.15 lakh ; Re.100/- E None of the avove Answer: C
786. Account under PNB Uttam Term Deposit Scheme can be opened for any period from ______ to
______ for deposit from above Rs. 15 lac to Rs. 10 Cr. under Maturity Option. Circular RBD (R)
15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A 7 days ; 120 months B 46 days ; 120 months C 91 days ; 120 months.
D 365 days ; 120 months. E None of the avove Answer: C
______ for deposit from above Rs. 15 lac to Rs. 10 Cr. under Income Option. Circular RBD (R)
15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
D 12 months ; 120 E None of the avove Answer: C
months
______ for deposit above Rs. 10 Cr. under Maturity Option. Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated
30.03.2020
A 46 days ; 1 Yr. B 91 days ; 1 Yr. C 91 days ; 10 Yrs.
D 179 days ; 10 Yrs. E None of the avove Answer: B
______ for deposit above Rs. 10 Cr. under Income Option. Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated
30.03.2020
A 46 days ; 1 Yr. B 91 days ; 1 Yr. C 3 months ; 1 Yr.
D 6 months ; 1 Yr. E None of the avove Answer: D
790. Interbank deposits above Rs 10 Crore under PNB Uttam Term Deposit Scheme can be opened
for any period from ______ to ______ with Maturity Option only. Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated
30.03.2020
A 46 days ; 1 Yr. B 91 days ; 1 Yr. C 3 months ; 1 Yr.
D 6 months ; 1 Yr. E None of the avove Answer: B
791. Account under PNB Tax Shield – Fixed Deposit Scheme, can be opened with a minimum deposit
of Rs.______ or in multiples thereof subject to maximum deposit of Rs.______ per financial year
only. Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs. 100/- ; Rs. 0.50 Lac B Rs. 100/- ; Rs. 1.00 Lac C Rs. 100/- ; Rs. 1.50 Lac
D Rs. 1000/- ; Rs. 1.50 E None of the avove Answer: C
Lac
792. Account under PNB Tax Shield – Fixed Deposit Scheme, can be opened for any period from
minimum _____ years to maximum ______ years, including incomplete quarter of 82 months, 95
months and 16 days so on. Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A 1 year ; 5 year B 1 year ; 10 year C 2 years ; 5year
D 5 years ; 10 year E None of the avove Answer: D
793. Lock in Perio under PNB Tax Shield – Fixed Deposit Scheme will be ______. Circular RBD (R)
15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A 1 year B 2 year C 3 year
D 5 year E None of the avove Answer: D
794. No term deposit receipt under PNB Tax Shield – Fixed Deposit Scheme shall be encashed before
the expiry of ______ years from the date of its receipt except in case of death of depositor.
279

Page
795. The term deposit receipt issued under PNB Tax Shield – Fixed Deposit Scheme shall not be

lien/pledged to secure a loan or as security to any other loan, before the expiry of the Lock in
Period of ______ years. Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
796. PNB Pranam Fixed Deposit Scheme shall be applicable for the age of ______ years and above
and up to ______ years. Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
797. Account under PNB Pranam Fixed Deposit Scheme can be opened with a minimum deposit of
RBD (R) 15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
Rs.1,99,99,999/. Rs.1,99,99,999/. Rs.1,99,99,999/.
Rs.1,99,99,999/.
798. Account under PNB Pranam Fixed Deposit Scheme can be opened with Income option for any
period from minimum _____ to maximum ______ years . The period of deposit under this option
shall be in complete months/ quarters as opted by the depositor. Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated
30.03.2020
A 46 days ; 10 year B 91 days ; 10 year C 6 months ; 10 year
D 1 year ; 10 year E None of the avove Answer: D
799. Account under PNB Pranam Fixed Deposit Scheme can be opened with Maturity option for any
period from minimum _____ years to maximum ______ years, even for incomplete quarters.
A 46 days ; 10 year B 91 days ; 10 year C 6 months ; 10 year
D 1 year ; 10 year E None of the avove Answer: D
800. Under PNB Pranam Fixed Deposit Scheme, penalty @ ______% will be levied for premature
withdrawal of deposit in case it is closed prematurely after attaining status of Senior Citizen.
A 0.25% B 0.50% C 1.00%
801. Account under PNB Floating Rate Fixed Deposit Scheme can be opened with a minimum deposit
of Rs.______ or in multiples thereof. However, acceptance of FDRs of above Rs.______ shall be
strictly subject to approval by Treasury Division, HO. Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs.100/- ; Rs.1 crore B Rs.100/- ; Rs.2 crore C Rs.1000/- ; Rs.1 crore
D Rs.1000/- ; Rs.10 crore E None of the avove Answer: D
802. Account under PNB Floating Rate Fixed Deposit Scheme can be opened for any period from
minimum _____ to maximum ______ years, even for incomplete quarters. Circular RBD (R)
15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A 7 days ; 10 year B 46 days ; 10 year C 91 days ; 10 year
D 179 days ; 10 year E None of the avove Answer: A
803. Depositors will be eligible for taking Demand Loan/Overdraft facility, against the FD made under
the PNB Floating Rate Fixed Deposit Scheme. However, for taking Overdraft facility, the FD
should be for a minimum of Rs. ______. Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs. 1000/ B Rs. 2000/ C Rs. 5000/
D Rs. 10000/ E None of the avove Answer: D
804. If any depositor desires to withdraw the deposit before maturity of term deposits of up to Rs.10
Crore and where deposit remains with the bank up to 5 years under the PNB Floating Rate Fixed
Deposit Scheme, interest payable will be ______% minus the rate that remained effective from
time to time for the period FD has actually run. Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A 0.25% B 0.50% C 1.00%
280

805. If any depositor desires to withdraw the deposit before maturity of term deposits of up to Rs.10
Crore and where deposit remains with the bank above 5 years under the PNB Floating Rate Fixed
Page
Deposit Scheme, interest payable will be ______% minus the rate that remained effective from

time to time for the period FD has actually run. Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A 0.25% B 0.50% C 1.00%
806. Account under PNB Varshik Aay Yojana Deposit Scheme can be opened with a minimum deposit
of Rs.______ and thereafter in multiples of ______ with maximum amount of Rs.______. Circular
RBD (R) 15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs.1000/- ; RS.100/- ; B Rs.1000/- ; RS.1000/- ; C Rs.10000/- ; RS.100/-
Rs.1, 99, 99,000/- Rs.1, 99, 99,000/- ; Rs.1, 99, 99,000/-
D Rs.10000/- ; RS.1000/- E None of the avove Answer: D
; Rs.1, 99, 99,000/-
807. Deposit under PNB Varshik Aay Yojana Deposit Scheme will be accepted for ______ months
only at the option of the depositor Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A 24, 36, 48 B 60, 72, 84 C 96, 108 & 120
808. Account under PNB Growth Fixed Deposit Scheme can be opened with Single deposit of
minimum Rs. ______, and thereafter in multiples of ______ and maximum up to Rs.______e.
A Rs. 1.00 Crore ; Re 1 ; B Rs. 1.00 Crore ; Rs. 100 C Rs. 2.00 Crore ; Re 1 ;
Rs.10.00 crore ; Rs.10.00 crore Rs.10.00 crore
D Rs. 2.00 Crore ; Rs. 100 E None of the avove Answer: C
; Rs.10.00 crore
809. Account under PNB Growth Fixed Deposit Scheme can be opened with Maturity option for any
period from minimum _____ to maximum ______ months. Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated
30.03.2020
A 7 days ; 120 months B 46 days ; 120 months C 91 days ; 120 months
D 179 days ; 120 months E None of the avove Answer: A
810. Account under PNB Growth Fixed Deposit Scheme can be opened with Income option for any
period from minimum _____ months to maximum ______ years. Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated
30.03.2020
811. Conversion/ Change in option under PNB Growth Fixed Deposit Scheme will be allowed
provided if the fixed deposit receipt has been issued for a period of ______ or more and
remaining period of the FD till maturity is ______ and above. Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated
30.03.2020
812. Account under PNB Bulk Fixed Deposit Scheme can be opened with Maturity option for any
period from minimum _____ to maximum ______ months. Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated
30.03.2020
813. Account under PNB Bulk Fixed Deposit Scheme can be opened with Income option for any
period from minimum _____ months to maximum ______ years. Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated
30.03.2020
814. Account under PNB Bulk Fixed Deposit Scheme can be opened with ______. Circular RBD (R)
15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Single deposit of above B Single Interbank Deposit C Single NRE & NRO Term
Rs.10.00 crore, and of Rs 2 crore& above Deposits of above Rs 10
281
thereafter in multiples of crore

Re. 1
D Single FCNR (B) deposit E Any of the above Answer: E
Page
of 1 Mio and above for

USD,GBP & EUR currency

815. Account under PNB MIBOR Linked Notice Deposit Scheme can be opened for any period from
minimum ______ to maximum ______. Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
816. Under PNB MIBOR Linked Notice Deposit Scheme, penalty @ ______% will be levied for
premature withdrawal/Part Withdrawal of deposit. Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A 0.25% B 0.50% C 1.00%
817. Which of the following customer is not eligible to open an account under PNB MIBOR Linked
Notice Deposit Scheme? Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A High Net worth Individuals B Company/Corporate Body C Public Sector
(HNIs) Undertakings
D Commercial Organization E None of the above Answer: E
818. Minimum/Maximum amount of deposit under PNB NRE Rupee Sugam Term Deposit Scheme will
A Min-Rs. 1000/- ; B Min-Rs. 10000/- ; C Min-Rs. 1000/- ; Max-
Rs.10.00 crore Rs.10.00 crore no limit
D Min-Rs. 10000/- ; Max- E None of the avove Answer: D
no limit
819. Under PNB NRE Rupee Sugam Term Deposit Scheme, penalty @ ______% will be levied for
premature withdrawal/Part/full Withdrawal of deposit. Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A 0.25% B 0.50% C 1.00%
820. The depositor may withdraw any amount before maturity in multiples of Rs. ______ any time
according to his convenience without breaking the entire deposit and also without losing
interest on remaining part of Fixed Deposit under PNB NRE Rupee Sugam Term Deposit
Scheme. Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs. 100/- B Rs. 1,000/- C Rs. 5,000/-
821. Which of the following customer is eligible to open an account under PNB NRE Rupee Sugam
Term Deposit Scheme? Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A NRIs – B NRIs – Public Sector C NRIs – Commercial
Company/Corporate Body Undertakings Organization
D NRIs – Individuals in E None of the above Answer: D
Single or Joint capacity.
822. The account under PNB NRO Sugam Term Deposit Scheme can be opened with minimum
deposit of Rs.______and thereafter in multiples of ______ with a maximum amount of Rs.______.
A Rs.1,000/- ; Re.1/- ; B Rs.10,000/- ; Re.1/- ; C Rs.10,000/- ; Re.1/- ;
Rs.1.00 Crore Rs.1.00 Crore Rs.10.00 Crore
D Rs.10,000/- ; Re.100/- E None of the avove Answer: C
; Rs.10.00 Crore
823. The account under PNB NRO Sugam Term Deposit Scheme can be opened for a minimum period
of ______and a maximum period of ______. Circular RBD (R) 15/2020 dated 30.03.2020
824. The depositor may withdraw any amount before maturity in multiples of Rs. ______ any time
according to his convenience without breaking the entire deposit and also without losing
interest on remaining part of Fixed Deposit under PNB NRO Sugam Term Deposit Scheme.
A Rs. 100/- B Rs. 1,000/- C Rs. 5,000/-
282

825. A Mini Deposit Account may be opened with an initial deposit of Rs. ______ in cash and
thereafter in multiples of Rs.______ which may be deposited either directly or through Mini
Page
Deposit Collector. Circular RBD (R) 14/2020 dated 30.03.2020

A Rs. 10/- ; Rs. 10/- B Rs. 100/- ; Rs. 10/- C Rs. 100/- ; Rs. 100/-
D Rs. 1000/- ; Rs. 100/- E None of the avove Answer: A
826. The upper ceiling for deposit per account per month in Mini Deposit Account is Rs.______.
A Rs.5000/- B Rs.10000/- C Rs.20000/-
827. A Mini deposit account may be opened for either all or for any period of ______. Circular RBD (R)
14/2020 dated 30.03.2020
828. Each Mini Deposit Collector will be required to deposit Rs. ______ under Term Deposits in cash
as security and also provide a surety good for Rs.______. Circular RBD (R) 14/2020 dated
30.03.2020
A Rs. 5000/- ; Rs. 5000/- B Rs. 5000/- ; Rs. 10000/- C Rs. 10000/- ; Rs.
10000/-
D Rs. 50000/- ; Rs.2 E None of the avove Answer: A
5000/-
829. It is also mandatory for every Mini Deposit Collector, (who has opted for the revised Mini Deposit
Scheme based on ICT based HHT model) to maintain a SF account with minimum balance of Rs.
______ for this purpose. This amount is over and above the security deposit to facilitate online
credit to Mini Deposit account holders and all the collection made by MDCs will be deposited in
this account. Circular RBD (R) 14/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Rs.5000/- B Rs.10000/- C Rs.20000/-
830. Which of the following statement/s is/are incorrect in respect of Mini Deposit Scheme? Circular
RBD (R) 14/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A Fresh accounts will be B The Scheme shall not be C No new Mini Depositor
opened in those branches introduced at any other Collector can be
only where the scheme is branch other than those, appointed.
in operation. where it is already
implemented /operational.
D No cheque will be E None of the above Answer: E
accepted for collection in
mini deposit account
831. Which of the following customer is not eligible to open an account under Mini Deposit Scheme?
A An Individual B One or more persons, C An individual minor, under
jointly, payable to either or guardianship of his/her
survivor natural guardian
D An illiterate person E None of the above Answer: E
832. Our bank has approved a system level check for limit on transaction amount and incorporated
in the CBS. Now Cash Receipt transaction in Customer Accounts will be restrcted to Rs. ______
in Rural/Semi Urban and Rs. ______ in Urban/Metro branches other than specialized offices.
Circular OD_GB 03/2020 dated 28.10.2020
A 1 Crores ; 2 Crores B 2 Crores ; 2 Crores C 1 Crores ; 5 Crores
D 2 Crores ; 5 Crores E None of the above Answer: D
in the CBS. Now Cash Payment transaction in Customer Accounts will be restrcted to Rs. ______
in Rural/Semi Urban and Rs. ______ in Urban/Metro branches other than specialized offices.
A 1 Crores ; 2 Crores B 2 Crores ; 2 Crores C 1 Crores ; 5 Crores
D 2 Crores ; 5 Crores E None of the above Answer: C
283
in the CBS. Now Transfer transaction in Customer Accounts will be restrcted to Rs. ______ in
Rural/Semi Urban and Rs. ______ in Urban/Metro branches other than specialized offices.
Page

A 50 Crore ; 100 Crores B 50 Crore ; 200 Crores C 50 Crore ; 500 Crores

D 100 Crore ; 500 Crores E None of the above Answer: C
835. Now Cash Receipt transaction in RIT/CRA/Office Accounts will be restrcted to Rs. ______ in
A 1 Crores ; 2 Crores B 2 Crores ; 5 Crores C 2 Crore ; 10 Crores
D 5 Crore ; 10 Crores E None of the above Answer: D
836. Now Cash Payment transaction in RIT/CRA/Office Accounts will be restrcted to Rs. ______ in
D 5 Crore ; 10 Crores E None of the above Answer: B
837. Now Transfer transaction in Office Accounts will be restrcted to Rs. ______ in Rural/Semi Urban
and Rs. ______ in Urban/Metro branches other than specialized offices. Circular OD_GB 03/2020
dated 28.10.2020
A 100 Crore ; 200 Crores B 100 Crore ; 500 Crores C 200 Crore ; 500 Crores
D 200 Crore ; 1000 Crores E None of the above Answer: C
838. A DD can be issued maximum upto Rs. ______ in Rural/Semi Urban and Rs. ______ in
Urban/Metro branches other than specialized offices. Circular OD_GB 03/2020 dated 28.10.2020
D 5 Crore ; 10 Crores E None of the above Answer: A
839. Bank Guarantee can be issued maximum upto Rs. ______ in Rural/Semi Urban and Rs. ______
in Urban/Metro branches other than specialized offices. Circular OD_GB 03/2020 dated 28.10.2020
D 5 Crore ; 10 Crores E None of the above Answer: A
840. Letter of Credit can be issued maximum upto Rs. ______ in Rural/Semi Urban and Rs. ______ in
Urban/Metro branches other than specialized offices. Circular OD_GB 03/2020 dated 28.10.2020
D 2 Crore ; 20 Crores E None of the above Answer: B
841. In terms of extant RBI guidelines, risk categorisation of accounts has to be periodically reviewed
at least once in ______. Circular KYC 07/2020 dated 12.10.2020
A six months B twelve months C eighteen months
D twenty four months E None of the avove Answer: A
842. In our bank risk category of all customers is reviewed on ______ basis through AML system on
the basis of certain pre-defined dynamic parameters Circular KYC 07/2020 dated 12.10.2020
A monthly B quarterly C half yearly
D yearly E None of the avove Answer: B
843. In case of existing business relationship which is not KYC compliant or KYC has not been
updated as per prescribed periodicity, Bank shall temporarily cease operations in the account.
However, before temporarily ceasing operations for an account, the Bank shall give the client
two notices of 10 days each and within ______ days period the account should be made KYC
compliant otherwise operations in the account shall be frozen. Circular KYC 05/2020 dated
21.08.2020
844. For opening of account and where the OVD furnished by customer does not have updated
address, customer has to submit additional documents with updated address, which are deemed
to be OVDs for limited purpose of proof of address. However, customer has to submit OVD with
current address within a period of ______ months failing which operations in his account may be
restricted. Circular KYC 05/2020 dated 21.08.2020
284

845. To monitor the accounts opened with OVDs without updated current address, a system has been
implemented in CBS to generate alert/ pop-up message on exceeding total deposit of Rs.______
Page
in a month in such accounts. Circular KYC 05/2020 dated 21.08.2020

A Rs.0.50 lakh B Rs.1 lakh C Rs.2 lakh

D Rs.2.50 lakh E None of the avove Answer: C
846. Whenever any Draft is presented for revalidation, the branches must revalidate it through CBS
system, irrespective of the amount of Draft. However, in case of stale Drafts up to an amount of
Rs.______, system will not restrict the payment if it is not revalidated through the system.
A Rs.2000/- B Rs.2500/- C Rs.5000/-
847. No Draft for Rs. ______ and above be issued against cash, non- compliance of which shall
amount to contravention of the RBI guidelines. Guidelines also prohibit payment of Draft of Rs.
______ and above in cash. Circular IAD 30/2020 dated 15.10.2020
A Rs. 25, 000/- ; Rs. B Rs. 50, 000/- ; Rs. C Rs. 50, 000/- ; Rs.
20,000/- 20,000/- 25,000/-
D Rs. 1,00, 000/- ; Rs. E None of the above Answer: B
50,000/-
848. Drafts for an amount up to and inclusive of Rs. ______ are signed singly by a GBPA holder and
Drafts above this amount should be issued only under the signatures of two officials under their
respective GBPA. Circular IAD 30/2020 dated 15.10.2020
A Rs. 20,000/- B Rs. 25,000/- C Rs. 50,000/-
849. SWO A will enter and issue system generated cash receipt upto the receipt of Rs. ______ and
SWO B will enter and issue system generated cash receipt upto the receipt of Rs. ______.
A Rs. 10000/- ; Rs. B Rs. 10000/- ; Rs. C Rs. 15000/- ; Rs.
20000/- 25000/- 20000/-
D Rs. 15000/- ; Rs. E None of the above Answer: D
25000/-
850. Any excess in the cash balance must be credited to sundries account and lying unclaimed for
more than ______ months will be transferred to miscellaneous income account.. Circular IAD
19/2020 dated 31.05.2020
A three months B four months C six months
D twelve months E None of the above Answer: C
851. Remittance exceeding Rs ______ would be made only through the Cash Van / customised Cash
Van (CCV). Circular IAD 19/2020 dated 31.05.2020
D Rs 50 lakh E None of the above Answer: B
852. Where no transport is available (Bank's or hired) and the distance between the sending office
and the receiving office is short, the cash remittance may be sent on foot. In such case,
remittance should not exceed Rs. ______. Circular IAD 19/2020 dated 31.05.2020
A Rs. One lac B Rs. Two lac C Rs. Three lac
D Rs. Five lac E None of the above Answer: B
853. Dual keys for the container may be used for cash remittances exceeding Rs.______ and in such
cases the two keys should be kept and carried by the SWO and the officer accompanying the
remittances respectively. Circular IAD 19/2020 dated 31.05.2020
854. For the remittance of cash above Rs ______ but not exceeding Rs 5 crores, Composition of
Escort will be minimum one clerk and one officer + two guards with fire arms irrespective of
whether the insured own vehicle is used or private vehicle is engaged Circular IAD 19/2020 dated
31.05.2020
A Rs 25 lakh B Rs 50 lakh C Rs 1 crores
285
D Rs 2 crores E None of the above Answer: B

855. In view of reporting of large number fraud cases relating to Gold Loan, bank has decided to
introduce ______ physical verification of Gold Packets along with security forms, articles in safe
Page
custody and cash. Circular IAD 05/2020 dated 15.02.2020

A Monthly B Bi monthly C Quarterly

D Half yearly E Yearly Answer: A
856. On ______ basis the concerned branch official has to check the balance of Banker’s Account
through internet banking provided by the bank where the branch is maintaining a current
account and prepare a reconciliation statement Circular IAD 03/2020 dated 08.01.2020
A Weekly B Monthly C Bi monthly
D Quarterly E None of the above Answer: A
857. All cheques of Rs ______ & above, (drawn in our customer’s accounts) received across the
counter or through Clearing would invariably be processed through the “Magnifying Glass and
the UV Lamp” by the concerned official before processing / passing the cheques. Circular FRMD
40/2020 dated 08.05.2020
A Rs. 50,000/- B Rs 1,00,000/- C Rs 1,50,000/-
D Rs 2,00,000/- E None of the above Answer: B
858. Telephonic confirmation should be obtained while processing cheques of Rs ______ & above for
transfer/cash payment transaction and irrespective of amount in case of suspicion. Circular
FRMD 40/2020 dated 08.05.2020
A Rs. 50,000/- B Rs 1,00,000/- C Rs 1,50,000/-
D Rs 2,00,000/- E None of the above Answer: D
859. All cheques of ₹ ______ and above be examined under UV lamp cum magnifying glass. Circular
FRMD 04/2020 dated 03.01.2020
D Rs. 5.00 lac E None of the above Answer: A
860. Telephonic confirmation may be obtained from the account holder for cheques of Rs. ______
and above, which are presented in physical form at counter & in clearing also at non-CTS
Centers and a noting to this effect be made invariably on the back of cheque leaf. Circular FRMD
04/2020 dated 03.01.2020
D Rs. 5.00 lac E None of the above Answer: B
861. Regarding cheques presented in CTS clearing, the telephonic confirmation may be obtained for
cheques of Rs. ______ and above, before passing. Circular FRMD 04/2020 dated 03.01.2020
D Rs. 5.00 lac E None of the above Answer: D
862. Customers who receive on an average ______ NEFT/ RTGS receipts or more in their account on
a daily basis from different centers and business locations covering large area can be offered e-
CMS ( CMS Product) System. Circular DBD 37/2020 dated 26.10.2020
A 50 B 100 C 150
863. The default limit of PNB ONE is Rs. 2 lakh, which customer can increase to Rs. ______. Circular
DBD 26/2020 dated 23.07.2020
A Rs. 2.5 lakh B Rs. 3 lakh C Rs. 5 lakh
864. limit of PNB ONE for Quick (Adhoc) Transfer within PNB (without adding beneficiary) is Rs.
______. Circular DBD 26/2020 dated 23.07.2020
865. limit of PNB ONE for Third Party Transfer and NEFT or RTGS Transaction is Rs. ______. Circular
DBD 26/2020 dated 23.07.2020
866. limit of PNB ONE for UPI Transaction, Mobile/DTH Recharge and Bill Payments is Rs. ______.
286
A Rs. 50,000 B Rs. 1,00,000 C Rs. 1,50,000

D Rs.2, 50,000 E None of the above Answer: A
867. Only Officer who is below the age of ______ years as on 31.3.2020 to be identified as Digital
Page
Ambassador at the branch and circle office. In case there is no officer below this age at the

branch, then the youngest officer be identified to act as Digital Ambassador. Circular DBD
24/2020 dated 16.06.2020
868. For PMJDY Debit Cards issued in PMJDY Accounts opened after 28-08-2018, the insurance
coverage has been enhanced from Rs. 1 lac to Rs. ______. Circular DBD 16/2020 dated 31.03.2020
A Rs. 1 lac B Rs. 2 lacs C Rs. 3 lacs
D Rs. 5 lacs E None of the above Answer: B
869. Under RuPay Insurance Program RuPay Premium Cards for FY - 2020-21, Sum insured will be
upto Rs. ______ for RuPay Platinum cardholders and upto Rs. 10 lakh for RuPay Select
cardholders. Circular DBD 16/2020 dated 31.03.2020
A Rs. 1 lakhs ; Rs. 5 lakh B Rs. 2 lakhs ; Rs. 5 lakh C Rs. 1 lakhs ; Rs. 10
lakh
D Rs. 2 lakhs ; Rs. 10 lakh E None of the above Answer: D
870. Benefits of Insurance will be available to the Cardholders who have performed minimum one
successful RuPay Card induced financial transaction at any POS/ecom,
both Intra and Inter-bank i.e. on-us or off us within ______ days prior to date of accident
including accident date of RuPay Cardholder Circular DBD 16/2020 dated 31.03.2020
871. Under RuPay Insurance Program RuPay Premium Cards for FY - 2020-21, The claims will be
settled in ______ days from the date of receiving the complete document set by TATA AIG
General Insurance Co. Ltd Circular DBD 16/2020 dated 31.03.2020
D fifteen working days E None of the above Answer: C
872. Under RuPay Insurance Program RuPay Premium Cards for FY - 2020-21,The intimationabout
claim should be immediate to TATA AIG General Insurance Co. Ltd or Bank but not later than
______ days of the date of accident. Circular DBD 16/2020 dated 31.03.2020
873. Under RuPay Insurance Program RuPay Premium Cards for FY - 2020-21, The claim documents
must be submitted within ______ days from the date of claim intimation. Circular DBD 16/2020
dated 31.03.2020
874. While putting up an Onsite ATM, it be ensured that it has potential to reach of at least ______ hits
(exception of lower hits of 100+ may be considered for semi-urban/rural areas) on an average per
day, within 6 months of installation. Circular DBD 10/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A 50 B 100 C 150
875. Installation of Offsite ATMs should be considered only if the site has a potential of at least
______ hits a day on an average. Circular DBD 10/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A 50 B 100 C 150
876. ATMs more than one year old at the end of the financial year and are having average daily hits
below ______ in the mentioned financial year are considered as Unviable ATMs. Circular DBD
10/2020 dated 30.03.2020
A 50 B 100 C 150
877. At the request of primary credit card holder, maximum ______ add-on cards can be issued only
to spouse, mother, father, major son and daughter (unmarried) of the primary cardholder.
287

A 0ne B two C three
D four E None of the above Answer: B
Page
878. Joining fee for primary Rupay Platinum/Select Credit Card will be Rs. _____. Circular CCD

03/2020 dated 31.03.2020

A Rs.100/- B Rs.200/- C Rs.300/-
879. Minimum joining fee for Corporate Credit Card with corporate liability will be Rs. ______ and for
Corporate Credit Card with individual liability, it will be Rs. ______. Circular CCD 03/2020 dated
31.03.2020
A Rs.1,000/- ; Rs.1,000/- B Rs.2,000/- ; Rs.2,000/- C Rs.2,000/- ; Rs.1,000/-
D Rs.2,500/- ; Rs.1,000/- E None of the above Answer: C
880. Minimum Annual fee for Corporate Credit Card with corporate liability will be Rs. ______ and for
Corporate Credit Card with individual liability, it will be Rs. ______. Circular CCD 03/2020 dated
31.03.2020
D Rs.2,500/- ; Rs.1,000/- E None of the above Answer: C
881. Late payment fee for credit card against FD will be 30% of minimum amount due subject to Min.
Rs.______& Max. Rs.______ per billing cycle. Circular CCD 03/2020 dated 31.03.2020
A Rs.100 ; Rs.200 B Rs.200 ; Rs.300 C Rs.200 ; Rs.400
D Rs.200 ; Rs.500 E None of the above Answer: D
882. Free interest period under all variants of Credit Card will be ______ only on retail purchases and
if the previous month’s balance has been cleared in full. Circular CCD 03/2020 dated 31.03.2020
A 10-30 days B 20-30 days C 10-50 days
D 20-50 days E None of the above Answer: D
883. Branches can inquire Credit Card details in CBS CUSTSRCH menu basis on ______. Circular CCD
02/2020 dated 15.01.2020
A Only Mobile Numbe B Only Identity Number C Only CBS Account
Number
D Only CBS customer Id E Any one of the above Answer: E
884. Under Floating Rate Savings Bonds, 2020 (Taxable), The branches shall issue a COH (Certificate
of Holding) to the subscriber/s, within ______ days from the date of tender of application. Circular
GBD 63/2020 dated 07.10.2020
885. Under Floating Rate Savings Bonds, 2020 (Taxable),The interest rate will be reset every ______
months/year. Circular GBD 63/2020 dated 07.10.2020
A month B three months C six month
D year E None of the above Answer: C
886. Under Floating Rate Savings Bonds, 2020 (Taxable), ______% of interest due and payable for the
last six months period of the holding period shall be recovered as penalty from the investor for
premature encashment. Circular GBD 63/2020 dated 07.10.2020
A 10% B 20% C 25%
887. The subscription received under Floating Rate Savings Bonds, 2020 (Taxable) is to be remitted
to RBI, Central Account Section, Nagpur within ______ days of the realization of the
cheque/draft/receipt of funds, through Link Cell Nagpur. Circular GBD 63/2020 dated 07.10.2020
888. Banks shall be paid Turnover Commission @ ______ on interest paid, principal amount repaid in
respect of the accounts held under BLA Scheme. Circular GBD 63/2020 dated 07.10.2020
A 5.50 paise per ₹ 100 B 6.50 paise per ₹ 100 C 7.50 paise per ₹ 100
D 8.50 paise per ₹ 100 E None of the above Answer: B
889. Under Floating Rate Savings Bonds, 2020 (Taxable), Period of preservation of Applications for
Bond Ledger Accounts will be ______ years from the date of repayment of the Bonds covered by
288
the form. Circular GBD 63/2020 dated 07.10.2020

Page
890. Under Floating Rate Savings Bonds, 2020 (Taxable), Period of preservation of Forms of

nomination/cancellation, Register of Nominations, Advices regarding acknowledgement of

registration of nomination/ cancellation of nomination etc. Will be ______ years from the date of
repayment of the Bonds covered by the form. Circular GBD 63/2020 dated 07.10.2020
891. Under online opening of NPS accounts, after filling all the details a PRAN will be immediately
generated after making a successful payment of minimum of Rs. ______ to the subscriber
account Circular GBD 56/2020 dated 04.09.2020
A Rs. 100/- B Rs. 500/- C Rs. 100/-
892. Menu option in CBS for tag surrender functionality for the customers who want to surrender
their FASTag is ______. Circular GBD 51/2020 dated 11.08.2020
A FTAGMBR B FTAGMRB C FTAGBRM
D FTAGRBM E None of the above Answer: A
893. Subscription to the Floating Rate Savings Bonds 2020 (Taxable) scheme will be in the form of
cash upto Rs. ______ only/drafts/cheques or any electronic mode acceptable to the Receiving
Office. Circular GBD 35/2020 dated 30.06.2020
A Rs. 10,000/- B Rs. 20,000/- C Rs. 25,000/-
894. Maturity period under Floating Rate Savings Bonds 2020 (Taxable) scheme will be ______ years
from the date of issuance. Circular GBD 35/2020 dated 30.06.2020
895. Minimum limit of investment under Floating Rate Savings Bonds 2020 (Taxable) scheme will be
Rs. ______ and in multiples of Rs. ______. Maximum limit under this scheme will be Rs. ______.
A Rs. 500/- ; Rs. 500/- ; B Rs. 1000/- ; Rs. 1000/- C Rs. 500/- ; Rs. 500/- ;
Rs. 50000/- ; Rs. 100000/- No maximum limit.
D Rs. 1000/- ; Rs. 1000/- E None of the above Answer: D
; No maximum limit.
896. Facility under Floating Rate Savings Bonds 2020 (Taxable) scheme is available to the eligible
investors after Lock in period of ______ years in the age bracket of 80 years and above, between
70 to 80 years and 60 to 70 years respectively Circular GBD 35/2020 dated 30.06.2020
A 3, 4, and 5 years B 4, 5, and 6 years C 5, 6, and 7 years
D 6, 7, and 8 years E None of the above Answer: B
897. The Sukanya Samriddhi Account may be opened by one of the guardian in the name of a girl
child, who has not attained the age of ______ as on the date of opening of the account. Circular
GBD 31/2020 dated 01.06.2020
A five years B seven years C eight years
D ten years E None of the above Answer: D
898. The Sukanya Samriddhi account may be opened with a minimum initial deposit of Rs. ______
and in multiples of Rs. ______. Circular GBD 31/2020 dated 01.06.2020
D Rs. 500/- ; Rs. 100/- E None of the above Answer: C
899. Subsequent deposits in Sukanya Samriddhi account shall be in multiples of Rs. _____ subject to
the condition that a minimum of Rs. ______ shall be made as deposit in a financial year in one
account. Circular GBD 31/2020 dated 01.06.2020
D Rs. 100/- ; Rs. 1000/- E None of the above Answer: A
900. The total amount deposited in a Sukanya Samriddhi account shall not exceed Rs. ______ in a
financial year Circular GBD 31/2020 dated 01.06.2020
289
A Rs. 100,000/- B Rs. 150,000/- C Rs. 250,000/-

901. Deposits can be made in the Sukanya Samriddhi account till the completion of a period of
Page
______ years from the date of opening of the account. Circular GBD 31/2020 dated 01.06.2020


902. Sukanya Samriddhi Account under default can be regularized any time till completion of a period
of fifteen years from the date of opening of account on payment of a penalty of Rs. ______ for
each year of default along with the minimum annual deposit in respect of the defaulted years.
A Rs. 20/- B Rs. 25/- C Rs. 50/-
903. The Sukanya Samriddhi Account shall be operated by the guardian till the account holder attains
the age of ______ years. Circular GBD 31/2020 dated 01.06.2020
D 21 years E None of the above Answer: Y
904. Interest for the period between the date of death of the Sukanya Samriddhi Account holder and
date of closure of the account shall be paid at the rate applicable on ______ for the balance held
in the account/legal heirs, as the case may be. Circular GBD 31/2020 dated 01.06.2020
A Banks' Savings Account B Post Office Savings C Banks' Term Deposit
Account Account
D Post Office Term Deposit E None of the above Answer: B
Account
905. No premature closure of an account shall be made before completion of ______ years from the
date of opening of the Sukanya Samriddhi Account. Circular GBD 31/2020 dated 01.06.2020
906. If, after the opening of Sukanya Samriddhi Account, the Account holder becomes a non-citizen
or non-resident of India, intimation to this effect shall be given by the guardian or the Account
holder to the Bank, within a period of ______ from the date of such status of the Account
holder’s citizenship or resident status. Circular GBD 31/2020 dated 01.06.2020
A 10 days B 15 days C one month
D No such criteria E None of the above Answer: C
907. Under Sukanya Samriddhi Account, a duplicate passbook may be subsequently issued in the
event of loss, mutilation, etc., of the original passbook, on the written request of the guardian or
the Account holder, on payment of a fee of ______ and such fees shall be creditable to the
Government account. Circular GBD 31/2020 dated 01.06.2020
A Rs. 20/- B Rs. 25/- C Rs. 50/-
908. The Sukanya Samriddhi Account may be transferred anywhere in India and from post offices to
Banks and vice versa and between bank to bank and branches to branches of the Bank, free of
cost on furnishing of proof of shifting of residence of either the guardian or the account holder
and otherwise, on payment of a fees of ______to the Bank or the Post Office to which the
transfer is made. Circular GBD 31/2020 dated 01.06.2020
A Rs. 20/- B Rs. 25/- C Rs. 50/-
909. The Sukanya Samriddhi Account shall mature on completion of a period of ______ years from
the date of its opening. Circular GBD 31/2020 dated 01.06.2020
A ten years B fifteen years C eighteen years
D twenty-one years E None of the above Answer: D
910. Amount invested in Sukanya Samriddhi Account up to Rs.______ p.a. is exempted under Sec.
80C under option I of income tax act 1961. Circular GBD 31/2020 dated 01.06.2020
A Rs. 100,000/- B Rs. 150,000/- C Rs. 250,000/-
911. A loan can be granted against deposit of Sukanya Samriddhi Account (SSA) with margin of
290
______% of deposited amount with maximum up to Rs. ______. Circular GBD 31/2020 dated
01.06.2020
A 5% B 10% C 15%
Page
D 25% E No loan can be granted Answer: E

912. Indian Resident who has attained the age of ______ years, ______ years in case of retirement on
Superannuation ,VRS or a special voluntary scheme and for retired Defence Personal , on
attaining the age of ______ years are eligible to open an account under the Senior Citizens
Savings Scheme, 2004 (SCSS). Circular GBD 13/2020 dated 24.03.2020
D 65 years ; 60 years ; E None of the above Answer: B
55 years
913. An account under Senior Citizens Savings Scheme, 2004 (SCSS) shall be opened with a
minimum deposit of Rs. ______ or any sum in multiples of Rs. ______ not exceeding Rs. ______.
A Rs. 500/- ; Rs. 1000/- ; B Rs. 1000/- ; Rs. 100/- ; C Rs. 1000/- ; Rs. 1000/-
Rs. 15 lakh Rs. 15 lakh ; Rs. 15 lakh
D Rs. 1000/- ; Rs. 1000/- E None of the above Answer: C
; Rs. 20 lakh
914. The deposit under Senior Citizens Savings Scheme, 2004 (SCSS) may be made in cash, if the
amount of deposit is up to Rs. ______. Circular GBD 13/2020 dated 24.03.2020
A Rs. 20000/- B Rs. 50000/- C Rs. 1.00 lakh
D Rs. 5.00 lakh E None of the above Answer: C
915. The deposit made at the time of opening of account under Senior Citizens Savings Scheme, 2004
(SCSS) shall be paid on or after the expiry of ______ years or after the expiry of ______ years
where account was extended from the date of the opening of the account. Circular GBD 13/2020
dated 24.03.2020
916. In case the account under Senior Citizens Savings Scheme, 2004 (SCSS) is closed after the
expiry of one year but before the expiry of two years from the date of its opening, an amount
equal to ______% of the deposit shall be deducted and the balance shall be paid to the account
holder. Circular GBD 13/2020 dated 24.03.2020
A 1.00% B 1.50% C 2.00%
917. In case the account under Senior Citizens Savings Scheme, 2004 (SCSS) is closed on or after the
expiry of two years from the date of its opening, an amount equal to ______% of the deposit shall
be deducted and the balance shall be paid to the account holder. Circular GBD 13/2020 dated
24.03.2020
A 1.00% B 1.50% C 2.00%
918. The account holder of Senior Citizens Savings Scheme, 2004 (SCSS) may extend the account for
a further period of ______ years by making an application within a period of ______ from the date
of maturity. Circular GBD 13/2020 dated 24.03.2020
A three years ; one year B three years ; six months C five years ; one year
D five years ; six months E None of the above Answer: A
919. Investment in SCSS qualifies for deduction under Section 80C of the Income-tax (I-T) Act under
the overall current ceiling of Rs. ______ per annum fixed for all investments under Section 80C..
A Rs. 100,000/- B Rs. 150,000/- C Rs. 250,000/-
920. Bank gets commission Rs.______ per physical transaction and Rs.______ per online transaction
in accounts under Senior Citizens Savings Scheme, 2004 (SCSS). Circular GBD 13/2020 dated
24.03.2020
A ₹ 30/- ₹ 6/- B ₹ 40/- ₹ 6/- C ₹ 40/- ₹ 9/-
291
D ₹ 50/- ₹ 10/- E None of the above Answer: C

921. As per extant bank guidelines, in case of advance to Share and stock brokers, wherever shares
are held as security (whether primary or collateral), the same shall be marked to market on
Page
______. Circular CRMD 22/2020 dated 26.10.2020

A weekly basis B Fortnightly C Monthly

D Bimonthly E None of the above Answer: A
922. In case of advance against shares/ debentures of companies approved by HO to individuals and
other borrowers, the valuation of shares held as security will be done at market price at least
______. Circular CRMD 22/2020 dated 26.10.2020
A once a week B once a fortnight C once a month
D daily E None of the above Answer: A
923. Sanctions in respect of Working Capital and Term Loan facilities shall be valid for ______ from
the date of sanction and facilities not availed within this period should be treated as lapsed.
Circular CRMD 11/2020 dated 15.09.2020
924. Unless a lapsed sanction is got revalidated by the Competent Authority within a maximum
period of ______ from the date of sanction, no facility should be released. Circular CRMD 11/2020
dated 15.09.2020
925. Details of sanctions lapsed at the level of ZOCAC-I & above will be submitted by all Zonal
Offices/ELCBs/LCBs to CRMD, on ______ basis Circular CRMD 11/2020 dated 15.09.2020
A monthly B Quarterly C half yearly
D yearly E None of the above Answer: C
926. For limits below Rs. ______, Bank shall solely rely upon the valuation reports of Bank’s
approved valuers irrespective of the credit limit and value of the mortgaged property. The
concept of BM valuation has been done away with. Circular CRMD 05/2020 dated 02.09.2020
927. As regards borrowal accounts having aggregate limit of Rs. 1 crore & above, valuation of IP
charged/mortgaged to the Bank will be got done from approved valuer once in______. Circular
CRMD 05/2020 dated 02.09.2020
A every year B two years C three years
928. Where the value of immovable property to be mortgaged/ charged is above Rs. ______, branches
shall get valuation of such IPs done invariably from minimum two valuers of category A or B on
the bank’s approved panel. Circular CRMD 05/2020 dated 02.09.2020
929. Payment of insurance premium on deposits to DICGC is required to be paid by the Bank in
advance every ______ on the basis of assessable deposits of the Bank. Circular FD 28/2020 dated
28.09.2020
A month B quarter C half year
D year E None of the above Answer: C
930. Minimum amount for suggesting the MOCs will be more than Rs ______ per entry Circular FD
26/2020 dated 21.09.2020
A Rs 5000/- B Rs 10000/- C Rs 20000/-
931. Concurrent Auditors / Statutory Auditors / CO will not suggest any change (to the Finance
Division) of single entry up to Rs 10000/- through MOCs but they will continue to point out the
mistakes and get them rectified. Circular FD 26/2020 dated 21.09.2020
A Rs 5000/- B Rs 10000/- C Rs 20000/-
932. Gratuity received by an employee on his retirement or on his becoming incapacitated prior to
292
such retirement or on termination of his employment or by his legal heir(s) on his death, is
exempt from Income Tax to the extent of maximum of Rs. ______. Circular FD 24/2020 dated
31.08.2020
Page
A Rs 10,00,000/- B Rs 15,00,000/- C Rs 20,00,000/-


933. Encashment of Privilege Leave is exempt from tax when received at the time of retirement
whether on superannuation or otherwise to the extent of maximum of Rs. ______. Circular FD
24/2020 dated 31.08.2020
A Rs.1,00,000/- B Rs.2,00,000/- C Rs.3,00,000/-
934. In relation to deduction of Tax at source on salary, the loss, if any, under the head “Income from
House Property” shall be set off with the income under any other heads of income to the extent
of Rs.______. Circular FD 24/2020 dated 31.08.2020
A Rs.1,00,000/- B Rs.2,00,000/- C Rs.3,00,000/-
935. In relation to deduction of Tax at source on salary, Section 80C provides deduction in respect of
specified qualifying amounts paid or deposited by the employee in the financial year and such
deduction shall not exceed Rs.______. Circular FD 24/2020 dated 31.08.2020
936. In relation to deduction of Tax at source on salary, an assessee shall be allowed an additional
deduction of Rs. ______ for any additional contribution under NPS in computation of his total
income and the ceiling of Rs. 1,50,000 as prescribed under section 80CCE does not apply for the
said additional contribution. Circular FD 24/2020 dated 31.08.2020
A Rs. 50000/- B Rs. 100000/- C Rs.150000/-
937. In relation to deduction of Tax at source on salary, Section 80 D provides deduction for medi-
claim premium/ preventive health check up paid of Rs.______ in the case of senior citizen and of
Rs.______ for other than senior citizen. Circular FD 24/2020 dated 31.08.2020
A Rs.25,000/- ; B Rs.50,000/- ; C Rs.1,00,000/- ;
Rs.25,000/- Rs.25,000/- Rs.25,000/-
D Rs.1,00,000/- ; E None of the above Answer: B
Rs.50,000/-
938. In relation to deduction of Tax at source on salary, the whole of the amount paid on account of
medical expenditure incurred on the health of person or his/her parent(s), who is senior citizen
and mediclaim insurance is not paid on the health of such person(s), the maximum eligible
amount of deduction is of Rs.______. Circular FD 24/2020 dated 31.08.2020
A Rs. 50000/- B Rs. 100000/- C Rs.150000/-
939. In relation to deduction of Tax at source on salary, A deduction upto Rs.______ is allowable on
account of preventive “Health Check-up” of self, spouse, parents or dependent children within
the overall limits underSection 80-D. Circular FD 24/2020 dated 31.08.2020
A Rs 5000/- B Rs 10000/- C Rs 15000/-
940. Time limit to get the information under RTI Act 2005 is ______ and in case information
concerning the life and liberty of a person it will be ______. Circular LAW 11/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 30 days ; 24 hours B 30 days ; 48 hours C 15 days ; 24hours
D 45 days ; 48 hours E None of the avove Answer: B
941. As per Section. 20(1) of the RTI Act, 2005 every CPIO will be liable for fine of Rs. ______ per day,
up to a maximum of Rs. ______, for not accepting an application, delaying information release
without reasonable cause, knowingly giving incomplete, incorrect, misleading information etc.
A Rs. 200 ; Rs. 25,000/- B Rs. 250 ; Rs. 25,000/- C Rs. 200 ; Rs. 50,000/-
D Rs. 250 ; Rs. 50,000/- E None of the avove Answer: B
942. The appeal under the RTI Act, 2005 should be disposed off within ______ days of receipt of the
293
appeal. In exception cases, the Appellate Authority may take ______ days for its disposal.
Page

943. The first appeal to the first appellate authority may be made within______ days from the date of
expiry of the prescribed period or from the receipt of communication from the CPIO. Circular LAW
11/2020 dated 26.03.2020
944. Amount of staff housing loan is to be repaid in maximum ______ and the loan amount (Principal
+ Interest) to be liquidated maximum up to the age of ______years for pension optees &/or
having other regular permanent income and in case of others maximum permissible age is up to
______ years or superannuation, whichever is earlier. Circular HRDD 838/2020 dated 04.06.2020
; 65 years ; 65 years ; 60 years
D 360 months ; 75 years E None of the above Answer: D
; 60 years
945. VRS optees staff may avail the benefit of extended repayment period of 360 months under
housing loan , who have completed ______ years age & minimum ______ years service. Circular
HRDD 838/2020 dated o4. 06.2020
A 50 years ; 20 years B 5o years ; 25 years C 55 years ; 20 years
946. In case of Conveyance Loan to staff, repayment period is permitted upto the age of ______ years
in case of pension optees and within overall repayment period, whichever is earlier. In other
cases, date of superannuation and within overall repayment period, whichever is earlier. Circular
HRDD 838/2020 dated 04. 06.2020
947. As per Punjab National Bank (Officers‘) Service Regulations, 1979, wholly dependent shall mean
such member of the family having an income not exceeding Rs.______ per month Circular HRDD
834/2020 dated 22. 06.2020
A Rs.10,000 B Rs.15,000 C Rs.20,000
D Rs.25,000 E None of the above Answer: A
948. Under the Policy of loan to retirees for payment of medical insurance premium, Net take home
pension after all deductions including the installment of proposed loan should not be less than
______% of Gross Pension. Circular HRDD 823/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 30% B 40% C 50%
949. Employees with total Service of ______ months and above are eligible under the Scheme for
Grant of Clean Overdraft/ Demand Loan Facility to Staff Members. Circular HRDD 822/2020 dated
27.03.2020
950. Demand Loan under the Scheme for Grant of Clean Overdraft/ Demand Loan Facility to Staff
Members will be repaid in ______ EMIs or remaining service period, whichever is earlier.. Circular
HRDD 822/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 60 EMIs B 72 EMIs C 84 EMIs
D 120 EMIs E None of the above Answer: D
951. Net take home salary under the Scheme for Grant of Clean Overdraft/ Demand Loan Facility to
Staff Members will be ______% of Gross Income for Income up to Rs.50000/- and ______% of
Gross Income for Income above Rs.50000/- after taking into account all deductions including
notional interest of sanctioned Staff Clean OD Limit. Circular HRDD 822/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 60% ; 40% B 50% ; 40% C 50% ; 30%
952. Under the Scheme for Grant of Clean Overdraft/ Demand Loan Facility to Staff Members, The
294
Subordinate employees whose total service in the Bank is 6 months & above and less than 3
years shall be eligible for limit of Rs. ______. Circular HRDD 822/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A Rs.1.00 Lac B Rs.2.00 Lac C Rs.3.00 Lac
Page
D Rs.4.00 Lac E None of the above Answer: A

Subordinate employees whose total service in the Bank is 3 years and above and less than 12
years shall be eligible for the limit of Rs. ______. Circular HRDD 822/2020 dated 27.03.2020
D Rs.4.00 Lac E None of the above Answer: B
Subordinate employees whose total service in the Bank is 12 years & above shall be eligible for
the enhanced limit of Rs. ______. Circular HRDD 822/2020 dated 27.03.2020
D Rs.4.00 Lac E None of the above Answer: C
Clerks employees whose total service in the Bank is 6 months & above and less than 3 years
shall be eligible for the limit of Rs. ______. Circular HRDD 822/2020 dated 27.03.2020
D Rs.4.00 Lac E None of the above Answer: B
Clerks employees whose total service in the Bank is 3 years and above and less than 12 years
D Rs.4.00 Lac E None of the above Answer: D
Clerks employees whose total service in the Bank is 12 years & above shall be eligible for the
enhanced limit of Rs. ______. Circular HRDD 822/2020 dated 27.03.2020
958. Under the Scheme for Grant of Clean Overdraft/ Demand Loan Facility to Staff Members, Officers
up to Scale IV whose total service in the Bank is 6 months & above and less than 3 years shall be
eligible for the limit of Rs. ______. Circular HRDD 822/2020 dated 27.03.2020
up to Scale IV whose total service in the Bank is 3 years and above and less than 12 years shall
be eligible for the limit of Rs. ______. Circular HRDD 822/2020 dated 27.03.2020
up to Scale IV whose total service in the Bank is 12 years & above shall be eligible for the
in Scale V & above whose total service in the Bank is 6 months & above and less than 3 years
in Scale V & above whose total service in the Bank is 3 years and above and less than 12 years
295
in Scale V & above whose total service in the Bank is 12 years & above shall be eligible for the
Page

964. In case of new car under the Scheme for Conveyance Loan to Staff Members, repayment period
will be ______ or expiry date of Registration, whichever is earlier. Circular HRDD 821/2020 dated
27.03.2020
965. Two Wheeler Loan under the Scheme for Conveyance Loan to Staff Members will be repaid in
______. Circular HRDD 821/2020 dated 27.03.2020
966. Maximum permissible age for repayment under the Scheme for Conveyance Loan to Staff
Members will be ______ years in case of pension optees and within overall repayment period,
whichever is earlier. In other cases, date of superannuation and within overall repayment period,
whichever is earlier. Circular HRDD 821/2020 dated 27.03.2020
967. Margin under the Scheme for Conveyance Loan to Staff Members for New car/Old car/Two
Wheeler will be ______%. Circular HRDD 821/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A Nil B 5% C 10%
968. Second hand Car loan under the Scheme for Conveyance Loan to Staff Members will be
______% of the valuation arrived at after providing depreciation of ______% p.a. on the current
invoice value of the vehicle on WDV basis or the purchase price subject to a maximum of Rs.10
Lac for Officers / Rs.7.00 lacs for Clerks, whichever is less. Circular HRDD 821/2020 dated
27.03.2020
A 95% ; 10% B 90% ; 10% C 85% ; 15%
969. Net take home salary under the Scheme for Conveyance Loan to Staff Members will be ______%
of Gross Income for Income up to Rs.50000/- and ______% of Gross Income for Income above
Rs.50000/- after taking into account all deductions including notional interest of sanctioned Staff
Clean OD Limit. Circular HRDD 821/2020 dated 27.03.2020
A 60% ; 40% B 50% ; 40% C 50% ; 30%
970. Under the Scheme for Conveyance Loan to Staff Members, Second hand vehicle to be allowed
only for cars and not for two wheelers and the same may be allowed to both officers and clerks.
However, the Car should not be more than ______ years old. Circular HRDD 821/2020 dated
27.03.2020
971. Under the Scheme for Conveyance Loan to Staff Members, The employees will be eligible for
availment of new loan after fully adjusting the previous loan, but not earlier than ______ years
from the date of availment of previous loan. Circular HRDD 821/2020 dated 27.03.2020
972. Under the Scheme for Conveyance Loan to Staff Members, Maximum amount of Car loan
(new/old) to Clerks will be Rs. ______. Circular HRDD 821/2020 dated 27.03.2020
973. Under the Scheme for Conveyance Loan to Staff Members, Maximum amount of Car loan
(new/old) to Officers will be Rs. ______. Circular HRDD 821/2020 dated 27.03.2020
296
974. Under the Scheme for Conveyance Loan to Staff Members, Maximum amount of Two-Wheeler
loan will be Rs. ______. Circular HRDD 821/2020 dated 27.03.2020
Page

975. Our bank has decided to allow Medical aid to each officer including his or her family @ ______of
December month’s Basic Pay of previous year with a minimum of Rs. 8000/- Per Annum to
Officers in JMG & MMG Scales and Rs.9050/- Per Annum to Officers in SMG & TEG Scales on
declaration basis. Circular HRMD 495/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 30% B 40% C 50%
976. For award staff, the reimbursement of medical expenses under medical aid scheme as per the
provisions of Bi-partite settlement will be restricted to an amount of ______per annum. Circular
HRMD 495/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A Rs.2000/- B Rs.2100/- C Rs.2200/-
977. The limit for reimbursement of expenditure for medical check up once in a year for self and
spouse is Rs. ______ for Officers in Scale VIII and Rs. ______ for Officers in Scale VI & VII.
A Rs 8000/- ; Rs 5000/- B Rs 8000/- ; Rs 6000/- C Rs 10000/- ; Rs 5000/-
D Rs 10000/- ; Rs 6000/- E None of the above Answer: B
spouse is Rs. ______ for Officers in Scale IV & V and Rs. ______ for Officers upto Scale III.
A Rs 4500/- ; Rs 3500/- B Rs 5000/- ; Rs 3500/- C Rs 4500/- ; Rs 4000/-
D Rs 5000/- ; Rs 4000/- E None of the above Answer: A
spouse is Rs. ______ for Award Staff. Circular HRMD 495/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A Rs 2000/- B Rs 2500/- C Rs 3000/-
980. Per month limit for reimbursement of expenditure for subscription to any Financial / Commercial
/Other Newspaper/Magazine is Rs. ______ for Officers in Scale VI & above and Rs. ______ for
Officers in Scale IV & V. Circular HRMD 495/2020 dated 26.03.2020
D Rs.500/- ; Rs.450/- E None of the above Answer: C
981. Per month limit for for subscription to any Financial / Commercial /Other Newspaper/Magazine is
Rs. ______ for Officers in Scale II & III and Rs. ______ for Officers in Scale-I for purchase of
Newspaper. Circular HRMD 495/2020 dated 26.03.2020
D Rs.500/- ; Rs.450/- E None of the above Answer: B
982. Per month limit for reimbursement of expenditure for purchase of Newspaper is Rs. ______ for
Clerical Staff and Rs. ______ for Subordinate Staff (including PTS). Circular HRMD 495/2020 dated
26.03.2020
D Rs.500/- ; Rs.450/- E None of the above Answer: A
983. Clerical Staff (including SA) and Subordinate Staff (including FTS) will be eligible for
reimbursement of Entertainment expenses of Rs. ______per month. Circular HRMD 495/2020
dated 26.03.2020
A Rs. 500/- B Rs. 600/- C Rs. 650/-
984. The Incumbent In-charge of Branches having achieved Budgets in at least three out of five
parameters, will be entitled for additional entertainment limit to the extent of ______ %. Circular
HRMD 495/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 10% B 15% C 20%
985. Sanction of Interest Free Festival Advance to employees would be one month’s Gross Salary of
297
the previous month, subject to maximum limits of Rs. ______ for officers in Scale I and Rs.
______ for officers in Scale II. Circular HRMD 495/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A Rs. 30000/- ; Rs. B Rs.35000/- ; Rs.50000/- C Rs.60000/- ;
Page
25000/- Rs.85000/-

D Rs.100000/- ; E None of the above Answer: B

Rs.125000/-
the previous month, subject to maximum limits of Rs. ______ for officers in Scale III and Rs.
______ for officers in Scale IV & V. Circular HRMD 495/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A Rs. 30000/- ; Rs. B Rs.35000/- ; Rs.50000/- C Rs.60000/- ;
25000/- Rs.85000/-
D Rs.100000/- ; E None of the above Answer: C
Rs.125000/-
the previous month, subject to maximum limits of Rs. ______ for officers in Scale VI & VII and
Rs. ______ for officers in Scale VIII. Circular HRMD 495/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A Rs. 30000/- ; Rs. B Rs.35000/- ; Rs.50000/- C Rs.60000/- ;
25000/- Rs.85000/-
D Rs.100000/- ; E None of the above Answer: D
Rs.125000/-
the previous month, subject to maximum limits of Rs. ______ for Clerical Staff and Rs. ______
for Subordinate Staff. Circular HRMD 495/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A Rs. 30000/- ; Rs. B Rs.35000/- ; Rs.50000/- C Rs.60000/- ;
25000/- Rs.85000/-
D Rs.100000/- ; E None of the above Answer: A
Rs.125000/-
989. Part Time employee drawing 1/3rd, ½ and 3/4th scale wages will be eligible for advance to the
extent of one month’s Gross Salary of the previous month, subject to maximum of Rs.______,
Rs.______ and Rs.______ respectively. Circular HRMD 495/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A Rs.8000/-, Rs.12000/- and B Rs.10000/-, Rs.12000/- C Rs.8000/-, Rs.12000/-
Rs.18000/- and Rs.18000/- and Rs.20000/-
D Rs.10000/-, Rs.15000/- E None of the above Answer: A
and Rs.20000/-
990. The facility of reimbursement of cost has been allowed towards purchase of Briefcase/
Suitcase/Handbag/Travel Bag would be upto Rs. ______ (inclusive of all taxes) for MD & CEO /
ED and Rs. ______ for officers in Scale VIII. Circular HRMD 495/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A Rs.3500/- ; Rs.2500/- B Rs.25000/- ; Rs.7000/- C Rs.40000/- ;
Rs.25000/-
D Rs.50000/- ; Rs.30000/- E None of the above Answer: D
Suitcase/Handbag/Travel Bag would be upto Rs. ______ (inclusive of all taxes) for officers in
Scale –VI & VII and Rs. ______ for officers in Scale – IV & V. Circular HRMD 495/2020 dated
26.03.2020
A Rs.3500/- ; Rs.2500/- B Rs.25000/- ; Rs.7000/- C Rs.40000/- ;
Rs.25000/-
D Rs.50000/- ; Rs.30000/- E None of the above Answer: B
Suitcase/Handbag/Travel Bag would be upto Rs. ______ (inclusive of all taxes) for officers in
Scale –II & III and Rs. ______ for Dy. Manager /Branch Head in JMG Scale-I. Circular HRMD
495/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A Rs.3500/- ; Rs.2500/- B Rs.25000/- ; Rs.7000/- C Rs.40000/- ;
Rs.25000/-
D Rs.50000/- ; Rs.30000/- E None of the above Answer: A
993. The employee applying for Sabbatical leave should have put in a minimum of ______ years of
service. Circular HRMD 495/2020 dated 26.03.2020
298

994. The period of Sabbatical Leave will be taken for a period of at least ______ months at a time with
Page
maximum of ______ years during their entire career and cannot be taken more than once in a

year. Circular HRMD 495/2020 dated 26.03.2020

D 6 months ; 3 years E None of the above Answer: A
995. The amount of scholarship for only one talented child per family of the employee will be
maximum of Rs.______ for subordinate staff including permanent part-time employees for
graduation/post graduation in any discipline of arts, science or commerce and Rs.______for
award / officer staff for technical education from any recognized university and / or from an
institution recognized by AICTE. Circular HRMD 495/2020 dated 26.03.2020
D Rs.5,000/- ; Rs.8,000/- E None of the above Answer: A
996. Officers up to Scale III who are required to work for more than 4 hours on a Sunday/Holiday are
entitle for 1 day Diem Allowance or 1 day Compensatory leave which will be availed within
______ days from the day of working on Sunday/Holiday. Circular HRMD 495/2020 dated
26.03.2020
997. Officers working on holidays in Back offices for CTS/ECS/RTGS/SWIFT and the officers required
to work on Holidays consequent to RBI/Govt. Direction, will be paid an amount of Rs. _____
without any stipulation of number of hours worked in lieu of 01 day Diem Allowance
Compensatory off Scheme. Circular HRMD 495/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A Rs. 1500/- B Rs. 1600/- C Rs. 1800/-
998. All staff members (Officers in all scales, Clerical staff and Subordinate staff including Part time)
on attaining the age of superannuation are eligible for memento of Rs.______. Contribution of
the expenses by the bank is also payable @ Rs.60/- per employee of that branch/office . Circular
HRMD 495/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A Rs.10,000/- (inclusive of B Rs.12,000/- (inclusive of C Rs.15,000/- (inclusive of
GST) GST) GST)
D Rs.20,000/- (inclusive of E None of the above Answer: A
GST)
999. The cost of Silver Jubilee Awards to honor employees on completion of 25 years of service in
Bank should not exceed Rs. ______. Contribution of the expenses by the bank towards
organizing function for bestowing the Award will be Rs.______ per employee posted in that
branch/office. Circular HRMD 495/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A Rs. 8,000/ ; Rs.50/- B Rs. 10,000/ ; Rs.50/- C Rs. 8,000/ ; Rs.60/-
D Rs. 10,000/ ; Rs.60/- E None of the above Answer: D
1000. The Internal Complaints Committee (ICC) will conclude the inquiry against sexual harassment of
women at workplace within a period of ______ days and will provide a report of its findings to
the employer within a period of ______ days from the date of completion of the inquiry. Circular
HRMD 495/2020 dated 26.03.2020
D 90 days ; 15 days E None of the above Answer: C
1001. In case of death of an employee as a result of or during bank robbery or attacks by terrorists,
including left-wing extremism on bank employees, the family of deceased will be given
compensation of Rs. ______ in case of death of Officers and Rs. ______ in case of death of
Clerical/Sub Staff. Circular HRMD 495/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A Rs 20 lakh ; Rs 10 lakh B Rs 20 lakh ; Rs 15 lakh C Rs 25 lakh ; Rs 10 lakh
D Rs 25 lakh ; Rs 15 lakh E None of the above Answer: A
1002. In respect of the persons other than the Bank employee who may get killed as a consequence of
or during robberies and/or attack of terrorists, the bank will pay a lump-sum compensation of
Rs.______ to the family of the deceased. Circular HRMD 495/2020 dated 26.03.2020
299
A Rs. 1 lakhs B Rs. 2 lakhs C Rs.3 lakhs

D Rs.5 lakhs E None of the above Answer: C
1003. In case of Bank employees/customers/members of public who actively resists bank robberies
Page
and terrorist’s attacks on banks, the bank may consider a cash reward not exceeding Rs.

______. Circular HRMD 495/2020 dated 26.03.2020

A Rs. 1 lakhs B Rs. 2 lakhs C Rs.3 lakhs
D Rs.5 lakhs E None of the above Answer: B
1004. There will be no restriction with regard to per unit cost of SFF items which means an officer can
opt for more expensive items within overall limits. However, this provision is not applicable in
the case of ______. Circular HRMD 495/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A Mattress B Curtains C Battery
1005. Whenever an officer is provided inverter with battery under Residential SFF, the same may be
allowed to be replaced after ______ months (if necessary) from the date of purchase on a cost
ceiling of Rs.9000/- (excluding GST) or replacement cost, whichever is lower, under buy-back
system of the existing Battery/ batteries. Circular HRMD 495/2020 dated 26.03.2020
A 30 months B 36 months C 42months
1006. In terms of the extant regulations, remittances against imports should be completed not later
than ______ months from the date of shipment, except in cases where amounts are withheld
towards guarantee of performance, etc. Circular FEC 100/2020 dated 29.10.2020
D twelve months E None of the avove Answer: B
1007. in view of the disruptions due to outbreak of COVID- 19 pandemic, with effect from May 22, 2020,
the time period for completion of remittances against normal imports (except in cases where
amounts are withheld towards guarantee of performance etc.) has been extended from six
months to ______ months from the date of shipment for such imports made on or before July 31,
2020. Circular FEC 100/2020 dated 29.10.2020
D twelve months E None of the avove Answer: D
1008. A person may bring into India from Nepal or Bhutan, currency notes of Government of India and
Reserve Bank of India uo to Rs. ______. Circular FEC 100/2020 dated 29.10.2020
A for any amount in B 100000/- in denominations C 50000/- in denominations
denominations up to up to Rs.2000/- up to Rs.1000/-
Rs.100/-
D 25000/- in denominations E None of the avove Answer: A
up to Rs.100/-
1009. An authorised dealer may, in the ordinary course of his business, give a guarantee in favour of a
non-resident service provider provided that no guarantee for an amount exceeding USD______
or its equivalent shall be issued on behalf of a service importer other than a Public Sector
Company or a Department / Undertaking of the Government of India / State Government Circular
FEC 100/2020 dated 29.10.2020
A USD 1,000,000 B USD 500,000 C USD 200,000
1010. Where the service importer is a Public Sector Company or a Department / Undertaking of the
Government of India / State Government, no guarantee for an amount exceeding USD ______ or
its equivalent shall be issued without the prior approval of the Ministry of Finance, Government
of India. Circular FEC 100/2020 dated 29.10.2020
A USD 1,000,000 B USD 500,000 C USD 200,000
1011. AD Category – I bank may allow advance remittance for import of goods without any ceiling
subject to the conditions that If the amount of advance remittance exceeds USD ______or its
equivalent, an unconditional, irrevocable standby Letter of Credit or a guarantee from an
international bank of repute situated outside India or a guarantee of an AD Category – I bank in
India, if such a guarantee is issued against the counter-guarantee of an international bank of
300
repute situated outside India, is obtained. Circular FEC 100/2020 dated 29.10.2020
A USD 1,000,000 B USD 500,000 C USD 200,000
D USD 100,000 E None of the avove Answer: C
Page
1012. As a sector specific measure, entities which have been permitted under the extant Foreign Trade
Policy to import aircrafts and helicopters (including used / second hand aircraft and helicopters)

or any other person who has been granted permission by the Directorate General of Civil
Aviation (DGCA) to operate Scheduled or Non-Scheduled Air Transport Service (including Air
Taxi Services), can make advance remittance without bank guarantee or an unconditional,
irrevocable Standby Letter of Credit, up to USD ______. Circular FEC 100/2020 dated 29.10.2020
1013. AD Category – I bank may accept, in lieu of Exchange Control Copy of Bill of Entry for home
consumption, a certificate from the Chief Executive Officer (CEO) or auditor of the company that
the goods for which remittance was made have actually been imported into India provided that
the amount of foreign exchange remitted is less than USD ______ or its equivalent as evidence
of Import subject to certain conditions. Circular FEC 100/2020 dated 29.10.2020
A USD 1,000,000 B USD 500,000 C USD 200,000
1014. Suppliers’ and Buyers’ credit (trade credit) including the usance period of Letters of Credit
opened for import of gold in any form, including jewellery made of gold/precious metals or/and
studded with diamonds/semi- precious/precious stones, should not exceed ______days from the
date of shipment. Circular FEC 100/2020 dated 29.10.2020
1015. AD Category-l banks have been permitted to offer facility of payment for imports of goods and
software of value not exceeding USD ______ by entering into standing arrangements with the
Processing of import related payments through Online Payment Gateway Service Providers
(OPGSPs) subject to certain conditions. Circular FEC 100/2020 dated 29.10.2020
A USD 1,000 B USD 2,000 C USD 5,000
1016. The period of realization and repatriation of export proceeds shall be ______ months from the
date of export for all exporters Circular FEC 96/2020 dated 20.10.2020
D fifteen months E None of the avove Answer: B
1017. For goods exported to a warehouse established outside India, the proceeds shall be realized
within ______ months from the date of shipment of goods. Circular FEC 96/2020 dated 20.10.2020
1018. Authorised Dealer Category – I (AD Category – I) banks have been allowed to offer the facility of
repatriation of export related remittances by entering into standing arrangements with Online
Payment Gateway Service Providers (OPGSPs). This facility shall only be available for export of
goods and services of value not exceeding USD ______. Circular FEC 96/2020 dated 20.10.2020
A USD 5,000 B USD 10,000 C USD 20,000
1019. The Asian Monetary Unit (AMU) shall be denominated as ______. Circular FEC 96/2020 dated
20.10.2020
A ACU Dollar B ACU Euro C ACU Yen
1020. Trade transactions with Myanmar can be settled in ______ currency in addition to the ACU
mechanism. Circular FEC 96/2020 dated 20.10.2020
A ACU Dollar B ACU Euro C ACU Yen
D any freely convertible E None of the avove Answer: D
currency
1021. All categories of foreign exchange earners are allowed to credit ______% of their foreign
exchange earnings to their EEFC Accounts. Circular FEC 96/2020 dated 20.10.2020
A 100% B 90% C 80%
301

1022. Any person resident in India may take outside India (other than to Nepal and Bhutan) currency
notes of Government of India and Reserve Bank of India up to an amount not exceeding
Page
Rs._______. Circular FEC 96/2020 dated 20.10.2020

A Rs.10,000 B Rs.20,000 C Rs.25,000

D Rs.50,000 E None of the avove Answer: C
traveler coming from and going to Pakistan or Bangladesh, and visiting India may take outside
not exceeding Rs. ______ while exiting only through an airport. Circular FEC 96/2020 dated
20.10.2020
A Rs.10,000 B Rs.20,000 C Rs.25,000
1024. In cases where exporters’ present documents pertaining to exports after the prescribed period of
______ days from date of export, AD Category – I banks may handle them without prior approval
of the Reserve Bank, provided they are satisfied with the reasons for the delay. Circular FEC
96/2020 dated 20.10.2020
1025. The duplicate copy of the EDF is submitted to the AD banks for monitoring purposes, by the
exporters within ______ days from the date of shipment of export. Circular FEC 96/2020 dated
20.10.2020
1026. AD Category – I banks may consider the applications received from exporters and grant
permission for opening / hiring warehouses abroad subject to Applicant has a minimum export
turnover of USD ______ during the last financial year. Circular FEC 96/2020 dated 20.10.2020
A USD 100,000/- B USD 50,000/- C USD 25,000/-
D USD 10,000/- E None of the avove Answer: A
1027. Trade transactions up to Rs.______ per transaction is permitted under Drawing Arrangements
with Exchange Houses. Circular FEC 81/2020 dated 09.09.2020
A Rs.5,00,000 B Rs.10,00,000 C Rs.15,00,000
1028. For derivative contracts involving INR, Authorised Dealers shall allow a user to book derivative
contracts up to USD ______ equivalent of notional value (outstanding at any point in time)
without the need to establish the existence of underlying exposure. Circular FEC 80/2020 dated
02.09.2020
1029. AD Category I banks may permit their overseas branches/ correspondents temporary
overdrawals not exceeding Rs.______ in aggregate, for meeting normal business requirements.
Circular FEC 80/2020 dated 02.09.2020
A Rs.100 lakhs B Rs.200 lakhs C Rs.500 lakhs
D Rs.1000 lakhs E None of the avove Answer: C
1030. Opening of Rupee accounts in the names of Exchange Houses for facilitating private remittances
into India requires approval of the Reserve Bank. Remittances through Exchange Houses for
financing trade transactions are permitted upto Rs.______ per transaction Circular FEC 80/2020
dated 02.09.2020
A Rs.5,00,000 B Rs.10,00,000 C Rs.15,00,000
1031. In terms of the extant regulations, remittances against imports should be completed not later
than ______ from the date of shipment, except in cases where amounts are withheld towards
guarantee of performance, etc. Circular FEC 09/2020 dated 28.01.2020
D fifteen months E None of the avove Answer: A
302
1032. It shall not be necessary to make declaration in the Currency Declaration Form (CDF) where the
aggregate value of the foreign exchange in the form of currency notes, bank notes or travellers
cheques brought in by such person at any one time does not exceed ______ or its equivalent
Page
and/or the aggregate value of foreign currency notes (cash portion) alone brought in by such

person at any one time does not exceed ______ or its equivalent. Circular FEC 09/2020 dated
28.01.2020
5,000 10,000 5,000
D USD 10,000 ; USD E None of the avove Answer: D
5,000
1033. Any person resident in India who had gone out of India on a temporary visit, may bring into India
at the time of his return from any place outside India (other than from Nepal and Bhutan),
currency notes of Government of India and Reserve Bank of India notes up to an amount not
exceeding ______. Circular FEC 09/2020 dated 28.01.2020
A Rs.10,000 B Rs.20,000 C Rs.25,000
1034. no guarantee for an amount exceeding ______ or its equivalent shall be issued on behalf of a
service importer other than a Public Sector Company or a Department / Undertaking of the
Government of India / State Government. Circular FEC 09/2020 dated 28.01.2020
A USD 100,000 B USD 100,000 C USD 300,000
1035. Where the service importer is a Public Sector Company or a Department / Undertaking of the
Government of India / State Government, no guarantee for an amount exceeding ______ or its
equivalent shall be issued without the prior approval of the Ministry of Finance, Government of
India. Circular FEC 09/2020 dated 28.01.2020
A USD 100,000 B USD 100,000 C USD 300,000
1036. If the amount of advance remittance exceeds ______ or its equivalent, an unconditional,
irrevocable standby Letter of Credit or a guarantee from an international bank of repute situated
outside India or a guarantee of an AD Category – I bank in India, if such a guarantee is issued
against the counter-guarantee of an international bank of repute situated outside India, is
obtained. Circular FEC 09/2020 dated 28.01.2020
A USD 50,000 B USD 100,000 C USD 200,000
1037. AD Category – I bank may accept, in lieu of Exchange Control Copy of Bill of Entry for home
consumption, a certificate from the Chief Executive Officer (CEO) or auditor of the company that
the goods for which remittance was made have actually been imported into India provided The
amount of foreign exchange remitted is less than ______ or its equivalent and The importer is a
company listed on a stock exchange in India and whose net worth is not less than ______ as on
the date of its last audited balance sheet, or, the importer is a public sector company or an
undertaking of the Government of India or its departments. Circular FEC 09/2020 dated 28.01.2020
A USD 1,000,000 ; B USD 1,000,000 ; C USD 2,000,000 ;
Rs.100 crore Rs.500 crore Rs.100 crore
D USD 2,000,000 ; E None of the avove Answer: A
Rs.500 crore
1038. The NRO account can be debited for the purpose of local payments, transfers to other NRO
accounts or remittance of current income abroad. Apart from these, balances in the NRO
account cannot be repatriated abroad except by NRIs and PIOs up to______ , subject to
conditions specified in Foreign Exchange Management (Remittance of Assets) Regulations,
292016. Circular FEC 07/2020 dated 14.01.2020
1039. Authorised Dealer banks have been permitted to issue International Credit Cards to NRIs/PIOs,
without prior approval of Reserve Bank. Such transactions may be settled by inward remittance
or out of balances held in the cardholder’s ______ Accounts. Circular FEC 07/2020 dated
303
14.01.2020
A FCNR (B) B NRE C NRO
Page
1040. The tenure of the SNRR account should be concurrent to the tenure of the contract/ period of
operation/ the business of the account holder and in no case should exceed ______ years.

Circular FEC 07/2020 dated 14.01.2020

A three years B five years C seven years
1041. Authorized Persons may accept payment in cash below Rs.______ against sale of foreign
exchange for travel abroad (for private visit or for any other purpose). Circular FEX 110/2020
dated 23.10.2020
A Rs.50,000/- B Rs.1,00,000/- C Rs.200,000/-
1042. Overdue PCFC will be crystallized on ______ from the due date. Circular FEX 109/2020 dated
21.10.2020
A 5th banking day B 7th banking day C 10th banking day
D 15th banking day E None of the avove Answer: D
1043. Any change/enhancement/extension/fresh sanction/renewal in limits of Export Credit under
PCFC will be informed to ECGC within ______ from the date of happening such instance. Circular
FEX 109/2020 dated 21.10.2020
1044. The Post Shipment Credit in Foreign Currency (PSCFC) Scheme will cover mainly export bills
with usance period upto ______ from the date of shipment (inclusive of normal transit period and
grace period, if any). Circular FEX 109/2020 dated 21.10.2020
1045. Firms and Companies, having an average annual turnover of Rs.______ during preceding three
licensing years are eligible for opening of Diamond Dollar Account(DDA). Circular FEX 85/2020
dated 05.08.2020
A Rs.1 crore or above B Rs.2 crore or above C Rs.3 crore or above
D Rs.5 crore or above E None of the avove Answer: C
1046. Suppliers Credit and Buyers Credit (Trade Credit), including the usance period of Letters of
Credit opened for import of Platinum, Palladium, Rhodium and Silver and rough, cut and
polished Diamonds, Precious and semi-precious stones; should not exceed ______ days from
the date of shipment. Circular FEX 80/2020 dated 01.07.2020
1047. for Clean Credit i.e. credit given by a foreign supplier to its Indian customer/ buyer, without any
Letter of Credit (Suppliers Credit)/ Letter of Undertaking (Buyers Credit)/ Fixed Deposits from
any Indian financial institution for import of rough, cut and polished diamonds, precious and
semi-precious stones, may be permitted for a period not exceeding ______ days from the date of
shipment. Circular FEX 80/2020 dated 01.07.2020
1048. All US financial accounts with an average value of ______ or more will to be reported under
FATCA. Circular FEX 67/2020 dated 15.05.2020
A USD 10,000 B USD 25,000 C USD 50,000
D USD 1,50,000 E None of the avove Answer: C
1049. The minimum maturity period for NRE (Rupee) term deposit is ______ and maximum ______.
Circular FEX 67/2020 dated 15.05.2020
A 6 months ; 5 years B 1 year ; 5 years C 6 months ; 10 years
D 1 year ; 10 years E None of the avove Answer: D
1050. If NRE term deposit is sought to be withdrawn prematurely, interest will be allowed as applicable
for the period for which the deposit remained with the Bank minus ______% penalty, provided
the deposit has completed
304
minimum period of 1 year. Circular FEX 67/2020 dated 15.05.2020

A no penalty is to be levied B 0.50% C 0.75%
Page
1051. If NRE Term Deposit is sought to be withdrawn prematurely for the purpose of converting into

FCNR (B) deposits, interest may be paid at applicable rate for the period for which deposit
remained with the Bank minus penalty of ______%. Circular FEX 67/2020 dated 15.05.2020
1052. If NRE Term Deposit is sought to be withdrawn prematurely for conversion into RFC, interest
may be paid at applicable rate for the period for which deposit remained with the Bank minus
penalty of ______%. Circular FEX 67/2020 dated 15.05.2020
1053. Where FCNR (B) deposits are converted into NRE deposits before maturity, at the request of
account holder, the rate of interest payable on such deposits will be subject to penalty of
______% on the rate applicable for the period for which the deposit has run. Circular FEX 67/2020
dated 15.05.2020
1054. The interest calculation, on FCNR (B) deposits is done on the basis of ______ days to a year.
D upon bank to decide E None of the avove Answer: A
1055. A Citizen of foreign state, not being citizen of Nepal or Bhutan or person of Indian origin (PIO),
who has retired from an employment in India and has inherited assets of deceased husband who
was an Indian citizen resident in India may remit an amount, not exceeding ______ per financial
year out of the balances in the account, on production of documentary evidence in support of
acquisition, inheritance or legacy of assets. Circular FEX 67/2020 dated 15.05.2020
A USD one million B USD two million C USD three million
D USD five million E None of the avove Answer: A
1056. NRI/PIO may remit an amount, not exceeding ______ per financial year, out of the balances held
in NRO accounts / sale proceeds of assets / the assets in India acquired by him by way of
inheritance / legacy, on production of documentary evidence in support of acquisition,
inheritance or legacy of assets. Circular FEX 67/2020 dated 15.05.2020
1057. NRI/PIO may remit sale proceeds of immovable property purchased by him as a resident or out
of Rupee funds as NRI/PIO, without any lock-in-period, subject to the
above limit of ______, per financial year. Circular FEX 67/2020 dated 15.05.2020
1058. For customers such as Seafarers, Naval Officers or the Army personnel on mission abroadwho
are not having any overseas address but eligible as NRI in terms of FEMA guidelines, HO: ITD
has created and customized a separate customer type ______ in CRM. Circular FEX 67/2020 dated
15.05.2020
A NRDEF B RNDEF C DEFNR
D DEFRN E None of the avove Answer: A
1059. Under the ECB framework, all eligible borrowers can raise ECB up to______ or equivalent per
financialyear under the automatic route. Circular FEX 61/2020 dated 20.04.2020
1060. Normally under ECB, the minimum average maturity period cannot be less than? Circular FEX
61/2020 dated 20.04.2020
305
1061. The exporter should submit declaration in Form SOFTEX in ______ in respect of export of
computer software and audio / video / television software to the designated official concerned of
the Government of India at STPI / EPZ /FTZ /SEZ for valuation / certification not later than
Page
______days from the date of invoice / the date of last invoice raised in a month Circular FEX

52/2020 dated 17.04.2020

A duplicate ; 30 days B triplicate ; 30 days C quadruplicate ; 30 days
D quadruplicate ; 45 days E None of the avove Answer: Y
1062. Status holders shall be entitled to export freely exportable items (excluding Gems and Jewellery,
Articles of Gold and precious metals) on free of cost basis for export promotion subject to an
annual limit of Rs. ______ or ______% of average annual export realisation during preceding
three licensing years, whichever is lower. Circular FEX 52/2020 dated 17.04.2020
A Rs. One Crore ; 1% B Rs. One Crore ; 2% C Rs. Two Crore ; 1%
D Rs. Two Crore ; 2% E None of the avove Answer: B
1063. AD branches may regularize cases of dispatch of shipping documents by the exporter direct to
the consignee or his agent resident in the country of the final destination of goods, up to ______
or its equivalent, per export shipment. Circular FEX 52/2020 dated 17.04.2020
1064. An Importer Exporter Code (IEC) Number is a ______digit number allotted to Exporter by DGFT is
mandatory for undertaking any export/import activities. Circular FEX 52/2020 dated 17.04.2020
D 16-digit E None of the avove Answer: A
1065. Out of the overall foreign exchange (USD 250, 000 per financial year under LRS), limit
ofTravellers proceeding (exchange in the form of foreign currency notes and coins) to countries
other than Iraq, Libya, Islamic Republic of Iran, Russian Federation and other Republics of
Commonwealth of Independent States will be ______ per visit or its equivalent. Circular FEX
51/2020 dated 07.04.2020
A not exceeding USD 1000 B not exceeding USD 2000 C not exceeding USD 3000
D not exceeding USD 5000 E None of the avove Answer: C
1066. Out of the overall foreign exchange (USD 250, 000 per financial year under LRS), limit of
Travellers proceeding (exchange in the form of foreign currency notes and coins) to Iraq or
Libya will be ______ per visit or its equivalent. Circular FEX 51/2020 dated 07.04.2020
A not exceeding USD 1000 B not exceeding USD 2000 C not exceeding USD 3000
D not exceeding USD 5000 E None of the avove Answer: D
1067. General permission is available to any resident individual to surrender received/ realized/
unspent/ unused foreign exchange to an AD Branch/ Exchange Bureau within a period of ______
from the date of receipt / realization / purchase / acquisition / date of return of the traveller, as
the case may be. Circular FEX 51/2020 dated 07.04.2020
D 180 days E None of the avove Answer: 180 days
1068. A returning traveller or resident is permitted to retain with him, foreign currency, travellers‘
cheques and currency notes up to an aggregate amount of ______ and foreign coins without any
ceiling beyond 180 days. Circular FEX 51/2020 dated 07.04.2020
A USD 1000 B USD 2000 C USD 3000
D USD 5000 E None of the avove Answer: B
1069. General permission is available to persons other than individuals to remit towards donations up-
to one per cent of their foreign exchange earnings during the previous three financial years or
______, whichever is less. Circular FEX 51/2020 dated 07.04.2020
A USD 1,000,000 B USD 2,000,000 C USD 2,500,000
of India if commission per transaction to agents abroad for sale of residential flats or
commercial plots in India exceeds ______ or five percent of the inward remittance whichever is
more. Circular FEX 51/2020 dated 07.04.2020
A USD 25,000 B USD 50,000 C USD 100,000
306

of India for remittances exceeding five per cent of investment brought into India or ______
Page
whichever is higher, by an entity in India by way of reimbursement of pre-incorporation

expenses Circular FEX 51/2020 dated 07.04.2020

A USD 100,000 B USD 200,000 C USD 2,50,000
1072. AD branch is permitted to issue guarantee for amount not exceeding ______ or its equivalent in
favour of a non-resident service provider, on behalf of a resident customer who is a service
importer. Circular FEX 51/2020 dated 07.04.2020
A USD 100,000 B USD 200,000 C USD 2,50,000
1073. In the case of a Public Sector Company or a Department/ Undertaking of the Government of
India/ State Governments, approval from the Ministry of Finance, Government of India for issue
of guarantee for an amount exceeding ______ or its equivalent would be required. Circular FEX
51/2020 dated 07.04.2020
A USD 100,000 B USD 200,000 C USD 2,50,000
1074. Under the Liberalised Remittance Scheme (LRS), AD branch may freely allow remittances by
Resident Individuals up to______ per Financial Year (April- March) for any permitted current or
capital account transaction or a combination of both. Circular FEX 51/2020 dated 07.04.2020
A USD 100,000 B USD 200,000 C USD 2,50,000
1075. Under the Liberalised Remittance Scheme (LRS), any resident individual can obtain foreign
exchange up to an aggregate amount of ______, from an AD branch, in any one financial year,
for private visits abroad, other than Nepal and Bhutan irrespective of the number of visits
undertaken during the year. Circular FEX 51/2020 dated 07.04.2020
A USD 100,000 B USD 200,000 C USD 2,50,000
1076. Under the Liberalised Remittance Scheme (LRS), any resident individual may remit up-to ______
in one FY as gift to a person residing outside India who is not resident of India or as donation to
an organization established outside India not owned by resident Indian. Circular FEX 51/2020
dated 07.04.2020
A USD 100,000 B USD 200,000 C USD 2,50,000
1077. Under the Liberalised Remittance Scheme (LRS), any resident Individual going abroad for
employment can draw foreign exchange up to ______ per FY from any AD branch in India.
A USD 100,000 B USD 200,000 C USD 2,50,000
1078. Under the Liberalised Remittance Scheme (LRS), a person wanting to emigrate can draw foreign
exchange from AD branch up to the amount prescribed by the country of emigration or ______.
A USD 100,000 B USD 200,000 C USD 2,50,000
1079. Under the Liberalised Remittance Scheme (LRS), a resident individual can remit up-to ______ per
FY towards maintenance of close relatives abroad. Circular FEX 51/2020 dated 07.04.2020
A USD 100,000 B USD 200,000 C USD 2,50,000
1080. For business trips to foreign countries, resident individuals can avail of foreign exchange up to
______ in a FY irrespective of the number of visits undertaken during the year under the
Liberalised Remittance Scheme (LRS). Circular FEX 51/2020 dated 07.04.2020
A USD 100,000 B USD 200,000 C USD 2,50,000
1081. Under the Liberalised Remittance Scheme (LRS) for Medical treatment abroad, AD branch may
307
release foreign exchange up to an amount of______ or its equivalent per FY without insisting on
any estimate from a hospital/doctor. Circular FEX 51/2020 dated 07.04.2020
A USD 100,000 B USD 200,000 C USD 2,50,000
Page

1082. Under the Liberalised Remittance Scheme (LRS), AD branch may release foreign exchange up to
______ or its equivalent to resident individuals for studies abroad without insisting on any
estimate from the foreign University. Circular FEX 51/2020 dated 07.04.2020
A USD 100,000 B USD 200,000 C USD 2,50,000
1083. The resident individual seeking to make the remittance should furnish Form ______ for purchase
of foreign exchange under Liberalised Remittance Scheme (LRS). Circular FEX 51/2020 dated
07.04.2020
A Form A1 B Form A2 C Form B1
D Form B2 E None of the avove Answer: B
1084. Prior approval of the Reserve Bank is necessary for remittance of assets where Remittance is in
excess of ______ per financial year on account of legacy, bequest or inheritance to a citizen of
foreign state, resident outside India and by NRIs/ PIOs out of the balances held in NRO accounts/
sale proceeds of assets/ the assets acquired by way of inheritance/ legacy. Circular FEX 51/2020
dated 07.04.2020
A USD 1,000,000 B USD 2,000,000 C USD 3,000,000
D USD 5,000,000 E None of the avove Answer: A
1085. Is it mandatory for resident individuals to have PAN number for sending outward remittances
under the Scheme. However, PAN card need not be insisted upon for remittance made towards
permissible current account transactions on cash deposits below Rs. ______. Circular FEX
51/2020 dated 07.04.2020
A Rs. 25000 B Rs. 50000 C Rs. 100000
D Rs. 150000 E None of the avove Answer: B
1086. A resident of India, who has gone out of India on a temporary visit may bring into India at the
time of his return from any place outside India (other than Nepal and Bhutan), currency notes of
Government of India and Reserve Bank of India notes up to an amount not exceeding Rs.______.
A Rs.10,000 B Rs.20,000 C Rs.25,000
traveller coming from and going to Pakistan and Bangladesh, and visiting India may bring into
not exceeding Rs. ______ while entering only through an airport. Circular FEX 51/2020 dated
07.04.2020
A Rs.10,000 B Rs.20,000 C Rs.25,000
1088. Any person resident in India who had gone to Pakistan and/or Bangladesh on a temporary visit,
may bring into India at the time of his return, currency notes of Government of India and Reserve
Bank of India notes up to an amount not exceeding Rs. ______ per person. Circular FEX 51/2020
dated 07.04.2020
A Rs.10,000 B Rs.20,000 C Rs.25,000
D Rs.50,000 E None of the avove Answer: A
1089. A person coming into India from abroad can bring with him foreignexchange without any limit.
However, if the aggregate value of the foreign exchange in the form of currency notes, bank
notes or travellers cheques brought in exceeds______ or its equivalent and/or the value of
foreign currency alone exceeds ______ or its equivalent, it should be declared to the Customs
Authorities at the Airport in the Currency Declaration Form (CDF), on arrival in India. Circular FEX
51/2020 dated 07.04.2020
5,000 10,000 5,000
D USD 25,000 ; USD E None of the avove Answer: A
308
10,000
1090. Foreign exchange for travel abroad can be purchased from an AD Branch against rupee payment
in cash below Rs.______. Circular FEX 51/2020 dated 07.04.2020
Page
A Rs.10,000 B Rs.20,000 C Rs.25,000


1091. A resident individual can make a rupee gift to a NRI/PIO who is a close relative of the resident
individual by way of crossed cheque /electronictransfer. The gift amount would be within the
overall limit of ______ per financial year as permitted under the LRS for a resident individual.
A USD 100,000 B USD 200,000 C USD 2,50,000
1092. Per transaction cash withdrawal limit of world travel card (WTC) on ATM are as per the limit will
be set by the concerned ATM provider of the country of visit with a maximum of ______ per day.
A USD 1000 B Euro 800 C GBP 500
1093. Maximum ceiling for use of the world travel card (WTC) at merchant establishments (POS) will be
______. Circular FEX 48/2020 dated 01.04.2020
A USD 1000 B Euro 800 C GBP 500
D No maximum ceiling E None of the avove Answer: D
1094. Under world travel card (WTC), minimum/maximum amount of loading/ reloading by any
resident individual is ______ for any financial year. Circular FEX 48/2020 dated 01.04.2020
A Min- USD 50,000 ; Max- B Min- USD 1,00,000 ; C Min- USD 1,00,000 ;
USD 2,50,000 Max-USD 2,50,000 Max-USD 5,00,000
D Min- No amount ; Max- E None of the avove Answer: D
USD 2,50,000
1095. Resident Indians who purchase World Travel cards are permitted refund of the unutilized foreign
exchange balance only after ______ from the date of last transaction. Circular FEX 48/2020 dated
01.04.2020
1096. The resident Indian can retain up to ______ in World Travel Card for his/ her subsequent visit to
abroad. Circular FEX 48/2020 dated 01.04.2020
A USD 500 B USD 1000 C USD 2000
D USD 5000 E None of the avove Answer: C
1097. Under world travel card (WTC), Insurance coverage is available up to ______ for any financial
losses arising out of fraudulent transactions, loss of card, loss of baggage and important
documents Circular FEX 48/2020 dated 01.04.2020
A Rs.1,50,000/- B Rs.2,00,000/- C Rs.3,00,000/-
D Rs.3,50,000/- E None of the avove Answer: D
1098. Insurance coverage is available under world travel card (WTC), if the loss suffered (or the
disputed transaction) is not reported to the Bank by the customer within a period of ______ from
the date of occurrence of first transaction. Circular FEX 48/2020 dated 01.04.2020
1099. World Travel Card is valid for a maximum period of ______ from the month of printing (mm/yy) or
up to the date of validity printed on the card. Circular FEX 48/2020 dated 01.04.2020
A 3years B 5 years C 7 years
1100. The PNB Expo Gold Card scheme for exporters will not be applicable to those exporters who are
making losses for the past ______ years or having overdue export bills in excess of ______ % of
the previous year’s export turnover. Circular FEX 13/2020 dated 19.02.2020
A 2 years ; 10 % B 3 years ; 10 % C 2 years ; 15 %
D 3 years ; 15 % E None of the avove Answer: B
309 Page

MCQs on Finacle 10 Module

1. Finacle software has been developed by:
A WIPRO B TCS C ACCENTURE
D INFOSYS E Tech Mahindra Answer: D
2. When did PNB migrate its systems from Finacle 7 to 10?
A Jan-18 B Sep-19 C Jan-19
D Jan-16 E Sep-17 Answer: A
3. When did PNB adopt Finacle 7 for implementing CBS?
A 2005 B 2001 C 2003
D 2009 E 2000 Answer:
4. Which of the following is a feature of Finacle 10?
A Multiple Solutions B Effective Collateral C Easy signature upload
Management
D Highly parameterized E All of the above Answer: E
software
5. Which one of the following is not a solution name in Finacle 10?
A CRM B CoreServer C SVS
D Change Credentials E Teller Answer: E
6. Which folder is required on your PC to export reports generated in Finacle 10?
A C:\upload B D:\upload C C:\FinDrive
D C:\UploadNew E Any folder on PC Answer: E
7. Which is the minimum version of Internet Explorer required for Finacle 10?
A 8 B 9 C 10
D 11 E 7 Answer: D
8. What is the URL to open Finacle 10 home page in Internet Explorer?
A 10.192.2.26 B 10.192.22.26 C 10.192.2.20
D 10.192.2.126 E 10.192.21.26 Answer: A
9. From which link on home page, a user can download Java required for Finacle 10?
A Finacle 10x Config & docs B FinX Configuration C FinX Downloads
D Fin10x utilities E None of the above Answer: A
10. Which of the following is needed to be added for compatibility view?
A pnb.co.in B pnb.com C pnb.org
D pnb.in E None of the above Answer: A
11. Which of the following is needed to be added for compatibility view?
A 10.192.2.26 B 10.192.22.26 C 10.192.2.20
D 10.192.2.126 E 10.192.21.26 Answer: A
12. Which button needs to be clicked under Privacy Tab after opening Internet Options?
A Sites B Advanced C Java
D Security E More Settings Answer: A
13. Which site address needs to be added in Internet Options?
A pnb.co.in B pnb.com C pnb.org
D pnb.in E None of the above Answer: A
14. What should a user do with the Turn On Pop up Blocker settings?
A Keep it unticked B Keep it ticked C Should be ticked only
when using CRM Solution
D This setting need not be E None of the above Answer: A
visited
15. How many digits of SOL ID must be entered on the home page?
A Only 4 digits B Full 6 digits C SOL ID is not required
310
D SOL ID is not entered on E Only first 02 digits Answer: B

home page but on login
screen
Page
16. When a user logs in after password reset, which solution is required to be selected first?

A ChangeCredentials B SSOAdmin C FINCORE

D CRM E SVS Answer: A
17. For logging out from Finacle 10, a user has to:
A Enter menu command, B Enter menu command, C Click on Logout button on
EXIT LOGOUT top right.
D Just click on Back button E Directly close the browser. Answer: C
18. To open the transfer transaction, ______ is to be entered in menu shortcut slot
A HOXFT B HOCST C HOTFT
D HOTRT E None of the above Answer: A
19. To open the cash transaction, ______ is to be entered in menu shortcut slot
A HOXFT B HOCST C HOTFT
D HOTRT E None of the above Answer: B
20. To enable the user id of other members of the branch, user has to enter______ in menu shortcut
slot
A ENABLUSER B ENABLUSR C ENABLEUSR
D ENBLUSR E None of the above Answer: B
21. To check the pending work of branch user has to enter______ Menu.
A AFI B HAFI C HSCOD
D HSCLOD E None of the above Answer: B
22. To know the office security related check, ______ is to be netered in the menu slot.
A SECCHK B HSECCHK C HSOLCHK
D SOLCHK E None of the above Answer: A
23. Menu option______ to initiate Sol Change of Date
A HSCOLD B HAFI C HSCOD
D HSSI E None of the above Answer: B
24. Menu option to know the status of SOL is ______.
D HSSI E None of the above Answer: D
25. If the HSCOD is successfully done, DBA shall proceed with ______ process
D HSSI E None of the above Answer: A
26. On successful closure of Day End process, the status of EOD Event status is ______.
A Closed B SCOLD running C EOD event not in
progress
D Day End Done E None of the above Answer: C
27. For the maintenace of finacle user id of branch member, ______ is to be selected from Solution.
A Core Server B Change Credentials C SSO Admin
D SVS E None of the above Answer: C
28. To modify the details of any use,r ______ is to be selected.
A Maintain Resource Details B Maintain User Access C Reset User Login Details
Details
D Maintain User Details E None of the above Answer: D
29. In case a user has forgotten his password or his user id is locked, ______ is to be selected.
A Maintain Resource Details B Maintain User Access C Reset User Login Details
Details
D Maintain User Details E None of the above Answer: C
30. User can change Login Status, Login Attempts, and Password in ______ field.
A Reset Type field B Login status field C maintain resoource field
D Create type field E None of the above Answer: A
31. If the User ID of any User has disabled due to wrong attempts, the same can be enabled by
setting the value ______ in “Reset type field.
311
A Login Status B Login Attempts C Enable user

D Modify user E None of the above Answer: B
If any User forgot his password, the same can be reset by setting the value ______ in “Reset
Page
32.
type field

A Password B Create Password C Modify Password

D Reset Password E None of the above Answer: A
33. From which user does one have to login to invoke the menu option HUPM?
A General User B Data Center User C Administrative User
D DBA User E None of the above Answer: D
34. Passing powers of Users in CBS are termed as ______.
A GBPA B Work Class C User Status
D Users Power E None of the above Answer: B
35. The work class of the user can be modified by loging in ______.
A General User B DBA User C Any of A or B
D HRMS E None of the above Answer: B
36. Menu option for modification in user work class is ______.
A HUPM B HACLINQ C HUSERWC
D HWCUSER E None of the above Answer: A
37. Which of the following option is unavailable for Branch Users in CBS under UPM?
A Add B Copy C Delete
D Both A & B E None of the above Answer: D
38. Which user can't see an account of any other Branch?
A Free User B General User C Captive User
D DB User E None of the above Answer: C
39. Customer Information File (CIF) can be created in ______ Solution field.
A SVS B CORE SERVER C CRM
D SSO ADMIN E NONE OF THE ABOVE Answer: C
40. For creation of new CIF user to select ______.
A EDIT ENTITY B QUICK EDIT C NEW ENTITY
D ENTITY QUEUE E CUSTOMER Answer: C
41. Basic Detail of customer to be filled under ______ Dcetail tab while creation of new CIF.
A DEMOGRAPHIC B GENERAL DEATIL C CURRENCY
D GROUP DETAIL E PSYCHOGRAPHIC Answer: B
42. Phone & Email sub tab comes under ______ Tab.
A BASIC INFO B IDENTIFICATION TAB C HOUSEHOLD
D COREINTERFACE E CONTACT Answer: E
43. How many types of address format can be used while entering address of customer?
A FIVE B SIX C THREE
D ONE E TWO Answer: E
44. Three types of document are mandatory to be filled under identification document tab.Thease
documents are ______.
A ADDPR-FOR ADDRESS B IDPRO- FOR ID PROOF C TAXPR-FOR TAX
PROOF PROOF
D NONE OF THE THREE E OPTION- 1, OPTION-2 & Answer: E
OPTION-3
45. For FATCA enabled customer which type of document is required?
A SBSML B TAXPR C IDPRO
D FATCA E NONE OF THE ABOVE Answer: D
46. Sub tab under Demographic details tab are ______
A GENERAL DETAIL B QUALIFICATION C EMPLOYMENT DETAIL
D INCOME & EXPENSES E ALL OPTION-1,2,.3 & 4 Answer: E
DETAIL
47. If customer wants to open account in any currency then that currency must be added first in
CCY tab by clicking on which button?
312
A ADD CCY B REMOVE CCY C ADD IDENTIFICATION

DOCUMENT
D ADD HOUSEHOLD E ADD CORE INTERFACE Answer: A
Page
48. Sub tab under Household tab are ______.

A CREATE AND LINK B LINK HOUSEHOLD C DELINK HOUSEHOLD

HOUSEHOLD
D ALL OPTION 1,2 & 3. E NONE OF THE ABOVE Answer: D
49. Tax certification detail tabs is field for which type of customer?
A FATCA ENABLED B SBSML C GENERAL CUSTOMER
D MINIORITY COMMUNITY E ALL OPTION-1,2,.3 & 4 Answer: A
CUSTOMER
50. There are ______ Sub tabs under Psychographic main tab.
A ONE B TEN C SEVEN
D FIVE E SIX Answer: E
51. For entering customers' others bank & credit card details which tab to be used?
A GENERAL DETAIL B DEMOGRAPHIC C OTHERS BANK &
CREDIT CARD DETAILS
D PSYCHOGRAPHIC E CURRENCY Answer: C
52. For verification of newely created CIF, user to select ______.
A EDIT ENTITY B QUICK EDIT C NEW ENTITY
D CUSTOMER E ENTITY QUEUE Answer: E
53. All newely created CIF are parked in which tray?
A SELF TRAY B SINGLE TRAY C OTHERS USERS TRAY
D BANK TRAY E BUSINESS CENTER Answer: E
GROUP TRAY
54. For verification of newely created CIF user to transfer CIF from business center group tray to
which tray?
A SELF TRAY B SINGLE TRAY C OTHERS USERS TRAY
D BANK TRAY E BUSINESS CENTER Answer: A
GROUP TRAY
55. Approval process time hyperlink comes after clicking on ______ tab.
A ENTITY INFORMATION B QUICK EDIT C ENTITY COUNT.
SUMMERY
D GET E CURRENT PROCESS Answer: E
STEPS.
56. For verifying CIF, user to select ______ in decesion drop down.
A REJECT B CLOSE C APPROVE
D MODIFY E NONE OF THE ABOVE Answer: C
57. For transferring CIF from business center group tray to self tray, user to right click in entity and
select ______.
A GET AS ASSIGNEE B TRANSFER C MODIFY
D QUICK EDIT E NONE OF THE ABOVE Answer: A
58. For modification of CIF user to select ______.
A EDIT ENTITY B ENTITY QUEUE C CUSTOMER STATUS
D VERIFY E NEW ENTITY Answer: A
59. For Quick edit of address/phone-Email user should select ______.
A EDIT B VERIFY C QUICK EDIT
D GET AS ASSIGNEE E REMOVE Answer: C
60. For CIF suspension, MENU option is ______.
A CUMMSUSP B HCRV C HACLINQ
D HACINT E HALM Answer: A
61. Which out of the following fields is/ are mandatorily to be entered in Identification Details of
Corporate CIF?
A CORP ID B Tax Proof C Address Proof
62. While creating CIF ID, Ownership details of the entity can be captured in ______.
313
A General Details B Relationship Details C Preferences

D Trade Finance E None of the above Answer: B
63. For which category of customer (s), the Customer Information File will be created under CIF
Page
Corporate?

A Pvt. Limited Company B HUF C Sole proprietor

D All of the above E None of the above Answer: D
64. While creating CIF ID (Corp), Registration Number of Firm can be captured in ______.
A Basic Info B Contact details C Demographic Details
D Group Details E None of the above Answer: A
65. Which out of the following is a non- mandatory field while creating CIF (Corp)?
A TAX ID B Total Annual Turnover C Fund Source
D Date of Commencement E None of the above Answer: D
66. While creating CIF ID, customer's e-mail ID can be captured in ______.
A Contact details B Basic Info C Demographic Details
D Address Details E None of the above Answer: A
67. In Corporate CIF, "Principal place of operation" of a corporate will be captured under which tab?
A General Details B Relationship C Preferences
D Contact E None of the above Answer: A
68. In Corporate CIF, "Beneficiary" or "Corporate Representative" details will be captured under
which tab?
A General Details B Relationship Details C Preferences
D Trade Finance E None of the above Answer: B
69. CIF ID of individual shall be created in CRM under _______ category.
A CIF RETAIL B CIF Corporate C
D E None of the above Answer: A
70. CIF ID of a Sole Proprietorship Firm shall be created in CRM under _______ category.
A CIF RETAIL B CIF Corporate C
D E None of the above Answer: B
71. While creating CIF ID (Corp), Registered address of Firm can be captured in which tab?
A Basic Info B Contact details C Demographic Details
D Group Details E None of the above Answer: B
72. For modification in existing CIF Corporate which function field is to selected under CIF
Corporate?
A Edit Enity B New Entity C Entity Queue
73. For creation of new CIF Corporate which function field is to selected under CIF Corporate?
74. For Verification of existing CIF Corporate which function field is to selected under CIF
Corporate?
75. In Corporate CIF, Trading details of the entity will be captured under which tab?
A General Details B Relationship C Preferences
D Trade Finance details E None of the above Answer: D
76. In Corporate CIF, corporate document details of the entity will be captured under which tab?
A General Details - Contact B General Details - Basic C General Details -
Info Identification document
D General Details - Currency E None of the above Answer: C
77. Which Solution is to be selected for Creation of CIF?
A SVS B Core Server C CRM

D GBM E None of the above Answer: C
78. In Corporate CIF, Registration details of the entity will be captured under which tab?
314

D General Details - Currency E None of the above Answer: B
Page
79. In Corporate CIF, Risk Category classification of the entity will be captured under which tab?


D General Details - Currency E None of the above Answer: B
80. In Corporate CIF, what is to be filled in "Tax ID" field for Sole Proprietorship Firm ?
A PAN No of the proprietor B PAN No of the Firm C Nothing is to be filled
D Automatically filled by the E None of the above Answer: A
system
81. Which Menu Option is used for opening of Saving Account under FIN 10X.
A HOAAC B HOAACSB C OAACSB
D OAAC E None of the above Answer: B
82. Which option is to be selected/entered under Function box for opening of Saving Account under
FIN 10X.
A Open B Enter C Create
D Copy from template E None of the above Answer: A
83. A debit card can be issued to a customer under ______tab while opening of Saving Account
under FIN 10X.
A Basic Details B General Details C Other Details
D Related Party Details E None of the above Answer: B
84. For opening of Saving Account under FIN 10X, what are the options available under "Reason for
No Card" field, if the "Debit Card Required" field is selected "No" while entering debit card
details?
A I-Illiterate B O-Otherwisw not eligible C M-Mobile not registered
D C-Customer not interested E All of the above Answer: E
85. Under ______ tab, employee has to enter the customer's mandate for Nomination while opening
of Saving Account under FIN 10X.
A General Details B Scheme Details C Nomination Details
86. For opening of Joint Saving Account under FIN 10X, the joint account holders details are to be
entered under ______ Tab.
A Account Limit B General Details C Other Details
D Related Party Details E None of the above Answer: D
87. For opening of Saving Account under FIN 10X, If the customer wants to print the name of
nominee on the passbook, then Free Text _____ is to be made Y-YES.
A Free Text 3 B Free Text 5 C Free Text 9
D Free Text 11 E None of the above Answer: D
88. Which among the following TAB is required to be visited by the maker, while opening of saving
account in FIN 10X.
A General Details B Nomination Details C Scheme Details
D Interest details E All of the above Answer: E
89. Which among the following TAB is not required to be visited by the maker, while opening of
saving account in FIN 10X.
D Account Limits E None of the above Answer: D
90. Which Menu Option is used for verification of Saving Account opened under FIN 10X.
A HOAACVSB B HOAACSB C OAACVSB
D OAAC E None of the above Answer: A
91. Which option is to be selected/entered under Function box for verification of Saving Account
opened under FIN 10X.
A Verify B Authorise C Approve
D Accept E None of the above Answer: A
92. Which Menu Option is used for closure of Saving Account under FIN 10X.
315
A HCAAC B CAAC C HOAACSB

D HCACC E None of the above Answer: A
Page
93. Which option is to be selected/entered under Function box for closure of Saving Account under
FIN 10X.

A V-Verify B X-Cancel C Z-Close

D Accept E None of the above Answer: C
94. Which Menu Option is used for Verification of closure of Saving Account under FIN 10X.
95. Which option is to be selected/entered under Function box for Verification of closure of Saving
Account under FIN 10X.
96. Which Menu Option is used for opening of Current Account under FIN 10X.
A HOAAC B HOAACCA C OAACCA
D OAAC E None of the above Answer: B
97. Which option is to be selected/entered under Function box for opening of Current Account under
FIN 10X.
A Open B Enter C Create
D Copy from template E None of the above Answer: A
98. A debit card can be issued to a customer under ______tab while opening of Current Account
under FIN 10X.
A Basic Details B General Details C Other Details
99. Under ______ tab, employee has to enter the customer's mandate for Nomination while opening
of Current Account under FIN 10X.
A General Details B Scheme Details C Nomination Details
100. Which among the following TAB is required to be visited by the maker, while opening of current
account in FIN 10X.
D Interest details E All of the above Answer: E
101. Which among the following TAB is not required to be visited by the maker, while opening of
current account in FIN 10X.
D Account Limits E None of the above Answer: D
102. Which Menu Option is used for verification of Current Account opened under FIN 10X.
A HOAACVCA B HOAACCA C OAACVCA
D OAACV E None of the above Answer: A
103. Which option is to be selected/entered under Function box for verification of Current Account
opened under FIN 10X.
A Verify B Authorise C Approve
104. Which Menu Option is used for closure of Current Account under FIN 10X.
105. Which option is to be selected/entered under Function box for closure of Current Account under
FIN 10X.
D Accept E None of the above Answer: C
106. Which Menu Option is used for Verification of closure of Current Account under FIN 10X.
107. Which option is to be selected/entered under Function box for Verification of closure of Current
316
Account under FIN 10X.

Page
108. Which Solution is to be selected for signature maintenance ?

A SVS B Core Server C GBM

D SSO E None of the above Answer: A
109. Which menu option is to be selected for uploading of signature ?
A Signatures and B Map account Rules C View signatures and
photographs photographs
D Maintain signatures and E None of the above Answer: D
photographs
110. In Function field which sub option is to be selected for adding a signature/photograph ?
A A - Add B M - Modify C V - Verify
D R - Recover E None of the above Answer: A
111. In Function field which sub option is to be selected to modify a signature/photograph ?
D R - Recover E None of the above Answer: B
112. In Function field which sub option is to be selected for verification of addition/ modification of
signature/photograph ?
D R - Recover E None of the above Answer: C
113. For adding new signature which option is to be selected under "Add Signature details "?
A N - Scan New B U - Upload from File C S - Select from other
accounts
D All of the Above E None of the above Answer: D
114. For uploading of Photograph users have to click on ______.
A Expand B Upload photo C Add photograph
D Upload Profile E None of the above Answer: A
115. In Account opening form users take signature and photograph on ______.
A PNB - 32 B PNB - 23 C PNB - 31
D PNB - 30 E None of the above Answer: A
116. While deleting a signaturein an account what should be entered in Remarks field?
A Reason of deleting B Field is not required C No such field available
signture
D Account Number E None of the above Answer: A
117. For verifying a signature, what should be entered under Function V?
A IFS Code B Sol ID C Account Number
D CIF ID E None of the above Answer: C
118. What is the menu option for receiving CASH at PNB Branches under Finacle 10?
A CASHDEP B PCASHDEP C HTM
D HCASHDEP E HCASH Answer: B
119. For some Cash deposit transaction, PAN number is mandatory. While accepting Cash, how the
User can check whether PAN number is registered or not?
A The PAN number will be B PAN number to be C PAN number is to be
auto populated in the checked from PANINQ checked from CRM.
PCASHDEP menu. menu.
D PAN number to be E None of the above Answer: A
checked from Account
Openining Form (AOF)
120. If user wants to post any transaction while accepting Cash, user has to ______.
A Select the Post Tran radio B Select the No radio button C Select the Post Tran radio
button after Yes field. after Post Tran Field. button
D Select the Yes radio E None of the above Answer: D
button after Post Tran
field.
317
121. If user wants to enter a Cash Deposit transaction but do not want to effect it in the acount before
verification, user has to _________.
A Select the Post Tran radio B Select the No radio button C Select the Post Tran radio
Page
button after No field. after Post Tran Field. button

D Select the Yes radio E None of the above Answer: B

button after Post Tran
field.
122. The Cash Deposit verification entry to be verified through _______ menu option.
A PCASHDEP B PCASHVERIFY C HTM
D VCASHDEP E None of the above Answer: C
123. What is the menu option for CASH payment at PNB Branches under Finacle 10?
A CASHDEP B PCASHDEP C HTM
D HCASHDEP E HCASH Answer: C
124. The Cash payment verification entry to be verified through _______ menu option.
A PCASHDEP B PCASHVERIFY C HTM
D VCASHDEP E None of the above Answer: C
125. What is the menu option for entering any transfer transaction in Finacle 10?
A TM B PCASHDEP C HTM
D HLASPAY E None of the above Answer: C
126. What is the menu option for entering any Payment transaction in Finacle 10?
127. If we want to enter any Payment transaction then in the what option is to be selected in the
transaction type & subtype field?
A C/NP B C/NR C T/BI
D T/CI E None of the above Answer: A
128. What is the menu option for entering any cash receipt transaction in Finacle 10?
D HLASPAY E None of the above Answer: B
129. Whether transactions related to loan account is permitted through HTM?
A Yes B No C Only Incase of recovery
through Transfer
D Only In case of cash E None of the above Answer: B
recovery
130. For entering a Customer Induced Transfer Transaction, user has to select the ______ option in
the Transaction Type & Sub Type field.
A C/NP B C/NR C T/BI
D T/CI E None of the above Answer: D
131. DDs are to be prepared through ______ menu option.
132. While entering transaction through HTM for accounts like Sundry or Suspense, the ______
details is to be selected.
A Copy part Tran B List Part Tran C Reverse Part Tran
D Additional part tran E None of the above Answer: D
133. While entering a transaction, if Post by Part Transaction is entered, the transaction will be
posted in the account immediately and change of amount will be reflected in the account ______.
A Before verification B After verification C Before entering
D Before day end E None of the above Answer: A
134. The account statements and entries can be checked through which of the following menus?
A HTM B PCASHDEP C HLASPAY
D HACLINQ E None of the above Answer: D
135. If user wants to see the entries of a SF fund account Transaction date wise and the oldest
transaction will be on top, then what options is to be selected in HACLINQ manu?
A Order by B Order by C Order by
318
Tran date Value date Tran date

and and
Oldest on Top Latest on Top
Page
D Any one of A & B E None of the above Answer: A

136. While verifying a transaction which was not posted during entered phase, needs ______ by the
checker user.
A To be added B To be posted C To be Deleted
D Both B & C E None of the above Answer: B
137. The transaction status can also be checked through _______ menu option
A HICHB B HFT C HFTI
D Both B & C E None of the above Answer: C
138. There may be situation when user missed to note the transaction number after entering. In such
cases, which of the following menu can be used for searching?
A HFTI B HFT C HTM
D Both B & C E None of the above Answer: A
139. There may be situation when user wants to search transaction IDs which are yet to be verified. In
such cases which menu can be used for searching?
A HICHB B HFT C HTM
D HFTI E None of the above Answer: D
140. For deleting any transfer transaction user has to invoke the menu _______ and select the Delete
option from the Function drop down list.
A HTMDEL B HTM C TMDEL
D Both B & C E None of the above Answer: B
141. Which menu option is to be used for verifying posted transactions in bulk?
A HTV B HFT C HTM
D HFTI E None of the above Answer: A
142. While searching for list of all posted transactions for verifying, user has to remove the _______
from HTV menu, otherwise the intersol transactions will not appear.
A Sol ID B Transaction ID C Amount
143. If user wants to confirm that whether any transaction is pending for verification or not user can
search it from ______ .
A HTV B HFT C HTM
D HFTI E HSVALRPT Answer: E
144. At times there may be situation when user wants to post all the part transactions of an entered
transactions at one go. In that case, user has to use the menu _______________.
A HTV B HFT C HTM
D HFTI E HBTP Answer: E
145. While, posting proxy for a Debit transaction to a Customer Account, system simultaneously
________ the Customer account to such extent for recovering the amount while reversing the
proxy entry.
A Freezes B Debits C Places a Lien
146. Proxy transaction Authorization power can be provided to any user through ______ menu option
based on the Banks policy.
A HUPM B HFT C HTM
D HFTI E HSVALRPT Answer: A
147. Proxy transactions are to be reversed through ______ menu option.
A HUPM B HFT C HTM
D HSPTM E HSVALRPT Answer: D
148. Transfer transactions related to expenditures are to be entered through _________
A HTM B HTBP C EXTM
D Either A or C E None of the above Answer: C
149. Bills of GST registered vendors are to be entered through menu option ______.
319
A HTM B HTBP C EXTM

150. Bills of GST unregistered vendors are to be entered through ______ .
Page
A HTM B HTBP C EXTM


151. The 'Unutilised amount' field shows a negative value under Expenditure Transaction
Maintenance menu. what does it mean?
A The allocated limit of B The residual amount of C Additional limit permitted
expenditure for the allocated limit for the
specified category is specified category.
exhausted.
152. While entering a bill of an Unregistered vendor in the Expenditure Transaction Maintenance
menu, user has to enter ______ in the GSTN field.
A GST Number B UNREGISTR VENDOR C UDYOG AADHAR
D PAN E None of the above Answer: B
menu, user has to enter ______ in the Invoice Number field.
A GST Number B UNREGISTRVENDOR C Any Number
D Nothing, as Invoice E None of the above Answer: D
number will be auto
populated.
menu, user has to enter ______ in the Amount field.
A Amount excluding GST B Amount including GST C Amount including TDS
D Any one of A & B E None of the above Answer: D
155. For any expenditure payment, 2 types of TDS is applicable. The first one is ______ and the
Second one is ______.
A TDS on Expenditure limit, B TDS on Expenditure limit, C TDS on GST, TDS
TDS Income Tax TDS on loan limit Income Tax
156. Which menu option is to be used for verifying a Expenditure Transaction related to a GST
Unregistered Vendor?
A HTM B EXTM C HBTP
D EXTMAU E None of the above Answer: B
157. All GST registered Vendors are to be entered through ______ menu as an One Time exercise
before entering the expenditure transaction.
A HTM B CRM C EXTM
D VENDORM E None of the above Answer: D
158. While entering a bill of an Registered vendor in the Expenditure Transaction Maintenance menu,
user has to enter __________ in the Invoice Number field.
A GST Number B UNREGISTRVENDOR C Any Number
D The Invoice Number as E None of the above Answer: D
mentioned by the Vendor
in the Invoice
159. The Reverse Charge field is to be selected as Y when the liability to pay GST is on ______.
A Bank B Vendor C Central Govt
D State Govt E None of the above Answer: A
160. The Reverse Charge field is to be selected as No, when the liability to pay GST is on ______.
A Bank B Vendor C Central Govt
D State Govt E None of the above Answer: B
161. If user wants to delete any Expenditure Transaction after verification, It is to be done through
______ menu option.
A EXTM B HTM C EXTMAU
D EXTMDEL E None of the above Answer: D
162. In our Bank SMS Alerts facility is available to______.
320
A Retail Customers B Corporate Customers C Both of the above

D Only Government E None of the above Answer: C
Accounts
Page
163. In our Bank SMS Alerts facility is available in______ languages.

A 10 B 11 C 12


164. SMS alerts are availble primarily in categories of______.
A Mandatory alerts only B Non mandatory alerts only C Mandatory and Non
Mandatory alerts
D None of the above E Answer: C
165. Registration for SMS Alerts is done at______.
A Branch only B ATM Machines C Call Centre
D All of the above E None of the above Answer: A
166. In Finacle, registration for SMS Alerts can be done through______.
A CRM Solution B Through CCBM menu C Both of the above
D In UPM only E None of the above Answer: C
167. For existing customers, registration for SMS Alerts can be done through______.
A CRM Solution B ALERTS menu C CCBM menu
D Any one of the above E None of the above Answer: B
168. There are no SMS Alerts charges if the customer opts for______.
A Mandatory alerts only B Non mandatory alerts only C Both of the above
D E None of the above Answer: A
169. In case the account is in the name of two or more individuals, the SMS alerts will be sent at the
registered phone number of______.
A All the account holders B First account holder only C Last account holder only
D As per the discretion of E None of the above Answer: B
bank
170. How to verify the record cancelled through 'X-Cancel' option in ALERTS menu ?
A Through nominated B Through Branch Head only C Through any officer with
Checker user of the powers in UPM as 100
branch
D No verification is required E None of the above Answer: D
171. What should be written in the field meant for mobile number if the customer does not want to
avail SMS Alerts facility?
A NOTWIL B NOTWILL C NAVAIL
D NOTWILLING E None of the above Answer: A
172. What should be written in the field meant for mobile number if the customer has no mobile
phone?
A NOTWIL B NOTWILL C NAVAIL
D NOTWILLING E None of the above Answer: C
173. How many maximum number of mobile numbers can be registered for SMS Alerts for Corporate
Customers?
A 1 B 5 C 10
D No limit E None of the above Answer: C
174. For Corporate Customers, the SMS alerts are sent at the ______.
A First registered mobile B Second registered mobile C Last registered mobile
number number number
D All the registered mobile E None of the above Answer: D
numbers
175. SMS Alerts facility can be registered for New Corporate Customers through______.
A CCBM menu B ALERTS menu C CRM solution
D Any one of the above E None of the above Answer: B
176. In our Bank E-statement facility is available for______.
A Saving Bank Accounts B Current Accounts C Overdraft Accounts
321
A Cash Credit Accounts B DEMAT account C PNB Met Life Insurance

Page
A Non Life Insurance B Mutual Funds C PPF account


A Lockers account B Deposit Account C Loan Account
180. What are the chareges for E-statement facility?
A Free B Rs. 15 per quarter plus C Rs. 15 per year plus GST
GST
D Rs. 25 per quarter plus E None of the above Answer: A
GST
181. At what interval the E-statement is sent to the customers in general?
A Weekly B Fortnightly C Monthly
D Quarterly E None of the above Answer: C
182. E-statement is sent in the format of ______.
A Text B Excel C PDF
D Word E None of the above Answer: C
183. What is the default password to open E-statement?
A Account number B PAN C Aadhar Number
D CIF ID E None of the above Answer: D
184. How can a cutomer get registered for E-statement?
A Through Branch B Through Call Centre C Through Internet Banking
D Any one of the above E None of the above Answer: D
185. How can a cutomer get registered for E-statement?
A Through SMS B Through ATM machine C Through Cash Deposit
Machine
D Any one of the above E None of the above Answer: A
186. What is the toll free number of our bank for registration of E-statement through Call Centre?
A 18001802222 B 18001032222 C 18001802345
D Both of the first two E None of the above Answer: D
numbers
187. What is the phone number of our Bank for registration of E-statement through SMS?
A 5607050 B 5607060 C 5607070
188. What is the mobile number of our Bank for registration of E-statement through SMS?
A 9264092650 B 9264092640 C 9265092650
189. What is the format of message sent through SMS for registration of E-statement?
A ESTMT<space>First 4 B ESTMT<space>First 6 C ESTMT<space>Last 4
digits of account digits of account digits of account
number<space> Email ID number<space> Email ID number<space> Email ID
D ESTMT<space>Last 6 E None of the above Answer: C
digits of account
number<space> Email ID
190. What is the menu option available in CBS to register for E-statement through Branch?
A STATEMENT B ESTATEMENT C EMAIL
D UPEMAIL E None of the above Answer: D
191. What is the main link in Internet Banking for registration of E-statement?
A Personal Services B Other Services C Transactions
D Manage Accounts E None of the above Answer: B
192. How many Email IDs can be registered at the time of creation of CIF ID?
A 1 B 2 C 3
322
193. In which details the Email IDs of customers can be captured at the time of creation of CIF ID?
A General Details B Relationship Details C Preference Details
D Finance Details E None of the above Answer: A
Page
194. Through which menu the new Email ID of customer can be captured in the system?

A CRM B CCBM C UPEMAIL

D ALERTS E None of the above Answer: B
195. Through which menu the changes can be made in Email ID of existing customers ?
D ALERTS E None of the above Answer: B
196. After which period Bank starts sending E-statement after registration?
A From next day B From next week C From next fortnight
D From next month E None of the above Answer: D
197. Through which menu the Email ID of customers can be changed for E-statement?
D ALERTS E None of the above Answer: C
198. Through which function the Email ID can be changed for E-statement?
A A-Add B C-Change C M-Modify
D N-New E None of the above Answer: C
199. How to verify the record deleted in UPEMAIL menu through D-Delete option?
Checker user of branch powers in UPM as 100
200. What is the menu option in CBS to issue a debit card to existing customers?
A DEBITCARD B DCARD C CARD
D ADCREQ E None of the above Answer: B
201. Which card will be issued if the customer opts for a debit card in AOF?
A Personalised Debit Card B Personalised Debit Card C Personalised Debit Card
with photo with photo and name
D Non Personalised Debit E None of the above Answer: D
Card
202. When will the debit card be activated if given at the time of account opening?
A Immediately after giving B After verification of Card C After verification of
the card account
D Any one of the above E None of the above Answer: C
203. Who can verify the account if the customer does not opt for Debit card at the time of account
opening?
A Such account can not be B Only second man of the C The officer with powers of
opened Branch 100 in UPM
D Any officer of the branch E None of the above Answer: C
204. How many maximum accounts can be linked with a debit card?
A Only 1 B 2 C 3
205. The accounts linked with a debit card must have been opened______.
A In the same CIF ID B In the same capacity C In the same name
206. How many maximum add on cards can be issued with one debit card?
A NIL B One C Two
D Three E None of the above Answer: C
207. After issuance of Debit Card the OTP of______ digits is sent at the registered mobile number of
customer.
A 4 B 5 C 6
208. The OTP sent for setting of PIN for debit card is valid for ______ hours.
A 24 B 36 C 48
323

209. In which category of debit cards the physical PIN is given to the customer?
A Personalised Debit Card B Non Personalised Debit C PMJDY Cards
Page
Cards
D Add on Cards E None of the above Answer: C

210. The PIN of debit card generated through OTP is called______.

A Green PIN B Orange PIN C Red PIN
D Yellow PIN E None of the above Answer: A
211. After receiving OTP for debit card, the customer can set his PIN through______.
A ATM Machine B Internet Banking C Pre Login page of Internet
Banking
D Anyone of the above E None of the above Answer: D
212. SMS for duplicate PIN of Debit Card can be sent at phone number______.
A 5607050 B 5607060 C 5607070
213. SMS for duplicate PIN of Debit Card can be sent at mobile number______.
A 9264092650 B 9264092640 C 9265092650
214. The format of SMS to be sent for duplicate debit card PIN is______.
A DUPLICATE<space> Card B DCPIN<space> Card C DCARD<space>Card
Number Number Number
D PIN<space> Card Number E None of the above Answer: B
215. In new account the OTP for setting of PIN of debit card is sent after______ hours of verification
of DCARD menu.
A One B Two C Three
D Four E None of the above Answer: D
216. In existing account the OTP for setting of PIN of debit card is sent after______ of verification of
DCARD menu.
A T+1 B T+2 C T+3
D Immediately E None of the above Answer: A
217. Personalised debit cards can be issued with ______.
A Name of the customer B Photo of the customer C Name and photo of the
customer
D None of the above E None of the above Answer: C
218. To activate the personalised debit card the maker will choose function ______.
A A-Add B M-Modify C R-Received by Customer
D P-Personalised card E None of the above Answer: C
219. To verify the personalised debit card the checker will choose function ______.
A A-Add B M-Modify C R-Received by Customer
D C-Verification of receive E None of the above Answer: C
220. In DCARD menu the function O stands for ______.
A OTP resend B OTP registration C OTP blocking
D OTP disable E None of the above Answer: B
221. After running the O function in DCARD the customer can get OTP after ______.
A 6 hours B 6 to 12 hours C 24 hours
D 48 hours E None of the above Answer: B
222. The menu option to capture details of Credit Card application in CBS is ______.
A CCAPP B CCAAP C CAPP
D CCPAY E None of the above Answer: A
223. In case of issuing credit card to Non PNB Customer, in the field of account number ______ is to
be written.
A NONPNBCUSTOMER B NONPNBCUSTOMER25 C NONPNBANNEXURE
D NONPNBANNEXURE25 E None of the above Answer: D
224. While capturing the details of application of Credit Card the tabs available are ______
A Personal Details B Address Details C Employer Details
324

225. While capturing the details of application of Credit Card the tabs available are ______.
A Nominee Details B Other Details C Add on cards
Page

226. In credit cards, what is the full form of UARN?

A Unique Application B Union Application C Unique Application
Reference Number Reference Number Reporting Number
D Unique Apply Reference E None of the above Answer: A
Number
227. The menu option to generate the forwarding schedule of credit card application is ______.
A GENDNLD B SCHDNLD C FWRDDNLD

D CCSCHDNLD E None of the above Answer: A
228. The menu option to generate the application schedule of credit card application is ______.
A APPDNLD B SCHDNLD C GENDNLD

D APPLSCHD E None of the above Answer: D
229. What is the menu option in CBS to receive payment of Credit Cards?
A CCAPP B CCAAP C CAPP
D CCPAY E None of the above Answer: D
230. What is the function to receive payment of credit card through clearing?
A C-Clearing B O-Other Bank C L-Clearing
D R-Clearing E None of the above Answer: C
231. What is the menu option in CBS to verify the cash transaction in payment of credit card?
A CCPAY B CCAPP C TM
D HTM E None of the above Answer: D
232. What is the menu option in CBS to verify the transfer transaction in payment of credit card?
A CCPAY B CCAPP C TM
D HTM E None of the above Answer: D
233. What is the menu option in CBS to verify the clearaing transaction in payment of credit card?
A CCPAY B CCAPP C OCTM
D HTM E None of the above Answer: C
234. What is the menu option in CBS to issue internet banking to retail customer?
A IBSR B ACDREQ C ADCREQ
D Through Realtionship E None of the above Answer: C
Manager only
235. What is the menu option in CBS to issue mobile banking to retail customer?
D Through Realtionship E None of the above Answer: C
Manager only
236. A retail customer can get himself registered for Internet Banking through ______.
A ATM Machine B Online C Through Call Centre
237. What is the menu option in CBS to issue internet banking to corporate customer?
D Through Realtionship E None of the above Answer: D
Manager only
238. How to verify the record deleted in ADCREQ menu through D-Delete option?
Checker user of branch powers in UPM as 100
239. In which situation the customer receives his IBS-Retail passwords at home?
A Apply through Branch B Apply through ATM C Apply through Call Centre
D Any one of the second and E None of the above Answer: D
third option
325
240. Which facility is not available under IBS-Retail services?

A View Only B Tranaction only C View and Transaction
D None of the above E None of the above Answer: B
Page
241. Menu option in CBS to issue WTC is ______.

A PPISS B WTC C WTCU

D WTCG E None of the above Answer: A
242. The function code to WTC in Euro is ______.
A WTC B WTCEURO C WTECER
D WTCE E None of the above Answer: D
243. Suvidha card can be relaoded with maximum of Rs. ______per month through cash.
A 10,000 B 50,000 C 1,00,000
D Can not be reloaded E None of the above Answer: B
244. Uphaar card can be relaoded with maximum of Rs. ______per month through cash.
A 10,000 B 50,000 C 1,00,000
D Can not be reloaded E None of the above Answer: D
245. If we consider a Branch scenario, an inventory item will reach the Branch from an ______.
A Double Lock B External location C Employee Location
D Any one of A & B E None of the above Answer: B
246. The inventory items so received from the external location are to be kept under ______ as they
are critical Business items and fraud prone.
D Any one of A & B E None of the above Answer: A
247. For issuing the inventory items, it is to be transferred from the Double lock to the ______.
D Any one of A & B E None of the above Answer: C
248. While sending the physical inventories to Branches, Printing and Stationary Department-HO also
provides a/ an ______ which is to be verified at Branches.
A Inventory Transaction ID B Greetings Card C Password
D Both A & C E None of the above Answer: A
249. The menu option for handling inventory items at Finacle 10 is ______.
A HICHB B HSPP C CBSCHQBK
D LKMC E HIMC Answer: E
250. For transferring inventory item from Double Lock to Employee location, we will be selecting the
______ under inventory movement between location module.
A Transfer B Movement C Add
D Change E None of the above Answer: C
251. What is the meaning of 'DL' under inventory movement between location module?
A Double Lock B Demand Loan C Printing & Stattionary HO-
Delhi
252. If we want to transfer an inventory item from Double Lock to Employee location, what is to be
selected in From Location Class & in the To Location Class?
A DL & DL B DL & DI C DL & ZZ
D ZZ & DL E DL & EMP Answer: E
253. What is the meaning of 'ZZ' under inventory movement between location module?
A Double Lock B Demand Loan C Printing & Stattionary HO-
Delhi
D External Location E It’s a typing error Answer: D
254. Inventory movement transactions added in Finacle 10 ______.
A Need to be verified B Need not to be verified C Need to be validated
D All of A, B & C E None of the above Answer: A
255. While transferring an inventory item from Double lock to Employee location, it is to be
authorised. The authorisation is to be done by _______.
A Both the Double Lock B By the employee to whose C The Incumbent Incharge
326
users. location the inventory

items are being
transferred.
Page
256. The menu option for destroying an inventory item in Finacle 10 is ______.


257. For Destroying an inventory, the 'To Location Class' should be ______.
A EM B DL C DI
D ZZ E None of the above Answer: C
258. Cancellation of any Inventory transaction is possible _______.
A After verification of entry B Cancellation not possible C After destruction
D Before verification of entry E None of the above Answer: D
259. The menu option for modifying an inventory transaction in Finacle 10 is ______.
260. Cancellation of any Inventory transaction is to be authorised by _______.
A The Double Lock users. B The Incumbent Incharge C Printing & Stattionary HO
D Both B & C E Authorisation not required Answer: E
261. For changing the Double Lock users , we have to invoke the menu option ______.
D HIMAUM E HIMC Answer: D
262. An inventory of 1000 cheque leaves have been received by an employee and now he wants to
issue a Cheque Book of 20 leaves to a customer. Before issuing the Cheque Book, what action is
to be performed?
A Splitting B Merging C Inventory Movement
263. The menu option for splitting a block of inventory transaction in Finacle 10 is ______.
A HICHB B HISIA C CBSCHQBK
D LKMC E HIMC Answer: B
264. The menu option for Merging Inventories in Finacle 10 is ______.
A HICHB B HISIA C HIMIA
D LKMC E HIMC Answer: C
265. Inventory Splitt transactions are to be verified by _______.
A The Double Lock users. B The Incumbent Incharge C Printing & Stationary
Division-HO
D No verification required E None of the above Answer: D
266. The Inventory status report of a branch or inventory under an employee location code can be
searched thorugh ______.
A HICHB B HISIA C HIMIA
D HISRA E HIMC Answer: D
267. Non Personalised Cheque Books are those where, ______ & ______ is not pre printed on the
face of the cheque
A The account number B Name of the account C Non Personalised' Phrase
holder
D Only A & B E None of the above Answer: D
268. Which of the following details are not pre-printed on the face of the Non Personalised cheque?
A Branch Name B Branch Code C Branch Address
D All of A, B & C E None of the above Answer: D
269. In case of personalised cheque books, ______ and ______ is pre printed on the cheque leaves in
addition to all other features of non personalized cheques.
A The name of the customer B 16 digit account number C Account Balance
D Only A & B E None of the above Answer: D
270. The menu option is to be used for issuing Personalised Cheque Books in Finacle 10 is ______.
A CBSCHQBK B HICHB C ICHB
327
D ISSCHQBK E None of the above Answer: A

271. While entering CBSCHQBK the Contact number to be entered must match with number as
provided in ______.
Page
A CRM B ALERTS C HACM

D HICHB E None of the above Answer: B

272. If more than One Chque book is to be issued to a customer at a single time, then permission
from ______ is required
A Customer B Branch Head C Circle Head
D Printing & Stationary E None of the above Answer: C
Department
273. Personalised Cheque book once entered need to be verified through ______ menu option.
A PCASHDEP B CBSCHQBK C HICHB
D Any one of B & C E None of the above Answer: B
274. The list of Cheque Book request eneterd through IBS/ MBS is available under ______.
A netpnb.com B DAYRPT 1/61 C CBSCHQBK
D Both A & B E None of the above Answer: B
275. Non Personalised Cheque Book can be issued in Finacle 10 by the user ______.
A Who is the Senior Most B At whose location the C Who holds the Work
inventory of Cheque Book Class Power of 100
is available.
D Only A & B E None of the above Answer: B
276. The menu option is to be used for issuing Non Personalised Cheque Books in Finacle 10 is
______.
A CBSCHQBK B HICHB C ICHB
D ISSCHQBK E None of the above Answer: B
277. Non Personalised Cheque book once entered need to be verified through ______ menu option.
D Any one of B & C E None of the above Answer: C
278. Which menu is to be used for marking Caution in any Cheque?
D HCHBM E None of the above Answer: D
279. Which menu is to be used for Deleting a Cheque leave?
D HCHBM E None of the above Answer: D
280. Which menu is to be used for Deleting a Cheque Book?
A PCASHDEP B CHBD C HICHB
D HCHBM E None of the above Answer: B
281. Which menu option is to be Used to change the cheque status from Unused to Paid?
A HUCS B CHBD C HICHB
D HCHBM E None of the above Answer: A
282. While changing staus of any cheque, whether the modification entry is required to be verifed or
not?
A Verification not required as B Verification not required as C Verification required.
it is not a transaction. the cheque was verified
previously.
D Verification not required if E None of the above Answer: C
entered by officer with
workclass of 100
283. The menu option for executing a Stop Payment instruction of a cheque is ______.
A HUCS B CHBD C HSPP
D HCHBM E None of the above Answer: C
284. Whether a cheque stop payment instruction is to be verified?
A No, if entered by if entered B Not required at all. C Yes, it is to be verified by
by officer with workclass of a Checke User.
100
D Either A or B E None of the above Answer: C
328
285. The menu option for verification of Cheque Stop Payment instruction is to be done by ______.
A Verification not required. B HSPP C HCHBM
D HSPPAU E None of the above Answer: D
Page
286. Which menu option is to be used for entering Revoke Stop Payment instruction in Finacle 10?

A Revoke Stop Payment not B HSPP C HCHBM

permitted.
D HSPPAU E None of the above Answer: B
287. Which menu option is to be used for verifying Revoke Stop Payment instruction in Finacle 10?
A Revoke Stop Payment not B HSPP C HCHBM
permitted.
D HSPPAU E None of the above Answer: D
288. Which menu option is to be used for searching any cheque books linked to any account?
A HCHBM B HCHBI C HSPP
D HSPPAU E None of the above Answer: B
289. The menu option HCHBI is available under which Solution in Finacle 10?
A SVS B SSO Login C CRM
D CoreServer E None of the above Answer: D
290. If a DD made from customer’s account on demand of Revenue authorities for Income tax & GST.
Such type of transaction will be called as ?
A Bank Induced Transaction B Customer Induced C Government Induced
Transaction Transaction
D Revenue Induced E None of the above Answer: A
Transaction
291. What is the application form number for applying issuance of DD in a branch?
A PNB 0001 B PNB 0010 C PNB 0100
D PNB 1000 E None of the above Answer: A
292. What is the Menu Option used for issuance of Demand Draft/ Pay Order in Finacle X.
A HDD B HTM C HDDI
D DDI E None of the above Answer: B
293. Which Function is used for issuance of DD/ PO with the help of drop down in Function Field.
A I-Issuance B A-ADD C C-Create
D E-Enter E None of the above Answer: B
294. In order to Enter or View the additional details of DD/ PO user has to visit which of the following
option?
A In Option drop down - B In Option drop down - List C In Option drop down -
Additional Part Tran Part Tran Details Optional Part Tran Details
Details
D In Option drop down - E None of the above Answer: A
Demand Draft Part Tran
Details
295. In order to modify charges (Waiver/Concession) for Issuance Demand Draft, user has to click on
______.
A Modify Fee B Edit Fee C View Charges
D Charge Modify E None of the above Answer: B
296. What is the Menu Option used in Finacle X for Printing a Demand Draft/ Pay Order?
A DDPRINT B HDDPRINT C HDDPRNT
D HDDPRT E None of the above Answer: C
297. What is the Menu Option used in Finacle X for Printing Demand Draft/ Pay Order in Bulk?
A HDDALL B HDDBPRNT C HDDPALL
D DDBPRNT E None of the above Answer: C
298. What is the Menu Option used in Finacle X for Re-Printing of a Demand Draft/ Pay Order?
A HDDRPRNT B DDREPRNT C REPRNTDD
D DDREP E None of the above Answer: A
299. What is the Menu Option used in Finacle X for Cancellation of a Demand Draft/ Pay Order?
A HDDD B HDDC C HTM
329
D TM E None of the above Answer: B

300. While cancelling a DD in CBS, a transaction ID genertaed is in Enter Stage, the Transaction ID
can be posted using menu option ______ under Function P-Post.
Page
A HDDD B HDDC C HTM


301. Which menu option is used in Finacle X for Marking a Demand Draft as LOST?
A HDDL B HDDLST C HDDLOST
D HDDMARK E None of the above Answer: C
302. After marking a DD as Lost, we have to enter the receipt of non payment advice in the cases
where “Non payment advice required” flag was marked as “Y”. User has to enter receipt of non-
payment advice using menu option ______ .
A HDDLOST B HDDNPADV C HDDNPAD
D HDDRNPA E None of the above Answer: B
303. What is the Menu Option used in Finacle X for Issuance Duplicate Demand Draft?
A HDDD B HTM C HDDDI
D HDDI E None of the above Answer: A
304. Payment of a draft can be made by any Branch. What is the menu option used for payment of
DD?
A HDDPAY B HTM C DDPAY
305. Using ______ menu option, user can inquire on the particulars of any specific DD that has been
issued or generate list of DDs issued on a specific date along with payment status of DD
A HDDSI B HDDIS C HDDSM
D HDDMS E None of the above Answer: C
306. Which Scheme Code is to be entered while doing inquiry in the status of DD?
A DDADD B DDISS C DDSTA
D DDPUR E None of the above Answer: A
307. Using ______ menu option, user can inquire on credits that have gone into Centralized DD A/c.
A HDDSI B HDDIS C HDDIC
paid.
D HDDIP E None of the above Answer: D
309. Using ______ menu option, user can inquire on debits that have gone into Centralized DD A/c.
A HDDSI B HDDIS C HDDID
310. What is the Menu Option used in Finacle X for Revalidation of Demand Draft?
A DDREVAL B HDDREVAL C DDREVL
D HDDREVL E None of the above Answer: A
311. Which Scheme Code is to be entered while doing revalidation of DD/ PO.
A DDCUS B DDISS C DDADD
D DDPUR E None of the above Answer: C
312. User can inquire the revalidation details through menu ______ by using function “I-INQUIRE”.
A HTM B HDDIS C HDDI
D DDREVAL E None of the above Answer: D
313. Which link needs to be visited for getting download link for Bulk upload excel file?
A Fin10x Configs B Fin10x Documents C Finacle 10x Config & docs
D FinX Quick Configs E None of the above Answer: C
314. What is the exact link name to be clicked for downloading bulk upload excel file?
A RTGS NEFT BULK 10x B RTGS BULK FILE C NEFT BULK FILE
D BULK UPLOAD FILE E BULK NEFT RTGS FILE Answer: A
315. The bulk upload file opens by default in ______.
A Word B Notepad C Excel
330
D Powerpoint E Access Answer: C

316. Maximum number of rows that can be entered in a single bulk upload file is ______.
A 220 B 1000 C 1200
Page
D 225 E 300 Answer: D

317. The file name to be entered in the upload file ______.

A Should be without B Should be with extension. C Should be with TXT
extension extension
D Should be with PRN E No need of entering file Answer: A
extension name in the upload file.
318. Which button is used to Generate the bulk upload file?
A Generate Upload File B Generate File C Upload generate
D Generate Button E File prepare Answer: A
319. Which folder is to be used to save the bulk upload file?
A C:\upload B D:\upload C C:\FINREPORT
D C:\BULKFILE E Any folder on any drive Answer: E
320. Which command is used for uploading the Bulk Upload NEFT RTGS file?
A HNFTBLK B HRTGSBLK C HFTBULK
D HPORDM E HACBULK Answer: A
321. What is the menu command for Bulk Neft RTGS in Finacle 10 ?
A HRTGSBLK B HNFTBLK C HRTGS
D HPORDMBLK E HADRC Answer: B
322. What should be the format of BULK upload file for NEFT RTGS?
A PRN B TXT C DOC
D XLS E RPT Answer: B
323. As a maker, which option is not available in Post Flag option?
A Enter B Trial C Post
D All three are available E Only a and c Answer: C
324. In which of the following, we may select Yes in Waive Charge flag?
A If the customer is our staff. B If waiver of charges is C In case of senior citizen
sanctioned.
D In case of female E Either a or b Answer: E
customers
325. Which button is used to select the bulk upload file for uploading?
A Select B Validate C Browse
D Upload E Track Answer: C
326. Where can we see the report of bulk upload after uploading the bulk upload file?
A HINTM B HREP C HPR
D HUPL E HRP Answer: C
327. Which two reports we get after uploading the bulk upload file?
A SUCCESS and FAILURE B HIT & MISS C FAIL and OK
D SUCCESS & MISS E UPLOAD and FAILED Answer: A
328. What do we need to do after rectification of error records in FAILURE report?
A Reupload the file using B Nothing needs to be done C Send the file by email to
HNFTBLK HO
D Just generate the report E None of the above Answer: A
again.
329. What is the menu command for verification of Bulk Neft RTGS in Finacle 10 ?
A HNFTBLKV B HNFTBLK C HRTGS
D HPORDMBLK E HADRC Answer: B
330. Which solution is required to be selected for making NEFT RTGS transaction in Finacle 10?
A SVS B CRM C CoreServer
D SSOAdmin E Teller Answer: C
331. What is the menu command for performing NEFT RTGS transaction in Finacle 10?
A HPORDT B HPORDM C HNFTBR
D HRTGS E HNFTBLK Answer: B
331
332. Which shortcut may be used to fill current date in date field in Finacle 10?
A Ctrl + Z B Ctrl + X C Ctrl + C
D Ctrl + V E Ctrl + B Answer: B
Page
333. Which of the following is not mandatory while doing NEFT or RTGS transaction in Finacle 10?

A Debit Account number B Address Line 1,2 & 3 C Instrument Type

D Amount E Receiver bank IFSC Code Answer: B
334. Which of the following information is shown in the pop-up received during NEFT transaction in
Finacle 10?
A Available Balance of Debit B Mobile number of sender C PAN number of Sender
account number customer custmer
D AADHAR of sender E Email ID of sender Answer: A
customer customer
335. Which option is used for data validation?
A Check B Validate C Cross Check
D Enter E Submit Answer: B
336. The reference number generated after successful submission of NEFT RTGS request is known
as ______.
A Payment Order ID B Request Number C Reference Number
D Order Number E Sequence number Answer: A
337. Which menu is used to verify NEFT RTGS reuqest in Finacle 10?
A HPORDT B HPORDM C HNFTBR
D HRTGS E HNFTBLK Answer: B
338. What is the full form of UTR?
A Unique Transaction B Unified Transaction C Unverified Transaction
Reference Reference Reference
D Unique Transaction E None of the above Answer: A
Record
339. What is the length of UTR number?
A 22 digit B 10 digit C 16 digit
D 15 digit E 5 digits Answer: A
340. Where from do we get the UTR number?
A From HPORDM menu B From customer C From HNFTBLK Menu
D From HAFI E Either a or b Answer: E
341. Menu command used for enquiry of UTR in Finacle 10 is ______.
A HUTRINQ B HUTRI C HPUTRI
D HNEFTI E HUTRIN Answer: B
342. What is the option available under Message Indicator drop down?
A Inward B Outward C Add
D Verify E Both a and b Answer: E
343. If an NEFT or RTGS is done successfully, what is the value in the status field?
A Processed B Result C Passed
D Reminder E Pending Answer: A
344. ______ Menu option is used to view or print the reports generated by user.
A PR B HPR C PNBRPT
D DAYRPT E None of the above Answer: B
345. To explore the report user has to tick the checkbox and then click on ______ TAB.
A PRINT B VIEW C PRINT SCREEN
D EXPLORE E None of the above Answer: C
346. In order to transfer a Report to PC, which among the following is correct?
A tick the checkbox and then B tick the checkbox and then C tick the checkbox and
click on View Details. click on Print. then click on Local Print.
D tick the checkbox and then E None of the above Answer: A
click on Print Screen.
347. Menu Option to Open a FD Account is ______.
A HOAAC B HOAACTD C HOAACSB
332
D HOAACCA E None of the above Answer: B

348. Mandatory tabs in HOAACTD are ______.
A General Details B Interest & Tax C Scheme Details
Page
D Renewal & Closure E All the above Answer: E

349. Mode of Operation is to be filled in ______ tab.

D Renewal & Closure E None of the above Answer: A
350. eIn location code, user has to enter the population group to which ______ belongs.
A Branch B Customer C Circle Office
D Nominee E None of the above Answer: B
351. If customer wants to get the TDS on FD deducted from operative account, user needs to fill tax
deducted at source operative account ID in ______.
D Renewal & Closure E None of the above Answer: B
352. If customer has opted for Special FD, user has to enter operative account number of the
customer in______ field, where interest has to be credited
A Interest Credit Account B Pay Interest C Collect Interest
D Account Credit Preferential E None of the above Answer: A
Interest
353. User has to enter the repayment a/c no in which the maturity proceeds of the FD would be
credited in ______ field.
A Linked Account Number B Reapyament Account C Deposit Account Number
Number
D Maturity Account Number E None of the above Answer: B
354. The system will display the summary of expected transactions in FD Account from the date of
opening the FD till the date of maturity of FD in ______ tab.
D Renewal & Closure E Flow Details Answer: E
355. User has to enter ______ if the FD is to be automatically closed on the maturity date in ______
Filed.
A Y, Auto Closure Field B N, Auto Closure Field C Y, Auto Renewal Field
D N, Auto Renewal field E None of the above Answer: A
356. Menu Option for the modification of FD Account is ______.
A HOAAC B HOAACTD C HOAACMTD
D HOAACVTD E None of the above Answer: C
357. Menu Option for the verification of FD Account is ______.
D HOAACVTD E None of the above Answer: D
358. Menu for renewal of FDR is ______.
A HTDREN B TDREN C HTDRENEW
D TDRENEW E None of the above Answer: A
359. In HTRDREN menu, ______ options are available in renewal fields.
A 3 B 4 C 2
360. Menu Option for the extension of FDR is ______.
A HTDEXT B TDEXT C HTDXTN
D TDXTN E None of the above Answer: A
361. Menu Option to genearte TDS Report is ______.
A HTDSIP B TDSIP C HINTCERT
D INTCERT E None of the above Answer: A
362. To Print Tax Certificate of a customer, ______ is to be selected.
A Print Consolidated Tax B Print Consolidated Tax C Print Tax Certificate-
Certiifcate- Account Level Certiifcate- Customer Customer Level
Level
D Customer Tax Summary E None of the above Answer: B
333
363. Menu Option to Open RD Account is ______.

A HOAAC B HOAACTD C HOAACSB
D HOAACCA E None of the above Answer: B
Page
364. Menu Option for the modification of RD Account is ______.


D HOAACVTD E None of the above Answer: C
365. Menu Option for the verification of RD Account is ______.
D HOAACVTD E None of the above Answer: D
366. Menu option to open Flexi RD account is ______.
A FOAAC B HFOAAC C HOAAC
D HOAACTD E None of the above Answer: A
367. Menu option for closure of Flexi RD is ______.
A FCAAC B HCAAC C CAAC
D HFCAAC E None of the above Answer: A
368. To verify the closure of Flexi RD user has to select ______ in function code.
A Verify 1 B Verify 2 C Verify 1 & Verify 2
D Either Verify 1 or Verify 2 E None of the above Answer: C
369. Bank used to freeze the customer’s account for various reasons. Which of the following are not
such reasons?
A Marriage of Customer B Customer deceased C Garnishee/Attachment
order is received
D Both A & B E All of A, B & C Answer: A
370. The menu option of Finacle-10 which is used to handle Freeze is ______.
A HFREEZE B HUFSM C HAFSM
D HFSM E None of the above. Answer: C
371. The menu option of Finacle-10 which is used to handle Unfreeze is ________
A HFREEZE B HUFSM C HAFSM
372. Freezing of any Customer's account can be done based on which of the following?
A Account number B CIF IF C Cheque number
D Only A & B E All of A, B & C Answer: D
373. While Freezing any account, which of the following type of Freeze options can be performed?
A Debit Freeze Only B Credit Freeze Only C Total Freeze Only i.e.
both Debit & Credit
Freeze.
D Only A & B E All of A, B & C Answer: E
374. While Freezing any account, User can select maximum ______ number of Freeze reason codes.
A 3 B 5 C 2
D 4 E 1 Answer: B
375. While Freezing any account, User has to select atleast _____ number of Freeze reason code.
A 3 B 1 C 2
D 5 E 4 Answer: B
376. The menu option of Finacle-10 which is used to verify Freeze entry is ______.
A HVFSM B HUFSM C HAFSM
377. Through which menu, the list of accounts Frozen under a particular SOL can be searched?
A HAFSM B HAFSI C HACS
D HVFSM E All of the above Answer: C
378. If we want to search the list of Current accounts of a Branch where Debit Freeze has been
placed, which menu option is to be used?
A HAFSM B HAFSI C HACS
D HVFSM E All of the above Answer: C
379. Whether any account is Frozen or not can also be checked through Menu option ______ in
334
addition to ‘HAFSM’ Inquiry function.

A HACM B HACI C HACITD
D All of A, B & C E None of the above. Answer: D
Page
380. If we want to search the Freeze reason code, then which menu option is to be used?

A HACM B HACI C HACITD

D All of A, B & C E HAFSM Answer: E
381. The menu option of Finacle-10 which is used to handle LIEN is ______.
A LIEN B HLIEN C HALM
D HLA E None of the above. Answer: C
382. The menu option of LIEN is available under ______ solution of Finacle 10.
A CoreServer B SVS C CRM
D SSO Admin E None of the above. Answer: A
383. Lien effective date is the date ______.
A From which date the Lien B From which date the Lien C On which the lien is being
in the account will be in the account will be enetered in CBS System.
effective ineffective However, it can be
modified.
D Only A & C E All of A, B & C Answer: D
384. Lien expiry date is the date ______.
A On which date the Lien in B Upto which date the Lien C On which date LIEN is to
the account will be in the account will be be modified manually.
inactive. active.
D Only A & C E All of A, B & C Answer: B
385. Rs.10000 is already marked lien in an account incorrectly. The customer visited the Branch and
notified the Branch staff about the same. In order to rectify the same, Branch staff will ______.
A Invoke the menu for LIEN B Invoke the menu for LIEN C Invoke the menu for LIEN
Maintenance and Select Maintenance and Select Maintenance and Select
'Cancel' Function is LIEN 'Remove' Function is LIEN 'Delete' Function is LIEN
is to be Cancelled. is to be Removed. is to be Deleted.
D Invoke the menu for LIEN E None of the above. Answer: D
Maintenance and Select
'Modify' Function is LIEN is
to be Released.
386. LIEN enetered in any account can be searched through which of the following menu option?
A HACM B HALM C HACCBAL
D Only A & C E All of A, B & C Answer: E
387. The 'Modify' function of LIEN Maintence Screen can be used for ______.
A Modifying the Lien Reason B Releasing Lien C Modify the Lien amount
Code
D Only A & C E All of A, B & C Answer: E
388. If user wants to check the details of LIEN placed in an account since inception, then user has to
select the ______ option of LIEN Maintenance screen.
A Inquiry B Modify C History
D Only A & B E All of A, B & C Answer: C
389. What is the menu option to create type of lokcer and respective rent versions in a branch?
A HLKKCM B HLKTRM C HLKKM
D HLKCM E None of these Answer: B
390. Type of locker and respective rent versions are created at ______.
A Data Centre B Zonal Office C Circle Office
D Branch E None of these Answer: A
391. What is the menu option for locker type charge maintenance?
A LKKM B LKKCM C HLKKM
D LKCPM E None of these Answer: D
392. Creation of locker type and respective rent versions are ______.
A One time activity done at B One time activity done at C One time activity done at
335
the time of installation of the time of branch opening the time of

each locker cabinet in
branch
Page
D One time activity done at E None of these Answer: A

the time of installation of

first locker cabinet in

branch
393. Menu option for locker key maintenance is ______.
A HLKKCM B HLKCM C HLKKM
D LKKCM E None of these Answer: C
394. Locker key maintenance is done at ______.
A Data Centre B Zonal Office C Circle Office
D Branch E None of these Answer: D
395. Menu of Loker Key Maintenance is run for which purpose?
A Assigning keys to locker B Exchange of keys between C Freezing of locker
number vacant lockers
D All of these E None of these Answer: D
396. How many digits are there in locker number?
A 5 B 6 C 7
D 8 E None of these Answer: C
397. Which function in locker key maintenance is selected for Freezing of Locker?
A A-Add B I-Inquire C M-Modify
D D-Delete E None of these Answer: C
398. Locker is issued to a customer through Menu Option ______.
A HLKKCM B HLKCM C HLKPM
D HLKRM E None of these Answer: B
399. What is security deposit ID under menu option for Locker Issuance?
A FD A/c no obtained as B FD a/c No obtained as C Operative A/c no of
security from the customer security from the supplier customer from which rent
to whom locker is issued of locker cabiner of locker is to be
recovered
D FD A/c no of customer E None of these Answer: A
kept under Monthly
Income Scheme
400. In which situation, entry in Remark field is mandatory while issuing locker?
A It is mandatory in every B It is not mandatory in any C When FD is not obtained
situation case as security deposit from
customer
D As per instruction of court E None of these Answer: C
401. Menu option for locker rent recover for a single lockr is ______.
A HLKKRM B HLKREM C HLKREV
D HLKRCM E None of these Answer: D
402. Menu option for batch locker rent recovery is ______.
A LKRED B LKREV C LKRNM
D LKRCM E None of these Answer: A
403. Batch rent recovery of locker is run by Data Centre on which frequency?
A Weekly B Fortnightly C Daily
D Monthly on due date E None of these Answer: C
404. What is the menu option for allowing locker operation to customer?
A HLKOPR B HLKOPS C HLKOPM
D HLKOPT E None of these Answer: B
405. Which function is to be selected for allowing operation of locker to the customer?
A O-Open B P-Operate C I-Check In
D Any of these E None of these Answer: C
406. Which function is to be selected after completion of locker operation by customer?
A C-Close B O-check Out C Z-Close operation
336
D Any of these E None of these Answer: B

407. For surrender of locker which menu option is to be used?
A HLKRM B HLKSRM C HLKOPM
Page
D HLKCM E None of these Answer: D

408. For break open of locker which function is to be used?

A S-Surrender B B-Break open C Z-Close
D M-Modify E None of these Answer: A
409. What is menu option for Report Generation of Locker?
A HLKRPM B LKREPM C LKRPM
D HLKRM E None of these Answer: B
410. What relaxation for Privilege Customer is available in Locker?
A Rent will be 50% B Security Deposit FD will be C Security Deposit FD is not
50% of required amount required
D All of the above E None of these Answer: C
411. Amount of Security deposit FD for locker should cover ______.
A Three years Rent of locker B Charges for Break Open of C Both of these
Locker
D Any of these E None of these Answer: C
412. Out station cheques can be lodged in core Server Module using the ______ Menu Option
A HOICM B CBSCHQBK C OCTM
D ICTM E None of the above Answer: A
413. Menu option to generate the forwarding schedule of lodged cheque is ______.
A HOICM B OSRPT C HOSRPT
D OICM E None of the above Answer: B
414. To run and save the setting of GBM which tab needs to be clicked on Finacle Home Page?
A Non-CBS applications B GBM Tool C Finacle 10 X Config and
Docs
415. What are the settings to be run and save for GBM Module?
A GBM Config. For Finacle B Certificates for GBM C Boath A & B
10
416. Is it compulsary to save the settings to run the GBM Module?
A Yes B No C No, only if the SOL is an
extention counter
D None of the above E Answer: A
417. Which among the following tabs are available in GBM Module?
A PPF B SSA C SCSS
418. What options are available to deposit any amount in PPF account under GBM?
A Cash only B Traansfer only C Clearing only
419. To open a PPF account which tab must be opted under PPF option in GBM?
A HUF Master B Account opening C Account maintenance
D All of the above E None of the above Answer: C
420. To verify a PPF account which tab must be opted under PPF option in GBM?
A HUF Master B Account opening C Account maintenance
421. To verify a PPF account we can enter the account number in the tab by?
A Manually entering the B Selecting from the drop- C Either of the above
number down
422. What is the first step to open a Sukanya Samriddhi Account?
A Creating customer Id of B Creating customer Id of C Fixing the amount to be
the guardian the girl child deposited every year
337

423. While opening the SSA the Id of the guardian can be entered by?
A Manually entering the Id B Selecting from the drop- C Either of the above
Page
down


424. What are the documents acceptable as identity proof in case of the child in SSA?
A Passport B Birth Certificate C Either of the above
425. SSA account can be entered in the tab for verification by?
A Manually entering the Id B Selecting from the drop- C Either of the above
down
426. What options are available to deposit any amount in SSA under GBM?
A Cash only B Traansfer only C Clearing only
427. The balance is credited in SSA/PPF account under GBM after?
A Entering the transaction B Verfication of transaction C Either of the above
D All of the above E None of the above Answer: B
428. To access the GBM Module which option is to be selected after logging in to Finacle X
A Finacle Core B GBM C CRM
D All of the above E None of the above Answer: B
429. Is the option of Standing Instructions is available in GBM?
A No B Yes C Only if the account holder
is a Senior Citizen
D Only if the account holder E None of the above Answer: B
is also a minor
430. The process where physical instruments are truncated at the point of presentment and only
image and data is transmitted onward for clearing purpose is called ______.
A CTS clearing B NON-MICR Clearing C P2F Clearing
431. Each clearing zone is identified on the basis of a ______.
A ZONE PIN B ZONE CODE C ZONE IDENTIFIER
D ZONE NUMBERS E None of the above Answer: B
432. The menu option for lodging of instruments for clearing is ______.
A HOCTV B HOCTM C HOOCTM
D HMCLZOH E None of the above Answer: B
433. Once all the cheques are lodged for clearing and verified, user shall suspend the zone using
menu ______ under function code ______.
A HMCLZOH, Function Z B HMCLZOH, Function S C HOCTV, Function Z
D HOCTV, Function S E None of the above Answer: B
434. Verification of instruments lodged in CBS for clearing is done by ______.
435. Modification of instruments lodged for clearing in CBS is done by Menu option ______.
436. CTS uploadable file is generated by Menu Option ______.
A HOCTV B CPTW C HOOCTM
437. Image of instrument is captued in ______ Menu at home screen of CTS Module.
A Remote Capture B Reject Repair C Batch Balancing
D Document Search E None of the above Answer: A
438. Instrument which fails the IQA test can be seen in ______ Menu at home screen of CTS Module
338
D Document Search E None of the above Answer: B

439. Summary of RBNL and LBNR can be viewed in ______ Menu at home screen of CTS Module
Page
D Document Search E None of the above Answer: C

440. Creation of limit node is mandatory for funded exposure of ______.

A Multiple facilities B For limit of more than 1 C Not required for funded
irrespective of limit crore exposure
D For any exposure E None of these Answer: B
irrespective of limit
441. Creation of limit node is mandatory for Non funded exposure of ______.
A Multiple facilities B For limit of more than 1 C Not required for Non
irrespective of limit crore funded exposure
D For any exposure E None of these Answer: D
irrespective of limit
442. Menu option for creation of limit node is ______.
A HLNM B OGM C HAML
D HLIMN E None of these Answer: A
443. Creation of limit node starts with which type of limit node ______.
A FUND B NFUND C TFD
D PTEXP E None of these Answer: D
444. PTEXP stand for ______.
A Party Total Exposure B Party exposure C Party total expenditure
D Party total E None of these Answer: A
445. While creation of limit node for total sanctioned limit drawing power indicator is to be selected
as ______.
A D-Derived B M-Maintained C E-Equal
D P-Parent E None of these Answer: C
446. While creation of PTEXP limit node entry made in Parent Limit is ______.
A Total Limit B Parent C No entry is made
D PTEXP E None of these Answer: C
447. Which field is to be entered mandatority for limit node maintenance in Limit Categories Tab?
A Limit ID B No entry required to be C Limit sanctioned date
made
D Customer ID of the E None of these Answer: B
customer
448. What is selected in drawing power indicator while creation of limit node for Funded Exposure
A D-Derived B M-Maintained C E-Equal
D P-Parent E None of these Answer: D
449. For Limit Node Maintenance, What will be parent limit ID for BG?
A PTEXP B N Fund C ILG
D LC E None of these Answer: B
450. What is menu option to enquire number of limit nodes created for a customer?
A HLNM B HLDL C HLTL
D HLNI E None of these Answer: C
451. What is shown in total liability of any facility when enquiry of limit node is made
A Total Limit sanctioned to B Total limit of the facility C Total balance outstanding
customer of the customer
D Total balance outstanding E None of these Answer: D
of the facility
452. Limit ID is linked with account in existing fund based limit through which menu option?
A HLNM B HACDPM C HLNI
D HLFM E None of these Answer: B
453. Which function is used for linking of limit node in existine account?
A A-Add B L-Link C M-Modify
D U-Amendment E None of these Answer: C
454. For resolution of error of “Liability exceeds Group Limit” while passing debits in accounts, Loan
339
Type in limit node is to be modified as ______.

A Non Revolving B Revolving C Parent
D Total exposure E None of these Answer: B
Page
455. Which menu noption is used to enquire number of accounts linked with any particular limit

node?
A HLTL B HLNM C HLTI
D HLNDI E None of these Answer: D
456. If Overflow exists in the Term Loan and Demand Loan Accounts, then Loan Demand Satisfaction
Process is run through menu option______.
A HLADGEN B HLADSP C HOFLOW
D HPAYOFF E None of the above Answer: B
457. Which menu option is used to run interest in Term Loan & Demand Loan Accounts?
A HINTTM B HLINTTM C HLADGEN
D HACINT E None of the above Answer: C
458. To run interest in Term Loan & Demand Loan accounts through HLADGEN menu which of the
following fields needs to be entered/Selected?
A Report to B From A/c C From Date
D Force Interest Run E All of the above Answer: E
459. Menu option to Credit the outstanding amount in Term Loan and Demand Loan accounts is
______.
A HLASPAY B HPAYOFF C HTM
D Option 1 & Option 2 both. E None of the above Answer: D
460. Which menu option is used for closure of Term Loan and Demand Loan accounts.
A HCACC B HCAAC C HCAACLA
D CAACLA E None of the above Answer: D
461. Due to which reason Reschedulement is done
A Change in Govt policy for B Correction in repayment C Education loan after
certain sector schedule moratorium or Staff
housing/ vehicle loan in
simple interest
D All of These E None of these Answer: D
462. What is menu option for reschedulement?
A HACMLA B HLARA C HLAXFRNT
D HAACLA E None of these Answer: B
463. Before running menu for reschedulement, amendment in loan account is done through menu
______.
A HACMLA B HLARA C HLAXFRNT
D HAACLA E None of these Answer: B
464. Uptodate interest is charged in loan accounts manually thrugh menu option ______.
A HLARA B HINT C HLADGEN
D HINTRUN E None of these Answer: C
465. Which function is selected for doing reschedulement?
A M-Modify B U-Amendment C A-Add
D R-Rescheduling E None of these Answer: D
466. While Rescheduling any loan account before end of moratorium, the field of Reschedule by is to
be selected as ______.
A O-Overdue demands only B P-Using Parameters C D-Deferred Interest
D H-Holiday period Interest E None of these Answer: Y
467. What should be the nature of balance in loan account which is to be rescheduled before end of
moratorium?
A Debit only B Credit only C DEM
D Either of Debit, Credit or E None of these Answer: A
Zero Balance
468. Which menu option is to be run before rescheduling the account if there is any outstanding
demand of Interest or Penal Interest?
340
A LAINTT B LADINT C Not required

D LAIND E None of these Answer: C
Page
469. Amendment in amount of instalment while rescheduling Education loan or Staff housing/vehicle
loan before end of moratorium should be done in which row of Payment Details screen?

A EIDEM B PRDEM C INDEM

D DEINT E None of these Answer: B
470. Which Menu Optionis used for Term Loan Interest Table Maintenance in Finacle 10X .
A HINTTM B HLINTTM C HLAINTTM
D INTTM E None of the above Answer: B
471. Which Menu Optionis used for verification of Term Loan Interest Table Maintenance in Finacle
10X .
472. Which Menu Optionis used for Account Interest Details Inquiry in Finacle 10X .
A HAIDI B HLAIDI C HAITINQ
D HITINQ E None of the above Answer: C
473. Which menu option is used to make disbursements in Term Loan & Demand Loan Accounts?
A HLADISB B HLASPAY C HPAY
D HDISB E None of the above Answer: A
474. Which menu option is used for Reversal of wrong disbursements done in Term Loan & Demand
Loan Accounts?
D HDISB E None of the above Answer: A
475. Which menu option is used to make Credit in Term Loan & Demand Loan Accounts?
D HDISB E None of the above Answer: B
476. Which menu option is used for Reversal of wrong Credit entry done in Term Loan & Demand
Loan Accounts.
D HDISB E None of the above Answer: B
477. Which menu option is used for opening of Term Loan and Demand Loan Accounts in Finacale
10.
A HCAACLA B CAACLA C HOAACLA
D HCAAC E None of the above Answer: C
478. Which of the following is not true regarding Cash Debit Limit Exception and Cash Credit Limit
Exception in General Details Tab during Term Loan account opening process.
A Maximum amount is B User can modify these C If any debit or credit
displayed by the system limits as per the transaction in the account
as per the limits set by the requirements of the exceeds the limit as set in
Data Centre. account. this field, the system shall
raise an exception.
D User cannot modify these E None of the above Answer: D
limits .
479. To enter the amount of Term loan sanctioned user has to visit which details in Finacle 10.
A Account Limits Tab B General Tab C LA interest Tab
D Loan Details Tab E None of the above Answer: D
480. In Loan Account Interest Tab, Interest deferred upto date field is required to be filled in the
following types of Term Loans.
A Staff Loans B Demand Loan C Education Loan
481. During Term Loan account opening, In Payment Plan Tab the mandatory fields to be entered are
:
A No. of Instalments B Instalment Start Date C Interest Start Date
D Instalment Frequency and E All of the above Answer: E
Interest Frequency
341
482. In Term Loan account opening process, amortization Schedule can be printed by visiting which
of the following TABs.
A General Details Tab B Loan Details Tab C Payment Plan Tab
Page
D Payment Schedule Tab E Account Limits Tab Answer: D

483. In Account Limit Details tab under Limit Ref. No. the information required to be entered are :
A 7 Digits PF Number of the B 7 Digits PF Number of the C 7 Digits PF Number of the
Recommending Authority Sanctioning Authority Recommending Authority
followed by /(slash)
D 7 Digits PF Number of the E Option 3 & Option 4 Both Answer: E
Sanctioning Authority
followed by /(slash)
484. Drawing Power Indicator field are :
A D - Derived from Security B E - Equal to Sanction C M - Manually Maintained
D P- parent E All of the above Answer: E
485. Under MIS codes in Free Text 1, the details required to be entered is ______.
A PNB Score ID in case of B Montlhly Income of the C PNB SME Score ID for
Retail Loans borrower SME borrower
D SOL ID of RAPC E None of the above Answer: A
486. In MIS details Monthly income of the borrower is required to be fed in Free Text ______.
D Free Text 4 E Free Text 6 Answer: B
487. In MIS details PNB SME Score ID of borrower is required to be fed in Free Text ______.
D Free Text 4 E Free Text 6 Answer: E
488. In MIS details in Free Text 7, which details are entered ?
A SOL ID of BRANCH B PNB TRAC SCORE C E VEDA ID NO.
D PNB SCORE ID E PNB SME SCORE ID Answer: C
489. Details of the Guarantor can be entered in which TAB in Finacle 10 ?
A General Details Tab B Scheme Details Tab C MIS Details TAB
D Related Party Details TAB E Other Details Tab Answer: D
490. After Verification of account, what is the menu option for further modification in Term Loan and
Overdraft accounts?
A HACM B HACMLA C HACMTL
D HACMDL E None of the above Answer: B
491. Menu option to verify the opening of Term Loan and Demand Loan Accounts is ______.
A HOAACVLA B HOAACTLA C HOAACDLA
D HOAACTD E None of the above Answer: A
492. Which menu option is used for opening of Cash Credit Accounts in Finacale 10.
A HCAAC B HCACC C HOAACCC
D HOACCC E None of the above Answer: C
493. Which menu option is used for opening of Cash Credit Accounts in Finacale 10.
A HCAAC B HCACC C HOACOD
D HOAACOD E None of the above Answer: D
494. Which information in not mandatory for opening of Cash Credit and Overdraft accounts?
A General Details Tab B Scheme Details Tab C Interest And Tax TAB
D MIS Codes tab E Related party details Answer: E
495. Which of the following is not true regarding Transfer Exception Limi Debit and Transfere
Exception Limit Credit in General Details Tab during CC/OD account opening process.
A Maximum amount is B User can modify these C If any debit or credit
displayed by the system limits as per the transaction in the account
as per the limits set by the requirements of the exceeds the limit as set in
Data Centre. account. this field, the system shall
raise an exception.
D User cannot modify these E None of the above Answer: D
limits .
342
496. In A/C Statement field, the various options available are ______.
A B - Both B N - None C S - Statement
D P - Passbook E All of the above Answer: E
Page
497. If 2 % more interest is to be charged in the account over and above the prevailing rate of

interest, then we have to visit which TAB?

A General Details Tab B Scheme Details Tab C Interest Details Tab
D Account Limit Details Tab E Other Details Tab Answer: C
498. To charge 2% more interest over and above the prevailing rate of interest in Interest Details TAB
user has to enter 2 in ______field.
A Customer Preferential B Customer Preferential C A/C Credit Preferential
Interest (Cr.) Interest (Dr.) Interest
D A/C Debit Preferential E Channel Preferential Answer: D
Interest Interest
499. In Finacle 10, which TAB is required to be visited to enter sanction limit amount ?
A Scheme Details Tab B Account Limits Tab C General Detaisl Tab
D Other Details Tab E None of the above Answer: A
500. The valid values in Drawing Power Indicator field are :
A D - Derived from Security B E - Equal to Sanction C M - Manually Maintained
D P- parent E All of the above Answer: E
501. In MIS details in Free Text 7, which details are entered ?
A SOL ID of BRANCH B PNB TRAC SCORE C E VEDA ID NO.
D PNB SCORE ID E PNB SME SCORE ID Answer: C
502. Details of the Guarantor can be entered in which TAB in Finacle 10 ?
A General Details Tab B Scheme Details Tab C MIS Details TAB
D Related Party Details TAB E Other Details Tab Answer: D
503. Verification of Overdraft accounts is done by menu option ______ In Finacle 10.
A HOAACMOD B HOAACDOD C HOAACVOD
D HOAACIOD E None of the above Answer: C
504. Verification of Cash Credit accounts is done by menu option ______ In Finacle 10.
A HOAACMCC B HOAACDCC C HOAACVCC
D HOAACICC E None of the above Answer: C
505. Which menu option is used to run interest in CC OD Accounts?
A HINTTM B HLINTTM C HLADGEN
D HACINT E None of the above Answer: D
506. After entering the necessary details while running HACINT menu and Clicking Submit button this
message is displayed on the screen.
A Batch Program invoked B Interest successfully C Interest debited tto the
successfully charged in the account account successfully.
D Interest Run successful E None of the above Answer: A
507. Menu option to unlink the security from an account is ______.
A HCLM B HCLL C HSCLM
D HUNCLM E None of the above Answer: C
508. Which Function is used for unlinking of Security from an account with the help of drop down in
Function Field while running HSCLM menu?
A M - Modify B L - Link C U - Unlink
D D - Delink E None of the above Answer: C
509. During unlinking of security through menu option HSCLM in Reason Code Field, user has to
select ______.
A WTDRW B CLOSURE C SUBST
D REPLACE E None of the above Answer: A
510. What is the Menu option to collect pending charges in CC/OD accounts ?
A HCACC B HCAAC C HCACHG
D HCAACHG E None of the above Answer: A
511. Which Function is used to collect pending charges in CC/OD accounts with the help of drop
343
down menu when HCACC menu option is invoked ?

A O - Collect B P - Pending C C - Charge
D A - Actual E None of the above Answer: A
Page
512. Which menu option is used to check the outstanding liability in CC/OD accounts ?
A HBAL B HACCBAL C HCCBAL

D HODBAL E HCDBAL Answer: B

513. The menu option for closure of CC/OD Accounts is ______.
A HCACC B HCAAC C HCLS
D HCCLS E None of the above Answer: B
514. Which Menu Optionis used for Term Loan Interest Table Maintenance in Finacle 10X .
515. Which Function is used for Term Loan Interest Table Maintenance with the help of drop down in
Function Field.
A P Plan Change B A-ADD C C-Create
D M-Modify E None of the above Answer: D
516. Which Menu Optionis used for verification of Term Loan Interest Table Maintenance in Finacle
10X .
517. Which Function is used for verification of Term Loan Interest Table Maintenance with the help of
drop down in Function Field.
A P Plan Change B V-Verify C A-Approve
D A-Accept E None of the above Answer: B
518. Which Menu Optionis used for Account Interest Details Inquiry in Finacle 10X .
A HAIDI B HLAIDI C HAITINQ
D HITINQ E None of the above Answer: C
519. Menu option for Renewal/Enhancement/Reduction of Sanctioned Limit in Finacle 10 is ______.
A HACLHM B HACRLA C HACMLA
D HACLMH E None of the above Answer: A
520. What is the menu option to change Drawing Power in CC/OD accounts in Finacle 10 ?
A HACLHM B HACDPM C HACDPI
D ACDPM E ACDPI Answer: B
521. What is the menu option to check/ inquire Drawing Power Indicator in a CC/OD account ?
A HACLHM B HACDPM C HACDPI
D ACDPM E ACDPI Answer: A
522. Which Menu Option is used for modification of Interest Table Code in CC/OD accounts in Finacle
10X .
D INTTM E None of the above Answer: A
523. Which Menu Option is used for verification of Interest Table Code modification in CC/OD
accounts in Finacle 10X .
D INTTM E None of the above Answer: A
524. What is the menu option to inquire collateral ID of security attached to an account ?
D HSCLL E None of the above Answer: B
525. What is the menu option for substitution of existing collateral ID in an account ?
D HSCLL E None of the above Answer: A
526. After invoking HCLM menu Which Function is used for substitution of stock statement with the
help of drop down in Function Field ?
A M - Modify B S - Substitute C L - Lodge
D X - Cancel E None of the above Answer: B
527. Which field is required to be entered in Particulars Tab during the substitution of stock
344
statement after invoking HCLM menu ?

A Lodged Date B Due Date C Withdrawn Date
D Received Date E None of the above Answer: D
Page
528. To enter the Value of stock as per stock statement which TAB has to be visited ?

A General Details Tab B Particuars Tab C Charge Tab

D Net Value Tab E None of the above Answer: D
529. To link the collateral ID with the account which menu option is used.
D HSCLL E None of the above Answer: C
530. What is the Menu Option used in Finacle X for creation of Collateral ID.
D HALM E None of the above Answer: A
531. If a DD made from customer’s account on demand of Revenue authorities for Income tax & GST.
Such type of transaction will be called as ?
A Bank Induced Transaction B Customer Induced C Government Induced
Transaction Transaction
D Revenue Induced E None of the above Answer: A
Transaction
532. What is the application form number for applying issuance of DD in a branch?
A PNB 0001 B PNB 0010 C PNB 0100
D PNB 1000 E None of the above Answer: A
533. What is the Menu Option used for issuance of Demand Draft/ Pay Order in Finacle X.
A HDD B HTM C HDDI
D DDI E None of the above Answer: B
534. In order to Enter or View the additional details of DD/ PO user has to visit which of the following
option.
A In Option drop down - B In Option drop down - List C In Option drop down -
Additional Part Tran Part Tran Details Optional Part Tran Details
Details
D In Option drop down - E None of the above Answer: A
Demand Draft Part Tran
Details
535. In order to modify charges (Waiver/Concession) for Issuance Demand Draft, user has to click on
______________ ?
A Modify Fee B Edit Fee C View Charges
D Charge Modify E None of the above Answer: B
536. What is the Menu Option used in Finacle X for Printing a Demand Draft/ Pay Order?
A DDPRINT B HDDPRINT C HDDPRNT
D HDDPRT E None of the above Answer: C
537. What is the Menu Option used in Finacle X for Printing Demand Draft/ Pay Order in Bulk?
A HDDALL B HDDBPRNT C HDDPALL
D DDBPRNT E None of the above Answer: C
538. What is the Menu Option used in Finacle X for Re-Printing of a Demand Draft/ Pay Order?
A HDDRPRNT B DDREPRNT C REPRNTDD
D DDREP E None of the above Answer: A
539. What is the Menu Option used in Finacle X for Cancellation of a Demand Draft/ Pay Order?
A HDDD B HDDC C HTM
540. While cancelling a DD in CBS, a transaction ID genertaed is in Enter Stage, the Transaction ID
can be posted using menu option ______ under Function P-Post.
A HDDD B HDDC C HTM
541. Which menu option is used in Finacle X for Marking a Demand Draft as LOST?
A HDDL B HDDLST C HDDLOST
D HDDMARK E None of the above Answer: C
345
542. After marking a DD as Lost, we have to enter the receipt of non payment advice in the cases
where “Non payment advice required” flag was marked as “Y”. User has to enter receipt of non-
payment advice using menu option ______.
Page
A HDDLOST B HDDNPADV C HDDNPAD

D HDDRNPA E None of the above Answer: B

543. What is the Menu Option used in Finacle X for Issuance Duplicate Demand Draft?
A HDDD B HTM C HDDDI
D HDDI E None of the above Answer: A
544. Using __________ menu option, user can inquire on the particulars of any specific DD that has
been issued or generate list of DDs issued on a specific date along with payment status of DD.
A HDDSI B HDDIS C HDDSM
545. Which Scheme Code is to be entered while doing inquiry in the status of DD.
A DDADD B DDISS C DDSTA
D DDPUR E None of the above Answer: A
546. Using ______ menu option, user can inquire on credits that have gone into Centralized DD A/c.
paid.
D HDDIP E None of the above Answer: D
548. Using ______ menu option, user can inquire on debits that have gone into Centralized DD A/c.
A HDDSI B HDDIS C HDDID
549. What is the Menu Option used in Finacle X for Revalidation of Demand Draft?
A DDREVAL B HDDREVAL C DDREVL
D HDDREVL E None of the above Answer: A
550. Which Scheme Code is to be entered while doing revalidation of DD/ PO.
A DDCUS B DDISS C DDADD
D DDPUR E None of the above Answer: C
551. User can inquire the revalidation details through menu ______ by using function “I-INQUIRE”.
A HTM B HDDIS C HDDI
D DDREVAL E None of the above Answer: D
552. What is the menu option for adding Standing Instruction in finacle 10 ?
A HSEM B HSIM C HSM

D HSIIM E None of the above Answer: B
553. Which of the following field is to be filled in header details tab to carry forward the deduction of
EMI to next month ?
A Auto post B Carry Forward if failed C Delete transaction if not
posted
D Auto Suspend E None of the above Answer: B
554. Which option is to be selected in Amount Indicator field for deduction of EMI ?
A Contra Balancing B Fixed C Table Code
D Variable E None of the above Answer: B
555. In which tab we have to enter the debit and credit account details of the customer ?
A Header details B SubInstructions Details C Sub Instruction List
D None of the above E None of the above Answer: B
556. Which of the following tab is not the part of HSIM Menu.
A Standing Instructions B Header details C SubInstructions Details
D Sub Instruction List E None of the above Answer: A
557. Which tab displays all the records of Debit and Credit transactions entered while adding
standing Instructions ?
346
A Standing Instructions B Header details C SubInstructions Details

D Sub Instruction List E None of the above Answer: D
558. SI can be added in an acoound in CBS under which solution?
Page
A SVS B Fincore C CRM

D HACM E None of the above Answer: B

559. In loan accounts the SI will generally be ______.
A Bank Induced B Customer Induced C Either A or B
D Induced by a court of law E None of the above Answer: A
560. Which among the following can be a possible frequency of SI?
A Daily B Fortnightly C Monthly
561. Which among the following can be a execution time of SI
A Before change of date B After change of date C Anytime
562. The SI date fom which EMI has to be recovered from customer is
A Next execution date B Due date C Overdue date
D Debit date E None of the above Answer: A
563. While modifying amount in SIM it should be modified in
A Record 1 only B Record 2 only C Both A & B
D Either A or B E None of the above Answer: C
564. Menu option for opening of BG is ______.
A OGM B BGCOV C HBGCOV
D HLNM E None of the above Answer: A
565. Detail of beneficiary of BG is entered in
A Guarantee detail TAB B Party Detail Tab C General Detail Tab
D Limit Detail Tab E None of the above Answer: B
566. If beneficiary is customer of PNB, his customer ID is to be entered in ______.
A Guarantee detail TAB B Limit Detail Tab C General Detail Tab
D Party Detail Tab E None of the above Answer: D
567. What is correct about effective date of BG in Finacle
A It is madatorily BOD date B Effective date can be C Effective date can be any
earlier to BOD date future date
D Effective date is populated E None of the above Answer: C
by default and it can not
be changed
568. In case of FD account taken as margin for issuance of BG ______.
A Type of margin will be L- B Type of margin will be C- C Type of margin will be T-
Lien Cash Transfer
D Type of margin will be C- E None of the above Answer: A
Collect
569. BG issuing charges are displayed in ______.
A Guarantee detail TAB B Margin Detail Tab C General Detail Tab
D Charge Detail Tab E None of the above Answer: D
570. While issuing BG, message type is to be selected as ______.
A 759 B 760 C 761
D 762N E None of the above Answer: B
571. Payment status in BG Outward message detail should be ______.
A Message not ready B Message Ready C Not required
D Message waiting E None of the above Answer: B
572. For verification of BG, verifier has to start verification with menu option ______.
A HOGM B HBGCOV C BGCOV
D OGM E None of the above Answer: C
573. At which stage message for BG is required to be generated?
A After verification of BG B Before verification of BG C After generation of BG
number
347
D Anytime after initiation of E None of the above Answer: A

BG issuance
574. Menu option for generation of message of BG is ______
Page
A OGM B BGCOV C HLNM

D HOGM E None of the above Answer: B

575. Status of Message generation is checked through Menu Option ______.
A BGCOV B HSIM C HMSI
D HSMI E None of the above Answer: B
576. Which function under menu optiion OGM is used for amendment of BG?
A A-Amendment B U-Amendment C C-Change
D M-amendment E None of the above Answer: B
577. Terms of amendment in BG are entered in ______.
A Amendment Detail B Amendment field of C Amendment field of
General Detail Guarantee detail
D Party Detail E None of the above Answer: A
578. Which function is to be selected in OGM menu for marking of invocation of BG?
A I-Invoke B M-Modify C R-Reverse
D G-Mark Invoke E None of the above Answer: D
579. Operative account of the applicant of BG is debited for Payment of BG amount to beneficiary
after invocation of BG through which function under OGM menu after invocation of BG?
A P-Make payment B G-Close BG C N-Invoke
D R-Reverse E None of the above Answer: C
580. In Omni Flow the work item will be displayed in ______ Tab.
A Search B My Search Queue C Search Queue
D ORM E None of the above Answer: B
581. To change the sol id ______ Menu is to be entered in menu shortcut slot
A HSOL B HCCS C HSCS
D HSCC E None of the above Answer: B
582. Menu to lodge import bill in Finacle X is ______.
A MIIB B MEOB C MIMP
D MIIM E None of the above Answer: A
583. To lodge import bill ______ is to be entered in function code.
A L B I C V
D G E None of the above Answer: D
584. Commodity details is to be entered from details mentioned in ______.
A Bill of lading B Bill of Exchange C INCOTERM
D Shipment Term E None of the above Answer: A
585. In Import Bill details of foreign party is to be enteted in ______ tab.
A Drawer details B Party details C Exporter details
586. Menu to advise inward LC is ______.
A ODCM B HCCS C IDCM
D HILC E None of the above Answer: C
587. In IDCM menu, currnecy of DC is to be entered in ______ Field.
A Bill CCY B Currency C CCY
D DC Bill E None of the above Answer: C
588. Menu for outward remittance in Finacle X is ______.
A ORM B HORM C IRM
D HIRM E None of the above Answer: B
589. Menu to issue Import LC is ______.
A ODCM B HCCS C IDCM
D HILC E None of the above Answer: A
590. Which menu option is used for creating record of Restructured accounts in CBS?
A RARM B RSAM C RACM
348
D RASM E None of these Answer: B

591. What is menu option for creating record of debiting charges in NPA account?
A NPADR B NPACHM C NPACHRG
Page
D NPACHRM E None of these Answer: C

592. What is correct about execution of menu option for recording debit charges in NPA accounts
A Debit transactionis made B Debit transaction is made C No impact is created in
in NPA account in expenditure account any account
D Record of debit is created E None of these Answer: D
in Memoranda account
593. Which menu is used for debit transactions in NPA?
A NPACHRG B HNPADR C HNPATM
D HTMNPA E None of these Answer: B
594. Which function is selected under menu option for debit transactions in NPA account?
A A-Add B D-Debit C W-Withdrawl
D U-Amendment E None of these Answer: C
595. What is the menu option for credit transactions in NPA account?
A HTMNPA B RSAM C HPAYOFF
D HNPACR E None of these Answer: D
596. Which function is not available while executing menu for credit transaction in NPA account.
A A-Add B M-Modify C V-Verify
D X-Cancel E None of these Answer: B
597. Under Recovery Action, which is not available in Finacle 10 in the field of Recovery Reason.
A V-Cash Recovery B Derecognized Interest C DRT/SARFAESI (Decree
(Voluntarily/ Recovery etc.)
Agent/ Persuation)
D Recovery from Guarantor/ E None of these Answer: E
Mortgagor
598. For which purpose HPAYOFF menu is utilised?
A To close NPA term loan B For running closure in C To close NPA CC account
account where up to date NPA Terms Loan accounts where up to date interest
interest is not to be is not to be recovered
recovered from customer from customer
D For running closure in CC E None of these Answer: A
Terms Loan accounts
599. Which menu is used for creation record of writted off and compromised NPA accounts in CBS?
A RECWO B NPWO C COWO
D WOREC E None of these Answer: C
600. In COWO menu, which of the following option is not available in field of Mode of Settlement
A LA-Lok Adalat B RA-Recovery Agencies C RC-Recovery Camp
D OTH-Others E None of these Answer:
349 Page


Finger Tips 2022 - Part - 2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Finger Tips 2022 - Part - 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FINGER TIPS FOR PROMOTION TEST 2022

FINGER TIPS IN YOUR HANDS

PART - 2 3600 MCQs

PROMOTION TEST 2022

[Type a quote from the document or

KNOW YOUR CIRCULARS

A.K.SINGH, CHIEF MANAGER, STAFF TRAINING CENTRE, NOIDA

Compiled by A.K.Singh , Chief Manager, Staff Training Centre, Noida

MCQs on Circulars Issued from 01.01.21 to 22.11.2021

Compiled by A.K.Singh , Chief Manager, Staff Training Centre, Noida

A 25% B 20% C 15%

Compiled by A.K.Singh , Chief Manager, Staff Training Centre, Noida

A Rs.3 lakh ; 30 sq.mt B Rs.3 lakh ; 60 sq.mt C Rs.6 lakhs ; 30 sq.mt.

D Rs.6 lakhs ; 60 sq.mt. E None of the avove Answer: A

Compiled by A.K.Singh , Chief Manager, Staff Training Centre, Noida

D Rs20.00 lac E None of the avove Answer: B

Compiled by A.K.Singh , Chief Manager, Staff Training Centre, Noida

A 10%. B 15%. C 20%.

Compiled by A.K.Singh , Chief Manager, Staff Training Centre, Noida

D 25%. E None of the avove Answer: C

Moratorium of_______ Circular RAD 54/2021 dated 27.04.2021

Compiled by A.K.Singh , Chief Manager, Staff Training Centre, Noida

A 15 years; (Course period + B 15 years; (Course period + C 10 years; (Course period

D 10 years E None of the avove Answer: B

Compiled by A.K.Singh , Chief Manager, Staff Training Centre, Noida

will be upto ______ years . Circular RAD 53/2021 dated 27.04.2021

Compiled by A.K.Singh , Chief Manager, Staff Training Centre, Noida

A Rs.25 lakh B Rs.50 lakh C Rs.100 lakh

Compiled by A.K.Singh , Chief Manager, Staff Training Centre, Noida

30.00 lakhs 50.00 lakhs 75.00 lakhs

A NIL ; 10% B NIL ; 15% C 5% ; 15%

Compiled by A.K.Singh , Chief Manager, Staff Training Centre, Noida

D 10% ; 15% E None of the avove Answer: B

Compiled by A.K.Singh , Chief Manager, Staff Training Centre, Noida

should be obtained within ______ . Circular RAD 50/2021 dated 27.04.2021

A 60% ; 100% B 50% ; 100% C 60% ; 120%

Compiled by A.K.Singh , Chief Manager, Staff Training Centre, Noida

D 75% ; 150% E None of the avove Answer: A

D Income of other than E None of the above Answer: E

borrowers is verified from

Compiled by A.K.Singh , Chief Manager, Staff Training Centre, Noida

and challans for Tax

Compiled by A.K.Singh , Chief Manager, Staff Training Centre, Noida

(Irrespective of age of borrower). Circular RAD 48/2021 dated 27.04.2021

A 60 ; 60 years B 72 ; 60 years C 72 ; 65 years

Compiled by A.K.Singh , Chief Manager, Staff Training Centre, Noida

D 72 ; 65 years E None of the avove Answer: C

A Rs.2,40,000/- B Rs.3,00,000/- C Rs.3,60,000/-

Compiled by A.K.Singh , Chief Manager, Staff Training Centre, Noida

D Rs.6,00,000/- E None of the avove Answer: B

conduct of the account is satisfactory. Circular RAD 46/2021 dated 27.04.2021

Compiled by A.K.Singh , Chief Manager, Staff Training Centre, Noida

A 12 months B 18 months C 24 months

A 20 times ; Rs 50 lakh B 25 times ; Rs 50 lakh C 20 times ; Rs 100 lakh

Compiled by A.K.Singh , Chief Manager, Staff Training Centre, Noida

be________ Circular RAD 45/2021 dated 27.04.2021

D 6 Months E None of the avove Answer: A

Compiled by A.K.Singh , Chief Manager, Staff Training Centre, Noida

A 1 Month B 2 Months C 3 Months

D 0.75% E None of the avove Answer: B

Compiled by A.K.Singh , Chief Manager, Staff Training Centre, Noida

______. Circular RAD 44/2021 dated 27.04.2021

D Rs.50 lac. E None of the avove Answer: C